Skip to main content

Full text of "A commentary on the revised version of the New Testament"

See other formats 


7-  n.'o 


Srom  t^e  fetfirar)?  of 

QBequeaf^e^  6g  ^im  to 
t^e  fei6rarg  of 

(princetcn  C^eofogtcaf  ^eminarg 


^  Commentary 

ON    THE 

REVISED    VERSION 

OF    THE 

NEW   TESTAMENT. 


91  Commentary 


EEVISED   VEESIOI^ 


NEW    TESTAMENT. 


/ 


BY 


W.    a.    HUMPHRY,    B.D., 

Vicar  of  St.  Martin  »?i  the  Fields,  Prebendary  of  St.  PauVs  Cathedral, 
and  one  of  the  Company  of  Revisers  of  the  New  Testament. 


"  TJNDERSTANDEST   THOU   WHAT    THOTJ   READEST?" 


Cassell,    Petter,    Galpin   <k   Co. 

LONDON,  PARIS  <t  NEIF  YORK. 


[all  rights  reserved.] 
1882. 


INTRODUCTIOlSr. 


I.  It  has  been  my  desire  in  writing  this  book  to  provide 
a  companion  for  the  English  reader  who  studies  the 
Revised  Vei\sion  of  the  New  Testament  with  a  view  to 
his  edification  and  instruction.  He  may  use  his  best 
endeavours  to  understand  what  he  reads,  and  may  have  a 
fair  knowledge  of  the  Scripture  in  the  original  language ; 
yet  if  he  be  altogether  without  guidance  he  will  sometimes 
fail  to  discover  the  reason  or  the  significance  of  the  change 
that  has  been  made  in  the  Version ;  and  in  such  cases 
he  will  lament  his  own  lack  of  critical  insight,  unless 
indeed  he  hastily  condemns  the  new  reading  as  a  need- 
less disturbance  of  the  old  familiar  text  with  which  he 
and  his  forefathers  have  been  well  content.  A  very 
few  words  will  generally  suffice  to  make  him  see  that 
the  change  was  not  made  "  for  the  sake  of  change "  or 
out  of  mere  pedantry.  He  will  find  that  in  one  place 
daylight  has  been  let  in  on  a  passage  which  before  was 
dark  ;  that  in  another  place  a  slightly  different  shade  of 
meaning  has  been  given  to  a  phrase  or  word ;  and  remem- 
bering what  the  Holy  Scriptures  are,  that  they  contain  a 
Divine  as  well  as  a  human  element,  and  that  we  know 
not  how  intimately  the  two  are  blended  together,  he  will  not 
venture  to  say  that  a  closer  approximation  to  the  original, 
however  minute,  may  safely  be  neglected. 

A  work  undertaken  with  such  a  purpose,  while  it  con- 
tains many  things  that  are  obvious  to  the  mature  Greek 
scholar,  will  yet  leave  much  room  for  the  exercise  of  care 
and  thought  on  the  part  of  the  intelligent  readers  for 
whom  it  is  specially  intended.  They  need  not  have  their 
attention  drawn  to  every  case  in  which  the  sense  of  a 
passage  has  been  affected  by  the  more  accurate  rendering 
of  the  Greek  article  or  the  tense  of  a  verb,  by  giving  to 
a    pronoun,   conjunction    or   preposition  its  due   force,   by 


vi  INTRODUCTION. 

removing  an  ambiguity,  by  following  the  order  of  the  words 
in  the  original  where  the  order  is  essential  to  the  emphasis, 
by  observing  uniformity  in  the  translation  of  the  saux' 
word,  by  distinguishing  in  translation  terms  which  in  the 
Authorised  Version  are  regarded  as  identical  in  their 
meaning.  With  regard  to  such  points,  which,  thougli 
small  in  themselves,  are  often  very  material  to  the  sense, 
it  is  sufficient  to  offer  a  few  words  of  comment,  when  the 
change  which  they  involve  is  so  important  as  to  require 
particular  consideration,  or  so  slight  as  to  be  easily 
overlooked. 

In  like  manner  those  changes  only  in  the  Greek  Text 
are  noticed  which  may  possibly  cause  perplexity  to  a  reader 
who  is  not  apprised  of  them.  With  regard  to  a  very  few 
such  changes,  a  brief  summary  is  given  of  the  evidence  on 
which  the  emendations  have  been  made.  For  a  complete 
exhibition  of  the  textual  authorities,  as  well  as  for  a  full 
discussion  of  the  more  difficult  questions  of  translation  and 
interpretation,  recourse  must  be  had  to  the  critical  and 
exegetical  commentaries  which  have  appeared  in  great  abun- 
dance during  the  last  forty  or  fifty  years — among  which 
may  especially  be  mentioned  those  of  the  late  Dean  Alford 
and  the  present  Bishop  of  Lincoln  (Dr.  Wordsworth),  Tlie 
New  Testament  Commentary  for  English  Readers,  edited  by 
the  Bishop  of  Gloucester  and  Bristol,  and  The  Speakers' 
Commerda,ry,  on  the  whole  of  the  New  Testament ;  those 
of  Canon  Westcott  on  the  Gospel  of  St.  John,  of  Dean 
Vaughan  on  the  Romans,  of  the  late  Dean  Stanley  on  the 
Corinthians,  of  the  Bishop  of  Durham  (Dr.  Lightfoot)  on 
the  Galatians,  Philippians,  Colossians,  Thessalonians,  and 
Philemon ;  and  those  of  the  Bishop  of  Gloucester  and  Bristol 
(Dr.  Ellicott)  on  many  of  the  Pauline  Epistles ;  also  the 
critical  edition  of  the  Greek  Testament  by  Canon  Westcott 
and  Dr.  Hort  (Cambridge,  1881),  Dr.  Scrivener's  Tntrodiiction 
to  the  Criticism  of  tlie  New  Testament,  and  the  two  editions 
of  the  Greek  Testament  published  respectively  at  Cambridge 
and  Oxford  in  1881  by  Dr.  Scrivener  and  Archdeacon 
Palmer,  the  one  exhibiting  in  the  margin,  the  other  in- 
corporating in  the  text,  the  emendations  whicli  have  been 
approved   and    followed  in  the    Revised    Version.       With 


INTEODUCTION.  vii 

these  should  by  all  means  be  read  the  pamphlet  entitled 
The  Revisers  and  the  Greek  Text  of  the  Neio  Testament,  hy 
ttvo  Members  of  the  New  Testament  Company,  London, 
Macmillan,  1882,  being  a  defence  of  the  principles  followed 
by  the  Revisers  with  regard  to  the  emendation  of  the 
Greek  Text. 

II,  It  is  unnecessary  here  to  set  forth  the  general 
principles  by  which  the  Revision  was  governed,  as  every 
reader  of  this  book  will  doubtless  have  made  himself  ac- 
quainted with  them  by  a  careful  perusal  of  the  Preface  to 
the  Revised  Version,  in  which  they  are  stated  and  explained. 
The  leading  principle  of  all  is  contained  in  the  following 
rule : — 

"  To  introduce  as  few  alterations  as  possible  into  the  Text 
of  the  Authorised  Vei-sion  consistently  with  faithfulness." 

Of  no  little  importance  in  its  bearing  on  this  rule,  though 
not  specially  referring  to  it,  is  a  resolution  of  both  Houses 
of  Convocation,  passed  by  them  unanimously,  in  the  follow- 
ing terms : — 

"Tliat  notwithstanding  the  restriction  introduced  into 
the  fifth  resolution,  this  House  does  not  intend  to  give  the 
slightest  sanction  or  countenance  to  the  opinion  that  the 
members  of  the  Revision  companies  ought  to  be  guided  by 
any  other  principle  than  the  desire  to  bring  the  translation 
as  near  as  they  can  to  the  original  texts ;  but,  on  the 
contrary,  regards  it  as  their  duty  to  keep  themselves  as 
much  as  possible  on  their  guard  against  any  bias  of  pre- 
conceived opinions  or  theological  tenets  in  the  work  of 
Revision."* 

The  chief  difficulties  of  the  Revision  arose  in  the  appli- 
cation of  the  great  principle  of  faithfulness  to  the  original 
text.  When  is  that  principle  peremptoiy  in  its  require- 
ments %  when,  and  how  far,  does  it  allow  of  laxity  ] 

Happily,  our  noble  English  Version  had  already  pre- 
scribed very  clearly  the  lines  and  the  limits  which  were 
to  be  observed  in  the  Revision ;  it  had  already  decided 
that  the  freedom  which  is  usual  in  translating  out  of  one 

*  See  Bibhop  Thirlwall's  Letters  to  a  Friend,  p.  211. 


viii  INTRODUCTION. 

language  into  another  is  not  applicable  to  the  Bible.  "The 
best  of  all  translations,"  it  has  been  said,  "is  that  which 
makes  you  forget  that  it  is  a  translation,  and  tempts  you 
to  think  that  it  is  an  original."*  This  maxim  must  be  taken 
in  conjunction  with  another  of  an  opposite  tendency,  which 
was  laid  down  long  ago  by  St.  Jerome  for  his  o\\ti  guidance, 
and  was  rigorously  observed  by  him — too  rigorously,  we 
must  confess — in  his  great  work  of  Scriptural  translation, 
the  Latin  Vulgate.  "  In  translating  from  the  Greek,"  he 
says,  "  my  practice  is  to  give  the  sense  of  the  original, 
not  to  render  word  for  word,  except  in  the  case  of  the 
Holy  Scriptu7-es,  where  even  the  order  of  the  words  is  a 
mystery."  "Non  solum  fateor,  sed  libera  voce  profiteer, 
me  in  interpretatione  Grsecorum,  absque  Scripturis  Sanctis, 
ubi  et  verborum  ordo  mysterium  est,  non  verbum  e  verbo, 
sed  sensum  exprimere  de  sensu."t  The  Authorised  Version 
has  avoided  both  extremes.  In  general  easy  and  melo- 
dious, it  has  occasionally  a  certain  ruggedness,  due  to  its 
close  following  of  the  original ;  it  contains  Hebraisms, 
Greek  and  Latin  words  and  idioms,  turns  of  expression 
derived  from  the  German,  English  words  and  phrases  which 
are  now  obsolete ;  some  of  these  being  due  to  the  successive 
revisions  through  which  it  has  passed,  others  inherent  in 
it  from  the  first.  For  the  most  pai't  it  is  abhorrent  of 
paraphrase  ;  but  Tyndale's  Bible,  though  pui-e  and  simple 
in  its  style  as  it  came  from  his  hands,  was  pruned  of  many 
elegant  and  pithy  but  inaccurate  phrases,  before  it  was 
brought  into  the  form  which  it  has  kept  for  nearly  three 
centuries  without  alteration.  Still  there  are  found  in  it 
some  few  loose  translations  which  obscure  or  impair  the 
sense  of  the  original.  For  these  it  lias  been  the  endeavour 
of  the  Revisers  to  substitute  words  which  should  fall  in 
with  the  flow  and  rhythm  of  the  context ;  and  where  there 
seemed  no  way  of  doing  this,  it  became  sometimes  necessary 
to  .sacrifice  the  graceful  diction,  the  familiar  rhj^lmi  and 
melody,  to  truth.  The  Revised  Version  is  intended  not 
only  for  "  the  hearing  of  the  ear,"  but  for  study  and  medita- 
tion ;  and  one  who  gains  from  it  a  better  insight  into  the 

•  Bishop  Wordsworth,  on  the  Revised  Version,  p.  15. 
+  Epist.  nd  Pammach,  101, 


INTRODUCTION.  ix 

sense  of  the  Scriptures  will  be  content  to  forego  any  sweet 
cadences  and  felicitous  phrases  which  give  an  untrue  or 
imperfect  representation  of  the  sacred  text ;  moreover,  he 
will  generally  find  that  his  ear  becomes  in  time  as  well 
accustomed  to  the  new  rhythm  as  it  was  to  that  which  has 
been  displaced. 

The  several  books  of  the  New  Testament,  though  united 
in  one  by  the  one  all-pervading  Spirit,  are  manifold  in 
respect  of  their  human  authorship  ;  and  it  is  not  desirable 
that  their  distinctive  peculiarities  should  be  smoothed  over 
in  translation,  and  such  a  uniformity  of  style  maintained 
throughout  as  would  obliterate  the  signs  of  individuality, 
the  incidental  traits  of  manner,  mental  training,  and  habits, 
the  national  or  local  characteristics,  which  naturally  tran- 
spire, and  which  may  be  found,  if  they  are  looked  for,  in 
the  Holy  Scriptures,  as  in  the  works  of  uninspired  writers. 
Many  such  personal  features  are  preserved  hi  the  Authorised 
Version  ;  and  the  Revision  goes  only  a  little  beyond  it,  in 
preserving  the  Hebraisms  of  St.  Matthew  and  St.  Mark, 
and  the  occasional  ruggedness  of  the  latter  Evangelist ; 
in  drawing  attention  to  those  points,  in  style  or  language, 
which  are  peculiar  to  St.  John ;  in  making  it  apparent 
that  St.  Paul  and  St.  John,  much  imlike  as  they  were 
(be  it  said  with  all  reverence)  in  personal  character  and 
in  the  substance  of  their  Epistles,  were  entii'ely  at  one 
in  their  inculcation  of  the  "  first  and  great  command- 
ment," which  is  "the  bond  of  all  virtues." 

To  bring  out  clearly  such  distinctions  and  such  har- 
monies, one  thing  most  needful  is  the  uniform  rendering 
of  the  same  word  or  phrase,  wherever  it  has  precisely  the 
same  sense,  by  the  same  English  equivalent.  Another 
important  point,  with  a  view  to  this  object,  is  the  careful 
discrimination  of  synonyms,  which,  though  describing  the 
same  thing,  have  each  a  special  shade  of  meaning.  Thus, 
by  the  first  three  Evangelists  a  miracle  is  called  "  a  power," 
"  a  mighty  work "  (Svvafiis) ;  whereas  St.  John's  word  is 
ai)Hiiov,  "  a  sign,"  an  evidence  of  the  Divine  presence.  Yet 
this  peculiarity  is  entirely  lost  in  the  Authorised  Version, 
which  has  the  word  "sign"  once  and  once  only  m  St.  John's 
Gospel  (chap.  xx.  30),  "  Many  other  signs  truly  did  Jesus." 


X  INTRODUCTION. 

Conipai'e  also  the  use  of  the  terms  "  kingdom  of  God," 
"  kingdom  of  heaven,"  "  Christ,"  "  the  Christ,"  and  other 
expressions,  as  they  occur  in  the  several  Gospels  and  in 
the  Epistles. 

In  pursuance  of  this  principle,  even  the  slighter  linguistic 
peculiarities  have  been  thought  worthy  of  note.  Such 
are  the  connecting  links  of  sentences  in  a  narrative — in 
St.  Matthew  and  St.  Luke  "  and,"  in  St.  Mark  "  straight- 
way," in  St.  John  "therefore;"  the  participial  constructions 
of  St.  Matthew,  a  conspicuous  example  of  which  appears 
in  the  narrative  of  the  adoration  of  the  Magi ;  St.  Paul's 
habit  of  reiterating  a  word  till  the  train  of  thought  con- 
nected with  it  comes  to  an  end,  as  in  1  Cor.  xiii.  ("love"), 
2  Cor.  ii.  ("  sorrow ").  There  are  other  distmguishing 
features  of  style  which  cannot  be  represented  in  a  version, 
such  as  St.  Matthew's  use  of  the  woi'd  "heaven;"  St.  Mark's 
accumulation  of  negatives  and  fi*equent  use  of  diminutives ; 
St.  Luke's  long  compound  words,  and  in  the  Acts  his  use 
of  the  particle  re  as  a  copula  instead  of  Kai  ("and"),  which 
he  employs  almost  exclusively  in  his  Gospel. 

III. — The  Greek  Text  which  King  James's  Revisers 
generally  followed  is  that  of  Beza  (Geneva,  1598),  which 
agrees  very  nearly  Avith  that  of  Stephens  (Paris,  1550),  the 
edition  of  Stephens  being  based  on  that  of  Ei-asmus,  who 
was  the  first  to  publish  the  New  Testament  in  Greek,  at 
Basle,  in  1516.  The  text  of  Stephens  was  founded  on  a 
few  MSS.  of  late  date,  used  with  little  critical  skill ;  and 
in  the  three  centuries  which  have  passed  since  its  appear- 
ance all  the  most  ancient  MSS.  that  are  now  known  to 
the  world  have  been  discovered  and  carefully  examined,  to- 
gether with  a  great  mass  of  evidence,  supplementary  to 
that  of  MSS.,  obtained  from  ancient  versions,  liturgies, 
and  quotations  of  Scripture  found  in  the  works  of  early 
Christian  writers.  To  the  collation  and  examination  of 
this  evidence  many  of  the  mo.st  eminent  scholars  of  this 
country  and  of  the  continent  have  directed  their  laboui's 
during  the  present  century ;  and  the  result  has  been  the 
formation  of  a  Greek  Text,  not,  indeed,  commanding  uni- 
versal assent,  for  the  evidence  is   often  too  conflicting  or 


INTRODUCTION.  xi 

too  evenJy  balanced  to  produce  tlie  same  effect  on  every 
mind  that  weighs  it,  nor  yet  a  text  that  can  claim  finality, 
so  long  as  it  is  possible  that  other  MSS.  may  be  forth- 
coming of  such  higli  authority  as  to  modify  the  con- 
clusions adopted  by  critics  in  our  generation.  But  a  Text 
has  been  formed,  far  more  trustworthy  than  that  of 
Stephens,  because  based  on  a  much  greater  concurrence  of 
testimony — that  testimony  also  being  more  ancient,  more 
varied,  and  better  understood  by  those  Avho  have  used  it. 

With  regard  to  the  correction  of  the  Greek  Text,  as 
with  regard  to  the  revision  of  the  English  Version,  we  can 
say  with  thankfulness  that  it  has  not  impaired  in  the 
slightest  degi-ee  any  one  ai-ticle  of  the  faith.  And  we 
may  go  further  than  this.  To  assert  that  in  consequence 
of  this  twofold  process  of  revision  the  doctrine  of  the 
Church  stands  as  firmly  as  it  did  before,  is  to  undei'rate 
the  effects  of  what  has  been  done.  The  doctrine  is  all  the 
stronger,  all  the  more  impregnable,  because  the  confident 
statements  of  assailants  have  been  I'efuted,  and  the  mis- 
givings of  half-hearted  believers,  so  far  as  they  were  coun- 
tenanced by  discrepancies  in  the  MSS.  and  imperfections 
in  the  version,  have  now,  we  may  hope,  been  for  ever  set 
at  rest. 

The  total  number  of  Greek  MSS.  of  the  New  Testament 
at  present  known  is  aboiit  a  thousand.  Of  these,  about  thirty 
are  entire  copies ;  the  rest  are  in  every  degree  of  incomplete- 
ness. The  greater  part  are  not  of  earlier  date  than  the 
ninth  century.  The  more  ancient  are  written  in  capital 
letters,  and  are  called  "  Uncials ; "  the  later,  ranging  from 
the  ninth  to  the  sixteenth  centuries,  are  in  smaller  ("minus- 
cule ")  characters,  approaching  more  or  less  to  a  running 
hand,  and  are  thence  called  "Cursives."  The  two  most 
ancient  and  authoritative  ai'e  the  "  Codex' Vaticanus  "  (B), 
in  the  Vatican  Library  at  Rome,  in  whicli  some  of  the 
Epistles  and  the  whole  of  the  Apocalypse  are  wanting ; 
and  the  "Sinaitic"  (*<),  discovered  by  Tischendorf  in  the- 
convent  on  Mount  Sinai  in  1859,  presented  by  him  to  the 
Czar  of  Russia,  and  now  at  St.  Petersburg.  These  two 
are  assigned  to  the  middle  of  the  fourth  century.  Next 
to  these,    and  of  somewhat  later  date,  stand  the  "  Codex 


xii  INTRODUCTION. 

Alexaiidrinus "  (A),  presented  to  King  Charles  I.  by  the 
Patriarch  of  Constantinople,  and  now  in  the  British 
Museum,  containing  all  except  parts  of  St.  Matthew's  and 
St.  John's  Gospels,  and  of  2  Corinthians  ;  and  the  "  Codex 
Ephraemi "  (C),  in  the  Paris  Library,  containing  about 
three-fifths  of  the  whole,  disjiersed  over  almost  every  book. 
With  these  may  be  associated  in  point  of  antiquity,  though 
by  no  means  equal  to  them  in  the  value  of  its  text,  the 
"  Codex  Bezaj "  (D),  in  the  Library  of  the  University  of 
Cambridge,  to  which  it  was  presented  by  the  great  Swiss 
scholar  and  critic,  Beza,  in  1581,  containing  the  Gospels, 
the  Acts  incomplete,  the  Pauline  Epistles  in  another 
hand,  not  quite  complete,  and  a  Latin  translation. 

Of  the  early  versions,  the  two  most  important  as  textual 
authorities  are,  from  their  great  antiquity  and  intrinsic 
merits,  the  Latin  Vulgate,  which  may  be  described  generally 
as  a  revision  made  by  St.  Jerome  of  already  existing  Latin 
versions  about  384  a.d.  ;  and  the  Syriac  version,  called  the 
"  Peshito,"  or  "  Simple,"  from  its  plain  and  popular  style, 
believed  to  be  no  less  ancient  than  the  Vulgate.  Next  to 
these  in  value  rank  the  two  ancient  Coptic  or  Egyptian 
versions,  viz.,  the  Memphitic,  or  version  of  Lower  Egypt, 
and  the  Thebaic,  or  Sahidic,  the  version  of  Upper  Egypt, 
both  of  which  are  attributed  to  the  second  century.  To 
these  may  be  added  the  -^thiopic  of  the  fourth  or  fifth 
century ;  the  Armenian,  made  early  in  the  fifth ;  and  the 
Gothic  of  Ulfilas,  the  great  bishop  of  the  Goths  in  the 
middle  of  the  fourth  century.  Other  versions,  being  merely 
translations  from  the  Latin  or  Syriac,  have  no  independent 
weight  on  textual  questions. 

Citations  from  the  New  Testament  abound  in  the  Avorks 
of  Origen  of  Alexandria  of  the  third  century,  and  are  found 
also  in  great  numbers  in  the  writings  of  St.  Chrysostom  of 
Antioch,  Cyril  of  Alexandria,  Theodore  of  Mopsuestia,  ikc, 
before  the  middle  of  the  fifth  ;  also  in  the  Latin  Fathei's 
Tertullian  (end  of  the  second  century),  Cyprian  (of  the  third), 
St.  Jerome  and  St.  Augustine  (of  the  fourth  and  fifth). 

IV.  One  feature  of  this  Commentary  is  the  continual 
reference  which  is  made  in  it  to  the  earlier  English  versions. 


INTRODUCTION.  xiii 

The  object  of  this  jjart  of  the  work  is  not  only  to  bring 
the  Revised  Version  into  comparison  with  its  predecessors, 
but  also  to  draw  attention  to  the  special  characteristics  of 
each,  and  to  shew  how  they  illustrate  the  changes  which 
have  taken  place  in  our  language  during  the  long  period 
over  which  they  extend.  For  those  who  wish  to  be  well 
acquainted  with  those  early  versions,  the  study  has  of  late 
been  made  most  easy  and  agi-eeable  by  the  treatises  of  Canon 
Westcott  and  the  late  Dr.  Eadie  on  the  English  Bible,  and 
by  the  publication  of  that  excellent  work,  Bagster's  English 
Hexaqyla,  which  contains  the  Greek  text,  with  six  English 
versions  in  jjarallel  columns  beneath  it,  and  a  full  his- 
torical account  of  each,  in  a  quarto  volume,  which  may  be 
purchased  at  a  very  moderate  price.  Many  of  the  laity,  I 
doubt  not,  as  well  as  of  the  clergy,  are  able  to  confirm  from 
their  own  experience  the  testimony  of  a  living  statesman,  who 
finds  that  the  perusal  of  one  of  those  versions  fi'eshens  his 
interest  in  the  Holy  Scriptures,  and  leads  him  to  see  many 
a  familiar  text  in  a  new  light.  The  shoi-t  history  of  tho 
English  Bible  which  follows  is  chiefly  derived  from  the 
standard  works  mentioned  above. 

1.  WyclifiFe. — The  first  complete  translation  of  the 
Bible  into  English  was  commenced  by  John  Wyclifle,  who 
was  born  near  Richmond,  in  Yorkshire,  about  a.d.  1324. 
After  passing  much  of  his  life  in  the  University  of  Oxford 
as  student  and  Doctor  of  Divinity  and  head  of  a  House, 
he  died  in  1384,  at  Lutterworth,  to  the  rectory  of  which 
parish  he  had  been  appointed  ten  years  previously  by  King 
Edward  III.  This  translation  was  made  entii-ely  from 
the  Latin  Vulgate,  without  any  reference  to  the  original 
languages,  and  it  was  circulated  in  manuscript,  the  art  of 
printing  being  the  invention  of  a  later  age.  His  New 
Testament  was  finished  and  published  in  1381,  and  a  second 
edition,  revised  and  freed  from  some  of  its  errors  and 
obscurities  by  his  friend  and  curate  Purvey,  made  its 
appearance  in  1388.  This  it  is  which  is  reprinted  in 
Bagster's  English  Hexapla.  Of  the  style  of  his  version  it 
has  been  observed  that  "it  is  racy,  homely,  familiar,  and 
picturesque,  the  language  of  his  own  age,  but  far  simpler 


xiv  INTRODUCTION. 

anci  more  intelligible  than  that  of  Chaucer,  his  contemporaiy. 
Wycliffe  translated  for  the  people,  not  for  the  nobility ;  and 
his  translation  is  really  better  in  style,  more  lucid  and 
idiomatic,  less  to}  tuous  and  laboured,  than  his  own  original 
writings."  Some  of  his  renderings  are  of  interest,  as  being 
borrowed  fi'om  the  phrases  or  customs  of  his  period.  Thus, 
Cyrenius  is  called  "  Cyrus,  justice  of  Syria  "  (Luke  ii.  2) ; 
"  they  took  Jesu  in  the  moot  hall "  (Matt  xxvii.  27) ; 
"  the  provost  stood  before  the  ark "  (Judges  xx.  28) ; 
Pontius  Pilate  is  called  "Pilate  of  pounce"  (Matt,  xxvii.  2), 
and  is  entitled  "mayor"  in  the  first  edition,  and  "justice" 
in  the  second. 

2.  Tyudale. — The  efi"ect  of  Wyclifie's  translation  of  the 
Latin  Scriptures  on  the  religious  life  of  England  has  been 
likened  to  the  first  touch  of  the  Saviour's  hand  on  the  eyes 
of  the  blind  man  "who  saw  men,  as  trees,  walking;"  and 
when  the  second  touch  passed  over  it  by  the  translation  of 
the  Bible  from  the  original  languages,  and  its  multiplication 
by  printing,  then  the  light  streamed  in  as  on  the  purblind 
man  who  saw  every  man  clearly.  William  Tyndale,  born 
in  Gloucestershire  about  1484,  acquired  his  knowledge  of 
Greek,  when  about  thirty  years  old,  by  attending  the  lectures 
of  Erasmus  at  Cambridge.  "  To  him  more  than  to  any  man," 
says  Canon  Westcott,  "  the  English  Bible  owes  its  character- 
istic shape ;  and  the  man  was  not  unworthy  of  the  glorious 
honour  for  the  attainment  of  which  he  lived  and  died." 
The  Greek  Testament  of  Erasmus,  which  appeared  in  1516, 
must  have  been  a  strong  incentive  to  Tyndale  ;  but  its  un- 
favourable recejjtion  in  the  University,  and  the  commotion 
which  it  stirred  up  against  its  illustrious  editor,  were 'signs 
of  the  treatment  which  any  one  might  expect  who  devoted 
himself  to  the  study  of  it  at  Cambridge.  Tyndale  removed 
to  London,  where  for  a  time  he  was  hospitably  received  and 
sheltered  by  Humphrey  Munmouth,  merchant  and  alder- 
man. Munmouth,  when  accused  before  the  Privy  Council 
in  1528  of  sending  money  abroad  to  the  assistance  of 
Tyndale,  described,  in  the  course  of  his  defence,  the  manner 
of  Tyndale's  life  while  under  his  protection.  "  I  took  him," 
he  said,  "  into  my  house  half  a  year;  and  thei-e  lie  lived  as 


INTRODUCTION.  xv 

a  good  priest,  as  methought.  He  studied  most  part  of  the 
day  and  of  the  night  at  his  book  ;  and  he  would  eat  but 
sodden  meat,  by  his  goodwill,  and  drink  but  single  small 
beer.  I  never  saw  him  wear  linen  about  him  in  the  time  he 
was  with  me.  I  did  promise  him  ten  pounds  sterling  to 
pray  for  my  father  and  mother,  their  souls,  and  all  Christian 
souls.  I  did  pay  him  when  he  made  his  exchange  to 
Hamborough." 

In  the  hope  of  finding  a  quiet  place,  where  he  might 
accomplish  his  great  design  of  translating  the  Bible  into 
English,  and  enabling  "every  ploughboy  to  know  moi'e  of 
the  Scriptvires  than  did  the  Pope,"  he  became  a  volunta)-y 
exile  from  his  native  land,  and  carried  on  his  work  suc- 
cessively at  Hamburg,  Cologne,  and  Worms.  His  New 
Testament  was  published  anonymously  in  1526.  On  its 
arrival  in  England  it  was  eagerly  bought  by  the  people,  and 
as  eagerly  denounced  by  the  authorities  in  Church  and  State. 
Sir  Thomas  More,  the  prototype  of  some  excellent  men  but 
intemperate  critics  who  have  flourished  in  the  nineteenth 
century,  declared  it  to  be  "ignorant,  dishonest,  and  here- 
tical." King  Henry  YIII.,  the  "  Defender  of  the  Faith," 
immediately,  by  advice  of  Wolsey,  ordered  the  book  to  be 
burnt ;  and  burnt  it  was,  at  Oxford,  at  Cambridge,  and  with 
great  solemnity,  in  the  presence  of  the  bishops  and  mitred 
abbots,  at  Paul's  Cross.  But  as  fast  as  it  was  consumed,  the 
thii-d  edition,  published  at  Antwerp,  was  brought  over  to 
England  with  the  cargoes  of  wheat  which  were  imported 
during  the  great  scarcity  of  corn  in  1527. 

The  first  six  editions,  numbering  in  all  about  15,000 
copies,  appear  to  have  been  almost  wholly  destroyed  by  the 
fierce  persecution  which  was  kept  up  against  the  book  for 
many  years ;  not  one  complete  example  of  them  is  now 
known  to  be  in  existence.  Tyndale  lived  long  enough  to 
hear  that  the  rage  against  him  in  England  had  subsided, 
and  that  the  king  who  had  burnt  his  version  allowed  that 
of  Coverdale  to  have  free  course.  But  he  was  himself  im- 
prisoned, tried  for  heresy  by  four  divines  of  the  University 
of  Louvain,  condemned,  strangled,  and  then  burnt — a  martyr 
"whose  name  will  be  blessed  by  all  generations. 

The   extent   to  which  Tyndale   was   influenced   in  his 


xvi  INTEODUCTION. 

translation  by  Luther's  German  vei'sion  and  the  Latin 
Vulgate  is  traced  with  care  and  discrimination  in  the  learned 
work  of  the  late  Dr.  Eadie,  On  the  English  Bible,  i.  145. 
Whatever  coincidences  there  may  be  between  his  version 
and  these,  his  work  was,  as  a  whole,  essentially  original  and 
independent,  and  became  the  model,  in  point  of  linguistic 
purity  and  simj)licity  of  style,  which  his  successors  copied ;  it  is 
not  above  the  intelligence  of  the  "  ploughboy  "  whom  he  had 
in  his  mind's  eye  when  he  began  it.  The  few  paraphrases 
which  on  account  of  their  inaccuracy  have  been  i-emoved 
in  the  present  revision,  we  part  with  regretfully  ;  they 
are  so  pithy,  so  idiomatic,  so  characteristic  of  Tyndale. 
How  clear  and  vigorous  he  was  in  the  expression  of  his 
own  thoughts  may  be  judged  from  the  following  specimen 
opening  sentences  of  the  Prologue  to  his  New  Testament : — 
"  I  have  here  translated,  brethren  and  sisters  most  dear 
and  tenderly  beloved  iai  Clnist,  the  New  Testament  for 
your  spiritual  edifying,  consolation,  and  solace ;  exhorting 
instantly  and  beseeching  those  that  are  better  seen  in  the 
tongues  than  I,  and  that  have  higher  gifts  of  grace  to 
interpret  the  sense  of  the  Scripture  and  meaning  of  the 
Sj^irit  than  I,  to  consider  and  ponder  my  labour,  and  that 
with  the  spirit  of  meekness ;  and  if  they  perceive  in  any 
places  that  I  have  not  attained  the  very  sense  of  the  tongue 
or  meaning  of  the  Scripture,  or  have  not  given  the  right 
English  word,  that  they  put  to  their  hands  to  amend  it, 
remembering  that  so  is  their  duty  to  do.  For  we  have  not 
received  the  gifts  of  God  for  ourselves  only  or  for  to  hide 
them ;  but  to  bestow  them  unto  the  honouring  of  God  and 
Christ,  and  edifying  of  the  congregation  which  is  the  Body  of 
Christ."  (See  Parker  Society's  Edition  of  Tyndale,  vol.  i.,  p.  7.) 

3.  Coverdale's  and  Cranmer's  Bibles.— Little  needs 
here  to  be  said  of  these  two  versions,  the  former  of  which 
was  published  in  1535,  the  latter,  called  from  its  size  "the 
Great  Bible,"  in  1538.  Neither  of  them  was  an  original 
work ;  both  may  be  described  as  re^dsions  of  Tyndale's,  with 
the  aid  of  the  Vulgate ;  both  were  done  by  Coverdale. 
The  Great  Bible  appeared  under  the  sanction  of  Cromwell 
and  Cr.'\nmer  (at  that  time  Archbishop) :  it  marks  an  epoch 


INTRODUCTION.  xvii 

in  the  history  of  the  English  version,  inasmuch  as  it 
had  the  imprimatur  of  Tunstall,  Bishop  of  London,  who 
had  been  one  of  the  foremost  in  condemning  Tyndale's 
version  :  it  was  published  with  the  licence  of  the  king, 
who  by  his  royal  proclamation  commanded  that  the  Great 
Bible  should  be  set  up  in  every  church  in  a  place  where  it 
might  conveniently  be  read  by  the  people;  and  in  1540, 
in  compliance  with  this  injunction,  six  copies  of  it  were 
set  up  by  Bishop  Bonner  in  St.  Paul's  Cathedral. 

4.  The  Great  Bible  was  superseded  in  1569  by  the 
Bishops'  Bible,  so  called  from  its  having  been  undertaken 
by  Archbishop  Parker,  and  carried  through  by  a  number 
of  revisers,  eight  of  whom  were  bishops.  It  was,  in  the 
main,  a  revision  of  the  Great  Bible,  and  was  published  in 
a  magnificent  volume  in  1568,  and  again,  after  revision, 
in  1572,  bearing  on  its  title-page  the  important  words 
cimi  privilegio  regite  voluntatis ;  but  it  does  not  appear  to 
have  obtained  authoritative  sanction  for  its  exclusive  use 
in  churches.  Dr.  Westcott  says  "it  has  received  far  less 
attention  than  it  deserves,  and  in  the  New  Testament  it 
shows  considerable  vigour  and  freshness."  In  treating  of  it, 
Dr.  Eadie  has  some  judicious  remarks  bearing  on  the  work 
of  Biblical  revision  in  general.  He  says  :  "  The  process  of 
revision  employed  in  the  preparation  of  this  Elizabethan 
Bible  led  to  a  virtual  Avant  of  uniformity  in  the  various 
parts  of  it.  There  had  been  little  consultation  among  the 
revisers,  and  there  was  not  that  final  supervision  of  their 
work  which  had  been  suggested  by  Bishop  Sandys.  It  is  only 
by  earnest  deliberation,  the  constant  exchange  of  critical 
opinion,  and  the  survey  of  a  term  or  an  idiom  on  all  sides, 
that  a  good  and  popular  version  can  be  formed.  The 
earliest  translators  were  virtually  individual  workers,  and 
their  versions  bear  the  stamp  of  personal  toil.  The 
Genevan  was  the  first  version  that  sprang  from  collegiate 
labour ;  and  it  had  naturally,  on  this  account,  no  small 
superiority"  (The  English  Bible,  ii.  100). 

5.  The  Genevan.— In  the  reign  of  Mary  the  public 
use  of  the  Bible  was  forbidden,  and  the  printing  of  it  was 


xviii  INTRODUCTION. 

suppressed.  The  principal  Reformers  who  escaped  fco  the 
continent  gathered  together  at  Frankfort;  and  some  of 
them,  seceding  from  their  brethren,  and  retii'ing  to  Geneva, 
completed  in  that  city  the  version  -which  is  distinguished 
by  the  name  of  the  "  Genevan."  The  first  edition  was 
published  in  1557;  the  second  appeared  in  1560,  carefully 
revised  and  dedicated  to  the  new  Queen  Elizabeth.  Being 
of  a  convenient  size  (a  small  quarto),  and  having  a  marginal 
commentary  composed  in  a  terse  and  vigorous  style,  it 
quickly  became,  and  for  three-quarters  of  a  centuiy  con- 
tinued to  be,  the  household  Bible  of  the  English  people, 
though  it  was  never,  like  the  "  Great  Bible,"  authorised 
for  public  use.  It  may  be  described  generally  as  a  re- 
vision of  Tyndale's  Bible,  largely  influenced  by  Beza'a 
Latin  version  of  the  New  Testament,  which  appeared  in 
1556. 

A  high  estimate  of  the  value  of  this  version  is  given  by 
those  who  have  made  it  their  study.  The  following  is  by 
Dr.  Eadie  {The  English  Bible,  ii  30)  :  "The  Anglo-Genevan 
Bible  is  much  more  correct  than  its  predecessors,  and  ranks 
in  value  next  to  that  in  common  use.  It  was  also  the 
great  intermediate  step  between  it  and  Tyndale's  ;  both  were 
made  in  exile.  It  was  the  self-imposed  work  of  noble- 
hearted  Englishmen ;  and  they  could  not  have  spent  their 
enforced  leisure  to  better  purpose.  Their  good  scholarship 
and  idiomatic  English  are  alike  apparent  in  many  felicitous 
renderings  which  yet  survive.  Beza  w-as  their  oracle ;  and 
he  well  merited  the  honour,  for  he  was  a  masterly  Hellenist, 
of  great  accomplishments  and  refined  tastes.  His  exegetical 
insight  was  clear  and  profound,  when  it  was  not  dimmed 
by  the  oblique  lights  of  his  theology." 

The  Genevan  version,  after  about  one  hundred  and  sixty 
editions  of  it  had  been  issued,  fell  gradually  into  disuse  in 
the  reign  of  Charles  I.,  giving  place  to  the  Authorised 
Version. 

6.  The  Rhemish  Version. — The  English  Version  in 
use  among  Roman  Catholics  is  called  the  Rheims  and  Douai 
Bible,  the  New  Testament  having  been  publislied,  as  appears 
from  its  title-page,  "  in  the  English  College  of  Rheims,"  in 


INTRODUCTION.  xix 

1582,  and  the  Old  Testament  at  Douai,  in  Flanders,  in 
1610.  Among  those  who  took  part  in  its  production,  the 
two  persons  whose  names  are  most  cons[)icuous  are  Gregory 
Martin,  sometime  scholar  of  St.  John's,  Oxford,  Avho  is  said 
to  have  been  the  principal  translator  of  the  whole  Bible ; 
and  William  Allen,  Canon  of  York,  and  Principal  of  St. 
Mary's  Hall,  Oxford,  afterwards  Archljisliop  of  Mechlin,  and 
Cardinal. 

Though  the  Rhemish  version  is  in  general  a  literal 
translation  of  the  Latin  Vulgate,  some  of  the  best  Greek 
scholax'S  of  the  time  were  concerned  in  it — e.g.,  Gregory 
IVIartin,  who  is  spoken  of  as  a  great  linguist ;  they  had  the 
Greek  Testament  open  before  them,  and  in  some  particulars 
referred  to  it  with  good  eftect,  especially  in  the  attention 
which  they  paid  to  the  definite  article,  inserting  it  in  many 
places  where  previous  translators  had  omitted  it,  and  in  some 
places  where  it  is  not  found  in  our  Authorised  Version. 
They  kept  in  view  and  used,  though  without  acknowledge- 
ment, the  previous  English  versions.  They  professedly 
aimed  at  uniformity  of  rendering,  which,  as  a  principle  of 
translation,  King  James's  revisers  pointedly  disclaimed, 
though  in  another  way  they  shewed  their  respect  for  the 
Rhemish  Version  by  introducing  many  fresh  renderings 
fi'om  it  into  their  revision. 

7.  The  Authorised  Version. — The  last  revision,  made 
in  the  reign  of  James  I.,  is  well  entitled  to  the  name  which 
it  bears,  if  not  from  any  exclusive  sanction  conferred  upon  it 
by  authority,  yet  from  the  exclusive  acceptance  and  general 
approval  which  it  has  retained  for  so  many  generations 
wherever  the  English  tongue  is  spoken.  Not  much,  how- 
ever, needs  to  be  said  of  it  in  this  brief  summary.  Its 
praise  is  on  the  lips  and  in  the  hearts  of  all.  The  principles 
on  which  it  was  conducted  are  set  forth  in  the  preface 
prefixed  to  it,  and  in  the  preface  to  the  Revised  Version ; 
the  extent  to  which  it  was  based  on  Tyndale  and  influenced 
by  succeeding  versions  will  be  apparent  in  the  course  of  this 
Commentary.  It  may  suflice  here  to  say  that  the  under- 
taking, though  not  actually  set  on  foot  by  the  king,  was 
congenial  to  his  character,  and  owed  much  to  the  active  part 


XX  INTRODUCTION. 

wliicli  lie  took  in  laying  clown  the  plan  for  its  accomplish- 
ment, A  number  of  divines,  forty-seven  in  all,  were  selected 
for  the  work,  and  were  divided  into  six  companies,  two  of 
which  met  at  Westminster,  two  at  Cambridge,  and  two  at 
Oxford.  To  each  company  were  assigned  portions  of  the 
Old  and  the  New  Testaments ;  and  when  the  revision  in 
parts  was  completed,  the  whole  was  subjected  to  supervision. 
The  work  occupied  two  years  and  three-quarters,  and  was 
published  by  the  king's  printer  in  1611,  with  the  announce- 
ment on  the  title-page  that  "  it  was  appointed  to  be  read  in 
churches."  On  what  "authority,"  if  any,  this  notice  was 
issued,  and  the  authorisation  of  the  "  Great  Bible  "  super- 
seded, it  does  not  appear  possible  now  to  ascertain. 

It  will  be  observed  that  in  the  present  Revision  a  return 
has  frequently  Ijeen  made  to  the  very  words,  and  still  more 
often  to  the  sense,  of  Wycliffe's  and  the  Rhemish  versions, 
and,  substantially,  to  the  rendering  of  the  Yulgate ;  and 
in  a  considerable  number  of  such  passages  the  Greek  Text 
has  been  followed  which  underlies  the  Vulgate,  in  preference 
to  that  of  Stephens,  on  which  Tyndale's  and  the  Autho- 
rised Version  are  based.  These  iiistances,  so  far  as  they 
go — and  they  go  a  good  way — serve  to  sliew  that  the  textual 
authorities  upon  which  the  current  Greek  Text  has  been 
amended  are  in  agi-eement  with  the  Vulgate,  and  that  the 
Vulgate  represents  better  as  well  as  older  MSS.  than  those 
which  were  known  to  Erasmus,  Beza,  or  Stephens ;  in 
other  words,  they  support  the  principle  adopted  by  modern 
critics  of  preferring  the  testimony  of  the  few  ancient  MSS. 
which  now  are  known,  to  that  of  the  later  but  more 
numerous  authorities. 

Influence  of  tlie  Vulgate. — The  Latin  Vulgate,  it  need 
not  be  said,  has  exercised,  both  for  good  and  for  evil, 
a  great  and  lasting  influence  on  the  English  version  :  for 
good,  by  its  close  adherence  to  the  original,  setting  thus  an 
example  of  the  literalism  which  .should  be  observed  in 
translating  the  Holy  Scriptui-es,  and  which  has  been  followed 
more  or  less  strictly  in  subsequent  versions  ;  for  evil,  owing 
to  the  inability  of  the  Latin  language  to  cope  with  the 
strength  and  siibtilty  of  the  Greek,  being  ^vithout  a  definite 


INTRODUCTION.  xxi 

article,  not  having  any  means  of  distinguishing  between  the 
aorist  (or  "  preeterite ")  and  the  perfect  tense  of  the  verb, 
and  though  possessed  of  participles,  admitting  but  sparingly 
of  theii'  use. 

From  the  Yulgate,  through  our  version  and  liturgy, 
we  have  derived  the  greater  part  of  our  religious  vocabulary ; 
as,  for  example,  the  words  "person,  essence,  scripture, 
lecture,  sermon,  grace,  adoption,  repentance,  spirit,  glory, 
satisfaction,  conversion,  sacrament,  redemption,  privilege, 
election,  eternity,  communion,  discipline,  missionary,  re- 
generation, justification,  congregation,"  &c.  (Eadie,  Enqlish 
Bible,  ii.  154). 

It  remains  for  me  to  say,  in  justice  to  my  brother 
revisers,  that  for  the  inception  of  this  work,  and  for  all  its 
faults,  I  am  alone  responsible. 

I  cannot  better  conclude  this  Introduction  than  by 
adopting  a  few  words  from  the  Prologe  of  Myles  Coverdale 
2cnto  the  Christen  Header  : — "  As  for  the  commendation  of 
God's  Holy  Scripture,  I  would  fain  magnify  it  as  it  is 
worthy,  but  I  am  far  insufiicient  thereto,  and  therefore  I 
thought  it  better  for  me  to  hold  my  tongue  than  with  few 
words  to  praise  or  commend  it ;  exhorting  thee,  most  dear 
reader,  so  to  love  it,  so  to  cleave  unto  it,  and  so  to  follow 
it  in  thy  daily  conversation,  that  other  men,  seeing  thy 
good  works  and  the  fruits  of  the  Holy  Ghost  in  thee,  may 
praise  the  Father  of  heaven,  and  give  this  Word  a  good 
report;  for  to  live  after  the  law  of  God  and  to  lead  a 
virtiious  conversation  is  the  greatest  praise  that  thou  canst 
give  unto  his  doctrine." 


The  following  abbreviations  are  commonly  used  in  tlie  course 
of  the  Commentary:- 


Date. 

YiUg. 

.    Tlie  Latin  "Vulgate     . 

384 

Wycl. 

.    Wycliffe's  Yersiou,  as  rc^dsed  by  Purvey 

1388 

TjTid. 

Tyudale's  Version        .... 

1534 

Cranm. 

.    Craumer's  Version     .... 

1538 

Genev. 

.    The  Genevan  Version 

1557 

Rliem. 

The  Rhemish  Version 

1582 

Auth. 

.    The  Authorised  Version    . 

1611 

It  is  to  be  understood  that  botli  Craumer's  version  and  the 
Genevan  agi'ee  with  that  of  Tyndale,  except  where  they  are 
mentioned  separately. 


COMMENTARY 

ON    THE 

REVISED     VEESION 


THE    GOSPEL    ACCORDING    TO 

ST.    MATTHEW. 


CHAPTER  I. 

1  The  book  of  the  generation.  Margin, "  Or  the  genealogy." 
This  word  well  expresses  tlie  meaning,  but  being  of  Gr.  origin, 
fails  to  represent  the  Hebraic  phrase  of  the  Evangelist.  More- 
over, it  is  more  in  its  proper  place,  as  the  translation  of  its  own 
Gr.  original,  in  the  Epistles  of  St.  Paul  (1  Tim.  i.  4  ;  Tit.  iii.  9), 
where  it  is  joined  with  terms  of  disparagement. 

The  word  translated  "  generation,"  {yevecris,  genesis),  has  several 
shades  of  meaning ;  here  it  is  synonymous  with  y^vea  (family,  or 
descent),  at  ver.  18  with  yeveVrj  [birth). 

2  Jndah. — Auth.,  "  Judas."  Here  and  elsewhere  the  Hebrew 
names  are  rendered  in  the  forms  to  which  we  are  accustomed  in 
the  O.  T.,  not  in  those  which  have  been  given  them  in  the  Gr.  of 
the  N.  T.,  such  as  Esaias,  Jeremy,  Osee,  Jesus  (for  Joshua j,  &c., 

11,  12,  17.  The  carrying  away.— The  Gr.  word  is  the  same  in 
all  three  verses,  though  Auth.  varies  in  its  rendering  of  it. 

17  The  Christ. — Auth.,  "  Christ."  It  is  to  be  observed  that  where 
the  article  is  prefixed  in  the  Gr.  as  it  is  here,  this  name,  "  the 
Christ,"  points  to  our  Lord  as  "the  Messiah,"  "the  Anointed 
One,"  foretold  in  proj)hecy,  and  expected  by  all  them  that  "  were 
looking  for  the  redemption  of  Jerusalem." 

18  When. — Auth.,  "  when  as,"  now  obsolete ;  similar  in  form  to 
"  whereas." 

B 


2  ST.    MATTHEW— T. 

Betrothed. — Auth.,  "espoused,"  whicli  formerly  had  the  same 
meaniiij?,  but  now  is  frequently  used  of  the  marriage  rite  itself. 
Wycl.  hei-e  has  "  betrothed,"  and  so  Tynd.  and  the  Genev.  ; 
Cranni.  "  married,"  Rhem.  "  espoused."     Compare  Luke  ii.  5. 

18  The  Holy  Ghost.  — Margin,  "Or  Holy  Spirit;  and  so 
tlu'oughout  this  book."  The  two  names  liave  to  us  precisely 
the  same  meaning  as  names  of  the  same  Holy  Being,  and 
they  can  therefore  be  used  indifferentlj' ;  but  the  words  "  ghost" 
and  "  spirit,"  taken  by  themselves,  are  not  interchangeable,  not 
being  in  all  respects  exact  equivalents ;  and  whereas  the  latter 
word  is  often  used  to  denote  the  third  Person  in  the  Godhead, 
the  former  is  never  so  used. 

19  A  righteous  man. — Auth.,  "a  just  man."  The  Gr.  SUaios  ia 
rendered  in  the  New  Testament  with  some  laxity,  now  by  one 
of  these  words,  now  by  the  other.  They  are  not  identical 
in  meaning.  "  Righteous  "  comprehends  the  discharge  of  duty 
both  toward  God  and  man  ;  "just  "  properly  refers  to  righteous- 
ness as  between  man  and  man.  There  is  no  need,  however,  in  the 
New  Testament  to  enforce  this  distinction  rigidly.  Thus  "  The 
resurrection  of  the  just "  has  been  retained  in  Luke  xiv.  14, 
where  the  meaning  cannot  be  misunderstood;  while  in  such  pas- 
sages as  this  tlie  term  "a  just  man"  is  liable  to  be  taken,  and 
might  reasonably  be  understood,  in  its  more  limited  sense,  but 
for  the  ruling  of  other  passages,  such  as  Luke  xxiii.  37,  50,  which 
require  tlie  wider  meaning,  and  the  use  of  the  more  compre- 
hensive Englisli  word. 

21  For  it  is  he  that  shall  save.— The  pronoun  in  the  Gr. 
is  emphatic.  Possibly  the  emphasis  is  overdone  by  this  ren- 
dering; but  it  is  quite  lost  in  Auth.,  "  for  he  shall  save."  None 
of  the  English  versions  take  notice  of  this,  though  the  Vulg. 
has  ijjse  cnini  salvum  faciet  ("for  he  hwiself  shaW.  save  "). 

22  Is  come  to  pass.  —  The  Gr.  verb  is  in  the  perfect  tense. 
Auth.,  "  was  done."  The  Evangelist  views  the  event  as  having 
happened  in  his  own  time,  and  still  present,  stiU  continuing,  in 

its  effects. 

By  the  Lord. — Auth.,  "  Of  the  Lord."  "  Of,"  in  its  good  old 
English  use  for  "by,"  might  here  be  taken  to  mean  "con- 
cerning." 

Through  the  prophet. — Auth.,  "  by  the  prophet."  The 
Lord  spake  through  the  prophet  as  through  an  instrament  or 
channel.  God  is  also  said  to  have  spoken  in  the  prophets,  as  at 
Heb.  i.  1,  where  see  Note ;  in  the  Nicene  Creed  "  by  (Gr., 
through)  the  prophets." 


ST.    MATTHEW— II.  3 

23  Behold,  the  Virgin  .  .  .  The  passages  quoted  from  the 
prophetical  books  of  the  Old  Testament,  and  the  Canticles  in 
bt.  Luke's  Gospel,  have  been  arranged  stichometrically — i.e., 
divided  in  lines,  so  as  to  indicate  the  metrical  structure  and 
the  parallelism  of  the  Hebrew  poetry. 

25  A  son.— There  is  but  little  MS.  authority  for  the  reading  which 
Auth.  here  follows,  "  her  first-born  son,"  and  which  is  part  of 
the  genuine  Gr.  text  in  Luke  ii.  7. 


CHAPTER  II. 

1  Wise  men  from  the  east  came.— Auth.,  "  "Wise  men  came 
from  the  east."  The  collocation  of  the  words  in  the  Gr.  appears 
to  connect  "from  the  east"  with  "wise  men,"  rather  than  with 
"  came,"  denoting  that  their  home  was  in  the  east,  and  not  that 
the  east  was  the  direction  from  which  they  came  to  Jerusalem. 

4  Gathering  together. — Auth.,  "  When  he  had  gathered  to- 
gether." This  chapter  is  marked  in  the  Gr.  by  the  frequent 
combination  of  a  jjarticiple  and  a  verb  to  express  a  double  action, 
which  according  to  English  idiom  is  usually  expressed  by  two 
verl)S,  as  in  verse  3.  The  paraphrase  by  which  the  Latin 
language  avoids  the  i;se  of  the  participle  has  been  adopted 
in  English,  especially  by  the  first  ti-auslators  of  the  Bible,  who 
had  tlie  Latin  Yulgate  always  before  them.  Occasionally,  how- 
ever, as  here  and  in  verses  9, 11,  the  participial  construction  serves 
to  lighten  the  sentence,  without  injury  to  the  rhythm,  and  with 
some  gain  to  the  ^'ividness  of  the  narrative. 

He  inquired. — SoWycl.;  Auth..  "he demanded"  (after Cranm.); 
a  word  denoting,  as  used  in  the  Bible,  an  imperious  or  peremptory 
interrogation,  which  though  it  might  be  consistent  with  tlie 
character  of  Herod  the  king,  is  not  implied  by  the  Gr.  eirvfedvero. 
"Inquired"  also  represents  the  Greek  better  than  "demanded" 
or  "  asked,"  as  being  suggestive,  like  the  imperfect  tense  of  the 
Greek,  of  a  repeated  and  continued  questioning ;  which  is  not 
the  case  with  the  other  two  words.    Compare  Note  on  Acts  iv.  7. 

6  By  the  prophet. — Margin,  "Or  through,"  which  is  tlie  literal 
rendering  of  the  Gr.  preposition  5j«,  but  would  not  be  intelli- 


4  ST.   MATTHEW— II. 

gible  here,  as  it  is  at  chap.  i.  22,  where  the  instrumental  meaning 
"through,"  "by  means  of,"  can  well  be  expressed,  "spoken  by 
the  Lord  through  the  prophet." 

6  Thou  Bethlehem,  land  of  Judah. — Auth., "  Thou  Betlilehem 
in  the  land  of  Judah."  The  insertion  of  in  is  uuuecessaiy,  and 
indeed  incorrect,  the  words  "  land  of  Judah  "  being  applicable 
to  Bethlehem,  considered  as  the  name  of  the  town  and  tlie 
surrounding  district,  over  which  district,  it  is  to  be  observed, 
Herod  extended  his  massacre  (verso  16). 

Shall  be  shepherd. — Auth.,  "  shall  rule,"  Gr.  iroifiaveT.  It  is 
not  often  tliat  this  beautiful  Orientalism,  pervading  both  the 
Old  and  New  Testaments,  can  be  preserved  in  English  -^vithout 
encumbering  the  sentence :  e.g.,  it  would  not  be  admissible  in 
Revelation  ii.  27,  xii.  5,  xix.  15,  where  "  rule  "  has  been  retained; 
for  in  these  places  it  is  not  the  general  character  of  the  shepherd, 
but  the  notion  of  guidance,  and  so  of  governance,  one  of  his 
offices,  which  is  predominant. 

7  learned  of  them  carefully. — Auth.,  "inquired  of  them  dili- 
gently." The  Gr.  verb  denotes  not  the  act  of  inquiry,  but  its 
result  ("learned"),  and  exactness  rather  than  diligence.  All 
previous  versions  have  "diligently,"  except  WycL,  "busily;" 
Yulg.,  diligenter.  "  Diligence"  was  a  bright  and  suggestive  word 
while  the  Latin  was  a  living  language ;  but  now,  though  not 
obsolete,  it  has  become  somewhat  faded  and  colourless;  and 
"  pains-taking  "  is  a  stronger  word.  "  Ascertained,"  as  used 
in  modern  English,  would  fairly,  but  somewhat  feebly,  represent 
the  Greek  in  this  place. 

8  Search  out  carefully  concerning  the  young  child.— 

The  two  prejjositions  expressed  by  "  out  "  and  "  concerning  "  are 
omitted  in  Auth.,  "  Search  diligently  for  the  young  child." 

That  I  also  may  come  and  worship  him. — Following 
the  Greek  order.  Auth.,  "That  I  may  come  and  worship  him 
also,"  intending  the  same  sense,  but  making  it  possible  for  a  care- 
less reader  to  connect  "  also "  with  "  worship,"  or  even  with 
"  him."  The  position  of  "  also  "  in  an  Enghsh  sentence  seems 
often  to  depend  on  other  considerations  than  those  of  perspicuity, 
and  its  true  connection  is  left  to  be  determined  by  the  intel- 
ligence of  the  reader.  Here  j)erhaps  it  was  thro^vn  to  the  end 
to  prevent  the  concurrence  of  open  vowels,  "  I  also." 

9  See  Note  on  ver.  4. 

11  Offered. — More  close  to  the  original  Gr.,  and  more  suitable  to 


ST.   MATTHEW— II.  5 

an  act  of  adoration,  than  Autli.  "  presented."  All  previous  ver- 
sions have  "  ofiered." 

13  An  angel.— Aiith.  has  "  the  angel,"  following  all  previous 
versions.  But  in  ver.  19,  Auth.,  as  well  as  Tynd.  and  his  suc- 
cessors, rightly,  though  inconsistently,  omit  the  article. 

Until  I  tell  thee. — Auth.,  "  Until  I  bring  thee  word."  So 
Tynd.  The  Gr.  is  different  from  that  which  is  well  rendered 
"  bring  thee  word"  in  ver.  8. 

16  Did  I  call.— Aiith.,  "  have  I  called  "  The  Gr.  aorist  here 
refers  to  an  action  completed  long  before ;  as  is  shown  by  the 
passage  of  Hosea  xi.  1,  "  Wlien  Israel  was  a  child,  then  I  loved 
him,  and  called  my  sou  out  of  Egypt." 

16  The  male  children. — Gr.,  robs  iralSas;  Auth., "  The  children," 
thus  doubling  the  number  of  the  slaughtered  innocents ;  and  so 
Tynd.  and  Oranm.,  following  Wycl.  But  Geneva  had  "  male 
chilcben,"  and  the  Rhcm.  '•  men  children,"  following  Vulg., 
"pueros." 

Borders. — Gr.,  dpiois ;  Auth.,  "  coasts,"  a  word  only  used  now 
of  the  sea  shore. 

18  A  voice  was  heard  in  Ramah.— Auth.,  "In  Rama  was 
there  a  voice  heard."  This  inversion  of  the  Greek  order  pro- 
duces awkward  English,  is  of  no  advantage  to  the  rliythm,  and  is 
not  required  for  emphasis.  It  is  derived  from  Tyndale,  and  is 
not  in  the  Auth.  of  Jer.  xxxi.  15. 

Jeremiah.— Ramah.— See  Kote  on  chap.  i.  2. 

18  Lamentation. — Auth.  Omitted  in  accordance  with  change  of 
Greek  text. 

And -she  would  not. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "and  would 
not."  This  change,  or  rather  restoration  of  Wycl.'s  rendering, 
is  required  to  make  the  sentence  grammatical. 

22  But. — "  Notwithstanding  "  (Auth.)  is  never  wanted  as  a  transla. 
tion  of  the  little  word  5e,  which  is  no  more  than  a  connecting 
liuk  between  one  word,  or  clause,  or  sentence,  and  another,  and 
may  be  rendered  "and"  or  " but," according  to  the  context. 

Withdrew. — The  Greek  avaxupeu  bears  several  shades  of  mean- 
ing in  the  N.  T. ;  e.g.,  "departed,"  ver.  12.  Here  "withdi'ew" 
is  more  suitable  than  Auth.  "  turned  aside." 

23  The  Greek  particle  on,  "  that,"  when  it  introduces  a  saying  or 
quotation  which  is  the  substance,  but  not  the  exact  form,  of  what 


ST.   MATTHEW— III. 

was  said  or  wi-itteu,  is  to  be  trauslated  "that";  sometimes  it 
may  be  regarded  as  a  part  of  that  whifh  it  introduces,  and  in 
that  case  must  be  left  out  in  translation.  Here  it  is  prefixed  to 
a  quotation  which  is  not  given  verbatim ;  and  it  shoidd  there- 
fore  be  translated.     The  contrary  is  the  case  at  chap.  iv.  6. 


CHAPTER  III. 

1  Cometh. — Gk.,  irapayiyfrat.  Auth,,  and  all  English  versions 
except  the  Rhem.,  have  *'  came."  Yvilg.,  venit,  is  ambiguous  in 
tense. 

3  Isaiah  the  prophet. — Auth.,  "the  prophet  Isaiah."  This 
may  seem  a  small  matter ;  but  it  is  well,  even  in  this,  to  follow 
the  usual  order  of  the  Greek,  which  is  indeed  commonly  observed 
by  Auth.  Once  only  is  this  order  revei'sed  in  the  Greek,  Acts  ii. 
16. 

Make  ye  ready. — Auth.,  "  prepare  ye."  The  Gr.,  iToifj.d(fiv, 
is  trauslated  both  ways.  The  change  here  is  consequential  on 
that  Avhich  it  was  necessary  to  make  in  the  parallel  passage, 
Mark  i.  3,  where  see  Note. 

4  John  himself. — Auth.,  "the  same  John,"  wliich  is  perhaps 
rather  an  archaic  than  an  incorrect  use  of  "  same."  It  was  "  this 
John  "  in  all  the  versions  till  the  Rhem.  changed  to  "  the  said 
John."      Gr.,  Avrbs  Se  6  'luavuris. 

Food. — Auth.,  "meat."  This  word  has  long  lost  the  comprehen- 
sive meaning  which  it  bore  three  centmies  ago.  The  Auth.  has 
"food"  about  forty  times  in  the  O.  T.,  but  only  foiu-  times  in 
the  N.  T.  (not  once  in  the  Gospels);  "meat"  about  sixty  times 
in  the  N.  T.,  and  frequently  in  the  O.  T. 

8  Fruit. — Auth.,  "  fruits."     Change  in  Gr.  text. 

Worthy  of  repentance. — Auth.,  "meet  for  repentance," 
which  was  probably  suggested  by  Beza's  Latin  version,  conveni- 
elites  resipiscentice,  amending  Vulg.,  fructum  dignum  pceni- 
tentid.  "  Meet  for,"  though  it  may  be  rightly  understood,  is 
open  to  iiiisintorpretatiou. 


ST.  MATTHEW— III.  7 

Margin,  "  Or,  worthy  of  your  repentance."  Whether  tliis  reii- 
deriug  should  be  talcen,  or  that  which  stands  in  the  text, 
depends  upon  the  force  of  the  article  in  the  Gr. — ttjs  neruvolas — 
which  may  denote  the  grace  of  repentance  (in  the  abstract),  or 
"the  repentance  which  you  profess."  The  former  has  been 
thought  the  more  probable. 

10  And  even  now. — The  inference  being  that  there  is  no  time  to 
be  lost.     Auth.,  "  And  now  also."     Change  in  Gr.  text. 

12  Cleanse. — Auth.,  "purge."  The  simple  verb  KaOapl^o)  is  almost 
always  translated  "  cleanse "  in  Auth. ;  and  the  compound. 
StaKadapiCo,  has  been  conformed  to  it,  both  here  and  in  the 
parallel  passage,  Luke  iii.  17. 

But  the  chaif  he  will  burn  up  with  unquenchable  fire. 

— Auth.,  "  but  he  will  burn  up  the  chaff."  Here  again  the  pre- 
sei'A'ation  of  the  Gr.  order  throws  the  emphasis  on  the  emphatic 
word. 

14  But  John  would  have  hindered  him.  —  This  gi^es  the 
Gr.  imperfect  its  proper  sense,  which  is  overlooked  in  Auth. 
"forbad  him."  Moreover,  StaKu\vetv  is  to  "hinder,"  not  to 
"forbid." 

16  Prom  the  water. — Auth.,  "  out  of  the  waters,"  the  Gr.  being 

an6y  not  iK. 

As  a  dove. — Auth.,  "like  a  dove."  Gr.,  iicrel,  "as  it  were"; 
denoting  the  manner  of  descent,  not  resemblance  in  form. 

Coming  upon  him. — Auth.,  "  lighting  upon  liim."  Gr.,  t'/jx*^- 
ixevou  eV  avrSv.  The  Corrections  in  this  verse  are  all  in  agreement 
with  Wycl.  and  Rhem.     Auth.  follows  Tynd.  and  his  successors. 

17  A  voice  out  of  the  heavens. — All  English  versions,  "a 
voice  from  heaven,"  although  "  the  heavens,"  in  the  plural,  have 
been  spoken  of  in  the  same  verse.  In  nothing  does  the  Gospel 
of  St.  Matthew  more  strongly  show  its  Hebraic  authorship  than 
in  the  distinctive  uses  of  the  singular  and  plural  of  the  word 
heaven.  (1)  In  the  singular,  "  heaven  "  is  applied  to  all  that 
lies  outside  the  earth,  whether  the  suljjoct  be  the  birds  of  the 
air,  or  the  face  of  the  sJcy,  or  the  "  clouds  of  heaven,"  or  the 
"  stars  of  heaven  ;  "  also  when  the  in^^sible  world  is  mentioned, 
as  the  "  angels  in  heaven,"  and  the  heaven,  the  "  throne  of  God," 
and  when  the  whole  universe  is  comprehended  in  two  words, 
"  the  heaven  and  the  earth."  (2)  "  The  heavens,"  in  the  j)lm'al,  is 
very  rarely  used,  except  where  there  is  reference  more  or  less 
distinct  to  the  dwelling-place  of  the  Most  High.     Thus  instead 


8  ST.   MATTHEW— IV. 

of  "  the  kiugdom  of  God,"  of  which  we  read  so  often  in  the 
other  three  Gospels  and  the  rest  of  the  New  Testament,  we  have 
a  term  common  in  Rabbinical  writings,  "  the  kingdom  of  heas'en," 
literally, "  of  the  heavens  "  {tuv  ovapvUv),  peculiar  to  St.  Matthew's 
Gosjiel,  in  which  it  is  found  not  less  than  thirty  times.  Other 
expressions  peculiar  to  St.  Matthew  are,  in  the  Lord's  Prayer, 
"  Our  Father,  which  art  in  heaven "  (lit.,  "  the  heavens "), 
though  the  singular  number  is  used  in  the  same  prayer,  "  as  in 
heaven;"  and  "our  heavenly  Father"  (lit.,  "our  Father  from  the 
heavens."  "  The  powers  of  the  heavens  "  (meaning  the  greater 
lights,  the  sun  and  moon),  which  is  found  in  the  first  three 
Gospels,  is  an  exception  to  this  statement,  but  is  from  the  Old 
Testament  (Isa.  xxxiv.  4). 

The  usage  of  St.  Mark  in  this  particular  agrees  with  that  of  St. 
Matthew,  except  as  to  "  the  kingdom  of  heaven."  In  St.  Luke 
the  plural,  "  heavens,"  occurs  only  four  times  ;  in  St.  John,  not 
once ;  in  the  Acts,  twice ;  in  the  Epistles  frequently ;  in  the 
Apocalypse,  once  only  (chap.  xii.  12),  "  Rejoice,  ye  heavens." 
The  distinction  here  pointed  out  appears  to  have  arisen  among 
the  Jews  from  the  Rabbinical  conception  of  heaven  as  consisting 
of  several  regions  or  layers,  one  above  another ;  whence  the  ex- 
pression  of  St.  Paul,  "  the  third  heaven,"  in  2  Cor.  xii.  2 — i.e., 
the  highest  heaven.  According  to  some  Rabbinical  writers 
the  number  of  these  regions  was  seven. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

2  He  hungered. — Auth.,  "  he  was  an  hungred,"  a  word  now 
obsolete,  similar  in  formation  to  afeared  (which  is  foimd  in 
Spenser,  and  still  used  in  rural  dialects) ;  the  n  added  before  h, 
as  in  "an  horse."  Wycl.  here  hag,  "he  hungered";  Rhem., 
"  he  was  hungry."  Both  these  forms  occur  elsewhere  in  Auth. ; 
and  tliere  being  three  modifications  of  the  same  word,  all  convey- 
ing the  same  sense,  it  is  no  wonder  that  one  of  them  has  dropped 
out  of  use. 

3  If  thou  art. — Auth.,  "  If  thou  be,"  which  would  represent 
fav  is.  "  If  "  with  the  indicative  is  as  correct  in  English  as  in 
Greek,  and  is  frequently  found  in  Auth. — e.g.,  2  Cor.  xi.  4. 

Margin,  "  Gr.,  loaves."    The  word  for  "  bread"  is  in  the  plural. 


ST.    MATTHEW— IV.  9 

Become. — Autli.,  "be  made;"  Gr.,  yeuuvrai.  It  is  j)ropcr  to 
mark  this  :  by  tlie  fiat  of  a  word,  and  not  by  any  handiwork,  was 
the  change  to  be  brought  about. 

5  Taketh  him. — Auth.,  "taketh  him  up."    The  Gr.  means  liter- 
ally, "  taketh  [him]  along  with  him." 

He  set  him. — Auth.,  "  he  setteth  him."    Change  in  Gr.  text. 

The  pinnacle. — A  particular  part  of  the  temple,  as  appears 
from  the  article,  which  is  omitted  in  Auth.  The  margin  gives 
the  literal  meaning  of  the  Gr.,  irTepvywv,  wing.  What  part  it 
may  have  been  there  are  no  means  now  of  determining. 

6  On  their  hands. — Auth.,  "  in,"  &e.,  giving  to  the  Gr.  pre- 
position €7ri  a  meaning  which  it  will  not  bear. 

Lest  haply. — Autli.,  "  lest  at  any  time."  A  change  fre- 
quently made — e.g.,  Matt.  v.  25,  xiii.  15.  In  Luke  xiv.  25,  Acts 
V.  39,  Auth.  itself  has  "  lest  haply."  The  proper  temporal  sense 
of  ^uTjTToTe  passes  into  a  notion  of  contingency. 

12  Delivered  up. — Auth.,  "cast  into  prison,"  which  was  the 
subsequent  act  of  the  authorities  to  whom  he  was  "  delivered 
up."  (Comp.  Matt.  x.  17,  19,  &c.)  Withdrew.  See  on  chap, 
ii.  22. 

13  By  the  sea. — Auth.,  "  by  the  sea-coast."  Gr.,  tt^v  irapadaXacraLav, 
to  be  distinguished  from  ttjs  irapaKiov  {x^p<^s  understood,)  which 
is  rightly  translated  "  the  sea  coast  "  at  Luke  vi.  17. 

16  Did  light  spring  up.— Auth.  (following  Tynd.,  &c.)  "  light  is 
sprung  up."  Wycl.  alone  gives  the  tense  correctly,  "  light 
arose  to  them."  The  later  versions  seem  to  have  been  led  into 
their  erroneous  mode  of  rendering  by  Yulg.,  orta  est,  which  was 
not  in  itself  incorrect. 

19  Come  ye  after  me. — "  Follow  "  is  used  in  Auth.  to  translate 
many  Gr.  words  and  phrases  for  which  a  more  literal  as  well  as 
a  varied  rendering  is  desirable. 

21  Boat. — Auth.,  here  and  elsewhere,  "  ship,"  which  gives  an  erro- 
neous idea  of  the  size  of  the  fishing  vessels  on  the  lake  (Gr.  ■kKoIo)). 
All  the  former  vei-sions  have  "  sliip,"  and  Yulg.,  navi. 

24  All  that  were  sick,  holden  with  .  .  . — Auth.,  "All 
sick  people  that  were  taken  with,"  &c.  The  text  follows  more 
closely  the  Gr.  construction,  and  also  gives  the  participle  its 
proper  meaning,  which  is  not  "  being  taken "  or  seized,  but 
"  being  held  fast." 


10  ST.   MATTHEW— V. 

24,25  "People"  is  without  ueed  iuserted  iu  Auth.  By  "the 
people,"  at  the  end  of  ver.  23,  is  meant  the  Jewish  nation 
(Gr.,  rf  \af). 


CHAPTER  V. 

1  When  he  had  sat  down. — "When  he  was  set"  runs 
through  all  the  English  versions,  showing  that  "  to  sit "  was 
foiTuerly  conjugated  like  "  to  come "  and  "  to  go."  Vulg., 
cum  se'disset.  "  Set,"  at  verse  14,  is  the  rendering  of  a  Gr. 
participle  (/cei^eV??). 

10  That  have  been  persecuted.  —  The  Gr.  is  in  the  past 
(praeter-perfect)  tense.  The  Vulg.  and  all  English  ver- 
sions render  it  as  a  present,  "  which  are  persecuted."  By 
attention  to  this  point,  the  distinction  is  made  more  clear 
between  those  who  are  spoken  of  in  this  verse  and  those  who 
are  addressed  in  the  next.  The  latter  class  (including  our 
ownselves)  are  thus  encouraged,  in  case  we  sufEer  persecution, 
by  the  assurance  that  they  who  have  suffei'ed  before  us  "for 
righteousness'  sake"  are  already  blessed. 

11  Reproach. — "  Revile,"  which  is  the  rendering  of  Tynd.  and 
all  subsequent  versions,  is  too  strong  a  word  for  the  Gr. 

13  Its  savour. — Auth.,  "  his."  The  distinction  of  genders  with 
regard  to  this  and  other  inanimate  objects  has  become  archaic, 
though  it  lingers  in  some  provincial  dialects  of  England ;  and  the 
language  has  gained  in  simplicity,  though  not  in  poetry  or 
euphony,  by  the  substitution  of  "  its,"  which  in  1611  had  no 
place  in  the  Bible,  but  is  used  by  Shakspcare,  e.ff.,  five  times  in 
the  Winter's  Tale,  and  by  MUton,  though  rarely,  in  Paradise 
Lost. 

15  Lamp  .  .  .  stand. — Auth.,  "  candle  .  .  .  candlestick ;  "  and 
so  all  English  versions,  except  Wycl.,  "  lantern  .  .  .  candlestick," 
following  Yulg.,  lucernam  .  .  .  candelabrum.  Our  translators 
were  probably  not  aware  that  candelabrum  was  commonly  used 
by  the  Romans  (like  "  chandelier  "  by  us)  for  a  lamp-stand  as  well 
as  "'  a  candlestick ;  "  and  seeing  it  used  in  the  Vulg.  to  translate 


ST.    MATTHEW— V.  11 

tte  Gr.  \vxvlav,  they  took  "  candle  "  for  Auxj'oj',  in  this  and  some 
other  places,  reserving  "  lamp  "  for  \a/xTrds  {lampas).  The  seven- 
branched  candlestick  of  the  Temple  was  lighted  by  lamps,  not  by 
candles. 

15  The  bushel  .  .  .  the  stand.— All  English  versions  omit 
the  article,  which  denotes  that  the  utensils  thus  referred  to  were 
things  usually  to  be  found  in  every  house. 

Shineth. — Auth.,  "giveth  light,"  following  Cranm.,  but  in  the 
next  verse,  for  the  same  Gr.  both  these  versions  have  "  shine." 

17  I  came. — So  Wycl.  and  Rh. ;  Auth.  with  Tynd.,  "  I  am  come." 
The  Gr.  is  the  aorist;  Vulg.,  ve7ii,  may  be  either  "  I  came,"  or 
"  I  am  come." 

18  Pass  away. — Auth.,  "pass,"  following  Wycl.  and  Cranm.  here, 
but  with  "  pass  away  "  at  chap.  xxiv.  35,  and  in  other  similar 
passages.  Tynd.  and  Genev.,  "finish."  Vulg.,  transeat,  re- 
minding us  of  "  sic  transit  gloria  muudi." 

20  In  no  wise. — Auth.,  "  in  no  case."  The  emphatic  negative 
oi)  fi-n  is  not  elsewhere  so  rendered  in  Auth.  The  previous  versions 
have  in  this  place  simply,  "ye  shall  not,"  following  Yu]g.,non 
intrabitis. 

21  It  was  said  to  them  of  old  time. — Auth.,  "by  them," 
foUoAving  Beza,  dictmn  est  a  veteribus.  All  previous  ver- 
sions, following  Yulg.,  with  Chrysostom,  &c.,  "  to  them." 
The  Gr.  is  in  itself  ambiguous  ;  but  the  meaning  is  decided  by 
the  consideration  that  the  commandments  which  follow  were 
given,  not  by  sundry  lawgivers  or  teachers,  but  by  one,  by  Moses 
to  the  Israelites  :  and  the  antithesis  may  be  thus  expanded  : 
"  This  was  said  by  Moses  to  them  of  old  time :  but  I  say  unto 
you."  Both  the  pronouns  (especially  "I")  are  here  emphatic 
in  the  Gr.  Moi-eover,  the  Gr.  ippfdri  in  the  New  Testament  and 
in  the  LXX.  is  not  followed  by  a  noun  describing  the  speaker, 
but  by  one  which  (as  here)  denotes  the  persons  addressed. 
Compare  Rom.  ix.  12,  26. 

Thus  at  the  A-ery  outset  of  His  ministry  our  Lord  assumes 
Divine  authority,  not  speaking  in  the  manner  of  the  scribes,  the 
servile  expoimders  of  Rabbinical  tradition,  but  taking  upon  Him- 
self to  enlarge  and  spiritualise  the  law  given  by  Moses  mider 
inspiration  from  God. 

21,22  Every  one  .  .  .  whosoever. —  Auth.  repeats  "who- 
soever," losing  sight  of  the  variation  in  the  Gr. 

22  The  omission  of  "  without  cause "  (Auth.)   is  consequent  on  a 


12  ST.   MATTHEW— V. 

change  of  the  Gr.  text.  The  Auth.  and  Cranm.  alone  follow  a 
text  which  had  the  omitted  words. 

The  hell  of  fire —Auth.,  "heU  fire;  "  the  Gr.  being  literally 
"  the  Gehenna  of  fire."  Gelieuna  was  originally  the  name  of  a 
valley  near  Jerusalem,  in  which  the  Israelites  offered  their 
children  in  sacrifice  to  the  false  god  Moloch.  A -f^er  its  defile- 
ment by  Josiah,  recorded  in  2  Kings  xxiii.,  it  wt<  legarded  as  an 
accursed  place;  and  its  name,  being  a  name  of  horror,  became 
a  by-word  with  the  Jews  of  later  times  for  the  place  of  future 
retribution.  So  it  is  said  in  the  Rabbinical  commentaiy  (the 
Targum)  in  Isa.  xxxiii.  14,  "  Gehenna  is  tlie  eternal  fire " 
(Plumptre,  commentary  on  this  verse,  and  Dr.  Field,  Otium 
Norvicense,  part  3,  p.  3).  The  old  English  "  hell,"  therefore,  in 
its  modern  acceptation,  seems  fairly  well  to  represent  Gehenna. 
The  Gr.  construction  requires  that  "  of "  should  be  inserted. 
So  Rhem.:  Wycl.  has  "  fire  of  hell."  Yulg.  may  be  taken  either 
way,  reus  erit  Gehennce  ignis.    Tynd.,  "  hell  fire." 

23  If  therefore- — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  Cranm.,  and  Luther 
(Darum  loenn),  "  Therefore  if."  The  return  to  the  Gr.  order 
lightens  the  sentence,  and  is  a  change,  which,  though  slight,  has 
been  often  made  with  advantage. 

23  If  thou  art  offering. — The  present  tense  in  the  Gr.  sup]30ses 
the  remembrance  to  occur,  as  is  very  likely  to  be  the  case,  when 
the  worshipper  is  in  the  act  of  offering  his  gift.  Auth.,  "  if  thou 
bring,"  which  less  vividly  conveys  the  same  idea  that  the  sacri- 
fice is  inchoate,  not  completed;  but  the  Gr.,  here  rendered 
"  bring,"  has  its  usual  and  proper  meaning,  "  offer,"  given  to  it 
in  the  next  verse. 

25  Lest  haply. — Note  on  chap.  iv.  6. 

26  The  last  farthing.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following  Vulg., 
novissinmm,  and  in  accordance  with  English  idiom.  This  is  the 
only  place  in  which  the  Gr.  is  rendered  "  uttermost  "  in  Auth. 
(after  Tynd.),  except  Acts  i.  8,  xiii.  4,  7,  where  it  has  its  proper 
local  meaning,  "  the  uttermost  parts  of  the  earth ; "  "  utmost, 
uttermost,  outermost,"  being  the  opposite  to  ''inmost,  innermost." 

Till  thou  have  paid,  like  the  Gr.,  ews  hv  diroS^s,  leaves  it 
uucertaiu  whether  it  ever  will  or  can  be  paid.  Auth.,  "  tiU  thou 
hast  paid,"  points  to  a  definite  time  when  it  will  have  been  paid. 
The  Genevan  first  introduced  the  definite  futm-e  here  into  the 
English  version. 

29  Causeth  thee  to  stumble. — Auth.,  "offend  thee,"  which 
would  mean  "  sin  against  thee,"  or  "  displease  thee,"  whereas 


ST.   MATTHEW— Y.  13 

the  Gr.  means  "causeth  thee  to  stumble,"  and  in  the  meta- 
phorical sense  in  which  it  is  very  frequently  used  in  the  N.  T., 
"  canseth  to  sin."  The  noun  {crKdvSa\oi/,  scandalon)  is  properly  a 
"  stumbling-block."  Though  occurring  fifteen  times  in  the  New 
Testament,  and  twenty  times  in  the  LXX.,  it  is  scarcely  ever 
found  in  profane  authors.  Hei*e  the  word  is  appropriate  in  its 
figurative  sense,  the  eyes  being  mostly  in  fault  when  we  take  a 
false  step  in  walking ;  and  it  is  through  the  eyes  that  the  sin 
mentioned  in  the  last  verse  has  been  committed.  But  in  vcr.  30, 
and  generally,  the  original  metaphor  is  lost  sight  of,  and  the  word 
signifies  that  which  causes  a  moral  fall — a  temptation  to  sin. 
The  English  word  "  scandal "  bears  a  very  difi:ereut  meaning ;  so 
does  "  slander,"  which  comes  to  ns  through  the  French,  and  is 
another  form  of  the  same  original.  There  is  a  singular  variety 
in  the  English  versions  as  to  the  rendering  of  the  word  in  this 
place.  Wycl.  has  "  slander  thee ;  "  Tynd.,  followed  by  Auth., 
"offend  thee;"  Cranm.,  "  hinder  thee;"  Gen.,  "  cause  thee  to 
offend;"  Rh.,  "scandalise  thee"  (following  Vulg.,  scandal- 
izet  te). 

And  not  thy  whole  body  be  cast  into  hell.— Auth.  in- 
serts that,  "and  not  that  thy  whole  body,"  &c.,  i.e.,  "and  not 
profitable  that  thy  whole  body  be  cast,"  &c.,  thus  giving  a  wrong 
turn  to  the  sentence,  the  whole  of  which  depends  on  "  it  is  pro- 
fitable for  thee  "  at  the  beginning. 

30  Go  into. — For  Auth.,  "be  east  into,"  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

32  Maketh  her  an  adultress. — Literally,  "  causeth  her  to  have 
committed  adultery."  Auth.,  "  causeth  her  to  commit  adultery." 
A  change  consequent  on  change  in  Gr.  text  (the  verb  being  in  the 
past  tense,  the  aorist,  instead  of  the  present). 

When  she  is  put  away. — Auth.,  "her  that  is  divorced." 
The  Gr.  is  the  same  here  as  in  the  two  places  above,  where  it  is 
thus  rendered. 

35  The  footstool  of  his  feet.— Auth.,  "  his  footstool,"  follow- 
ing  Tynd.  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  preserve  the  Hebrew  idiom,  follow- 
ing Vulg.,  scabellum  est  pedum  ejus. 

Nor  by  Jerusalem. — The  Gr.  is  literally  "  toward "  (eh) ; 
doubtless,  when  they  swore  by  the  holy  city,  they  looked  towards 
it,  as  they  did  in  their  prayers. 

37  Your  speech. — Auth.,  "  communications,"  with  all  previous 
versions,  except  Wycl.,  "  your  word." 

Is  of  the  evil  one. — Margin,  "  or,  evil,  as  in  ver.  39 ;  vi 


14  ST.   MATTHEW— VI. 

13."  AutL,  "  Cometh  of  evil."^  (So  Tynd.)  The  question  be- 
tween  the  masculine  and  neuter  is  a  doubtful  one,  the  Gr.  being, 
iK  Tov  TTovnpov,  but  appeal's  to  be  decided  by  ver.  39,  where  see 
note. 

39  Resist  not  him  that  is  evil. — So  Wj^cL,  "  an  evil  man," 
the  Vulg.  being,  non  resistere  malo.  All  other  English  versions, 
"  evil "  (in  the  abstract).  But  we  are  boimd  to  resist  evil,  and 
him  also  who  is  the  author  of  it  (James  iv.  7).  The  Gr.,  there- 
fore, though  in  itself  ambiguous,  must  signify  "  the  evil  man," 
as  at  1  Cor.  v.  13,  where  the  mascidine  is  used,  "Put  away  the 
wicked  man  from  among  yourselves."  Some  explain  this  pre- 
cept as  forbidding  retaliation,  "retm*n  not  evil  for  evil;"  but 
there  is  no  example  of  the  verb  which  is  here  rendered  "  resist " 
ha\'ing  any  other  sense. 

40  Go  to  law. — The  Gr.  is  so  rendered  at  1  Cor.  vi.  1.  Here  Auth. 
has,  "  sue  thee  at  law."  The  word  includes  litigation,  whether  in 
prosecution  or  defence. 

41  Compel. — Margin,  "  Gr.  impress."  The  word,  which  is  of  Per- 
sian  origin,  is  connected  with  the  custom  of  impressing  horses 
and  men  for  the  use  of  a  king's  courier  carrying  despatches ;  it 
is  used  (chap,  xxvii.  32)  with  reference  to  Simon  of  Cp'ene. 

44  The  omissions  in  this  verse  are  consequent  on  changes  in  the  Gr. 
text. 

48  Ye  therefore  shall  be. — Auth.,  "  Be  ye  therefore,"  follow- 
ing Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  and  Vulg.,  estate.  The  Gr.  is  the  future 
indie,  used  often,  as  here,  with  an  imperative  meaning,  as  in  the 
Commandments. 

Your  heavenly  Father.— For  Auth.,  "  Your  Father  which 
is  in  heaven,"  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

1  Do  not  your  righteousness.  —  For  Auth..  "alms,"  by  a 
change  of  Gr.  text,  which  is  generally  receired.  Yn\g..ju.^titiam. 
followed  by  Wycl.  and  Rhem.     The  Auth.  follows  Tynd.     The 


ST.    MATTHEW— VI.  15 

command  is  thus  of  general  application,  and  not  limited  to  alms- 
givinpf. 

With  your  Father. — i.e.,  in  his  judgement.  So  Cranm. :  Auth., 
following  Tynd.  and  Genev.,  "  of."  The  Gr.  is  napd,  which  the 
Viilg.  renders  wcU  by  apicd. 

2  They  have  received  their  reward.— Auth.,  "  They  have 
their  reward."  The  Gr.  is  in  the  present  tense,  but  with  the 
sense  of  the  perfect,  "they  have  got  it"  (anexovcri).  So  Vulg., 
receperunt,  followed  by  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  The  Auth.  follows 
Tynd.  ;  but  in  a  similar  passage  (Luke  vi.  24)  has  "  ye  have 
received,"  following  Genev. 

4  Shall  recompense  thee. —Auth.,  "reward."  The  Gr.  is 
ano^ucrei ;  but  in  vers.  1,  2  "  reward  "  (the  noun)  represents  a  dif- 
ferent Gr. 

Tlie  omission  of  "  openly "  (Auth.)  is  consequent  on  a  change  in 
the  Gr.  text,  as  also  the  substitution  of  the  plural  for  the  singular 
in  the  next  verse. 

6  Inner  chamber. — Auth.,  "  closet."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as 
in  Matt.  xxiv.  26,  "  Behold,  he  is  in  the  secret  chamber  "  (Auth.), 
and  properly  means  "  a  storehouse." 

10  As  in  heaven,  so  on  earth. — Auth.,  "  in  earth,  as  it  is  in 
heaven."  The  Gr.  order  is  followed,  as  in  Luke  xi.  2  (Auth.,  but 
omitted  in  the  Revision).  There  is  much  diversity  in  the  earlier 
versions.  Vulg.,  sicut  in  ccelo,  et  in  terra,  according  to  the 
Gr.  order,  is  followed  by  Rhem.  only.  The  inverted  order  is 
tliat  of  Wycl.  and  Tynd.  The  Gr.  order  emphasizes  the  last 
words,  "  so  on  eartli " ;  the  Auth.  throws  the  stress  on  "  as  it 
is  in  heaven,"  and  suggests,  as  the  meaning  of  the  petition,  "  may 
Thy  will  be  done  on  earth,  as  perfectly  as  it  is  done  in  heaven ;" 
whereas  the  true  meaning,  according  to  the  Gr.,  is,  "  may  Thy 
will,  which  is  done  in  heaven,  be  done  on  earth  also,"  no  compa- 
rison being  implied  as  to  the  manner  in  which  it  is  done  :  the 
connecting  particles  being  "  as  "  (a»s,  not  Kaddis)  in  heaven, ''  also  " 
(Kal,  not  ouTois)  on  earth. 

It  is  worthy  of  notice  "  that  "  heaven  "  appears  in  the  Gr.  as  a 
plural  at  the  beginning  of  the  prayer,  and  here  in  the  singular. 
(See  Note  on  chap.  iii.  17.) 

13  Bring  us  not.— Auth.,  "  lead  us  not,"  with  Vulg,,  ne  nos 
inducas,  and  all  English  versions ;  Gr.,  m^  ela-eveyKris.  This  verb 
in  the  six  other  places  of  the  New  Testament  in  which  it  occurs, 
and  in  classical  Gr.,  is  "  to  bring,"  or  "  carry,"  not  to  "  lead;  " 


16  ST.   MATTHEW— VI. 

and  when  said  of  a  person  it  implies  that  he  is  made  to  go,  if  not 
against  his  will,  without  his  consent.  Compare  the  petition  in 
the  Litany  of  the  Clmrch,  "  That  it  may  please  thee  to  bring  into 
the  way  of  truth  all  such  as  have  erred  and  are  deceived."  "To 
lead  "  is  suggestive  of  a  consenting  will.  Thus  it  is  remarked  by 
Bishop  Andrewes  in  his  Analysis  of  the  Lord's  Prayer  (published 
in  1611),  that  qui  ducitur  volens  ducitur,  "  he  who  is  led 
is  led  with  his  own  consent,"  and  that  the  Gr.  word  in  this 
place  is  "  rather  ne  inferas  than  ne  inducas  "  {Sermons,  Oxford 
edition,  1843,  vol.  5,  p.  446).  Of  our  Lord  it  is  said  (Matt.  iv.  i.), 
that  He  "was  led  up"  (avvx^v),  and  (Luke  iv.  i.)  that  He  "was 
led  "  (^76To)  by  the  Spirit  into  the  wilderness  to  be  tempted  of 
the  devil.  He  was  led ;  His  will  then,  as  always,  going  along 
with  the  Divine  will.  This  cannot  well  be  said  of  us,  at  the  very 
moment  Avhen  we  are  deprecating  exposure  to  temptation ;  "bring 
not "  is,  then  at  least,  more  appropriate  to  our  frame  of  mind 
than  "  lead  not ; "  at  any  rate,  it  is  the  word  which,  if  we  are  to 
follow  literally  our  Lord's  injunction,  He  has  prescribed  for  our 
use. 

It  has  been  observed  that  "lead"  is  an  over-strong  and  jiainful 
word,  drawn  from  the  Vulgate,  and  used  thei-e  for  the  reason 
that  the  Latin  has  no  verb  which  adequately  represents  "bring" 
in  the  sense  required  here.  ("  Ely  Lectures  on  the  Revised 
Version,"  by  Canon  Kennedy,  p.  71.) 

Deliver  us  from  the  evil  one. — All  English  versions, 
"  from  evil ;  "  Vulg.,  a  tnalo.  Beza,  Bishop  Andrewes  {Sermons 
vol.  5,457),  Bengel,  Bishop  Wordsworth,  and  other  modern  com- 
mentators, "  from  the  evil  one."  The  Gr.  a-rrh  rov  -jrovrjpov  may 
be  either  masculine  or  neuter,  and  is  rendered  ambiguously  in  the 
Latin  a  malo.  The  question  is  whether  in  this  place  the  mascu- 
line or  the  neuter  is  to  be  preferred ;  and  the  answer  to  this 
question  requires  consideration  of  the  usage  of  the  New  Testa, 
meut,  and  of  the  sense  attached  to  the  word  in  the  ancient  ex- 
position of  the  prayer. 

It  appears  that  our  Lord  unquestionably  used  6  irov-qpos  of  "  the 
evil  one,"  in  Matt.  xiii.  19,  "  then  cometh  the  evil  one,"  and  chap, 
xiii.  38,  and  probably  in  this  discourse,  chap.  v.  37  (see  above) 
and  John  xvii.  15,  and  that  it  was  clearly  so  used  several  times 
by  St.  John  (1  John,  ii.  13,  iii.  12 ;  v.  18,  19,  Compare  Jolm 
\'iii.  44,  1  John  iii.  8).  The  passages  where  it  is  undoubtedly  neuter 
are  only  two — Luke  vi.  45,  and  Rom.  xii.  9 — "  Abhor  that  which 
is  evil ; "  there  are  also  three  or  four  places  in  which  the  same 
ambiguity  exists  as  in  the  Lord's  prayer. 


ST.    MATTHEW— VI.  17 

Tlie  mast'iiline  sense  agrees  well  with  tlie  coutext.  "  Briug  us  not 
into  temptation,  but  deliver  lis  from  tlie  tempter." 

As  regards  versions,  the  most  ancient  Sp'iae  appears  to  have  the 
masculine  rendering.  The  most  ancient  Latin,  followed  by  St. 
Jerome  in  theYiilg.,  has  a  malo,  which  was  taken  by  the  Fathers 
of  the  Latin  Church  generally,  thougli  not  by  the  most  ancient, 
as  a  neuter.  It  will  be  seen  that  mains  is  the  rendering  given 
in  tlie  Yulgate  for  the  Gr.  6  novr^pos,  the  evil  one,  at  chap.  xiii.  19, 
where  see  note.  In  the  Saliidic,  the  version  of  Upper  Egj-pt,  it  is 
a  masculine  :  in  the  Memphitic,  the  version  of  Lower  Egyi)t,  it  is 
ambiguous  ;  but  in  the  liturgy  of  that  Church  it  is  interpreted 
as  a  masculine,  ''  Deliver  us  from  the  evil  one  and  his  works  : " 
and  so  it  is  interpreted  in  the  three  most  ancient  Gr.  liturgies, 
Avhicli  are  named  after  St.  James,  St.  Mark,  and  Adgeus.  The 
earliest  Latin  liturgies  (those  of  tlie  Western  Church),  following 
the  example  of  the  later  Latin  fathers,  have  the  masculine. 

The  Greek  Fathers,  who  expound  or  refer  to  this  petition,  all 
take  the  masculine  interpretation — e.g..  the  Clementine  Homilies. 
Origen,  Dionysius  of  Alexandria,  Cyril  of  Jerusalem,  Gregory 
Nysseu,  Didymus  of  Alexandria,  Chrysostom,  Isidore  of  Pelusium ; 
so  does  the  earliest  Latin  Father,  TertuUiau,  followed  by  Cyprian. 
In  Latin  writers,  as  Ambrose  and  Hilary,  a  change  is  manifest; 
and  Augustine  sets  the  example,  which  has  been  followed  by  the 
Western  Church,  of  taking  the  neuter  sense,  "  e^-il."  in  general, 
not  the  "  e^il  one  "  as  a  j)erson.  For  a  full  investigation  of  the 
eAadence  of  which  the  above  is  a  brief  summary,  the  reader  is 
referred  to  the  able  papers  on  this  subject  l)y  the  Bishop  of 
Durham  (Lightfoot),  which  appeared  in  the  Guardian  of  Sep- 
tember, 1881,  in  answer  to  a  learned  argument  on  the  other  side  by 
Canon  Cook,  entitled  "  A  Protest  against  the  Change  in  the  Last 
Petition  of  the  Lord's  Prayer  adopted  in  the  Revised  Version. " 

It  has  been  obsen^ed  in  further  confirmation  of  the  mascu- 
line rendering,  that,  accordmg  to  St.  Matthew,  tlie  prayer  was 
delivered  by  our  Lord  shortly  after  He  had  liimsclf  lleen  led 
into  temptation,  and  had  been  in  conflict  with  tlie  •'  evil  one." 

Canon  Cook  has  i-ecently  replied  to  the  Bishop  of  Durham,  and 
the  deeply  interesting  discussion  is  not  yet  concluded.     (June, 

1882.) 

13  The  omission   of  the  Doxology   is    rendered   necessary   l)y   tlie 

great  preponderance  of  textual  authorities  against  it.    It  is  not  in 

the  Vulgate,  and  is  not  generally  used  in  Western  Christi'ndoin. 

Its  interpolation  into  the  Gr.  text  was  probably  in  the  first  iu- 

o 


18  ST.    MATTHEW— VI. 

stance  due  to  its  use  as  a  proper  termiuation  of  tlie  prayer  iu  the 
services  of  the  Church.  The  omissiou  of  the  Doxology  in  the 
Church  Catechism  is  readily  accounted  for,  when  it  is  borne  in 
mind  that  the  Lord's  Prayer  was  generally  knoAvn  and  taught  in 
Western  Europe  according  to  the  Latin  use,  Avithout  the  Doxology, 
until  the  pul^lication  of  the  New  Testament  in  Greek  by  Erasmus, 
iu  1516.  He  in  the  text  of  subsequent  editions  indicated  its 
doiibtfulness,  and  in  his  Commentary  (1522)  argued  strongly 
against  its  authenticity :  and  though  retained  by  Stephens  (1546) 
and  Beza  (1598)  in  their  editions  of  the  Greek  Testament,  and  in 
Elzc\ar's  text  of  1633  (now  current  under  the  title  of  the  Textns 
Receptus)  it  was  not -admitted  into  any  part  of  the  service  of  the 
Church  prior  to  the  Revision  of  the  Prayer-book  iu  1662  ;  and 
then  it  was  probably  introduced  (as  has  been  suggested  1)y 
Freeman,  Principles  of  Divine  Service.  Part  2,  p.  108)  iu  con- 
sideration of  its  use  in  the  morning  seriace  of  the  Greek  Church. 
It  was  judged  to  be  spurious  by  Mill  in  his  critical  edition  of 
the  (ir.Test.     (Oxfurd.  1707.)   "800  Note  on  1  Pet.  iv.  11. 

18  That  thou  be  not  seen. — So  Auth.  at  verse  5,  where  the 
Gr.  is  the  same  ;  ))ut  here  "  appear  not,"  probably  because  of 
"  seeth  in  secret,"  in  the  same  verse.  But  "appear  not,"  is  in- 
appropriate, being  suggestive  of  the  outward  seeming  as 
opposed  to  the  reality. 

19  Consume.  —  All  English  versions  "corrupt,"  except  WycL, 
•■  destroyeth  ;  "  Vnlg.,  demolitur.  The  Gr.  is,  literally  "maketh 
to  disappear."  We  do  not  say,  cloth  is  corrupted  by  the  moth, 
or,  iron  is  corrupted  by  the  rust ;  the  word  has  now  a  moral 
significance,  whicli  does  not  in  any  degree  appertain  to  the  Greek. 

21  Thy  treasure. —  By  change  in  Gr.  text  from  "your  treasure  " 
(Auth.).  The  sudden  transition  from  plural  to  singular,  and 
singular  to  plural,  is  a  characteristic  of  the  Mosaic  laws  and 
precepts.  Our  use  of  "you"  for  "thou"  precludes  us  from 
resorting  to  this  mode  of  giving  -vivacity  and  variety  to  a  familiar 
discourse;  but  it  is  used  several  times  by  our  Lord  iuthis  and  the 
following  chapters. 

22  The  lamp  of  the  body.— All  English  versions,  "light," 
except  Wyel.  and  Rhem ;  Gr.,  as  before,  \vxvos.  The  eye 
receives  light,  but  is  in  no  true  sense  a  light  itself. 

23  The  darkness.— All  English  versions,  "  that  darkness;"  here, 
as  in  many  other  places,  being  misled  by  the  Vulgate,  which,  as 
tlie  Latin  language  has  no  article,  either  neglects  the  Greek 
article,  or  ovei-translates  it,  and  liere  has  ipsce  tenebroe. 


ST.    MATTHEW— VI.  19 

25  Be  not  anxious. — Auth.,"  Take  uo  thought," apparently  using 
that  phrase  liere  and  in  1  Sam.ix.  5.  to  denote  anxious  tliought, 
which  is  the  meaning  of  the  Gr. ;  Vulg.,  Jie  solliciti  sitis;  Wycl.. 
"  be  not  busy ;  "  other  English  versions,  "  be  not  careful." 
"Over-careful"  is  not  a  classical  i^hrase,  or  it  miglit  have  been 
accepted. 

Pood, — All  English  versions.  "  meat ;  "  whicli  has  now  a  mnch 
more  limited  meaning  than  the  Gr.  Tpo(pris,  ''nourishment."  The 
article,  omitted  by  all  except  Rhein.,  signifies  "  tlie  food  which 
sustains  the  life  .  .  .  the  raiment  which  clothes  the  body." 
and  the  tliought,  thus  expanded,  resemljles  that  in  chap,  xxiii.  17, 
"' Whether  is  greater,  the  gold  or  the  temple  that  sanctifies  the 
gold  P  " 

26  Birds.— All  English  versions,  "  fowls."  which,  like  '"  food,"  is 
now  in  modern  usage  a  Avord  of  limited  meaning  in  comparison 
of  the  Gr.  Trereca  Avhich  it  represents  ;  though  it  is  etymologically 
eqiuvaleut  to  it.     Vulg.,  volatilia. 

Of  the  heaven. — ^Autli.  "  of  the  air,"    All  above  the  earth  was 
to  the  Hebrews  "  heaven." 

26  Of  much  more  value.— So  Auth.,  for  the  same  Gr.,  at  chap. 
X.  31,  but  here,  following  T^nid.,  "■  much  better."  Y\\\g.,]pluris 
estis.     Wycl.,  "  ye  are  more  worthy." 

27  Stature. — Margin,  '•  or.  or/e."  The  latter  rendering  has  been 
supported,  on  the  ground  that  it  is  the  proper  meaning  of  tlie 
Gr.,  as  iu  John  ix.  21 ;  Heb.  xi.  2-1.  But  "  a  cubit  "  is  a  measure 
of  length,  and  is  applied  in  classical  Gr.  to  the  measiirement  of  a 
man's  stature,  as  in  Aristoph.  VespcB,  553,  and  is  not  a  measure 
of  age.  Compare  also  Luke  xix.  3,  where  the  same  Gr.  is  pro- 
perly rendered  "  stature  "  (see  Field's  Olium  Now.,  Part  3,  p.  4). 

30  If  God  doth  so  clothe. — "  If."  in  Gr.  or  Engl.,  with  the  in- 
dicative mood,  puts  hypotlu'tically  what  miglit  be  assumed  as  a 
certainty.  "  If  he  so  clothes,  as  he  does  " — Aiitli.,  "  if  he  clothe," 
states  it  as  uncertain,  whether  the  hypothesis  be  true  or  not. 

33  His  Kingdom.— For  Auth.,  "the  kingdom  of  God,"  by  change 
in  Gr.  text. 

31  "Will  be  anxious  for  itself.— For  Auth..  "for  the  tilings 
of  itself;  "  things  of"  being  omitted  in  Gr.  Text. 


20  ST.    MATTHEW— VII. 

CHAPTER  VII. 

2  Measured  unto  you.— Autli.,  ••  measured  to  you  again,"  fol- 
lowing  a  different  reading  of  the  Gr.  text. 

4  Let  me  cast  out. — So  Autk.,  in  the  next  verse,  for  the  same 
word  ;  here,  "  pull  oiat." 

9  Who,  if  liis  son  shall  ask  him  .  .  .  will  give.— AutU., 
"  whom,  if  his  son  shall  ask  him  .  .  .  will  give,"  an  migraiu- 
matical  eonstruction,  like  that  in  ehap.  xvi.  13,  "  whom  do  men 
say  that  I  am.''  (See  Latham's  English  Grammar,  vol.  ii., 
p.  ;361.) 

A  loaf. — Auth..  "bread."  Tlie  Gr.  in  the  singular  is  properly  "a 
loaf"  (compare  Mark  \'iii.  1-i).  and  here  something  is  gained  by 
marking  this,  and  so  suggesting  the  cmtward  resemblance  wliich 
may  be  supposed  between  a  loaf  and  a  stone,  as  between  a  lisli 
ami  a  serpent. 

13  Narrow  is  the  gate. — So  Rhem.  All  other  Engl,  versions 
liave  '■  strait,"  which,  as  an  adjective,  has  almost  gone  out  of  use. 
Being  derived  from  "  strict  "  ( Latin,  stridus),  it  is  not  to  be  con- 
founded with  "  straight,"  which  is  the  same  as  "  stretched." 

Enter  in. — So  Wycl.  and  Rliem.,  following  Vidg.,  qui  intrant 
per  eaui,  and  rendering  the  Gr.  exactly.  Autli.,  after  Tynd., 
"go  in." 

1-i  Straitened.— Auth.,  "  strait."  The  Gr.  is  not  the  same  adjec 
tive  as  at  ver.  13, but  the  participle  of  a  verb  signifying  ''to 
press,"  or  "  hem  in." 

16  By  their  fruits,  &c.— The  order  of  the  Gr.  is  inverted  here  in 
Auth.,  but  followed  in  ver.  20. 

22  Mighty  works.— Auth.,  "wonderful  works  ;  "  the  Gr.  literally 
being  "powei's,"  and  suggestive  of  "might"  ratlier  than 
"wonder."  Tynd.  renders  the  Gr.  l)y " miracles," and  is  followed 
by  Cranm.,  Genev.,  and  Rhem.  The  Vulg.  has  virtutes.  and 
hence  Wycl.  "  virtues."  "  Mighty  works  "  is  the  rendering  of 
Aiith,  in  other  places  of  the  Gospels,  but  in  the  Acts  and  Epistles 
"  miracles,"  except  in  2  Cor.  xii.  12.  Avhere  all  the  English  ver- 
sions have  "mighty  deeds,"  except  Wycl.,  "virtues."  This 
diversity  appears  to  be  an  indication  that  the  four  Gospels  were 
,  not  in  the  Aiith.  finally  supei'\"ised  by  the  same  eve  and  hand  as 
the  rest  of  the  N.  T. 

27  Smote.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "beat,"  as  at  ver.  2.j.     The  Gr.  in 

the  two  verses  is  different. 


ST.    MATTHEW— VIII.  21 

28  The  multitudes.— By  the  reiteration  of  this  word  (in  the 
singular  or  plural)  we  are  constantly  reminded  that  our  Lord, 
wherever  He  went,  drew  about  Him  eager  crowds  of  the  common 
people,  who  sometimes  thronged  and  pressed  upon  Him  too 
closely,  sometimes  followed  Him  far  from  their  own  homos,  and 
always  heard  Him  gladly.  The  English  versions  occasionally,  as 
here,  have  "  people,"  without  any  apparent  reason  or  advantage. 

Teaching. — So  Wycl.  All  other  Engl,  versions.  "  doctrine." 
following  Vidg.,  doctrina.  There  are  two  words,  often  used  in 
the  N.  T.,  the  one  denoting  the  manner  of  a  person's  teaching 
{SiSaxv),  the  other  the  substance  of  it.  The  distinction  is  marked 
.by  using  always  "  teaching  "  for  the  former  and  "doctrine  "  for 
the  latter.  To  preserve  this  distinction  uniformly,  many  changes 
have  been  made,  as  here,  in  the  Auth. 

29  Their  scribes.  —  By  change  of  Gr.  text  for  Auth.  "  the 
scribes." 


CHAPTER  YIII. 


3  Stretched  forth  his  hand.— Auth..  f(jllowing  Tynd..  "put 
foi-th."  The  Gr.  denotes  a  lively,  energetic  movement,  and  else- 
where in  Auth.  is  almost  always  translated  "  stretched  forth." 
Here  the  action  was  the  more  impressive,  Ijecause  to  touch  a  leper 
was  to  incur  canonical  defilement,  and  by  so  doing  our  Lord 
showed  Himself  to  be  above  the  law. 

6  My  servant. — Margin,  "  or,  boy"  the  Gr.  ha^-ing  properly  (like 
gar^on  in  French)  the  latter  meaning,  though  often  used  in  the 
former. 

In  the  house. — Auth.,  "  at  home."     Wycl.  alone  gives  this 
correctly,  following  Vulg.,  which  has,  in  domo,  not  domi. 

9  For  I  also  am  a  man,  &c. —  So  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  after 
Vulg.,  "  For  I  also  myself  am  a  man."  Auth.,  following  Genev., 
"  For  I  am  a  man."  Only  by  "  also  "  rendering  the  Gr.,  Kai, 
and  by  the  emphatic  "  under  myself,"  is  it  made  apparent  that 
he  compares  his  own  position  with  that  of  our  Lord,  whom  he 
supposes  to  be  under  Divine  authority,  but  endued  with  power 
over  the  subalterns,  or  inferior  ministers  of  God. 


22  ST.    MATTHEW— VIII. 

12  The  weeping  and  gnashing.— All  Eugl.  versions  omit  the 
article,  wliieli  in  tlie  Gr.  accompanies  both  words,  bnt,  according 
to  Engl,  idiom,  being  expressed  with  the  former,  extends  to  both. 
The  article  shows  this  to  be  a  familiar  expression  for  bodily  and 
mental  agony.  This  also  apjx'ars  from  tlie  frequent  repetition  of 
the  phrase,  wliich  is  found  six  times  in  St.  Matthew  and  once  in 
St.  Luke. 

14  Lying  sick.— Axith.,  "  laid,  and  sick."  Tlie  Gr.  here  rendered 
'•  laid,"  is  literally  "  cast,"  and  is  translated  "  lying  "  in  chap, 
ix.  2.  The  Engl,  idiom  says  ''  lying  sick  "  where  tlie  Gr.  has 
"  lying  and  sick." 

16  He  cast  out  the  spirits  with  a  word.— The  Auth.  alone 
inserts  "  his,"  which  is  not  needed,  and  impairs  the  simple  sub- 
limity of  Aoyqi  in  tlie  original.     Comiiare  ver.  8,  margin. 

19  A  scribe. — Margin,  "  Gr.  one  scribe."  Compare  Note  on  cliap. 
xxi.  19. 

22  Leave  the  dead. — All  Engl,  versions,  "let  the  dead  bmy  their 
dead,"  where  "  let  "  is  liable  to  be  understood  as  the  sign  of  the 
imperative  mood,  instead  of  an  independent  verb,  as  it  is.  (Com- 
pare "  Lord,  now  lettest  thou  thy  servant  depart.")  Yulg., 
correctly,  dimitte  viortuos  sepelire  mortuos  suos." 

25  Save,  Lord- — Auth.,  "Lord,  save  us."  The  omission  of  "us," 
due  to  a  change  in  the  Gr.  text,  adds  vividness  to  the  cry  for 
help. 

28  The  Gadarenes.— Auth.,  "the  Gergesenes."  The  MSS.  vary 
much  as  to  the  name  of  tliis  locality.  The  most  probable  reading 
is  "  Gadarenes."  Their  city  was  at  the  south-east  of  tlie  lake  of 
Gennesareth,  and  its  rock-hewn  tombs  still  remain,  and  are  the 
only  habitations  of  the  living.  The  Gergesenes  appear  to  have 
had  no  city,  and  to  have  been  a  remnant  of  the  nomad  tribes, 
whom  the  Israelites  found  in  occupation  of  the  Promised  Land. 
Their  name  occurs  (Josh.  xxiv.  llj  in  connection  witli  the 
Hivites,  &c. 

29  "Jesus."     (Auth.)     Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

31  Send  us  away.— By  change  of  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "Suffer  us 
to  go  away." 

32  Rushed  down  the  steep.— Auth.,  "  ran  violently  down  a 
steep  place,"  impairing  the  vividness  of  the  narrative  by  the 
omission  of  the  article,  and  by  the  periphrasis  employed  in  the 


ST.   MATTHEW— IX.  23 

rest  of  the  sentence.     The  Vulg.  led  to  this,  by  the  not  incorrect 
translation,  impetu  abiit  per  prceceps. 
34  From.— Auth.,  "  out  of,"  which  would  in  Gr.  be  eV,  not  airS. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

1  Crossed  over. — All  Engl,  versions  have  "  passed  over."  "To 
pass  "  is  used  in  Auth.,  wiih  or  without  a  preposition,  to  repre- 
sent eleven  different  Gr.  words  (for  an  example  see  ver.  9  of  this 
chapter) ;  and  "  to  cross  over  "  is  now  a  more  usual  phrase  than 
to  "  pass  over,"  for  going  across  the  water. 

2  Son. — M&vgin,  "  Gr.  child"  (reKvov).  This  word  may  probably 
have  been  preferred  by  our  Lord,  as  better  expressing  his  tender 
compassion  for  the  parent. 

Thy  sins  are  forgiven.— All  Engl,  versions  (except  Ehem.), 
"  thy  sins  be  forgiven ;"  which  might  possibly  now  be  mistaken 
for  an  intercessory  prayer.  That  "  be"  and  "are"  were  formerly 
interchangeable  in  a  declaratory  sentence  is  shown  in  the  prayer 
for  purity,  '*  unto  whom  all  hearts  be  open  ....  and  from 
whom  no  secrets  are  hid." 

6,  8  Power.  —  Margin,  "  or,  authority."  Consistently  with  the 
usual  rendering  of  the  Gr.,  i^ova-la,  the  word  in  the  mai'gin  sliould 
have  been  in  the  text.  Compare  John  v.  27.  There  have  been, 
however,  a  few  dejjartures  from  this  rule ;  and  the  cure  of  the 
sick  man  was  a  visible  exercise,  not  of  "  authority  "  only,  but  of 
"  power,"  and  therefore  imparted  to  the  word,  at  least  as  used 
by  the  multitudes  in  ver.  8,  the  stronger  meaning  of  "  power." 

9  The  place  cf  toll. — Auth.  (following  Tynd.),  "the  receipt  of 
custom."  The  Gr.  signifies  the  place  at  which  tolls  were  levied 
on  the  cargoes  landed  from  the  vessels  that  traded  on  the  lake. 
So  Wycl.,  "  tolbooth." 

13  I  desire. — Auth.  (with  Cranm.  and  Genev.),  "  I  will  have." 
Wycl.  and  Rhera.  (following  closely  the  Latin,  volo,  and  the  Gr., 
fleAco),  "I  will  mercy."  Tynd.,  with  a  paraphrase,  "  I  have  plea- 
sm-e  in  mercy." 

"  To  repentance."     (Auth.)     Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 


24  ST.    MATTHEW— IX. 

Ifi  Undressed  cloth.— An tli.,  following  Tynd.,  "  new."  as  in  the 
paralli4  passage  (Luke  v.  36),  "a  new  garment";  where,  how- 
ever, the  Gr.  is  different.  The  word  used  in  tliis  j)lace  is  applic- 
able to  a  piece  of  cloth  that  has  not  yet  undergone  the  final  pro- 
cess  of  bleaching,  which  takes  out  of  it  some  portion  of  its 
strength.  Viilg.,  i'>cmni  rudis.  Wycl.,  "  boistous  "  (the  same 
as  "  boisterous,"  "  rude,"  Chaucer). 

17  Wine-skins.— Auth.,  "bottles,"  with  Wycl..  Cranni.,  and  Rliem. 
Vnlg.,  7(fres  :  properly  vessels  made  of  hides  partly  tanned,  and 
liable,  when  old,  to  crack.     See  Josh.  ix.  4,  13. 

Is  spilled.~All  Engl,  versions,  "runneth  out,"  except  Wycl., 
"is  shed,"  following  Vulg.,  effimditur.  The  Gr.  is  a  A-erb 
passive. 

New  wine  into  fresh  wine-skins.— The  words  in  Gr.  are 

varied.     Auth.,  "  new  wine  into  new  bottles." 

20  The  border  of  his  garment- — All  Engl,  versions,  "the  hem." 
The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  chap,  xxiii.  5,  "  they  enlarge  the  borders 
of  their  garments  "  (Auth.).     Yulg.,  fimbriam. 

21  I  shall  be  made  whole.— Auth.,  "  I  shall  be  Avhole."  The 
Gr.  is  literally.  "  I  shall  be  saved,"  denoting  the  cure,  not  the 
state  of  soimd  liealth  which  will  ensue  thereon  ;  and  so  the  Auth. 
in  the  next  verse. 

23  The  flute-players.— All  Engl,  versions,  "  minstrels."  Vulg., 
tihlcines.  Hired  mourners,  plajnng  on  the  solemn  Phrygian  flute, 
were  usual  attendants  at  funerals  among  the  Greeks  and  Romans, 
and  among  the  Jews  also,  as  appears  from  Eccles.  xii.  5  ;  Jer. 
ix.  17. 

The  crowd  making  a  tumult.— Auth.,  with  Wycl.,  Cranm., 
and  Genev..  "  tlie  people  making  a  noise."  Tynd.,  '•  the  people 
raging."  The  Gr.  signifies  the  stir  and  confusion  of  a  crowd, 
rather  than  tlie  noisy  ejaculations  of  a  number  of  mourners.  So 
Vulg.,  tnrham  tumuUnantem. 

26  Went  forth.—  So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Auth.  following  Cranm., 
"went  abroad."  The  one  rendering  refers,  as  does  the  Gr.,  to 
the  going  out,  the  other  to  the  spreading,  of  the  report.  In  ver. 
31  "  spread  abroad  his  fame  "  (Auth.)  is  a  good  and  faithful  trans- 
lation of  tlie  Gr.  The  preposition,  with  which  the  verb  is  com- 
pounded, here  is  6k,  in  ver.  31  Sid. 

27  As  Jesus  passed  by. — Auth.,  as  Tj-nd.,  "  dej)arted."  Wycl., 
"passed,"  following  Vulg.,  transiente  hide  Jesu.  Gr.,  trapayovri. 
We  may  infer  from  this  word  that  Jesus  was  passing  by  in  the 


ST.    MATTHEW— X.  25 

road,  and  the  two  blind  men  hoard  that  it  was  He  ami  followed 
Him.  So,  in  Luke  xviii.  37,  it  is  related  that  a  blind  beggar, 
sitting  by  the  wayside,  heard  that  Jesus  of  Nazareth  was  passing 
by,  Gr.,  Trapepxfrai. 

Have  mercy  on  us,  thou  son  of  David.— The  Gr.  order, 
followed  here,  expresses,  better  than  the  inverted  order  of  Auth., 
the  eagerness  of  the  blind  men  in  crying  for  mei'cy.  See  Note 
on  chap.  xxvi.  22. 

30  Strictly  charged.— Auth.,  "  straitly,''  now  obsolete. 

31  Land.— Gr.,  yf;.  Auth.,  "  country,"  follomng  Rhem.  All  pre- 
vious versions,  "  land."  "  Country  "  is  used  to  denote  one's  own 
country,  x'^P"-  irarpis  (chap.  ii.  12,  xiii.  57) ;  a  foreign  country, 
Xoi/jo  (chap.  viii.  28,  Acts  xxvii.  27);  the  country  in  contradis. 
tinction  to  the  to^vn,  x«^P"  (Mark  v.  14) ;  but  "  land  "  more  nearly 
answers  to  the  more  general  word  yv. 

34.  By  the  prince  of  the  devils  .  ..  .—The  Gr.  order  is 
followed  by  Auth.  in  the  parallel  passage  of  Mark  iii.  22,  though 
not  here,  nor  in  Luke  xi.  15. 

35  Among  the  people. — Auth.     Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

36  Were  distressed.— For  Auth.,  "fainted,"  in  consequence  of  a 
change  in  the  Gr.  text. 


CHAPTER  X. 


3  The  changes  here  are  due  to  changes  in  the  Gr.  text.  The  inter- 
pi'etation  of  the  name  "  Canansean,"  given  in  the  margin,  is  from 
Luke  vi.  15  ;  "  Zealot,"  one  who  is  zealous  for  God's  glory. 

10  Wallet. — All  Engl,  versions,  "  scrip."  now  obsolete  in  this 
sense  ;  but  compare  Shakspeare,  As  You  Like  It,  iii.  2,  "  Let  us 
make  an  honourable  retreat,  if  not  with  bag  and  baggage,  yet 
with  scrip  and  scrippage." 

11  Search  out  —The  Gr.  is  more  than  "  inquire,"  Auth. ;  rather, 
''  find  out  by  inquiring  "  (e|€To<roTe). 

12  As  ye  enter. — i.e.,  in  the  act  of  entering  :  more  Aivid,  as  well 
as  more  exact,  than  Auth.,  "  when  ye  enter."     And  so  ver.  14. 


26  ST.    MATTHEW— XL 

16  Harmless. — The  Gr.  means  this,  or,  as  in  mai-gin,  "  simple," 
according  as  we  prefer  to  derive  it  from  Kfpas,  a  horn,  or  Kepawvixi, 
to  mingle. 

23  The  next. — Auth.,  "another."  Literally,  "the  other"  (tV 
a\\7]v).  Compare  "his  neighbour"  (Auth.,  "another"),  whore 
the  Gr.  is  Thv  'irepov,  and  Note  on  Rom.  xiii.  8,  "  he  that  loveth 
his  neighbour." 

Gone  through. — Auth.,  "  gone  over."  The  Gr.  is  literally, 
"  ye  shall  not  liave  accomplished." 

28  Be  not  afraid  of  .  .  .  fear  him,— Auth.,  "fear  .  .  . 
fear  him."  The  Gr.  is  slightly  varied  in  the  two  parts  of  the  sen- 
tence, but  without  any  perceptible  difference  of  meaning  (<|>o/3>j07Jt6 

dirj      .      .      .      (poPridT]Te). 

29  Not  one  of  them  shall. — Auth.,  "  one  of  them  shall  not," 
The  negative  is  brought  forward  to  throw  the  emphasis,  where  it 
is  in  the  Gr.,  on  "  one." 

38  He  that   doth  not  take  his   cross   and  follow. —  The 

negative  is  connected  with  both  "  take  "  and  "  follow  "  ;  but  in 
Auth.,  "  he  that  taketh  not  his  cross,  and  followeth,"  it  is  gram- 
matically connected  witli  the  former  verb  only,  as  if  the  meaning 
were,  "  he  that,  without  having  taken  his  cross,  followeth  me." 

39  Life, — Margin,  "  or,  soxiV  The  word  ^vxh  is  to  be  understood 
in  its  two  diiferent  senses  in  each  clause  of  the  sentence.  "  He 
that  findeth,  preserveth  his  natural  life,  shall  lose  his  heavenly, 
spiritual  life  (his  soul),  and  vice  versa  ;  an  example  of  the  double 
entendre,  like,  "  leave  the  dead  to  bury  their  dead,"  chap.  viii.  22. 


CHAPTER  XI. 


2  He  sent  by  his  disciples. — For  Auth.,  "he  sent  two  of  his 
disciples,"  by  change  in  Gi*.  text. 

4  Go  your  way. — Auth.,  "  go."  The  Gr.  iropeuoyuoi  commonly 
has  the  sense  of  "proceeding,"  "going  on  the  way."  and  is  not 
simply  "go,"  "be  gone,"  "depart."  Comp.  chap.  viii.  33,  where 
the  opposite  change  is  made. 


ST.   MATTHEW— XI.  27 

5  Have  good  tidings  preached  to  them. —Auth.,  "  have 
the  gospel  preached  to  them."  Gr.,  evayyf\l(ovTai  {eiiangeli- 
eontai).  The  Avord  as  used  by  our  Lord,  aud  understood  by  liis 
hearers,  would  not  have  the  special  sense  which  it  soon  after- 
wards acquired,  and  in  which  we  now  use  it,  "  arc  evangelised,"  or 
in  the  old  English  foi*m,  ''  have  the  gospel  preached  to  them." 
He  meant  by  it  simply  "  good  tidings ;  "  l)ut  by  liis  frequent  use 
of  it  and  tlie  cognate  noun,  He  commended  it  to  his  disciples  as 
the  plirase  by  whicli  for  all  time  the  joyful  message  was  to  be  de- 
signated, Avhich  He  brought  from  heaven,  and  whicli  they  received 
from  Him.  Tj'ud.  alone  has  in  this  place  ''  glad  tidings."  The 
word  as  used  by  the  evangelists  has  its  later  meaning,  as  iu 
Luke  ix.  6. 

6  None  occasion  of  stumbling.— No  ground  for  disbelief 
aud  refusal  of  my  glad  tidings.  Auth.,  "  shall  not  be  offended." 
There  was  here,  probably,  a  gentle  glance  at  the  doubts  expressed 
by  the  disciples  of  John. 

7  To  behold. — Auth.,  "  to  see."  The  G-r.,  eedaaa-eai  implies  that 
it  was  an  unusual  sight  which  they  went  out  to  look  upon.  In 
the  next  verse,  when  the  question  is  briefly  repeated,  the  shorter 
and  more  ordinary  word  <56?c,  "  to  see,"  is  used.  The  variation  is 
not  noticed  in  any  of  the  English  versions.  In  the  ninth  verse, 
according  to  the  amended  Gr.  text,  the  question  is  repeated  in  a 
still  shorter  form,  "  But  wherefore  went  ye  out  ?  " 

11  He  that  is  but  little.— Auth.,  "the  least."  Wycl.  and 
Tynd.,  "  he  that  is  less,"  after  Yulg.,  minor ;  Gr.,  6  fx.iKp6Tepos, 
"  he  that  is  comparatively  little,"  as  in  Mark  iv.  31.  The  Auth. 
may  have  been  iniluenced  by  Beza,  minimus. 

12  Men  of  violence. — Auth.,  '•  the  violent."  The  Gr.  is  a  noun, 
and  has  not  the  article.  Wycl..  correctly.  "  violent  men  ;  "  TjTid., 
by  a  paraphrase,  "  they  that  go  to  it  with  violence."  Auth.  follows 
Cranm.j  Genev.,  and  E-hem. 

14  If  ye  are  willing  to  receive  it.— AU  English  versions,  "  if 
ye  will  receive  it,"  which  does  not  express  the  decided  action 
of  volition  implied  by  the  Gr.  d  fleXere.     Yulg.,  si  vultis. 

The  word  to  be  supplied  after  "  receive  "  may  be  either  it  (the 
thing  which  I  am  about  to  say)  or  Imn  (John  the  Baptist).  The 
former  is  the  more  probable. 

Which  is  to  come. — All  previous  English  versions,  "  which 
was  for  to  come,"  considering  that  the  coming  of  John,  and  there- 
fore of  EHjah  iu  his  pex'son,  could  only  be  spoken  of  as  a  past 


28  ST.    MATTHEW— XI. 

event.  But  our  Lord  is  addressing  those  who  were  still  mentally 
looking  forward  from  the  Old  Testament  point  of  view,  and 
having  regard  for  them  he,  here  and  elsewhere,  treats  the 
coming  of  Elijah  as  a  future  event.     Yvlg.,  venturus  est. 

This  is  Elijah. — Nothing  would  be  gained  for  sense  or  em- 
phasis by  translating  literally  the  Gr.  avros.  "himself."  It  is 
otherwise  at  chap.  i.  21,  where  see  Note. 

16  Market-places. — So  Cranm.  and  Rhem..  with  Vulg.,  foro. 
Auth. has  the  familiar  abbreviation  ''markets."  Wycl.."chap}Tig." 

17  Ye  did  not  luoxirn. — Margin,  Gr.,  "  beat  the  breast."  One 
company  of  children  are  supposed  to  be  making  music,  first  in 
joyful  and  then  in  mournful  strains,  and  the  other  refusing  to  re- 
spond in  eitlier  case  with  appropriate  gestures  of  body. 

23  Shalt  thou  be.— For  Auth.,  "thou  shalt  be."  by  change  of 
Gr.  Text.  Hades. — The  j)lace  of  the  dead.  The  Gr.  Avord  is 
kept,  as  there  is  now  no  Englisli  equivalent  for  it :  "  hell " 
more  nearly  represents  Gehenna,  the  place  of  torment. 

25  I  thank  thee.— Margin,  "Or,  praise."  The  Gr.  is  properly, "  I 
make  acknowledgment  to  thee;"  whether  in  thanksgiving  or  ex- 
pression, is  to  be  inferred  in  each  place  from  the  context. 

Understanding.— This,  rather  than  "  prudent,"  Auth.,  is  the 
meaning  of  the  Gr.  ffweriis.  But  prxulens  being  the  rendering 
of  the  Yulg.  was  followed  by  all  English  versions,  except  Geuev.. 
which  has  "  men  of  understanding,"  following  Beza,  intelligen  - 
tibiis.  So  long  as  it  I'ctained  the  original  meaning,  which  was 
well  defined  by  Chaucer  when  he  said,  "  Prudence  is  goodly 
wisdom  in  the  knowledge  of  things,"  "  prudent "  was  a  good 
translation  of  the  Gr.,  but  ceased  to  be  so  when  it  became  nar- 
rowed to  sagacity  and  providence  concerning  mundane  affairs. 

26  It  was  well  pleasing  in  thy  sight.— Auth.,  "it  seemed 
good  in  thy  sight."'  The  Gr.  is  the  sacred  word,  so  often  used  of 
God's  "  good  pleasure  "  (eiiSoKia — eudoJiia)  as  at  Luke,  ii.  14,  &c. 
All  previous  versions  express  this  thought  by  "  it  j)leased  thee,"  or 
"  it  was  thy  good  pleasure."     Vulg.,  sic  fiiit  placit^im  ante  te. 

27  Willeth  to  reveal. — Auth.,  "  will  reveal."  as  at  vei'se  14. 


ST.    MATTHEW— XII.  29 


CHAPTER  XII. 


1  Cornfields. — Autli.,  "corn:"  but  covufielcls  iu  the  pai'allol 
passages  of  St.  Mark  aud  St.  Luke. 

An  hungred.  —  Compare  Note  on  chap.  iv.  2: 

6  One  greater. —  Margin,  "  Gr.,  a  greater  thint/."  The  Gr. 
text  being  altered  to  form  the  masculine  to  the  neuter,  from 
Hi'i^oov  to  ixf^Cov. 

7  I.  desire.— Auth.,  "  I  -will  have."     See  Note  on  chap.  ix.  13. 

10  Sabbath  day.  -Auth.,  "  Sabbath  days."  The  Gr.,  even  when 
plural  in  form,  is  singular  in  sense,  and  is  so  treated  in  Anth.,  as 
in  the  next  verse. 

12  To  do  good. — SoaU  versions  before  Auth.,  "  to  do  well,"  which 
is  not  the  same  iu  meaning,  nor  so  close  to  the  Gr. 

14  Took  counsel. — So  again  all  versions  before  Anth.,  which  has, 
*'  held  a  council."  The  Gr. ,  <rviJL0ov\tov,  generally  iu  the  New  Tes- 
tament means  •'  counsel,"  "  consultation,"  and  is  so  rendered  in 
Anth.  But  in  Acts  xxv.  12  it  is  the  "  coixncil,"  the  consulting 
body,  and  is  so  translated. 

15  Jesus  perceiving  it. — Anth.,  -when  Jesus  knew  it;"  sug- 
gesting, what  is  not  in  the  Gr.,  that  there  was  a  time  when  lie 
knew  it  not.  Previous  English  versions  agree  mth  Anth.  except 
Rhem.,  which  has,  "  knowing  it."  after  Vnlg.,  sciens.  The  Gr. 
denotes  perception,  not  knowledge  ;  the  contrary  is  the  case  at 
ver.  25. 

22  The  dumb  man. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  the  blind  aud 
dumb"  (Auth.l. 

29  The  strong  man. — ''Man"  is  in  italics,  not  being  in  the  Gr. 
which  is  literally  "the  strong  one  " — i.e.,  Satan. 

31  Every  sin. — So  Rhem. .following  Vnlg.,  owjiepeccrtfHJH.  Auth., 
with  all  other  English  versions,  "  all  manner  of  sin,"  which,  ho,v- 
ever  true  it  may  be,  is  not  expressed  by  the  Gr.  nua-a. 

The   Spirit. — Auth.,    "the   Holy    Ghost"   {holy  supplied    in 
italics).     Sec  Note  on  chap.  i.  18. 

32  Holy  Spirit.— Auth.,  -'Holy  Ghost."  The  change  is  conse- 
quent on  the  translation  of  Tlviv/xaros,  "'  Spirit,"  in  the  preceding 
verse. 


30  ST.    MATTHEW— XIII. 

35  Out  of  his  good  treasure. — By  change  of  Gr.  text  for  Auth., 
■•  out  of  the  good  treasure  of  his  heart." 

41  Shall  stand  up  in  the  judgment. — Auth..  "  shall  rise  in 
judgment."  Tlie  judgment  i.s  the  final  judgment.  The  word 
translated  "stand  up"  is  commonly  used  of  the  resurrection,  but 
is  also  applied  to  the  coming  forward  of  witnesses  at  a  trial,  as 
in  Mark  xiv.  57,  "  There  stood  up  certain,  and  bare  false  witness 
against  him." 

■il  A  greater  than — Here  again  the  adjective  in  the  Gr.  is  neuter, 
as  at  verse  6.  In  familiar  English  Ave  might  approach  near  to 
the  Gr.  tlius.  •'  more  than  a  Jonah  is  liere." 

42  The  ends  of  the  earth. — SoWycl..  following  Yidg.._/?jK'b (is. 
the  Gr.  being  simply  TrepaTcoi/.  Auth..  following  Tynd..  "the 
uttermost  parts." 

43  He. — Margin,  "Or,  is ;"   the  Gr.  for  Spirit  (TrreC^a)  being  neuter. 

Waterless  places.  —  All  English  versions.  "  dry  places ; " 
Yulg..  arida  loca.  which  does  not  make  it  plain  that  the  places 
are  such  as  the  psalmist  describes.  "  a  barren  and  dry  land,  where 
no  water  is."  It  is  not  the  drpiess,  biit  the  want  of  water, 
which  is  expressed  by  the  Gr.,  and  "  waterless."  though  like  the 
Gr.  &vuSpos.  an  umisual  word,  and  not  found  in  the  Bible,  was 
used  when  the  Bible  Avas  translated — e.g.,  by  Udal  the  divine,  and 
Wyat  the  poet. 

4fi  Seeking  to  speak. -So  Wycl.  and  Rliem.  Vulg..  qucerenies 
loqni  ci.  Auth..  after  Tynd.,  "  desiring."  The  Gr.  implies  the 
effort  made  to  get  near  liim.  rather  than  the  desire  that  pronijited 
it. 


CHAPTER   XIII. 


And  there  were  gathered  unto  him  .  .  .  Auth..  •■  And 
great  multitudes  Avere  gathered  togctlier  unto  him."  This  and 
other  transpositions  of  the  like  sort  liave  been  made,  because 
Tiliilc  they  represent  the  order  of  the  Gr..they  are  also  in  ac- 
corcknce  Avith  the  general  style  of  the  Auth..  Avhicli  in  this  re- 
sijoct  is  modelled  on  the  Gr. — e.cj..  ver.-^e  1,  "  went  Jesus,"  not 


ST.    MATTHEW— XIII.  31 

"Jesns  went"  (according  to  modem  English  idiom),  as  tlie 
German  jn-ose  style  in  a  much  greater  degree  admits  what  seems 
to  ns  an  illogical  and  inverted  order,  in  secular  literature  as  well 
as  in  the  version  of  the  Scriptures. 

All  the  multitude.— Auth.,  "the  whole  multitude,"  which 
regards  the  multitude  as  a  unit,  and  would  in  Gr.  be  6  iras  oxf<os, 
rather  than  irds  6  ox^os. 

2  Beach.— Auth..  following  Tynd.,  "shore."  The  Gr.  denotes 
that  it  was  sandy  or  pebbly  (Hesychius),  i,e.,  a  beach  or  strand. 
Conip.  Acts  xxvii.  39.  "It  is  the  exact  word  for  the  exact  spot 
at  wJiich  the  event  referred  to  took  place,  and  it  suits  no  other  spot 
on  the  whole  lake."     (Farrar,  Gontemp.  Review,  March,  1882.) 

3  The  sower.— Auth..  "  a  sower."  Gr.,  6  airdpuv.  Tlie  definite 
article,  though  not  required  by  English  idiom,  is  not  at  variance 
with  it,  and  enlivens  the  discourse,  besides  reminding  us  that  the 
man  who  is  sowmg  represents  the  one  great  spiritual  sower. 

5  The  rocky  places. — All  English  versions,  "  stony,"  except 
Rhem.,  "rocky,"  following  Yvlg.,  petrosa. 

7  The  thorns  grew  up.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "sprung  up," 
which  implies  a  more  rapid  growth  than  the  Gr. 

8  Yielded.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "brought  forth."  The  Gr.  is 
literally  "  gave,"  as  WycL,  and  Vulg.,  dabant. 

12  Abundance.— The  Gr.  is  here  over-translated  by  Auth.,  "  more 
abundance ;  "  in  chap.  xxv.  29  "  more  "  is  omitted. 

14  Unto  them.  —  For  Auth.  "  in  tlieni,"  in  consequence  of  the 
omission  of  the  preposition  in  the  Gr.  text. 

15  And  should  turn  again.— Auth. ."should  be  converted."  with 
Wycl.  Cranm.  and  Rhem,  following  Vulg.,  convertantnr.  Ty^ld., 
"  should  tvu-n  ;  "  Genev.,  "  should  return  ;  "  Beza,  coavertant. 
The  Gr.  is  einaTp(^w(n  in  the  active  A'oice,  and  where  tliere  is  no 
reference  to  change  of  mind,  it  is  commonly  treated  in  Auth. 
as  a  verb  neuter,  "  to  return  ;  "  thus  chap.  xii.  44,  "  I  will  return 
into  my  house."  In  the  passage  quoted  here  from  Isaiah  vi.  10 
the  Auth.  has  the  unusual  verb  neuter,  "  convert ;  "  "  lest  they 
should  understand  and  convert."  The  passive  sense.  "  be  con- 
verted," appearing  in  Vulg.,  and  thence  adopted  in  the  Auth.. 
testifies  to  the  unwillingness  which  has  long  prevailed  in  tlie 
Western  Church  to  recognise  the  "  conversion,"  or  turning  or 
return  to  God.  as  in  any  degree  the  spontaneous  act  of  the  sinner 
himself.      Tlie  doctrine  implied  in  the  prayer,  "  Turn  thou  us,  O 


32  ST.    MAITHEW— XIII. 

Lord,  and  we  shall  be  turned  "  (Lam.  v.  21),  was  enlarged  upou, 
to  the  neglect  of  the  Apostolic  precept,  "  Draw  nigh  to  God, 
and  he  will  draw  nigh  to  you  "  (James  iv.  8),  and  the  great  ex- 
ample of  St.  Paid's  conversion  threw  into  the  shade  tliat  other 
side  of  our  Lord's  teaching  which  He  himself  put  before  us  in 
(the  parable  of  the  returning  prodigal. 

18  Hear  then  ye. — Avith.,  ''  Hear  ye  therefore."  The  transpo- 
sition is  made  in  order  to  show  that  "  ye  "  is  emphatic,  as  it  is  in 
the  Gr.,  following  on  what  has  been  said  in  the  last  verse. 

19  The  evil  one. — As  in  tlie  Lord's  Prayer.  (See  Note  on 
cliap.  vi.  13.)  Auth., "  with  Rhem.,  the  wicked  one ;"  Gr..  o  iroutjpSs. 
There  is  much  variety  in  the  earlier  versions.  The  Vulg.  has 
venit  malus ;  Wycl.,  "  the  evil  spirit ;  "  Tynd.  and  Oranm. 
(strangely  I,  "  the  evil  man  ;  "  Genev.,  "  that  evil  one."  This  use 
of  mains  in  the  Yulg.  is  an  indication  that  the  word  was  meant 
to  have  a  personal  sense  in  the  petition  "  Libera  nos  amalo." 

Snatcheth  away. — This  expresses  the  swiftness  and  violence 
of  the  bird  of  prey  better  tluin  Auth.,  Avith  Tynd.,  Cranm.,  and 
Genev.,  "  catchetli  away."     Vulg.,  rapit. 

He  that  was  sown. — Not  as  Auth.,  "  he  that  received  seed." 
Gr.  o  o-TTOfJeis.  Tlie  mistranslation  in  Auth.,  whieh  first  appears 
in  Cranm.  (verse  2U).  was  prompted  by  tlie  desire  to  make  the 
parable  and  its  interpretation  in  aU  points  agree  together. 

21  He  stumbleth.— See  Note  on  verse  5. 

23  Verily. — TJiis  word  represents  the  almost  imtranslatable  Gr.  par- 
ticle Stj  (de)  which  emphasizes  the  thought  or  feeling  of  the  sen- 
tence in  which  it  is  used.  Wycl..  following  Vulg.,  expres.sed  it  Ity 
"truly:"  Auth.,  •'also."  The  intermediate  versions  omit  it 
altogether.     See  Note  ou  Acts  xiii.  2. 

32  Less  than  all. —  Autli.,  "  the  least  of  all,"  and  so  the  previous 
versions.  Tlie  adjective  in  the  Gr.  is  '"less."  as  at  chap.  xi.  11., 
where  sec  Note.  For  the  same  reason  greater  than  is  prefer- 
able to  Auth..  '•  the  greatest."  In  neither  case  are  the  words  to 
be  pressed  hi  their  literal  sense  ;  but  the  mustard-seed  was  with 
the  Jews  a  type  of  things  extremely  small,  while  the  tree  which 
sprmig  from  it  attained  such  a  size  that  a  branch  of  it  formed 
tlie  covering  of  a  hut,  and  the  stem  was  so  strong  that  a  man 
might  climb  it.     (Alford.  Note.) 

33  All  leavened. — So  Wycl.  and  Tj-nd.  Auth.,  following  Ehem., 
'•  the  whole  was  leavened."     The  article  is  not  in  the  Gr. 


ST.    MATTHEW— XIII.  33 

35  Hidden. — Auth.,  "kept  secret."  The  Gr.  word  wliieh  is  of 
frequent  occurrence,  is  usually  to  "  hide  "  in  Auth.,  and  is  so  ren- 
dered here  in  Wycl.  and  Rliem. 

36  He  left. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "sent  away,"  a  meauiiigf  rarely 
given  to  the  Gr.  word  in  Auth.,  which  more  often  translates  it  by 
"leave,"  as  at  chap.  iv.  11,  "  the  devil  leaveth  him."  A  different 
word  is  rightly  rendered  "send  away"  in  chap.  xiv.  24. 

37 — 39  In  these  verses  one  characteristic  feature  of  St.  Matthew's 
style,  the  superabundant  use  of  connecting  particles  (5e  and  Kai) 
has  been  retained,  though  at  some  loss  to  the  buoyancy  and 
terseness  of  the  passage  as  it  appears  in  Auth. 

38  The  world. —  Tliree  Gr.  words  are  represented  by  this — (1) 
d  k6(thos,  "  cosmos  "  (as  hei'e),  which  is  in  its  widest  sense  the 
universe,  but  especially  "  the  world  "  of  men,  to  which  it  is  often 
apj)lied  exclusively,  as  in  John  xii.  19,  "  the  world  is  gone  after 
him;"  (2)  6  alwv,  "aion, "  literally  explained  in  the  mar. 
ginal  note,  "  Or,  oge,"  denoting  the  period  appointed  by  God,  and 
knoAvn  to  Him  only,  during  which  the  present  or  any  other  order 
of  things  is  to  continue.  This  meaning  it  has  in  verses  39, 
40,  49 ;  (3)  ^  olKovfievrj ,  the  Roman  Empire,  as  in  Luke  ii.  1, 
where  see  Note. 

The  good  seed,  these  are  .  .  . — The  Auth.,  with  Geuev. 
only,  omits  "  these."  Tlie  word,  however,  has  its  significance, 
"  the  good  seed,  these  choice  ones,  are  the  sons  of  the  kingdom." 

45  A  man  that  is  a  merchant. — Auth.,  "  a  merchant  man." 
In  the  Gr.,  "  a  man,"  from  its  position,  has  a  slight  emphasis,  re- 
minding us  that  He  who  spoke  was  himself  more  than  man. 

Goodly. — This  elegant  correction  for  "  good  "  was  adopted  by 
Auth.  from  Crauni.  Other  English  versions  follow  Yidg.,  &onas. 
Tlie  Gr.  is  kukovs. 

55  Joseph.— Auth.,  "  Joses."     See  Note  on  chap.  i.  2. 

57  They  were  offended  in  him.— Here  the  ordinary  rendering 
of  Auth.  has  been  retainotl.  and  the  literal  meaning,  being  too 
harsh  for  the  text,  is  noticed  in  the  margin. 


34  ST.    MATTHEW— XIV 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

1  The  report  concerning  Jesus.  —  AU  English  versious 
"the  fame  of  Jesus,"  following  Vulg., /«;/!-« w.  The  Gr.  axoi^v 
may  be  rendered  "  that  which  was  heard,"  and  is  used  in  that 
sense  several  times  in  the  New  Testament,  as  in  John  xii.  38, 
"  Who  hath  believed  our  report  "  (Auth). 

2  These  powers  work  in  him. — ^Auth.  (alone),  "  mighty  works 
do  show  forth  themselves  in  him."  Compare  Note  on  chap.  vii.  22. 
The  word  here  or  elsewhere  rendered  in  Auth.,  "  mighty  works" 
has  its  usual  and  j)roper  sense,  "  powers  ;  "  and  the  paraphrase 
"  do  show  forth  themselves  "  for  "  work"  is  unnecessary. 

These  powers. — Gr.,  "  the  powers,"  i.e.,  "  these  of  which  we 
see  the  manifestation." 

6  Came. — So  Tynd. :  Auth.,  "  was  kept,"  with  Cranm.  and  Geuev. 
The  Gr.  is  literally  '•  on  tlie  coming  to  pass  of  the  birthday." 
Compare  a  similar  use  of  the  word  in  Acts  xix.  38 ;  also  Luke 
xxiv.  21. 

In  the  midst. — So  Wycl.  af ter  Vulg. :  Auth. ^vithTyud.,  "before 
them."  The  Gr.  probably  denotes  the  relative  positions-  of  the 
dancer  and  the  spectators. 

8  Being  put  forward. — Tliis  is  the  literal  meaning  of  the  Gr., 
and  also  more  gn'.pliic  than  that  of  the  English  version,  "being 
befoi'e  instructed,"  foUoAving  Yvlg.  lircBVionita.  The  same  word 
is  used  in  Acts  xix.  33. 

A  charger. — Tliis  word,  though  obsolete  in  the  sense  of  "  a 
dish "  or  "  platter,"  has  been  retained,  partly  because  of  its 
frequent  occurrence  in  Niim.  chap,  vii.,  aud  partly  because  no 
other  word  presented  itself  which  would  not  seem  below  tlie 
solemnity  of  the  occasion. 

9  For  the  sake  of  his  oaths. —  Auth.,  "for  his  oath's  sake." 
Gr.  is  in  the  plural,  tliougli  singular  in  ver.  8.  All  English 
versions  apparently,  with  the  Vulg.,  have  the  singular. 

12  The  corpse. — Auth.,  "  the  body;  "the  Gr.,  by  change  of  reading 
(irrihixa  for  ffwixa),  being  the  same  as  in  the  parallel  passage  of 
Mark  \\.  29,  wlicre  it  is  "  corpse  "  iu  Auth, 

i  1  He  had  CGm.pa,ssion.  Tlierc  is  here  an  imusual  and  interest- 
ing variety  in  llio  English  versions.  Wycl.,  "he  had  ruth;" 
Tynd.,  "his  heart  did  melt  ;"  Cranm.,   "he  was  moved  with 


ST.   MATTHEW— XIV.  35 

mercy ;  "  Geuev.,  "  lie  was  moved  with  compassion : "  and  so 
Autli. ;  Rliem.,  "  he  pitied  them,"  following  Yulg.  misertus  est. 

20  They  took  up  that  v/hich  remained  over  of  the  brclcen 
pieces — i.e.,  the  remainder  of  the  pieces  which  he  had  broken. 
This  is  shown  in  the  Gr.  by  the  noun  in  this  verse,  K\d(xixa,  whicli 
is  cognate  to  the  verb  in  tlie  jn'ocediiig-,  /cAatras.  But  in  Auth.  "the 
fragments  that  remained,"  the  connection  is  obscured  by  the 
change  from  "  brake  "  to  fragments,"  and  the  suggestion  arises 
that  the  "  fragments  "  were  the  "  crumbs  "  left  by  the  multitude 
unconsumed.  Thus  it  appears  that  the  Lord  had  provided 
portions  for  a  larger  number  of  persons  than  those  who  were  to 
partake  of  the  meal.  Wycl.  has  "  they  took  the  reliefs  (relics) 
of  broken  gobbets  ;  "  Tynd.,  "  the  gobbets  that  remauied."  See 
Note  on  John  \\.  12. 

24  Distressed. — Auth.  ^^^th  Tynd.,  ''tossed;  "  Wycl.  "  .shogged  '* 
(■i.e.,  "  jogged,"  or  "  tossed.")  The  Gr.,  in  its  ordinary  meaning,  is 
"tormented,"  as  at  cliaj).  viii.  6;  but  compai-e  Mark  vi.  48,  where 
it  is  said  of  rowers  struggling  against  the  wind. 

25  Came. — For  Auth.,  "  went,"  by  change  in  the  Gr.  text. 

26  An  apparition. — Auth.,  "  a  spirit,"  following  Tynd.;  Rheni., 
"  a  gliost."  The  Gr.  occurs  again  only  in  Mark  vi.  49.  From 
it  is  derived  the  English  "  phantom,"  which  is  the  rendering  of 
Wycl.  here.  In  the  Vulg.  it  is  unaltered,  and  -\vi-itten  phantasma, 
which,  as  well  as  "  apparition,"  is  a  Shakspeariau  word. 

31  They  came  to  the  land,  unto  Gennesaret. — By  change  of 
Gr.  test  for  Auth.  "  to  the  land  of  Gennesaret.  Crossed  over. 
See  note  on  ix.  1. 

35  Knew  him. — Auth.,  "  had  knowledge  of  him,"  an  ambiguous 
rendering  in  this  place,  as  it  miglit  mean  "  when  they  were  in- 
formed of  his  arrival."  The  Gr.  is  projierly  "  they  recognised 
him,"  as  at  Acts  iv.  13,  "  they  took  knowledge  of  him."    (Auth.) 


36  ST.    MATTHEW— XV. 

CHAPTER  XY. 

I  There  came  to  Jesus  from  Jerusalem  Pharisees  and 
Scribes.— By  change  of  Gr.  text  for  Autli.,  "  Scribes  aud 
Pharisees  which  were  from  Jerasalcm." 

3  Because  of  your  tradition.— Auth..  "by  your  traditiou," 
giving  to  the  Gr.  j)reposition  Sid  with  the  accusative  the  seuse 
which  it  has  ouly  with  the  genitive.  The  sense  is,  that  they 
broke  God's  commandments  on  accoimt  of  their  tradition,  to 
which  they  gave  greater  heed. 

4  Speaketh  evil  of.— Auth.  "  curseth,"  which  is  the  translation 
of  another  word. 

Let  him  die  the  death.— The  Margin,  "Or  snrcly  die," 
gives  the  meaning  of  this  peremj)tory  Hebraic  phrase. 

5  This  verse  has  been  relieved  of  the  obscurity  in  Avhicli  it  is  involved 
by  the  rendering  aud  interpretation  of  the  Auth. :  (1)  by  a  dif- 
ferent arrangeniont  of  the  first  part  of  the  sentence ;  (2)  by  the 
insertion  in  italics  of  the  words  to  God,  "  is  given  to  God,"  these 
Avords  being  supplied  from  the  parallel  passage  of  St.  Mark,  vii. 
11,  12,  where  the  word  is  not,  as  hei'e,  the  Gr.  SUpov,  "a  gift,"  but 
the  Hebrew  horhan,  mcauing  that  which  is  dedicated  to  God's 
service ;  (3)  by  a  change  in  the  Gr.  text  of  ver.  6,  giving  this  as 
the  meaning,  '"  he  shall  not  honour  his  father,"  instead  of  "  and 
honour  not  his  father  or  his  mother  ;  he  shall  be  free." 

The  pretence  of  the  son  is,  that  what  he  might  have  given  for  the 
bonetit  of  his  parents  he  has  already  dedicated  to  God's  ser- 
vice ;  aud  tlie  Pharisees  said,  any  one  alleging  such  a  prior 
dedication  should  be  excused  from  obser-sauce  of  the  fifth  com- 
maiulmeut — he  should  not  lionoi;r  his  father.  Thus  for  tlie  sake 
of  their  traditiou  they  allowed  the  law  of  God  to  be  set  aside. 

8  Part  of  this  verse  is  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

9  The  precepts. — So  Tynd. ;  Auth.,  '•  commandments,"  whicli 
is  the  rendering  in  ver.  6  of  a  different  word.  The  seuse  is 
"  teaching  as  their  cardinal  rules  mere  human  precepts,  instead 
of  the  commandments  of  God." 

II  Proceedeth. — Aiith.,  "  comcth ; "  the  same  Gr.  in  ver.  17  is 
'■  proceed"  (Auth.) ;  and  again  in  ver.  19  Autli.  has  "  proceed" 
for  a  different  Gr.  Avord. 

14  Blind  guides.  —  The  Gr.  means  specially  oue  who  guides 
another  on  his  way,  and  is  so  rendered  in  Rhem.  The  Yulg.  has 
duces,  whence  Tynd.  and  Auth.  "  leaders," 


ST.    MATTHEW—XYI.  37 

A  pit. — Autli.,  "  the  ditch,"  biitforthe  same  Gr.  in  chap.  xii.  11, 

Auth.  has  "  pit." 

17  Perceive. — So  Tynd. :  Auth.  following  Wyol.,  "understand"; 
■which  has  been  properly  used  in  the  preceding  verse  as  the 
rendering  of  another  word. 

19  Railings. — All  English  ATrsions  "  blasphemies,"  except  Genev., 
"  slanders."  Tlie  Gr.  is  literally  "  blasphemies,"  which  is  indeed 
the  Gr.  word  in  Englisli  form  :  but  the  word  in  English  is  limited 
to  reviling  against  God,  whereas  the  Gr.  may  have  for  its  object 
God  or  man.  Compare  Titus  iii.  2,  "  speak  evil  of  no  man," 
where  the  Gr.  is  "  blaspheme."  In  this  place,  from  its  following 
on  "  false  witness,"  the  word  appears  to  have  man,  not  God,  for 
its  object. 

27  For  even  the  dogs. — Even  these,  an  inferior  race,  are  per- 
mitted to  eat,  &c.  Auth.,  "yet  the  dogs,"  not exj)ressing the  Gr. 
Kai. 

28  Was  healed. — So  Wycl. :  Auth.,  with  Tynd., "  was  made  whole," 
which  represents  another  Gr.  word. 

31  The  dumb  speaking.— Is  easier  English,  and  more  true  to  the 
Gr.  than  Aiith.,  "  the  dumb  to  si^eak."  Wycl.  alone  has  tlie  par- 
ticipial rendering.     Tjiid.,  "  the  dumb  speak  "  (without  "  to.") 

32  I  would  represents  a  separate  word,  fle'Aw,  which  is  not  dis- 
tinctly done  by  Auth.,  "  I  will." 

33  Isoaves. — Auth.,  "bread."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  in  this  verse 
and  in  the  next. 

37  That  which  remained  over. — Auth..  "that  was  left."  The 
Gr.  is  the  same  as  at  chap.  xiv.  20. 


CHAPTER  XYI. 


Ye  know  how. — Auth.,  "Te  can,"  with  Wycl.  and  Tynd. 
Rliem.,  "  Ye  have  skill."  The  change  iu  itself  is  immaterial,  Ijut 
is  requii'ed  by  faithfidness  to  the  Gr. 

But  ye  cannot. —  The  Gr.  may  be  interrogative,   and  is  so 


38  ST.    MATTHEW— XYI. 

iaken  in  Auth. ;  but  the  indicative  is  preferable  in  a  case  wbere 
the  context  supplies  no  reason  against  it. 

5  The  disciples  came  to  the  other  side,  and  forgot  to 
take  bread.— Tills,  the  true  rendering  of  the  Gr.,  seems  not  to 
make  it  clear  whether  their  forgetting  was  before  or  after  they 
came  to  the  other  side,  though  the  context  may  enable  us  to  put 
the  right  meaning  on  it — viz.,  that  it  was  before,  not  after.  The 
less  exact,  but  clearer  rendering  of  the  Auth., "  When  the  disciples 
came  .  .  .  they  had  forgotten,"  requires  to  be  supplemented 
thus :  "  When  they  arrived,  they  became  aivare  that  they  had  for- 
gotten.    See  the  j)arallol  x^assage  in  Mark  viii.  14. 

7  We  took  no  bread. — The  words  "  it  is  because  "  (Auth.)  are 
omitted,  and  the  Gr.  'on,  which  they  represent,  is  merely 
introductory  of  the  saying  which  follows  it,  and  therefore 
according  to  the  rule  laid  down  in  Note  on  chap.  ii.  23,  is  not 
translated.  There  is,  however,  room  for  doubt  whether  such 
is  the  use  of  the  Gr.  particle  ui  this  i^lace,  and  consequently 
the  words  omitted  in  the  text  are  set  in  the  margin.  Even  if  they 
are  omitted,  the  tliought  which  tliey  express  must  have  been  the 
motive  of  the  abrupt  exclamation,  '"  We  took  no  bread" — i.e.,  It 
is  because  we  brought  no  bread  with  us  that  he  says  this. 

8  Ye  have.— For  Auth.,  "  ye  have  brought,"  by  change  of  Gr. 
text. 

11  But  beware. — For  Auth.,  "  that  ye  should  bewai-e,"  by  change 
of  Gr.  text.  According  to  this  reading  our  Lord  repeats  his  com- 
mand, and  the  disciples  now  perceive  the  meaning  of  it. 

13  Who  do  men  say  .  .  .  ? — For  the  iiugrammatical  English 
"  whom  do  men  say  that  I  the  son  of  man  am  ?  "  which  stands  in 
all  Engl,  versions,  except  Wycl.,  who  has  "whom  say  men  to  be 
man's  son  ?  "  thus  leading  those  who  followed  him  to  a  false 
English  construction,  by  his  adoi^tion  of  a  good  Latin  con- 
struction from  Yiilg.,  quevi  clicunt  homines  esse  Filium  hominis. 

15  Who  say  ye  ? — "  Te  "  is  emphatic,  as  it  stands,  and  still  more 
in  the  Gr.,  where  it  begins  the  sentence;  as  if  it  were,  "  And  ye, 

who  say  ye,"  &c. 

18  And  I  also  say  nnto  thee.— Axith.,  "and  I  say  also."  This 
change  of  order,  besides  being  required  by  the  Gr.,  is  of  value 
as  throwing  the  stress  on  "I"  preceding.  ''Thou  hast  said 
who  I  am ;  and  I  in  return  teU  thee  thy  new  name,  and  thy  office 
and  callino-." 


ST.   MATTHEW— XVI.  39 

The  marginal  note  sliows  the  origin  and  significance  of  tlie  name; 
"  Then  art  Petros,  Peter,  the  rock ;  and  on  this  Petra,  i-ock,  I 
will  build  my  Church."  This  is  not  the  place  for  even  touching 
on  the  controversy  which  ever  since  the  Reformation  has  been 
maintained  about  these  words. 

22  Be  it  far  from  thee,  Lord. — The  two  Gr.  words  ("  merciful 
to  thee  ")  which  ai-e  thus  rendered,  are  said  to  represent  a  brief 
form  of  deprecation  in  use  among-  the  Jews.  Compare  1  Mace, 
ii.  21,  and  Exod.  xxxii.  12  (LXX.  version). 

23  Thou  art  a  stviinbling-block  unto  nxe. — i.e.,  Thou  puttest 
in  my  way,  as  tliougli  thou  wert  Satan  himself,  a  temptation 
to  sin.     Auth.,  "  an  oifence." 

Thou  miudest  not. — "  Thy  mind  is  not  set  upon  the  things  of 
God."  For  a  similar  use  of  the  Gr.  (ppoue7v,  compare  Phil.  iii.  19. 
"  Who  mind  earthly  things  "  (Auth.).  All  English  versions  have 
''  thou  savourest,"  which  is  now  certainly  an  inappropriate  ren- 
dei'ing  of  the  Gr.,  and  never  can  have  been  quite  suitable,  being 
a  translation  of  the  Yulg.,  sapis,  one  of  the  senses  of  which  was 
expressed  in  French  by  savourer,  another  by  savoir,  according  as 
the  bodily  sense  or  the  mental  percei>tion  was  to  be  signified ; 
and  thus  came  into  our  language  the  two  words,  now  widely 
different  in  meaning,  "  savour  "  and  "  sapient,"  both  from  the 
same  root,  one  direct  from  the  Latin,  the  other  through  the 
French. 

24,  25  Would  come  .  .  .  would  save. — Compare  chap.  xv. 
32  and  Note  there. 

26  Life. — All  English  versions  "  soul."  The  Gi'-,  being  the  same 
{'^"X'h,  "  psyche  ")  throughout  these  two  verses,  must  be  translated 
in  the  same  way,  though  it  is  used  in  two  different  senses,  which 
we  may  distinguish  mentally  as  we  read,  the  lower  bodily  life,  and 
the  higher  spiritual  life.  Comj^are  chap.  x.  39;  also  Note  on 
chap.  viii.  22,  '•  Let  the  dead  bury  their  dead.  " 

Forfeit. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  lose,"  The  Genev.  version 
showed  that  the  Gr.  meant  more  than  this  ;  and  it  gave  the  mean- 
ing well,  though  too  much  in  paraphrase,  by  "  be  condemned  to 
pay  his  soid."  Rhem.,  "sustain  damage  of  his  soul,"  following 
Vulg.,  datrimentimi  patiatur. 

27  His  deeds. — Literally,  as  the  Margin  shows,  his  doing.  Auth., 
"  his  works,"  which  is  the  usual  translation   of    another  word 

(cpya). 


40  ST.    MATTHEW— XVII. 

CHAPTER  XYII. 

2  His  garments  became. — So  Rhem.  Auth.,  "his  raiment 
was  ;  "  but  "  became  "  at  Mark  ix.  3.  The  attii'e  of  his  ordinary 
life  was  changed  in  liriofhtness. 

8  Lifting  up  their  eyes  they  saw. — The  participial  con- 
struction of  the  Gr.  is  lighter  and  more  vivid  than  that  of  Auth., 
following  Tynd.,  "When  they  had  lifted  up  their  eyes,  they  saw." 

No  one. — "  One  "  has  often,  as  here,  taken  the  place  of  "  man  " 
(Auth.)  not  only  as  being  more  close  to  the  Gr.,  but  because  there 
is  often  an  advantage  in  the  indefiuiteness  which  is  thus  preserved, 
the  thoughts  being  not  limited  to  sex  or  age  or  even  to  human 
beings. 

11  Elijah  indeed  cometh. — ''First"  is  omitted  by  change  in 
Gr.  text.  "  Traly  "  (Auth.)  is  used  for  a  stronger  Gr.,  or  rather 
Heb.  word  Amen.  Cometh,  not  the  future,  "  shall  come  " 
(Auth.),  is  required  by  the  Gr. 

14  A  man. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  a  certain  man."  Tliis  cor- 
rection has  been  often  made;  and,  slight  as  it  may  .seem,  it  is 
worth  while  once  for  all  to  notice  it.  The  Gr.  ny,  in  Latin 
aliquis,  may  in  many  places  be  conveniently  rendered  by  "  a 
certain  man,"  which,  though  not  an  exact,  has  become  a  conven- 
tional and  well-understood  expression ;  but  there  can  l)e  no 
reason  for  having  i-ecourse  to  it  in  passages  like  this,  in  wliicli 
there  is  no  such  indefinite  word  to  be  translated. 

15  Epileptic. — Auth..  "lunatic."  The  Gr.  occurs  in  the  New 
Testament  only  in  this  place  and  chap.  iv.  23.  It  was  a  general 
term  for  disorder  of  the  mind,  implying,  like  "  Imiatic,"  that  the 
derangement  was  due  to  hmar  influence,  that  the  sufferer  was 
"moonstruck."  In  this  particular  case  the  woi'd  appears  to  de- 
signate what  is  uowcaUed  epilepsy.  Tyn dale's  word  is  "frantic." 
The  other  Englisli  versions,  "  lunatic." 

17  Bear  with.  —  More  idiomatic  English,  and  a  closer  reading 
of  the  Gr.,  than  "  si;fBer,"  which  all  the  versions  have,  following 
Vulg.,  iisque  quo  2^atiar  vos. 

20  Because  of  your  little  faith. — Auth.,  "  because  of  your 
unbelief."  The  word  now  brought  into  the  Gr.  text  is  not  else- 
where found  in  the  New  Testament ;  but  the  adjective  connected 
with  it  occurs  several  times,  and  is  translated  "  of  little  faith" 
(Auth.),  as  in  Matt.  vi.  30 

25  Spake  first  to  him.— So    Tynd.  and    Genev.      The  Yulg. 


ST.    MATTHEW— XVIII.  41 

prcevenit  was  translated  by  Wycl.,  "came  before  him,"  but  wa.s 
afterwards  itself  adopted  into  English,  in  the  form  here  nsed 
by  Cranm.,  Rhem.,  and  Auth.,  "prevented."  It  has,  hoM^ever. 
in  a  later  age,  acquired  another,  almost  a  contrary  sense,  and 
thus  in  the  Bible  and  prayer-book  has  become  the  cause  of 
embarrassment  to  the  unlearned.  To  anticijpate  is  in  some 
respects  an  equivalent,  but  is  open  to  some  objections ;  and 
Tyndale's  phrase  best  meets  the  present  case.  When  Peter  came 
into  the  house  to  report  the  matter  to  his  Master,  Jesus  was 
beforehand  with  Iiim,  and  "  spake  first "  to  him,  and  by  what  He 
said  at  once  showed  his  omniscience,  and  asserted  his  divine 
sonshii?, 

The  kings  of  the  earth,  from  whom  .  .  .—This,  the  order 
of  the  Greek,  brings  out  the  point  of  the  question  more  cleai'ly 
than  does  the  Auth.,  "  of  whom  do  the  kings  of  the  earth,"  &c. 
The  comparison  implied,  though  not  expressed,  is  between  eartlily 
kings  and  their  sons  on  the  one  side,  and  God  and  His  Son  on 
the  other. 

27  A  shekel. — Which  was  payment  for  two  persons,  being  equal 
to  four  drachmas.  The  Gr.  name  for  the  coin  of  that  value  was 
stater. 


CHAPTER   XVm. 


1  In  that  hour. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following  Vulg.,  and 
taking  the  Gr.  &pa,  hora,  in  its  narrower  sense  of  "  hour,"  In 
its  larger  sense,  "  season,"  it  is  here  taken  by  Au.th.,  following 
Tynd.,  and  rendei'ed  "  at  the  same  time."  But  though  it  occurs 
more  than  a  hundred  times  in  the  New  Testament,  it  is  not  more 
than  a  dozen  times  translated  otherwise  than  "  hour." 

Greatest. — Margin,  Gr.  greater ;  "  comparatively  great,  greater 
than  others,  and  so  greatest  of  aU.  The  comparative  thus  be- 
comes a  superlative. 

3  Turn.— See  note  on  chap.  xiii.  15. 

6  It  is  profitable  for  him.— Auth.,  "it  were  better  for  liim." 
The  Gr.  is  in  the  present  tense.  The  verb  is  always  in  Autli. 
rendered  "  it  is  pi'ofitable,"  or  "  it  is  expedient,"  except  here  and 
in  chap.  xix.  10,  "  it  is  not  good  to  marry."     The  meaning,  though 


42  ST.   MATTHEW— XVIII. 

expressed,  like  some  otlier  sayings  of  our  Lord,  in  the  langTiasfo 
of  hyperbole,  is  very  plain.  For  sucli  a  man  the  worst  punish, 
ment  of  human  vengeance  is  a  boon,  in  comparison  to  tlie  retri- 
bution which  awaits  him  at  the  hands  of  God. 

8  Eternal. — For  Auth.,  "everlasting,"  and  so  wherever  the  Gr.  is 

aidvios,  aioyiios, 

9  The  hell  of  Sre.— See  Note  on  chap.  v.  22. 

12  Unto  the  mountains. — Auth.,  "  into."  The  preposition  in 
Gr.  is  not  the  same  as  at  chap.  xvii.  1. 

13  Over. — The  Gr.  is  not  "  of,"  as  Auth.,  i.e.,  "  concerning."  but 
"  upon." 

15  Sin  against  thee. — Tlie  Gr.  afxaprivoj  is  uniformly  transl.ited 
"  to  sin."  The  English  versions  here  have  "  trespass,"  for  which 
there  is  no  corresponding  Gr.  verb  in  the  New  Testament. 

Show  him  his  fault. — Not  merely  as  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  toU 
him  his  fault,"  but  show  it  him,  make  him  see  it. 

16  At  the  mouth. — Or  (literally)  "  on  the  mouth,"  not  as  Auth. 
"  in ;  "  ''  on  the  evidence  of,"  as  we  should  say. 

Two  witnesses  or  three. — This  is  the  Gr.  order,  probably 
in  reference  to  Deut.  xvii.  16.     Compare  2  Cor.  xiii.  1. 

17  Tell  it  unto  the  church. — Margin,  "  Or,  congregation."  The 
two  words,  originally  interchangeable,  have  become  widely  dif- 
ferent in  meaning  ;  the  "  Church,"  the  more  comprehensive  of  the 
two,  including  the  wliole  body  of  the  faithful,  not  a  particular 
"  congregation  "  or  assemblage  of  them  only.  The  Gr.  ecclesia 
occurs  in  the  Gospels  twice,  here  and  in  chap.  xvi.  18. 

Gentile. — Auth.,  "  heathen  man."  The  former  is  but  the  Latin 
translation  of  the  latter,  yet  at  the  jDresent  day  the  two  names 
have  different  shades  of  meaning.  If  the  nations  are  spoken  of 
as  Gentiles,  it  is  in  contradistinction  to  Israelites  ;  if  as  lieatheus, 
it  is  in  contrast  to  worshippers  of  the  true  God.  But  the  reason 
here  and  in  other  places  for  the  change  from  "  heathen "  to 
"Gentile"  is,  that  in  the  Auth.  "Gentile"  is  by  far  the  more 
common  name,  and  the  few  passages  in  which  "  heathen " 
occurs  have  been  brought  into  harmony  with  the  rest. 

23  Would  make  a  reckoning  with  his  servants. — ^Auth., 
"  would  take  an  account  of  his  servants,"  which  is  neither  clear 
in  meaning  nor  close  to  the  Gr. 

25  He  had  not  wherewith  to  pay. — Auth.,  "  he  had  not  to  pay." 


ST.    MATTHEW— XIX.  43 

The  insertion  of  wherewith  (though  indeed  hardly  an  insertion, 
as  it  is  implied  in  the  Gr.  jj.^  ex'>'^'^'>s),  is  necessary  to  make  the 
English  clear. 

27  Released  liim. — Auth.,  "loosed  him."  The  Gr.  verb,  which  is 
of  frequent  occurrence,  is  not  elsewhere  rendered  "  loose  ;  "  nor 
is  "  loose,"  which  implies  previous  binding  or  imprisoning,  appro- 
priate here,  as  it  is  not  said  there  had  been  actual  seizure  of  the 
debtor's  person. 

30  That  which  was  due. — All  English  versions  "  the  debt,"  but 
at  ver.  Si  "  that  was  due."  The  Gr.  in  these  places  is  the  passive 
participle,  and  not  the  word  which  is  translated  "  the  de])t "  at 
ver.  27. 

31  SKCeeding  sorry.  —  Auth..  "  very  sorry ;  "  hardly  forcible 
enough  for  the  feeling  denoted  by  the  Gr. 

32  Besoughtest  me. — So  Rhem. :  "  desiredst  me  "  (Auth.)  is  not 
in  itself  a  good  phrase,  nor  does  it  adeqiiately  render  the  Gr., 
which  signifies  a  strong  appeal. 

33  Mercy  .  .  .  mercy. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  :  Auth.  following 
Tjaid.  has  "  comj)assion  .  .  .  pity."  The  Gr.  is  the  same 
word  in  both  places,  and  that  word  is  elsewhere  in  Auth.,  with 
only  two  exceptions,  rendered  "  have  mercy." 

34,  35  The  omissions  in  these  verses  are  due  to  changes  in  the  Gr. 
text. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

6  There  are  several  changes  in  this  and  the  preceding  verses  of 
the  chapter  which  do  not  seem  to  require  explanation. 

7  Bill. — So  in  the  parallel  passage  of  Mark  x.  4.  In  other 
places  of  the  New  Testament,  about  twenty-five  in  number,  the 
Gr.  /3(6Aiof  (biblion)  is,  with  one  exception,  "  a  book."  The  docu- 
ment here  referred  to,  like  the  genealogy  in  Matt.  i.  1,  was 
doubtless  a  "  scroll  of  a  book." 

10  It  is  not  expedient. — Compare  Note  on  chap,  xviii.  6. 

16  Master.— Auth.  "Good  master,"     The  title  "good,"  though 
omitted  here  (see  Margin),  is  given  in  the  parallel  passages  of  St. 


44  ST.    MATTHEW— XX. 

Mark  aud  St.  Luke ;  and  we  cannot  doubt  that  it  was  actually 
used  by  the  questioner,  as  it  is  so  pointedly  referred  to  by  the 
Lord  in  his  answer  "  one  there  is  that  is  good."  (Plumptre, 
Commentary  on  this  place.) 

20  "  Fi'om  my  youth  up  "  (Auth.),  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text 

Observed. — So  Tynd.  and  Genev.  (Auth.  with  "Wycl.,  Cranm., 
and  Genev.),  is  "  kept,"  which  is  elsewhere  and  more  correctly 
used  for  another  Gr.  word. 

22  He  was  one  that  had. — Auth.,  "  he  had."  The  Gr.  is  peculiar: 
literallj^  "he  was  having,"  or  "he  was  a  holder  of"  great  posses- 
sions. 

23  It  is  hard  for  a  rich  man  to  enter.— This  paraphrase  ia 
adojited  by  Tyndale.  Auth.,  following  Rhem.,  has  "  a  rich  man 
shall  hardly  enter,"  whicli  at  first  sight  is  a  literal  and  satisfac- 
tory translation :  biit  according  to  modern  English  "  hardly 
enter  "  means  "  shall  scarcely,  shall  most  j)robably  not,  euter," 
whereas  the  meaning  of  the  original  is  that  lie  shall  with  diffi. 
culty  enter,  with  struggle,  suffering  "  hardness."  Observe  the 
difference  between  this  passage  and  Mark  x.  23,  "  how  hardly," 
&e. 

24  A  needle's  eye. — There  is  no  article  in  the  Gr.  text  either 
here  or  in  Mark  x.  24.  Biit  the  change  from  "  the  eye  of  a 
needle  "  (Auth.)  has  been  adduced  with  some  reason  as  a  case  of 
unnecessary  prccisoness. 

25  Astonished. — Auth.,  "amazed."  which  is  usiially  the  reading 
of  another  word.  (Compare  Acts  viii.  11,  ix.  13).  Tlie  same 
may  be  said  of  "  forsaken  "  (Aiith.),  at  ver.  27. 


CHAPTER    XX. 


6  Others  standing.—"  Idle "  (Auth.)  is  omitted  in  Gr.  text : 
also  the  words  "  and  whatsoever  is  right,  that  shall  ye  receive/' 
at  ver.  77. 

8  Pay. — Auth.,  "  give."     The  Gr.  is  literally  "  render." 

11  The  householder. — As  at  ver.  1.     All  English  versions  exce])t 
Wycl.,  "  the  good  man  of  the  house."    It  is  to  be  regi'etted  that 


ST.   MATTHEW— XX.  45 

this  good  old  English  phrase  is  obsolete,  aud  no  longer  conveys 
to  an  ordinary  reader  the  meaning  of  the  Gr.,  "  the  master  of  the 
house."     Yidg.,  patreni  familias. 

12  Spent. — Anth.,  with  Tynd.,  "wrought."  The  Gr.  is  properly 
"  made  one  hour  " — i.e,  "  spent  it,"  as  at  Acts  w.  33,  "  They  had 
spent  some  time  there,"  where  Auth.  has  "when  they  had  tarried 
there  a  space." 

The    burden  of  the   day  and  the  scorching    heat.— 

Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  the  burden  and  heat  of  the  day."  The 
word  rendered  "  scorching  heat "  is  used  in  James  i.  11,  and 
Jonah  iv.  8  (LXX.  version),  for  the  hot  wind  which  prevailed  in 
the  forenoon. 

13  Friend. — An  exclamation  then,  as  now,  not  spoken  always  in  a 
friendly  tone.  Gr.  Iraipe.  It  is  only  found  in  this  Gospel. 
Compare  xxii.  12,  xxvi.  50. 

14  Take   up. — Auth.,  "  take."      He  bids  them  take  it  up  from 
the  table  on  which  he  has  put  it.     Yulg.,  tolle. 

It  is  my  will  to  give. — All  English  versions,  "  I  will  give." 
The  Gr.  is  de\ai,  expressing  the  peremptory  detei-mination  of  the 
householder.     Stet  pro  ratione  voluntas.     Yulg.,  volo  dare. 

16  The  clause  "  For  many  are  called,"  &c.  (Auth.)  is  omitted  by 
change  in  Gr.  text,  but  occurs  in  chap.  xxii.  14,  in  connection 
mtli  the  paraljle  of  the  marriage  feast. 

18  Shall  be  delivered. — So  Rheiu.  This  is  the  usual  meaning 
of  the  Gr.,  and  there  is  no  reason  for  translating,  it  as  Auth. 
(foUoAving  Tynd.),  "betrayed"  in  this  verse,  and  "delivered"  in 
the  next. 

19  Shall  be  raised  up. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,"  shall 
rise  again."  Our  Lord  does  not  yet  make  it  fully  kno^vn  to  his 
disciples  that  he  was  to  be  a  voluntary  sufferer,  aud  that  he  was  to 
rise  again  by  the  power  of  his  Godhead;  "  to  lay  do^vn  his  life, 
and  take  it  again  "  (John  x.  18). 

20  The  mother  of  the  sons  of  Zebedee. — Auth.,  following 
Tynd.,  "  Zebedee's  children,"  probably  because  "  sous  "  occurs 
immediately  afterwards.  But  the  variation  suggests  that  the 
persons  named  in  the  two  places  were  not  the  same — viz.,  the 
Apostles  James  aud  John.      Compare  chap,  xxvii.  56. 

Asking. — Auth.,  "desiring."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  ver. 
22,  except  that  in  that  verse  being  in  the  middle  voice,  and  ad- 
dressed to  the  sons,  it  might  be  rcnrlcred  "  ye  ask  for  yourselves." 


46  ST.   MATTHEW— XXI. 

22  The  clause  relating  to  "  the  baptism  "  is  omitted,  by  cliang-e  in 
Gv.  text,  both  iu  tliis  aud  the  following  verses,  ha\aug  probably 
been  interpolated  from  the  parallel  passage  of  St.  Mark  x.  38. 

24  Concersiing  the  two  brethren. — This  being  the  meaning 
of  the  Gr.,  not  as  Auth.,  "  against,"  it  would  seem  that  the  two 
brethren  retired,  and  the  ten  expressed  their  indignation  among 
themselves. 

25  Biulers. — Auth.,  "  princes,"  with  Wycl.  aud  Cranm.  follomng. 
Yulg.  principes.  This,  however,  is  the  rendering  of  another 
word,  for  which  it  is  more  appropriate,  apxvyiJs,  as  Acts  iii.  15, 
"  the  Prince  of  life."     Tynd.  aud  Geuev.  here  have  "  lords." 

29  Went  out. — Auth,,  "depart."  The  Auth.,  notwithstanding  its 
studied  variety,  uses  this  for  twenty-one  different  Gr.  words, 

30  The  transposition  is  due  to  a  change  in  the  Gr.  text. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 


4  Now  this  is  come  to  pass— Auth..  "all  this  was  done." 
Compare,  as   to  the    change   of    tense.    Matt.   i.  22.     "  All "  is 

■omitted  in  the  Gr.  text. 

5  Hiding. — Auth.,  "sitting,"  as  in  ver.  7,  and  iu  the  uarallel 
passage  of  Mark  xi.  7: 

7  He  sat. — For  Auth.,  "  they  set  him,"  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

8  The  most  part  of  the  multitude. — The  Gr.  is  very  un- 
usual, 0  TrAeFcrTos  ux^^os.  Wycl.,  "  full  miich  peojile."  Tynd,, 
"  many  of  the  people."  ■  Auth.,  following  Rhem.  aud  Vulg.,  "  a 
very  great  multitude." 

10  All  the  city  was  stirred. — So  Wycl,,  after  "Viilg.,  commota 
est.  The  Gr.  is  properly  "  was  shaken,"  as  by  an  earthquake. 
Auth.,  following  TjTid., "  was  moved." 

12  The  doves  (-svith  the  article),  which  were  offerod'iu  the  Temple 
on  occasions  of  piu-ification,  as  in  Luke  ii.  24.  Tlie  mouey- 
cliaugers  gave  small  coin  for  large,  or  Jewish  for  Gentile 
money,  to  those  who  were  buying  the  doves  or  other  oblations. 


ST.    MATTHEW— XXI.  47 

13  Biobbers. — All  English  versions,  "  thieves,"  for  which  the  Gr. 
has  a  different  word.  Bnrab1)as  .and  the  two  that  were  crucified 
on  Calvary  are  called  "  roljbcrs  ;  "  Judas  Iscariot,  "  a  thief." 
The  propriety  of  the  comparison  is  better  seen  if  we  take  into 
account  John  ii.  14,  where  those  that  sold  oxen  and  sheep  are 
mentioned  using  the  court  of  the  Temple,  as  tlie  caves  in  the  rocks 
■were  used  by  the  brigands  to  house  the  droves  of  cattle  which 
were  their  chief  booty.  (So  Dr.  Field,  Otium  Norvicense,  on  this 
passage,  comparing  Dion.  Hal.,  i.  39.) 

15  Were  moved  with  indignation. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem., 
after  Yulg.,  indignati  sunt.  Auth.,  "  were  sore  displeased." 
Tynd.,  "  they  disdained  him."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  at  chap.xx. 
24. 

19  Margin,  "  Or,  a  single."  The  Gr.  has  the  numeral  "  one," 
which  is  often  emphatic  in  the  sense  of  "  one  only."  Here  it  may 
indicate  that  the  fig-tree  stood  by  itself ;  as  indeed  each  of  us 
stands  alone,  whether  he  be  fruitful  of  good  works  or  unfruitful, 
in  the  sight  of  God.  On  the  other  hand,  at  chap.  viii.  19,  where 
the  Gr.  is  "  one,"  it  is  sufficiently  rendered  by  "  a  scribe." 

Let  there  be  no  fruit  from  thee. — So  the  Gr. :  Auth., 
"  let  no  fruit  grow  on  thee,"  following  Tynd. 

20  How  did    the    fig-tree  immediately  wither  away? — 

It  is  not  an  exclamation  of  wonder,  as  in  Auth.,  "  How  soon  is 
the  fig-tree  withered  away  ! '"  but  a  question,  "  how,  from  what 
cause  ?  "  From  the  fuller  narrative  in  Mark  xi.,  there  seems 
to  have  been  an  interval  of  a  day  between  the  cursing  of  the 
ti'ee  and  the  saying  of  the  disciples. 

Immediately. — Auth.,  "presently."  Wycl.and  Tynd.,  "  anon; " 
and  as  that  word  had  become  an  archaism  in  tlie  time  of  the 
Auth.,  so  is  "  presently,"  now  obsolete,  in  the  sense  of  immedi- 
ately," except  as  liaving  in  view  the  immediate  future. 

21  Be  thon  taken  np. — Auth.,  "  be  thou  removed,"  which  would 
represent  another  Gr.  word.     Tynd.  has  "  take  thyself  away." 

24  Question. — Margin,  "  Gr.,  word."  The  various  uses  of  the 
Gr.  \6yos  are  signally  shown  in  the  New  Testament,  where  it  is 
rendered  by  the  Autli.  in  fifteen  different  ways. 

29  Repented  himself. — The  Gr.  verl)  (not  that  which  is  com- 
mouly  "  rejjeut ")  is  thus  rendered  in  Autli.,  and  chap,  xxvii.  3. 
See  again  ver.  32.     This  Avord  nfTaueXo/xat  implies  rather  the  first 


48  ST.    MATTHEW— XXI. 

qualius  of  compiuictiou  tliau  tliorougli  "  repeutauce  "  or  "  change 
of  miud  "  {fieTcivoia). 

31  Go  before  you. — The  Gr.  is  always  so  rendered  in  tlie  Gospels ; 
but  here  it  would  have  borue  a  more  forcible  translation :  "  lead 
you  on  the  way." — (Plumptre.) 

32  The  insertion  of  "  even,"  which  adds  force  to  the  rebuke,  is  due 
to  a  change  in  the  Gr.  text. 

33  Another  counti'y. — Auth.,  "  a  far  country,"  with  "Wycl.,  which 
is  not  indicated  by  the  Gr.     The  Yulg.  has  jperegre  ])rofectus  est. 

31  His  fruits. — Auth.,  "the  fruits  thereof"  (of  the  vineyard). 
The  Gr.  may  be  either. 

36  In  like  manner. — Auth.,  "  did  unto  them  likeAvise,"  is  not 
now  a  recognised  English  phrase.  The  full  form  of  it,  "  in  like 
-nnse,"  is  used  in  Aiitli.  at  verse  21  of  this  chapter. 

41  Miserably  destroy  those  miserable  men.—  The  iteration 
of  a  word  to  intensify  the  sense  (as  we  say,  "  evil  be  to  him  that 
evil  does")  is  a  Gr.  as  well  as  a  Hebrew  idiom.  It  disappears  in 
Auth.,  which  has,  "  miserably  destroy  those  Avicked  men." 

12  Was  made. — Auth..  "  is  become."  The  verb  in  Gr.  is  in  the 
past  tense,  passive  voice. 

This. — i.e.,  "  this  thing."  not,  "  the  head  of  the  corner."  As 
ths  Gr.  for  "  head,"  Kec^aXr;,  is  feminine,  the  pronoun,  "  this," 
being  also  feminine,  would  in  classical  Gr.  refer  to  it.  But  these 
words  are  a  cpiotation  from  the  LXX.  version  of  Ps.  cxvii.  22, 
which  here  follows  tlu'  Hebrew  idiom.  So  in  1  Sam.  iv.  8  ;  Ps. 
ci.  19  (Bengel  and  Wordsworth). 

This  was  from  the  Lord. — This  is  according  to  the  Gr., 
though  we  must  regret  the  loss  of  TjTidale's  paraphrase,  adox)totl 
by  Auth.,  "  this  is  the  Lord's  doing." 

41  Shall  be  broken  to  pieces. — So  Cranm.  All  other  versions, 
"  broken " ;  overlooking  the  force  of  the  compound  Gr.  verb, 
which  is  given  in  Vulg.,  conf ringed  a  r. 

It  will  scatter  him  as  dust- — Auth..  "will  gi-ind  him  to 
powder."  So  Tjnid.  and  Gencv.  Wycl..  "  will  all  to  (almost) 
bruise  him."  The  Gr.  is  proijerly,  "  will  Avinnow  like  chaff;  "  it 
is  used  in  the  LXX.  translation  of  tlie  prophecy  of  Dan.  ii.  41 
(Aiitli.).  "it  (the  kingdom  wliicli  shall  never  be  destroyed)  shall 
break  in  pieces  and  consume  all  these  kingdoms,"  a  passage 
which  evidently  supplied  the  imagery  of  this  saying  of  our  Lord. 


ST.    MATTHEW— XXII.  49 

CHAPTER  XXII. 

2  A  marriage  feast. — Auth.,  "a  man-iag-e."  T^aul.,  "  wbioh 
married  his  son."  Tlie  Gr.  is  ixsed  iu  the  LXX.  version  of  tlie 
Old  Testament  for  the  celcln-ation  of  a  marriage,  and  of  other 
great  ceremonies  (as  in  Estlier  i.  5  ;  Gen.  xxix.  22.  See  Alford, 
Note  on  this  word).  Tlie  fuial  fidfilment  of  the  parable  is  to  be 
looked  for  iu  tlie  "  marriage  supper  of  the  Lamb,"  the  Son  of 
God  (Rev.  xix.  9). 

4  Made  ready.— All  other  Engl,  versions,  "  prepared."  The 
same  Gr.  word,  in  its  verbal  and  adjectival  forms,  is  used  in  both 
parts  of  the  verse. 

5  One  to  his  own  farm. —  The  emphatic  Gr.  adjective, 
showing  the  intentness  of  the  man  on  his  own  private  interest,  is 
not  expressed  in  any  of  the  Engl,  versions. 

6  The  rest.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  ''the  reumant,"  which,  as  it 
denotes  a  single  remaining  fragment,  is  not  an  appropriate  trans- 
lation of  the  Gr.  plural. 

Shamefully. — So   Craum. :    Auth.,  following   Rhem.,   "spite- 
fully;" the  Gr.  betokens  insolence  rather  than  malice. 

9  The  partings  of  the  highways. — Auth.,  following  Tynd. 
"  the  highways."  The  Gr.  docs  not  occui*  again  in  the  N.  T.  At 
the  partings,  or,  what  is  the  same  thing,  the  confluences,  of  the 
sti'eets  were  open  spaces,  wliere  tliere  were  many  coming  and 
going,  besides  the  idlers  and  beggars  and  sportive  children  wlio 
usually  congregate  in  such  places. 

10  Filled  with  guests. — Tlie  Gr.  has  simj)ly  this  meaning. 
Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "furnished." 

11  To  behold  the  guests.- To  take  a  -saew  of  them.  Auth., 
"  to  see,"  with.  Cranm. ;  Tynd.,  "  to  visit." 

15  Ensnare  Him. — This  is  the  literal  meaning  of  the  Gr.,  in 
modern  Engl.,  "  to  entrap."     Auth.,  "  to  entangle." 

25  Married  and  deceased.— So  Tynd.:  Auth.,  "when  he  had 
married  a  wife,  deceased,"  as  if  the  one  event  followed  immedi- 
ately on  the  other. 

25  Having  no  seed. — SoWycl. :  Auth.,  "having  no  issue."  The 
Gr.  airipixa  is  elsewhere  literally  translated  in  Auth. 

33  Teaching.— Auth.,  "  doctrine."    See  Note  on  chap.  vii.  28. 


50  ST.    MATTHEW— XXTII. 

38  Great  and  first.  — For  Autli.,  "first  and  q-reat,"  by  cliansre  in 
Gr.text. 

40  Hangeth  the  whole  law  and  the  prophets.— The  con- 
struction is  like  tliat  in  John  ii.  2,  "  Jesns  also  was  bidden,  and 
his  disciples,  to  the  marriage." 

43  In  the  Spirit.— Under  the  influence  of  the  Holy  Ghost.  All 
Engl.  Tcrsious,  "  in  spirit." 

44  Underneath  thy  feet.— By  change  of  Gr.  text  for  Auth., 
"  till  I  make  tliine  enemies  thy  footstool." 


CHAPTER  xxrn. 


6  Place. — Auth.,  "rooms,"  now  obsolete  in  this  sense.  The 
other  versions  have  "  places"  or  "  seats."  "  Place  "  and  "  room" 
are,  in  their  etymology,  similar,  though  distinct :  "  place  "  coming 
from  the  Latin  platea,  a  street ;  and  "  room  "  from  the  Gr.  pv/j-v 
(rume),  a  street. 

9  Which  is  in  heaven.— Margin,  "  Gr.  the  heavenly."  This, 
which  is  the  reading  of  all  the  best  MSS.,  is  not  verbally  the 
same,  though  it  may  be  tho  same  in  meaning,  as  that  in  the 
Lord's  prayer,  which,  probably  because  familiar  from  its  use  in 
the  prayer,  was  here  introduced  in  place  of  the  true  reading. 

12  Humhled.— Auth.,  "  abased."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  in  both 
parts  of  the  verse.  The  sentence  in  Wycl.  is  as  follows,  "  ho 
that  higheth  himself  shall  be  meeked ;  and  he  that  meeketh  him. 
self  shall  be  enhanced." 

13  Them  that  are  entering  in  to  enter.— Auth.,  "  them  that 
are  entering  to  go  in."  The  verb  is  repeated  in  the  Gr.,  but 
from  the  difference  between  the  participle  and  infinitive  mood 
the  assonance  is  not  so  marked  as  it  is  in  Engl.  See  marginal 
note  as  to  the  omission  of  verse  14. 

15  And  when  he  is  become  so. — This,  in  point  of  idiom,  is 
not  a  satisfactory  rendering;  neither  is  that  for  which  it  is  sub. 
stituted,  "  and  when  he  is  made,"  in  which  Auth.  follows  Wycl.  ; 
Craum.,  '*  when  he  is  become  one." 


ST.    MATTHEW— XXIII.  51 

A  son  of  hell.— So  Wycl.     Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  a  cliild 
of  hell." 

16  The  temple. — Margin,  "  Or,  sanctuary."  The  Gr.  properly 
denotes,  not  the  Temple  in  its  lai-ger  meaning  (rh  iep/iv),  with  its 
pivcinct,  but  the  sacred  edifice  which  was  especially  dedicated  to 
worship  and  sacrifice,  in  classical  Gr.  the  shrine  {va6s).  It  has 
often,  however,  in  the  N.  T.,  the  more  comprehensive  sense,  and 
is  so  translated,  except  where  it  is  limited  in  meaning  by  the 
context. 

He  is   a   debtor. — Mavg'm,  "  Ov,  ho2md  by  Ms  oath,"  which  is 
to  be  regarded  as  an  interpretation,  not  as  a  literal  rendering. 

18  A  debtor.— Auth.,  following  Cranm.,  "guilty."  The  Gr.  is 
the  same  as  in  verse  16.     Tynd.,  in  both  places,  "  offendeth." 

20  He  therefore  that  sweareth.— Auth.,  "  whosoever  therefore 
shall  swear."  Our  Lord  speaks  with  regard  to  the  present ;  the 
Scribes  are  rej)resented,  in  verses  16, 18,  as  laying  down  a  general 
rule,  '"whosoever  shall,"  &c. 

23  Ye  tithe. — So  all  Engl,  versions,  except  Auth.,  "  ye  pay  tithe," 
which  is  an  interpretation,  but  a  correct  one. 

24  Strain  out. — So  Tynd.  Auth.,  "  strain  at,"  which  now  has  a 
very  different  meaning.  The  common  explanation  of  this  pe- 
culiarity in  the  Auth.,  that  at  was  a  misprint  for  out,  may  be 
true,  but  is  not  supported  by  any  evidence. 

25  Full  from  extortion  and  excess. — All  Engl,  versions,  wth 
the  Vulg.,  "full  of  extortion  and  excess."  The  foi'ce  of  the 
preposition  in  the  Gr.,  e|  apTrayris,  has  been  overlooked,  the  sense 
being  that  their  cup  and  platter  are  full  in  consequence  of 
extortion  and  excess :  the  practice  of  these  iniquities  has  been 
the  means  of  filling  their  cup,  the  material  cup,  which  out- 
wardly is  so  bright  and  clean.  Excess,  according  to  Aristotle's 
definition  of  the  Gr.,  anpaaia,  includes  the  immoderate  pursuit  of 
gain  or  honour,  or  any  other  worldly  object  {Ethics,  vii.  6). 
The  preposition  on  which  turns  this  distinction  between  "  from  " 
and  "  of  "  is  not  repeated  in  verse  28,  "  ye  are  full  of  hypocrisy 
and  iniquity." 

26  The  inside. — The  contrast  is  between  the  inside  and  the  out- 
side (so  Tynd.,  Genev.,  and  Rhem.),  not  (as  Auth.,  following 
Cranm.)  between  "  that  which  is  within,"  the  contents  of  the  cup, 
and  the  outside  of  the  cup. 

28  Ye  are  full. — The  Gr.  is  a  different  word  from  that  used  before, 


52  ST.    MATTHEW— XXIII. 

and  shoiild  have  been  rendered  otherwise  than  by  "  ye  are  full," 
if  our  language  supplied  an  equivalent. 

29  Sepulchres  .  .  .  tombs. — Auth.,  "tombs  ".  .  .  "sepulchres." 
This  iuterehauge  has  been  made  to  preserve  the  uniformity  which 
has  elsewhere,  and  especially  in  regard  to  the  sepidture  of  the 
body  of  Christ,  been  observed  in  the  treatment  of  the  two  words 
rd(pos  and  /Livrj/^eTov. 

32  Fill  ye  up  then.— The  emphatic  "  ye  "  of  the  Gr.,  coming  at 
the  close  of  the  solemn  strain  of  rebuke,  is  sufficiently  represented 
by  the  position  of  the  English  pronoun. 

33  Offspring. — Auth.,  "  generation,"  as  at  iii.  7,  xii.  34. 

How  shall  ye. — Not  "  how  can  ye,"  as  Auth.  Meditating  on 
the  future,  as  if  in  soliloquy,  the  Lord  goes  on  to  predict  what 
warnings  would  be  given  them,  and  with  what  effect.  Wycl., 
Cranm.,  and  Rhem.  have  the  future,  following  Vulg./wg'ie^is; 
Tynd.  and  Genev.,  "  how  should  ye." 

Judgement. —  So  Rhem.  and  Vulg.,  "judicium;"  Wycl. 
"  doom."  The  other  versions,  "  damnation."  This  word  occurs 
here  in  the  New  Testament  for  the  first  time:  the  Gr.  Kpia-is, 
crisis,  having  in  all  former  passages  of  this  Gospel,  and  notably 
in  ver.  23  of  this  chapter,  been  translated  "  judgement,"  accord- 
ing to  its  literal  sense,  in  which  it  does  not  necessaril}'-  imply 
condemnation.  As  the  word  "  damnation  "  occurs  eleven  times, 
and  the  vcrlj  "  to  damn  "  three  times,  it  may  be  well  once  for  all 
to  say,  that  these  words,  having  acquired  a  stei'ner  meaning  than 
they  had  in  the  time  when  the  Bible  was  translated,  have  been 
displaced  in  the  Revised  Version  by  others  more  apposite  to  tlie 
woi'ds  of  tlie  original  Gr.,  which  do  not  in  tliemselves  imply  a 
judgement  to  condemn  for  all  eternity. 

37  Which  killeth.— All  English  versions,  following  the  Yulg.. 
have  "  which  killeth."  Tlie  use  of  the  third  person  at  the  begbming 
of  the  verse  has  generally  been  ignored,  except  by  some  modern 
commentators,  as  by  Bengel,  who  treats  irohs  avrriv  as  equivalent 
to  Trphs  ere.  The  sudden  transition  from  the  third  to  the  second 
person,  from  speaking  of  Jerusalem  to  addressing  her,  may  be 
taken  to  express  the  transport  of  tender  affection  and  sorrow  in 
the  bosom  of  the  Saviour,  Avhich  ensues  on  the  utterance  of  her 
name.  In  the  same  sentence,  with  almost  as  sudden  a  transition, 
he  passes  from  the  singular  to  the  j)lural,  from  apostrophising  the 
city  as  a  whole,  to  addressing  her  people,  who  in  multitudes  were 
listening  to  him. 


ST.   MATTHEW— XXIV.  53 

CHAPTER  XXIV. 

1  Went  out  from  the  temple,  and  was  going  on  his  way. 

— For  Autli.,   "  W(Mit  out   and   departed  from  tlie   temple,"  l)y 
cliauge  in  the  order  of  the  Gr. 

3  Thy  coming. — Literally,  "  thy  presence."  Tlie  Gr.  napouaia, 
parousia,  referring  to  the  second  advent  of  Christ,  is  so  ren- 
dered several  times  in  this  chapter  (bnt  not  elsewhere  in  the 
Gospels),  and  in  many  passages  of  the  Epistles. 

4  Lead  you  astray. — Auth.,  following  Wycl.  and  Tyud.,  "  de- 
ceive you,"  whicli  is  indeed  the  secondary  but  not  tlie  literal 
meaning  of  the  Greek.  The  word,  as  used  in  the  Xew  Testament 
implies  that  the  people,  like  sheep,  were  led  astray  from  their  true 
guides  by  false  shepherds  pretending  to  have  divine  authority. 
Several  such  impostors  are  mentioned  in  the  early  liistoiy  of  the 
Church,  as  Theudas  and  Judas  of  Galilee,  Acts  v.  37. 

7  Pestilences  (Auth.)  is  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text.  The 
words  for  "  famine  and  pestilence  "  are  nearly  alike,  differing 
only  by  a  single  letter,  so  that  the  introduction  of  the  latter 
word  into  the  Gr.  text  woiJd  be  easily  made  by  a  careless  copyist; 
and  the  mistake  would  not  attract  notice,  as  the  one  calamity 
very  commonly  follows  or  accompanies  the  other. 

8  Travail. — All  English  versions,  "  sorrows."  The  Gr.  uSlv  pro- 
perly means  the  pangs  of  child-birth,  and  is  used  in  that  sense, 
as  well  as  its  cognate  A^erb,  many  times  in  the  New  Testament. 
The  "  great  jjain  and  peril,"  of  which  the  word  is  a  symbol,  gives 
rise  to  many  allusions  ai.  !  comparisons  in  the  Old  Testament ; 
and  if  we  assume,  as  we  well  may,  tliat  our  Lord  here  gives  a 
higher  significance  to  the  word  and  to  the  thought  connected 
with  it,  we  better  account  for  the  frequent  recurrence  and  de- 
velopment of  the  same  figure  of  speech  in  the  Epistles.  The 
"  regeneration,"  or  new  birth  of  the  world,  of  which  He  speaks, 
is  to  be  accomplished  through  pain  and  travail,  "the  whole 
creation  groaning  and  travailing  together  until  now."  (Rom. 
viii.  22.) 

9  Unto  tribulation.  —  So  Wycl..  adopting  the  word  of  the 
Vulg.,  trihulationem.  The  Gr.  e\:\pLs,  for  which  this  is  now  taken 
as  the  uniform  iranslation,  is  variously  rendered  in  Auth.,  some- 
times by  "  tribulation,"  as  at  ver.  21,  and  sometimes,  as  here,  by 
"  affliction." 

12  Shall  be  multiplied.— The  Gr.  is  always  so  rendered  in  Auth., 
except  in  this  place,  where  it  is  "  abound." 


54  ST.   MATTHEW— XXIV. 

18  His  cloke.— For  "his  clotlies  "  (Aixtli.  witli  Tyud.),  by  cliauge 
in  Gr.  text  from  the  plural  to  the  singular.  Tlie  ■\vord,  when 
used  in  the  singular,  denoted  particularly  the  long  and  large 
garment  which  would  be  worn  by  a  man  on  a  journey,  but 
which  he  would  leave  at  home  when  going  to  work  in  the  field. 

21  Until  now.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem. :  Auth.,  "to  this  time.  "  The 
terseness  of  the  Gr.  would  literally  be  represented  by  "  until 
the  now." 

22  Had  been  shortened  .  .  .  would  have   been    saved.— 

Auth.,  "  should  be  shortened  .  .  .  should  be  saved."     The  future 
is  spoken  of  as  already  accomplished  in  the  divine  mind. 

23  Here  .  .  .  here.  —  Auth.,  "  here  .  .  .  there."  The  Gr.  has 
"  here"  in  both  places. 

24  If  possible. — Auth.,  "if  it  ice7'e  possible."  The  insertion  of 
were,  implying  that  the  thing  suggested  was  not  possible,  appears 
first  in  Tynd.,  and  was  adopted  by  Crauiu.  and  Genev.  It  is 
unnecesssry,  and,  considering  the  words  that  follow,  may  Ijc 
attril)uted  to  a  predestiuarian  bias.  Yuig.,  &c.,  fieri  jyotest,  fol- 
lowed by  Wycl.  and  Rhem. 

25  Beforehand. — Auth.,  "  I  have  told  you  before,"  following 
Tynd.  The  correction  is  necessary  to  exclude  the  meaning  "  I 
have  told  you  this  already  on  a  former  occasion,"  and  to  make 
the  sense  and  significance  of  the  warning  clear,  "  I  have  told  you 
beforehand ;  remember  my  words,  and  be  prepared." 

26  Inner  Chambers. — Auth.,  "  secret  chamber."  See  Note  on 
chap.  vi.  6. 

27  Is  seen. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.  and  Genev.,  "  shineth."  Wycl., 
Cranm.,  and  Rhem.  (foUomug  Vulg.,  which  hasj3«)-ei),  "  ap- 
peareth."  "  Shineth  unto  "  suggests  that  the  lightning,  like  the 
sun,  travels  across  the  sky ;  whereas  the  meaning  of  the  Gr.  is 
that  its  light  in  the  East  "  is  seen,"  or  is  ap^mrcnt  as  far  as  the 
opposite  quarter  of  the  heaven.  Is  seen. — The  same  Gr.  is 
so  translated  (chap.  ^'i.  5),  "  that  they  be  seen  of  men."    (Auth.) 

32  Now  from  the  fig-tree  learn  her  parable. — Auth.,  "  now 
leani  a  parable  of  the  fig-tree."  The  article  is  in  the  Gr.  pre- 
fixed to  both  words,  and  the  preposition  is  "  from,"  not  "  of." 
The  order  in  the  Gr,  by  placing  the  words  "  from  the  fig-tree"  at 
the  beginning  of  the  sentence  lays  on  them  an  emphasis  whicli 
the  Rhemish  version  only  has  preserved.  Our  Lord  was 
sitting  on  the  Mount  of  Olives  (ver.  24),  in  passing  over  which 


ST.    MATTHEW— XXIV.  55 

on  a  former  occasion  lie  had  sought  fruit  from  a  fig-tree  which 
grew  there  (Mark  xi.  33).  It  is  not  unlikely  that  he  now  liad  in 
xiew  a  tree  of  the  same  sort,  and  while  discoursing  of  the  things 
unseen,  illustrated  them  by  a  sudden  transition  to  one  of  the 
objects  within  sight  of  himself  and  his  hearers.  Compare  the 
parallel  passage  in  Mark  xiii.  28. 

Is  now  become  tender. — This  is  the  meaning  of  the  Gr. 
oTw  ^5rj  yfVTiTai.  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  has  "  While  his  branch 
is  yet  tender,"  as  if  the  "  tenderness,"  the  viridity,  of  the  branch 
were  passing  away,  not  beginning. 

33  He  is  nigh  is  preferable  to  Auth., "  it  is  near,"  which  is  placed 
in  the  Margin.  The  reference  of  "  it "  to  "  things,"  just  above, 
is  not  free  from  difficulty,  whereas  "  he  "  is  clearly  referable  to 
the  "  son  of  man  "  (ver.  30),  and  this  interpretation  is  strength- 
ened by  the  words  of  St.  James  (v.  9),  "  The  judge  staudeth 
before  the  doors." 

40  Two  men. — This  is  s1io\\ti  in  the  Gr.  by  the  "  one  "  in  each 
case  being  masculine.  All  the  versions  have  "  two  shall  be."  The 
Gr.  also  has  the  verbs  which  follow  in  the  present  tense,  "  one  is 
taken,  and  one  is  left."  The  event  is  thus  placed  vividly  before 
the  mind.  Wycl.,  in  the  next  verse  has  the  still  familiar  form, 
"  the  tother." 

M  In  an  hour  that  ye  think  not. — Auth.,  "  in  such  an  horn- 
as,"  following  Cranm. 

45  Hath  set  over. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "hath  made  ruler 
over." 

47  All  that  he  hath.— The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  all  that  belongeth 
to  him."     Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  all  his  goods." 

48  But  if.— Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  but  and  if."  The  and  in 
this  connection  is  an  archaism,  having  been  originally  a  conjunc- 
tion resembling  "  "  if"  in  meaning ;  it  is  now  redundant,  and 
perplexing  to  the  unlearned.  Compare  John  vi.  62,  "  What  and 
if"  (Auth.). 

50  Expecteth  not.  .  .  . — Knoweth  not.  Auth.,  with  Tjoid., 
"  looketh  not  for  him  ...  is  not  aware  of,"  which  are  not 
quite  literal  renderings,  though  in  themselves  idiomatic  and 
forcible. 


66  ST.   MATTHEW— XXV. 


CHAPTER  XXV. 

6  There  is  a  cry.— Wycl.,  Tyud.,  and  Autli.,  "  There  was  aery 
made."     The  Gr.  is  literally  "  is  come  to  pass." 

Behold  the  bridegroom !—"  Cometh"  (Auth.),  is  omitted  by 
change  in  Gr.  text.  Both  these  changes  add  liveliness  to  the 
description. 

Come  ye  forth.— All  Ejiglish  versions,  '•  go  ye  out."  The  Gr. 
may  be  either  "  go  out  "  or  "  come  out,"  and  the  cry  being  from 
the  outside,  decides  for  the  latter. 

8  Are  going  out. — The  Gr.  is  in  the  present  tense,  a^ewwrai : 
and  so  Tynd.,  "  go  out."  Vulg.,  extinguuntur.  Auth.  alone, 
"  are  gone  out."  This  correction,  the  necessity  of  which  admits 
of  no  doubt,  may  furnish  an  apt  illustration  to  those  who  hold 
that  the  Divine  grace  is  never  in  this  life  entirely  withdrawn 
from  any  one  avIio  has  received  it,  however  he  may  have  neg- 
lected to  seek  the  renewal  of  it. 

9  Peradventure  there  will  not  be. — Auth.,  "Vo/ so— lest 
there  be  not."  The  elliptical  i)hrase  of  the  Gr.  is  completed  by 
a  paraphrase  in  the  one  case,  and  by  an  insertion  in  the  other. 

13  Wlierein     .     .     . — (Auth.),  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

14  It  is  as  when. — Auth.,  following  Genev.,  inserts  the  hing- 
dom  of  heaven  instead  of  "  It." 

Another  country.— For  Auth.,  "  a  far  country,"  as  at  chap, 
xxi.  23. 

15  To  each. — So  Wycl. :  Auth.,  with  TjTid.,  "  to  eveiy  man."  The 
Gr.  is  (Koi(TT(j).  This  change,  for  the  sake  of  terseness  and  sim- 
l^licity,  has  been  often  made. 

22  Other  two  talents. — "Beside  them"  (Auth).,  omitted  here 
and  in  ver~e  20  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

24  Didst  not  scatter. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  thou  hast  not 
strawcd  " — i.e.,  strewed.  The  same  Gr.  is  also  in  Auth.  trans- 
lated "  scatter,"  as  at  Luke  i.  55,  "  Thou  hast  scattered  abroad  :  " 
and  although  "  strew  "  is  a  word  that  we  would  gladly  retain,  the 
meaning  which  we  have  here  to  express  is  not  that  of  strewing  or 
littering  on  the  gi*ound,  but  of  scattering  abroad. 

25  Lo,  thou  hast  thine  own. — So  Tynd.  This,  while  more  literal, 
gives  the  curt  speech  of  the  sullen  servant  better  than  Auth.,  with 
its  inserted  words  (following  Rhem.  only),  "  Lo,  there  thou  hast 
that  is  thine."     Vulg..  ccce  hahes  gnod  txmm  est. 


ST.    MATTHEW— XXV.  57 

27  The  bankers. — So  Rhem.  Autli.,  "  tlie  mouey-cliaugers,"  as 
at  verse  21.  The  busiuess  of  the  "  table-keeper "  (the  literal 
meaniug  of  the  Gr.  Tpaire(ir7is),  included  with  luouey-chaugiiig 
what  is  now  understood  by  "  banking,"  or  rccei^dng  money  on 
deposit  and  placing  it  out  at  interest.  The  latter  term  is  the 
more  appropriate  here. 

With,  interest.  —  Auth,  with  Wycl.  and  Rliem.  (following 
Vulg.,  cum  usiird),'hsiYe  "  with  usury,"  a  word  which  now  has  an 
opprobrious  significance  not  implied  in  the  Greek.  Tynd.,  "  with 
A'autage." 

32  All  the  nations. — All  English  versions  have  "  all  nations." 
The  pi-eseuce  of  the  article  appears  to  show  that  the  solemn  pas. 
sage  which  follows  has  particular  reference  to  the  Gentiles,  de- 
claring the  principle  by  which  they  are  to  be  judged.  The  following 
is  from  Plumptre's  Note  on  this  passage  : — "  We  have  had  in  this 
chapter  (l),in  the  wise  and  foolish  virgins,  the  law  of  judgement 
for  all  members  of  the  Church  of  Christ ;  (2)  in  the  talents,  that 
for  those  who  hold  any  office  or  ministry  in  the  Church ;  now  we 
have  (3)  the  law  by  which  those  shall  be  judged  who  have  lived 
and  died  as  heathens,  not  knowing  the  name  of  Christ,  and 
knowdug  God  only  as  revealed  in  Nature,  or  in  the  law  written 
in  their  hearts." 

40  One  of  these  my  "brethren,  even  these  least. —  This 
meaning  is  educed  not  so  much  from  the  words  themselves  as 
•  from  their  order  in  the  Gr.  The  Auth.  differs,  not  widely,  from 
it,  "  One  of  the  least  of  these  my  brethren."  It  is  to  be  remem- 
bered  that  although' the  words  are  addressed  to  those  who  as 
Gentiles  are  not  in  the  highest  sense  of  the  word  "  brethren  "'  of 
Christ,  and  may  never  have  had  an  opportunity  of  showing  kind- 
ness to  any  such,  yet  Christ  has  proclaimed  the  universal  brother- 
hood of  mankind,  and  their  relation  to  Him,  as  the  "  Sou  of 
man." 

46  Eternal  punishment. — The  Gr.  aluvios  (aionios)  is  the  same 
in  both  parts  of  the  verse,  and  in  both  places  is  "  everlasting  "  in 
Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  and  in  Yidg,  (eternum.  In  Auth.,  follo\^4ng 
Tynd.,  it  is  varied,  being  "everlasting"  in  the  first  place, 
"  eternal "  in  the  second. 


58  ST.  MATTHEW— XXVI. 

CHAPTER  XXVI. 

2  Cometh.. — Autli.,  foUowiug  Geuev.,  "is;"  other  versions,  "shall 
be."  The  Gr.  is  yiverat,  not  eVri,  and  denotes  the  coming  on  of 
the  feast.     A  similar  change  is  made  in  ver.  5. 

3  The  court. — So  Rhem.  "Wycl.  and  Genev.,  "hall.  Vulg., 
atrium.  Auth.,  following  Tynd.  and  Cranm.;  "palace,"  which 
nsiially  applies  to  a  residence.  The  Gr.  av\^,  "a  court,"  probably 
here  denotes  an  open  place  in  which  assemblies  and  trials  were 
held.  So  Auth.  at  Rev.  xi.  2,  "  The  court  which  is  without  the 
temple." 

5  During  the  feast. — AU  English  versions,  following  Vulg., 
diefesto,  have  "  on  the  feast  day."  The  Gr.  is  literally,  "in  the 
feast ; "  and  the  Feast  of  the  Passover  continued  a  whole  week. 

Tumult. — This  is  the  word  used  in  Auth.,  for  the  same  Gr.  at 
chap.  xx™.  24;  and  in  this  place  it  expresses  better  than 
"  uproar  "  (Autli.  follov^dng  Tynd.)  the  popidar  commotion  by 
which  the  purpose  of  the  coimeil  might  be  defeated. 

7  An  alabaster  cruse. — All  English  versions,  "an  alabaster 
box."  The  Gr.  is  Alahastron.  The  vessel  appears  to  have  been 
in  the  form  of  a  flask.  The  marginal  note  gives  "  a  flask,"  as  an 
alternative  rendering  of  the  Gr.,  which  is  said  to  have  oi-igiually 
been  the  name  of  a  vessel  or  A-ase  without  handles  (from  o  ^nd 
\a^i),  a  handle),  and  subsequently  to  have  been  applied  to  the 
material  of  which  A^essels  of  that  form  were  usually  made. 

10  Jesus  perceiving  it.— Auth.,  follomng  Tynd.  and  Cranm., 
"  When  Jesus  understood  it."     Compare  chap.  xii.  15  ;  xvi.  8. 

12  To  prepare  me  for  burial.— Auth.,  "She  did  it  for  my 
burial."  Pre-sdous  versions,  "  She  did  it  to  bury  me."  Vulg., 
ad  sepeliend^im  me."  The  Gr.  means  properly  to  "  prepare  a 
body  for  burial — e.g.,  by  embalming;  and  is  so  used  in  John  xix. 
40.,  and  in  the  LXX  version  of  Gen.  1.  2,  of  the  embalming  of 
Jacob's  body  before  its  bm-ial  in  Canaan. 

13  That  also  which  this  woman. — Autli.,  "  there  shall  also 
this  that  this  woman,"  a  rare  instance  of  inattention  to  euphony 
in  the  English  version,  and  peculiar  to  the  Auth. 

Spoken  of.— So  Genev.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "told."  The  Gr. 
AaAe'ctf  means,  and  is  commonly  rendered  in  Auth.,"  to  speak,"  not 
"  to  teU." 

15  They  weighed  unto  him. — The  true  meaning  of  the  Gr.  has 


ST.    MATTHEW— XXVI  59 

been  overlooked  by  all  Euglisli  vcrbions,  fulluwiug  Viilg.,  consli- 
tuerunt.  Wycl.  has  "  ordained ;  "  Tynd.,  "  api)ointed  ;"  Autli., 
"coveuanted  mth  liim  for  thirty  pieces  of  silver."  The  same 
Gr.  is  used  iu  the  LXX.  version  of  Zech.  xi.  12,  conceriiiug  the 
thii-ty  xiieces  of  silver,  where  the  Autli.  has,  "  they  weighed  for  my 
price."  Compare  also  Jer.  xxxii.  9  (LXX.  version),  "  I  weighed 
him  the  money  (eo-TTjffa  auri^),"  as  here. 

16  Deliver. — Anth.,  "  betray."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  the  last 
verse. 

17  Make  ready. — So  Wycl.  Other  versions,  "  prepare ;  "  but  at 
ver.  19,  for  the  same  Gr.,  Auth.  has  "  make  ready." 

18  I  keep. — (The  present).  So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Vulg.,  facio 
Pascha.     Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  1  will  keep." 

22  Is  it  I,  Lord? — Auth.,  inverting  the  order  of  the  Gr.,  "  Lord, 
is  it  I  ?  "  There  is  much  diversity  on  this  point  in  the  previous 
versions,  though  they  mostly  xjrcserve  the  original  order.  Vulg., 
Num  quid  ego  sum,  Rabhi  I  Wycl.,  "  Lord  whether  I  am  P  "  (both 
with  a  very  imperfect  apprehension  of  the  sense).  Tynd.,  "  Is 
it  I,  Master  ?  "  Rhem.,  '*  Is  it  I,  Lord  ?  "  The  disciples,  hoi'ror- 
struck  at  what  their  Master  has  said,  exclaim  as  with  one  voice, 
"  Is  it  I?  "  or  moi*e  exactly,  iu  deprecation  of  such  a  charge,  "  It  is 
not  I,  is  it  ?  "  Their  question  is  put  abruptly,  and  followed  by 
the  word  of  respectful  address,  with  Avliich  they  would  usually 
commence.  This  is  the  natural  sequence  of  thought  and  speech 
in  such  a  case,  whetlier  in  Gr.  or  English.  Compare  chap.  xvi. 
22,  where  om-  Lord  has  foretold  his  approaching  death,  and  St, 
Peter  exclaims, "  This  be  far  from  thee,  Lord:"  (Auth.).  See  also 
Acts  ix.  5  ;  x.  4. 

23  He  that  dipped  his  hand. — The  past  participle  iu  the  Gr. 
shows  that  the  action  had  ali'cady  taken  place.  "  Auth., 
"  dippeth." 

21;  Through  whom. — The  preposition  in  the  Gr.  is  the  same  that 
is  so  often  used  in  saying  "  The  Lord  spake  through  the  prophet," 
signifying  that  Judas  was  an  instrument  in  the  hands  of  another. 
All  English  versions  have  "  by  whom ;  "  Vulg.,  correctly,  per 
quern. 

25  Is  it  I,   Rabbi?— So  Rhem.,  foUowing  Vulg.     Auth., mth  all 

other  versions,  "  Master."  Judas  does  not,  like  the  rest,  use  the 
higher  title,  "  Lord,"  but  "  Rabbi,"  "  teacher,"  the  term  by  which 
the  Jews  addressed  and  described  him.  So  again  in  the  garden 
(ver.  49),  "  Hail,  Rabbi."    Ave  Bahhi. 


60  ST.    MATTHEW— XXVI. 

27  A  cup. — The  article  is  omitted  iu  tlie  best  MSS.  A  tliffereuce 
iu  tlie  mode  of  giving  the  bread  aud  the  cup  is  indicated  iu  tlie 
Gr.  simply  by  the  use  of  two  different  tenses  of  the  same  verb, 
but  cannot  be  so  simply  represented  iu  English.  He  went  on 
giving  the  bread  (iSiSov) ;  he  gave  with  his  own  hand  to  each ; 
the  cup  he  gave  to  them  once  for  all  (e5w;ce),  that  they  might  hand 
it  on  one  to  another. 

28  The  covenant. — All  English  versions,  following  Vulg.,  "  the 
New  Testament."  There  is  probably  a  reference  to  tlie  words  of 
Moses  iu  Exod.  xxiv.  8.,  "  Behold  the  blood  of  the  coveuaut." 
The  old  covenant  was  now  to  be  superseded  by  a  better  and  more 
comprehensive  one,  which  the  former  had  pre-figured.  The  word 
"  new  "  was  originally  wanting  in  this  place,  aud  iu  the  parallel 
passage  of  Mark  xiv,  24,  and  appears  to  have  been  inserted  in  an 
early  age  in  the  MSS.  from  Luke  xxii.  20,  aud  1  Cor.  xi.  25. 

31  In  me. — So  Wycl.  and  Rliem.,  following  Vulg.  Autli.,  with 
Craum.,  "becaiiseof  me,"  a  true  interpretation,  though  not  an 
exact  translation.     Tyud.  aud  Geuev.  "  by  me." 

35  Even  if  I  must  die  with  thee.— "Wycl.,  still  more  literally, 
"  though  it  behove  that  I  die  with  thee."  Auth.,  following 
Tynd.,  "  though  I  shoidd  die,"  &c., 

37  Sore  troubled. — This  gives  the  sense  of  the  Gr.  more  clearly 
than  Auth.,  following  Cranm.,  "  very  heavy."  Moreover  the 
latter  word  is  used  at  ver.  43,  where  it  is  said  that  "  their  eyes 
were  heavy." 

38  Abide. — (So  Wycl.)  is  the  usual  rendering  of  the  Gr.  yueVw. 
Auth.,  "Tarry." 

42  Cup  (Auth).  is  omitted  in  nearly  all  the  older  MSS. 

50  Do  that  for  which  thou  art  come. — The  sentence  in  the 
Gr.  is  abrupt  aud  uugrammatical.  AU  English  versions,  fol- 
lowing Vulg.,  complete  it  in  the  form  of  a  question,  "  Wherefore 
art  thou  come  ?  "  In  the  Gr.  the  words  stand  thus,  beginning 
with  the  relative  pronoun,  "  The  thing  for  which  thou  art  come," 
and  we  may  supply  either  an  imperative  "  Do  the  tiling  for 
which,"  or  an  interrogative  "  What  is  the  thing  for  which  ?  "  The 
former  interpretation  is  that  of  the  eminent  Gr.  expositor  Euthy- 
mius,  of  the   12th   centm'y,  "  ijyovu  rh   Kara  (TKOirhv  irpttTTe,"    "  Do 

according  to  thy  intent ; "  as  oiu-  Lord  had  said  to  him  at  the 
sui^per;  "What  thou  doest  do  quickly"  (Dr.  Field).  If,  iu 
such  a  scene  of  agony  and  confusion,  an  exclamation  was  abrupt 
in  its  utterance,  or  was  imperfectly  heard,  it  is  no  more  than 
might  be  exjpccted  to  happen. 


ST.    MATTHEW— XXVI.  61 

The  same  meauiug  is  more  clearly  expressed  in  John  xiii.  27, 
"  "What  thou  doest,  do  quickly." 

53  Even  now.^ — So  Cranm. — i.e.,  "at  this  veiy  moment."  Gi-. 
&pTt.     Auth.,  "  presently,"  with  Rhom. — i.e.,  "immediately." 

Send. — Auth.,  "  give."  The  exact  meaning  of  the  Gr.  is 
"  make  to  stand  at  my  side." 

55  A  robber. — All  English  versions,  "a  thief."  Compare  Note 
on  chap.  xxi.  13.  So  large  a  force  would  not  have  been  required 
for  the  capture  of  a  common  thief  ;  but  the  roblsers  (or  brigands) 
of  Palestine  were  formidalile  from  the  numbers  in  which  they 
banded  themselves  together. 

Ye  took  me  not.— So  Tynd.  Auth.,  "  Ye  laid  no  hold  on  me," 
which  better  represents  another  Gr.  word,  as  at  Tim^  vi.  12,  19 
(Auth).    Wycl.,  '•  Te  held  me  not,"  from  Vidg.,  non  me  tenuistis. 

56  Is  come  to  pass.— Auth.,  "  was  done."  Compare  chap,  i,  22, 
and  Note  there. 

58  The  officers.  .  . — i.e.,  of  the  court.  Auth.,  "the  servants,"  for 
which  in  Gr.  another  word  would  have  been  used. 

60  Afterward. — More  exact  than  Auth.,  with  all  previous  versions, 
"  at  the  last. 

61  This  man. — Auth.,  "fellow,"  a  term  of  contempt,  which  is  not 
necessarily  implied  in  the  Gr. 

66  He  is  worthy  of  death.— So  Tynd.  Auth.,  with  Wycl.  and 
Rhem., "  guilty  of  death,"  following  Yulg.,  reus  est  mortis.  The 
Gr.  is  literally  "  liable  to  death." 

69  Maid.— Auth.  has  "  damsel  "  here,  but  "maid  "  for  the  same  Gr. 
at  ver.  71. 

75  The  word  which  Jesus  had  said.  —  By  change  of  Gr. 
text  for  "  the  word  of  Jesus  whicli  said  unto  him." 


62  ST.   MATTHEW— XXVII. 

CHAPTER  XXVn. 

.5  The  sanctuary. — Anth..  "The  temple."  Compare  Note  on 
cliap.  xxiii.  16.  It  appears  that  into  this  holy  place  Judas,  iu  the 
agony  of  his  remorse,  flung  the  pieces  of  silver,  and  then  went 
away. 

6  Since  it  is. — Auth,  "because."  Tlio  Gr.  eirsi  has  properly, 
like  "  since  "  in  English,  a  temporal  sense,  iu  which  it  is  commonly 
used  hj  classical  authors  ;  but  in  the  New  Testament  it  is  always 
causal. 

9  Priced. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  "Auth.,  valued."  The  same 
word  in  its  verbal  and  substantival  forms  is  in  tlic  Gr.  three  times 
repeated.  The  situation  may  be  grating  to  the  e;ir,  Ijut  aptly 
expresses  what  is  deeply  offensive  to  our  feelings,  that  He  who 
came  to  be  a  ransom  for  sin  was  himself  priced  at  the  price  of  so 
much  money  by  those  whom  He  came  to  save. 

14  He  gave  him  no  answer,  not  even  to  one  word.— Auth., 

following  Tyud.,  "  answered  him  to  never  a  word ;  "  "  never  "  as 
the  emphatic  negative  of  our  Old  English  idiom. 

15  At  the  feast. — Margin,  "  Or,  a  feast."  Auth.  after  Tynd.,  "at 
that  feast."  There  being  no  article  in  the  Gr.,  the  words  admit 
of  the  rendering,  "at  a  feast"  (as  in  the  margin),  i.e.,  at  any  of 
the  Jewish  feasts,  not  at  tlie  Passover  only  ;  and  so  it  was  taken 
by  "Wycl.  "  for  a  solemn  day."  But  the  words  of  Pilate,  at  John 
xviii.  39,  appear  to  confine  this  inconvenient  custom  to  the  gi'eat 
feast  of  all.  "  Ye  have  a  custom  that  I  should  release  unto  you 
one  at  the  Passover." 

19  Righteous. — All  English  versions  following  Yulg.,  "  just,'  and 
so  at  ver.  24, 

24  Was  arising. — Auth.,  "  was  made ;  "  Rhem.,  "  was  toward ;  " 
Gr.,  yiveTai. 

27  The  Palace.— Margin,  "  Gr.,  Prcetorium."  Auth.  with  Tynd., 
"  common  hall,"  with  Margin,  "  Or,  governor's  house."  The  Gr., 
or  rather  Roman,  word  properly  signifies  the  head-quarters  of 
the  commanding  officer  in  camp,  find  from  thence  was  applied  to 
the  residence  of  the  Roman  Governor  at  the  seat  of  government 
in  a  province,  as  in  Acts  xxiii.  35. 

The  whole  band. — Margin,  "  Or,  cohort,"  properly  the  sub- 
division of  a  Roman  legion,  called  a  cohort,  and  numbering 
about  1,000  men. 


ST.    MATTHEW— XXYII.  63 

29  Kneeled.— So  "Wycl. ;  this,  the  meaning  of  the  Gr.,  "  fell  on 
their  knees,"  not  "bowed  the  knee"  (Auth.  after  Tynd.),  as 
in  making  obeisance.  Compare  Mark  i.  40,  x.  17.  The  follow- 
ing apt  illustration  of  this  act  of  the  soldiers  is  from  Dr. 
Field's  note : — "  With  this  irony  of  the  Roman  soldiery  it  is 
interesting  to  compare  a  grim  jest  which  was  wont  to  be  played 
off  by  the  Mediterranean  pirates,  of  whose  imboundcd  insolence 
many  anecdotes  are  recorded  by  Plutarch  in  his  life  of  Pompey, 
xxiv.  "But  the  most  contemptuous  circumstance  of  all  was, 
that  when  they  had  taken  a  prisoner,  and  he  cried  out  that  he 
was  a  Roman  (Civis  Romanus  sum),  they  pretended  to  be  struck 
with  terror,  smote  their  thighs,  and  fell  upon  their  knees 
(Trpoo-eViTTToi/  ouTcD)  to  ask  his  pardon ;  and  that  his  quality  might 
no  more  be  mistaken,  some  put  calcei  on  his  feet,  others  threw 
a  toga  around  him,  the  official  costume  of  a  Roman  citizen. 
When  they  had  made  game  of  him  {KaTeipuvevcra^^voi  avrSv)  for 
some  time,  they  let  down  a  ladder  into  the  sea,  and  bade  his 
worship  go  in  peace ;  and  if  he  refused,  they  pushed  him  oif  the 
deck  and  drowned  him." 

32  Him  they  compelled  to  go  with  them,  that  he  might 
bear  his  cross. — Aiith.  with  Tyud.,  "  compelled  to  bear  his 
cross."  The  Margin  gives  the  literal  sense  of  the  Gr.  Avord, 
which  is  used  here  and  in  chap.  v.  41,  "  to  impress."  It  appears 
to  have  been  a  common  thing  for  Roman  sohliex's  to  impress 
people  to  carry  burdens  for  them.  (Farrar's  Life  of  Christ,  ii., 
395,  quoting  Ei)ictetus,  Dissert,   iv.  1.) 

34  Wine  to  drink. — So  Wycl.  and  Rliem.  following  Yulg., 
vinum.  Auth.  with  Tynd.,  "  vinegar."  The  Gr.  is  literally 
"  sour  wine,"  such  as  was  commonly  drunk  by  the  Roman 
soldiers,  and  is'described  in  Mark  xv.  23  as  having  myrrh  mingled 
with  it.  St.  Matthew's  narrative  connects  this  act  with  the  words 
of  Ps.  Ixix.  22,  "  They  gave  me  gall  to  eat :  and  when  I  was 
thirsty,  they  gave  me  vinegar  to  drink." 

35  They  parted  his    garments    among  them. — The  words 

'  among  them  "  are  not  expressed  in  the  Gr.,  but  are  implied  1)y 
the  middle  voice  of  the  vei-b  "  parted."  The  quotation  from  Ps. 
xxii.  18,  "  They  parted  my  garments,"  is  omitted  in  the  Gr.  text, 
the  great  preponderance  of  ancient  authorities  being  against  it. 

38  Robbers.— All  English  versions,  "  thieves."  Yulg.,  latrones. 
See  Note  on  chap.  xxi.  13. 

39  Railed  on  him.— Auth.,  "  reviled  "  here,  but  at  Mark  xv.  29 
"  railed." 


64  ST.   MATTHEW— XXVII. 

42  He  is  the  king  of  Israel.— This,  by  tlae  omission  of  "  if," 
wliich  has  been  removed  from  the  Gr.  text,  becomes  an  assei-tion 
of  the  truth  made  in  derision. 

42,  43  We  will  believe  on  him.   .  .  He  trusteth  on  God.— 

The  Gr.  preposition  requires  the  rendering  "  on  "  in  both  places. 
Auth.  has,  "  we  will  believe  him.     ,     .     He  trusted  in  God." 

44  Cast  upon  him  the  same  reproach.— Auth.,  with  Tynd., 
"  cast  the  same  in  his  teeth,"  a  more  vivid  rendering,  and  better, 
if  it  did  not  suggest  that  there  was  a  corresponding  idiom  in  the 
Gr.     Wycl.,  "upbraided;"  Rliem.,  "reproached." 

50  Yielded  up  his  spirit.— The  spirit  which  he  had,  being  man 
as  a  part  of  liis  human  nature  {rh  wevfj-a),  concerning  wliicli  lie 
said  (Luke  xxiii.  46,  in  the  words  of  Ps.  xxxi.  5)  :  "Into  thy 
hands  I  commend  my  spirit."  The  English  versions  here  have 
"yielded  up,"  (following*  Wycl.,  "gave  up")  "the  ghost,"  which 
better  answers  to  the  word  that  follows  in  the  passage  of  Luke 
xxiii.  46,  e|eVi'€U(r6,  literally,  "  he  expired,"  "  gave  up  the  breath 
of  life."     Compare  John  xix.  30. 

52  The  tombs.— All  English  versions,  "  the  graves."  The  Gr. 
here  and  in  ver.  53  is  literally  "  the  monuments ;  "  and  so  Vulg., 
momimenta. 

54  The  Son  of  God. — Margin,  "  Or,  a  son."  The  word  "  son  "  has 
has  not  liere  tlie  article  in  the  Gr.,  and  though  the  article  may 
properly  stand  in  the  English,  it  does  not  necessarily  imply  tliat 
the  centurion  confessed  him  to  be  the  only  Son  of  God,  or  that 
it  was  the  same  solemn  ackiiowlcdgment  in  his  mouth  as  it  was 
when  spoken  by  Simon  Peter,  xiv.  33,  where  also  the  article  is 
omitted.  With  regard  to  the  significance  of  expressions  such  as 
this,  which  were  in  common  use,  not  much  can  be  iuferred  from 
the  absence  or  presence  of  the  article,  there  being  in  Gr.  no  in- 
definite article;  and  "  God's  Son"  or  "  Son  of  God  "  might  bo 
said  at  one  time  of  Him  who  at  another  would  be  called  "  the 
Son  of  God."    . 

50  The  sons  of  Zebedee.— Compare  Note  on  chap.  xx.  20. 

58  Asked.— Auth.  following  Tynd.,  "begged."  It  is  likely  that 
he  made  his  request  submissively,  but  the  Gr.  simply  says,  "  lie 
asked." 

Commanded  it  to  be  given  up. — Auth.  with  Tynd.,  "  com- 
manded it  to  be  delivered ;  "  "  the  body  "  is  omitted  by  change  in 
Gr.  text.  The  word  airodo9jjvai  properly  means  "  to  be  given  back," 


ST.    MATTHEW— XXVIl.  65 

and  is  not  elsewhere  in  Autli.  rendered  "  to  be  delivered,"'  which 
commonly  represents  another  Gr.  word. 

60  Tomb. — Autli.,  "  sepulchre."  See  Note  on  ver.  52.  In  tlie 
next  verse  the  Gr.  is  rdcpos,  which  is  rendered  "  sepulchre," 
as  in  Auth.  By  the  interment  the  tomb  {ixvqfx^iov)  became 
a  sei)idcre  (to<^05).     See  Note  on  chap,  xxiii.  8. 

62  Which  is  the  day  after.  —  Auth.,  "that  foUowed."  The 
clause  is  explanatory,  the  Evangelist  thus  explaining  to  his  Hebrew 
readers  that  the  ciiicifixion  took  place  on  the  day  of  preparation 
for  the  Sabbath,  Paraskeue,  and  that  the  chief  priests,  &c.,  went 
to  Pilate  on  the  day  after,  on  the  close  of  the  Sabbath  (See 
Alford's  Note). 

64  "  By  night"  (Auth.),  is  omitted  in  Gr.  text. 

Error, — So  all  English  versions,  foUomng  Vulg.,  thus  repre- 
senting it  as  a  possible  error  on  the  part  of  the  people,  who,  if 
made  to  believe  that  Christ  had  fulfilled  his  prediction,  and 
risen  again,  would  be  led  still  more  astray  than  before.  The 
Gr,  irXavri,  which  occurs  ten  times  in  the  NeAv  Testament, 
has  been  uniformly  in  the  Revised  Version,  and  with  only  three 
exceptions  in  the  Auth.,  translated  "  error."  Considering  that  the 
cognate  noun  TAa;'os is  "deceiver"  in  the  preiaous  Aerse,  and  the 
verb  is  commonly  rendered  "  to  lead  astray,"  implying  wilful  de- 
ception, many  commentators  have  proposed  to  read  "  deceit  "  in 
this  place  for  "error."  The  true  and  normal  meaning  of  the 
word,  however,  admits  of  an  easy  explanation,  and  must  therefore 
be  retained. 

65  Ye  have  a  guard  .  .  . — The  marginal  notes  show  that 
both  the  sayings  attributed  to  Pilate  are  of  ambiguous  meaning. 
It  may  be  that,  vexed  with  himself,  and  scorning  those  who  now 
came  to  him,  he  disnussed  them  curtly,  with  phrases  purposely 
obscure. 

A  guard. — So  Rhem.  Auth,  witli  Cranm.,  "  a  watch,"  wliich 
in  this  sense  is  archaic.     Tyud. and  Genev.,  "watchmen." 

QQ  The    guard    being    with    them. — Auth.,  "  and  setting    a 
watch,"  a  departure  from  the  literal  rendering  of  the  earlier  ver- 
sions "  with  watclimen,"  probably  made  on  account  of  the  ob- 
jectionable juxtaposition  of  words  which  would  be  presented  by 
.    the  translation,  "  sealing  the  stone  with  a  watch," 


66  ST.    MATTHEW— XXVIII. 

CHAPTER  XXVIII. 

1  Late  on  the  Sabbath-day. — Auth.,  "in  the  end  of."  In- 
stances are  given  by  Bengel  from  later  Greek  writers  (Plutarch 
and  Pliilostratus)  of  the  use  of  6\pe  for  "  after."  If  this  sense 
could  be  admitted  in  the  New  Testament,  the  narrative  of  St. 
Matthew  would  be  brought  into  strict  accord  with  St.  Mark's, 
"when  the  Sabbath  was  past." 

2  "  From  the  door  "  (Auth.)  is  omitted  in  the  Gr.  text. 

3  His  appearance. — Auth. ,  following  Tynd.,"  his  countenance." 
The  Gr.  i54a  (idea),  properly  "  form,"  "  outward  appearance,"  is 
not  elsewhere  found  in  the  New  Testament.  Wycl.  has  "  his 
looking,"  after  Vulg.,  aspectus.  The  English  translators  may 
have  taken  "  countenance,"  in  order  to  associate  the  passage  with 
Dan  X.  11,  where  it  is  said  of  the  angel,  "  his  face  was  as  the 
appearance  of  lightning." 

4  The  watchers. — Auth.,  with  Wycl.  and  Tynd.,  "the  keepers," 
which  is  used  for  another  word,  <t>v\SL^  (Acts  v.  23).  Here  the  Gr. 
is  01  T-npovuTfs,  which  is  translated  "watching  "  in  Auth.  xxvii.  54. 

Did  quake. — Auth.,  "  did  shake."  Wycl.  "  were  afeard,"  fol- 
lowing the  loose  I'endering  of  Vulg.,  exterriti  sunt.  Tynd., 
"  were  astonied."  Tlie  Gr.  denotes  "  trembling,"  and  the  cognate 
noun  at  verse  2  is  "  an  earthquake." 

5  Pear  not  ye.— So  the  Auth,.  correcting  Tynd.,  "Be  not  afraid." 
The  "  ye  "  is  emphatic  in  the  Gr..  which  is  not  the  case  at  ver.  10, 
where  the  Lord  repeats  the  encouraging  salutation  of  the  angel. 
Though  the  watchmen  were  terrified,  the  women  are  told  that 
they  need  not  fear ;  the  pious  purpose  of  their  visit  to  the  sepul- 
chre is  known  to  God. 

Which  hath  been  crucified.  —  Tlae  event  is  spoken  of  as 
quite  recent,  the  Gr.  verb  being  in  the  perfect  tense.  "  Auth., 
"  which  was  crucified." 

6  The  Lord. — We  could  iU  have  spared  these  words;  yet  the 
sentence,  if,  according  to  a  strongly  ^supported  various  reading, 
they  were  omitted,  would  be  in  keeping  with  the  sublime  brevity 
of  the  angel's  address. 

8  From  the  tomb.— See  Notes  on  chap,  xx^ai.  52 — 60.  It  had 
ceased  to  be  rd<pos,  a  sepulchre,  and  had  become  again  fivvfj-etov,  an 
empty  touili. 

9  As  they  went.     .     . — (Auth.).,  omitted  in  the  Gr.  text. 


ST.   MATTHEW— XXVIII.  67 

They  took  hold  of  his  feet. — So  Rliem.  All  other  EugHsli 
Tersious,  "  held  him  by  his  feet,"  followiug  Yulg.,  temper  unt, 
which  would  imply  a  continued  holding,  as  if  to  detain  him," 
which  is  not  the  meaning  of  the  Gr.  iKparria-ey. 

10  Fear  not. — As  at  verse  5,  where  see  Note. 

11  That  were  come  to  pass.— Auth.,  "that  were  done,"  with 
Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following  Yulg.,  facta  fuerunt,  as  at  chap.  i.  22 ; 
xxvi.  56,  &c.  Tlie  Latin  fio  is  a  good  translation  of  the  Gr. 
yivofiai,  but  its  ]3ast  tense  (as  here)  is  not  an  equivalent  of  the  past 
tenses  of  yivofxat. 

14  If  this  come  to  the  governor's  ears. —  This  is  one  of 
Tyndale's  idiomatic  and  felicitous  renderings.  The  Gr.,as  nearly 
as  it  can  be  translated,  is  "  If  this  be  heard  before  the  governor," 
which  suggests  the  alternative  reading,  given  in  the  Margin,  "  If 
this  come  to  a  hearing  (a  judicial  hearing)  before  the  governor." 
"Wycl.  has,  "  if  this  be  heard  of  the  justice."  Yulg.,  si  hoc 
auditum  fuerit  a  prcBside. 

And  rid  you  of  care. — Auth.,  "  make  you  secui-e,"  as  Wycl., 
"  make  sicher."  Yulg.,  securos  vos  faciemus.  This  woidd  be 
correct  if  "secure"  still  bore  the  meaning  of  the  Latin  securus, 
"  free  from  care :  "  but  in  modern  usage  it  is  synon^Tuous  with 
"  safe  ;  "  and  that  sense  is  given  to  the  Gr.  by  Tynd.,  ''  save  you 
harmless." 

15  Was  spread  abroad. — Auth.,  "  is  commonly  reported."  This 
change  is  required  by  the  meaning  of  tlie  Gr.  verb,  and  by  its 
tense  (the  aorist).  The  past  act  is  sho's^ii  in  the  Gr.  to  extend  to 
the  present  time  by  the  addition  of  the  words  "  until  this  day." 
The  English  idiom  requires  a  connecting  link,  such  as  "  and  con- 
tinueth." 

16  Unto  the  mountain. — The  article  indicates  that  a  particular 
place  in  Galilee  had  been  appointed  by  our  Lord,  either  through 
the  angel  (ver.  10),  or,  more  probably,  at  one  of  his  own  appear- 
ances to  his  disciples. 

18  Authority. — The  usual  rendering  of  i^ovaia.  All  English  ver- 
sions, "  power." 

Hath  been  given.— Auth.,  "is  given."  The  Gr.  is  i^roperly, 
"  was  given ;  but  here,  and  in  many  other  places,  the  exact  force 
of  the  aorist  cannot  be  insisted  on. 

19  Make  disciples  of.— AU  English  versions,  "  teach,"  follow- 
ing Yulg.,  docentes.     See  Note  on  chap.  xiii.  52. 


68  ST.    MATTHEW— XXVIII. 

Into  the  name.— All  Euglish  versions, "  in  the  name."  Yulg., 
in  nomine,  and  so  Acts  xix.  5.  But  at  Rom.  vi.  3,  Auth.,  fol- 
lowing Cranm.,  rightly  has  "  baptized  into  Jesus  Christ."  Here 
Beza  also  has  in  nomine. 

The  name  of  the  triune  God  was  to  be  to  the  believers  all  and 
more  than  all  that  the  name  of  Jehovah  had  been  to  the  Jews. 
To  be  baptized  into  that  name  was  to  be  consigned  to  the  loving, 
redeeming,  sanctifying  power  of  Father,  Son,  and  Holy  Ghost. 

20  Alway.— The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  all  the  days;"  and  so  Vulg., 
in  omnibus  cliebus  ;  and  Wycl.,  "in  all  days."  The  continuity 
of  the  Lord's  presence  is  fully  expressed  in  English  by  alway 
(Tynd.) ;  but  more  impressively  by  the  Gr.,  which  says  in  effect, 
"  there  is  not  one  of  the  days  even  unto  the  end  of  the  world,  on 
which  I  will  not  be  with  you.  " 

The  end  of  the  world. — Margin,  "  Or,  "  the  consummation  of 
the  age.  See  Note  on  chap.  xiii.  39.  The  phrase  only  occurs  in 
this  Gospel :  with  "  ages  "  (plural),  Heb.  ix.  26. 

The  final  Amen  is  not  found  in  the  most  ancient  MSS.  and 
versions. 


THE    GOSPEL    ACCORDING    TO 

ST.     MARK. 

CHAPTER    I. 

2  Isaiah,  the  prophet.— So  Vulg.,  Wycl.,  Rliem.  The  Auth., 
with  Tynd.,  follows  the  reading  noticed  in  the  Margin, "  the 
prophets,"  an  alteration  made  in  some  early  MSS.,  apparently 
for  the  purpose  of  accommodating  the  text  to  the  fact  that  two 
prophets  are  here  quoted  (Mai.  iii.  1 ;  Isa.  xl.  3). 

3  Make  ye  ready.— So  Wycl.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "prepare," 
as  in  the  last  verse ;  where,  however,  the  Gr.  is  not  the  same  word 
as  here,  and  "  make  ye  ready  "  has,  consequently,  been  adopted 
for  the  word  which  is  used  in  this  verse  and  in  the  parallel  pas- 
sage of  Matt.  iii.  3. 

4  John  came,  who  baptized.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  John  did 
baiitize,"  passing  over  the  Gr.,  iyevero,  which  is  feebly  rendered 
in  Yvi\g..fint  Johannes  haptizans,  and  Wycl.,  "  John  was  in  tlie 
desert  baptizing."  Moreover,  the  Gr.  text,  as  now  amended,  has 
the  article,  and  instead  of  ''  baptizing,"  the  participle  lias  tlie 
meaning  "  he  that  baptized."  The  exact  force  of  iyfveTo 
here  and  in  Averse  11  is  '"  came  into  existence,"  and  the  meaning 
of  the  whole  is  sufficiently  expressed  by  "  John  came,  who 
baptized." 

5  Country.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Yulg.,  regio.  Auth.,  with 
Tynd.,  "  land,"  which  is  the  usual  translation  of  another  word  (7^). 

The  river  Jordan.— Auth.,  "  the  river  of  Jordan,"  following 
Rhem.,  which  was  misled  by  Jordanis  ftmnine  of  Yulg.,  Jorclanis 
being  supposed  to  represent  a  genitive  in  the  Gr.  But  Wycl. 
rightly  had  "flum  Jordan,"  and  so  TjTid. 

3  A  leathern  girdle.— More  literal  and  plainer  than  "  a  girdle 
of  a  skin,"  as  all  English  versions.     Had  is  inserted  because  the 


70  ST.   MARK— I. 

English  "  clothed  "  is  not,  like  the  Gr.  which  it  represents,  ap- 
plicable to  the  girdle  as  well  as  to  the  camel's  hair. 

7  There  cometh  after  me  he  that  is  mightier  than  I. 

— Auth.,  "there  cometh  one  that  is  mightier  than  I  after  me." 
This  change,  besides  improving  the  rhythm,  gives  the  requisite 
force  to  the  article,  which  is  omitted  in  all  the  English  versions, 
except  Oranm.,  "he  that  is  stronger;"  the  anarthrous  Latin  of 
the  Yulg.  leading  into  error  by  venit  fortior. 

8  With  water. — Margin,  "Or  in."  The  Gr.  eV  may  denote 
either  the  means  wherewith,  or  the  element  wherein,  the  baptism 
is  performed ;  the  former  sense  seems  best  to  suit  each  of  the 
mystic  rites  which  are  here  contrasted. 

10  Rent  asunder. — All  English  versions,  "  opened,"  as  Auth..  or 
"  open,"  following  Yulg.,  ajpertos,  except  Genev.,  "  cleft,"  which 
was  probably  suggested  by  Beza's  Latin,  findi.  The  Gr.  trxiConevovs 
requires  a  Avord  of  this  meaning,  and  is  translated  "  rent "  in 
Matt,  xxvii.  51  (Auth.),  and  elsewhere. 

11  The  heavens. — As  in  last  verse.  Auth.,  "  heaven."  See  Note 
on  Matt.  iii.  17. 

Auth.  inserts  saying,  which  is  not  required,  and,  as  we  are  now 
concerned  with  the  vivid  and  often  abrupt  narrative  of  St.  Mark, 
is  better  omitted. 

In  thee. — ^For  Auth.,  "  in  whom,"  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

14  Delivered  up. — So  Rhem.  Auth.,  "  put  in  prison,"  foUowiug 
Genev.,  "VVycL,  and  Tynd.,  "  taken."  Compare  Note  on  Matt, 
iv.  12. 

15  Believe  in  the  Gospel.— Auth.,  "believe  the  Gospel."  The 
preposition  eV,  in  conjunction  with  iriaTevw,  "  to  believe,"  signify, 
ing  "  I  belicA'e  in,"  is  scarcely  found  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment. The  same  meaning  is  conveyed  in  the  Creeds  of  the 
Church,  and  in  the  New  Testament — especially  in  the  Gospel  of 
St.  John — by  Tncrrevu)  us. 

16  Passing  along: — For  Auth.,  "  as  he  walked,"  by  change  in  Gr. 
text. 

18  left- — So  Wycl.  and  Vulg.,  relidis  retibus.  Auth.,  following 
Tynd.,  "forsook,"  implying  sudden  abandonment,  which,  though 
true  m  fact,  is  not  expressed  in  the  Gr, 

23  Straightway. — This  word  is  one  of  the  most  noticeable  charac- 
teristics  of  St.  Mark's  Gospel.  It  is  here  added  by  change  iu 
the  Gr.  text. 


ST.   MARK— II.  71 

24  Let  us  alone. — (Autli.)  omitted  by  change  in  the  Gr.  text.  The 
changes  of  text  throughout  this  Gospel  are  much  more  numerous 
than  in  the  other  three ;  and  they  wiU  only  be  noticed  in  the  few 
eases  in  which  they  are  of  special  interest  or  importance. 

27  What  is  this?  a  new  teaching?  with  authority  .  .  . 

— For  Auth.,  "  What  new  doctrine  is  this  ?  For  with  authority, 
&c,"  by  change  in  Gr.  text.  These  abrupt  exclamations,  though 
not  elegant,  are  life-like,  and  in  keeping  with  the  general  style  of 
the  Evangelist. 

28  The  report  of  him.— See  Note  on  Matt.  iv.  24. 

Went  out. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "spread  abroad,"  which  better 
represents  another  word  in  verse  45  and  Matt.  ix.  31. 

The  region  of  Galilee  round  about— i.e.,  round  aboxit  Ca- 
pernaum. Auth.,  "  the  region  round  about  Galilee."  The  Gr. 
may  be  grammatically  rendered  either  way  :  the  context  decides 
in  favour  of  the  former. 

35  A  desert  place. — "Desert"  is  the  constant  rendering  of 
eprifios ;   otherwise  "  a  solitary  place  "  would  here  be  preferable. 

38  For  to  this  end.  —  Auth.,  "  for  therefore,"  after  Cranm., 
with  the  same  meaning,  but  using  "  therefore  "  in  its  now  obsolete 
sense. 

45  Spread  abroad.— Auth.,  "  blaze  abroad."   See  Note  on  verse  28. 


CHAPTER  II. 

4  The  crowd. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  the  press."    The  Gr.  is 
the  word  usually  translated  "  multitude." 

18  Were  fasting.— So  Wycl.  Tynd.,  "  did  fast."  Auth.,  with 
Rhem.,  "used  to  fast."  The  Gr.  is  literally  "were  fasting," 
and  describes  what  was  being  done  at  that  particular  time. 

21,  22  See  Notes  on  the  parallel  passage  of  Matt.  ix.  16,  17. 


72  ST.   MARK— III. 


CHAPTER  III. 

1  Had  his  liand  withered.— Auth.,  "  a  withered  hand."  The 
Gr.  idiom  uses  the  definite  article,  "  the  hand,"  as  in  English  we 
use  the  possessive  pronoun. 

4  To  do  harm. — A.iith.,  with  Wycl.  and  Cranm.,  "  to  do  evil." 
Tynd.  and  Geuev.,  "to  do  an  evil."  The  Gr.  denotes  not  evil 
generally,  but  injury  to  a  feUow-creatm-e. 

A  life. — Not,  as  Auth.,  "  life  "  generally. 

5  The  hardening. — Auth.,  with  Genev.,  "  the  hardness,"  proba- 
bly following  Beza,  q^iod  occalluisset  cor  eorum ;  other  versions, 
"  blindness."  The  Gr.  indicates  the  process,  which  the  Lord  ob- 
served in  them  going  on.  The  same  word  irupucris  is  used  by 
St.  Paul  (Rom.  xi.  25 ;  Eph.  iv.  18).  The  state  in  which  the 
hardening  ends  is  expressed  by  o-KX-npoKapSla,  which  may  be  ren- 
dered "  hard-heartedness." 

7  The  change  in  punctuation  is  to  be  noticed,  showing  that  a  fresh 
sentence  commences  after  "  Jerusalem."  Two  multitudes  are 
mentioned :  one,  from  different  parts  of  Palestine,  "  followed 
"  him  ;  "  the  other,  from  outlying  regions,  "  came  unto  him." 

12  Charged  them  much.— Auth.,  "  .straitly."     See  chap.  v.  23. 

26  Hath  risen  up  .  .  .  and  is.  — Auth.,  "  rise  up  .  .  . 
and  be."  The  verbs  are  in  the  indicative  mood,  not  in  the  sub- 
junctive as  at  verse  25. 

29  An  eternal  sin.— The  preponderance  of  the  best  ancient  au- 
thorities, both  of  MSS.  and  ver.sions,  is  in  favour  of  this  reading ; 
and  it  has  been  adopted  by  the  greater  number  of  critical  editors. 
A  sin  may  be  said  to  be  eternal  if  it  is  undying  in  its  guilt  and 
its  consequences.  The  Vulg.  has  eterni  delicti  ;  Wycl.,  "  ever- 
lasting ti-espass  ;  "  Rhem., "  eternal  sin  ;  "  Auth.,  following  Tynd., 
"  eternal  damnation." 


ST.   MARK— IV.  73 


CHAPTER  IV. 


For  this  chapter  compare  Notes  in  the  parallel  passage  of  Matt, 
xiii.  1,  &c. 

10  The  parables.— For  Auth.,  "the  parable,"  by  change  of  Gr, 
text. 

11  All  things  are  done.— So  all  English  versions,  except  Auth., 
which  inserts  "  these,"  putting  a  limit  to  what  is  expressed  by  our 
Lord  as  a  universal  truth ;  as  Beza,  per  parabolas  omnia  ista 
fiunt.     But  Vulg.,  in  parabolis  omnia  fiunt. 

21  See  Notes  on  Matt.  v.  15. 

22  Come  to  light.— So  Rhem.  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "come 
abroad."  The  Gr.  denotes  becoming  manifest,  rather  than 
spreading. 

29  When  the  fruit  is  ripe.— Literally  when  it  "  yields,"  "  sur- 
renders " — i.e.,  to  the  reaper.      Auth.,  "  is  brought  forth." 

He  putteth  forth  .— Auth.,  "  he  putt  eth  in."  Tynd.,  "he 
thrusteth  in."  Yxilg.,  mittit  falcem  :  "  sendeth"  is  recognised 
in  our  Margin,  but  is  not  probable.  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in 
Joel  iv.  13  (LXX.  version),  where  the  Auth.  has  "  Put  ye  in  the 
sickle,  for  the  harvest  is  ripe  ;  "  a  passage  which  was  evidently 
in  the  mind  of  our  Lord  in  giA'ing  this  parable.  {Field,  "  Otinm 
Norvicense.") 

30  Parable. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  the  Gr.  being  irapaffoKfi,  para- 
bole.     Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  comparison." 

36  Leaving.— Auth.,  "when  they  had  sent  away."  All  other 
English  versions,  "  they  left." 

37  Was  now  filling.— The  verb  is  in  the  jiresent  tense.  All 
English  versions,  "  full,"  as  if  a  past  tense  had  been  used. 

38  The  Cushion.— All  English  versions,  "a  pillow";  the  seat  of 
the  rowers  and  steersman.  (Alford  and  Wordsworth.)  Bengel, 
quoting  Theophylact,  says  it  was  of  wood. 

41  Who  then  is  this?— Wycl.,  "  Who,  thinkest  thou,  is  this  ?  " 
following  Vulg.,  Quis  putas,  est  iste?  Tynd.  and  Genev., 
"  What  fellow  is  this  ?  "  Auth., "  What  manner  of  man  is  tliis  ?  " 
omitting  the  particle  &pa  (which  the  Vulg.  attempts  to  express  Ijy 
putas),  and  translating  tIs  (who  ?)  as  if  it  were  voTos  (Avhat  manner 
of  man  ?). 


74  ST.    MARK— Y. 


CHAPTER  y. 

1  Gerasenes.— For  "  Gadarenes"  (Auti.),  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

See  Note  on  Matt.  viii.  28. 

4  Had  strength. — The  Greek  verb  requires  a  more  distinct  and 
expressive  rendering  than  "could"  (Auth.),  which  is  used  for 
r)Svi'aTo  in  verse  3. 

11  On  the  mountain  side.— For  Auth.,  "nigh  unto  the  moun- 
tains," by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

15  Even  him  that  had  the  legion.— Following  the  order  of 
the  Gr.  text,  in  which  this  clause  is  added,  as  an  after-thought, 
at  the  end  of  the  sentence. 

19  Go  to  thy  house. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  following 
Tynd.,  "  Go  liome;"  "  his  house,"  the  proper  place  for  one  who 
had  long  been  houseless,  dwelling  among  the  tombs. 

21  By  the  sea. — The  Gr.  signifies  not  "  nigh  unto  "  (Auth.),  but 
"  by  the  side  of,"  on  the  sea-shore. 

30  That  the  power  proceeding  from  him  had  gone  forth.— 

The  presence  of  the  Gr.  article,  overlooked  in  all  English  ver- 
sions, requires  this  change  in  the  construction  and  meaning  of 
the  sentence.  Power  is  the  proper  and  usual  meaning  of  the 
word,  which  here  is  rendered  "  virtue  "'  in  Aixth.  and  previous 
versions,  foUowiug  Vulg.,  ''  virtutem." 

36  Not  heeding. — Margin,  "  Or  overhearing,''  by  change  in  Gr. 
text,  for  Auth.,  "when  Jesus  heard."     See  Matt,  xviii.  17. 

39  Why  make  ye  a  tumult. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  Why  make 
ye  this  ado  ?  "  The  word  in  Greek  is  the  cognate  verb  to  the 
noun  translated  "  tumult "  in  the  preceding  verse ;  and  the 
idiomatic  rendering  of  Tynd,  therefore  gives  way  to  the 
claims  of  uniformity. 


ST.   MAEK— YI.  76 


CHAPTER  VI. 

The  greater  part  of  the  changes  in  this  chapter  are  due  to  the 
emendations  which  have  been  made  on  the'  authority  of  ancient 
writers  in  the  Gr.  text. 

8  Wallet.— For  Auth.  "scrip,"  obsolete  in  this  sense.  See  Matt. 
X.  10. 

9  And,  said  he,  put  not  on.— There  is  here,  according  to  the 
amended  Gr.  text,  a  change  from  the  third  person  to  the  second, 
and  the  verb  is  in  the  imperative  mood. 

14  Had  become  known.— OomjDare  note  on  iv.  22. 

19  Set  herself  against  him.— Auth.,  "  had  a  quarrel  against 
him."  The  unusual  word  iv^^xev  denotes  rather  a  secret  spite  or 
grudge,  than  an  open  "  quarrel,"  or  cause  of  enmity.  Yulg., 
insidiabatur  illi. 

The  same  verb  is  used  in  the  LXX.  version  (Gen.  xlix.  23).  In 
classical  Gr.  it  is  found  only  in  Herodotus,  with  the  addition  of 
X^^ov.  See  Herod,  vi.  119 :  ivexeiv  is  an  elliptical  expression, 
as  ewexeii^  {suhaudi  vovv). — Field. 

20  Kept  him  safe. — i.e.,  against  Herodias  (Bengel).  So  "Wycl., 
following  Vulg.,  custodiebat  eum ;  and  this  is  the  meaning  of  crw- 
T7)piw  in  all  the  places  in  which  it  occurs  in  the  New  Testament. 
Compare  Matt.  ix.  17,  "both  are  preserved";  Luke  ii.  19,  and 
v.  38.  Auth.,  "observed  him,"  following  Tynd.,  "gave  him 
reverence." 

21  Chief  men. — Literally,  "first  men."  Auth.,  following  Tynd. 
"  chief  estates,"  for  which,  as  the  italics  show,  there  is  no  equiva- 
lent in  the  Gr. 

25  Forthwith. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  by  and  by,"  which  in  modern 
usage  points  to  a  time  not  so  immediate  as  the  Gr.  e|auT^s, 

27  A  soldier  of  his  guard. — Auth..  "an  executioner."  Wycl., 
strangely,  "  a  man-queller ; "  Tynd.,  "  the  hangman."  This,  as 
also  gf?-«&af wm, "  a  bed "  (verse  55  of  this  chapter),  St.  Mark 
has  used,  in  a  Greek  form.  The  Latin  was  spicidator  (as  in 
Vulg.)  or  speculator,  and  if  derived  from  spictdtim,  "  a  jave- 
lin," would  mean  "  one  of  the  body  guard,"  who  carried  such 
weapons  ;  if  from  speculari,  "  an  executioner." 

43  Broken  pieces.— See  Note  on  Matt.  xiv.  20. 


76  ST.   MARK— VI. 

46  After  he  had  taken  leave  of  them.— Anth.,  following 
Tynd.  and  Vulg.,  "  when  he  had  sent  them  away."  The  Gr. 
word  has  not  the  same  meaning  as  that  wliich  is  rendered 
"  sendeth  away  "  in  the  preceding  verse  ;  it  is  coiTectly  translated 
in  Luke  ix.  61,  "  Suffer  nie  to  bid  farewell  to  them."     (Auth.) 

48  Distressed  in  rowing.— Auth.,  "toiling,"as  Vulg.,  lahorantes, 
and  Rhem.,  "  labouring."     See  Note  on  Matt.  xiv.  24. 

49  An  apparition.— Auth.,  "  a  spirit."  See  Note  on  Matt, 
xiv.  26. 

52  They  understood  not  concerning  the  loaves.— So  Wycl., 
Tynd.,  and  Rhem.,  following  Vulg.,  nonintellexsrunt  de  panibus. 
The  characteristic  brevity  of  St.  Mark's  style,  which  is  so 
apparent  here,  becomes  obscured  by  the  insertion  made  (in  Auth.- 
only)  to  ease  the  sentence  and  expres.s  the  meaning,  "  they  con- 
sidered not  the  miracle  of  the  loaves." 

"They  did  not  understand  concerning  the  loaves,"  how  the  multi- 
plication of  them  proved  their  Master's  power  over  Nature,  and 
should  therefore  have  prevented  them  from  being  troubled  when 
they  saw  Him  coming  to  them  over  the  water,  or  amazed  at  the 
sudden  dropping  of  the  wind  as  soon  as  He  joined  them.  Their 
hearts  were  "  hardened "  against  conviction,  not  by  wilful  un- 
belief, but  by  diJness  of  perception. 

53  Moored  to  the  shore.— Auth.,  "  drew  to  the  shore."  Tjaul. 
and  Cranm.,  "  drew  up  into  the  haven."  The  Greek,  wliicli  does 
not  elsewhere  occui  in  the  New  Testament,  signifies  not  "  ap- 
proacliing,"  but  "  making  fast  the  boats  to  the  shore."  Vulg., 
ufplicuerunt. 

56  The  market-places.— The  Gr.  requires  this  rendering,  what- 
ever may  have  l^cen  the  places  answering  to  this  appellation  in 
the  open  coimtry  (Gr.  ay^iuvi).  AH  Engl,  versions  have  "streets," 
after  Vulg.,  plateis. 


ST.   MARK— VII.  77 


CHAPTER  YII. 


2  Defiled. — Tlie  Gr.,  literally  "  commou,"  is  used  in  the  New 
Testament  to  signify  that  which  is  ceremonially  "  unclean,"  as  in 
Acts  X.  14;  Rom.  xiv.  14. 

3  Diligently. — All  Engl,  versions,  "  oft,"  following  Yulg.,  crebro. 
The  Gr.  is  a  rare  word,  and  of  uncertain  meaning. 

4  Wash,  chemselves.— Margin,  "  Gr.  baptize."  The  use  of  this 
word  iudicates  that  the  ceremonial  washing  on  their  return  from 
worldly  business  in  the  market-place  extended  to  the  dipping  of 
the  whole  person,  and  that  the  yesscls  were  also,  as  a  religious 
purification,  dipped  in  water.  The  marginal  note  shows  that 
there  is  some  strong  authority  for  the  reading,  "  and  couches  " 
(i.e.,  the  couches  on  which  they  reclined  at  meals),  for  which  the 
Auth.,  follomng  Tynd.,  lias  "  and  of  tables." 

7  Precepts. — Auth.,  "  commandments,"  which  rej)reseuts  a  diffe- 
rent  word  in  the  next  verse.     Compare  Matt.  xv.  9. 

8  Ye  leave. — So  Wycl.  "Vulg.,  relinquentes.  Auth.,  "  laying 
aside."  The  word  is  usually  rendered  "  leave,"  as  at  chap  viii.  13 
(Auth.). 

10  Speaketh  evil  of. — Auth.,  "  curseth."  See  Notes  bearing  on 
this  and  the  following  verses  in  the  parallel  passage  of  Matt. 
XV.  1. 

11  Given  to  G^ocZ.— Auth.,  "a  gift."  "A  gift  or  oblation  to 
God  "  is  one  meaning  of  the  Hebrew  word  korban,  which  is  also 
used  in  Matt,  xxvii.  6  for  the  place  in  which  the  oJferings  were 
received,  "the  treasury"  of  the  Temple.  The  previous  versions 
vaiy  much  in  their  renderings  of  this  verse.  Tynd.  has  it  con-ectly 
"  given  God."  The  sentence  as  now  i^unctuated  and  translated 
is  clear,  without  the  insertion  of  Auth.,  "  he  shall  be  free." 

19  This  He  said,  making  all  meats  clean:  —  Auth.,  with  aU 
previous  versions,  ''  j)urging  all  meats  "  (connected  with  "  goeth 
out").  By  a  change  of  reading  in  the  Gr.  text  (Kadapi^wv  for 
Kaddpi(ov,  the  masculine  for  the  neuter),  "  purging,"  or  "  making 
clean,"  is  connected  with  "  he  saith  "  at  the  beginning  of  verse  18; 
and  to  make  the  meaning  clear  in  translation,  a  new  sentence  is 
commenced  at  the  end  of  verse  19  by  the  insertion  of  "  This  he 
said."  And  thus  the  great  truth  is  for  the  fii'st  time  declared  in 
this  Gospel,  that  by  the  teaching  of  Christ  the  ceremonial  unclean- 
nesses  enforced  by  the  law  of  Moses  were  abolislied.  Tlie  same 
was  again  declared  to  St.  Peter  in  liis  vision  on  the  house-top, 


78  ST.    MARK— VII. 

Acts  X.  15,  "  Wliat  God  liatli  cleansed  make  not  thou  common," 
where  the  same  Gr.  is  used,  iKaOdpuxe,  "  cleansed."  These  two 
passages,  thus  brought  side  by  side,  become  an  interesting  liuk,  in 
addition  to  those  which  have  long  been  observed,  between  St. 
Mark  and  St.  Peter.  It  is  St.  Mark  alone  who  draws  this  infe- 
rence from  the  words  of  our  Lord,  though  they  are  recorded  by 
St.  Matt.  XV.  15.  The  commonly  received  reading  and  rendering 
of  the  verse  scarcely  admits  of  a  satisfactory  interpretation. 
The  above  explanation  is  that  of  Origen  commenting  on  the  parallel 
passage  of  St.  Matthew,  and  of  St.  Chrysostom,  who  says  that 
"according  to  Mark,  by  saying  these  words  the  Saviour  made  all 
meats  clean."  In  like  manner,  at  chap.  iii.  30,  he  makes  a  com- 
ment on  a  saying  of  our  Lord,  where  the  same  Avords,  TJiis  he 
said,  may  be  suiiplied.  "  This  he  said,  because  tliey  said  he 
hatli  an  unclean  spirit." 

Dr.  Field,  who  advocates  this  intei-pretation,  also  gives  an  in- 
teresting history  of  it,  in  his  comment  on  the  passage  {Otium 
Now.,  p.  2-4).  The  places  of  Origen  and  St.  Chrysostom,  he 
says,  had  escaped  the  notice  of  all  critics  and  commentators  till 
Matthaei  noticed  them  in  his  editions  of  the  New  Testament, 
1788,  1803,  in  disparaging  terms.  From  that  time  no  further 
notice  was  taken  of  this  interpretation  tiU  Dr.  Field  drew  atten- 
tion to  it  in  editing  St.  Chi-ysostora's  Homilies  on  St.  Mattheiv, 
torn,  iii.,  p.  112 ;  nor  even  then  did  any  critic  or  expositor,  En- 
glisli  or  foreign,  take  notice  of  it  until  Dr.  Burgon,  in  his  work  on 
the  last  twelve  A^erses  of  St.  Mark,  made  favourable  mention  of 
Dr.  Field's  attempt  to  restore  the  true  interpretation  of  the 
passage.  He  may  I'casonably,  therefore,  have  been  gratified  on 
.  finding  it  soon  after  in  the  text  of  the  Revised  Verson,  without 
even  a  marginal  variation. 

26  A  Greek.— Margin,  "Or  Gentile."  The  term  "Greek"  appears 
to  have  been  in  familiar  use  among  the  Jews  as  a  synonym  for 
"  Gentile,"  even  when  the  people  so  spoken  of  were  not  Greeks 
by  race.  This  is  especially  the  case  in  the  Epistles  of  St.  Paul, 
by  whom  Jew  and  Greek  are  often  contrasted — Jew  and  Gentile 
only  once,  when  lie  is  recalling  words  addressed  by  him  to  St. 
Peter  before  the  Jewish  Christians  at  Antioch,  Gal.  ii.  14. 

35  Bond. — So  Wycl. ;  and  Yulg.,  vinculum,  the  Gr.  being  Sea/xSs. 
Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  string." 


ST.    MARK— VIII.  79 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

4  Fill.— So  WycL:  Aiitli.  witli  Tynd.,   "satisfy."      The   Gr.   is 
properly  "  fill  fiUl." 
17  "Yet"  (Aatli.)  is  omitted  before  "hardened,"  by  change  in  Gr. 
text. 

19,  20.  To  the  marginal  note  on  these  verses  it  may  be  added  that  in 
verse  19  the  Gr.  is,  "  how  many  baskets  full  of  broken  pieces," 
inverse  20  "  the  fillings  or  contents  of  how  many  baskets,"  "how 
many  basketfuls,"  making  it  conceivable  that  in  the  former  case 
twelve  baskets  were  filled,  in  the  latter,  one  basket  seven  times. 
This  slight  distinction  is  not  observed  in  the  parallel  passage  of 
Matt.  xvi.  10. 

23  Brought— For  Auth.,  "led,"  as  in  Matt.vi.  13;  Mark  ix.  2,  &c. 

Village. — The  Gr.  is  usually  so  rendered  in  Auth. ;  but  here, 
"  town." 

24  I    see  men;  for   I   behold  them,  as  trees  walking.— 

So  Tjnd.  Auth.,  with  Vulg.  and  Wycl.,  follows  another  reading 
of  the  Gr.  text,  wliich  gives  the  less  graphic  rendering,  "  I  see 
men  as  trees,  walking." 

25  He  looked  stedfastly  .  .  .  and  saw  all  things 
clearly. — By  changes  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  he  made  him  look 
up     .     .     .     and  saw  every  man  clearly." 

26  Do  not  even  enter  into  the  village.— By  change  of  Gr. 
text,  for  Auth.,  "  Neither  go  into  the  town,  nor  tell  it  to  any  in 
the  town." 

27,  33,  34.  See  Notes  on  the  parallel  passage  of  Matt.  xvi.  13, 
23,  24. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

3  Glistering.— So  Rhem.  Yvlg.,splendenUa;  Auth.,  "shining," 
following  Tynd.  The  Gr.  requires  a  word  expressive  of  dazzling 
brightness. 

Exceeding  white.— The  comparison  "  as  snow,"  which  is  in 
all  English  versions  and  Vulg.,  may  have  been  imported  into 
some  01  the  MSS.  at  an  early  period  from  Dan.  vii.  9. 


80  ST.    MARK— IX. 

6,  7  Became  sore  afraid— there  came  a  cloud— there  came 
a  voice. — The  same  word  is  repeated  in  the  Gr.  Auth.,  "  they 
were  sore  afraid  " — "  there  was  a  cloud  " — "  a  voice  came." 

9  Save  when. — So  Yulg.,  nisi  aim,  and  Wycl.,  "  but  when." 
Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  till." 

12  And  how  is  it  written  of  the  Son  of  man    .    .    .     ?— 

The  strict  reuderiug  of  the  Gr.  requires  tliat  this  should  be  put 
as  a  question  (compare  verse  28  and  Note  there),  and  the  con- 
nection of  thought  appears  to  be  as  follows : — The  disciples  desire 
an  explanation  of  the  saying  of  the  sci'ibes  that  "  Eli j  all  must  first 
come."  Our  Lord  answers,  "  He  is  coming,  and  is  to  restore  all 
things ;  and  now  I  ask  you  how  it  is  that  it  is  written  of  the 
Son  of  man,  that  he  is  to  suffer  ?"  The  answer  to  that  question 
is,  that  as  Elijah,  though  he  came  and  suffered  in  fulhlnient  of 
prophecy,  is  to  come  again  and  restore  all  things,  so  the  Son, 
though  He  is  to  suffer,  shallcome  again  in  his  kingdom,  and  fulfil 
that  Avhich  is  written  of  Him.  The  latter  part  of  the  cnm[)arisou, 
however,  is  not  expressed,  but  loft  to  be  inferred  from  the  former 
part',  or  made  clear  by  future  events. 

18  Dasheth  him  down.— So  V/ycl.,  "hurtleth  down,"  after  Vulg., 
allidit.  Auth..  following  Tynd.,  "  beareth,"  (with  margin,  "  Or 
dasheth  him'") ;  but  at  Luke  ix.  42,  "  threw  him  down."  The  Gr. 
fi-fiyvvixi  has  usually  the  sense  of  "  tear,"  as  in  Matt.  to.  6  and  in 
classical  wi'iters;  l)ut  in  later  Gr.  sometimes  is  "to  fell,"  "to 
knock  do\vu,"  and  so  in  the  LXX.  version  of  the  Old  Testament. 
"  Tare  "  is  the  rendering  of  another  word  at  verse  20. 

Grindeth  his  teeth. —  Auth.,  "gnasheth  with  his  teeth," 
which  represents  another  Gr.  word. 

23  If  thou  canst. — Auth.,  "  if  thou  canst  believe,  all  things," 
&c.  By  the  omission  of  "  believe,"  consequent  on  a  change  in 
the  Gr.  text,  the  saj-ing  of  our  Lord  becomes  a  reiteration  of  the 
father's  words,  with  the  implied  meaning,  ''  how  canst  thou  speak 
so  doubtingly  ?  for  thee  this  may  be  done,  if  thou  hast  faith ;  aU 
things  are  possible  to  him  that  believeth." 

The  definite  article,  prefixed  to  this  saying  in  the  Gr.,  cannot 
without  being  cumbrously  over-translated,  he  given  in  English. 
Compare  Matt.  xix.  18 ;  Gal.  v.  14,  where,  as  here,  it  marks  the 
words  which  follow  as  a  well-known  saying  or  command. 

24  It  is  to  be  regi-etted  that  the  omission  of  "  with  tears  "  ( A.uth.) 
is  ruled  by  modern  criticism  to  be  necessary,  notwithstanding  the 
evidence  of  "  many  ancient  authorities." 


ST.    MARK— IX.  81 

28  Saying,  We  could  not  cast  it  out.— It  is  an  inten-ogation 
in  fact,  thougli  not  in  grammatical  construction  (like  "  the  scribes 
say,"  at  verse  11) — an  expression  of  surprise  and  disappointment, 
inviting,  though  not  asking  an  explanation,  which,  however,  is 
given  in  the  next  verse. 

29  And  fasting. — (Auth.),  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

33  What  were  ye  reasoning  in  the  way? — Auth.,  "what  was 
it  that  ye  disputed  among  yourselves  by  the  way  ?  "  The  word 
in  Gr.  is  not  the  same  that  is  translated  in  the  next  verse  "  dis- 
puted." By  his  use  of  it  our  Lord  appears  not  to  impute  to  the 
disciples  more  than  an  amicable  discussion. 

34  Who  was  the  greatest.  —  So  Wycl.  and  Rhem. ;  and  Yulg., 
quis  eorum  major  esset.  The  inserted  words  in  Auth.,  "  who 
should  he  the  greatest,"  point  to  a  future  precedency,  which  is 
not  the  question  here. 

35  Minister. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  after  Yulg.  Auth.  in  this 
place  (following  Tynd.),  has  "  servant;  "  but  in  chap.  x.  43,  Matt. 
XX.  26,  and  usually  in  the  Epistles  "  minister."  The  Gr.  word 
appears  in  the  Ei)istles  twice  in  an  English  form, "  deacon,"  and 
in  that  form  has  given  name  to  one  of  the  orders  of  the  Christian 
ministry.     The  cognate  verb  is  usually  translated  "  to  minister." 

40  Is  for  us.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  on  our 
part."     In  the  Gr.  the  contrast  is  made  by  the  two  prepositions. 

41  Because  ye  are  Christ's. — Tliis  follows  from  the  change  of 
Gr.  text,  which,  as  shown  in  the  margin,  is  literally,  "  in  name 
that  ye  are  Christ's."  Auth.,  "in  my  name,  because  ye  belong 
to  Christ."  With  this  passage  may  be  compared  1  Cor.  iii.  23, 
"  Te  are  Christ's,  and  Christ  is  God's." 

42 — 50  Compare  the  parallel  passage  in  Matt,  xviii.  6,  and  Notes 
there. 

43  Having  thy  two  hands. — The  article  in  Gr.,  as  in  French' 
may  often  be  best  rendered  in  English  by  the  possessive  pronoun. 
In  Auth.  it  is  omitted. 

The  unquenchable. — Auth.,  "the  fire  that  never  shall  be 
quenched,"  as  at  verse  45.  In  the  Gr.  the  adjective  is  used  in 
this  place,  the  verb  at  verse  45. 

50  Be   at  peace. — AU  Engl,  versions,  "  have  peace,"  as  in  John 
xvi.  33,  where  it  is  an  exact  translation   of  the  Gr.  phrase. 
The  Gr.  is  here  a  single  word,  as  in  1  Thess.  v.  13,  where  Auth. 
has  "  be  at  peace." 
O 


82  ST.    MARK— X 


CHAPTER  X. 

1  Come  together. — Autli.,  "  resort,"  whicli  signifies  "  frequent 
coming,"  not,  as  the  Gr.,  "flocking  together." 

12,  13,  16,  19.  The  variations  from  Auth.  are  consequent  on  changes 
in  Gr.  text,  as  also  the  omission  of  "  take  up  the  cross  "  in  verse 
21. 

22  His  countenance  fell. — Auth.,  "  He  was  sad."  Wycl.,  "  He 
was  full  sorry."  Tyud.,  "  He  was  discomforted."  Rhem.,  "  He 
was  stricken  sad."  The  same  Gr.  word  is  used  in  Matt.  xvi.  3,  of 
the  heaven  "lowering,"  in  Ezek.  xxvii.  35  (LXX.  version),  of 
kings  "  troiibled  in  their  countenance."  It  denotes  the  outward 
signs  of  gloom,  whether  physical  or  mental.  "  His  countenance 
fell "  is  said  of  Cain,  Gen.  iv.  5. 

He  was    one  that  had. — Auth.,  "  he  had."     See  Note  on 
Matt.  xix.  22. 

35  Come  near  unto  Him. — Auth.,  "come  unto  Him."  The 
word  thus  translated  occiu-s  in  the  LXX.  version  of  Exod.  xxiv. 
14,  but  not  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament. 

43,  44,  Minister— servant. — The  margin  bids  us  notice  the  dis- 
tinction which  there  is  in  the  words  of  our  Lord.  He  who  would 
be  great  among  the  disciples  must  make  himself  their  servant, 
their  minister ;  he  who  would  become  first  of  all  must  descend 
to  the  lowest  depths  of  hiunility,  and  make  himself  the  bond- 
servant— the  slave  of  all. 


CHAPTER  XI. 

4  The  open  street. — The  Gr.  &fi(t)oSos,  mnphodos,  is  so  inter- 
preted Viv  Hesychius,  and  this  appears  to  be  meant  by  the  rendering 
of  the  Engl,  versions,  derived  from  Yulg.,  bivmm,  "a  place 
where  two  ways  meet,"  as  distinguished  from  a  road  that  was  not 
a  thoroiighfare,  via  vicinalis. 

8  And  others  branches,  which  they  had  cut  from  the 
field. — By  change  of  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  and  others  cut 
down  branches  off  the  trees  and  strawed  them  in  the  way."     Th« 


ST.    MARK— XII.  83 

meaning  is  the  same,  unless  the  rendering  in  Margin  be  taken, 
which  would  substitute  "layers  of  leaves  "  for  the  palm-branches; 
and  so  apparently  Vulg.,  which  ha,s  frondes. 

17  Shall  be  called  a  house  of  prayer  for  all  the  natious. — 

Auth.,  "  shall  be  called  of  all  nations  a  house  of  prayer."  The  Gr. 
admits  of  either  rendering.  In  tlie  passage  Isa.  Ivi.  7  the  words 
are  as  now  given  in  the  text.  See  Note  on  "  robbers,"  Matt.  xxi. 
13. 

19  Every  evening. — By  change  of  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  when 
even  was  come."  The  same  thing  is  said  more  distinctly  in 
Luke  xxi.  37.     See  marginal  note. 

26  This  verse  is  omitted  by  change  in  the  Gr.text,  having  been  intro- 
duced from  Matt.  vi.  14,  where  it  stands  as  an  exposition  of  the 
petition  for  forgiveness  in  the  Lord's  prayer. 

32  They  feared  the  people. — The  broken  construction  is  another 
example  of  the  abrupt  style  of  St.  Mark's  Gospel. 


CHAPTER  XII. 


1  Another  country. — Aiith.,  "a  far  country."  See  Notes  on  the 
parallel  passage  of  Matt.  xxi.  33,  &c. 

13  That  they  might  catch  him  in  talk.— Auth.,  "in  his 
words."  The  Gr.  is  not  the  same  as  that  which  is  rendered 
"  ensnare  him  in  his  talk,"  Matt.  xxii.  15. 

14  Of  a  truth — i.e.,  assuredly.  The  Gr.  phrase  is  elsewhere  so 
rendered  in  Auth.,  as  in  Luke  iv.  25;   Acts  iv.  27;   x.  34,  "of 

'  a  truth  I  perceive."  Here  all  Engl,  vei-sions  have  "  in  truth,"  or 
" truly,"  connected  with  "thou  teachest."  In  Matt.  xxii.  16,  "  thou 
teachest  the  word  of  God  in  truth,"  both  the  words  and  the  order 
of  the  Gr.  are  different. 

26  In  the  place  concerning  the  bush.— Wycl.  "how  in  the 
book  of  Moses  on  the  bush,"  following  Yulg.,  in  libro  Moysi 
super  rubuni,  qiiomodo  dixerit  illi  Deus.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "in 
the  bush;"  the  Gr.  is,  literally,  "  at  the  bush."  The  section  of  the 
book  of  Exodus,  chap,  iii.,  concerning  the  burning  bush,  was 
probably  distinguished   by  that  name,  as  the   lamentation   of 


84  ST.    MARK— XIII. 

David  for  Saul  and  Jonatlian  is  thouglit  to  have  been  called 
"  tlie  Bow,"  i.e.,  the  song  of  the  bow,  from  the  mention  made  in 
it  of  Jonathan's  bow,  together  with  the  introductory  words  in 
2  Sam.  i.  18,  "  David  bade  them  teach  the  chiklren  of  Judah 
the  bow,"  the  words  "  the  use  of"  (Auth.)  being  an  insertion  of 
the  translators  by  way  of  explanation. 

29  The  Lord  our  God,  the  Lord  is  one.— This,  the  mar. 
ginal  alternative,  and  the  Auth.,  "  the  Lord  our  God  is  one  Lord," 
are,  each  of  them,  admissible  renderings  of  the  Gr.  The  Auth. 
follows  the  text  of  the  i^assage  of  Deut. 

32  Of  a  truth.  Master,  thou  hast  well  said.— See  Note  on 
verse  14.  Auth.,  "  Well,  Master,  thou  hast  said  the  truth," 
making  "  Well,  master,"  a  separate  exclamation.  The  sentence, 
however,  is  aU  one :  "  well "  is  to  be  connected  with  "  thou  hast 
said;"  "of  a  truth,"  as  in  other  places,  is  a  mode  of  asseveration. 

35  In  the  Holy  Spirit.— Auth.,  "in  the  Holy  Ghost."  The 
name  "  Holy  Ghost"  is  not  used  in  the  Engl,  version  of  the  Old 
Testament.  We  read  in  Ps.  li., "  Take  not  thy  Holy  Spirit  from 
me  "  (Auth.) ;  but  the  Holy  Ghost  in  His  divine  personality  was 
not  yet  revealed. 

38  Desire. — Auth.,  "  love,"  which  does  not  give  the  true  sense  of 

deKo. 

44  Superfluity. — Auth.,  "  abmidance,"  which  does  not  denote  so 
clearly  as  does  the  Gr,  the  "  having  more  than  enough." 


CHAPTER  Xni. 


4  Are  all  about  to  be  accomplished.— Auth.,  "  shall  be 
accomplished."  The  inquiry  relates  not  to  the  time  of  the 
accomplishment,  but  to  the  time  when  it  is  at  hand. 

8  Travail. — Auth.,  "  sorrow."     See  note  on  Matt.  xxiv.  8. 

9  For  a  testimony  unto  them. — So  all  versions  except  Auth., 
"  against  them."  By  that  testimony  governors  and  kings,  and 
their  subjects,  were  to  be  converted ;  and  they  who  gave  it,  and 
laid  down  their  lives  ia  confirmation  of  it,  were  emphatically 
called  "  martyrs,"  witnesses. 


ST.   MAEK— XIII.  85 

10  Preaclied. — Autli.,  "  published  ;  "  the  Gr.,  which  properly 
meaus  "  to  proclaim  as  a  herald,"  is  usually  in  the  New  Testament 
rendered  "  to  preach." 

14  Standing  where  he  ought  not. — The  participle  is  mascu- 
line, according  to  the  change  in  tlie  Gr.  text  made  on  the 
authority  of  the  best  MSS. ;  and  it  refers  probably  to  a  statue  of 
the  Roman  Emperor  placed  in  the  Temple. 

16  Cloke. — The  long  outer  garment  which  the  working  man  would 
leave  at  home  when  he  went  to  his  labour  in  the  field.  Compare 
Note  on  Matt.  xxiv.  18. 

23  I  have  told  you  all  things  beforehand.— So  Tynd. 
Auth.,  following  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  "I  have  foretold  you  all 
things,"  which  does  not  give  the  meaning  with  its  full  emphasis. 
They  have  now  been  fore-warned,  and  must  be  on  the  watch  for 
the  fulfilment  of  his  predictions.  This  is  his  answer  to  their 
question,  verse  4  :  "  When  shall  these  things  be  ?  and  what  shall 
be  the  sign,"  &c.  He  does  not  say  "  when,"  but  tells  them  what 
are  "  the  signs." 

25  The  stars   shall  be  falling  from  heaven. —  So  Rhem 

The  Gr.  is  iaovrai  Tr'nrTovTes ;  falling  by  a  continued  movement, 
not  by  a  sudden  convulsion  of  the  firmament;  dropping  off 
like  the  petals  of  a  flower,  as  Bengel  suggests,  referring  to 
James i.  11, " the  flower  thereof  falleth "(e'leTreo-e).  Auth.,  "the  stars 
of  heaven  shall  fall."  In  the  parallel  passage  of  Matt.  xxiv.  29 
the  Gr.  is  different,  and  is  correctly  translated  "  the  stars  of 
heaven  shall  fall." 

The  heavens. — In  the  latter  part  of  the  verse  the  plural 
is  used,  the  singular  "  heaven  "  in  tlie  former.     So  "Wycl.  only. 
The  distinction  is  observed  in  Matt.  xxiv.  29  (Auth.).     See  Note 
on  Matt.  iii.  17. 

26  In  clouds.— So  Wycl.  only.  "The  clouds*  (Auth.)  woidd 
mean  the  ordinary  clouds  of  nature.  The  Gr.,  by  its  indefinite- 
ness,  "  in  clouds,"  leaves  us  at  liberty  to  conceive  a  supernatural 
nimbus  or  glory.  Nor  are  the  words  in  Matt.  xxiv.  30,  "  coming 
in  the  clouds  of  heaven,"  adverse  to  such  a  supposition,  if  we 
consider  how  much  may  be  comprehended  in  the  word  "heaven." 
See  Note  on  Matt.  iii.  17. 

28  See  Notes  on  Matt.  xxiv.  32—36. 

34  It  is  as  when  a  man.— The  Gr.,  "  as  a  man,"  is  very  abrupt, 
and  needs  an  insertion  of  some  words  to  complete  the  sentence. 


86  ST.    MARK— XIV. 

Sojourning  in  another  country.— Auth.,  '■  taking  a  far 
journey,"  following  other  English  versions,  and  Viilg.  peregre 
profectus.  The  Gr.  signifies  not  foreign  travel,  but  residence  in 
a  foreign  land. 

35  The  lord  of  the  house. — So  Wycl.  and  Tynd.  An  unusual 
expression,  but  quite  appropriate  when  said  by  our  Lord  of  Him- 
self, being  "  as  a  Son  over  God's  house,"  Heb.  iii.  6.  Auth., 
with  Tynd.,  "the  master  of  the  house."  The  phrase  is  found 
only  in  this  parable,  which  is  peculiar  to  St.  Mark ;  but  similar 
to  it  are  "  the  lord  of  the  harvest"  and  "  the  lord  of  the  vineyard  " 
in  the  other  Gospels. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


1  The  unleavened  bread. — Is  not  to  be  connected  with  "  the 
feast  of,"  as  in  Auth.,  "  the  feast  of  the  Passover  and  of  un- 
leavened bread."  Wycl.  and  Tynd.  follow  the  construction  of 
the  Gr.,  "  Easter,  and  the  days  of  sweet  bread." 

With  subtilty.— Auth.,  "  by  craft."     See  Matt.  xxvi.  4  (Auth.) 

7  Te  can  do  them  good.— Not  merely  '■  ye  may  "  (Auth.). 

8  She    hath    anointed   my  body  aforehand.— The  Gr.  is 

literally,  "  She  hath  before-taken,  anticipated  (rrpoeAa/Se),  to  anoint." 
Auth.,  "  She  is  come  aforehand  to  anoint,"  following  Vulg., 
prcevenit  ungere,  and  so  Rhem.,  "  prevented,"  in  the  archaic 
Biblical  sense. 

10  He  that  was  one  of  the  twelve.— For  "  one  of  the  twelve " 
(Auth.),  consequent  on  the  insertion  of  the  article  before  "  one  " 
in  the  Gr.  text ;  "  the  one  of  the  twelve,"  apparently  referring  to 
the  words  of  our  Loi'd  at  verse  18,  "  One  of  you  shall  betray  me," 
recorded  also  in  Matt.  xxn.  21,  and  John  xiii.  21. 

14;  My  guest-chamber. — "  My  "  is  added  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 
So  Vulg.,  refectio  mea.  The  Gr.  is  the  same  word  that  is  ren- 
dered "  inn,"  Luke  ii.  7 :  "  there  was  no  room  for  them  in  the  inn." 
In  1  Samuel  ix.  22  (LXX.  version)  it  stands  for  the  Hebrew  word 
which  in  Auth.  is  "  harbour,"  the  room  for  the  entertainment  of 
guests.    Rhem.  here,  "refectory." 


ST.    MARK— XIV.  87 

15  Furnished  and  ready. — Auth.  for  "  ready  "  has  "  prepared." 
The  Gr.  is  iu  both  parts  of  the  verse  the  same,  adjectival  iu  the 
first  place,  the  verb  iu  the  second.  The  word  rendered  '•  fur- 
nished "  is  properly  "  spread  with  carpets ;  "  the  last  thing  done 
in  preparing  a  room  for  guests  was  to  cover  the  couches  with 
carpets.     {Field,  Note.) 

18  Even  he  that  eateth  with  me. — (Following  the  Gr.  order.) 
These  words  apparently  are  added  to  designate  particularly  that 
"one  of  them"  who  was  to  betray  him.  Autli.,  "one  of  you 
that  eateth  with  me  shall  betray  me." 

19  And  another  said,  Is  it  I  ? — (Auth.)  Omitted  by  change  iu  Gr. 
text.  The  changes  in  the  verses  22,  23  are  due  to  the  same 
cause. 

25  I  will  no  more  drink.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following 
Vulg.,  jam  non  bibam.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  I  Avill  drhik  no 
more  of."  Bytliis  return  to  the  collocation  of  the  Gr.,  "no 
more "  is  connected  exclusively  A^-ith  the  verb  to  which  it  pro- 
perly belongs. 

80  Thou,  to-day  .  .  . — The  emphatic  "  thou "  is  added  by 
change  in  the  Gr.  text.  It  is,  however,  given  in  Vulg.,  tu, 
hodie,  in  node  hdc. 

Even  this  night. — AU  English  versions,  "  even  iu  this  night." 
In  is  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text.  The  terrible  concise- 
ness of  the  sentence  might  have  been  still  more  nearly  given 
by  the  omission  of  the  inserted  even,  "thou  to-day,  this 
night,  &c." 

36  Kemove. — The  Gr.  word,  literally  "  make  it  pass  by,"  is  only 
found  twice  in  the  New  Testament — here,  and  in  tlie  parallel 
passage  of  Luke  xxii.  42,  where  it  is  "  remove  "  iu  Auth. 

38  Willing.— Auth.,  "ready."  The  same  word  is  rendered 
"  willing  "  in  Matt.  xxvi.  41. 

49  But  this  is  done  that  the  Scriptures  might  be  fulfilled. 

— So  Wycl.  and  Tynd.,  following  Vulg.  The  Gr.  is  literally 
"  but  that  the  Scriptures  may  be  fulfilled."  Auth.,  "  but  the 
Scriptures  must  be  fulfilled." 

54  In  the  light  of  the  fire.— Avdh.,  "at  the  fire."  The  Gr.  is 
wphs  t5  (pws.  This  correction  is  of  importance,  explaining  that 
by  coming  to  the  fire  to  warm  himself  he  became  exposed  to  re- 
cognition from  the  light  of  the  fire  falling  upon  him.  The  looser 
translation  which  nms  through  the  English  versions  came  from 
Vulg.,  sedebat  ad  ignem  et  califaciebai  se. 


88  ST.    MARK— XV. 

65  Received  Mm.— By  cliauge  of  Gr.  text  for  "struck  him" 
(Auth.),  signifying  that  with  this  wanton  violence  the  officers  of 
the  court  took  him  again  into  their  custody  after  his  arraignment 
before  the  high  priest. 

69  The  maid— i.e.,  the  same  person  as  before.  All  English  ver- 
sions, "  a  maid,"  overlooking  the  article  in  the  Gr.  Several 
changes  in  this  and  the  two  following  verses  r.re  due  to  changes 
in  the  Gr.  text. 

72  When  he  thought  thereon.— See  margin.  Another  inter- 
pretation, which  has  much  to  be  said  for  it,  is  that  of  Theophylact, 
"  he  covered  his  head  and  wept."  This  rendering  of  iirt&aAciv  is 
supported  with  much  learning  by  Dr.  Field ;  and  it  introduces  an 
additional  action  on  the  part  of  St.  Peter,  and  is  therefore  more 
graphic  than  the  other  renderings. 


CHAPTER  XV. 

6  No  more  answered  anything. — So.  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  after 
Vulg.,  amplius  nihil  respondit.  The  Gr.  is  the  same,  oir/ceVt,  as 
at  chap.  xiv.  25,  "I  will  no  more  drink,"  &c.,  "  no  more" — i.e.,  not 
as  he  had  answered  Pilate  when  questioned  by  him  (verse  2). 
Auth.,  "  yet  answered  nothing,"  which  would  mean,  "  notwith- 
standing the  appeal  made  to  him  by  PUate "  in  verse  4.  This, 
though  also  true,  is  not  the  meaning  conveyed  by  the  Gr. 

7  With  him — .(Auth.)  Is  omitted  by  change  of  Gr.  text.  The 
omission  is  in  this  respect  a  gain,  that  the  clause,  "  who  liad  com- 
mitted murder,"  has  not  the  appearance  of  refening  to  Barabbas, 
as  it  has  in  the  Auth. 

8  Went  up — i.e„  to  the  Prsetorium,  the  governor's  palace.  So 
Vulg.  Anth.,  with  Tynd.,  follows  another  reading  of  the  Gr. 
text,  "  crying  out." 

21  Compel  to  go. — Compare  Note  on  Matt,  xxvii.  31. 

23  They  offered  him.— The  verb  is  the  same  as  that  rendered 
"  gave  "  in  Matt.  xxAdi.  34 ;  but  the  tense  is  different. 

32  The  Christ.  —  He  had  been  condemned  before  Caiaphas  for 
claiming  to  be  the  Christ,  before  Pilate  for  asserting  that  he  was 
the  king  of  the  Jews.    The  chief  priests  combine  the  two  charges. 


ST.    MARK— XVI.  89 

Pilate  in  the  superscription  recognised  only  tliat  of  which  he  had 
cognisance  himself. 

39  Which  stood  by.— Anth.,  "  which  stood."  The  Gr.  requires 
this  addition.     The  centurion  stood  near,  and  in  front  of  Him. 

43  A  councillor  of  honourable  estate.— Auth.,  "  an  honour- 
able counsellor."  The  Gr.  word  does  not  refer  to  the  personal 
character,  but  to  the  condition  in  life  of  him  or  her  whom  it  de- 
scribes.    Compare  Acts  xiii.  50  ;  xvii.  12. 

Looking  for, — Auth.,  "waiting  for."  The  same  word  is  used 
of  Simeon  and  Anna  in  Luke  ii.  25,  38,  and  in  the  latter  place  is 
rendered  "  looking  for  "  in  Auth.,  as  it  is  here  by  Tynd. 

Boldly  went  in  ...  .  and.— Auth.,  ''  went  in  boldly." 
This  slight  inversion  of  the  order  shows  that  "  boldly  "  apj)lies  in 
the  Gr.  to  the  whole  action  of  Joseph,  and  not  to  his  "  going  in  " 
only.  It  would  perhaps  be  more  exactly  rendered  "  took  courage, 
and  went  in  unto  Pilate." 

45  Corpse.  — For  Auth.,  "  body,"  by  change  in  Gr.  text  (irrwyua  for 
<ra)fj.a).  The  same  word  is  used  with  respect  to  the  body  of  St. 
John  the  Baptist  (chap.  vi.  29).  In  this  place,  harshly  as  it 
sounds  in  our  ears,  it  is  appropriate,  in  its  sense  of  "  dead  body  " 
(properly  caro  casa,  "carcase  "),  as  there  has  just  been  a  question 
as  to  the  life  being  extinct.  In  the  next  verse,  when  the  body 
has  been  given  over  to  the  care  of  Joseph,  the  Evangelist  speaks 
not  of  "  it,"  but  of  "  Him."  We  may  suppose  the  former  word 
to  have  been  that  of  Pilate  and  his  soldiers,  the  latter  that  of 
Joseph  and  Nicodemus. 

46  A  linen  cloth.— So  Wycl.  and  TjTid.  The  Gr.,  sindon,  is  so 
rendered  in  Auth.  at  Matt,  xxvii.  59  ;  here,  "  fine  linen." 

Tomb. — Auth.,  "  sepulchre."  Compare  Notes  on  Matt,  xxvii. 
52—60. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 


2  When  the  sun  was  riseni— So  "Wycl.  and  Tynd.  Vulg., 
orto  jam  sole.  The  verb  is  in  the  past  tense  (the  aorist).  Auth., 
"  was  rising." 

4  Rolled  back.— For  Auth.,  "  rolled  away,"  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 


90  ST.    MARK— XVI. 

Arrayed  in  a  white  robe. — Auth.,  "  a  loug  wliite  garment." 
The  Gr.  (stole)  is  translated  "robe"  in  Luke  xv.  22,  and  often 
in  the  Apocalypse. 

6  Trembling  and  astonishment   had  come  upon  them. 

— So  Rbem.,  preserving  the  Biblical  phrase,  following  Vulg., 
invaserat  enivi  eas  timor  et  pavor.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  they 
trembled  and  were  amazed." 

11  Disbelieved. — Auth.,  "believed  not."  Here  and  in  verse  16 
the  Gr.  hincrriu}  is  rendered  "to  disbelieve,"  implying  the  reject- 
ion of  a  statement  as  incredible — a  stronger  expression  than  ovk 
(TTlffTivffav,  "  believed  not,"  which  implies  incredulity  not  amount- 
ing to  absolute  rejection.  The  eleven  utterly  disbelieved  the  first 
story  which  reached  them,  the  report  of  Mary  Magdalene  (verse 
11).  It  seemed  to  them  as  an  idle  tale  (Luke  xxiv.  11).  The  nan-a- 
tive  of  the  two  disciples  returning  from  Emmaus  was  told  them 
afterwards,  but  not  even  that  was  believed  by  them  ;  they  did  not 
"  disbelieve,"  but  they  "  believed  not." 

12  He  was  manifested.—  So  WycL,  "  was  showed,"  following 
Vnlg.,  ostensus  est.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  appeared,"  which  an- 
swers to  several  Gr.  words  ;  but  (pavip6u  in  Auth.  is  usually  and 
properly  rendered  "  to  manifest,"  as  in  chap.  iv.  22.  By  showing 
himself  after  his  resurrection  he  "manifested  forth  his  glory,"  as 
he  did  by  his  first  miracle  at  the  beginning  of  his  ministry 
(John  ii.  11). 

14  Unto  the  eleven  themselves. — Auth.  omits  "  themselves," 
following  Vulg.,  illis  (not  ipsis)  anclecim. 

16  To  the  whole  creation. — This  is  the  coiTect  rendering  of 
Kricris,  as  in  Auth.  (cliaps.  x.  6 ;  xiii.  19).  In  the  Epistles  of  St. 
Paul — where,  as  in  this  place,  it  denotes  not  the  creative  act,  but 
the  i-esult  of  it,  the  created  world — this  word  is  in  Auth.  trans, 
lated  "  creature,"  to  the  serious  injury  of  the  sense.  The  Vulg. 
in  all  such  cases  has  creatura,  which  means  any  created  being, 
animate  or  inanimate.  Hence  Wycl.  in  this  place,  "to  each 
creature."     Tynd.,  "  to  all  creatures."     The  Gr.  is  irda-ri  rrj  kt'ktu. 

20  Confirming  the  word  by  the  signs  that  followed.— The 

change  is  necessary  to  give  expression  to  the  article.  Tlius  was 
fulfilled  the  promise,  "  these  signs  shall  follow  them  that  believe  " 
(verse  17) 


THE    GOSPEL    ACCORDING    TO 

ST.    LUKE. 

CHAPTER  I. 

1  To  draw  np. — Autli.,  "  to  set  forth  in  order."  Tyud.  "  to 
compile."  Vulg.,  orditiare.  The  Gr.  does  uot  occur  else- 
where in  the  New  Testament.  "Set  in  order"  is  the  rendering 
of  other  words:  "draw  up"  approves  itself  here  as  express- 
ing the  same  work,  by  almost  the  same  figiure  of  speech  as  tlie 
Gr.,  both  words  containing  the  idea  of  "  marshalling  "  the  succes- 
sive  details,  the  order  of  march,  so  to  speak,  of  a  continuous 
narrative. 

A  narrative. — So  Rhcm.  after  Yulg.,  narrationem.  Auth. 
following  Cranm.,  "  a  declaration."  Tyud.,  "  ati-eatise."  Genev., 
"  to  write  a  history."  Though  the  Gr.  has  other  derivative  senses, 
its  proper  meaning,  as  defined  by  Plato,  is  "  the  relating  of 
events  past,  present,  or  to  come." 

Which,  have  been  fulfilled. — The  Gr.,  when  used  in  reference 
to  things,  means  "  fully  accomj)lished,  or  established,"  as  in  2  Tim. 
iv.  5 ;  when  referring  to  persons,  "  filled  full  of  knowledge  or 
assurance,"  as  in  Rom.  iv.  21.  Here  the  Vulg.  has  coonpletce, 
which  is  correctly  followed  by  Rhem.,  "accomplished  ;  "  Tynd., 
"  which  are  siu'ely  known,"  whence  Auth.,  "  surely  believed." 

3  Having  traced  the  course  of  all  things.— The  proper 
meaning  of  the  Gr.  is  "  to  accompany  side  by  side."  "  I  have 
walked  by  the  side  of  the  stream,  as  it  were,  from  the  foimtain 
head "  (Woi'dsworth).  Hence,  generally,  "  to  follow,"  as  in 
Mark  xvi.  17,  "  These  signs  shall  foUow  them  that  believe." 
2  Tim.  iii.  10.  Auth.,  "Having  had  pei'fect  understanding  of 
all  things  from  the  very  first,"  which  points  not  so  much  to  the 
close  companionship  as  to  the  ultimate  knowledge  resulting  from 
it.     The  previous  versions  vary  much  in  their  treatment  of  this 


92  ST.    LUKE— I. 

word,  but  ill  general  adopt  tlie  interpretation,  "  as  soon  as  I  bad 

searched  out  diligently."      Vulg.,  assecuto  omnia  a  principio 

diligenter. 

Accurately. — E-atlier  than  Auth.,  "  diligently."     See  Note  on 

Matt.  ii.  7. 

It  is  not  unlikely  that  St.  Luke,  a  Hellenistic  Jew,  and  a  native 
of  Antioch  a  centre  of  Grecian  culture,  may  have  been  acquainted, 
as  St.  Paul  appears  to  have  been,  with  some  of  the  masterpieces 
of  classical  literature ;  and  in  that  case,  the  resemblance  may  not 
have  been  accidental  which  is  traced  between  the  opening  verses 
of  his  Gospel  and  a  sentence  in  the  introduction  to  the  histoiy  of 
Thucydides  :  "  I  lived  through  the  whole  of  the  war,  and  I  took 
great  pains  to  make  out  the  exact  truth."    (Jowett's  translation.) 

4  Wherein  thou  wast  instructed.— Or,  "ivhich  thou  ivast 
taught  hy  word  of  inoiith."  This  Marginal  rendering  is  added 
because  the  proper  meaning  of  the  Gr.,  which  under  the  form 
of  "  catechize,"  we  have  in  EngHsh,  is  "  to  iustruct  orally ; "  and  if 
that  sense  be  given  to  it  here,  St.  Luke's  purpose  would  appear 
to  be  that  his  frieud  Theophilus  should  have  exact  iuformation  in 
writing  of  the  things  which  had  already  been  taught  him  less 
consecutively,  or  with  less  precision,  in  a  colloquial  way.  But  in 
other  places  of  the  New  Testament  the  word  means  simply  "  to 
iustinict;"  and  it  is  so  used  by  St.  Luke  himself,  Acts  xviii.  25, 
xxi.  21,  24. 

5  He  had  a  wife.— For  Auth.,  " his  wife  was"  by  change  iu 
Gr.  text,  avT((i  for  auToD. 

9  To  enter  ....  and  burn  incense. — This  inversion  of  the 
Gr.  order  gives  the  sense  of  the  Gr.  better  than  Auth.,  "  to  burn 
incense  when  he  entered." 

13  Supplication. — The  word  in  Gr.  is  not  that  which  is  commonly 
used  for  "  prayer  "  (Auth.). 

17  Shall  go  before  his  face.  —  This  lively  Hebraism  is  not 
given  in  any  Engl,  version  except  Genev.,  "go  before  in  his 
sight." 

To  loalk  in. — The  insertion  appears  to  be  necessary,  the  pre- 
position in  the  Gr.  beiug  "  in,"  not  "  to,"  as  in.  the  preceding 
clauses. 

To  make  ready  for  the  Lord  a  people  prepared  for 
him.  — This  appears  to  be  the  full  meaning  of  the  Gr.,  and  it  is 
after  the  manner  of  St.  Luke  to  place  a  word,  as  here,  "  for  the 
Lord,"  between  two  others,  with  either  or  both  of  which  it  may 
be  connected.     Comp.  Acts  i.  2. 


ST.    LUKE— I.  93 

19  To  bring  thee  these  good  tidings.—"  To  bring "  tidings 
is  a  move  appropriate  and  usual  phrase  than  "  to  show  "  ( Auth.) ; 
and  "good"  tidings  is  more  close  to  the  Gr.  than  "glad" 
(Auth.). 

The  Gr.  word,  in  Engl.  "  to  evangelize,"  is  used  more  than  twenty- 
times  in  St.  Liike's  Gospel  and  the  Acts,  and  is  one  of  the  many- 
words  which  remind  us  of  his  intimate  acquaintance  with  St. 
Paul,  as  one  of  the  fellow-travellers  of  the  Apostle.  It  is  found 
in  no  other  Gospel  excei:)t  that  of  St.  Matthew,  which  has  it 
once  in  a  passive  sense,  and  once  only  in  the  Epistles  of  St.  Peter, 
while  it  is  of  frequent  ocem-rence  in  the  Epistles  of  St.  Paul 
(Wordsworth).  On  the  other  hand,  the  cognate  noun  "  evan- 
gelion,"  "gospel,"  though  often  used  by  St.  Matthew  and  St. 
Mark,  is  not  in  the  Gospels  of  St.  Luke  and  St.  John,  and  is 
only  twice  used  in  the  Acts,  while  it  is  a  very  frequent  word  with 
St.  Paul. 

20  Silent. — All  Engl,  versions  "  dumb,"  the  ordinary  rendering  of 
another  word,  KoxpSs,  which  follows  in  verse  22. 

22  He  continued  making  signs.— Auth.,  "  he  beckoned."  The 
word  here  used  does  not  occur  elsewhere,  and  requires  a  different 
rendering  from  "  beckon,"  which  in  Auth.  answers  to  several 
words  in  the  original.  In  the  Gr.  the  continued  action  is  denoted 
by  "was  "  with  the  participle,  "was  making  signs." 

27  Betrothed. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  "  espoused." 
See  note  on  Matt.  i.  18. 

28  The  Marginal  note  shows  that  the  words  "  Blessed  art  thou 
among  women,"  which  are  in  the  text  of  verse  42,  are  not  genuine 
here,  though  supported  here  also  by  many  ancient  authorities. 
At  the  beginning  of  the  next  verse  there  is  another  change  of 
reading  in  the  Gr.  text. 

30  Favour. — Gr.,  X"/"^  (charis) ;  the  same  word  is  often  translated 
"  grace." 

35  Which  is  to  be  born.—"  Of  thee  "  (Auth.)  is  omitted  by 
change  in  the  Gr.  text. 

37  For  no  word  from  God  shall  be  void  of  power.— This 

is  the  literal  rendering  of  tlie  Gr. ;  "  from  God"  being  substituted 
for  "  with  God,"  by  change  in  Gr.  text.  Auth.  (following  Tjoid.), 
"  for  with  God  nothing  shall  be  impossible,"  making  "  no  word  " 
to  be  the  same  as  "  no  thing,"  and  rendering  tiie  Gr.  aSwaTi^crei 
("without  active  power"),  which  in  connection  ^vit]l  "word  "'  is 
appropriate  and  expressive,  by  "  impossible,"  wliich  is  suitable  to 


94  ST.   LUKE— I. 

"thing,"  but  not  to  a  "-vrord."  The  Gr.  for  "  wovcl  "  (^^/wo)  hero 
used  by  the  angel,  is  in  the  next  verse  repeated  by  Mary. 

38  The  handmaid. — The  Gr.,  as  noticed  in  the  margin,  is  "bond- 
maid," the  feminine  of  "  bond-servant,"  slave  (SoivAtj),  and  expresses 
the  absolute  obedience  of  the  Blessed  Virgin  more  strongly  than 
the  word  which  all  the  English  versions  have,  and  which  has  be- 
come in  this  place  too  sacred  to  be  disturbed,  "  handmaid." 

42  She  lifted  tip  her  voice. — The  Gr.  which  occurs  nowhere 
else  in  the  New  Testament,  properly  is  "  to  shout,"  not  as  Auth., 
to  "  speak."  Previous  versions  have  "  cried ;  "  YiJg.,  exclamavit. 

With  a  loud  ctry. — By  change  of  Gr.  text  for  "  with  a  loud 
voice"  (Auth.).  The  salutation  of  Elizabeth  was  preceded  by  a 
loud  exclamation  of  joy. 

52  He  hath  put  down  princes  from  their  thrones. —  Auth. 

with  Tynd.,  "  he  hath  put  down  the  mighty  from  their  seats." 
The  Gr.  Qp6vos,  "thronos,"  is  almost  always  '-throne,"  in  Auth.; 
and  the  Gr.  for  "the  mighty"  (Auth.),  wliich  is  of  rai'e  occur- 
rence, means  "  one  endued  with  princely  power,"  and  is  ren- 
dered "potentate"  in  1  Tim.  vi.  15. 

54  That  he  might  remember  mercy.— So  (in  part),  Genev., 
"that  he  might  be  mindful,"  &c. ;  the  construction  of  the  Gr. 
showing  the  p^irpose  of  his  helping  Israel.  Auth.,  "  in  remem- 
brance of  his  mercy."  His  is  not  in  the  Gr.,  as  is  shown  by  the 
italics  in  Auth. 

55  Toward. — For  Auth.,  '•  to ;  "  making  it  plain,  as  it  is  in  the  Gr.. 
that  the  words  which  follow  are  not  to  be  connected  with  those 
which  immediately  precede.  The  meaning  is  not  "  as  he  spake  to 
our  fathers,  to  Abraham,"  &c.,  but  "  that  he  might  remember 
mprcy  toward  Abraham,"  &c. 

58  Had  magnified  his  mercy  towards  her.— So  Wycl.  and 
Rhem.  The  word  in  the  Gr.  is  the  same  tliat  is  used  at  the  be. 
ginning  of  the  Magnificat.  Losing  sight  of  this  connection,  the 
Auth.  turns  the  Gr.  by  the  elegant  paraphrase,  "  had  showed 
gi-eat  mercy  upon  her"  (following  Tynd.) 

59  They  would  have  called  him. — To  give  the  inchoate  sense 
conveyed  by  the  imperfect  tense  of  the  Gr.  verb,  "  they  were  for 
calling  her."     All  English  versions,  "  they  called  him." 

63  A  writing  tablet  expresses  the  Gr.  better  than  Auth.  (with 
TjTid.),  "  a  table."  The  latter  word,  however,  iu  old  English  had 
the  same  meaning,  as  we  are  reminded  by  the  two  "tables"  of 
stone  in  Exodus  ;  and  this  is  the  meaning  of  the  Latin  idbula. 


ST.   LUKE— II.  95 

66  What  then  shall  this  child  be?— The  question  was, 
"  What  wiU  he  be  in  the  future,  when  he  is  a  man  ?  "  not  as  Auth., 
following  Wycl.  and  Tynd.,  "  what  manner  of  child  shall  he  be  ?  " 
Vulg.,  Quis,  putas,  puer  iste  erit  ? 

68  Wrought  redemption.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  after  Vulg. ; 
Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  redeemed."  .  The  Gr.  noiin  is  projjerly  "  a 
ransommg,"  that  being  in  Old  Testament  phrase  the  mode  of  de- 
noting "deliverance,"  primarily  where  a  price  was  paid,  and 
specially  from  bondage,  then  from  sin  or  any  evil,  with  or  without 
ransom. 

71  Salvation  from. — Taking  up  the  word  from  verse  69.  So 
Wycl.  ("health  from")  and  Rhem.,  after  Yulg.  Auth.,  with 
TjTid.,  "  that  we  shoidd  be  saved." 

72  To  show  mercy  towards  our  fathers.— Auth.,  with 
Tynd.,  "  to  perform  the  mercy  promised  to  ovu'  fathers."  The 
Gr.  is  literally,  "  to  do,  or  work  mercy,  with  our  fathers ; "  and 
so  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following  Yulg.  There  is  here  neither 
the  definite  article  nor  any  suggestion,  as  there  is  in  the  Magni- 
ficat, that  the  mercy  had  been  "promised." 

75  All  our  days.— For  Auth.,  "all  the  days  of  our  life,"  by 
change  in  Gr.  text. 


CHAPTER  II. 

1  The  world. — The  Gr.,  meaning  properly  "  the  inhabited  earth.'" 
that  part  of  the  world  which  was  "  dwelt  in  "  by  settled  inhabit- 
ants, not  by  nomad  tribes,  was  the  usual  phi'ase  designating  the 
Roman  Empire  ;  and  from  it  in  early  Christian  times  the  word 
oecumenical  was  derived,  as  a  description  of  those  Church  Councils 
which  were  attended  by  representatives  from  every  province 
of  the  Empire. 

Enrolled. — So  Rhem. ;  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "taxed ;  "  Yulg., 
ut  describeretur.     The  enrolment  appears  to  have  been  made  for, 
the  purpose   of  ascertaining  the  population   of  the   Empire — a 
census;    and  there    is    no   mention    of    any    taxing    connected 
with  it. 

2  This  was  the  first  enrolment  made.— Auth.,  "  this  taxing 


96  ST.    LUKE— II. 

was  first  made."  If  "  first "  were  to  be  taken  as  an  adverb,  the 
Gr,  should  be  not  Trpcorrj,  as  it  is,  but  irpooroi/.  St.  Luke,  in  Acts  v. 
37,  refers  to  another  enrolment,  which  took  place  ten  years  after- 
wards, in  the  time  of  the  same  governor,  Quirinius  :  and  he  dis- 
tinguishes the  earlier  from  the  later,  by  saying  that  this  was  the 
"  first  "  eni'olment,  the  eai'lier  of  the  two,  made,  &c. 

Quirinius. — A  Latin  name,  given  in  Auth.,  more  nearly  as  it 
was  represented  in  Gr.,  "  Cyrenius." 

4  Family.— So  Rhem.  with  Yulg.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  lineage." 
"We  have  the  same  Gr.  in  Ephes.  iii.  15,  "  Of  whom  every  family 
in  heaven  and  earth  is  called." 

11  Christ  the  Lord.— Margin,  "  Or  Anointed  Lord.  Tlie  Mar. 
ginal  note  is  appended,  because  neither  of  the  words  in  the  Gr. 
has  the  definite  article,  and  therefoi'e  "  Christ  "  might  ho  under- 
stood in  its  proper  meaning,  " anointed,"  not  "the  Messiah." 
This,  however,  is  noticed  as  a  possible,  not  as  a  j)robablo, 
interpretation. 

li  And  on  earth  peace  among  men  in  whom  he  is  well 
pleased. — With  two  marginal  notes  (1)  explaining  that  the  Gr. 
of  the  words  following  "  peace  "  is  literally  "  among  men  of  good 
pleasure"  {i.e.,  of  God's  good  pleasure) ;  (2)  showing  that  there 
is  another  reading  of  the  Gr.  text,  which  is  followed  by  Auth., 
after  Tjoid.,  "  peace,  goodwill  {i.e.,  God's  good\vill)  among  men." 
The  difference  in  the  Gr.  text  consists  in  the  addition  of  a 
single  letter,  by  which  "good  pleasure"  becomes  the  genitive  in- 
stead of  the  nominative  case.  The  genitive  is  supported  by  the 
text  of  the  three  best  MSS. : — the  Sinaitie,  the  Vatican,  and  the 
Alexandrine;  by  the  general  testimony  of  the  Latin  Fathers, 
liturgies,  and  versions ;  and  by  a  passage  of  the  anteniceue  Gr. 
father,  Origen;  the  nominative  is  found  in  uncial  MSS.  of  iuferio.- 
though  good  authority,  and  in  the  Fathers  and  versions  of  the 
Eastern  Church.  The  evidence  as  to  text  is  amply  discussed  in 
the  second  volume  of  Westcott  and  Hort's  Greek  Testament. 

The  change  of  the  text,  slight  as  it  is,  involves  a  great  change  of 
rendering  and  interpretation,  and  throws  some  obscurity  on  one 
of  the  most  joyous  passages  in  the  Bible.  Yet  even  the  loss  of 
a  familiar  rhythm  and  a  dehglitful  assurance  may  be  more  than 
compensated  by  the  belief  that  we  know  better  than  we  did  what 
was  the  real  utterance  of  the  heavenly  host,  and  the  exact  mean- 
ing of  the  joyful  tidings  which  they  proclaimed.  And  we  may 
remember  tliat  by  accepting  it  we  are  only  adopting  the  form 
which  has  always  been  current  in  the  version  and  liturgy  of 
the  Western  Church.     "  On  earth  peace  among  men  in  whom  ho 


ST.    LUKE— II.  97 

is  well  pleased  " — i.e.,  God's  peace  auioug  all  to  Avliom  tliefse  glad 
tidiugs  shall  come,  and  who,  iu  recemug  them,  become  his  dear 
childreu,  the  objects  of  his  good  pleasure. 

21  Which,  was  so  called. — Auth.,  for  variation,  has  "so  named." 
The  Gr.  has  the  same  word  iu  both  parts  of  the  sentence. 

22  The  days  of  their  purification.— So  Tynd.  and  Cranui. 
Auth.,  with  Vulg.,  WycL,  and  Rhem.,  "  her."  Tlic  difference 
arises  out  of  a  difference  in  the  Gr.  text.  According  to  the  read- 
ing, "  their  purification,"  the  infant  Saviour  is  associated  with 
his  Mother  in  the  cei*emony  of  purification  prescribed  by  the  law 
of  Moses,  and  begins,  even  from  his  bii-th,  '"to  fulfil  all  righteous- 
ness." 

25  Holy  Spirit.— For  Auth.,  "  Holy  Ghost,"  because  "the  Spirit" 
is  the  word  which  must  of  necessity  be  used  in  verse  27,  and 
there  should  be  no  possibility  of  doubting  whether  the  same 
Divine  Being,  the  Person  of  the  Godhead,  is  signified  in  both 
verses.     See  Note  on  Matt.  i.  22. 

29  O  Lord. — The  Gr.  is  not  Kyrie,  but  Despota,  "'  Master,"  which 
is  unusual  in  an  address  to  God,  but  appropriate  here,  as  the 
correlative  of  "  bond-servant,"  or  "  slave "  [dov\ov),  the  term 
which  Simeon  applies  to  himself. 

32  For  revelation  to  the  Gentiles.— So  Rhem.,  "  to  the  reve- 
lation of  the  Gentiles,"  following  Vulg.  The  Gr.  is  apocalypsis. 
Auth.,  "  a  light  to  lighten,"  as  if  rendering  a  verb  cognate  to  the 
noun  (pS>s  (phos). 

33  His  father. — As  in  verse  48,  by  change  of  Gr.  text  for 
*'  Joseph  "  (Auth.). 

37  Even  for. — By  change  of  Gr.  text  (ews  foi  ir).  Auth.,  "  of 
about,"  pointing  to  the  extraordinary  length  of  her  widowhood. 

"Worshipping.— Auth.,  "but  served."  The  Gr.  is  a  par- 
ticiple of  XuTpevai,  which  is  properly,  as  used  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment, to  serve  God  by  worship  or  sacrifice. 

38  Coming  up  at  that  very  hour. — Auth.,  "coming  in  that 
instant."     The  Gr.  is  the  usual  word  for  "  hour." 

40  In  spirit. — (Auth.)  Omitted  by  change  of  Gr.  text,. 

43  Boy. — He  is  now  no  longer  called  ' ■  {.•Inld'"' (iraihioy),  as  He  luis 
been  prior  to  his  first  going  up  to  Jerusalem  (see  verse  40),  but 
Ta7s,  "boy."  Tlie  transition  from  childhood  to  boyhood,  wliieh 
was  marked  outwardly  about  the  age  of  twelve  by  change  of  dress, 
and  which  is  indicated  by  this  change  in  the  Greek,  seems 
H 


98  ST.   LUKE— II. 

proijerly  to  be  observed  here  in  the  English,  tliough  in  other 
places  the  Gr.  iraTs  may  be  sufficiently  rendered  "child." 

47,  48  Amazed  .  .  .  astonished, — These  changes  are  made 
in  order  to  keep  for  each  of  the  two  Gr.  words  the  rendering 
which  it  has  in  other  places. 

49  In  my  Father's  house.— Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "about  my 
Father's  business."  Wycl.  is  literal,  but  ambiguous,  "  in  those 
things  that  be  of  my  father,"  as  Yvlg.  in  his  quce  patris  mei 
sunt.  The  Gr.  is  iv  to7$  toC  irarpSs  fj.ov.  In  arriving  at  their 
decision  on  this  passage,  the  Revisers  were  much  influenced  by 
a  learned  dissertation  of  Dr.  Field,  of  Norwich,  which  he  printed 
and  circulated  among  them,  and  which  it  is  to  be  hoped  he  will 
see  fit  to  publish.  From  tliis  it  appears  that  the  phrase  is  capa- 
ble of  either  interpretation,  but  far  more  likely  to  have  been 
used  by  our  Lord  in  the  sense  which  has  been  adopted — 1st, 
because  rd  nvos,  which  properly  means  a  person's  things  or 
belongings,  came  to  be  used  specially  of  his  house ;  as  in  other 
languages,  ancient  and  modern,  the  word  house  is  omitted  in 
colloquial  speech — e.g.,  "  I  am  going  to  my  father's."  2nd, 
because  clear  examples  of  iv  to7s  nvos  thai,  "  to  be  in  a  person's 
house,"  are  found  in  the  LXX.  version  of  the  Old  Testament,  as 
well  as  in  classical  and  patristic  Gi*.  Compare  Esther  vii.  9,  Job 
"viii.  19,  Gen.  xli.  51,  with  the  Hebrew.  See  also  John  xiv.  32, 
and  Acts  xxi.  6.,  where  the  plural  adjective  is  used,  ri  tSta,  for 
his  or  their  home.  On  the  other  hand,  no  example  has  been  pro- 
duced in  classical  or  biblical  Gr.  of  the  entire  phrase  eli/ai  eV  to7s 
Ttvos,  "to  be  about  a  person's  business;  "  the  nearest  approach  to 
it  in  the  New  Testament  is  1  Tim.  iv.  15,  ff  tovtois  tadi,  "  Give 
thyself  Avholly  to  these  things."  3rdly,  as  to  the  ancient  versions, 
the  Vulg.,  Arabic,  and  Ethioijic  are  not  decisive  either  way;  the 
Syriac  is  clear  for  "in  the  hoixse  of  my  Father."  Of  Gr.  Com- 
mentators,  Origen  of  the  3rd  century,  Epiphaniiis  of  tlie  4th, 
Theodoret  of  the  5th,  Theophylact  of  the  11th,  and  Euthymius 
of  the  12th,  are  authorities  in  favour  of  this,  the  local  sense. 

62  Advanced. — Auth.,  "  increased,"  following  Tynd.  and  Genev. ; 
Wycl.,  "profit etl;  "  Rhem.,  "  proceeded."  The  proper  meaning 
of  the  Gr.  is  "to  advance,"  to  "make  progress,"  and  it  is  so 
rendered  in  other  places,  as  Rom.  xiii.  12,  "the  night  is  far 
spent"  (Auth.),  and  the  cognate  noun  is  in  Phil.  1.  12,  "the  fur- 
therance "  of  the  gospel  (Auth.) 

Stature. — Margin,  "  Or  age."  The  Gr.  {vXiKla)  bears  both  mean, 
ings,  and  is  here  rendered  "  a^e "  in  all  the  earlier  versions 
(following  Vulg.,  oetate),  except  Genev.,  which  has  "stature,"  from 
Beza,  staturd.    "  Age  "  would  not  be  inappropriate  in  this  place, 


ST.   LUKE— III.  99 

as  it  includes  "  stature  ;  "  but  in  some  j)assages  it  could  not  well 
be  so  translated,  especially  in  chap.  xii.  25  of  this  Gospel, ''  wliicli 
of  you  can  add  one  cubit  to  his  stature  ?  "  and  xix.  3,  Zacchseus 
was  "  little  of  stature."  These  passages,  occurring  in  this  Gospel, 
appear  to  decide  the  meaning  here. 


CHAPTER  III. 

3  Compare  Notes  on  the  parallel  passage  o£  Matt.  iii.  3,  &c. 

1-i  Soldiers  also  asked  him. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Auth., 
following  Tyud.,  "the  soldiers  also  demanded  of  him."  The 
word  "  demand,"  according  to  its  usage  in  the  Authorised  Yersion 
of  both  the  Old  and  New  Testaments,  has  a  peremptory  signifi- 
cance, which  might  fittingly  apply  to  the  deportment  of  Roman 
soldiers  in  tlieir  intercourse  with  a  Jew ;  but  it  is  not  implied  in 
the  Gr.,  eTrTjpoJTcoi/.     Compare  Matt.  ii.  4,  and  Note  there. 

15  Reasoned. — The  Gr.  usually  has  this  meaning,  and  denotes  a 
more  active  consideration  than  is  implied  by  "  mused  "  (Auth., 
foUomug  Cranm.  and  Genev.)     Vulg.,  cogitantibus  omnibus. 

17  Throughly  to  cleanse.— For  Auth.,  "  and  he  will  thoroughly 
pm-ge ;  "  by  change  of  Gr.  text  from  future  to  infinitive. 

23  When  he  began  to  teach,  was,  &c. — Auth.,  "  began  to  be 
about  thirty  years  of  age,"  following  Cranm.  and  Genev.  The 
Gr.  may  be  rendered  literally,  "was,  when  he  began,  of  about 
thirty  years,"  and  so  Tynd.  The  proper  Avord  to  be  supplied  after 
"began"  is  "to  teach,"  as  apj)ears  from  other  places  in  which 
St.  Luke  speaks  of  our  Lord's  commencement  of  his  ministry,  as 
Acts  i.  1.,  "  all  that  Jesus  began  both  to  do  and  teach,  until  the 
day,"  &c.,  and  i.  22 ;  and  here  the  Evangelist  evidently  has  in 
view  the  time  when,  having  been  bapti/.ed  by  John,  and  having 
received  the  unction  of  the  Holy  Ghost,  He  entered  on  his  public 
ministry. 


100  ST.    LUKE— IV. 

CHAPTER  lY. 

1  In  the  wilderness. — For  "  iuto  "  (Auth.)  by  cliauge  of  Gr. 
text,  tlie  true  reading  liaviiig  probably  been  altered  in  order  to 
assimilate  this  passage  to  Matt.  iv.  1.  The  verb  here  is  in  the 
imperfect,  denoting  a  continuance  of  the  leading,  not  in  the 
aorist,  denoting  a  finished  act,  as  in  Matt.  iv.  1.  Combining  tlie 
two  accounts,  therefore,  we  learn  that  the  Lord  was  led  up  into  the 
wilderness  to  be  tempted,  and  that  while  He  was  there  the  Divine 
Comforter  continued  to  be  his  leader  and  guide  throughout  the 
temptation  ;  and  by  liis  example  we  may  be  encouraged  to  believe 
that  He  who  brings  us  into  trial  and  temptation  -will  in  like 
manner  continue  mth  us  while  it  lasts,  and  bring  us  out  of  it 
safely,  if  we  will  follow  his  guidance. 

4,  5,  8.  The  words  omitted  in  these  verses,  but  given  in  Auth., 
were  probably  inserted  in  some  MSS.  from  St.  Matt,  with  the 
purj)o^e  of  assimilation.  See  Note  above  on  verse  1,  and  Notes  on 
the  parallel  passage  of  Matt.  iv.  1,  &c. 

10  To  guard  thee. — Auth.,  "  to  keep  thee."  The  Gr.  signifies 
properly  "  to  guard  as  a  sentinel."  Such  guards  were  the 
"  keepers  "  of  Peter  in  the  prison,  Acts  xii.  6,  19. 

18  To  preach  good  tidings. — The  passage  of  Isaiah  is  so  rendered 
iu  the  Auth.  (chap.  Ixi.  1) ;  and  the  word,  to  "  evangelize,"  would 
not  convey  to  the  hearers  of  our  Lord  the  same  meaning  wliich 
"  to  preach  the  gosi^el "  now  conveys  to  us,  or  which  it  did  j)ro- 
bably  convey,  when  He  had  finished  His  work  to  those  who  heard 
His  Apostles,  when  they  went  forth  "  to  preach  the  gospel  to  the 
whole  creation  "  (Mark  xvi.  15).  There  is  a  propriety,  therefore,  in 
rendering  the  Gr.,  ^<rav  evayye\iC6fj.(voi,  "  they  preached  the 
gospel,"  in  Acts  xiv.  7,  though  that  i-endering  would  be  an  ana- 
chronism at  this  early  period  of  the  Lord's  ministry. 

To  heal  the  broken-hearted. — (Auth.),  omitted  by  change  in  Gr. 
text. 

18, 19  To  proclaim. — ^Auth.,  "  to  preach."  The  Gr.,  usually  so 
translated  iu  Aiith.,is  properly  to  "proclaim  as  a  herald." 

20  The  attendant. — ^Auth.,  "  the  minister,"  which  in  this  place 
might  be  supposed  to  mean  the  "  ofiiciating  minister "  of  the 
synagogue. 

22  The  words  of  grace. — i.e.,  of  divine  grace.  So  Wycl.  and 
Rhem. ;  Yulg.,  verbis gratice.  Auth.,  with  T^Tid., '"  gracious  words  " 
■which  does  not  to  a  modern  English  ear  denote  the  Divine  source 


ST.    LUKE— I Y.  ml 

of  the  loving-kindness  that  spake  in  his  words.  The  Gv.,  x<*P'J, 
charis,  "  grace,"  and  its  cognate  verb,  so  frequently  used  by  St. 
Luke  and  St.  Pavd,  are  not  found  in  the  Gospels  of  St.  Matthew 
and  St.  Mark,  and  charis,  the  noun,  is  found  once  only  iu  the 
Gospel  of  St.  John  (i.  14),  and  once  in  his  second  Epistle, 
whereas  it  is  a  contiuually-recnrring  word  in  St.  Peter's  first 
Epistle. 

24  Acceptable.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  accepted,"  following  Yulg., 
acceptus.  The  Gr.  is  not  a  participle,  but  a  verbal  adjective  of 
the  form  represented  by  the  Latin  termination -&i?is,  and  the 
Euglish-6Ze. 

29  Cast  him  forth.— Auth.,  "  thrust  him  out."  The  Gr.  does 
not  necessarily  imply  tlie  use  of  violence.  The  word  at  the  end 
of  the  sentence,  literally  "  to  throw,  or  cast  headlong,"  does  not 
occur  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament. 

32  His  word  was  with  authority. — As  it  is  said  at  the  end  of 
the  Sermon  on  the  Mount,  Matt.  vii.  29,  "  He  taught  them  as  one 
having  authority."  See  also  verse  36  of  this  chap.  Auth.,  "with 
power." 

36  Amazement  came  upon  alL— Auth.,  '-they  were  all  amazed." 
Tynd.  and  Rhem.,  "  fear  came  upon  all."  The  phrase  is  charac- 
teristic of  St.  Luke.     Comp.  chap.  i.  65. 

What  is  this  word?— So  Wycl.,  following  Yulg.,  quod  est 
hoc  verbum  ?  Autli.,  "  What  a  word  is  this ! "  The  Gr.  is  not  an 
exclamation  prompted  by  their  amazement,  but  a  question,  "What 
is  the  meaning  of  this  word  ?  " 

38  Holden.— Auth.,  "  taken."     See  note  on  Matt.  iv.  24. 

41  Christ. — (Auth.),  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

42  Would  have  stayed  him. — The  Gr.  verb  is  in  the  imperfect 
tense.  Auth.,  "  stayed  him,"  which,  as  the  next  Averse  shows,  they 
did  not  succeed  in  doing.     See  note  on  chap.  i.  59. 

43  The  good  tidings.— See  note  on  verse  18. 


102  ST.    LUKE— Y. 

CHAPTER  V. 

3  Asked  him. — Antli.,  with  Wycl.  and  Tynd.,  "prayed  him." 

The  Gr.  is  properly  to  "  ask  a  question,"  but  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment more  often  "  to  make  a  request."  The  one  sense,  by  an 
easy  transition,  leads  to  the  other,  as  the  case  has  been  with  our 
word  "  to  ask."  The  request  would  probably  be  made,  by  way  of 
courtesy,  in  an  interrogative  form,  as  when  we  say,  "  will  you 
have  the  kindness  to  do  so-and-so?"  especially  would  the  request 
be  made  in  this  form,  where  the  person  making  it  was  equal  or 
superior  to  the  person  addressed.  St.  John  alone  uses  it  of 
prayer  made  to  God,  and  he  only  in  the  case  of  the  co-equal  Son 
addressing  the  Father.     Comp.  John  xiv.  16  ;  xvi.  26. 

Put  out. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  thrust  out,"  but  in  verse  4, 
"launch  out."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  in  both  places,  and  as 
applied  to  a  vessel  means  "  put  out  from  the  shore  to  the  sea." 

6  Their  nets  were  breaking. — i.e.,  began  to  break,  the  im- 
perfect tense.  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  their  nets  brake,"  which 
would  imply  the  actual  bursting  of  tlie  nets,  and  escape  of  fish. 
In  the  next  verse  the  inchoate  meaning  of  the  present  tense  of  the 
verb  is  well  expressed  by  Auth.,  "  they  began  to  sink." 

10  Thou  shalt  catch  men. — With  marginal  note, "  Gr.  tahe  olive." 
The  words  in  Gr.  are  in  literal  meaning  and  order  as  follows : 
"  Henceforth  men  shalt  thou  be  catching  alive."  The  use  of  the 
words  "  catch  alive"  in  this  place  by  the  Lord  of  life  is  probably 
not  without  its  significance.  Archbishop  Trench  ("  On  the 
Miracles,"  p.  13-i)  enlarges  on  the  thought,  explaining  the  word  to 
'mean  "  thou  shalt  catch  men  and  take  them  for  life,  and  not  for 
death " ;  and  he  observes  that  our  Lord  thus  by  anticipation 
"  tui'us  the  edge  of  Julian's  malignant  sneer,  who  said  the 
Galilean  might  well  call  his  apostles  fishers,  for  tliey  drew  their 
victims  from  the  waters  in  which  they  lived  and  were  free,  and 
delivered  them  over  to  an  element  in  which  they  could  not 
breathe,  and  must  presently  expire." 

12  In  one  of  the  cities — i.e.,  of  Galilee.  So  Wycl.  and  Rhem., 
following  Vulg.,  and  in  accordance  with  the  Gr.  Auth.,  follow- 
ing Tynd.,  "  in  a  certain  city.''  In  like  manner  at  verse  17,  "  On 
one  of  those  days,"  i.e.,  at  that  time,  instead  of  Auth.,  "  on 
a  certain  day,"  which  leaves  the  time  entirely  indefinite. 

13  Be  thou  made  clean. — Auth.,  "  Be  thou  clean."  The  Gr.  is 
the  same  verb,  in  the  j)assive  voice,  as  in  the  last  verse,  "  thou 
canst  make  me  clean." 


ST.    LUKE— YI.  103 

17  It  came  to  pass  .  .  .  that  he  was  teaching,  and  there 
were. — Auth.,  "  it  came  to  pass  ...  as  he  was  teaching,  that 
there  wei-e."  The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  it  came  to  pass  .  .  .  and  lie 
was  teaching,  and  there  were ;  "  the  use  of  "  and  "  as  the  con- 
necting link,  instead  of  "  that,"  being  a  characteristic  of  St. 
Luke's  style.     Comp.  chap.  "di.  37. 

Was  with  him  to  heal. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth., 
"  was  present  to  heal  them." 

26  Amazement  took  hold  on  all.— Auth.,  "  they  were  all 
amazed."  Comp.  chap.  iv.  36,  and  note  there.  It  is  by  a  lively 
figure  of  speech  that  we  regard  the  state  of  our  minds  as  ob- 
jective, e.g.,  "a  panic  seized  them."  ''I  was  struck  with  such 
a  thought ;  "  "I  feU  into  a  passion."  It  is  well  to  be  made  aware 
that  this  mode  of  speaking  is  not  a  thing  of  yesterday,  but  at 
least  as  ancient  as  the  first  age  of  the  Gospel. 

27  At  the  place  of  toll.— Comp.  Matt.  ix.  9,  and  note  there. 

36  In  this  verse  the  Auth.  has  been  altered  in  several  particulars, 
the  chief  being  due  to  the  addition  of  "rendeth"  in  the  Gr. 
text,  making  the  piece  put  upon  the  old  garment  to  be  a  piece 
rent  from  the  new  one :  if  this  be  done,  a  rent  is  made  in  the  new, 
and  the  old  has  an  unseemly  patch.  "  He  will  rend  the  new  "  is 
required  alike  by  the  Gr.  and  by  the  sense,  instead  of  "the  new 
maketh  a  rent "  (Auth.) :  with  this  change  the  meaning  of  the 
sentence,  which  in  the  Auth.  is  obscure,  becomes  clear.  See  Notes 
on  the  parallel  passage  of  St.  Matt.  ix.  16. 

38  "  And  both  are  preserved." — (Auth.),  omitted  by  change  in  Gr. 
text ;  probably  interpolated  from  Matt.  ix.  9. 


CHAPTER  YI. 

7  Might  find  how  to  accuse  him.— For  Auth.,  "  might  find 
an  accusation  against  Him." 

9  To  do  harm. — See  note  on  Matt.  xii.  10. 

17  A  level  place. — Auth.,  "  the  plain."  The  Gr.  indicates  that 
it  was  not  the  plain  lying  at  the  foot  of  the  mountains,  but  a 
plateau  or  level  place  to  which  they  came  in  the  descent ;  and  so 


104  ST.   LUKE— VI. 

it  is  in  some  of  tlie  older  Engl,  versions  :  "Wycl.,  "  a  fieldy 
place  " ;  Tynd.,  "  the  plain  field  "  ;  Genev.,  "  the  champain 
country  "  ;    Rhem.,  "  a  plain  place  "  ;  Vulg.,  in  loco  cawpestri. 

19  Power.— An th.,  "  virtue,''  and  so  in  chap.  viii.  46.  Comp.  Note 
on  Mark  v.  30. 

34  To  receive  again  as  nmch. — i.e.,  to  receive  back  as  much. 
•     Auth.,  "  to  receive  as  much  again,"  which  now  is  in  colloquial 

langixage  the  same  as  "  to  receive  twice  as  much." 

35  Wever  despairing.— All  Engl,  versions,  '•  hoping  for  nothing 
again."  Yulg.,  nihil  inde  sperantes.  This  agrees  well  with  the 
context,  but  is  not  according  to  the  meaning  of  the  Gr.  aTreK-rri^u), 
as  used  in  classical  wi-iters,  and  in  the  Apocrypha,  "  to  give  up 
hope."  The  word  does  not  occur  again  in  the  New  Testament. 
As  it  stands,  it  gives  this  sense,  "  Lend,  and  though  appearances 
may  be  unfavourable,  despair  not  of  being  repaid  ;  "  because  you 
are  lending,  not  to  man  only,  but  to  the  Lord,  who  will  assm-edly 
repay  what  you  have  laid  out. 

37  Release,  and  ye  sliall  be  released.— So  Yulg.,  dimittite 
et  dimittemini.  All  Engl,  versions,  "  Forgive,  and  ye  shall  be 
forgiven."  The  Gr.,  airoAvw,  never  has  the  sense  of  "  forgive  " 
in  the  New  Testament.  It  is  often  used,  and  always  signifies 
"let  go,"  "  release,"  as  in  reference  to  Barabbas,  especially  in  the 
Gospel  of  St.  Luke  and  the  Acts,  in  both  of  which  books  it 
frequently  occurs. 

41  Considerest.— So  Tynd.  Auth.,  "  perceivest,"  but  "con- 
siderest "  in  the  parallel  passage  of  St.  Matt.  \\i.  3,  where  see 
Notes. 

44  Each,  tree  is  known  by  its  own  fruit.— Auth.,  "cA-ery 
tree."  "  Each  "  is  the  better  rendering  of  the  Gr.  tKaa-Tos,  and 
"  every "  of  irus,  as  in  verse  47.  Comp.  Matt.  xv.  13  (Auth.) 
"  Every  tree  that  my  Father  hath  not  planted,"  &c. 

48  Digged,  and  went  deep.—  AU  Engl,  versions  "  digged 
deep,"  following  Vulg.,  fodit  in  altum.  In  the  Gr.  there  are  two 
words,  literally,  "  digged  and  deepened." 

Laid  a  foundation  upon  the  rock. — The  Gr.  has  not  the 

article  with  the  former  word,  but  has  it  with  the  latter.  Auth., 
with  Tynd.,  has  "the"  with  the  former,  and  "a"  with  the 
latter.  Similarly  in  Matt.  vii.  24,  25.  "Wycl.  here  has  "  it  was 
founded  on  a  sad  stone  "  ("  sad,"  i.e..  firm,  steady). 

Brake  against.— According  to  the  literal  meaning  of  the  Gr. 
Auth.,  "  beat  vehemently." 


ST.    LUKE— YII.  105 

49  It  fell  in— Auth.,  "it  fell."      The  Gr.  is,  Uterally,  "it  feU 
together,"  into  a  heap,  "  collapsed." 


CHAPTER  yn. 


1  In  the  ears. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following  Vulg.,  in  aures 
plebis.  Auth.,  after  Tynd.,  "in  the  audience,"  as  in  many  places 
both  of  the  Old  and  New  Testament :  but  this  word  no  longer 
means  "the  hearing,"  except  in  the  phrase  "  grant  an  audience," 
and  in  common  ixsage  is  a  noun  of  multitude  designating  the 
hearers  themselves  in  the  aggregate. 

2  Margin,  "Or  boy."  The  Gr.,  ■n-aTs,  properly  means  "boy,"  and 
was  applied  to  domestic  servants,  for  the  same  reason  that  the 
corresponding  words  in  French,  and  (in  one  or  two  cases)  in  our 
own  language,  are  similarly  used,  because  the  servants  were,  or 
were  supposed  to  be,  younger  than  their  masters. 

Dear. — Margin,  "  Ov  precious."  The  Gr.,  ivrifios,  properly  has 
reference  to  price  or  value.  Compare  1  Peter  ii.  4,  6  ;  and  in  that 
sense  we  speak  of  the  "precious  blood;"  but  "  precious  "  has 
almost  entirely  lost  its  primarj'-  meaning,  and  become  limited  to 
its  secondary  sense  ;    "  dear"  is  equally  used  in  both. 

At  the  point  of  death. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  ready  to 
die,"  which,  in  one  sense,  we  should  all  wish  to  be,  in  the  midst 
of  life  and  health ;  but  in  the  sense  intended  here,  that  of  being 
moribund,  "  about  to  die,"  the  phrase  is  an  archaism.  Wycl.  has 
"  drawing  to  the  death." 

3  Come  and  save. — Auth.,  "  come  and  heal."  The  petition  was 
not  that  he  would  heal,  but  that  he  would  save  from  death.    Gr., 

4  Earnestly. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "instantly."  This  word  also, 
in  its  old  sense  of  "  urgently,"  has  become  an  archaism,  having 
acquired  a  temporal  sense,  like  the  cognate  noun  "  instant "  m. 
this  Gospel  and  in  Isa.  xxix.  5,  "  It  shall  be  at  an  instant  sud- 
denly." The  adjective,  in  the  sense  of  "  insistent,"  is  almost 
obsolete,  but  not  having  acquired  the  temporal  sense  is  not  of 
diibious  meaning,  and  is  well  understood  in  2  Tim,  iv.  2,  "  Be 
instant  in  season,  out  of  season." 


106  ST.   LUKE— VII. 

5  Himself  built  us  our  synagogue.— Auth.,  "  he  hath  built 
us  a  synagogue."  The  effect  of  the  Gr.  pronoun  and  article, 
both  of  which  are  overlooked  in  all  the  English  versions,  is  to 
make  it  emphatically  apparent,  that  the  peojile  of  Capernaum, 
according  to  the  statement  of  their  own  chief  men  or  "  elders," 
were  indeljted  to  this  Roman  Centurion,  this  heathen  soldier,  for 
their  only  place  of  worship,  which  he  had  built  liimself . 

6  Worthy. — Margin,  "  Gr.,  sufficient.'"  The  word  is  not  the 
same  as  that  which  is  translated  "  worthy,"  in  verses  4,  7.  Com- 
pare  the  parallel  j)assage  in  Matt.  viii.  8. 

8  See  Note  on  Matt.  viii.  9. 

10  "  That  had  been  sick." — (Auth.)  omitted  by  change  in  Gr. 
text. 

12  He  drew  near. — Auth.,  "  came  nigh,"  which  in  verse  14  is  the 
rendering  of  another  word.  The  Gr.  in  this  place  would  be 
exactly  represented  by  "  he  neared." 

One  that  was  dead. — The  Gr.  does  not  say  that  he  was  "  a 
man' '  (Auth.).  From  verse  14  we  learn  that  ho  was  "  a  young 
man." 

14  The  bearers. — This,  besides  being  the  appropriate  English 
phrase,  avoids  the  insertion  of  /ifm.  Auth.,  "  they  that  bare 
him." 

15  He  gave  him  to  his  mother. — So  Wyel.  and  Rhem.,  follow- 
ing Yulg.,  cledit.  Truly,  as  the  Gr.  says,  it  was  a  gift.  Auth., 
with  Tynd.,  "  he  delivered  him  to  his  mother."  The  word 
"  deliver  "  was  probably  used  by  our  translators  here  in  remem- 
brance of  the  similar  passage  in  1  Kings  x\'iii.  23,  where  Elijah, 
after  restoring  the  widow's  son  to  hfe,  "  delivered  him  to  his 
mother."  But  there  the  word  in  the  LXX.  version,  which 
doubtless  was  that  which  the  Evangelist  had  in  mind,  as  in  tliis 
passage,  fSuKe,  "  gave." 

19  Sent  them  to  the  Lord. — By  change  in  Gr.  text,  for  Auth., 
"  sent  them  to  Jesus."  It  is  worthy  of  notice  that  St.  Luke, 
both  in  his  Gospel  and  in  the  Acts,  designates  the  Saviour  by  this 
title,  "  the  Lord."  "  So  also  does  St.  John  in  his  Gospel ;  but 
so  do  not  St.  Matthew  and  St.  Mark,  writing  as  they  did  more 
especially  for  Jewish  Christians,  who  had  Joeen  accustomed  by 
that  title,  when  they  used  the  Gr.  language,  to  designate  "  the 
Lord  "  of  the  Old  Testament,  the  Lord  Jehovah. 

24,  25  To  behold  ...  to  see. — Represent  two  different  Gr. 
words ;  the  first,  "  to  behold,"  as  a  sj)ectacle,  the  second,  simply 


ST.   LUKE— YII.  107 

"to  see."  Anth.  has  "to  see"  in  both  places.  "Behold"  is 
also  used  in  verse  25,  27,  to  represent  another  Gr.,  iSov,  an  excla- 
mation of  frequent  occurrence  throughout  the  New  Testament, 
and  occasionally  rendered  by  "  Lo !  "  which  is  an  abbre^-iatiou  of 
"  Look ! " 

28  None  greater  than  John. — For  Auth., "  not  a  greater  prophet 
than  John,"  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

30  Rejected  for  themselves  the  counsel  of  God.— Auth., 
"  rejected  the  counsel  of  God  against  themselves."  By  this 
order  of  the  words,  together  with  the  rendering  "  against  them- 
selves," God's  counsel  is  represented  as  being  against  them,  and 
therefore  rejected  by  them ;  whereas  the  true  meaning  is  that 
they  rejected,  in  reference  to  themselves  {els  eavrovs),  the  counsel 
of  God :  merciful  as  it  was,  they  woiild  not  apply  it  to  them- 
selves. 

31,  &c.  See  Notes  on  Matt.  xi.  16,  &c. 

37  And  when  she  knew. — "  And "  inserted  in  Gr.  text,  as  at 
chap.  V.  17.     See  Notes  on  Matt.  xxvi.  6,  &c. 

38  To  wet  his  feet.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "to  wash."  Wycl., 
"  to  moist."  Vulg.,  rigare.  The  Gr.  is  literally  "  to  sprinkle," 
as  with  rain.  Compare  Matt.  v.  45,  "  He  sendeth  rain  on  the 
just,"  &c. ;  that  sense  is  also  more  apposite  here  than  "wash." 

41  A  certain  lender. — So  Wycl.  and  Tynd.,  following  Yulg. 
fceneratori.  Auth.,  following  Rliem.,  "  a  certain  creditor."  The 
Gr.  does  not  express  the  relation  in  wliich  the  lender  stands  to  the 
borrower  as  does  "  creditor,"  but  means  one  who  is  a  money- 
lender by  occupation. 

42  When   they  had  not  ivherewith  to   pay.— So  "Wycl.   and 

Rliem.,  •following  Vujg.,  non  hahentibus  iliis  uncle  reclderent. 
Auth.,  after  Tynd.,  "  they  had  not  to  pay,"  which,  though  an 
exact  rendering  of  the  Gr.,  has  not  the  same  meaning,  and  at 
least  in  colloquial  English  would  be  imderstood  to  mean  that 
they  had  nothing  to  pay,  were  not  required  to  pay. 

Forgave. — So  all  versions  previous  to  Auth.,  which  has  "  frankly 
forgave."  The  Gr.  needs  no  strengthening,  and  elsewhere  is 
simj)ly  rendered  "  forgive  "  in  Auth.,  as  2  Cor.  ii.  7,  Col.  ii.  13. 

"  Tell  me." — (Auth.)  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

44  Her  hair. — For  Auth.,  "  the  hairs  of  her  head,"  by  change  of 
Gr.  text. 


108  ST.   LUKE— VIII. 

CHAPTER  YIII. 

3  XTnto  them — i.e.,  Unto  the  Lord  and  his  discij)les,  by  change  in 

Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  unto  him." 

4  See  Notes  on  Matt.  xiii.  2,  &c.,  and  Mark  iv.  1,  &c, 

6  Grew. — Auth.,  "  sprung  up."  The  Gr.  is  not  the  same  as  in 
Matt  xiii.  5. 

10  The  rest. — So  Rhem.,  correctly  following  Vulg.,  cceferis.  Auth., 
less  comprehensively,  "  to  others." 

12  Taketh  away  the  word  from   their  heart.— Auth.,  "  out 

of."  The  Gr.  is  airS,  not  sk  ;  and  "  from  "  is  more  appropriate 
than  "  out  of,"  which  implies  that  the  word  had  been  "  in  "  their 
hearts,  whereas  they  had  been  hearers  only. 

That  they  may  not.— All  English  versions,  "lest  they 
should,"  expressing  the  same  motive  in  a  negative,  not,  as  the  Gr., 
in  a  positive  form. 

15  Hold  it  fast. — The  Gr.  requires  a  stronger  rendering  than 
Auth.,  "  keep  "  (following  Tynd.).     Yulg.,  retinent. 

16  Lamp. — Auth.,  "  candle."     See  Note  on  Matt.  v.  15. 

18  He  thinketh  he  hath.— Auth.,  following  Genev.,  "he 
seemeth  to  have."     The  Gr.  may  be  either. 

23  Were  filling  ivith  ivater. — The  Gr.  is  the  passive  imperfect, 
which  may  be  often  represented  in  English  by  the  imperfect  of 
the  active  voice,  as  we  say  the  house  is  "  building  "  (or  a-building) 
i.e.,  beiug  built.  Auth.,  "  they  were  filled,"  which  would  repre- 
sent the  Gr.  aorist,  and  signify  that  the  vessel  was  full. 

25  Who  then  is  this  ? — Auth.,  "  What  manner  of  man  is  this  ?  " 
Compare  chap.  iv.  36,  ix.  9,  xxiv.  13. 

26  Compare  Matt.  viii.  28,  &c  ;  Mark  v.  1,  &c.,  and  Notes  there. 

28  The  Most  High  God.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  God  most 
high."  The  change  is  required  by  the  Gr.,  aud  has  its  signifi- 
cance, shewing  that  the  adjunct,  "  Most  High,"  is  not  merely 
added  in  reverence,  but  to  distinguish  the  supreme  God  from  the 
inferior  deities  of  the  heathen  world.  So  Wycl.,  "  the  highest 
God." 

29  Kept  under  guard. — Auth.,  "kept."  Compare  Note  on 
chap.  iv.  10. 

Breaking  asunder.— Auth.,  "he  brake."     The  force  of  the 


ST.    LUKE— VIII.  109 

preposition  is  given  elsewliero  in  Auth.  by  "  rent,"  as  Matt.  xxvi. 
65,  "  He  rent  his  clothes,"  in  which  place,  as  in  this,  it  needs  to  be 
expressed.  It  is  understood,  without  being  expressed^  in  such  a 
case  as  the  nets  breaking  (Luke  v.  6). 

31  The  abyss. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  the  deep,"  which  from 
the  context  might  be  understood  to  mean  the  sea.  Wycl.,  "  liell." 
The  literal  meaning  of  the  Gr.,  abyssos,  is  "  the  bottomless  gulf ;  " 
and  in  Scripture  it  is  used  to  denote  the  abode  of  evil  spirits. 
Compare  Rev.  ix.  1,  &c. 

32  That  he  would  give  them  leave. — Auth, "  suffer ;"  but 
in  Mark  v.  13,  "  gave  them  leave,"  where  the  Gr.  is  the  same. 

37  All  the  people  of  the  country. —The  Gr.  is  literally  "  the 
whole  multitude,"  as  at  chap.  xix.  37.  There  the  words  following 
are  "  of  the  disciples  ;"  but  it  woidd  not  be  in  accoi-dance  with 
English  idiom  to  say,  "the  whole  multitude  of  the  coimtry." 

40  Welcomed  him. —  Auth.,  "  gladly  received  him,"  inserting 
gladly,  which  is  implied  in  the  Gr.  aTreSt^aro.  That  word  is 
used  by  St.  Luke  only ;  in  this  one  place  of  his  Gospel,  and  in 
several  places  of  the  Acts  {e.g.,  chap.  ii.  41). 

45  "And  sayest  thou  .  .  .  ."  —  To  the  end  of  the  sentence 
(Auth.)  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

46  Some  one  did  touch  me    .    .     .     .—This  in  the  Gr.  is  all 

throAvn  into  the  past.     Auth.,  "  some  one  hath  touched  me." 

48  "  Be  of  good  comfort,"  and  verse  54,  "  Put  them  out."  (Auth.), 
are  omitted  in  Gr.  text,  also  in  Wycl.  and  Rhem. 

65  That  something  be  given  her  to  eat.— Auth.,  following 
Tynd.,  "  he  commanded  to  give  her  meat."  The  English  idiom 
here  so  closely  agrees  with  the  Gr.  tliat  it  is  strange  Tynd.  should 
have  deviated  from  it,  especially  as  Wycl.  has  "  give  her  to  eat." 


no  ST.    LUKE— IX. 

CHAPTER  IX. 

1  The  twelve. — Autli.,  "the  twelve  disciples."  The  last  word 
is  omitted  in  the  Gr.  text. 

2  He  sent  them  forth.— Auth.,  "  he  seut  them."  From  the 
Gr.  is  derived  the  word  "apostle,"  siguifyiug  "oue  sent 
forth." 

3  "  Apiece." — (Auth.),  omitted  by  chauge  in  Gr.  test,  and  not  found 
in  the  previous  versions,  or  in  the  Yulg. 

6  Preaching  the  Gospel.— See  Note  on  Matt.  xi.  5. 

7  "  By  him." — (Auth,),  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

9  He  sought  to  see  him.— Auth.,  "he  desired."  This  ex- 
presses more  than  a  desire,  an  endeavour. 

10  "  Into  a  desert  -place. " — (Auth.),  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text, 

11  Welcomed.- Auth.,  "  received."     See  Note  on  chap.  viii.  40. 

14  In  companies    about  fifty  each. — So  Wycl.   and  Rhcm., 

nearly.      Auth.,  less  perspicuously,  and  less  literally,  but   with 
the  same  meaning,  "by  fifties  in  a  company,"  following  Tjoid. 

Compare  Matt  xiv.  15  and  Notes  there  ;  also  Max'k  vi.  35  ;  John 
vi.  1 ;   for  this  one  miracle  is  related  by  all  the  Evangelists. 

18  See  Matt.  x\i.  13,  and  Notes  there. 

22  Be  killed.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "be  slain."  The  Gr.,  which 
occurs  about  seventy  times  in  the  New  Testament,  is  in  all  places 
except  four,  of  which  this  is  one,  rendered  "kill"  in  Auth.;  and 
thei'e  appears  no  reason  why  it  slioidd  not  have  the  same  rendering 
here. 

25  Or  forfeit  his  own  self.— The  Gr.  is  literally,  "or  be 
mulcted  of  liis  o^aii  self."  Tynd.,  "  or  run  in  damage  of  him- 
self." Auth.,  "  or  be  cast  away,"  a  j)araphrase  which  avoids  the 
harshness,  but  also  conceals  the  nigged  force  of  the  original. 
Compare  Matt,  x-^-i.  26,  &c. ;  Mark  viii.  36,  where  we  have  "  for- 
feit his  own  soul ;  "  and  see  Notes  there. 

36  Held  their  peace. — So  Rhem.,  following  closely  the  Gr.  and 
Vulg.     Auth.,  after  Tynd.,  "  kept  it  close." 

37  Mountain. — So  Genev.  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.  and 
Craum. .  hei-e  has  "  hill,"  but  "mountain  "  for  the  same  Gr.  in  verse 
28.     Compare  Matt.  xvii.  14 ;    Mark  ix.  14,  and  Notes  tlierc. 


ST.  LUKE— X.  Ill 

38  Multitude.— Autli.,  "  company  ;  "  but  "  multitude,"  iu  verse  37. 

43  Majesty.— So  Auth.  for  the  same  Gr.  iu  2  Peter  i.  16; here, 
with  Tyud.,  "  mighty  power."  Wycl.,  "greatness,"  following 
Vulg.,  magnitudine.  There  is  no  note  of  "power"  or  "might" 
in  the  Gr.  word,  which  occm-s  only  three  times  iu  the  New 
Testament. 

45  Concealed.— Auth.,  "hid,"  with  Wycl.  and  Tynd. ;  Rlicm., 
"  covered."  The  Gr.  is  properly  "  covered  with  a  veil,"  and  is 
not  found  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament. 

51  When  the  days  were  well  nigh    come.— Rhem.,   after 

Vulg.  and  Wycl.,  "  whilst  the  days  were  accomplishing  ;  "  Auth., 
with  Tynd.,  "  when  the  time  was  come."  The  Gr.  denotes  the 
near  apin-oach,  not  the  arrival  of  the  time ;  literally,  "  when 
the  days  were  being  fulfilled."  The  same  phrase  is  used  by  St. 
Luke,  in  Acts  ii.  1,  where  see  Note. 

54  "  Even  as  Elias  did." — (Auth.)  omitted  by  change  iu  Gr.  text. 

56  The  Mai-giual  Note  shews  that  words,  which  appear  in  Auth., 
resembling  John  iii.  17,  wei'e  added  hei'e  in  some  MSS. 

60  Leave  the  dead,  &c. — Compare  Matt.  viii.  22,  and  Note 
there. 

Publish  abroad.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  preach,"  which  is  used 
as  the  rendering  of  several  words,  but  not  elsewhere  of  this,  the 
proper  sense  of  which  is  "  to  announce  "  as  a  messenger.  Vulg., 
annuntia. 


CHAPTER  X. 

1  Was  about  to  come.— Auth.,    "  would   come,"    denotes    the 
intention  of  coming,  which  the  Gr.  e/xeAAe  does  not. 

11  To  our  feet. — Not  in  Auth.,  added  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

15  Shalt  thou  be  exalted  unto  heaven  ?— By  change  in  Gr. 
text,  for  Auth.,  "  which  art  exalted  to  heaven."  Capci-naura 
api^ears  to  have  been  a  flourishing  city  at  this  time  ;  and  its 
inhabitants  may  have  been  anticipating  for  it  a  still  higher  degree 
of  prosperity.  The  site  of  it  is  now  uncertain.  See  Dictionary 
of  Biblical  Geography,  and  Farrar's  Life  of  Christ,  i.  182. 

Hades.— Auth.,  "  hell."    See  Note  on  Matt.  xi.  23. 


112  ST.   LUKE— X. 

16  Rejecteth.— Auth.,  "despiseth"  here,  but  "  rejecteth"  for  the 
same  Gr.,  iu  chap.  vii.  30,  and  elsewhere.  The  Gr.  does  not 
imply  contempt,  but  rejection,  from  whatever  motive  that  act 
may  proceed. 

18  I  beheld  Satan  fallen— Auth.,  " I  beheld  Satan  faU."  The 
Gr.  is  the  j)articiple  of  the  aorist,  denoting  a  completed  event  or 
action  :  "I  saw  him  when  he  was  fallen  out  of  heaven ;  "  like  light- 
ning, both  in  the  rapidity  of  the  fall  and  iu  the  brightness  of 
the  angelic  nature.  Compare  Isa.  xiv.  12,  to  which  there  appears 
to  be  a  reference  in  these  words  of  our  Lord,  "  How  art  thou  fallen 
from  heaven,  O  Lucifer,  son  of  the  morning ! "  So  A  Lapide 
(a.d.  1620),  ''pro  cadentem,  Grrcece  est  Trea-SvTa,  id  est  lapsuni, 
in  prceterito.  See  also  Theophylact,  quoted  by  "Wordswortli,  and 
Alford's  Note. 

The  participle  of  the  praater-perfect  would  express  the  condition 
ensuing  on  a  fall,  the  lying  prostrate  :  coraj).  Acts  xv.  16,  "  the 
tabernacle  of  David,  Avhich  is  faUeu,"  and  Rev.  ii.  5;  ix.  1; 
xviii.  3. 

19  Authority.— Auth.,  "power."  The  Gr.  is  not  tlie  same  as  Lu 
the  following  clause.  On  the  other  hand,  m  verse  20,  Auth.  has 
"that"  and  "because,"  where  the  Gr.  is  the  same  in  both 
places. 

21  Rejoiced  in  the  Holy  Spirit.— According  to  the  Gr.  text, 
followed  by  Vulg.,  Wycl.,  and  Rhem. ;  for  Auth.,  "  ui  the  spirit.'' 
Comj)are  the  parallel  passage.  Matt.  xi.  25. 

29  Desiring.— Auth.,  "  ^^^lling."  The  Gr.  BeKoov  expresses  a  more 
active  feeling  than  that  of  willmguess.  "  Where  there  is  a  will," 
says  the  proverb,  not  "  where  there  is  willingness,"  "  there  is  a 
way." 

30  Which  both  stripped  him  and  beat  him.— Auth.,  after 

"  strij)ped  him,"  adds  "  of  his  raiment "  (following  Tynd.), 
which  is  not  recpiired  by  the  Gr.  For  beat,  Auth.  has 
"wounded."  The  Gr.  is  literally  "laid  blows  upon  him;" 
"  ^vovmds  "  iu  verse   34  is  the  rendering  of  another  word,  of 

rpavfiara,  not  irArjyois. 

34  Pouring  on  them.—A]l  English  versions  "  poixring  iu,"  fol. 
lowing  Yulg.,  inf lindens.  The  minute  accuracy  with  which  the 
treatment  of  tlie  wounded  man  is  described  reminds  us  of  St. 
Luke's  worldly  calling  as  a  physician.  The  wine  and  the  oil 
each  had  their  proper  function  iu  the  liealing  of  wounds,  the  wine 
to  cleanse  them,  the  oil  to  assuage  the  pain,  according  to  Pliny, 


ST.    LUKE— XT.  113 

Nat.  Hist.  xxix.  9.  Compare  also  Pliny  xxxi.  7,  and  seo  the 
Notes  of  "Wordsworth  and  Alford ;  and  Trench  "  On  the 
Parables." 

35  "  Wlien  he  departed." — Auth.,  omitted  by  emendation  of  Gr. 
text,  is  not  found  in  Wycl.  and  Rhem. 

I,  when  I  come  back  again.—"  I "  is  emphatic  in  the  Gr. 
Auth.,  "  When  I  come  again,  I  will,"  &c. 

36  Which  of  these.  .  .  proved  neighbour.— Auth.,  "which 
of  these  .  .  .  was  neighbour."  An  idiomatic  use  of  "  prove " 
has  been  introduced  to  express  the  Gr.,  which  is  literally  "  which 
of  these  seemeth  to  thee  to  have  become  neighbour?  " 

42  For  Mary. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  and  Mary,"  as  Auth. 
The  change  is  slight,  but  renders  it  necessary  mentally  to  supply 
that  for  which  the  reason  is  thus  given — e.g.,  "  One  thing  is 
needful ;  and  I  will  not  ash  Mary  to  do  what  tho^i  desirest, 
for  she  hath  chosen,"  &c. 


CHAPTER  XL 

2  The  short  form  of  prayer  which  is  here  given  was  delivered,  as 
the  previous  verse  makes  evident,  not  in  the  Sermon  on  the 
Mount,  but  on  another  occasion,  when  the  Lord  had  been  in 
prayer ;  and  the  additions  to  it,  found  in  "  many  ancient  author- 
ities," and  adopted  in  Auth. — some  of  them,  being  in  the  Vulg., 
which  is  itself  an  "  ancient  authority  "  as  regards  the  original 
text — are  an  illustration  of  the  endeavours  that  were  made  at  a 
.  very  early  period  to  assimilate  some  passages  of  this  Gospel  to  the 
parallel  passages  of  St.  Matt.     See  Notes  on  Matt.  vi.  9,  &c. 

11  Of  which  of  you  that  is  a  father  shall  his    son  ask, 

&C. — All  English  versions,  following  Yulg.,  turn  this  sentence 
by  treating  the  interrogative  pronoun  at  the  beginning,  "  which 
of  you,"  as  indefinite,  equivalent  "  to  any  one  ;  "  "  If  a  son  shall 
ask  bread  of  any  of  you  that  is  a  father,"  &c. ;  which  comes  to 
the  same  thing,  as  regards  the  general  meaning ;  but  the  Gr. 
rendered  literally,  is,  "  Of  which  of  you,  being  the  father,  shall 
the  son  ask  bread,  and  will  he  give,"  &c. 

The  two  parables,  in  which  bread  is  the  subject,  may  have  been 
recalled  to  the  mind  of  the  Evangelist  by  the  petition  for  daily 


lU  ST.    LUKE.— XL 

bread  in  the  Lord's  Prayer  (verse  3) ;  at  any  rate  tbey  follow 
appropriately  after  it,  iu  illustration  of  the  blessing  to  be  obtained 
by  prayer. 

12  Give  — Anth.,  "offer,"  following  Tyud.  Wycl.,  "areche " 
(reach).  Vulg.,  jiorrigcd.  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  the  last 
verse,  biit  the  translators  apj)ear  to  have  thought  it  inconceivable 
that  a  scorpion  should  be  actually  "  given."  Comp.  Matt.  xii.  22 
— i5,  and  Notes  there. 

14  Which  was  dumb.— Aiith.,  "  and  it  was  dumb,"  according  to 
the  Gr.  text  of  some  MSS.,  in  which,  probably  the  change  waa 
made  by  one  who  had  observed  how  the  manner  of  St.  Luke  is 
to  link  together  sentences,  and  parts  of  sentences,  by  "and." 

21  PuUy  armed.— Auth.,  "  armed."  The  Gr.  (a  compoimd  verb) 
denotes  one  armed  cap-a-j)ie.     His  armour  is  called  his  panoply, 

travoTrXia,  in  verse  22. 

Court. — So  Rhom.,  following  Vulg.,  atrium,  as  in  Matt.  xxvi.  3, 
&c.  Auth.,  "  palace."  Comj).  John  x.  1,  where  the  same  word  is 
iised  for  the  sheejjfold. 

33  In  a  cellar. — Auth.,  "  a  secret  place."  By  a  shght  change  in 
Gr.  text  the  word  has  a  feminine  instead  of  a  neuter  termina- 
tion;  and  iu  that  iovm.  {KpinrT-q,  whence  the  English "  crypt ")  it 
designates  an  underground  vault  or  ceUax*. 

34  The  lamp.— Auth.,  "  light."  Comp.  Matt.  vi.  22.  Thy  body 
.  .  .  thine  eye,  for  Auth.,  "  the  body  .  .  .  the  eye,"  by  change 
of  Gr.  text. 

iO  Ye  foolish  ones. — All  Engl,  versions,  "ye  fools."  Vulg., 
stulti.  The  Gr.  is  an  adjective,  and  has  not  in  the  New  Testament 
the  blunt  severity  of  the  English  noun.  Comp.  Luke  xxiv.  25. 
It  is  several  times  used  by  St  Paul,  e.g.,  Rom.  ii.  20 ;  1  Cor.  xv. 
36 ;  and  once  by  St.  Peter ;  not  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament. 

41  Give  for  alms  those  things  which  are  within.— So  Genev. 
Auth.,  "  but  rather  give  alms  of  such  things  as  ye  have " 
(following  Tynd.  and  Cranm.),  from  which  no  very  clear  sense  is 
to  be  obtained.  Our  Lord  compares  the  Pharisees  to  their  own 
vessels,  and  means  that  they  should  make  clean  the  inward  parts 
of  the  material  vessels  and  of  their  own  selves,  and  give  in  mercy 
to  the  poor  that  which  is  within  the  vessels,  the  material  food, 
and  that  which  is  within  themselves,  the  loving  heart. 

43  The  chief  seats.— Auth.,  "The  uppermost."  The  Gr,  is, 
literally,  "  the  first."     See  Matt,  xxiii.  25,  &c. 


ST.    LUKE— XII.  115 

53  And  when  he  was  come  out  from  thence.— By  change  of 
Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  and  as  he  said  these  things  unto  them.' 

54  "That  they  might  accuse  him."— (Auth.).     Omitted  in  accord- 
ance with  change  in  Gr.  text. 


CHAPTER  XII. 


1  The  many  thousands  of  the  multitude.— Auth.,  following 
Tynd.,  "an  innumerable  multitude  of  the  people,"  which,  though  a 
paraphrase,  is  scarcely  a  more  hyperbolical  phrase  than  the 
original,  and  is  more  close  to  it  than  Yulg.,  mxdtis  turbis.  But  bj-- 
the  omission  of  the  article  we  lose  the  idea  which  it  conveys,  that 
a  vast  concourse  of  people  accompanied  or  gathered  about  Him 
whithersoever  He  went. 

2  Covered  up.— Auth.,  "covered;"  "up"  being  added  to  give 
the  force  of  the  Gr.  preposition,  (tvv.  St.  Luke's  style,  both  in 
the  Gospel  and  the  Acts,  is  characterised  by  the  use  of  long  com- 
pound verbs. 

3  The  inner  chambers.— Auth.,  "closets."     The  Gr.  is  the 

same  as  in  Matt.  vi.  6 ;  xxiv.  26. 

6  In  the  sight  of  God.— Aiith.,  "before,"  with  Wycl.  and 
Rhem.  Vulg.,  coram.  The  Gr.  iuannov  is  veiy  frequently  used 
by  St.  Luke,  but  does  not  occur  in  the  first  two  Gospels,  and 
once  only  in  St.  John's  ;  it  is  very  frequent  in  St.  Paul's  Epistles 
and  in  the  Apocalypse;  iix-wpoa-Bev,  which  is,  literally,  "before," 
is  common  in  all.  In  verses  8  and  9  both  the  words  occur,  .and 
though  the  meaning  is  not  different,  faithfulness  requires  that 
they  should  be  distinguished  in  translation. 

11  BiUlers. — So  Tynd.  Ynlg.,  magistrcdus,  whence  Wycl.  and 
Rhem.,  and  Auth.,  "magistrates,"  a  word  which  denoted  high 
officers  of  state  in  Latin  and  old  English  {e.g.,  in  the  litany  of 
the  Church),  but  is  now  limited  to  officers  discharging  judicial 
functions.     The  Gr.  is  apxds. 

Authorities.— Auth.,  "powers."  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  "potes- 
tates,"  adopting  the  very  word  of  the  Vulg.,  which  also  appears 
in  Auth.  (1  Tim.  vi.  15),  in  a  slightly  altered  form,  "potentates." 
Gr.,  i^ovaias. 


116  ST.    LUKE— XIT. 

12  In  that  very  hour.— Autli.,  "in  the  same  hour."  The  Gr.  is 
yery  emphatic,  avrp  ttj  wpa.  This  expression,  frequent  in  the 
Gospel  and  the  Acts,  is  not  found  in  the  other  Gospels,  which 
have  ry  wpa  iKfii'fj,  "in  that  hour,"  instead,  nor  in  the  rest  of  the 
New  Testament. 

15  Keep  yourselves  from. — All  Engl,  versions,  "beware,"  fol- 
lowing Tulg.,  cavete.  "  Beware  "  is  the  rendering  of  other  words, 
e.g.,  of  /SAeVere  and  7rpo(r€X€Te,  as  in  Matt.  vii.  15,  &c.  The  Gr. 
here  is,  literally,  "  guard  yourselves  from,"  <pv\dfffffoQe. 

18  My  corn.— By  change  of  Gr.  text  for  "my  fruits"  (Auth.). 

20  Thou  foolish  one.— See  Note  on  xi.  40. 

And  the  things  which,  &c.— So  Rhem.  This  is  the  Gr. 
order,  and  it  is  more  emphatically  scornful  than  that  of  Auth., 
"  then  whose  shall  those  things  be,"  &e.  (following  Tynd.). 

Prepared. — The  Gr.  is  usually  so  rendered  in  Auth.,  which 
here,  following  Tynd.,  has  "  provided,"  a  word  better  answering 
to  Trpovoec},  as  in  Rom.  xii.  16,     Similarly  below,  verse  33. 

22  Comp.  Matt.  vi.  25,  &c.,  and  Notes  there. 

83  Purses. — Tlie  Gr.,  which  only  occurs  in  St.  Luke's  Gospel,  is 
thus  translated  elsewhere  in  Auth.,  but  here  "bags"  (with 
Tynd.).     See  chap.  x.  4 ;  xxii.  35. 

Draweth  near. — Auth.,  "  approacheth,"  as  Rhem.  See  Note 
on  chap.  vii.  12. 

Destroyeth. — So  Wyel.,  giving  the  preposition  with  which  the 
woi'd  is  compoiinded  its  proper  force.  And  so  Auth.,  in  Rev. 
viii.  9 ;  here  with  Tynd.,  "  cornipteth,"  following  Vulg.,  cor- 
rumpit. 

56  Looking  for. — Auth.,  "  that  wait  for,"  as  in  chap.  ii.  25. 

39  Left. — Auth.,  "  suffered,"  which  leads  to  the  supposition  that 
the  house  has  been  broken  into  with  the  master's  permission. 

42  Comp.  Matt.  xxiv.  43,  &c.,  and  Notes. 

46  Expecteth. — Auth.,  "looketh  not  for  him."  The  Gr.  is  not  the 
same  which  is  rendered  "  looketh  for,"  at  verse  36. 

The  Tinfaithful. — So  Wycl.  Yulg.,  infidelibus,  whence  Tynd. 
and  subsequent  versions  have  " imbelievers,"  or,  as  Rhem.,  "in- 
fidels." Tlie  Gr.  may  have  either  sense ;  and  here  "  imfaithful " 
appears  preferable,  as  "  hypocrites  "  is  the  corresponding  word  in 
the  parallel  passage  of  Matt.  xxvi.  51. 


ST.  LUKE— XIII.  117 

48  Did  things.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following  Yiilg.,  fecit. 
Autli.,  with  Tyiid.,  "  did  commit."  The  Gr.  is  sufficicutly 
rendered  by  "did,"  and  "commit"  is  used  afterwards  in  this 
verse  in  a  different  sense. 

49  To  cast  fire.— So  Rhem.,  with  the  Gr.  Auth.,  with  Wycl., 
Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  "  to  send,"  following  Yidg.,  mittere.  Genev., 
"  to  put  fire."  He  came  to  cast  the  sparks  of  a  fire,  in  which, 
when  it  was  kindled,  He  was  himself  to  be  the  first  that  should 
suffer. 

65,  56  The  marginal  notes  sufficiently  explain  the  changes  in  the 
Gr.  text  of  these  two  verses.  The  Gr.  for  "  scorching  heat " 
is  the  same  that  is  used  in  the  parable  of  the  labourers  in  the 
vineyard,  Matt.  xx.  12.  Interpret.—  Auth.,  "  discern,"  which  is 
used  for  woi'ds  implying  discrimination,  as  in  the  parallel  passage 
of  Matt.  xvi.  3,  for  hiaKpivo>,  and  in  1  Cor.  xi.  29,  "  not  discerning 
the  Lord's  body"  (Auth.). 


CHAPTER  XIII. 


1  At  that  very  season.— See  Note  on  chap.  xii.  12. 

4  Offenders.— Auth.,  "  sinners,"  with  Tynd.  The  Gr.  is  not  the 
same  as  in  verse  2,  and  is,  literally,  "  debtors,"  as  in  Wycl.  and 
Rhem.,  following  Yulg.,  debitores. 

7  Why  doth  it  also  cumber  the  ground  ?—  All  Engl, 
versions  omit  "  also,"  which  is  fxxll  of  significance.  The  tree  is 
not  only  unfruitful  itself,  but  "  also  "  occupies  the  ground  so  as 
to  prevent  another  tree  from  gromug  there  and  bearing  fruit. 
The  Gr.  for  "  ciunbereth  "  properly  means  "  makes  idle,"  "  steril- 
izes," a  frequent  word  in  the  Pauline  Epistles,  e.g.,  Rom.  iii.  3, 
but  not  found  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament. 

15  The  stall.—  The  Gr.  is  properly  "  the  manger,"  and  is  so 
rendered  in  chap.  ii.  7. 

17  "Were  put  to  shame.— This  is  the  proper  meaning  of  the  Gr., 
denoting,  not  the  conviction  of  the  conscience,  as  Auth.,  "  were 
ashamed,"  but  the  sense  of  being  dishonoured  before  men. 

19  A  tree. — "  Great "  (Auth.),  is  omitted  by  change  of  Gr.  text. 


118  ST.    LIJKE— XIA^ 

24  The  narrow  door.— Auth.,  "the  strait  gate."  See  Note  on 
Matt.  vii.  13.  "Door"  has  been  taken  here  instead  of  "gate," 
though  "gate"  has  been  retained  in  the  parallel  passage  of  St. 
Matt.,  because  it  is  the  more  convenient  word  in  the  verses  which 
follow. 

31  He  would  fain.— The  Gr.  is  ee\u,  "he  willeth,"  not  "he  will" 
(Auth.). 

32  I  perform  cures.— Auth.,  "I  do  cures."  TheGr.,  oTroTtAai,  ig 
not  found  elsewhere  in  the  Gospels,  but  several  times  in  the 
Epistles  of  St.  Paul ;  it  is  derived  from  the  same  word,  reKos,  as 
that  which  is  rendered  in  this  verse,  "  I  am  perfected." 

33  I  must  go  on  my  way.— The  Gr.  is  usually  so  rendered,  not 
"  walk,"  as  all  Engl,  versions  here,  following  Vulg.,  ambulare. 
Our  Lord  speaks  of  the  journey  which  He  has  to  accomplish 
through  this  world,  not  of  his  walking  up  and  down  among  men. 

34  Which  killeth.— See  Note  on  Matt,  xxiii.  37. 


CHAPTER  XIY. 

1  One   of  the   rulers   of  the   Pharisees. — So  Wycl.  and 

Rhem.  "  A  prince  of  the  Pharisees,"  according  to  the  Gr.,  and 
Yulg.,  cnjusdam  principis  Pharisoeorum.  Auth.,  with  Tynd., 
"  one  of  the  chief  Pharisees." 

5  A  well. — Not  "  a  pit,"  as  in  the  parallel  passages  of  Matt.  xii.  2 
and  4,  and  as  all  Engl,  versions  here. 

Draw  up. — Is  the  proper  rendering  of  the  Gr.,  not  "pull  out," 
as  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  nor  "  lift  up,"  as  in  Matt.  Wycl.  and 
Rhem.  have  ''  draw  him  out,"  followaug  Vulg.,  extrahat. 

7  The  chief  seats.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  rooms."  The  Gr.  is, 
literally,  "  the  first  couches." 

9  The  lowest  place.— So  Wycl.  Auth.,  "  room,"  which  in  old 
English  is  synonymous  with  "  place,"  e.g.,  Ps.  xxxi.  8,  "  Thou 
hast  set  my  feet  in  a  large  room,"  and  still  is  so  in  more  than 
one  use  of  the  word ;  e.g.,  "  there  was  no  room  for  them." 

10  Glory.— So  Rhem.  and  Yulg.     Auth.,  "vvith  Tynd.,  "  worship," 
which  in  its  present  use  implies  an  outward  act  of  reverence. 


ST.    LUKE— XV.  119 

II  Humbled. — AutL.  here,  "  abased,"  aud  foi*  the  same  word  in  the 
latter  part  of  the  sentence,  "  humble th." 

23  Constrain. — So  "Wycl.  This  is  the  usual  rendering  of  the  Gr. 
word.     Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  compel,"  following  Yulg.,  compelli. 

31  As  he  goeth  to  encounter  .  .  .—This  expresses  the  Gr. 
participle  more  clearly  than  "  going  to,"  which,  according  to 
English  idiom,  might  mean  "  being  about  to." 

To  encounter  ...  in  war.— This  points,  as  does  the  Gr. 
ffv/j.Pa\f7v,  to  the  actual  conflict  in  battle,  whereas  "  to  make 
war  "  (Auth.)  is  a  general  term  for  hostilities. 

S3  Renoxinceth.— So  Rhem.,  after  Vulg.,  renuniiat.  The  Gr.  is, 
literally,  "  taketh  leave  of."  Auth.,  foUoAving  Tynd.,  "  for- 
saketh." 


CHAPTER  XV. 

12  The  portion  of  tliy  substance.— So  Vulg.,  snhstantup  ; 
and  so  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  in  the  next  verse,  but  here  Auth.,  with 
Tynd.,  has  "goods.'  The  Gr.  is  ovcrlas.  The  Gr.  article  is 
properly  represented  by  thy  (comp.  chap.  xyi.  8,  "his  Lord,") 
though  it  would  also  be  according  to  colloquial  usage  in  English 
for  a  son  to  speak  to  his  father  of  "  the  in-operty,"  meaning  the 
family  estate.     So  Tynd.  here,  "  the  goods." 

16  The  husks.— Propei-ly  the  pods  or  fruit  of  the  carob  tree,  called 
also  St.  John's  bread,  from  the  tradition  that  it  was  the  Baptist's 
food  in  the  wilderness.  They  were  in  shape  like  a  beau  pod, 
curved  as  a  sickle,  and  thence  called  by  the  name  given  them  in 
the  Gr.  text,  "little  horns."  The  tree  is  common  in  Spain, 
Africa,  and  the  East.  In  this  country  it  is  to  be  seen  only  as  an 
exotic  shrub  in  gardens  (Trench  "  On  the  Parables,"  p.  398'). 

Would  fain  have  been  filled.— So  the  Gr.  is  sufficiently 
rendered  in  Matt.  xiv.  20  and  all  other  places  ;  though  the  liomely 
phrase  of  Auth.,  "  would  fain  have  filled  his  belly,"  derived  fi'om 
Vulg.,  cujpiebat  iinplere  ventrem  suum,  is  very  expressive  and 
appropriate  in  this  case. 

18  In  thy  sight. — The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  iu  verse  21. 


120  ST.   LUKE— XVI. 

22  Quickly.— Added  by  change  in  Gr.  text.  So  Rliem.  after  Vulg., 
cito  proferte. 

26  "What  these  things  might  he.— So  Rhem.  after  Wycl. 
Auth.,  not  so  literally,  "  what  these  things  meant,"  following 
Tynd. 

29  A  commandment  of  thine. —  This  English  idiom  fitly  re- 
presents the  Gr.,  which  is  literally, "  a  commandment  of  thee,"  and 
expresses  particularly  what  is  said  in  Auth.  hi  general  terms,  "  thy 
commandment." 

30  When. — The  Gr.  is  simply  thus,  not  "  as  soon  as  "  (Auth.). 

31  All  that  is  mine  ip  bhine. — This  is  the  literal  rendering  of 
the  Gr.    Auth.,  "  all  that  I  have  is  thine." 


CHAPTER  XYI. 


1  He  was  wasting.  —The  Gr.  participle  being  in  the  present 
tense  denotes  a  still-continuing  peculation.  Auth.,  "he  had 
wasted." 

2  "What  is  this  that  I  hear  of  thee  ?  —  Auth.,  with  Tynd., 
less  literally,  and  not  more  idiomatically,  "  how  is  it  that  I  hear 
this  of  thee  P  " 

Canst. — Auth.,  "mayest."    The  Gr.  is  Swp. 

3  I  have  not  strength. — So  the  Gr.  and  Vulg.,  non  valeo. 
Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  I  cannot." 

6  Thy  bond :  the  legal  document  (Gr.,  ypdfifiara),  by  which  thou 
art  bound. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  and  Cranm.,  "  thy  bill."  Genev., 
"  thy  obligation.     Vulg.,  cautionem. 

8  His  Lord. — This  rendering  of  the  Gr.  article  removes  the  sup- 
position, which  is  not  an  unlikely  one  on  the  part  of  an  unlearned 
reader  or  hearer,  that  "  the  lord  "  (Auth.)  refers  to  Him  who  is 
so  often  designated  by  that  title. 

Are  for  their  own  generation  wiser.  —  All  English 
versions  have  "  in,"  not  "  for,"  taking  the  Gr.  preposition  us  to 
have  the  meaning  of  iv,  nor  do  they  make  it  clear  that  the  pronoun 


ST.   LUKE.— XVI.  121 

in  Gr.  is  reflective,  "their  own."  The  meaning  of  the  sentence 
as  thus  corrected  is,  that  the  sons  of  this  world,  worldly  men, 
men  who  boimd  their  ^dew  by  tlie  term  of  this  earthly  life,  are 
with  regard  to  their  o^vn  generation — i.e.,  with  regard  to  men 
like  themselves,  and  with  regard  to  wordly  interests,  wiser  than 
are  the  sons  of  light,  those  who  profess  to  live  for  heaven,  with 
regard  to  their  own  generation — i.e.  their  Heavenly  Father,  and 
their  eternal  interests. 

9  Make  to  yourselves  friends  by  means  of  the  mammon. 

.  .  . — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "make  to  yourselves  friends  of 
the  mammon,"  &c.  (Vulg.,  de  mammo wo),  which  is  now  likely  to  be 
understood  as  a  command  to  make  friends  of  mammon,  to  make 
mammon  our  friend ;  though  in  the  time  of  Wycl.  and  Tynd. 
"  by  means  of  "  may  have  been  the  obvious  meaning.  With  this 
slight  correction  the  sense  of  the  passage  comes  out  clearly. 
*'  By  means  of  the  mammon  of  unrighteousness,  worldly  pelf — 
which  like  the  world  to  which  it  belongs,  is  tainted  with  sin — by  a 
right  use  and  good  application  of  it,  make  to  yourselves  friends 
in  heaven." 

That  when  it  (the  mammon)  shall  fail.— By  change  in  Gr. 
text  for  "  when  ye  fail,"  which  all  former  versions  have  with  the 
meaning,  "when  ye  die."  The  sentence  then  continues,  they 
(the  heavenly  friends)  may  receive  you  into  the  eternal 
tabernacles.  So  Rhem. :  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  habitations,"  thus 
missing  the  true  force  of  the  Gr.  The  tabernacles  of  earth, 
whether  they  be  tents  or  cities,  are  but  for  a  time.  The  taber- 
nacles  of  heaven,  like  the  city  that  hath  foundations,  are 
eternal. 

13  ITo  servant  can  serve. — The  margin,  "  Gr.,  hoiiseliold  ser- 
vant," directs  us  to  notice  that  there  is  a  difference  between  tlie 
verb  and  noun,  which  is  not  represented  in  the  English,  "  No 
domestic  can  be  slave  to  two  masters." 

14  Lovers  of  money.  —  This  is  the  literal  meaning  of  the  Gr. 
(See  1  Tim.  vi.  10 ;  2  Tim.  iii.  2).  All  English  versions,  "  cove- 
tous," which  is  not  limited  to  those  who  are  greedy  of  gain,  and 
in  Auth.  commonly  represents  another  Gr.  word. 

Scoffed  at  him. — The  Gr.,  both  here  and  in  chap,  xxiii.  35,  the 
only  two  places  in  which  it  is  used,  requires  a  stronger  word  than 
"  derided."    Auth.,  with  Rhem,  from  Vulg.,  ieridebant  eutn. 

15  That  which  is  exalted.  —  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  highly  es- 
teemed." The  Gr.  v^r]\6y,  "  lofty,"  does  not  in  itself  contain  any 
notion  of  esteem. 


122  ST.    LUKE— XVII. 

16  The  gospel  of  the  kingdom  of  God  is  preached.— Auth., 

"  the  kingdom  of  God  is  j)reached."  The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  the 
kingdom  of  God  is  evangelized" — i.e.,  is  preached  as  good  tidings, 
as  a  gospel. 

Entereth  violently.— Auth.,  "  presseth  ,"  which  does  not  give 
the  Gr.  with  sufficient  force. 

19  Faring  sumptuously.— See  Margin.  The  literal  rendering  ol 
the  Gr.  woiUd  be  "  making  merry  splendidly." 

21  "  Crumbs." — (Auth.)    The  word  is  omitted  in  the  Gr.  text. 

Tea,  even  the  dogs  came. — Auth.,  "  moreover,  the  dogs." 
Such  was  the  misery  and  helplessness  of  the  beggar,  that  the  dogs 
which,  as  usual,  were  allowed  to  eat  the  crumbs  that  fell  from  the 
table,  came  out  and  licked  his  sores. 

24  In  anguish. — The  Gr.  is  not  the  same  that  is  rendered  "in 
torments  "  in  verse  23. 

26  That  they  .  .  .  may  not  be  able.  — Auth.,  "so  that." 
The  purpose  of  the  gulf  is  signified  by  the  Gr.  Sirus,  not  the  effect 
only. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 


3  "  Against  tlicc." — (Auth.).  Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text.  See 
Note  on  parallel  passage  of  Matt,  xviii.  15. 

7  Straightway. — Is  to  be  connected  with  what  follows,  being 
sej)arated  from  the  preceding  clause  by  the  insertion  of  "to  him" 
in  the  Gr.  text. 
9  "  I  trow  not." — (Auth.)  Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

17  Were  not  the  ten  cleansed ?— The  article  with  "ten"  in 
the  Gr  ,  which  the  Latin  Vulg.  could  not  represent,  and  which 
consequently  has  been  overlooked  in  the  English  versions,  shows 
the  question  to  be  not,  as  in  Auth.,  as  to  the  number  being  ten, 
but  whether  the  ten  were  not  all  cleansed. 

18  Were  there  none  found.  .  .  ? — The  Gr.  may  be  either 
an  interrogative,  or  a  direct  assertion.  It  is  taken  as  the  latter 
in  the  English  versions,  but  as  the  former  in  the  Vulg. ;  and 
as  a  question,  it  follows  appositely  after  the  other  two  questions. 


ST.   LUKE— XVIIT.  123 

23  Lo  here !— The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  verse  21. 

31  His  goods.— The  Gr.  is  literally  "  his  vessels ;  "  and  so  Vulg., 

vasa  ;  Auth.,  with  Tyud.,  "  his  stuff." 

33  To  gain  his  life. — So,   by  change   of  Gr.   text,  for  "  save  " 
(Auth.), 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 


5  Wear  me  out.— Margin,  ''Or  bruise."  Auth.,  ''weary  me." 
The  Gr.  is  one  of  the  many  words  used  in  the  New  Testament 
only  by  St.  Luke  and  St.  Paul  (1  Cor.  ix.  27,  "  I  buffet  my 
body  "),  and  is  a  term  borrowed  from  the  pugilists,  who  struck 
the  face  under  the  eyes  {^ir^iriov),  and  thence  it  came  to  mean 
metaphorically,  "  to  worry,"  "to  fret."  Analagous  to  it,  though 
not  exactly  parallel,  is  in  English  "  to  brow-beat."  Like  the  un- 
just judge,  the  disciples  would  have  their  Master  send  away  the 
Syrophcenician  woman,  because  she  cried  after  them.  Matt. 
XV,  23, 

6  The  unrighteous  judge.— The  Gr.,  as  indicated  in  the  Mar. 
gin,  is  a  Hebraism. 

7  And  he  is  long-suffering  over  them.— By  change  of  Gr, 
text  (verb  for  participle).  Auth.,  "though  he  bear  long  with 
them."  St.  Luke's  predilection  for  the  copula  "  and,"  already 
noticed,  is  sliown  in  this  broken  construction. 

Over  them. — i.e.,  his  elect;  for  Auth.,  "with  them" — i.e., 
with  men  in  general.  The  change  is  helpful  to  the  sense,  which 
is  somewhat  strained  according  to  the  Auth.,  and  it  is  required 
in  order  to  give  its  proper  meaning  to  the  Gr.  preposition  eVi. 

9  Set  at  nought. — This  is  the  literal  meaning  of  the  Gr.,  and 
so  it  is  rendered  in  Auth.,  Luke  xxiii.  11,  Acts  iv.  11 ;  here  all 
English  vei'sions  have  ''  despised." 

12  All  that  I  get. — The  Gr,  verb  is  to  "  acquire,"  not  to  "pos- 
sess," as  all  English  versions,  following  Vulg.,  possideo ;  except 
the  prseter-perfect,  "  I  have  acquired  " — i.e.,  "  I  possess." 

13  Margin,  "  Or  the  sinner,"  giving  expression  to  the  Gr.  article. 
This  alternative  rendering  brings  out  more  distinctly  what  ia 


124  ST.    LUKE— XIX. 

probaUy  meant  by  that  iu  tlie  text,  tliat  the  publican  implicitly 
contrasts  himself,  as  a  sinner,  with  the  self-righteous 
Pharisee. 

15  Their  babes.— (The  Gv.  has  the  article.)  So  Tynd  and  G-enev. ; 
and  the  Gr.  is  so  translated  in  the  first  and  second  chapters  of 
this  Gospel,  as  applied  to  the  infant  Jesus.  Auth.,  foUowiug 
Rhem.,  "  infants  "  (omitting  the  article). 

25  To  enter. — (Twice)  So  in  the  Gr.  In  Auth.,  the  word  is  varied, 
"  go  through,"  and  "  enter  into." 

27  Our  own. — Or  "our  own  homes  "  (as  in  Margin),  by  change  of 
Gr.  text ;  for  Auth.,  "  all." 

32  Shamefully.— Auth.,  "  spitefully."     See  Note  on  Matt.  xxii.  6. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 


7  To  lodge. — So  Genev. ;  Auth.,  "  to  be  guest  with."  The  proper 
sense  of  the  Gr.  is  "to  loosen  the  harness,"  "to  put  up,"  and 
thence  "  to  lodge."     So  at  chap.  ix.  12. 

8  Wrongfully  exacted. — As  at  chap.iii.  14,  where  the  Gr.  is  the 
same.  The  word,  however,  implies  what  is  expressed  in  Auth., 
that  the  wi'ong  is  done  "  by  false  accusation." 

13  Trade  ye. — So  Yulg.,  negotimnini ;  Wycl.,  "  chaffer  ye  ; " 
Tynd.  and  Genev.,  "  buy  and  sell ;  "  Cranm.,  Rhem.,  and  Auth., 
"  occupy."  The  Gr.  is  literally  "  do  business."  The  rendei'ing 
of  Auth.  must  have  been  intended  in  the  sense  of  "  be  occupied," 
"  follow  your  occupation." 

Till  I  come. — By  the  use  of  the  indicative  (i'ais  epxa/xai)  instead 
of  the  usual  indefinite  (tws  &v  eAOu),  the  certainty  of  his  coming 
is  implied.     Compare  John  xxi.  22,  23,  and  1  Tim.  iv.  13. 

14  An  ambassage — So  Auth.,  at  chap.  xiv.  32;  here  "a  mes- 
sage,"  foUowiug  Cranm.  and  Genev.     Yulg.,  legationem. 

18  Hath  made.— Gr.,  eVotrjo-e,  as  in  Matt.  xxv.  16.  Auth.,  "hath 
gained."    The  English  idiom  here  tallies  with  that  of  the  Gr. 


ST.    LUKE— XIX.  125 

28  Going  up.— As  at  Matt.  xx.  17,  &c.  A.uth.,  here,  with  Tynd. 
and  Cranm.,  "ascending,"  which  elsewhere  in  Auth.  is  used  only 
of  the  going  up  into  heaven.     Yulg.,  ascendens. 

35  They  threw. — All  Enghsh  versions,  "  they  cast."  The  Gr. 
word  is  not  used  again  in  the  New  Testament ;  it  signifies  a 
more  rapid  and  tnmnltuary  action  than  "  cast."   Vulg.,  jactantes. 

40  Shall.— For  "should"  (Auth.),  by  change  of  Gr.  text;  "im- 
mediately "  (Auth.)  is  not  in  the  Gr. 

42  In  this  day. — By  change  of  Gr.  text,  for  Auth.,  "  at  least  in 
this  thy  day."  Compare  the  fervid  brevity  of  this  exclamation 
with  the  Lord's  answer  to  Peter  (Mark  xiv.  30),  "  Yerily  I  say 
unto  thee,  that  thou  to-day,  even  this  night,  before  tlie  cock  crow, 
shalt  deny  me  thrice." 

43  A  bank. — The  Gr.  word,  x«P«l,  includes  both  the  palisade  and 
the  nioimd  on  which  it  was  placed.  By  the  excavation  necessary 
for  raising  the  embankment,  a  trench  was  also  formed ;  but  that 
was  not  included  in  the  word.  Auth.  has  "  trench,"  following 
Genev.  and  Rhem.;  WycL,  "pale ;  "  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  "  bank; " 
Vulg.,  vallo. 

44"  Shall  dash  thee  to  the  ground.— Auth.,  "  shall  lay  thee 
even  with  the  ground."  The  Gr.  verb  does  not  occur  again  in 
the  New  Testament,  but  is  used  sevei'al  times  in  the  LXX.,  as 
in  Ps.  cxxxvii.  9,  where  the  Auth.  has  "  dasheth  thy  little  ones 
against  the  stones." 

48  The  people  all  hung  upon  him.— So  Genev.  only.  Auth., 
"  all  the  people  were  very  attentive  to  hear  him."  Tynd.  and 
Cranm.,  "  stuck  by  him,  and  gave  him  audience."  Vulg.,  sus- 
pensus  erat,  audiens  ilium,  whence  Bhem.,  "was  suspense, 
hearing  him."  The  word  does  not  occur  again  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment, and  once  only  in  the  LXX„  Gen.  xliv.  30.  The  same 
metaphor  is  used  by  Virgil,  ^n.  iv.  79,  "  pendetque  iterum  nar- 
rantis  ab  ore,"  one  of  the  j)^sages  which  may  be  adduced  to 
show  that  St.  Luke  had  an  acquaintance  with  classical  literature. 


126  ST.    LUKE— XX. 

CHAPTER  XX. 

7  They  knew  not.— So  Wycl.  and  E-hem.  Autli.,  following 
Tynd.,  "  they  could  not  tell,"  apparently  for  the  sake  of  the 
rejoinder  in  the  next  verse,  "neither  tell  I  you." 

17  Was  made. — Auth.,  "is  become."  The  Gr.  is  the  passive 
aorist,  denoting  a  thing  done  and  past. 

18  It  will  scatter  him  as  dust. — Auth.,  folloiving  Tynd.,  "  it 
will  grind  him  to  powder."  Comp.  Matt.  xxi.  44,  and  Note 
there. 

20  Speech. — Auth.,  "  words."  The  Gr.  is  in  the  singular,  K6yov, 
"  word." 

To  the  rule  and  to  the  authority.— The  concurrence  of  the 
two  words  which  are  thus  translated  occurs  at  chap.  xii.  2,  and  is 
characteristic  of  St.  Paul.     See  1  Cor.  xv.  24,  &c. 

21  Of  a  truth  teachest. — An  asseveration,  "verily,  thou 
teachest."  Auth.,  "  thou  teachest  the  way  of  God  truly."  See 
Note  on  Mark  xii.  14. 

28         He  be. — For  "  he  die  "  (Auth.),  by  change  of  Gr.  text. 

35  To  attain  to. — Auth.,  "  to  obtain,"  which  is  the  rendering  in 
Auth.  of  various  words,  but  is  not  suitable  for  this  {rvxe'ii'). 

37  In  the  place  concerning  the  Bush. — See  Note  on  the  parallel 
passage  of  Mark  xii.  26. 

46  Chief  seats.  .  .  . — See  notes  on  chap.  xiv.  7 ;  Matt,  xxiii.  6. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 


4  Superfluity. — Auth.,  "  abundamce."     See  Note  on  Mark  xii.  44 

The  gifts. — The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  verse  1.  Auth.,  "  offer- 
ings." In  verse  5  "  offerings  "  represents  another  word  which  is 
not  used  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament,  avaOrt/j-ara. 

"  Of  God."— (Auth.)     Omitted  by  change  of  Gr.  text. 

9  Immediately. — The  phrase  in  Auth.,  "by  and  by,"  is  now 
applied  rather  to  the  middle  distance  than  to  the  foreground  of 
the  future.  The  Gr.  is  ti/Bews,  generally  rendered  "  straiglit- 
way." 


ST.  LUKK— XXI.  127 

11  There  shall  be  terrors.— So  Rhem.,  after  Yiilg.,  ierrores. 
Auth.,  "  fearful  sights  "  (Tyncl.,  "  fearful  things,"),  which  is  the 
meaning,  but  weakened  by  its  expansion  into  two  words.  Comp. 
Ps.  Ixxxviii.  15,  "  Thy  terrors  have  I  suffered  with  a  troubled 
mind." 

16  Even  by.— Auth.,  "  both  by,"  which  would  be  correct  if  only 
two  classes  were  specified,  but  as  there  are  four,  the  Gr.,  Kal,  is 
properly  rendered  by  "  even." 

19  Ye  shall  win  your  souls.— Auth.,  "  shall  possess."  Comp. 
chap,  xviii.  12,  and  Note  there ;  and  as  to  the  sense,  Matt.  xvi. 
25. 

Te  shall. — The  future  for  the  imperative  by  change  in  Gr. 
text.,  i.e.,  "in  your  patience,  and  by  means  of  it,  ye  shall  win  for 
yourselves  the  eternal  life." 

21  In  the  country.— i.e.,  in  coimtry  places.  So  Genev.  Auth., 
"in  the  countries,"  following  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Tynd.  and 
Cranm.,  "in  other  countries." 

25  In  perplexity  for  the  roaring  of  the  sea.— By  change 
of  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  the  sea  and  the  waves  roaring." 

Billows. — The  Gr.,  (rd\ov,  is  not  the  usual  word  for  "  waves," 
and  being  in  the  singular  number,  is  equivalent  to  what  is  called 
by  mariners,  "  a  heavy  sea,"  "  a  swell." 

26  Expectation.— Auth.,  "  looking  after."  The  Gr.,  ■rrpoa-SoKla,  is 
used  only  by  St.  Luke  here  and  in  Acts  xii.  2,  where  it  is  "  expec- 
tation"  in  Auth.  "Looking  for"  (not  "after")  represents 
another  Gr.  word. 

86  At  every  season.— So  Wycl.,  "in  each  time,"  after  Vulg., 
omni  tempore.  Auth.,  "  always,"  which  now  means  "  without 
intermission." 


128  ST.  LUKE— XXII. 


CHAPTER  XXn. 

2  Put  him  to  death.— Autli.,  "kill."     The  Gr.  ia  one  of  several 

words  wliicli  are  rendered  "  kill "  in  Auth.,  but  is  in  chap,  xxiii. 
32,  "put  to  death." 

3  Who  was  called. — So  Wyel.  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  sur- 
named."  "  lecariot "  was  not,  properly  speaking,  his  surname, 
but  a  local  name,  as  appears  from  several  places  in  St.  John's 
Gospel  (vi.  71,  xii.  4,  xiii.  2,  26),  where  he  is  called  "  Judas,  son 
of  Simon,  an  Iscariot,"  "  Judas,  the  Iscariot,"  i.e.,  probably  a 
native  of  Kerioth,  mentioned  in  the  Book  of  Joshua  as  being  in 
Juda  (Alford). 

4  Deliver  him. — Auth.,  "  betray  him."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as 
in  verse  21  (7rapa5i5ai/ii).  Like  many  other  words,  it  takes  its 
colouring  from  the  context :  here,  in  the  narrative  of  the  traitor's 
communing  with  the  chief  priests,  the  ordinaiy  rendering  seems 
adequate.  In  verse  21,  used  by  our  Lord  of  the  traitor's  act, 
and  by  Him  used  absolutely  without  such  words  as  "  unto  the 
chief  j)riests,"  "  betray  "  is  more  appropriate. 

6  He  consented. — So  Tynd.  Auth.,  "he  promised,"  following 
Vulg.  and  Rhem.  The  promise  was  on  their  part ;  He,  according 
to  the  Gr.,  agreed  thereto. 

14  "  Twelve  ;  "  and  16,  "  any  more  ;  "  18,  "  from  henceforth  ;  "  31, 
"  And  the  Lord  said  "  (Auth.),  omitted  by  changes  in  Gr.  text. 

17  A  cup. — AU  Engl,  versions,  "  the  cup."  The  Gr.  is  without  the 
article. 

32  When  once  thou  hast  turned  again. — i.e.,  "from  thy 
desertion  and  denial  of  me."  Auth.,  with  Tynd,  "  when  thou 
art  converted,"  omitting  "  once  "  (Gr.,  irore).  On  "  converted,'' 
see  Note  on  Matt.  xiii.  15. 

Stablish. —  Auth.,  "  strengthen."  The  Gr.  is  more  than 
"  strengthen — fix  immoveably,"  and  is  usually  rendered  in  Auth. 
by  "  stablish,"  as  in  Rom.  i.  2.  "  Strengthen  "  (verse  43)  repre- 
sents  another  word. 

33  With  thee  I  am  ready.— Auth.,  "I  am  ready  to  go  with 
thee."  Tlie  order  of  the  words  ia  the  original  is  too  emphatic  to 
be  lost  sight  of  in  translation, 

36  He  that  hath  none. — i.e.,  no  purse.  Auth.,  "he  that  hath  no 
eword,"  supplying  or  drawing  back  that  word  from  the  end  of 


ST.   LUKE— XXII.  129 

the  sculeuce,  where  it  is  expressed  in  the  Gr.  The  former  con- 
struction is  the  simpler,  and  the  more  natiiral,  connecting  this 
clause  with  the  preceding. 

37  Hath  fulfilxnent. — All  Engl,  versions  "  have  an  end,"  a  literal 
translation  (the  Gr.  beiug  tsKos),  but  obscure,  from  the  uncertainty 
as  to  the  meaning  of  "  an  end,"  standing  so  by  itself,  whether  it 
be  a  "termination,"  or  "a  purpose."  "That  which  concerneth 
me  (that  which  is  written,  or,  the  counsel  of  God  concerning  me) 
is  in  course  of  fulfilment,  and  soon  I  shall  say  of  it,  '  It  is 
finished.'  "  Thus  may  the  saying  be  understood  and  unfolded  by 
us  who  look  upon  it  in  the  light  thrown  upon  it  at  the  crucifixion. 

39  Went  as  his  custom  was.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  went  as  he 
was  wont,"  which,  besides  not  being  a  happy  combination  of 
words,  is  not  an  exact  translation. 

46  Pray  that  ye  enter  not.— So  Auth.  in  verse  40  and  Matt. 
xxvi.  41 ;  but  here,  "  pray  lest."  "  Pray  that "  expresses,  as  does 
the  Gr.,  the  object  asked  for  in  prayer.  "  Pray  lest "  denotes  the 
purpose  of  praying,  but  does  not  specify  the  thing  desired. 

52  Against  him. — Auth.,  "to  him."  The  Gr.  preposition  is  the 
same  in  both  parts  of  the  sentence. 

53  The  power  of  darkness. —  On  the  sense  of  i^oua-la,  here  ren- 
dered "  power,"  elsewhere  "  authority ;  "  see  Note  on  Col.  i.  13. 

54  They  seized  him. — The  Gr.  requires  for  its  expression  a  word 
more  suggestive  of  violence  than  "took"  (Auth.). 

55  Sat  down  together  and  sat  here  represent  two  different  Gr. 
words. 

56  Looking  stedfastly. — Auth.,  "  earnestly  looked."  The  Gr. 
denotes  the  fixed  gaze,  not,  as  Auth.,  the  strong  feefing  or  sus- 
picion which  prompted  the  gaze. 

61  This  day.— Added  in  the  Gr.  text. 

64  "Struck  him  in  the  face  and" — (Auth.).  Omitted  ia  the  Gr. 
text. 

65  Reviling  him. — So  the  same  Gr.  is  translated  in  Matt,  xxvii. 
39,  here,  "  blaspliemously  spake  they."  The  Gr.  word  to  "  bias- 
pheme  "  (for  so  it  is,  very  nearly,  in  Gr.)  is  not  limited  to  what  we 
commonly  understand  by  "  blasphemy,"  the  expression  of  con- 
temj)t  or  hatred  of  God ;  and  here  that  meaning  would  not  aj)ply 
to  the  Roman  soldiers,  nor  indeed  to  the  Pharisees,  who  did  not 
believe  Jesus  to  be  divine. 


130  ST.  LUKE— XXIII. 

68  "  Nor  let  me  go."— (Auth.).     Omitted  iu  the  Gr.  text. 

69  From  henceforth.— Auth.,  \nih.  Tynd.,  "  hereafter."  The  Gr. 
phrase  is  the  same  as  at  chap.  i.  48,  "  From  henceforth  all  gene- 
rations shall  call  me  blessed."  Compare  also  John  i.  51,  whex*e 
the  Gr.  &iTapTi  has  the  same  sense  given  to  it. 

Shall  be  seated.— So  the  Gr.,  "  shall  be  "  with  the  participle, 
not  the  future  tense  of  the  verb,  and  so  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  fol- 
lowing Yulg.,  erit  sedens.  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  shall  sit." 
The  Lord  spoke  of  himself  in  his  human  nature  "  the  Son  of 
man,"  as  He  will  appear,  not  standing  before  an  earthly  judge,  but 
sitting  on  the  heavenly  throne,  united  with  the  majesty  of  the 
Godlund. 


CHAPTER   XXIIL 


1  Brought  him. — As  Auth.  in  Matt.  x.  18 ;  the  English  phrase 
is  "  brought "  before  a  judge,  not  "  led." 

2  This  man.— Auth.,  following  TjTid.,  "  this  fellow."  This  op- 
probious  term,  though  consistent  with  the  treatment  which  our 
Loi'd  received  throiighoiit  from  his  accusers,  is  hardly  waiTanted 
by  anything  in  the  Gr.,  either  here  or  in  the  other  places  in  which 
it  has  been  intx'oduced. 

5  The  more  urgent. — Auth.,  with  TjTid.,  "the  more  fierce," 
which  overdoes  the  Gr.  iiriaxvov,  "literally,  "they  grew  stronger 
against  him."  So  Wycl.,  "  they  waxed  stronger,"  after  Vulg., 
invalescehant.  The  Gr,  eVio-x"^"  is  used  actively  (chap.  xxii.  43), 
"  sti'engthening  him."     Both  words  are  peculiar  to  St.  Luke. 

6  "  Of  Galilee."— (Auth.)     Omitted  in  Gr.  text. 

11  Apparel- — So  the  Gr.  and  Tynd.  Auth.,  "robe,"  with  Yulg., 
veste  alba. 

12  The  incident  of  Pilate's  sending  Jesus  to  Herod  is  recorded  by 
St.  Luke  only,  and  by  him  with  much  detail ;  the  conclusion  of  it 
lias  a  special  emphasis  when  the  phrase  and  order  of  the  Gr.  are 
observed,  as  inverse  12,  "became  friends  together  that  very  day," 
"  for  "  tlie  same  day  were  made  friends  together  "  (Auth). 

15  E3   sent  him  hn.ck  unto  us —So  Wycl.,  following  some 


ST.  LUKE— XXIII.  131 

ancient  Latin  MSS.,  though  Yulg.  has  remisi  vos  ad  ilium,  which 
is  according  to  the  reading  of  the  Gr.  text  followed  by  Tynd., 
Rheui.  and  Auth.,  "  I  sent  you  to  him." 

Nothing  worthy  of  death  hath  been   done  by  him.— 

All  English  versions,  "  to  him."  The  Gr.  has  the  same  ambiguity 
as  in  Matt.  v.  21  (where  see  Note),  and  the  proper  meaning  in 
such  a  case  must  be  gathered  from  the  context.  Here  the  render- 
ing of  Auth.,  "  nothing  worthy  of  death  is  done  unto  him,"  yields 
no  adequate  sense ;  while  admitting  "  by  him  "  to  be  right,  we 
have  Pilate  saying,  "Behold,  he  is  sent  back  to  us  by  Herod; 
evidently,  therefore,  in  Herod's  judgement  he  has  not  committed 
any  crime  worthy  of  death." 

19  Insurrection.— So  Tynd.  Auth.,  with  E-hem.  and  Vulg.,  "se- 
dition," but  "  insurrection  "  for  the  same  Gr.  in  Mark  xv.  7. 

22  It  is  worth  noticing  that  the  idiomatic  "  why,"  of  Auth.  was  fii-st 
introduced  by  Rhem.,  expressing  the  idiomatic  "ydp  of  the  Gr.,  and 
emm  of  the  Latin,  Avhich  Wycl. gives  thus,  "For  what  evil  hath  he 
done  ?  "     It  is  omitted  by  Tynd. 

Kelease  him. — So  Aiith.  for  the  same  Gr.  in  verses  16,  20, 25 ; 
here  "let him  go." 

23  Asking. — The  Gr.  is  usually  so  rendered  in  Auth. ;  but  in 
this  one  passage,  perhaps  because  a  stronger  word  would  here 
seem  more  appropriate,  Auth.,  folloAving  Tynd.,  has  "  requiring," 
in  verse  25  the  milder  word,  "  desired." 

"  And  of  the  chief  priests."  —  (Auth.),  omitted  in  Gr.  text, 
also  in  Vulg.  and  Wycl. 

27  A  great  multitude  of  the  people  — i.e.,  of  the  Jewish 
people.     Auth.,  omitting  the  article,  "  a  great  company  of  people." 

And  of  women  who  bewailed  and  lamented  him.— The 

outward  expression  of  grief  was  shown  by  the  women  only, 
according  to  the  Gr.  It  might  appear  otherwise  from  the  punc- 
tuation in  Auth.    "Also  "  (Auth.),  is  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

32  Two  others,  malefactors.— The  change  of  "  other  "  (Auth.) 
to  "  others,"  makes  it  plain  in  the  English,  as  it  is  in  the  Gr., 
that  the  word  "  malefactors  "  is  applicable  only  to  the  "  two."  Of 
late  years  this  limitation  of  the  word  has  been  indicated  by  a 
comma  after  "other,"  "two  other,  malefactors,"  but  it  was  not  so 
in  the  Auth.  of  1611 ;  nor  in  Vulg.,  ducebantiir  alii  duo  ne- 
c^iam  cum  eo ;  nor  in  Wycl.,  "  also  other  tweie-wicked  men." 
Tynd.  and  Cranm.  omit  "other,"  "there  were  two  evil-doers  led 
with  him."    Genev.  carefully  marked  the  distinction,  "  there  were 


132  ST.    LUKE— XXIII. 

two  others,  wliicli  were  evil-doers,  led  with  him."  It  is  evident 
from  verse  33  that  this  was  the  meaning  of  the  Evangelist. 

33  The  place  wliicli  is  called  The  skull. —All  English 
versions,  "Calvary,"  following  Vnlg\,  locum  qui  vucatur, 
Calvarice.  Gr.,  Kpaviov.  St.  Luke,  writing  for  Latins  who  were 
acquainted  with  Greek,  does  not  give  the  Hebrew,  "  Golgotha," 
which  we  find  in  the  first  two  Gospels  with  the  interpretation 
added  in  Greek,  "Golgotha,  that  is  to  say,  the  j)lace  of  a  skull." 
Calvaria  (Yulg.)  is  the  Latin  translation  of  Golgotha. 

84  And  Jesus  said,  &C. — This  is  omitted,  as  shown  in  the  Mar- 
gin, by  "  some  ancient  authorities,"  the  chief  of  which  is  the 
Yatican  MS.  (Codex  B.)  The  reader  may  cousiilt  Westcott  and 
Hort's  Note  in  Vol.  ii.  of  their  Gr.  Testament  for  a  fidl  investi- 
gation of  the  evidence;  concluding  with  these  observations: 
"  Few  verses  of  the  Gospel  bear  in  themselves  a  surer  witness  to 
the  truth  of  what  they  record  than  this  the  first  of  tlie  words 
from  the  cross ;  but  it  need  not  therefore  belong  originally  to 
the  book  in  which  it  is  now  included.  "We  cannot  doubt  that 
it  comes  from  an  extraneous  source.  Nevertheless,  like  xxii. 
43  /.,  Matt.  xvi.  2  /.,  it  has  exceptional  claims  to  be  permanently 
retained,  with  the  necessary  safe-guards,  in  its  accustomed  place." 

35  Scoffed  at  him.— See  Note  on  chap.  xvi.  14. 

The  Christ  of  God,  His  chosen.— By  change  of  Gr.  text, 
for  Auth.,  "  Christ,  the  chosen  of  God." 

39  "  Written  ...  in  letters  of  Greek,  and  Latin,  and  Hebrew." 
—  (Auth.)  The  omission  of  these  words  in  the  Gr.  text  renders 
unnecessary  the  suggestions  made  by  Commentators  in  order  to 
account  for  the  different  order  in  which  the  three  languages  are 
mentioned  by  St.  Luke  and  St.  John. 

Art  not  tliou  the  Christ?— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for 
Auth.,  "  If  thou  be  Christ."  The  interrogation  is  even  a 
sharper  mode  of  railing  than  the  hypothetical  "  if." 

42  In  thy  kingdom.— In  thy  majesty.      All  English  versions, 

and  Vulg.,  following  the  reading  which  is  noticed  in  the  Margin, 

have  "  into  thy  kingdom." 
44  Over  the  whole  land.— So  Tynd.  and  Geuev.    Auth.,  with 

Wycl,  Cranm.,  and  Rhem.,  "  the  whole  earth,"  but  in  Margin 

"  land." 

Came  over.— So    Tynd.    and    Genev.     Auth.,   with    Cranm., 

"  there   was."     Gr.  iyivero  i-Ki ;   Wycl.  and   Rhem.,  "  there  was 

made,"  after  Vulg.,  tenebrcB  facice  sunt. 


ST.    LUKE— XXTTI.  133 

45  The  sun's  light  failing.— Literally,  "  the  sun  failing :  "  the 
Gr.  by  change  of  Gr.  text,  is  the  same  word  as  "being 
eclipsed  "  in  English.  All  English  versions,  following  another 
reading  of  the  Gr.  text,  have  "  the  snn  was  darkened." 

46  And  when  Jesus   ha^d  cried  with  a  loud  voice.— The 

alternative  reading  given  in  the  Margin  is  admissible,  as  the  Gr. 
participle  may  be  so  taken,  in  combination  with  the  verb  follow- 
ing ;  and  it  might  have  appeai'ed  the  more  probable,  were  it  not 
that  St.  Matthew  and  St.  Mark  speak  of  his  crying  with  a  loud 
voice  "  My  God,  my  God,  why,"  &c.  (Matt,  xxvii.  46,  Mark  xv. 
34),  and  to  that  exclamation  St.  Luke  may  be  thought  here  to 
refer.  But  after  that,  before  or  at  the  moment  of  giving  up  the 
ghost,  he  uttered  another  loud  cry  (see  Matt,  xxvii.  50,  Mark 
XV.  37).  It  must,  therefore,  still  be  considered  doubtful  whether 
the  text  or  margin  is  to  be  preferred. 

48  Returned,  smiting  their  breasts.— Auth.,  with  "Wycl.  and 
Tynd. ,  "  smote  their  breasts,  and  returned ;  "  as  if  they  first  did 
the  one  thing  and  then  the  other.  Rhem.  following  Vulg.,  has 
"  returned,  knocking  their  breasts." 

50  A  councillor. — One  of  the  council,  the  Sanhedrin ;  not  what  is 
now  understood  by  a  "  counsellor,"  Auth.     So  Mark  xv.  43. 

A  righteous. — Auth.,  "  a  just."  The  change  is  consequent  on 
the  use  of  the  same  Eng'lish  for  the  same  Gr.,  in  verse  47,  "  Cer- 
tainly this  was  a  righteous  man." 

52  Asked  for.— Auth.,  "  begged."  Compare  Matt,  xxvii.  58,  and 
Note  there. 

53  A  linen  cloth.— So  Auth.,  in  Matt,  xxvii.  59 ;  but  hero,  and 
in  Mark  xv.  46,  "  linen." 

Tomb.— Auth,,  "  sepulchre,"     See  Note  on  Matt,  xxiii.  29. 

Had  yet  lain.— Auth.,  "was  laid,"  which  is  the  rendering  of 
Auth.  for  another  word,  for  which  it  is  more  ajipropriate,  in 
verse  55.     There  the  Gr.  is  irtdr],  here  it  is  ^v  Keifitvos.  • 

54  The  Sabbath  drew  on.— Literally,  as  in  the  Margin,  "  began 
to  dawn."  But  the  literal  rendering  is  not  to  be  enforced  here, 
as  the  Jewish  sabbath  began  in  the  evening ;  and  the  word  is 
correctly  used  by  St.  Luke,  in  conformity  with  the  Rabbinical 
practice  of  speaking  of  the  sunset  conventionally  as  the  dawn  of 
a  new  day.     (Alford.) 


134  ST.    LUKE— XXIV. 

CHAPTER   XXIV. 

1  At  early  dawn.— Literally,  at  "  deep  dawn."  Autli.,  not  so 
precisely,  "  very  early  in  the  morning.'' 

"  And  certain  others  with  them." — (Auth.)  Omitted  by  change 
in  Gr.  text. 

4  While. — Anth.,  "  as."  Tlie  connection  of  the  two  clauses  is  one 
of  time,  not  of  cause  and  effect — dum,  not  quia.  In  verse  5  it  is 
otherwise,  and  "  as  "  is  there  correct. 

Dazzling. — Auth.,  "  shining."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  word  that  is 
used  of  lightning  in  chap.  xvii.  24. 

10  And  the  other  women  with  them.— Auth.,  connecting 
"  and,"  &c.,  with  the  previous  clause,  "  and  other  women  that  were 
with  them,  which  told."  The  omission  of  the  relative  "  which  " 
in  the  Gr.  text  makes  necessary  this  change  in  the  translation. 

11  Idle  talk. —  Auth.  (alone),  "idle  tales;"  a  good  rendering, 
excei)t  that,  being  in  tlie  plural,  it  does  not  represent  the  con- 
tinued outpouring  of  words  without  sense,  which  is  implied  by 
the  Gr.,  Xvpos.     Rhem.,  "dotage." 

12  And  he  departed  to  his  home,  wondering.  .  .  — Auth., 
"  departed,  wondering  in  himself."  The  Gr.,  '  to  himself,"  irphs 
kavrlv,  admits  of  either  rendering ;  but  the  sense  appears  to  be 
determined  by  John  xx.  10,  relating  to  the  same  occasion,  "  the 
disciples  went  away  again  unto  their  own  home,"  where  the  Gr. 

is  the  same,  irpbs  eavrovs. 

15  Questioned  together.— Auth.,  reasoned."  The  Gr.  is  pro- 
perly, "sought  together." 

17  And  they  stood  still,  looking  sad. —  By  change  in  Gr. 
text  for  Auth.,  "  as  ye  walk  and  are  sad."  The  new  rendering 
expresses  a  very  natural  action  on  the  part  of  the  two  friends, 
stopping  short  in  their  walk,  on  being  accosted  with  such  a 
question  by  a  stranger. 

18  Dost  thou  alone  sojourn  in  Jerusalem,  and  not  know? 

— Auth.,  with  Tynd.  and  Rhem.,  "  Art  thou  only  a  stranger  in 
Jerusalem  p  "  which  gives  the  same  meaning  if  "  only  "  be  con- 
nected with  "  thou,"  and  not  taken  for  an  adverb  and  joined  with 
the  word  following,  "  only  a  stranger."  Vidg.,  tu  solus  pere- 
grinus  es.  The  alternative  rendering  in  the  mai'gin  seems  not 
improbable,  "  Dost  thou  sojourn  alone  ?  " 


ST.    LUKE— XXIV.  135 

Sojourn. — Represents  the  Gr.  more  exactly  tlian  "  art  tliou  a 
stranger  p  "  which  is  the  translation  of  another  word  in  Auth. 

22  Amazed  us. — This  is  the  usual  rendering  of  the  word  which  is 
here  in  Auth.  translated  "made  us  astonished."  See  chap.  ii. 47  ; 
Acts  viii.  9. 

25  O  foolish  men.— Auth.,  "  0  fools."     See  Note  on  chap.  xi.  40. 

26  Behoved  it  not  the  Christ.— So  Wycl.,  and  so  Auth.  at 
verse  46,  "Thus  it  behoved  Christ  to  suffer;  "  but  here,  "ought 
not  Christ  to  have  suffered,"  with  Tynd.  and  Rhem.,  making  the 
question  relate  to  the  justice  rather  than  to  the  necessity  of 
Christ's  sufferings. 

27  Interpreted.— So  Tynd.  and  Rhem.,  following  Yulg.,  inter- 
pretabatur.  The  Gr.  word  is  not  used  again  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment ;  the  cognate  noun  is  rendered  "  interpreter,"  1  Cor.  xiv.  28 
(Auth.). 

35  They  rehearsea.— All  Engl,  versions,  '-they  told,"  which 
represents  other  and  more  common  words ;  elrjye'o^at,  is  used 
five  times  by  St.  Luke,  and  once  by  St.  John,  and  not  elsewhere 
in  the  New  Testament. 

The  things  that  liaji'pened  by  the  way. — It  is  necessary 
to  insert  something  in  translating  the  elliptical  phrase  of  the  Gr., 
but  it  can  hardly  be  said  that  any  things  "  were  done "  by  the 
way,  as  Auth. 

In  the  breaking  of  the  bread. — Auth.,  "in  breaking  of 
bread."  The  article  has  a  significance  which  is  lost  in  Auth., 
leading  us  to  associate  the  act  of  our  Lord  at  the  supper  at 
Emmaus  with  what  he  had  done  four  days  before  at  the  supper  in 
Jerusalem. 

39  As  ye  behold  me  having. — Auth.,  "  as  ye  see  me  have." 
"  Behold "  and  "  see  "  are  interchanged  several  times  in  this 
passage,  conformably  with  the  variation  in  the  Gr. 

41  Anything  to  eat. — Auth.,  "  any  meat."  The  Gr.  is,  literally, 
"  any  eatable." 

44  My  words. — "  My  "  is  added  in  the  Gr.  text.  Auth.,  "  the 
words." 

49  Until  ye  be  clothed.— So  Wycl.  Auth.,  following  Tynd., 
"  until  ye  be  endued."     "  Endue,"  etymologically,  is  the  same  in 


136  ST.   LUKE— XXI Y. 

meaning  as  "  clothe,"  but  is  now  used  exclusively  in  a  metaplior- 
ical  sense,  and  is  not  an  equivalent  of  the  Gr;  evSvo/xai  (enduoinai), 
which  is  frequently  used  both  by  St.  Luke  and  St.  Paul,  e.g., 
Eph.  vi.  11,  "  Put  on  the  whole  armour  of  God."  It  is  not  else- 
where rendered  "  endue  "  in  Auth. 

50  Until    they    were  over  against  Bethany.— For    "  as    far 

as  to  Bethany "  (Auth.) ;  not  actually  to  the  village,  but  until 
they  could  look  down  upon  it  from  the  ridge  of  the  Mount  of 
Olives,  which  lies  between  it  and  Jerusalem. 

51  He  parted  from  them. — Auth.,  "  he  was  parted."  The  Gr. 
has  not  a  passive  sense.  It  is  used  in  the  New  Testament  by  St. 
Luke  only.  Previous  versions  have,  "  he  departed."  Vu'g., 
recessit  ab  eis. 

63  "  Praising." — (Auth.).     Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  toxt. 


THE    GOSPEL    ACCORDING    TO 

ST.     JOHN. 

CHAPTER   I. 

3  The  Margin  shows  that  the  Gr.  is  "  all  things  were  made  throngli 
him,"  the  Gr.  preposition  being  5td,  "  through,"  not  Ctto,  "  by  ;  " 
but  the  literal  rendering  here,  as  in  Matt.  ii.  5  (where  see  Note), 
would  scarcely  have  been  intelligible  to  the  English  reader.  It  is 
otherwise  in  Heb.  i.  2:  "  God  .  .  .  hath  spoken  to  us  in  his  sou 
,  .  .  through  whom  also  he  made  the  worlds,"  where  "  throngli 
whom,"  as  denoting  instrumentality,  is  explained  by  the  context. 

5  Apprehended  it  not. — All  Engl,  versions,  "  comprehended 
it  not,"  following  ^''^^g-  "Apprehend"  is  the  rendering  of  the 
same  Gr.  in  Phil.  iii.  12,  13  (Auth.),  and  has  been  here  adopted 
as  better  expressing  the  metaphorical  sense  of  the  word,  "  to  seize 
mentally,  to  perceive,"  than  the  Anth.,  "  comprehend,"  which  in 
its  metaphorical  sense  is  to  "  embrace,  or  grasp  fully  "  with  the 
understanding.  This  meaning  is  also  in  accordance  with  what 
is  said  in  verse  11,  "  his  own  received  him  not." 

The  alternative  rendering  in  the  Margin,  "  the  darkness  overcame 
it  not,"  "  did  not  overtake  and  conquer  it,"  is  consistent  with  the 
usage  of  the  word  in  John  xii.  35,  "  that  darkness  overtake  you 
not,"  and  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament,  but  would  here  be 
inappropriate. 

6  There  came  a  man— i.e.,  came  into  being,  as  in  Mark  i.  11, 
"  a  voice  caine  out  of  the  heavens,"  and  in  other  passages,  where 
the  Gr.  is  the  same,  4yeveTo  -.  it  is  here  preferable  to  "  was  " 
(Auth.),  which  is  liable  to  be  joined  with  "  sent,"  as  if  the  mean- 
ing were  that  which  is  given  by  WycL,  "  a  man  was  sent  from 
God."  Had  tliat  been  intended,  the  vei-se  would  have  begun  like 
chap.  iii.  1,  "  There  was  a  man,"  ^Hj/  U  avepccnos.     The  necessary 


138  ST.   JOHN— I. 

and  proper  use  of  "came"  in  the  next  verse,  as  tte  literal  transla- 
tion of  ^xde,  may  be  thought  an  objection  to  its  employment  here 
in  another  sense,  and  for  a  different  Gr.  word.  The  answer  must 
1)6,  that  the  two  words  of  the  Gr.,  though  they  differ  in  literal 
meaning,  in  sense  are  not  here  widely  apart ;  the  one  properly 
"became,"  "was  made,"  as  at  verse  2,  the  other  "  came,"  i.e.,  to 
men,  for  witness.  If  there  existed  an  English  equivalent  to  the 
Gr.  yiyvea-eai,  in  all  its  applied  uses,  undoubtedly  it  woidd  have 
been  found  very  convenient  in  the  translation  of  the  New  Testa- 
ment. 

7  Came  for  witness — i.e.,  for  testimony,  as  Rliem.  Auth.,  fol- 
lomng  Genev.,  "for  a  witness,"  which,  though  a  correction  of 
Tynd.,  "  came  as  a  witness,"  is  open  to  the  interpretation  that  he 
came  to  be  in  his  own  person  "a  witness,"  a  giver  of  testimony. 

8  But  came. — Auth.,  following  Craum.,  "  was  sent,"  which  sup- 
plies more  than  is  needed  for  the  sense.  Wycl.,  Tynd.,  and 
Rhem.  give  the  sentence  -without  any  insertion,  "He  was  not  that 
light,  but  to  bear  witness,"  which  if  intelligible  is  abrupt  and 
harsh.  The  proper  connecting  liiJi  is  "  came,"  suggested  by  the 
preceding  verse. 

9  There  was  the  true  light. — Auth.,  "  that  was  the  true 
liglit."  Wycl.,  "  there  was  a  very  light."  TjTid.,  "  that  was  a 
true  light."  Ci'anm.,  "  that  light  was  the  true  light."  Genev., 
"  that  was  that  true  light."  Jlhem.,  "  it  was  the  true  liglit." 
AH  these,  except  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  by  throwing  the  em- 
phasis on  "  true  light,"  diminish  the  importance  which  attaches 
to  the  first  word  of  the  sentence  in  Gr.,  ^y,  when  it  is  viewed  in 
connection  with  eytvero,  said  of  John  in  verse  6,  and  ^v,  said  of 
the  "  Word"  in  verses  9  and  10.  John  "  came  into  being,"  came 
to  men  for  witness ;  there  was  always  the  true  Light,  and  He  was 
always  in  the  world,  though  unknown  to  it,  tiU  He  "came"  in 
the  likeness  of  human  nature ;  and  then  He  was  not  received. 

Even  the  light  which  Ughteth  every  man,  coming  into 

the  world. — Auth.,  "which  lighteth  every  man  that  cometh 
into  the  world."  So,  with  slight  variations,  aU  the  Engl. 
versions,  and  Vidg.,  Erat  hix  vera,  qitce  illuminat  omneni  homi- 
nem  venientem  in  Mine  imtndum.  An  ambiguity  is  caused  in 
tlie  Gr.  by  the  participle,  wliich  is  of  doubtfid  gender,  and  appli- 
cable, if  masculine,  to  "man;"  if  neuter,  to  "  light ;"  and  the 
context  will  accommodate  itself,  more  or  less  easily,  to  either 
alternative.  The  comma  placed  in  the  text  after  "  man,"  and  the 
reading  of  "  coming  into,"  for  "  that  cometh  into,"  are  intended 
to  sever  the  participle  from  "  man  "  which  immediately  precedes 


ST.    JOHN— T.  139 

it,  and  to  connect  it  with  "There  was  the  true  light  "at  tlie 
beginning  of  the  sentence ;  but  on  consideration  of  wliat  has 
been  said  in  the  former  Note  on  this  verse,  and  of  the  words  in 
verse  10,  "  He  was  in  the  world,"  it  may  be  thought  that  to  say 
here,  "  He  was  coming  into  the  world,"  is  somewhat  at  variance 
with  what  precedes  and  follows ;  moreover,  if  this  had  been 
intended,  "There  was  "  would  not  have  been  so  far  separated 
from  the  dependent  participle,  "  coming."  The  Revised  Yersion 
shows  a  decided  preference  for  this  interpretation,  but  does  not 
preclude  the  other,  which  is  that  of  the  ancient  fathers,  versions, 
and  expositors,  as  well  as  of  the  Engl,  versions,  and  according  to 
which  the  great  truth  is  here  declared,  that  before  the  coming  of 
John  there  was  in  the  world  the  true  light  (shown  in  the  next 
verse  to  be  Christ  himself)  which  enlightens  eveiy  man  born  into 
the  world  :  every  man,  wliether  he  have  knowledge  of  Christ  or 
not,  on  coming  into  tlie  world  receives  light  from  Him.  "  To 
come  into  the  world  "  is  a  common  Hebrew  idiom  for  "  to  1)6 
bom,"  according  to  Yorst,  de  Hebraismis,  p.  713,  quoted  by 
"Wordsworth  in  Note  on  this  place. 

11  He  came  unto  his  own,  and  they  that  were  his  own 
received  him  not. — All  Engl,  versions  except  Wycl.  have, 
"  He  came  unto  his  own,  and  his  own  received  him  not,"  over- 
looking the  difference  in  gender  of  the  same  adjective  in  the  two 
clauses  of  the  sentence.  In  the  former  the  Gr,  is,  "  unto  his  own 
things,"  meaning  that  "  he  came  unto  his  own  home,"  the  land  of 
Israel ;  in  the  latter,  "  they  that  were  his  own,"  his  own  peculiar 
people,  the  Israelites,  "  received  liim  not."  The  distinction 
iDetween  the  neutei*,  to  XSta,  and  the  masculine,  oi  ifSiot,  is  pre- 
sei'ved  in  Wycl.,  "  He  came  to  liis  own  things,  and  liise  {sic) 
received  him  not,"  following  Yiilg.,  in  propria  venit,  et  sui  eum 
non  receperunt. 

12  Gave  he  the  right. —  All  Engl,  versions,  "gave  he  the 
power."  Yulg.,  potestateni.  The  Gr.  i^ovaia  is  usually 
"  authority,"  in  virtue  of  which  a  person  exercises  power  or  rule 
over  others  who  are  placed  under  him;  but  where,  as  in  this  place, 
the  word  indicates  a  certain  relation  between  him  who  receives 
and  him  who  gives  it,  the  English  equivalent  is  "  a  right,"  rather 
than  an  "  authority,"  or  "  power." 

Children. — All  Engl,  versions,  "  sons."     The  Gr.  is  reKva. 

14  The  Word  became  flesh. — Auth.,  "was  made  flesh,"  with 
all  Engl,  versions,  except  Cranm.,  "  became."  This  is  the  proper 
sense  of  the  Gr.  iyepero,  and  not  to  be  departed  from,  where  that 
word  is  used  in  speaking  of  the  mystery  of  the  Incarnation,  though 


140  ST.    JOHN— I. 

"  was  made  "  may  safely  be  taken  to  represent  it  in  verse  3.  The 
Word  became  flesb  by  His  oyra  will ;  the  world  became  the  world, 
was  made,  by  the  will  of  God,  through  the  Word. 

14  Dwelt  among  us. — The  Gr.,  ia-K-fivtaa-e,  "  tabernacled,"  may 
signify  either  that  He  sojom-ned  among  men  as  in  a  temporary 
teut  or  tabernacle  (so  Bengel),  or  that  our  flesh  was  to  Him  what 
the  tabernacle  in  the  wilderness  was  to  the  Shechiuah,  the  Divine 
glory,  His  abode,  His  holy  j)lace.  (So  Chrysostom  and  Words- 
worth.) The  former  and  simpler  of  these  two  interpretations  is 
to  be  preferred,  "He  dwelt,  or  sojoui-ued,  in  the  midst  of  us, 
and  we,  among  whom  he  lived,  beheld,"  &e.,  and  taking  it  thus, 
we  may  understand  that  in  the  16th  verse, "  we  all  receiA'cd,"  &e., 
"  all "  is  added  in  order  to  include,  besides  the  actual  eye- 
witnesses, the  whole  Christian  brotherhood.     (Westcott.) 

The  only  begotten  from  the  Father. — All  Engl,  versions, 
"  of  the  Father."  The  full  meaning  is,  "  the  glory  of  the  only 
begotten,  sent  to  us  from  the  Father."     (wapa  narpos.) 

15  John  beareth  witness  of  him  and  crieth.— So  Wycl.  and 
Cranm.,  following  Vulg.  Autli.,  "  bare  witness  of  him,  and 
cried,"  with  Tynd.,  Genev.,  and  Beza.  Tlie  past  tense  seems 
to  have  been  adopted  because  the  Gr.  perfect,  KtKpaye,  was  sup- 
posed to  require  a  past  rendering,  whereas  it  speaks  of  an  act 
still  continuing  in  its  effect,  "  he  hath  cried,"  and  his  voice  is 
stiU  sounding.  Ajid  so  of  the  former  vex-b,  which  is  in  the 
present  tense,  fiaprvpe?,  he  "  beareth  witness,"  his  testimony 
stands  as  if  it  were  this  day  delivered.  Comp.  Note  on  Matt. 
i.  22. 

Is  become  before  me. — Auth.,  following  Genev.,  "  is  pre- 
ferred before  me,"  as  Beza,  mihi  antepositus  est.  Tlie  previous 
versions  vaiy  much.  Wycl.,  "is  made  before  me,"  following 
Vulg.,  ante  me  fadus  est.  Tynd.,  "  was  before  me,  because  he 
was  yer  (ere)  than  I."  Cranm.,  "which  though  ho  came  after 
me,  went  before  me,  for  he  was  before  me."  Rhem.,  ''  He  that 
shall  come  after  me  is  made  before  me,  because  he  was  before 
me."  None  of  these  yield  either  a  satisfactory  meaning  or  a 
faithful  rendering.  Even  when  a  clear  perception  of  tlie  true 
rendering  and  meaning  has  been  obtained,  there  is  much  diffi- 
culty in  translating  the  words  with  precision  and  xierspicnity. 
The  Anth.  is  misleading,  as  the  sense  in  which  "  preferred  "  is 
now  used  is  not  contained  in  the  original.  Tlie  literal  transla- 
tion, which  lias  been  adopted,  gives  the  true  sense,  though  in 
•  awkward  plu*ase,  "  He  that  cometh  after  me  is  become  before  me," 
hath  his  place  before  me,  hath  precedence  of  me,  "  for  he  was," 


ST    JOHN— I.  Ui 

in  time,  "  before  me."  So,  as  regards  the  meauiug,  Beugel :  "  is 
come-to-be  befoi'e  me,"  would  very  "well  express  iu  Euglisli  idiom 
tlie  Gr.  for  wliieli  we  have  "  is  become  before  me,"  but  would  be 
ambiguous  ;  for  taken  in  connection  with  "  he  that  cometh  after 
me,"  it  might  bo  understood  to  mean  "  is  come  in  order  to  be 
before  me." 

16  For  of  his  fulness.— "For,"  instead  of  "and"  (Auth.),  by 
change  in  Gv.  test.  "  His  fuhiess  "  has  reference  to  verse  14, 
'•■  full  of  grace  and  truth,"  the  testimony  of  John  iu  verse  15  being 
parenthetical.     (Westcott. ) 

18  The  only  begotten  Son.— The  reading  in  the  Margin,  God 
only  begotten,  0EO2,  for  TI02,  is  found  in  the  two  MSS.  which 
are  of  the  highest  authority,  the  Sinaitic  and  tlie  Vatican,  and  in 
many  others,  several  of  which  are  of  great  value ;  it  is  also  sup- 
ported by  the  testimony  of  some  of  the  most  ancient  versions  and 
some  of  the  Greek  Fathers.  The  reading  iu  the  text  lias  on  its 
side  several  of  the  early  MSS.,  as  the  Alexaudi-ine,  and  the  great 
majority  of  the  later ;  also  the  Latin  and  other  ancient  versions, 
some  of  tlie  Gi'eek  Fathers,  as  Eusebius  and  Athanasius,  and,  so 
far  as  is  known,  all  the  Latin  Fathers.  The  reading,  "  God  only 
begotten,"  has  been  adopted  by  several  of  the  principal  editors 
of  the  Greek  Testament,  as  by  Tregelles,  and  by  Professors 
Westcott  and  Hort.  But  where  tlie  ancient  authorities  are  so 
diAaded,  it  has  been  thought  better  in  the  version  to  follow  the 
revised  text,  rather  than  to  adopt  a  reading  which  is  not  illus- 
trated by  any  like  expression  iu  the  Holy  Scriptures. 

19  The  witness  of  John. — Auth.,  with  Tyud.,  here  has  "record," 
but  for  the  same  Gr.,  "  witness,"  usually,  as  at  vei-se  7. 

24  And  they  had  been  sent  from.— By  change  of  Gr.  text  for, 
"  and  they  which  were  sent  were  of  the  Pharisees." 

26  In  the  midst  of  you  standeth  one.— More  emphatic  in 
iang-uage,  as  well  as  collocation,  than  Aiith.,  "  There  standeth  one 
among  you."     The  Gr.  is  /xea-os  v/xuv. 

27  The  changes  in  this  verse  are  due  to  changes  in  Gr.  text. 

28  Bethany.— By  change  of  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  Bethabara," 
which  appears  to  have  been  substituted  for  the  true  reading  in 
the  MSS.,  on  the  suggestion  of  Origen  in  the  3rd  century,  who 
was  not  aware  of  there  being  in  the  time  of  our  Lord  another 
Bethany  besides  that  on  the  Mount  of  Olives,  the  residence  of 
Lazarus  and  his  sisters. 


142  ST.    JOHN— I. 

33  Abiding. — As  in  verse  32.  Atith.,  following  Rliem.,  "remain- 
ing," the  proper  meaning  of  wliicb,  and  the  meaning  which  it 
has  in  Auth.,  is  "staying  behind,"  or  "  sm'viving." 

35  Was  standing. — AU  Engl,  versions, "  stood."  This  participial 
rendering,  to  exx^ress  the  imperfect,  has  several  times  been 
adopted  in  this  Gospel. 

39  Ye  shall  see. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  '•  Come  and 
see." 

Where  he  ahode. — Auth.,  "  where  he  dwelt."  The  word  in  the 
Gr.  is  the  same,  three  times  repeated,  but  in  Aiitli.  is  varied  to 
avoid  the  iteration,  which,  as  a  feature  in  the  style  of  the  original, 
is  to  be  preserved  at  whatever  sacrifice  of  elegance. 

41  rindeth  first.— For  Auth.,  "first  findeth,"  by  change  of  Gr. 
text,  the  accusative  for  the  nominative  {irpuTov  for  Trpwros) ;  which 
suggests  that  another  was  found  afterwards. 

42  By  interpretation,  Peter  —  i.e.,  in  the  Greek  language 
(Petros).  Auth.,  "  a  stone,"  the  interpretation  in  English,  more 
correctly  given  in  the  Margin,  "  That  is,  rock,  or  stone." 

48,  50  Under  .  .  .  underneath— represent  diifereut  Gr.  words, 
uvra  vnh  ttjc  ffvKrjv,  denoting  his  being  gone  thither ;  vnoKdrw  rfjs 
crvKTis,  his  being  there. 

51  "  Hereafter."— (Auth.)     Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

The  heaven  opened. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  "heaven 
oj)en,"  with  Tynd.  The  Gr.  is  the  participle,  auecfiySra.  The 
opening  or  rending  of  the  heavens  is  a  Scriptural  symbol  of  the 
intercourse  between  God  and  man,  fii'st  met  ^A'ith  in  Isa.  Ixiv.  1. 
"  Oh  that  thou  wouldest  rend  the  heavens,  that  thou  wouldest  come 
down  ! "  (Comp.  Matt.  iii.  16.)  The  Psalms  have  a  similar  ex- 
pression, "  Bow  the  heavens,"  xviii.  9,  cxliv.  5. 


ST.    JOHN— 11.  143 


CHAPTER  n. 

2  Bidden. — Auth.,  "  called,"  but  elsewhere  "  biddeu,"  for  tlie  same 
Gr.,  iu  the  sense  of  "  invited." 

3  When  the  wine  failed.— So  Tynd.,  with  "VVycl.  and  Vulg., 
deficiente  vino.     Auth.,  ''  when  they  wanted  wiue." 

6  After  the  Jews' manner  of  purifying.— More  perspicuous 

than  Autli.,  "  after  the  manner  of  the  purifying  of  the  Jews." 

8,  9  The  ruler  .  .  .  the  ruler. — The  Gr.  is  the  same  in  both 
places.  Auth. ,"  the  ruler  .  .  .  the  governor;"  a  notable  instance 
of  studious  variation,  made  even  at  the  risk  of  perplexing  tlie 
reader. 

9  Now  become  wine. — Auth.,  "that  was  made  wine,"  following 
Wycl.,  Rhem.,  and  Auth.,  aqiumi  vinum  factam.  Gr.,  yeyevn/jLeiov. 

10  Setteth  on — i.e.,  on  the  table.  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  "setteth." 
Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  setteth  forth."  The  Gr.  is  Tie-qai ;  "  set 
forth  "  would  represent  irpoTldrtai. 

First. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  has  the  paraphrase  "  at  the  begin- 
ning." 

Have  drunk  freely. — Auth.,  vnth  Genev.  and  Rhem.,  "  have 
well  drunk."  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  "  when  men  be  drunk,"  follow- 
ing Yulg.,  cuvi  inebriati  fuerint.  This  last  is  the  exact  meaning 
of  the  word  here  used  by  the  jociuid  ruler  of  the  feast. 

11  This  beginning  of  his  signs. — Wycl.  has  "  signs,"  follow- 
ing Yulg.,  sij/Jicf.  Avitli.,  with  Tynd.,  "miracles."  The  use  of 
this  word,  Gr.  a-nixiiov,  is  characteristic  of  St.  John,  who  has  not 
the  ordinary  word  of  the  other  Evangelists,  ivva^jus,  for  "  a 
miracle,"  either  in  his  Gospel  or  4113  Epistles.  On  the  other  hand, 
in  the  fii'st  three  Gospels,  o-n/j.i'tov  is  rarely  found  iu  the  sense  of  a 
miracle,  as  in  Luke  xxiii.  8.  St.  John  views  the  miracles  of 
Christ  as  "  signs  "  of  His  Godhead,  the  other  Evangelists  as  mani- 
festations of  His  mighty  power.  The  word  "  miracle,"  in  its 
original  meaning,  expresses  neither  of  these  ideas,  being  properly 
"  a  wonder." 

His  signs. — "  His  "  represents  the  article,  which  is  overlooked 
in  Autli. 

13  The  passover  of  the  Jews — as  Wycl.,  is  a  more  perspicuous, 
as  also  a  fuller  rendering  of  the  Gr.,  than  '"the  Jews'  passover," 
Auth.  and  Tynd. 


144  ST.  JOHN— IL 

15  Cast  out. — Autli.,  "di'ove  out,"  with  Wycl.  and  Tyiul.  The 
same  Gr.  is  rendered  " cast  out"  iu  Auth.  in  the  similar  passage 
of  Matt.  xxi.  12. 

Cast  all  out  .   .    .   both  the   sheep   and  the    oxen.— 

Auth.,  '•  drove  them  all  out  .  .  .  and  the  sheep,  and  the  oxen." 
It  appears  from  tlie  Gr.  that  this  applies  to  the  animals  only,  not 
to  the  men  {Travras  being  governed  as  to  gender  by  fioas  rather 
than  7rp6^araj. 

17  Shall  eat  me  up.— By  change  of  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "hath 
eaten  me  up."     In  the  Psalms  (Ixix.  9)  the  j)ast  tense  is  used. 

20  Haise  it  up.— So  Wycl.  and  Ehem.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "rear 
it  up."     The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  verse  19. 

22  Was  raised  from  the  dead.— The  same  Gr.  verb,  in  the 
active  voice,  is  used  in  the  preceding  verses  of  "raising  up"  tlie 
temple.  The  connection  is  obscured  in  all  the  Engl,  versions  by 
the  varied  rendering  "  when  he  was  risen,"  foHowhig  Yulg.,  cum 
resurrexisset. 

24  Did  not  trust  himself. — Auth.,  following  Cranm.  and  Rhem., 
"did  not  commit  himself."  Tynd.,  "put  not  himself  in  tlutir 
hands."  The  Gr.,  in(mvw,  thus  used  transitively,  expresses  trust, 
as  it  does  in  its  ordinary  intransitive  use  in  verse  23.  Comp. 
Rom.  iii.  2. 

For  that  he  knew  all  men,  and  because  he  needed 

not.— So  Rhem.,  and  similarly  Wycl.,  foIlo\ving  Vulg.,  eo  quod 
ipse  nosset  omnes,  ct  quia.  Aiith.,  with  Tynd.,  "because  he  knew 
all  men,  and  needed  not."  Two  reasons  are  given,  separate 
though  connected,  the  one  being  consequent  on  the  other. 

25  He  himself  knew.— The  Gr.  pronoun,  aMs,  occurs  four  times 
in  these  two  verses.  Twice  it  is  emj)hatic  as  nominative  case  to  a 
verb,  but  in  the  24th  Averse,  "  Jesus  did  not  trust  himself,"  it 
coidd  not,  without  needless  tautology,  have  been  expressed  in 
Eno:lisli. 


ST.   JOHN— III.  145 


CHAPTER  ni. 


3  Eom  anew. — Mixrgin,  "  Or,  from  above."  The  Gr.,  &vco9ev,hcis 
both  meanings,  that  in  the  Margin  being  proper  to  it,  the  other 
dei'ivative,  "from  above,"  from  tlie  beginning,  or  source,  as  in 
Gal.  iv.  9,  "  Te  desire  to  be  in  bondage  over  again."  In  this 
place,  expositors  from  the  time  of  Chrysostom  have  been  divided 
between  the  two  alternatives,  either  of  which  fits  the  context, 
and  is  true.  The  chief  reason  for  giving  preference  to  the  mean- 
ing in  the  text  is  that  it  appears  to  have  been  so  understood  by 
Nicodemus  in  the  next  verse ;  otherwise  the  usage  of  St.  John 
would  determine  in  favour  of  "  from  above,"  as  in  verse  31  of 
this  chap.,  and  in  chap.  xix.  11. 

8  The  wind  .  .  .  the  spirit. — The  same  Gr.  word,  nyevfia,  is 
used  in  both  parts  of  the  verse,  and  is  rendered  "  spirit "  in  both 
places  by  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following  Yulg.  But  it  is  certainly 
used  for  "  wind  "  in  other  places,  as  Heb.  i.,  and  in  the  LXX., 
and  the  context  seems  to  require  both  senses  here :  for  there  is 
manifestly  a  comparison  between  the  natural  element  which  blows 
or  breathes  (irvet)  and  is  heard,  and  the  supernatural  power ;  both 
are  invisible,  both,  in  their  origin  and  course,  past  finding  out. 
The  word  ■Kvev/j.a,  as  distinguished  from  &ve/u.o?,  denotes  a  gently- 
breathing  wind,  producing  the  "  still,  small  voice." 

Voice.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  sound." 
The  Gr.,  (pcov-fj,  usually  signifies  an  articulate  sound,  as  in  1  Cor. 
xiv.  7. 

Enowest  not.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  "canst  not 
tell :"  one  of  the  many  idiomatic  but  inexact  renderings  which  are 
due  to  Tynd. 

15  See  marginal  Note  :  "  believeth  "  stands  by  itself,  as  in  several 
other  places  of  this  Gospel.     (Comp.  chap.  iv.  42.) 

17  The  Son.—"  His"  (Auth.)  is  omitted  in  Gr.  text. 

17,  18,  19  Judge,  judgement.— For  Auth.,  "condemn,  condemna- 
tion," the  Gr.  being  /cpiVw,  Kpi<ns,  not  KaraKpivu,  KardKpicns. 

20  Doeth  ill. — So  Rhem.  only.  AU  other  versions,  "doeth  evil." 
The  Gr.  is  a  word  denoting,  not  as  in  verse  19,  things  positively 
evil,  but  negatively  so,  "mean,"  "base." 

25  A  questioning  on  the  part  of  John's  disciples  with  a 

Jew. — Auth.,  "a  question  between,"  &c.  The  Gr.  denotes,  not 
a  question,  but  the  discussing  of  a  question,  and  shews  that  it 

K 


146  ST.   JOHN— IV. 

originated  witli  the  disciples  of  John,  "  on  their  part "  (^«).     "  A 
Jew"  is  by  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  the  Jews." 

31  Is  of  the  earth.— (Repeated.)  So  Tynd.,  following  the  Gr. 
Auth.,  with  Cranm.  and  Genev.,  "is  earthly."  Rhem.  has 
relieved  tlie  monotony  and  strengthened  the  emphasis  by  revers- 
ing the  order  of  the  second  clause — "  He  that  is  of  the  earth,  of 
the  earth  he  is : "  he  is  true  to  his  origin,  he  does  not  soar 
above  it.  "Earthly  "  (Auth.)  means,  not  as  the  Gr.,  "  springing 
out  of  the  earth,"  but  "  belonging  to  the  earth." 

33  Hath  set  his  seal  to  this.— Auth.,  "  hath  set  to  his  seal," 
an  archaic  use  of  "  set  to." 

34  For  he  giveth  not  the  Spirit  by  measure.  — The  limit- 
ing words,  unto  him,  have  no  i^lace  in  the  Gr.,  and  were  first 
inserted  by  Cranm.  The  omission  of  the  defining  word  at  the 
beginning  of  the  clause,  "  God,"  which  stands  in  all  the  English 
versions,  is  due  to  change  in  Gr.  text ;  it  is  uncertain,  but  also 
immaterial,  whether  "he "  shoidd  he  referred  to  God  or  to 
Christ. 

36  Obeyeth  not.— Auth.,  "believeth  not."  The  Gr.  is  not  the 
same  as  in  the  former  part  of  the  verse,  and  may  mean  either 
"  disobey  "  or  "  disbelieve." 


CHAPTER  IV. 

6  Sat  thus  by  the  well— i.e.,  as  any  weary  man  might  sit. 
Compare  chap.  xiii.  25. 

"  Tlie  well "  is  called  here  and  in  verse  14  "  a  spring,"  but  in 
verse  11  "  a  well."  It  still  goes  by  both  names,  thougli  seventy, 
five  feet  deep,  and  dry.     (Westcott.) 

15  All  the  way. — An  addition  consequent  on  change  in  Gr.  text. 

22  Ye  worship  that  which  ye  know  not. —  So  the  Gr.  and 

Wycl.,  following  Vulg.,  vos  adoratis  quod  nescitis.  Auth.,  "  Te 
worship  ye  know  not  what."  The  true  meaning  is,  "  Te  worship 
a  deity  of  whom  ye  have  a  conception,  but  ye  know  him  not." 
According   to  Auth.   it  would  be  "  Te  worship  ye  know  not 


ST.   JOHN— IV.  147 

what — sometlung  undefined  and  indistinct,  even  in  your  own 
minds." 

23  For  such,  doth  the  Father  seek  to  be  his  worship- 
pers.— Autli.,  "  to  worship."  The  Gr.  participle  denotes  a 
class,  the  class  spoken  of  again  in  verse  24,  "they  that  worship 
liim."  The  rendering  of  Anth.  points,  not  to  the  class,  but  to  the 
act  of  worshipping. 

25  Declare. — Auth.,  "  teU."  The  Gr.  is  especially  said  of  one  who 
makes  an  announcement  by  Divine  authority,  as  at  chap.  xvi.  13. 
"  He  (the  Spirit)  shall  declare  unto  you  the  things  to  come." 

27  With  a  woman. — So  Rhem.  AH  other  versions,  "  with  the 
woman."  The  article,  though  not  in  the  Gr.,  might  after  the 
preposition  be  imderstood.  But  the  position  of  the  words  shows 
them  to  be  emphatic.  The  Jewish  rabbis  despised  women,  and 
did  not  willingly  converse  with  them  in  public.  (Lightfoot  and 
Schoettgen,  quoted  by  Wordsworth.) 

29  Can  this  be  the  Christ ?— Auth., " is  not  this  the  Christ?" 
(following  Tynd.).  The  nearest  idiomatic  rendering  would  be, 
"  This  man  is  not  the  Christ,  is  he  ?  " 

34  To  accomplish. — The  Gr.  word,  signifying  to  "  complete  "  or 
"  perfect,"  is  found  chiefly  in  the  Gospel  and  Epistles  of  St. 
John,  and  the  Epistle  to  the  Hebrews,  and  in  Auth.  is  most  com- 
monly rendered  "  make  perfect ;  "  here,  "  finish." 

38  Ye  have  not  laboured. — Auth.,  following  the  paraphrase  of 
Tynd.,  made  for  the  sake  of  variety,  "  Ye  bestowed  no  labour." 

42  Because  of  thy  speaking.— Wycl.,  "thy  speech."  Yulg., 
tuam  loquelam.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  thy  saying,"  which  sug- 
gests that  they  were  convinced  by  some  single  saying  of  the 
woman,  as  by  what  she  said  in  verse  29,  "  He  told  me  all  things 
that  ever  I  did ; "  but  there  is  nothing  in  the  Gr.  to  support 
such  an  interpretation. 


148  ST.    JOHN— V. 


CHAPTER  Y. 


3  The  passage  given  in  the  marginal  Note,  being  part  of  verse  3 
and  the  whole  of  verse  4  in  Auth.,  is  omitted  on  the  authority  of 
f  onr  out  of  the  five  leading  MSS. ;  it  is  also  marked  as  spurious 
in  many  others.  The  majority  of  modern  editors  of  the  Gr. 
Testament  have  rejected  it.  It  is,  however  believed  to  be  a  very 
early  interpolation,  giving  probably  the  popidar  Jewish  explana- 
tion of  the  troubling  of  the  water,  which  would  now  be  regarded 
as  a  natural  phenomenon,  the  salutary  pool  being  supplied  by  an 
intermittent  spring  of  mineral  water. 

5  Had  been  ...  in  his  infirmity. —  Auth.,  following 
Tynd.,  "had  an  infii-mity."  The  Gr.  phrase  is  the  same  here 
and  in  tl:e  next  verse. 

10  To  take  up.— So  Cranm.  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.  and 
Genev.,  "to  carry."     The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  verses  8  and  11. 

18  Called  God  his  own  Father.— All  English  versions  omit 
"  own,"  the  proper  rendering  of  the  Gr.  tStov,  expressed  in  Vulg. 
by  sumji.  The  omission  is  the  more  remarkable,  as  of  the  foui-- 
teen  places  in  this  Gospel  in  which  the  word  occurs,  this  is  the 
only  one  in  which  it  is  not  in  Auth.  rendered  "his  own  " — e.g., 
chap.  i.  11,  41.  Compare  Rom.  viii.  3,  "  God  sending  his  own 
Son."  The  restoration  of  this  word  to  its  place  in  the  English 
text  makes  it  manifest  that,  according  to  the  view  of  the  Jews 
themselves,  as  recorded  by  St.  Jolm,  our  Lord  spoke  of  God  as 
His  Father,  not  as  any  God-fearing  person  might  take  that  rela- 
tion to  himself,  btit  in  a  sense  implying  personal  Fatherhood  and 
Sonship. 

24, 29  Judgement. — Auth.,  "condemnation,"  "  damnation,"  though 
the  same  Gr.  is  the  ruling  word  throughout  this  passage. 

27  The  Son  of  man. — The  article,  which  is  in  the  Gr.  in  verses 
12,  23,  is  here  omitted ;  as  it  is  also  in  xix.  7,  "  He  made  himself 
the  Son  of  God."  The  title,  "  the  Son  of  man,"  is  often  used  in 
the  four  Gospels ;  and  this  is  the  only  place  where  it  is  written 
without  the  article.  But  it  does  not  ap^iear  that  any  difference  in 
meaning  is  to  be  inferred  from  the  omission  in  a  phrase  of  such 
frequent  occurrence. 

29  The  two  Gr.  words  here  rendered  "  have  done  "  may  be  distin- 
guished in  English  by  "  done  "  and  "practised,"  as  in  Rom.  vii. 
15,  19 ;  but  in  this  passage  there  was  more  to  be  lost  by  inter- 
cepting the  parallelism  of  the  two  parts  of  the  sentence  than  was 


ST.    JOHN— V.  149 

to  be  gaiued  by  markiug  a  tlistinetiou  wliicli  lias  no  strong  signi- 
ficance. St.  Pan!  in  2  Cor.  v.  10  uses  irpdffcrw,  "  to  practise,"  in 
the  same  connection. 

34  The  witness  which  I  receive  is  not  from  man.  —  It  is 

tlius  affirmed  that  He  does  receive  witness,  tlioiigli  not  from  man. 
All  English  versions,  "  I  receive  not  testimony  from  man."  This 
rendering  is  simply  a  negation,  without  any  implied  affirmative, 
and  is  due  to  neglect  of  the  article  with  "  witness  "  in  the  Gr. 

35  He  was  the  lamp  that  hurneth  and  shineth.— WycL, 

"a  lantern  burning  and  shining,"  and  so  Rliem., following  Vulg., 
hicerna  ardens  et  splendens.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  the  light 
that  burneth  and  shineth,"  overlooking  a  material  point  in  this 
description  of  the  Baptist.  He  was  emphatically  the  lamp  that 
biirneth  (6  Kaio/j-fvos,  pi'operly,  "that is  made  to  burn  ")  and  shineth, 
not  himself  the  source  of  light,  but  the  vessel  containing  and 
shewing  it.  "  He  was  not  tlie  light "  (chap.  i.  8).  The  Jews 
were  fain  to  rejoice,  to  bask,  as  it  were,  for  awhile  in  the  light 
which  he  shed  around  him,  but  not  to  follow  its  guidance  in 
earnest  when  he  would  lead  them  on  to  Christ. 

37  His  form. — All  English  versions,  "  shape."  Yulg.,  speciem. 
"  Form  "  does  not  apply  so  definitely  as  "  shape  "  to  the  outline 
of  a  figure,  and  is,  on  tliat  account,  a  better  rendering  of  the  Gr. 
fiSos. 

39  Ye  search  the  Scriptures.  —  All  English  versions  have 
the  imperative  "  search."  The  Gr.  may  be  either.  In  the 
context  reasons  may  be  found  for  either  rendering ;  and 
consequently  there  have  been  interpreters  of  high  autho- 
rity taking  opposite  sides,  both  in  ancient  and  modern 
times.  The  Greek  fathers,  whose  opinion  in  a  question  of 
Gr.  ought  to  have  great  weight,  ai-e  for  the  imperative,  with 
the  remarkable  exception  of  Oyi'il  of  Alexandria,  who  ai'gues 
strongly  against  the  imperative  as  not  being  in  harmony  with  the 
context  (Comment,  in  Joann.,  vol.  iv.,  p.  260,  ed.  Aubert,  1638). 
In  recent  times  Erasmus,  Bengel,  Lllcke,  and  the  majority  of 
commentators,  have  been  for  the  indicative ;  and  even  those  who 
cannot  reconcile  themselves  to  the  loss  of  a  familiar  and  truly 
scriptural  precept  must  admit  that  with  the  indicative  the  sequence 
of  thought  rims  easily  along,  "  Ye  search  the  Scriptures  because 
ye  think  that  in  them  ye  have  eternal  life ;  and  it  is  those  veiy 
Scriptures  which  testify  of  me,  and  direct  you  to  me ;  and  yet  ye 
will  not  come  to  me,  to  obtain  the  life  which  ye  seek  for  in  those 
Scriptm-es,  and  which  they  direct  you  to  seek  for  in  me." 

The  identity  in  Gr.  of  the  indicative  and  imperative  of  the  second 


150  ST.   JOHN— VI. 

person  plural  is  the  occasion  o£  several  ambiguities  in  the  New 
Testament,  and  especially  in  this  Gospel.  See  chaps,  xii.  19 ; 
xiv.  1 ;  XV.  18,  27,  texts  not  so  conspicuous,  but  quite  as  dubious 
as  this. 

44  Gloiry. — ^uth.,  "  honour,"  which  represents  tI/xt],  rather  than 
So|a. 

45  On  whom  ye  have  set  your  hope.— Wycl.,  "in  whom  ye 
hope."  Auth.,  with  Tyud.,  "  in  whom  ye  trust."  The  Gr.  is 
literally,  "  in  whom  ye  have  hoped." 


CHAPTER  VI. 

3, 15  The  mountain. — ("With  the  article  in  Gr.)  The  well-kuo^-n 
mountainous  rim  of  the  lake.  . 

11  "  He  distributed  to  the  disciples." — (Auth.)  Omitted  by  change 
in  Gr.  text,  probably  interpolated  from  Matt.  xiv.  19,  as  a  ne- 
cessary link  in  the  narrative.  The  co-operation  of  the  disciples  in 
the  distribution  may  be  understood,  though  not  expressed.  See 
Notes  on  the  parallel  passage  of  Matt.  xiv.  13,  &c. 

12  Broken  pieces. — Auth.,  "fragments;"  Gk..  KXacr/xara.  These, 
as  Ave  learn  from  the  other  Evangelists  (Matt.  xiv. ;  Mark  xi. ; 
Luke  ix.),  were  the  pieces  which  He  himself  broke  and  distributed 
to  the  disciples.  Tlie  incident  is  presei-ved  in  all  tlie  four 
Gospels;  and  besides  the  plain  and  obvious  warning  that  the 
gifts  of  God  are  not  to  be  wasted,  we  may  see  in  it  a  deeper 
meaning,  a  symbolical  illustration  of  the  saying  of  our  Lord, 
recorded  by  St.  John  only,  chap.  iii.  34,  "  He  givetli  not  the  Spirit 
by  measure  :  "  His  gifts  of  gi'ace,  our  spiritual  food,  are  pro^-ided 
in  superabundance,  like  the  bodily  food  which  He  supplied  to  the 
five  thousand :  as  it  was  said  of  the  manna,  none  shall  lack,  and  to 
none  shall  there  be  any  over  ;  yet  there  is  more  than  enough  for 
aU.  This  truth  St.  Paid  repeats  again  and  again  in  language 
of  his  own,  which  cannot  be  deemed  hyperbolical  when  we  call 
to  mind  the  saying  of  our  Lord,  and  the  illustration  which 
it  receives  from  His  action  in  this  passage.  Comp.  Rom.  ii.  4; 
V.  17  ;  2  Cor.  iv.  15  ;  Eph.  iii.  8 ;  1  Tim.  iv.  14,  where  the  Apostle 
delights  to  dwell  on  the  "  imsearchable  riches  of  Christ,"  on  "  the 
exceeding  abundance  of  His  grace,"  &c. 


ST.    JOHN— VI.  151 

15  Jesus  therefore  perceiving. —  Auth.,  "  when  Jesus  per- 
ceived," wliicli  indicates  a  point  of  time  when  He  became  aware. 
It  is  well  in  such  things  (lesser  things  though  they  may  be),  rela- 
ting to  our  Lord,  to  adhere  as  closely  as  possible  to  the  original. 

Withdrew. — Auth.,  "  departed."  The  Gr.  word  has  here  the 
same  proper  and  definite  meaning  in  which  it  is  so  often  used  by 
St.  Matthew. 

21  They  were  willing  therefore  to  receive  him. —  Auth., 
less  exactly,  "  they  willingly  received  him ; "  following  Geuev., 
"  they  most  willingly  received  him." 

24  They  themselves  (following  the  example  of  the  disciples) 
got  into  the  boats — i.e.,  into  those  which  ai-e  described  in  vei'se 
23  and  here  as  "  little  boats,"  which  came  from  Tiberias  after  the 
departure  of  that  in  which  the  disciples  had  gone  away  "  alone." 
Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  took  shipping,"  thus  losing  sight  of  the  cou- 
secutiveness  of  the  narrative,  which,  however,  was  obscured  by 
the  difference  in  the  Gr.  text  between  the  "  little  boats  "  in  verse 
23  and  "  boats  "  in  verse  24.  "  Little  boats  "  is  now  the  Gr.  in 
both  places. 

27  Work  not. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  The  Gr.  is  the  word  com- 
monly so  rendered.  Auth.,  "  labour  not,"  which  represents 
KOTTidw.  The  endeavour  after  the  spiritual  hfe  and  its  blessedness 
is  usually  designated  a  "  work  " ;  a  "  labour  "  in  scriptural  lan- 
guage denotes  spiritual  travail  and  weariness :  "  Come  unto  me, 
all  ye  that  labour  and  are  heavy  laden." 

The  Father,  even  God.— So  Rhem. ;  an  instance  of  the 
careful  attention  paid  to  the  Gr.  in  the  execution  of  that  ver- 
sion. Vulg.,  Pater  signavit  Be^is.  All  other  vei'sions,  "  God 
the  Father,"  an  expression  which,  though  not  infrequent  in  the 
Epistles,  does  not  occur  elsewhere  in  the  Gospels, 

32  It  was  not  Moses  that  gave  you  the  bread  out  of 
heaven — i.e.,  the  true,  the  heavenly  bread.  The  manna  which 
he  gave  was  only  a  type  of  that.  All  Engl,  versions,  "  Moses 
gave  you  not  that  bread  from  heaven ;  "  where,  by  rendering  the 
Gr.  article  "  that "  instead  of  "  the,"  a  reference  seems  intended 
to  the  bread  just  before  mentioned — viz.,  to  the  manna — and  the 
real  bearing  of  our  Lord's  answer  is  lost. 

33  Is  that  which  cometh  down. — SoWycl.  and  Rhem.;  Auth., 
"  is  he  who."  Even  if  the  Gr.  admits  of  a  doubt,  the  next  verse 
shews  that  these  words  were  understood  by  the  Jews  in  reference 
to  bread,  and  the  meaning  given  in  Auth.  is  in  anticipation  of 
what  is  distinctly  said  in  verses  35,  38. 


152  ST.    JOHN— VI. 

37  All  that  which  the  Father  giveth  me.— Autli.,  "Allthat 
the  Father  giA-eth  me,"  which  might  be  misunderstood  as  mean, 
ing,  "  All  they  that,"  &c.  The  Gr.  is  in  the  singular,  irau  '6.  The 
whole  body  of  the  believers,  "  the  mass,"  as  Bengal  expresses  it, 
are  the  gift  of  the  Patlier  to  the  Son;  and  then  the  individual  is 
mentioned,  "him  that  cometh  to  me,"  &c.  Compare  chap, 
xvii.  2. 

42  Now  (added  in  Gr.  text)  has  a  special  significance.  "  How  doth 
he  now  say  what  is  so  inconsistent  with  his  parentage  and  child- 
hood, which  are  so  well  known  to  us  ?  " 

45  Every  one  that  hath  heard  from  the  Father,  and  hath 

learned.— Supply, /?"07n.  hun.  Auth.,  "Every  man  that  hath 
heard,  and  hatli  learned  of  the  Father."  The  meaning  in  this 
verse  and  the  next  is  confused,  by  using  "  of  "  in  two  different 
senses  for  two  different  Gr.  prepositions.  (l)."They  shall  all 
be  taught  of  (i.e.,  by)  God ; "  (2)  "  hath  heard,  and  hath  learned  of 
(i.e.,  from)  the  Father  ; "  and  again,  "  he  which  is  of  (i.e.,  from) 
God  " — i.e.,  "  the  Sou." 

The  position  in  the  Gr.  of  "  and  hath  learned,"  separated  off 
from  ' '  hath  heard,"  is  significant,  showing  that  it  is  possible  to 
"  hear  from  God,"  by  the  teaching  of  His  Spirit,  without  learning 
the  heavenly  wisdom  which  He  teaches,  and  that  he  only  who 
both  hears  and  learns  really  comes  to  Christ. 

47  "  On  me." — (Auth.)     Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

49  They  died.— So  Rhem.  alone ;  aU  other  Engl,  versions,  "  they 
are  dead,"  and  so  Vulg.,  viortui  sunt.  The  sense  of  the  aorist 
in  this  verb  is  not  to  be  overlooked.  It  is  true  they  "  died  ;  "  is 
it  true  that  they  "  are  dead  "  ?  God  is  not  the  God  of  the  dead, 
they  all  live  unto  Him.     (See  Rom.  vi.  2 — 8.) 

51  "  Which  I  will  give."— (Auth.,  after  "my  flesh.")  Omitted  by 
change  in  Gr.  text. 

52  Strove  one  with  another. — Auth.,  "  strove  among  them- 
selves," which  does  not  make  it  so  plain  as  it  is  in  the  Gr.,  that 
the  "  war ''  of  words  [fudxoyro)  was  carried  on  between  man  and 
man. 

53  Ye  have  not  life  in  yourselves — i.e..  Ye  have  not  in  your 
own  selves  the  source  and  spring  of  the  eternal  life.  All  Engl, 
versions,  "  Ye  have  no  life  in  you,"  which  fails  to  bring  out  the 
deep  meaning  of  the  original. 

55  Margin,  "  Gr.  true  meat."    This  is  added  because  the  reading  in 

the  Gr.  text  is  changed  from  "  truly  "  to  "  true." 


ST.    JOHN— VII.  153 

67  I  live  because  of  the  Father.— Autb.,  "  by  tho  Father," 
which  would  require  the  Gr.  preposition  Sid  to  be  followed  by  the 
gcuitive,  not,  as  it  is,  by  tlie  accusative.  If  we  cannot  see  or 
cannot  fully  appreciate  the  difference,  we  are  not  the  less  bound 
to  render  the  words  with  accuracy. 

66  Upon  this. — Auth.,  "from  this  time."  The  Gr.  admits  of 
either  a  temporal  or  a  causal  sense ;  the  latter  seems  the  more 
appropriate  here,  as  also  at  xix.  12,  "  upon  this  Pilate  sought  to 
release  him." 

67  Would  ye  also  go  away?— Auth.,  "Will  ye."  The  Gr.  is 
MT].Ka\  vix€7s  0e'A€T6 — "  Ye  would  not,  would  ye  ?  "  Compare  Matt, 
xxvi.  22,  and  Note  there. 

70  Did  not  I  choose  you  the  twelve.— All  Engl,  versions, 
misled  by  the  absence  of  the  article  in  the  Vidg.,  "  Have  not  I 
chosen  you  twelve."  He  chose  them  not  merely  "  twelve  "  in 
number,  but  "  the  twelve,"  whd  were  to  be  the  founders  of  His 
Church,  and  were  to  sit  on  twelve  thrones,  judging  the  twelve 
tribes  of  Israel.  It  cannot  be  doubted  that  this  name,  "  the 
twelve,"  by  which  they  are  so  often  designated  in  the  Gospels, 
and  once  in  the  Epistles  of  St.  Paul  (1  Cor.  xv.  5),  was  adopted 
by  the  disciples  in  consequence  of  its  use  by  our  Lord. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

1  Judsea. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  Jewry,"  the  old  English 
name  for  Judah,  or  the  region  inliabited  by  Jews.  It  occurs 
only  once  more  in  the  Bible,  Dan.  v.  13,  but  is  familiar  to  us 
from  its  use  in  the  Psalter  of  the  Prayer  Book,  Ps.  Ixxvi.  1,  "  In 
Jewry  is  God  known,"  where  "  Judali  "  is  substituted  in  Auth. 
The  prevalence  of  another  English  word  with  the  same  sound 
may  account  for  its  disuse.  The  Auth.  here  has  "  Judaea  "  in  the 
next  verse,  and  the  A^ariety  might  lead  an  unwary  reader  to  sup- 
pose that  Jewry  was  not  the  same  district  as  Judtea. 

2  The  feast  of  the  Jews,   the   feast  of  tabernacles.— 

Auth.,  "The  Jews'  feast  of  tabernacles."  St.  John,  writing  for 
Gentile  as  well  as  Jewish  Christians,  introduces  the  name  of  the 
feast  with  this  special  explanation.  It  was  pre-eminently  "  the 
feast "  of  the  Jews,  the  greatest  and  holiest  of  aU  the  feasts, 


154  ST.    JOHN— VII. 

according  to  Joseplius  and  Pliilo.  (See  Dictionary  of  the  Bible, 
"  Tabernacles,  Feast  of.") 

4  For  no  man,  &c.— In  coUoqnial  English  this  would  be^  "  No 
one  doeth  a  thing  in  secret,  and  also  seeketh  to  be  known  openly." 
The  meaning  is  obscured  in  Auth.  by  the  insertion  of  "  he  :  " 
"  there  is  no  man  who  doeth  anything  in  secret,  and  he  himself 
seeketh,"  &c. 

5  For  even  his  brethren  did  not  believe  in  him. — The 

Gr.  puts  it  thus,  in  stronger  terms  than  Auth.,  "  for  neither  did 
his  brethren  believe  in  him." 

8  The  reading  of  "  not "  for  "  not  yet "  is  noticed  in  the  Margin. 
The  difference  caused  by  the  omission  of  "  yet "  is  immaterial ; 
for  the  verb  beiug  in  the  present  tense,  the  meaning  would  then 
be  "  I  go  not  up  at  present,"  and  it  would  still  be  uncertain 
whether  He  intended  to  go  up  at  a  later  day. 

11  The  Jews  therefore.— Auth.,  "  Then  the  Jews."  The  Gr. 
particle,  ouv,  is  causal,  not  temporal,  and  is  fi-equently  used  in 
this  Gospel  as  the  connecting  link  in  the  narrative,  where  there 
is  not  so  clear  a  sequence  of  cause  and  effect  as  in  this  passage. 
The  2'>ost  hoc  and  the  propter  hoc  are  apt  to  be  closely  associated 
in  our  thoughts. 

12  The  multitudes.— (Twice.)  So  Rhem.  All  other  Engl,  ver- 
sions, "the  people."  It  is  especially  necessary  in  this  Gospel  to 
notice  the  difference,  as  St.  John  has  "  people  "  only  twice,  xi.  50 
and  xviii.  14,  where  he  is  narrating  and  referring  to  the  speech 
of  Caiaphas,  in  whose  mouth  it  means  the  Je^vish  nation.  It 
occurs  also  in  the  much- questioned  passage,  viii.  2. 

"  The  multitudes,"  in  the  j)lural  (used  once  only  by  St.  John  and 
once  by  St.  Mark),  were  the  various  gi-oups  which  had  come  up 
to  the  feast,  such  as  the  "company"  returning  from  the  Passover, 
of  which  we  read  in  Luke  ii.  44. 

17  If  any  man  willeth  to  do  his  will. —  Auth.,  "Avill  do 
his  will."  The  iteration  in  the  Gr.  is  emphatic,  signifying  man 
has  a  mil  of  his  own,  and  must  exercise  it  in  accordance  with  the 
will  of  God ;  otherwise  the  rendering  would  be  more  elegant, 
though  feebler,  "  If  any  man  is  miaded  to  do  his  wUl." 

I  speak  from  myself. — Auth.,  "  of  "  myself.  Here,  as  in 
chap.  vi.  46,  "  of  "  is  misleading,  as  it  is  more  likely  to  be  thought 
equivalent  to  "  concerning,"  than  "  from."     Gr.,  ottJ, 

19  Doeth.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem,,  with  the  Gr.  and  Vulg.,  facit 


ST.    JOHN— VII.  155 

legem.  Autb.,  with  Tynd.,  "  keepetli."  To  "  do  the  law"  ex- 
presses an  active,  to  "  keep  the  law  "  a  passive,  observance. 

Seek. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Aiith.,  with  Tynd.,  "  go  about," 
an  idiomatic  but  not  precise  rendering  of  C'JTeiTe. 

22  For  this  cause  hath  Moses  .  .  . — Auth.,  "Moses  there- 
fore gave  unto  you,"  making  the  Slo,  tovto,  "  therefore,"  appear  to 
be  retrospective,  not,  as  it  is,  prospective.  The  meaning,  though 
somewhat  involved,  is  this  :  "  Moses  on  this  account  gave  you  the 
rite  of  circumcision,  not  because  it  was  an  institution  of  his  own, 
but  of  the  patriarchs,  he  handing  it  down  with  the  fresh  sanction 
of  his  own  authority :  and  ye,  recognising  the  pre-Mosaic  cere- 
mony as  paramount  to  the  Mosaic  Law  of  the  Sabbath,  circum- 
cise a  man  even  on  the  Sabbath,  on  which  day  the  commandment 
says  no  work  shall  be  done."  The  same  meaning  is  educed,  and 
more  easily,  if  the  passage  be  read  with  the  punctuation  given  in 
the  Margin. 

23  I  made  a  man  every  whit  whole. — After  noticing  several 
idiomatic  renderings  of  Tynd.,  which  have  been  removed,  it 
is  well  to  have  the  opportunity  here  of  bearing  testimony  to 
the  many  felicitous  phrases  (of  which  this  is  one)  for  wliich  we 
are  indebted  to  the  same  venerable  translator.  Wycl.  has,  literally, 
but  awkwardly,  "  I  have  made  all  a  man  whole."  The  Gr.  is 
oAov  &vdpwirov  vyirj  67roirj(ra. 

32  The  Pharisees    heard  the    multitude    m.urmuring. — 

Auth.,  "  heard  that  the  people  murmui*ed."  The  Gr.  implies 
that  they  heard  the  murmurs  with  their  own  ears,  not  from  the 
rei)ort  of  others. 

35  The  dispersion  among  the  Greeks. — Auth.,  "the  dis- 
persed among  the  GentUes."  The  Gr.,  Siaairopd,  is  the  word 
both  of  the  LXX.  and  the  N.  T.  (as  in  James  i.  1)  for  the  Jews 
scattered  abroad  in  heathen  (Greek-speaking)  coxmtries.  The 
word  by  which  it  is  translated,  "  dispersion,"  occurs  once  only  in 
Auth.  (Jer.  xxv.  34),  and  there  not  of  the  dispersed  people,  but  of 
the  event,  the  being  dispersed.  Like  other  English  words  of 
similar  formation,  it  has  been  applied  to  the  people  themselves, 
as  "  corporation,"  "  convention,"  "  congregation,"  &c. 

The  Greeks. — Auth.,  "  the  Gentiles."  "  The  Greeks  "  are  not 
named  in  any  of  the  first  three  Gospels,  and  in  this  only  here  and 
in  chap.  xii.  20,  but  frequently  in  the  Acts  and  in  the  Epistles  of 
St.  Paul. 

36  "What  is  this  word  ?— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  what  manner  of 
saying  is  this?" 


156  ST.    JOHN— VIII. 

39  The  Spirit  was  not  yet  given. — The  last  word  is  supplied 
as  in  Auth.,  and  as  by  the  Yatican  MS.,  and  other  authori- 
ties,  to  make  it  clear  tliat  the  dispensation  of  the  Holy  Spirit  is 
here  spoken  of,  not  His  Personal  existence,  which  is  recognised  in 
chap.  i.  of  this  Gospel,  and  throughout  the  Bible,  as  being  before 
all  things. 

46  "  Like  this  man." — (Auth.)     Omitted  by  change  of  Gr.  text. 

49  Accursed. — This  adjective,  meaning  "  subject  to,"  or  "  deserv- 
ing of  a  curse,"  coiTesponds  better  to  the  Gr.,  iTriKaraparSs,  than 
does  Auth.,  "  cursed,"  which  properly  signifies  one  on  whom  a 
curse  has  been  pronounced. 

50  Before.— For  "  by  night "  (Auth.),  by  change  of  Gr.  text. 

53  The  passage  which  foUows  (chap.  viii.  1 — 12)  is  omitted  by 
many  of  the  earliest  and  best  authorities,  and  is  given  by  others 
with  considerable  variations.  It  differs  in  style  and  diction  from 
the  rest  of  this  Gospel.  It  was  not  received  by  the  primitive 
Church  eitlier  in  the  East  or  the  West,  but  has  been  treated  as 
genuine  in  the  West  since  its  recognition  by  Augustine,  Ambrose, 
and  Jerome.  According  to  the  most  probable  opinion,  it  is  not 
a  part  of  St.  John's  Gospel,  but  is  of  very  ancient,  perhaps  of 
Apostolical  origin,  and  it  may  be  regarded  as  a  true  narrative, 
biit  not  as  part  of  canonicaror  inspired  Scripture.   (Wordsworth.) 

The  Gr.  MSS.  which  contain  the  passage  have  many  variations, 
some  of  which,  but  none  that  materially  affect  the  sense,  have 
been  followed  in  the  Revised  Version. 


CHAPTER  Vni. 


18  I  am  he  that  beareth  witness  of  myself.— Auth.,  "I 

am  one  that  bear  witness  of  myself."  The  Gr.  lias  not  "  one," 
and  is,  literally,  "  I  am  tlie  witnesser  concerning  myself." 

19  If  ye   knew  me,  ye  would  know   my  Father  also.— 

The  Gr.  is  in  the  imperfect,  implying  that  it  is  still  possible  for 
them  to  know  Him.  Auth.,  "If  ye  had  known  me,  ye  should 
have  known,"  thus  throwing  the  hypothesis  into  the  irreversible 
past,  as  if  the  time  for  knowing  Him  were,  for  those  whom  He  ad- 


ST.   JOHN— A^III.  157 

dressed,  gone  by.  Tlie  Euglisli  translators  were  mifortunatcly 
led  to  this  interpretation  from  not  observing  that  the  Gr.  TjSerre, 
though  pluperfect  in  foi-m,  is  imperfect  in  sense.  The  Yulg.  has 
correctly  rendered  it,  Si  me  sciretis,  forsitan  Patrem  vieum 
sciretis,  and  so,  following  the  Vidg.,  Wyel.  and  Rhem. 

20  Took  him.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  laid  hands  on  him."  Gr., 
iviao-ev.  (Comp.  chap.  vii.  30,  &c.)  The  word  is  frequently  used 
by  St.  John. 

21  In  your  sin.— So  Rhem.  and  Yulg.,  ^^eccaio.  All  other  Engl, 
versions,  "  in  your  sins."  The  difference  is  not  to  be  overlooked, 
the  word  in  the  singiUar  denoting  the  sinfid  state,  in  the  plural, 
as  at  verse  24,  the  actual  sins  of  commission  or  omission. 

24  I  am  he.— Margin,  "  Or,  I  am."  The  text  follows  Tynd.  and 
Auth. :  the  marginal  rendering  is  that  of  Wycl.  and  Rhem., 
follomng  Vulg.,  ego  sum.  The  Gr.  is  ey&j  ei'yUi.  This  phrase, 
used  by  our  Lord  of  Himself,  occurs  three  times  in  this  chapter. 
In  the  last  place,  verse  58,  the  context  leaves  no  doubt  that  He 
asserts  by  it,  and  by  those  who  heard  was  understood  to  assert,  His 
Divine  and  eternal  self -existence.  (See  Note  there.)  But  in  His 
conversation  with  the  woman  of  Samaria  (chap.  iv.  26),  and  in  His 
declaration  of  Himself  to  those  who  came  to  take  Him  in  the 
garden  (chap,  xviii.  5),  where  the  same  words  are  spoken  by  Him, 
it  is  not  likely  that  He  made  an  assertion  which,  in  its  iiighest 
sense,  woxild  not  be  understood  by  His  hearers,  and  which  was 
capable  of  a  lower  and  more  natiu'al  interpretation.  And  in  this 
place,  and  verse  28,  though  a  lower  interpretation  does  not  so 
readily  jiresent  itself,  the  rendering  of  the  Auth.  has  been  retained 
with  the  marginal  Note,  which  is  not  appended  in  chap.  iv.  26, 
xviii.  5.  Here  it  will  bear  this  meaning,  "  I  am  he  of  whom  I 
have  told  you,  the  light  of  the  world"  (Averse  12),  "the  witness 
concerning  myself  "  (verse  18).  He  all  but  implies,  perhaps  He 
does  imply,  what  He  declares  beyond  question  in  verse  58 ;  but 
the  Jews,  as  appears  from  the  next  verse,  did  not  understand 
Him,  and  asked.  "  Who  art  thou  ?  "  desiring  Him  to  supply  the 
predicate  which  He  had  left  to  their  own  sense  and  conscience  to 
s\iggest.  At  last,  when  He  repeated  these  words  in  verse  58, 
they  asked  no  more  questions,  but  shewed  by  taking  up  stones  to 
stone  Him  for  blasjAemy,  that  they  perceived  His  meaning. 

25  Even  that  which  I  have  also  spoken  unto  you  from 
the  heginning.— The  Gr.  is  of  doubtful  import,  both  the  gram- 
matical construction  and  the  interpretation  being  uncertain.  The 
rendering  which  has  been  preferred  is  substantially  the  same  as 
that  of  Auth.,  "  Even  tlie  smne  that  I  said  unto  vou,"  &c.     The 


158  ST.    JOHN— VITI. 

marginal  Note  shews  what  has  been  the  divergence  of  exposition 
on  this  passage.  The  version  that  is  given  is  that  of  St. 
Chrysostom.  Tor  that  which  stands  in  the  text  Dr.  Field  notes 
a  singular  coincidence  in  Plautus,  Oaptiv.  iii.  4.  91,  Quis  igitur 
ille  est?     Quevi  dudam  dixi  aprincipio  tibi. 

31  Believed  him. — So  Rhem.  only.  Auth.,  "believed  on  him." 
So,  or  "  believed  in  him,"  all  other  Engl,  versions.  The  Gr.  is 
Tovs  7r67ri(rT€ii/c(^Tas  avTw,  in  verse  30  i-n-ifTTevcrav  eis  avrSv ;  and  the 
difference  in  meaning  the  same  as  between  "  believed  him," 
gave  credence  to  his  words,  and  "  believed  in  him,"  put  their 
trust  in  him.  The  i)hrase  "  to  believe  in "  is  almost  peculiar  to 
St.  John,  being  very  frequent  in  his  Gospel,  and  only  found  in 
the  other  Gospels  twice,  Matt,  xviii.  6  and  Mark  ix.  42. 

37  Hath  not  free  course  in  you. — Doth  not  make  progi-ess, 
"  ne  marche  pas."  Vulg.,  non  capit.  Compare  2  Thess.  iii.  1. 
Auth.,  "hath  no  place  in  you,"  following  Tynd.  and  Beza. 
Xojpeij/,  as  a  neuter  verb,  expressing  motion  forwards,  is  not  found 
again  in  the  New  Testament,  but  occiirs  in  the  LXX.,  and  in 
classical  Gr.  An  example  of  it  in  the  sense  of  Auth.,  "hath  no 
place,"  is  adduced  by  Dr.  Field  from  Alcijjhron's  Epistles,  iii.  7. 

38  Ye  also  do  the  things  which  ye  heard  from  your 
Father. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  and  ye  do  that 
which  ye  have  seen  A\atli  your  Father."  The  omission  of  "  your  " 
from  the  Gr.  text  makes  it  possible  to  take  this  sentence  impera- 
tively, as  in  the  Margin,  in  which  case  it  is  a  command  to  them 
to  do  what  they  have  heard  from  the  Father,  as  "  He  does  what 
he  has  seen  with  the  Father,"  bringing  out  a  contrast  between 
"  heard  "  and  "  seen."  This,  however,  does  not  seem  probable,  or 
in  harmony  with  the  context. 

42  I  came  forth. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.  and  Yulg.,  "  I  proceeded 
forth,"  which  is  the  usual  rendering  of  another  word. 
And  am  come.— Auth.,  "  and  came,"  Gr.  ^ku.     The  sense  is, 
"  From  God  came  I  forth,  from  God  I  now  am  here." 

44  He  is  a  liar,  and  the  father  thereof.— Auth.,  "  of  it." 
The  Gr.  aurod,  "thereof,"  may  mean  (1)  "of  lyiug,"_  the  devil 
is  the  father  of  lies,  which  is  the  common  acceptation  of  the 
words;  or  (2)  "  of  the  liar,"  generally;  the  liar  is  a  child  of  the 
devil.  The  former  alternative  is  the  better,  but  there  is  not 
much  difference  between  the  two. 

46  Convicteth.— Auth.,  "  comduceth."  Compare  chap.  xvi.  8. 
The  meaning  of  the  Gr.  is  not  "  convinceth  me  of  tlie  existence 
and  evil  of  sin,"  but  "  con^-icteth  me  of  being  myseli  a  siuuer." 


ST.   JOHN— IX.  159 

56  Abraham  rejoiced  to  see  my  day.— As  we  read  in  Gen. 
xvii.  17,  "  he  rejoiced  witli  laughter."  The  Gr.  particle,  'iva. 
(already  acquiring  the  use  which  is  borne  by  its  fragment  va.  iu 
modern  Gr.)  is  found  in  the  New  Testament,  and  especially  in 
the  Gospel  and  Epistles  of  St.  John,  connecting  verbs  of  desire 
or  joy  with  their  object ;  as  at  chaps,  xi.  15,  iv.  47  (so  Woi-ds- 
worth  and  Alford).  There  is  much  to  be  said  for  the  rendering 
in  the  Margin,  "  rejoiced  that  he  should  see,"  his  joy  being  iu 
prospect  of  the  future,  as  he  remembered  the  promise  connected 
with  the  birth  of  the  son  who  when  boi-n  was  named  Isaac, 
"  laughter." 

58  Before  Abraham  was.— Margin,  "  Gr.  was  horn."  The  con- 
trast is  between  Abraham  the  creatui'e,  who  was  born,  came  into 
being,  and  Christ,  who  says  of  Himself,  "  I  am,"  taking  to  Him- 
self the  name  of  the  Lord,  as  it  is  given  in  Exod.  iii.  14.  No 
lower  interpretation  is  here  possible  of  these  words,  as  at  verse 
24,  where  see  Note. 

59  The  latter  part  of  this  verse  (Auth.)  is  omitted  by  change  in 
Gr.  text.  A  similar  withdrawal  of  our  Lord  from  the  midst  of 
His  enemies  is  related  in  Luke  iv.  30. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

4  We  must  work. — For  Auth.,  "  I  must  work,"  by  change  in 
Gr.  text. 

5  When  I  am. — The  Gr.  conjunction,  Stw,  is  indefinite.  All 
Engl,  versions  (following  Yulg.,  Quamdiu)  have  "  as  long  as." 
This  would  set  a  limit  to  our  Lord's  continuance  in  the  world, 
which  is  not  implied  in  the  original. 

8  A  beggar.— So  Vulg.,  and  all  Engl,  versions,  except  Genev. 
and  Auth.,  which  have  "  blind,"  following  another  reading  of 
the  Gr.  text. 

II  The  man. — The  weU-known  bearer  of  the  name.     So  aU  Engl, 
versions  (following  Yulg.,  ille  homo),  except  Auth.,  '•■  a  man." 

14  It  was  the  Sabbath   on  the  day.— Auth.,   "it  was  the 
Sabbath."     Compare  chap.  v.  10,  where  the  Gr.  is  the  same. 


160  ST.    JOHN— X. 

17  In  that  ne  opened. — Autb.,  "  that  lie  hath  opened."  The 
meaning  of  the  Gr.  is,  "  "What  hast  thou  to  say  of  him  on  account 
of  {oTt)  his  opening  thine  eyes  ? "  which  is  not  quite  clearly 
expressed  in  Auth. 

24  Give  glory  to  God. — So  WycL,  Genev.,  and  Rhem.  Auth., 
with  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  "Give  God  the  praise."  The.Gr.  is 
So^av,  not  iitaivov.  A  frequent  phrase  in  the  Old  Testament; 
sometimes  a  form  of  adjuration,  as  Josh.  vii.  19,  "  My  son,  give 
glory  to  the  Lord  God  of  Israel,  and  make  confession  unto  him ;  " 
1  Sam.  vi.  5  ;  Jerem.  xiii.  16,  &c.  So  the  meaning  now  may  be, 
"  Ye  are  before  God ;  give  gloiy  to  Him,  by  sj^eaking  the  truth 
to  His  honour." 

30  The  marvel. — For  Auth.,  "  a  marvellous  thing,"  by  insertion 
of  the  article  in  the  Gr.  text. 


CHAPTER  X. 


1  The  fold  of  the  sheep. — So  Wyel.  and  Rhem. ;  Vulg.,  ovile 
ovium.  The  Gr.,  alxi  ("fold"),  is  repeated  in  verse  16,  and,  as 
representing  a  distinct  idea  in  the  passage,  is  to  be  rendered  as  a 
separate  word.  Auth.,  "  sheepfold."  Compare  "  the  door  of  the 
sheep,"  verse  7.     (Westcott.) 

4  All  his   own. — For  Auth.,    "his   own   sheeji,"  by  change  in 

Gr.  text. 
6  This  parable. — Margin,  "  Or,  proverb."    The  Gr.,  Trapoi/j.la,  has 

both  meanings ;  a  proverb  being  often  expressed  in  the  form  of 

a  hrk't  parable,  as  ''  The  sow  is  returned  to  her  wallowing  in  the 

mire." 

11  Layeth  down  his  life. — All  Engl,  versions,  "  giveth,"  fol- 
lowing Vulg.,  dat,  but  in  verses  15,  17,  "layeth  do^vn,"  where 
Yulg.  has  }>07io,  the  Gr.  being  the  same,  TlOrja-i. 

12  Snatcheth. — Auth.,  "catcheth."  Yulg.,  rapit.  "Snatcheth" 
suits  the  same  Gr.,  apird^ei,  in  verse  28,  where  Auth.  has  "  pluck 
them  out  of  my  hand,"  and  so  Matt.  xiii.  19. 

13  He  fleeth.—Th\s  insertion,  in  italics,  is  rendered  necessary  by  the 
omission  from  the  Gr.  text  of  "  The  hiiroling  fleeth  "  (Auth.). 


ST.  JOHN— X.  161 

14  I  know  mine  own,  and  mine  own  know  me. — By  change 
in  Gr.  text  for  Autli.,  "  I  know  my  sliocp,  and  am  known  of 
mine." 

15  Even  as  the  Father  knoweth  me,  and  I  know  the 
Father.— All  Engl,  versions,  following  Vnlg.,  "  As  the  Father 
knoweth  me,  even  so  know  I  the  Father."'  The  slight  changes 
here  made  (1)  in  the  punctuation  at  the  end  of  verse  14,  and  (2) 
in  the  rendering  of  Kwyu,  "  and  I "  for  "  even  as  I,"  give  au 
entirely  different  turn  to  the  two  verses,  which  being  read  in 
continuity  are  a  declaration  on  the  part  of  our  Lord  that  as  the 
Father  knoweth  Him,  and  He  knoweth  the  Father,  even  so  He 
knows  His  own,  and  His  own  knoAV  Him.  An  intimate,  personal, 
loving  knowledge  is  thus  implied,  as  when  it  is  said,  "the  Lord 
knoweth  the  way  of  the  righteous,"  Ps.  i.  6 ;  and  "  the  Lord 
knoweth  them  that  are  his,"  2  Tim.  ii.  19. 

For  other  instances  in  which  the  relations  between  Christ  and 
His  people  are  compared  to  those  subsisting  between  the  Father 
and  Christ,  see  chap.  xiv.  20 ;  chap.  xv.  10 ;  chap.  xvii.  8,  21 ; 
Matt.  xi.  27 ;  Luke  xxii.  29 ;  1  Cor.  xi.  3 ;  chap.  xv.  28 ;  Rev. 
iii.  21.     (Bengel.) 

16  Them  also  I  must  bring.— Margin,  "  Or,  lead."  The  Gr. 
is  the  aorist  of  the  verb  "  to  lead,"  and  that  sense  is  appropriate 
here,  as  the  sheep  are  represented  following  the  shepherd  who 
leadeth  them  out  (elayei)  (verses  3,  4).  But  here  the  prominent 
thought  is  not  that  they  are  led  in  the  way,  but  that  they  are  con- 
ducted  home  to  the  one  fold,  and  the  aorist  dyay^'iv  is  almost 
always  in  the  New  Testament  rendered  "  to  bring,"  not  "  to  lead," 
apparently  as  describing  the  action,  not  in  its  continuance,  but  in 
its  completion. 

One  flock,  one  shepherd.  — So  Tynd.  only.  The  Gr.  is 
iroifiv-n,  "  flock,"  in  all  the  Gr.  MSS.,  not,  as  it  is  in  the  former 
part  of  the  verse,  av\-l],  "  fold,"  The  other  English  versions  have 
"  fold,"  following  Yulg.,  ovile.  One  "flock;  "all  the  separate 
flocks,  in  their  separate  folds,  are  to  be  united  together  in  one 
flock,  under  the  one  Chief  Shepherd ;  not  in  one  "  fold,"  which 
has  been  polemically  interpreted  as  the  exclusive  enclosure  of  an 
outward  chui-ch. 

The  reading  grex  is  foimd  in  the  old  Latin  or  •'  Italic  "  version  ; 
but  ovile  prevailed  in  the  Vulg.,  and  was  uni^xn-sally  acce^jted  in 
the  Western  Church,  also  by  Erasmus  and  by  Beza  before  his 
edition  of  1582.     (Westcott.) 


162  ST.  JOHN— XI. 

18  Power.— Mai-glu,  " Or, right"  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  at  chap. 
i.  14,  where  see  Note. 

24  How  long  dost  thou  hold  us  in  suspense  ? — Auth., 
"dost  thou  make  us  to  doubt  .'^"  Gr.,  Tr]v  x^vxyv  v/xan/  alpeis.  It 
was  not  that  they  doubted  His  truthfulness,  but  they  were  uncer- 
tain as  to  His  meaning.  Tlie  phrase  resembles  that  in  Luke  xii. 
29,  "  neither  be  ye  of  doubtful  mind,"  where  the  literal  meaning 
is,  "  be  not  suspended  in  the  air." 

28  No  one  shall  snatch. — It  is  well  in  this  and  some  other 
passages  not  to  limit  the  statement  by  the  insertion  of  "'man," 
(as  in  Auth.).  Possibly  some  adversaries,  other  than  human, 
may  be  contemplated  in  the  words.  As  to  "  snatch,"  see  Note 
on  verse  12. 

36  Sanctified.— Margin,  "  Or,  consecrated."  See  Note  on  chap, 
xvii.  17. 

39  He  went  forth. — So  Rhem.  Wycl.,  "he  went  out.''  Aiith., 
with  Tynd.,  "  he  escaped."  The  Gr.  implies  that  wlieu,  humanly 
speakhig,  they  had  Him  in  their  power,  He  came  out  from  among 
them  quietly,  without  struggle,  and  without  flight. 

41  Came  unto  him. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  "  resorted." 
The  Gr.,  ^A0ov,  like  its  compoimd  in  verse  39,  has  a  simpler 
meaning  than  is  given  to  it  in  Auth. 


CHAPTER   XI. 

1  Village. — The  usual  rendering  of  the  Gr,  Kci/ir?.    Auth.,  "town." 
Yixlg.,  castellum. 

8  But  now. — Auth.,  "  of  late."     The  Gr.  is  vvv,  which  in  con- 
junction with  the  verb  in  the  impei-fect  tense  is  "  just  now." 

11  Is  fallen  asleep,  expresses  the  i)r8eter-i:)erfect  tense  of  tlie 
verb.    All  English  versions,  "  sleepeth,"  following  Yulg.,  dormit. 

12  He  will  recover. — Auth.,  "  he  shall  do  well,"  following  Tynd., 
"he  shall  do  well  enough."  The  Gr.  is  literally  "he  will  be 
saved,"  whence  Yulg.,  salvns  erit.  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  "  he  shall 
bo  safe." 


ST.    JOHN— XI.  163 

25  Though  he  die.  —  All  Englisli  versions,  "tlioiigli  he  were 
dead,"  overlooking,  as  in  many  cases  of  more  importance,  the 
force  of  the  aorist  of  Ovtxtku. 

27  I  have  believed.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  with  Vulg.,  credicli. 
Axith.,  following  Tynd.,  "I  believe."  The  Gr.  is  in  the  prgeter- 
perfect  tense. 

28  Is  here. — All  English  versions,  "  is  come,"  or  "  cometh."  The 
Gr.  is  irdpeffTt,  '•■  is  present."     Vulg.,  aclest. 

31  Quickly. — So  Auth.,  at  verse  29  ;  here,  "  hastily." 

Supposing. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  saying  "  ( Anth.). 

33  Jesus  wept.— The  Gr.  is  not  that  which  in  the  preceding  verses 
has  the  marginal  explanation,  "Gr.  ivailing,"  but  is  literally 
"  shed  tears,"  i^dnpyaiv. 

Groaned  in  the  spirit.— So  Englisli  versions,  except  Wycl., 
"made noise  inspirit,"  following  Yulg.,  infremuit  sj^iritu.  The 
Gr.  implies  indignation  in  the  other  places  where  it  occurs 
(Matt.  ix.  30 ;  Mark  i.  43 ;  xiv.  5),  and  probably  here,  though 
the  cause  is  not  stated. 

Was  troubled, — Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  "troubled  himself,"  fol- 
lowing Yulg.,  turhavit  seipsuvi.  The  verb  is  here  in  the  active 
voice ;  in  chap.  xiii.  21  it  is  the  passive,  "  was  troubled,"  and  so 
Auth.  in  both  phi.ces.  He  wept  for  tlie  death  of  His  friend  ;  He 
was  troubled.  Ho  groaned  in  spirit,  for  the  unbelief  of  those  who 
stood,  around. 

37  Of  him  that  v/as  blind.— Referring  to  the  miracle  narrated 
in  chap.  ix.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  the  blind."  Wycl.,  "  of  the 
born  blind,"  following  Yidg.,  cceci  nati. 

40  If  thou  believedst.— Axith.  (alone), "if  thou  woiddest  believe," 
implj-ing  a  want  of  the  will  to  believe,  which  is  not  indicated  by 
the  Gr. 

44  Grave-hands  (Margin). — Probably  like  the  swaddling-clotlics 
used  for  infants.     (Wordsworth.) 

50  Take  account. — For  Auth.  "  consider,"  by  change  iu  Gr.  text, 

\oyi(ea6€  for  5ia\oyi^ecrde, 


164  ST.    JOHN— XII. 


CHAPTER   XII. 


6  Took  away. — The  Gr.  /Scjo-roCfif  has  this  sense  (chap.  xx.  15). 
AU  English  versions, ''  bare,"  which  is  the  usual  rendering.  The 
previous  statement  that "  he  was  a  thief  "  seems  to  require  a  word 
suggestive  of  pui-loiniug. 

V  Suffer  her  to  keep  it.  — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth., 
"  let  her  alone  :  against  the  day  of  my  burying  hath  slie  kept 
tliis."  This  reading  is  supported  by  strong  MSS.  authority,  by 
the  Vulg.,  &c.  There  is  a  great  difficulty,  common  to  this  reading 
and  the  Auth.,  in  explaining  how,  being  poured  out  at  the  supper, 
the  oiutment  could  have  been  kept  against  the  day  of  the  Lord's 
burial.  An  ingenious,  and  not  altogether  fanciful,  conjectui'e  has 
been  made,  that  part  of  the  ointment  ha\'ing  been  consumed  by 
Mary  in  preparing  the  body  of  her  brother  Lazarus  for  inter- 
ment, she  had  reserved  the  rest  of  it  for  the  preparation  of 
Christ's  body,  and  now  used  it  in  conscious  or  unconscious  antici- 
pation of  that  event.  This  would  accoiint  for  her  ha^aug  "  kept " 
it,  and  for  Judas  saying  it  might  better  have  been  sold,  and 
given  to  the  poor.     (Field,  Otium  Norv.,  p.  69.) 

9  The  common  people.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "much  people," 
and  Yulg.,  midta  turha.  The  Gr.  has  the  very  unusual  order  of 
article,  noun,  and  adjective,  6  oxAos  iroXvs.  See  also  marginal 
Note  on  verse  12,  where  the  same  is  noticed  as  a  various  reading. 

13  The  branches  of  the  palm  trees  —  i.e.,  of  the  palm.-troes 
which  grew  in  the  city,  or  on  the  way  to  the  hill  outside.  Palm- 
branches  were  used  by  the  Jews  as  tokens  of  victory,  as  we  sec 
in  1  Mace.  xiii.  51,  and  in  the  Apocaly^jse.  The  "  palmy  days  " 
of  Judaea  have  long  since  departed,  and  witli  them  the  sym- 
bolical tree,  formerly  so  abundant,  has  departed  also. 

19  Behold. — Auth.,  "  ye  perceive."  The  Gr.  may  be  either  impe- 
rative or  affirmative.  The  rendering  of  deupew  [theoreo)  is  usually 
"  to  behold ;  "  it  denotes  sight  and  reflection  combined. 

24  A  grain.— So  Rhem.  Auth.,  with  Wycl.  and  Tynd.,  "  a  corn," 
which  as  applied  to  a  single  grain  is  now  obsolete. 

32  Margin,  "  Gr.  out  of.''  {4k.)  This  rendering,  if  adopted,  woidd 
refer  to  the  "lifting  up,"  the  resurrection  from  the  bowels  of  the 
earth ;  and  it  might  be  adopted  but  for  the  next  verse,  in  which 
tlie  Evangelist  makes  his  comment  on  these  words,  and  explains 
them  of  the  lifting  up  of  Christ  ou  the  cross.  They  are  also  by 
both  ancient  and  modern  expositors  treated  as  having  a  further 


ST.  JOHN— XIII.  165 

fulfilment  in  the  Ascension,  by  which,  or  in  consequence  of  which, 
He  draws  us  up  in  heart  and  mind  to  dwell  with  Him. 

35  Overtake. — Auth.,  "come  upon  you."    The  Gr.  is  properly 
"  catch."     See  Note  ou  chap.  i.  5. 

43  Glory.— Auth.,  "praise."    See  Note  on  chap.  v.  44. 

45  Beholdeth. — Auth.,  "  seeth,"  as  in  verse  19.      In  chap.  xiv.  9, 
"  He  that  hath  seen  me,"  &c.,  the  Grr.  is  different. 

i7  And  keep  tliem  not.— By  change  in   Gr.   text  for  Auth., 
"  and  believe  them  not." 


CHAPTER  XIII. 


1  Unto  the  end.— Margin,  "  Or,  to  the  uttermost,"  which  is  a 
truth  in  itself,  and  a  possible,  but  not  very  probable,  interpi-eta- 
tion  of  the  Gr.  in  this  place.  In  Matt.  x.  22,  xxiv.  13,  it  is  "  to 
the  end." 

2  During  supper.— By  change  of  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  supper 
being  ended,"  ytvo/nevov  for  yevo/xemv,  the  present  for  the  past. 

3  He  came  forth  from  God.— Auth.,  "  was  come  from  God." 
The  Gr.  is  e|^A0e,  not  dTTTjAOe. 

Goeth. — Auth.,  "went."     The  Gr.  is  in  the  present  tense. 

10  He  that  is  bathed. — AU  Engl,  versions,  "washed."  Two 
different  words  are  used  in  this  verse,  one  meaning  to  "  bathe," 
tlie  other  to  "  wash  " — XoveaOai,  v'nrrfadai ;  and  by  tliis  symbolical 
saying  our  Lord  appears  to  teach  us  that  he  wlio  has  "  believed 
and  been  baptized,"  needs  not  save  to  wash  off  by  repentance 
tlie  stains  of  his  actual  sins,  contracted  as  he  goes  through  life. 
Bathing  is  of  the  whole  body ;  baptism  is  applied  to  the  whole 
man;  washing  is  of  a  part,  e.g.,  of  the  feet;  daily  repentance  is 
for  the  partial  defilemeut  incurred  in  our  daily  walk. 

17  Blessed. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Yulg.,  heati.  Auth.  with 
Tynd.,  "  happy."  The  Gr.,  /xaKaptoi,  denotes  something  more 
than  "  happiness  "  in  its  usual  sense— the  happiness  that  God 
gives. 


166  ST.   JOHN— XIII. 

19  Prom  henceforth.  —  So  Rhem.  and  Yulg.,  amodo.  Gr., 
ott'  dpri.  Autli.,  follo^ying  Tynd.,  "  now."  Hitherto  He  has 
spoken  but  little  and  obscurely  of  that  which  is  coming  upon 
Him.  From  this  time  He  foretells  it  more  j)lainly,  so  that  at  last 
they  say,  "  Now  speakest  thon  no  proverbs  "  (chap.  xvi.  29).  So 
with  His  Divine  foreknowledge  He  prepares  them  for  their  great 
trial,  while  in  His  human  nature  He  yearns  towards  them,  as  the 
friends  from  wliom  He  looked  for  sympatliy. 

23  There  was  at  the  table  reclining.— The  Gr.,  dvaKeinevos, 
is  the  same  that  in  other  places .  is  sufficiently  represented  by 
"  sitting  at  meat."  Here,  on  account  of  the  words  which  follow, 
it  is  rendered  according  to  its  strict  meaning,  which  denotes  the 
position  iisuallj^  adopted  at  meals.  Autli.,  with  Tynd.,  "Now 
there  was  leaning  on  Jesus'  bosom."  Vulg.,  recumbens  in  sinu 
Jes^i.  The  recumbent  position  had  been  tlie  i^ractice  of  the  Jews 
for  some  time,  in  imitation  of  the  Roman,  or  perhaps  of  the 
Persian  custom. 

24  And  saith  unto  him,  tell  ns  who  it  is.— So  (nearly)  Yulg., 
•Wycl.,  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  following  a  variation  in  the  Gr.  text, 
"beckoneth  to  him,  that  he  should  ask  who  it  should  be,"  a 
change  apparently  made  to  suit  tlie  context.  According  to  the 
reading  now  restored  in  the  text,  St.  Peter  supposes  our  Lord  to 
have  already  told  St.  John  privately  who  it  should  be. 

25  He  leaning  hack. — Auth.,  "  He  then  lying  on  Jesus'  breast." 
The  Gr.  is  waTnawv,  properly,  "  He  fell  back,  and  saith." 

As  he  was. — Added  in  Gr.  text.  Literally,  "  thus,"  an  exple- 
tive, denoting  an  involuntary  movement,  from  which  a  person 
miglit  restrain  himself  if  he  thought  upon  it.     (See  chap.  iv.  6.) 

26  For  whom  I  shall  dip  the  sop,   and    give   it   him.— 

By  cliauge  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "to  whom  I  shall  give  a  sop 
when  I  have  dipped  it."  "  The  sop,"  according  to  the  Eastern 
custom  of  honom-ing  a  guest  by  presenting  him  with  a  morsel  of 
the  food.  (Westcott.)  Comp.  Ruth  ii.  14,  "  Come  thou  hither, 
cat  thy  bread,  and  dip  thy  morsel  in  the  ^iuegar." 

Taketh— is  added,  and  "  Iscariot "  is  connected  with  Simon 
instead  of  Judas  (as  in  Auth.),  by  changes  in  Gr.  text. 

30  Went  out  straightway.— The  order  as  it  is  changed  in  the 
Gr.  text  is  here  obseiwed — denoting  an  abrupt  departure.  In 
verse  32,  "  straightway  "  (in  the  Gr.  as  in  Auth.)  precedes  the 
verb. 


ST.   JOHN— XIY.  1G7 

32  "  If  God  be  o-lorified  iu  Lim."' — (Auth.)  Omitted  by  change  in 
Gr.  text. 

34  Sven  as  I  .  .  .  — i.e.,  "  This  is  the  purport  of  my  new  com- 
mandment wlien  fully  stated,  that  ye  love  one  another,  even  as  I 
have  loved  you,"  the  stress  being  on  "even  as  "  {KaQdis,  not  ws), 
i.e.,  with  a  perfect  love.     (Comp.  Eph.  iv.  32.) 

37  I  will  lay  down  my  life  for  thee.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem., 
following  Vulg.,  animam  meam  pro  te  i^onam.  Auth.,  with 
Tynd.,  "  for  thy  sake."  The  Gr.,  inrip,  is  "  in  thy  behalf,"  or  "iu 
thy  stead,"  not  "  for  thy  sake."  Comp.  chap.  x.  15,  "  I  lay  down 
my  life  for  the  sheep  "  (Auth.). 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


1  Te  believe.— So  Auth,,  with  Yulg.,  Wycl,  Genev.,  and  Rhem. 
Tynd.,  as  in  Margin,  "  believe  "  (imperative).  The  Gr.  may  be 
either.  The  varied  order  of  the  words  in  the  two  clauses  of  the 
Gr.,  the  verb  being  the  first  word  in  the  fii'st  clause  and  the  last 
in  the  second,  may  seem  in  favour  of  the  variation  iu  mood  as 
given  in  the  text. 

2  Many  mansions. — So  all  Engl,  versions  (except  Genev.),  fol- 
lowing  Yidg.,  mansiones,  i.e.,  tarrying-places,  or  "  stations,"  on 
the  way,  not  j)ermanent  abodes.  The  Gr.,  /uoj/tj,  is  used  only 
once  again  in  the  New  Testament,  in  verse  23  of  this  chap.,  and 
there  is  rendered  "  abode."  Neither  meaning  is  well  expressed  by 
the  word  • '  mansion,"  which  is  used  now  in  quite  another  sense,  and 
the  Margin,  " abiding-places," derived  from  Genev.,  "dwelling- 
places,"  and  Beza,  "habitations,"  would  have  superior  claim  to 
stand  in  the  text,  if  it  were  a  simpler  and  shorter  word. 

3  I  come  again.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  I  will  come  again."  By 
the  present  tense  of  the  verb  is  indicated  not  a  remote  but  an 
immediate  return. 

4  Ye  know  the  way. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  ye 
know,  and  the  way  ye  know." 

10  Doeth  his  works. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  himself  docth 
the  works."    The  sense  is, "  What  I  say  to  you,  I  speak  not  on  my 


168  ST.   JOHN"— XIY. 

own  authority :  it  is  the  Father  dwelling  within  me,  who  is  thus 
doing  his  works,  accomplishing  his  will." 

14  If  ye  shall  ask  me  anything.— "  Me "  is  added  in  Gr. 
text.  It  is  also  inYiilg.  and  Rhem.  (not  in  Wycl.).  and  it  is 
omitted  in  Autli.  Tlie  alteration  is  important,  showing  tliat 
prayer  is  to  be  made  to  our  Loi'd  Himself,  as  well  as  to  the  Father 
in  His  name.  On  the  other  hand,  the  emphatic  "  I "  {eyu),  "  it  is 
I  that  will  do  it,"  has  now  been  omitted  from  the  Gr.  text. 

IG  I  will  pray  the  Father.— Margin,  "  Gr.  make  request  of." 
The  same  word  occurs  in  Luke  v.  3,  where  comp.  Note.  It  is  used 
of  prayer  to  God  by  our  Lord  only,  in  speaking  of  His  own  requests 
to  the  Father  in  this  Gospel,  and  once  in  1  John  v.  16,  of  interces- 
sory prayer  to  God,  offered  by  one  man  for  another.  But  iu 
general  it  denotes  a  request  made  by  man  to  his  brother  man. 

Another  comforter.— Margin,  "Or,  advocate."  The  Gr., 
■7rapdK\T]Tos,  "paraclete,"  has  two  distinct,  yet  allied  meanings : 
1.  (iu  a  passive  sense)  one  who  is  called  to  the  aid  of  anotlier,  as 
an  advocate  {advocatus),  to  plead  for  him  before  a  judge ;  2. 
(active)  one  who  encourages,  counsels,  aud  so  "comforts" 
another.  The  two  meanings  ax-e  closely  connected.  The  "  advo- 
cate "  who  is  called  iu  is  naturally  regarded  as  the  bearer  of 
comfort  and  strengtli.  We  have  no  single  word  that  adequately 
represents  the  combination,  except  it  be  the  word  "  counsel,"  as 
iised  in  the  legal  profession.  We  are  therefore  obliged  to  render 
tlie  Gr.  l)y  different  words  according  to  the  requirements  of  the 
context,  unless  we  were  to  follow  the  example  of  tlie  Yulg.,  and 
introduce  the  Gi*.,  "  paraclete,"  which  at  present  Avould  not  be 
acceptable,  nor,  indeed,  distinctly  intelligible.  That  word  occurs 
in  tlie  N.  T.  only  in  tliis  and  the  two  following  chapters  of  St. 
John's  Gospel,  and  in  his  first  Epistle,  ii.  1,  where  Christ  Him- 
self is  spoken  of  as  "our  advocate  with  the  Father."  In  the 
Engl,  versions  it  is  rendered,  "comforter,"  which  according  to 
its  Latin  derivation  signifies  one  who  imparts  strength  or  courage, 
though  now  its  meaning  has  become  narrowed  to  one  particular 
kind  of  support,  the  sympathy  which  binds  up  the  broken  heart, 
or  soothes  the  wouuded  spirit. 

18  Desolate. — Auth.,  witli  Tynd.,  "comfortless,"  thus  suggesting 
a  connection  with  "  comforter  "  in  verse  16.  The  Gr.,  however, 
is  op(pavoi)s,  "  orphans,"  and  is  so  given  in  Viilg.,  nan  relinqiiam 
vos  orphanos ;  but  this  word,  being  now  limited  in  meaning  to 
tliose  who  are  bereaved  of  parents,  is  not  an  equivalent  of  its  Gr. 
original,  nor  have  w^e  any  that  comes  more  near  to  it  than  "  deso- 
late." 


ST.    JOHN— XV.  169 

22  Judas  (not  Iscariot)  saith.— This  transposition  places  tlic 
words  in  brackets  close  to  those  which  they  immediately  folhnv 
in  the  Gr.     Auth.,  "  Jndas  saith  (not  Iscariot).". 

25  Abiding. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "present."     Gr.,  fj.fvcov. 

26  The  Holy  Spirit.— Autli.,  '-the  Holy  Ghost."  The  Comforter 
is  elsewhere  in  this  discourse  spoken  of  as  the  "  Spirit  of  Trntli," 
chaps.  XV.  26,  and  xvi.  13,  and  in  those  places  "  Gliost  "  could  not 
be  substituted  for  "  Spirit "  ;  in  order,  therefore,  to  make  quite 
clear  the  identity  of  "  tlie  Comforter  "  in  all  these  places,  it  was 
necessary  to  have  "  the  Holy  Si^irit "  here.     (Comp.  Luke  iv.  1.) 

It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  Gr.  nvfvfj.a,  "  spirit,"  though  of  the 
neuter  gender,  is  referred  to  here  and  in  other  passages  ])y  a 
masculine  pi'onoun,  "  he,"  fKuvos,  a  clear  testimony  to  the  per- 
sonality of  the  Holy  Ghost. 

27  Fearful. — Auth.,  "  afraid,"  which  is  coinmonly  used  for  anotlier 
word,  and  is  expressive  of  a  momentary  feeling,  rather  than  of 
an  habitual  state  of  mind.  The  Gr.  is,  literally,  "  let  it  not  bo 
cowardly."     (Comp.  2  Tim.  i.  7.) 

30  The  prince  of  the  world.— "  The  "  for  "this"  (Aiith.),  by 
change  in  Gr.  text. 


CHAPTER  XY. 


2  He  cleanseth  it.— All  Engl,  versions,  "purgeth,"  from  the 
Vulg.,  purgabit.  "  Cleanse  "  is  a  better  equivalent  for  Kaflaipej 
than  "  purge,"  being  more  used  in  reference  to  spiritual  purifica- 
tion; also  in  the  next  verse, "  clean  "  represents  the  corresponding 
adjective  of  the  Gr. 

4  So  neither. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  no 
more,''  which  is  not  a  grammatical  parallel  to  "  as,"  nor  an  exact 
rendering  of  the  Gr. 

6  Apart  from  me — i.e.,  separate  from  me.  Gr.,  x^^P'*-  All  Engl, 
versions,  "  without  me,"  which  would  rather  mean,  "  unassisted 
by  me." 


170  ST.    JOHN— XV. 

6  They  gather  them.— Auth.,  witli  Tynd.,  inserts  men  .-  "  men 
gather  tliem : "  who  they  are  that  gather,  is  left  mysteriously 
indefinite. 

11  That  my  joy  may  be  in  you,  and  that  your  joy  may 
be  fulfilled. — "  May  he,"  by  cliange  of  Gr.  text  followed  by 
Viilg.,  Wycl.,  and  Rliem.,  for  "  might  remain "  (Anth.  and 
Tynd.) ;  "may  be  fulfilled,"  as  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  for  Autli.,  with 
Tynd.,  "might  be  full."  The  joy  of  Christ  is  "  to  be  "  in  them 
for  ever,  and  their  joy  is  to  increase  tiU  it  attains  its  final  con. 
summation.     (Comp.  chap.  x^-i.  24.) 

15  No  longer  do  I  call  you  servants.— Implying  that  they 
had  been  so  called  in  time  past,  imder  the  Mosaic  dispensation. 
The  Gr.  is  ovk4ti.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  Henceforth  I  call  you 
not  servants." 

16  Appointed  you. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  ordained,"  which 
haA'ing  acquired  a  limited  meaning,  and  being  applied  especially 
to  the  ministers  of  the  Gospel,  does  not  now  represent  the  Gr., 
which  applies  to  any  office  or  post.     Yulg.,  posui. 

17  These  things  I  command  you  that  ye  may  love  one 
another. — The  addition  of  "may,"  whicli  is  required  by  the  Gr., 
indicates  that  what  He  has  now  been  saying  does  not  constitute  a 
commandment  of  love,  but  has  been  said  with  this  purpose,  that 
they  may  be  led  by  it  to  love  one  another. 

22  No  excuse  for  their  sin. —  So  Wycl,  and  Rhem.,  after 
Vulg.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "-cloke."  The  Gr.  is  irp6^a(nv,  literally, 
"pretence." 

26  "Which  proceedeth  from  the  Father.— Margin,  "  Or.  cjoetli 
forth  from."  The  marginal  rendering  might  have  been  preferred, 
were  it  not  that  "  proceedeth  "  has  become  familiar  to  us  from  its 
use  in  this  text,  and  in  the  Nicene  Creed  and  the  history  of  the 
Church,  in  connection  with  the  "  Holy  Spiiit."     Vulg.,  procedit 


ST.   JOHN— XVr.  171 


CHAPTER  XYI. 

1  That  ye  should  not  he  made  to  stumhle.— Tins  pluaso. 
so  frequcut  in  the  first  tlu*ee  Grospels,  is  used  by  St.  Jolm  only 
here  and  in  liis  first  Epistle,  ii.  10.  Autli.,  "that  ye  should  not 
be  offended."  The  meaning  is  that  by  these  sayings  He  has  been 
preparing  them  to  withstand  the  opposition  of  Jews  and  Gentiles 
who  will  endeavour  to  make  them  stumble — to  overthrow  them. 

2  Shall  think  that  he  offereth  service  unto  God.— ^.e., 

that  he  makes  before  God  a  religious  service.  All  Engl,  versions 
"  that  he  doeth  God  service,"  i.e.,  that  he  acts  as  a  servant  of 
God  in  fulfilling  His  will.  But  the  "  service  "  which  the  Gr. 
denotes,  Xarpeia,  is  not  that  of  obedience,  but  of  worship. 

4  That  when  their  hour  is  come. — Auth.,  "  that  when  the 
time  shall  come."     "  Their,"  for  "  the,"  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

Ye  may  remember  them,  how  that  I  told  you. — "  Them," 
by  the  construction  of  the  Gr.,  is  connected  ynth.  "  remembei'," 
not  with  "  told  you,"  as  in  Auth. 

7  G-o  away  .  .  .  go. — Auth.,  "go  away  .  .  .  depart."  The 
former  of  the  two  verbs  in  Gr.  denotes  "go  awnj  from  you;"  the 
latter,  "  go  my  way."  In  the  one  there  is  the  thought  of  those 
who  are  left  Ijehind,  in  the  other  of  the  journey  that  is  to  be  ac- 
complished. 

8  Convict. — Auth.,  "reprove,"  as  Wyel.  and  Genev.  Vulg., 
arguet,  whence  Rhem.,  "  argue."  Compare  chap.  rai.  46,  and 
Note  :  "  He  shall  bring  to  men's  hearts  the  truth  concerning," 
&c.,  convicting  the  conscience  of  what  is  evil,  convincing  it  of 
what  is  good.  There  is  no  English  word,  used  like  the  Gr. 
i\€yXftv,  in  both  the  senses  "  convict "  and  "  convince,"  though 
the  substantive  "  conviction  "  admits  of  both. 

13  Into  all  the  truth.— (With  the  article.)  Not  as  Auth.,  "into 
all  truth,"  meaning  "  all  manner  of  truth  "  distributively,  but 
collectively  "  the  whole  truth,"  of  which  at  present  only  some 
detached  portions  have  been  revealed. 

Declare.— So  Wycl. ;  all  other  versions,  "  shew."  Compare 
chap.  iv.  25,  and  Note  there.  This  and  the  two  follomng  verses 
tell  us,  with  solemn  reiteration,  that  the  office  of  the  Holy  Spirit 
is  to  make  a  declaration,  or  announcement,  on  the  part  of  God 
to  man. 

14  Take. — So  Wycl. ;  all  other  versions,  "  receive."  The  Gr.  is  the 
same  in  this  and  the  following  verses. 


172  ST.    JOHN— XVI. 

16  Ye  behold  me  ...  ye  shall  see  me.— All  Engl,  versions 
have  "  see  "  in  both  places.  "  A  little  while  and  ye  no  longer 
behold  me  with  wondering  contemplation  [dewpeTTe) ;  and  again  a 
little  while,  and  ye  shall  see  me  unexpectedly  appearing  to  you." 
The  Gr.  6-n-Tofxai,  "  to  see,"  as  nsed  in  the  New  Testament,  is  to 
see  an  appearance,  as  of  the  risen  Saviour,  or  a  vision,  as  of 
angels.     (See  Note  on  Acts  i.  3.) 

23  In  that  day  ye  shall  ask  me  nothing.— So  ■Wycl.,Rhem., 

and  Auth.,  following  Ynlg.,  rogabitis.  Tliis  gives  to  the  Gr. 
ipMTav  the  sense  of  "  making  request,"  which  it  has  in  verse  26 
and  elsewhere.  The  Margin  gives  the  alternative  rendering, 
which  is  that  of  Tynd.,  "  ye  shall  ask  me  no  question ;  "  as  Beza, 
interrogahitis,  in  which  sense  the  word  is  used  in  verse  19. 
Either  interpretation  may  here  be  accepted ;  the  former  prepara- 
tory to  the  saying  wliich  follows,  "  Wliatsoever  ye  sliall  ask 
(oiT^o-Tjre)  the  Father,"  &c.;  the  latter  with  reference  to  their 
recent  inquiry,  "  Ye  sliall  not  ask  me  anymore  questions,  for  the 
Spirit  of  tnith  will  inform  yoii." 

He  will  give  it  you  in  my  name. — By  change  in  Gr. 
text,  for  Auth.,  "  Whatsoever  ye  shall  ask  in  my  name,"  &c. 

25  Tell. — Auth.,  "  shew."  The  Gr.  awayyiWa),  not  avayyeWw  as  in 
chap.  XV.  13,  denotes  the  bearing  of  a  message. 

27,  28  I  came  forth  from  the  Father.— I  came  out  from 
the  Father. — By  change  in  Gr.  text,  the  preposition  in  the 
former  case  is  irapd,  in  the  latter  ew,  making  this  distinction  in 
the  sense :  He  came  foi'tli  from  the  side  {-^apd),  from  "  the 
right  hand  of  God."  (So  again  at  chap.  xvii.  8.)  He  came 
out  (6(f)  from  the  Father,  from  His  Divine  essence.  (Westcott.) 
Compare  chap.  viii.  1'2.  In  verse  30  the  prej)osition  is  ottJ,  which 
is  simply  "  from.'' 

30  Now  know"  we. — Auth.,  following  Cranm.,  "  we  are  sui-e."  All 
other  versions  "  we  know."     Gr.,  oWapi.fv. 

33  Ye  have  tribulation.— By  change  of  Gr.  text,  for  "  ye  shall 

have  "  (Auth.). 


ST.   JOHN— XVII.  173 


CHAPTER  XYII. 


1  That  the  Son  may  glorify  thee.— All  Eugi,  veisious,  fol- 
lowing Yulg.,  have  "tliy  Sou;"  Cranm.  aud  Autli.,  "tliy  Sou 
also."  "  Thy "  is  omitted  by  chauge  iu  Gr.  text.  Thus  "  the 
Son  "  is  spokeu  of  iu  Ps.  ii.  8,  "  Kiss  the  Sou,  lest  he  be  angry," 
&e.  The  Lord,  iu  the  opening  of  the  prayer,  speaks  of  Himself 
in  the  third  person,  as  if  to  show  those  who  heard  Him  that  He 
was  not  seeking  "  His  own  glory  "  (compare  chap.  viii.  50),  but 
the  glory  of  "  the  Father." 

2  That  whatsoever  thou  hast  given  him,  to  them,  &c. — 

"  Whatsoever  "  (Gr.  -n-av  o)  is  said  of  the  whole  body  of  the  be- 
Movers,  "to  them" — i.e.,  the  iudi^-iduals  of  whom  tlie  body 
cousists.  So  Rhem.,  following  Yulg.,  «f  omne  quod  dedisti  ei, 
det  eis  vitam  ceternam.  Auth.,  with  Tyud.,  "  that  he  should 
give  eternal  life  to  as  many  as  thou  hast  given  him ; "  a  para- 
plirase  which  does  indeed  avoid  the  rugged  phrase  of  the  original, 
while  it  seems  at  first  sight  to  convey  the  full  meaning  of  it : 
but  even  the  rugged  phrase  is  dear  to  one  who  thinks  by  whom, 
and  on  what  occasion,  it  was  used ;  and  it  becomes  stiD.  more 
precious  when  he  perceives  what  the  full  meaning  really  is — 
the  Father  has  "given,"  has  made  over,  to  the  Son  the  whole 
body  of  the  believers ;  aud  to  each  of  them,  one  by  one,  the  Son 
gives  eternal  life.  As  He  says  of  Himself,  in  the  paraljle  of  the 
good  shepherd, "  He  caUeth  his  own  sheep  by  name."  (Chap.  x.  3. ) 

3  Jesus  Christ. — At  the  end  of  the  sentence,  accordiug  to  the 
Gr.  order.  So  all  Engl,  versions,  except  Cranm.  and  Auth., 
"  aud  Jesus  Christ,  whom  thou  hast  sent."  The  effect  of  the 
transposition  of  the  holy  name  to  the  end  is  to  throw  the  em- 
phasis more  strongly  on  the  fact  of  the  sending  than  on  the 
person  sent. 

It  is  especially  to  be  observed  in  this  chapter  that  the  Gr.  aorist 
is  used  in  what  is  called  a  "  prolei^tic  "  manner,  speaking  of 
future  events  as  if  they  were  already  past.  The  prseter-perfect 
also  is  used  in  this  way,  but  pointing  to  a  jiast  event  which  is 
recent,  or  still  continuing ;  and  it  is  very  difficult  to  decide  when 
the  aorist  may  be  translated  as  a  j)erfect,  with  "  have,"  and  when 
it  should  be  strictly  rendered.  It  will  probably  continue  to  be 
the  case,  as  it  has  been,  that  a  number  of  j)ersons  studying  the 
discourses  of  our  Lord  with  regard  to  this  point  will  not  be 
unanimous  iu  their  views  of  it,  and  even  the  same  person  Avill 
vary  in  his  conclusions  at  different  times.  Our  Lord  appears  to 
speak,  when  the  great  agony  of  His  human  nature  is  approaching, 


174  ST.   JOHN— XVII. 

as  if  already  His  work  ou  eartli  iu  tlie  bounds  of  time  and  space 
were  ended,  and  He  were  looking  back  npou  tlie  remote  past 
from  His  eternal  throne.  So  in  this  verse  we  have  "  whom  thou 
didst  send,"  not  as  Auth.,  "  whom  thou  hast  sent;  "  and  in  tha 
next  verse,  "  I  glorified  thee  ou  the  earth,"  for  Auth.,  "  I  have 
glorified  thee." 

10  All  things. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem. ;  Yulg.,  mea  omnia  tua 
sunt,  a  universal  statement.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "all  mine  are 
thine,"  as  if  persons  only  were  intended. 

11  Keep  them  in  thy  name  which  thou  hast  given  nie. — 

The  change  of  Gr.  text  in  this  and  the  next  verse  (^  for  ovs),  by 
which  tlie  relative  is  connected  with  "  name,"  not  with  "  them," 
is  supported  by  a  great  preponderance  of  the  best  authorities, 
and  has  been  adopted  by  all  recent  editors  of  the  Gr.  text. 
"  Thy  name,"  the  incommunicable  name,  which  is  to  lis  as  the 
symbol  of  incommunicable  wisdom  and  goodness;  that  name, 
witli  all  the  attributes  belonging  to  it,  the  Father  has  given  to 
the  Son. 

12  I  guarded  them.— All  Engl,  versions,  "  I  have  kej)t  them." 
The  Gr.  signifies  guarding  against  danger,  and  is  not  the  same 
that  is  rendered  "  I  kept,"  just  before,  meaning  "  I  watched,"  or 
kept  in  view,  and  which  is  elsewhere  used  of  "  obser'sang  "  or 
"  keeping  "  the  commandments. 

ITot  one  of  them  perished  but  the  son  of  perdition.— 

In  the  Gr.  a  solemn  iteration  is  produced  by  the  verb  and  its 

correlative  noun,  airciAero,  airaiXeias. 

15  That  thou  shouldest  keep  them  from  the  evil  one. — 

Auth.,  "  from  the  evil."  All  previous  English  versions,  "  from 
evil."  "Vulg.,  ut  serves  eos  a  vudo.  The  masculine  ren- 
dering is  strongly  suppoi'ted  by  comparison  with  1  Jolm  v.  18, 
"  He  that  was  begotten  of  God  keej)eth  him,  and  the  evil  one 
(6  TToyripos,  masculine)  toucheth  him  not ; "  wliere  the  Gr.  for 
"  keepeth  "  is  the  same  as  here,  rripe?.  The  Apostle  while  writing 
one  passage  seems  to  have  had  in  mind  the  other.  Comj)are  Note 
on  Matt.  vi.  13.  The  Gr.  is  literally  "  shouldest  keep  them  out 
of  the  evil  one,"  "  out  of  his  hands,"  out  of  his  sphere  (««). 

17  Sanctify  them. — Margin,  "Or,  cousecra/e."  Wycl,  "hallow." 
The  word  is  used  in  the  Lord's  prayer  (Matt,  and  Luke) ;  and  in 
Matt,  xxiii.  18,  19,  of  the  gold  and  the  gift  being  made  holy  by 
the  temple  and  altar  which  are  holy.  St.  John  uses  it  iu  tliis 
chapter  and  chap.  x.  30  only— it  does  not  a;)pear  elsewhere  in  the 


ST.   JOHN— XVIII.  175 

Gospels.     Its  proper  meaniug,  whether  applied,  to   persons  or 
thiugs,  is  "  to  consecrate  to  the  service  of  the  Lord." 

19  Sanctified  in  truth. — Not  as  Aiith.,  "iu  the  trutli,"  Imt 
"truly,"  "really."  Compare  chap.  iv.  23,  "iu  spirit  aud  iu 
truth." 

21  Believe. — For  Auth.,  "shall  believe,"  by  change  in  G-r.  text. 

23  Even  as.— All  Engl,  versions,  "as."     The  Gr.  is  Kadiis,  not  cbs. 

24  That  which.— For  Auth.,  "  they  whom,"  by  change  in  Gr. 
text.     Compare  verse  2. 

26  Made  known. — So  Wycl.,  following  Vulg.,  notmn  feci.  Gr. 
iyvwpicra.  Auth.,  with  Tyud.,  "  declared."  He  speaks  not  now 
of  declaring  a  message,  but  of  imparting  the  knowledge  whicli 
He  has  iu  Himself. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 


The  brook. — The  Gr.  properly  signifies  a  winter  torrent ;  aud 
so  Vulg.,  torrentevi,  and  Rhem.  Wycl.,  "  tlie  stroudo  "  (strand). 
Margin,  "  Or,  of  the  cedars."  This  alternative  rendering"  is  due 
to  the  form  of  the  word  iu  the  Gr.  (iceSpccv,  Kedron),  whicli 
properly  has  this  meaning,  but  in  this  place  is  generally  believed 
to  be  a  Gr.  coi'ruptiou  of  the  Hebrew  name  Jcidron.  Neverthe- 
less, as  there  were  cedars  on  the  Mount  of  Olives,  there  prol^ably 
were  some  in  the  ravine  below,  from  which  the  brook  aud  the 
ravine  might  have  this  name,  replacing,  by  a  slight  change,  the 
ancient  Hebrew  name. 

The  band  of  soldiers.— Margin,  "Or,  co/ior^,"  which Avas  the 
name  of  a  division  of  the  Roman  legion.  The  force  consisted,  iu 
part  of  Roman  soldiers — not,  however,  a  whole  cohort,  wliich 
would  have  been  five  or  six  hundred  men,  for  tlie  word  was 
loosely  used  sometimes  to  designate  a  smaller  number — aud  iu 
part  of  officers  seut  by  the  chief  priests  and  Pharisees,  the 
"  Sanhedrin."     (See  chap.  vii.  32.) 

I  lost  not  one. — More  emphatic  than  Auth.,  "  have  I  lost 
Gi-iio."     Compare  chnp.  XA-ii.  12,  "  not  one  of  them  perislied." 


176  ST.   JOHN— XVIII 

12  The  Margin  gives  the  military  name  of  the  commander,  who  is 
styled  '•■  chief  captain  "  in  the  text. 

Seized. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  took."  Gr.  awixa^ev,  a  word  not 
often  used  in  the  New  Testament  for  taking  a  prisoner  into 
custody,  and  implying  personal  violence  more  strongly  than  does 
the  simple  rendering  "  took." 

15  The  court  of  the  high  priest.— Anth.,  "palace."  (See  Note 
on  Matt.  xxvi.  3.) 

17  Art  thou?— Auth.,  "  Art  thou  not  ?  "  Here  and  at  verse  25 
the  Gr.  might  be  more  exactly  given  by  the  colloquial  phrase, 
"  Thou  art  not,  art  thou  .P  "     Compare  Note  on  Matt.  xxvi.  25. 

18  Coals. — So  all  English  versions.  The  word  in  the  Gr.  means 
properly  "  chai-coal :  "  "  coals  "  would  probably  be  still  under- 
stood in  that  sense  in  the  time  of  James  I. 

20  All. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "always"  (Auth.). 

Come  together. —  So  "Wycl.  Auth.,  following  Tynd.  and 
Rhem.,  "  resort,"  which  is  xised  for  another  Gr.  word  in  verse  2. 

21  Behold,  these  know.— All  English  versions,  "  behold,  they 
know."  The  Gr.  is  oItoi.  "  See,  these  here  in  the  court,  these 
know  and  can  bear  witness." 

22  With  his  hand.— Margin,  "  Or,  with  a  rod."  The  Gr.  has 
both  meanings,  and  either  will  suit  in  this  place,  as  the  officers 
carried  staves. 

24  Annas  therefoi'e  sent  him  bound. — By  change  in  Gr.  text 
for  Auth.,  "  Now  Annas  had  sent  him  boiind."  The  aorist  has  its 
usual  force,  "  sent,"  not  "  had  sent."  Annas  Avas  perplexed,  and 
''therefore"  sent  his  prisoner  to  Caiaphas,  having  first  ordered 
Him  to  be  bound  again  with  the  fetters  from  wliicli  He  had  been 
liberated  while  standing  in  court. 

26  A  kinsman  of  him.— Thus  Wycl.,  "  cousin  of  him,"  altered 
by  Tynd.  to  "  his  cousin  whose  ear,"  &c.,  whence  Auth.,  "  his 
kinsman  whose  ear,"  &c. 

28  The  palace. — Margin,  "  Gr.  Prcetoriinn:''  Auth.,  "judgment 
hall."  In  Matt,  xxvii.  27  it  is  called  "  common  hall "  (Auth.) ; 
bi;t  in  Mark  xv.  16,  Pnetormm,  properly  a  Latin  word,  is  retained 
in  Auth. 

oO  An  evil  doer.— So  TjTid.  Auth.,  following  Rhem.,  "  a  male 
factor."  This  is  in  Luke  xxiii.  32  the  rendering  of  KaKovpyos, 
which  in  the  New  Testament  is  only  used  of  persons  charged  with 


ST.   JOHI^— XIX.  177 

a  crime.    The  Gr.  in  this  place,  KUKoiroids,  is  applied  to  "  evil- 
doers "  generally,  as  in  1  Peter  ii.,  iii.,  iv. 

31  Take  him  yourselves.— Auth.,  "  Take  ye  him,"  which  docs 
not  sufficiently  express  the  emphatic  "  ye,"  the  vfiels  of  the  G-r. 

38  No  crime. — Anth.,  "  no  faidt."  The  Gr.  ahiav  is  properly 
"  cause  or  ground  for  a  charge."  Wycl.  and  Tynd.,  "  no  cause, ' 
following  Vulg.,  causam. 


CHAPTER    XIX. 


2  Arrayed  him.— The  Gr.  is  so  rendered  in  Auth.  (Matt.  vi. 
29,  and  Luke  xxiii.  11),  here  "  j)ut  on  him;"  following  Wycl., 
"did  about  him;"  Tynd.,  "'did  on  him;"  Vulg.,  circumdederunt 

Garment. — So  Tynd.  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  "  robe,"  as  in  Luke  ; 
but  there  the  Gr.  is  ia-dTJra,  here  l/^aTiov,  probably  in  this  case  one 
of  the  soldiers'  cloaks;  for  which  the  Gr.  chlumys  is  used  in 
Matt,  xxvii.  28. 

3  With  their  hands.— See  Note  on  chap,  xviii.  22. 

They  came  to  him. — Added  in  the  Gr.  text.  The  imperfect 
tense,  ijpxovro,  probably  indicates  that  they  came  to  Him  one 
after  another,  to  make  their  mocking  obeisance.  This  addition, 
preserving  a  graphic  detail  of  the  mockery,  is  found  in  nearly 
all  the  best  MSS,  and  in  most  of  the  ancient  versions,  as  in  the 
Vulg.,  whence  it  appears  in  "Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  but  not  in  Tynd. 

4,  5,  "Went  out  .  .  . — Came  out— i.e.,  out  of  doors.  Gr.  «|«. 
Auth.,  "  forth,"  in  both  verses. 

G  Take  him  yourselves.— See  Note  on  chap,  xviii.  31. 

10  Power  to  release  thee  .  .  .—See  Auth.  The  transposi- 
tion is  according  to  the  order  in  the  best  MSS.,  and  represents 
the  natural  sequence  of  thought,  appealing  first  to  the  hopes  of 
tlie  prisoner,  and  then  to  his  fears. 

11  Hath  greater  sin. — Auth.,  "  the  greater  sin."  Tlie  article  is 
not  in  the  Gr.,  and  the  phrase  resembles  that  in  chap.  xv.  22 ; 

M 


178  ST.   JOHN— XIX. 

ix.  41 ;  1  John  i,  8,  and  is  peculiar  to  St.  John,  repi-esenting  tlie 
state,  sinfulness,  not  tlie  actual  commission  of  a  sin. 

12  Upon  this. — All  English  versions  give  to  the  Gr.  iKrovrov.sL 
temporal  sense,  "  from  thenceforth,"  following  Vnlg.,  exincle.  It 
was  in  consequence  of  this  answer  that  Pilate  songlit  to  release 
Him.     So  at  chap.  vi.  6Q,  where  see  Note. 

If  thou  release  this  man.— The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  before. 
Autli.  alone  varies  in  the  renderiug,  "  If  thou  let  this  man  go." 

17  Bearing  the  cross  for  himself. —  By  change  of  Gr.  text 
for  Auth.,  "  bearing  his  cross."  So  Vulg.,  iajulans  sibi  crucem, 
and  Wycl.,"  lie  bare  to  himself  a  cross." 

20  For  the  place  .  .  .  . — The  renderiug  in  the  Margin,  how- 
ever im}»r(jl)al)le,  is  made  possible  by  the  transposition  of  the 
words  in  the  Gr.  text.  It  would  have  the  effect  of  bringing  the 
place  of  crucifixion  within  the  city,  and  tlius  would  be  at  variance 
with  Heb.  xiii.  12,  "  Jesus   ....    suffered  without  the  gate." 

In  Hebrew,  and  in  Latin,  and  in  Greek.— AU  English 
versions,  following  Yulg., '"  in  Hebrew,  and  Greek,  and  Latin." 
This  order  of  the  three  languages,  which  now  stands  in  the  Gr. 
text,  is  suj)ported  by  strong  authority,  and  is  probable  in  itself, 
the  vernacular  coming  fii-st,  then  the  official  language,  the  Latin,  ■ 
and  last,  that  in  which  the  people  and  rulers  conversed  together, 
the  Greek. 

25  The  wife  of  Clopas. — Clopas  is  generally  taken  to  be  the 
AlphEeus  of  Matt.  x.  3.  {Kuinoel,  in  Wordsworth's  Note  on  this 
verse.)  There  is  no  authority  in  the  MSS.  for  the  reading 
"  Cleophas "  (Auth.),  which  our  translators  derived  from  the 
Vulg. 

28  Are  now  finished. — Auth., "accomplished;"  Wycl.,  "ended;" 
TjTid.,  "  performed  ; "  Rhem.,  "  consummate."  The  Gr.  is  the 
same  as  in  verse  30,  where  Tynd.  has  "  finished ;  "  Wycl., 
"  ended ;  "  Rhem.,  "  consummate." 

29  Brought  it  to  his  mouth. — irpoo-^epo)  is  usually  rendered 
"bring  to  "  in  the  Gosj)els,  not  as  here  in  Auth.,  "put to." 

30  Gave  up  his  spirit. — All  English  versions,  "  gave  up  the 
ghost."  ComiJare  Matt,  xxvii.  50.  The  verb,  however,  in  this 
place,  napeSuKe,  points  more  distinctly  to  a  voluntary  surrrender 
of  life  than  does  the  &(pvKe  of  St.  Matthew,  "  he  yielded  up." 

31  Asked  of  Pilate. —  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  besought,"  and  so 
again  in  verse  38.     These  applications  to  the  Roman  governor 


ST.   JOHN— XX.  179 

are  not  represented  as  having  been  made  beseechingly,  but  as 
requests,  the  Gr.  verb  being  in  each  case  ^purdw. 

40  Bound  it. — SoWycl.  and  Rhem.  after  Yulg.,  Z/j/arer^mf.  Auth., 
following  Tynd.,  "  wound  it."  Gr.  eSriaav.  In  the  case  of 
Lazarus,  Auth.  renders  the  same  word  "  bound,"  and  so  in  all 
other  places  of  the  New  Testament. 

Linen  cloths. — Not  "  clothes  "  (Auth.).  These  were  swathes 
or  bandages  -.  see  Note  on  chap.  xi.  44.  Over  these  probably 
was  drawn  the  linen  cloth,  (xivScov,  mentioned  in  Matt,  xxvii.  59. 

Custom.— So  Wycl.     Auth.,  with  Tynd.  and  Rhem.,  "  manner." 

42  There  is  scarcely  any  alteration  in  this  verse,  except  in  the  order 
of  the  scATral  clauses,  which  is  that  of  the  Gr.,  lea-\"iug  the  mind 
to  dwell  on  the  main  fact  of  the  sentence,  and  producing  in  the 
rhythm  a  cadence  suited  to  the  sacred  calm  in  which  the  Evange- 
list brings  the  long  sad  agony  to  its  close. 


CHAPTER  XX. 


3  They  went  toward  the  tomb.  —  All  English  versions, 
"  they  came  to  the  tomb."  The  Gr.  is  here  in  the  imperfect 
tense,  ^pxovro  ;  but  in  the  former  part  of  the  verse  in  the  aorist, 
"  went  forth." 

5  Stooping  down  and  looking  in.— The  latter  words  are 
riglitly  added  in  Auth. ;  and  there  was  no  need  to  print  them  in 
italics  (as  in  modern  editions  of  the  Auth.),  since  they  ai'e  con- 
tained in  the  single  Gr.  word,  -rtapaKv^as,  which  means  "'stooping 
to  look."     Compare  Luke  xxiv.  12  ;    1  Pet.  1.  12. 

6  He  beholdeth.— Gr.,  eeojper.  Auth.,  "seeth."  His  action  is 
set  before  us  in  time  j)resent,  as  he  stands  within,  and  surveys 
and  ponders  over  the  things  that  meet  his  view. 

7  That  was  upon  his  head.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Auth., 
with  Tynd.,  "  about."     Gr.,  eVi. 

16  In  Hebrew.— Tliis  is  added  by  change  in  Gr.  text,  being  in- 
tended, together  with  the  intei-pretation  wliich  follows,  for  the 
GentUe  readers  of  the  Gospel. 


180  ST.   JOHN— XXI. 

19  When,   therefore,  it  was  evening  on  that  day  .  .  .— 

The  order  of  the  Gr.  is  here  observed,  as  it  is  by  Wycl.  and 
Rhem.,  following  Yulg.  Auth.,  with  Tjiid.,  "  Then  the  same 
day  at  evening,"  which  conveys  the  same  meaning,  A^-ithout  tlie 
solemn  emphatic  definiteness  of  the  original.  (Compare  Mark 
xiv.  30.) 

23  Forgive.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  with  Tyud.,  "remit," 
following  Vnlg.,  quorum  remiseritis  peccata  remittuntur  eis. 
The  word  "  remit  "  is  not  elsewhere  found  iu  the  Bible,  and  there 
appears  no  reason  why  its  good  old  English  sjTionym  should  not 
stand  here,  as  it  does  for  the  same  Gr.  elsewhere.  (Comp.  1  John 
i.  y,  ii.  12.)  Tliese  are  the  only  passages  in  which  St.  John  speaks 
of  "  forgiving,"  or  "  forgiveness  of  sins."  In  this  place  probably 
"  remit  "  was  used  in  the  Engl,  versions  as  the  Latin  correlative 
of  "  retain." 

25  Put  my  hand.— So  Wycl.  aud  Rhem.  Yiilg. ,  viittam.  Auth., 
"  thrust."     The  Gr.  is  /3a\w  in  both  places. 

29  "  Thomas  "  (Auth.) — omitted  by  almost  all  the  ancient  authorities. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 

1  Manifested  Jdmself, — So  Rhem.,  following  Yulg.,  mrniZ/ips^ 
avit  se.  All  other  Engl,  versions,  "  shewed  himself."  Tlie  Gr., 
<pa.vep'6<i},  is  almost  always  ''  manifest  "  in  Auth.  The  appearance 
of  Christ  after  His  resurrection  was  as  much  a  "manifesting  of 
his  glory,"  as  was  the  "  beginning  of  his  signs  at  Cana,"  chap, 
ii.  11. 

4  When  day  was  now  breaking. — Auth.,  '■  when  the  morn- 
ing was  now  come."  Tlie  participle,  by  change  in  Gr.  text,  is  in 
the  i)resent  tense,  not  (as  Auth.)  in  the  past. 

The  beach. — Auth.,  "  the  shore."     (See  Note  on  Matt.  xiii.  2.) 

5  Aught  to  eat. — Auth.,  "  any  meat."  The  Gr.,  vpos(payiou, 
does  not  occur  again  in  the  New  Testament,  and  its  meaning  is 
not  precisely  ascertained,  but  it  is  said  to  include  whatever  may 
be  eaten  with  bread,  e.g.,  fish.  (So  Kuinoel,  quoted  by  Words- 
worth.) The  Scottish  term  "  kitchen  "  represents  this  meaning 
of  the  Greek;  and  "meat"  in  Scotland  still  signifies  "food" 
generally.     (Eadie,  TJie  English  Bible,  ii.  372.) 


ST.   JOHN— XXI.  181 

7  His  coat. — So  all  Engl,  versions  except  Aiitli.,  "  his  fislier's 
coat."  It  was  as  the  Gr.,  i-n-evSvTT}?,  denotes,  an  overcoat,  but 
docs  not  appear  to  have  been  peculiar  to  fishermen. 

8  The  net  full  of  fishes. — There  is  the  same  ellipsis  of  "  full '' 
in  Matt.  xiv.  13,  Kepd,uioy  vSaros,  "  a  pitcher  of  water."  So  here, 
WycL,  "  the  net  of  fishes."  All  other  Engl,  versions,  "  the  net 
with  fishes." 

9  When  they  got  out  upon  the  land.— All  Engl,  versions, 
"  when  they  were  come  to  land."  The  Gr.,  airiPrjo-av,  "  stepped 
off"  (tlie  boat),  is  the  converse  of  e/xfiaivco,  to  step  into,  "to  enter 
it,"  and  of  ava^aivu  (verse  11),  to  "  step  up  "  (on  to  the  boat),  to 
go  on  board. 

11  Was  not  rent. — All  Engl,  versions,  "  was  not  broken."  The 
Gr.  is  not  the  same  Avhich  is  rendered  in  Luke  v.  19,  "  their  nets 
were  breaking." 

12  Break  your  fast. — All  Engl,  versions,  "  Come  and  dine," 
except  Wycl.,  "  Come  ye,  eat  ye."  Vidg.,  vcnite,  jirandete.  The 
Gr.,  api(rrri(raT€,  denotes  the  first  meal  of  the  day;  and  as  the  time 
was  claybreak,  "  dine,"  according  to  our  modern  usage,  woidd 
seem  to  be  an  inappi'opriate  rendering. 

Inquire. — All  Engl,  versions,  "  ask."  The  Gr.,  i^sTaaai,  is  not 
simply  "  to  ask,"  but  to  fiud  out  by  careful  inquiiy.  (See  Matt. 
ii.  8,  X.  11.) 

15  So)i    of  John. — Observe  the  marginal  Note. 

16,  17  Lovest  thou  me  .  .  .  — Two  words  for  which  we  have 
not  two  English  equivalents  are  used  in  these  verses  :  aya-n-w, 
signifying  spiritual,  lieaveuly  love ;  and  (piAco,  earthly  aifcetion,  or 
friendship.  Twice,  in  questioning  His  Apostle,  our  Lord  uses 
the  former.  St.  Peter  answers  affirmatively,  yet  in  so  doing,  as 
if  he  hardly  ventured  to  claim  that  higher  love,  he  substitutes 
the  lower  Avord;  almost  as  if  the  question  had  been,  "Lovest 
thou  me  with  all  thy  soul  ?  "  and  the  answer  Avere,  "  Yea,  thou 
knowest  that  I  love  t'hee  with  all  my  heart."  The  third  time,  as 
if  in  compassion  for  the  Apostle's  distrust  of  himself,  our  Lord 
descends  to  the  lower  ground  of  earthly  affection,  and  repeats 
His  question  with  the  lower  word  which  expresses  it ;  but  iu 
translating  it  we  can  only  use  the  same  word  as  before,  "  LoA'est 
thou  me?  "  Whereupon  St.  Peter,  being  grieved  that  the  question 
is  repeated  a  third  time,  and  in  this  altered  form,  appeals  more 
vehemently  than  before  to  his  Master's  knowledge  of  him. 

Our  Lord  also  varies  the  form,  though  hardly  the  substance,  of  the 


182  ST.   JOHN— XXL 

cliarge  wliich  He  gives  after  eacli  question  and  answer.  1st. 
"  Feed  my  lambs,"  fioa-Ke ;  2ud.  "  Tend  my  sheep,"  ■n-oi/j.aive,  "  Be 
their  shepherd  "  ;  3rd.  "  Feed  my  sheep,"  fioaKe.  All  Engl, 
versions  repeat  in  each  place  "  Feed,"  folio-vying  Yulg.,  Pasce. 

23  This  saying  therefore. —  Auth.,  "  Then  this  saying  went 
abroad."  In  such  jiassages  as  this  it  needs  especially  to  be  borne 
iu  mind  that  "  then,"  in  Anth.,  at  the  beginning  of  sentences  in 
St.  John's  Gospel,  has  not  a  temporal,  but  a  causal  meaning.  We 
are  not  to  suppose  from  the  Gr.  that  the  saying  immediately 
spread  among  tlie  disciiiles,  but  that  it  did  so  iu  couseqiience  of 
what  Jesus  had  said. 


THE  ACTS  OF  THE  APOSTLES. 


CHAPTER  I. 

2  He  was  received  up.— Auth.,  witli  Tyud.,  "  was  taken  up," 
following  Vulg.,  assumptihs  est;  wlieuee  Wycl.  and  Rliem., 
"  was  assumpted."  But  in  Luke  ix.  51  Autli.  lias  "  received  up," 
with  Tynd. ;  The  Gr.  is  here  apeXri^dr),  there  aya\7i\peco?.  At 
verse  9  a  different  word  is  used,  i-KripQri,  which  is  properly  ren- 
dered "  was  taken  up."  The  Ascension  is  called  in  the  Greek 
Church,  Analeiosia,  "  the  receiving  up."  Again,  in  Luke  xxiv. 
51,  it  is  said  "  he  was  carried  up,"  avecpepero.  But  from  this 
verse  and  chap.  ix.  51  of  the  Gospel  it  would  seem  that  the  "  re- 
ceiving up  "  was  the  most  familiar  term  in  use  among  the  first 
disciples  for  the  Ascension,  as  "  the  passion,"  rh  iradeiy  (vei'se  3), 
was  for  the  sufferings  of  their  Lord. 

3  He  also  shewed  Himself.— The  Gr.  is  properly,  as  in  Margin, 
"  presented  himself,"  and  is  so  rendered  chap.  ix.  41 ;  and  so 
here,  Yulg.,  proibtdt  se :  but  that  rendering  would  here  be  in- 
appropriate. "  After  His  passion,"  though  not  an  exact  equiva- 
lent of  "  after  he  had  suffered,"  is  the  rendering  of  all  English 
versions,  following  Ynlg.,  post  passionem  suam.  It  is  too  sacred 
a  word  to  be  expunged  from  this,  the  only  place  where  it  occurs 
in  the  Bible ;  and  doubtless  it  will  ever  hold  its  ground  in  the 
Prayer-Book,  "  By  thy  cross  and  passion  ! " 

Proofs. — "Tokens,"  the  rendering  of  Tynd.  and  Cranni.,  was 
probably  felt  to  be  in  itself  too  weak,  and  after  being  strengthened 
by  the  addition  of  "  infallible  "  in  Genev.,  gave  place  to  "  proofs  " 
in  Auth.,  which  has  "  infaUible  proofs."  Wycl.  and  Rhem., 
"  arguments,"  following  Vulg.,  argumentis.  The  Gr.,  reK/xriptov, 
does  not  apj)ear  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament ;  as  used  by 
Aristotle,  it  means  a  convincing,  certain  evidence,  as  distin- 
guished  from  ay^iiuov,  a  probable  but  not  certain  sign ;  whence 
Beza,  certissimis  signis,  followed,  as  above,  by  Genev.  and 
Auth. 


184  THE  ACTS— I. 

Appearing  unto  them.— So  all  English  versions  before 
Autli.,  following  Yulg.,  apparens  eis.  Auth.,  "being  seen  of 
them,"  which  would  imply  that  He  was  continually  before  their 
eyes.  The  Gr.,  oirraySfxevos,  not  again  used  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment, is  a  frequentative  verb,  •with  the  sense,  "  api^earing  from 
time  to  time."     See  Note  on  John  xvi.  16,  "  Te  shall  see  me  " 

By  the  space  of— i.e.,  appearing  to  them  during  that  space 
or  interval  of  time ;  so  Genev.  Auth.,  "  seen  of  them  forty 
days,"  would  signify  "  seen  on  forty  days,"  which,  as  Chrysostom 
observes,  if  it  had  been  the  meaning  of  the  writer,  would  have 
been  differently  expressed. 

Speaking  the  things  concerning.— Not  "  speaking  of  the 
things,"  as  Auth.,  but  speaking  the  very  things,  whether  truths 
to  be  believed  or  commands  to  be  obeyed.  Wycl.,  Tyud.,  and 
Rhem.,  following  Yulg.,  "  speaking  of  the  kingdom  of  God." 

4  Being  assembled  together  with  them: — The  marginal 
rendering,  "  eating  wdth  them,"  is  the  interpretation  adopted  by 
Chrysostom,  and  followed  by  Vulg.,  convescens  illis,  and  by 
Wycl.  and  Rhem. ;  and  it  may  be  supported  by  reference  to  Luke 
xxiv.  42  :  but  it  is  founded  on  a  fanciful  derivation  of  the  word, 
as  if  from  aA.es,  salt ;  and  it  is  inconsistent  with  the  usage  of 
classical  authors — e.gr.,  Herodotus  i.  62.  Tyud.  has  "gathered 
them  together,"  and  so  Calvin,  congregans  illos  ;  but  this  would 
be  giving  a  transitive  sense  to  the  verb,  and  would  require  a 
different  construction  of  the  Gr. 

He  charged  them.— All  English  versions,  "he  commanded," 
Avhich  is  the  rendering  of  several  other  words. 

5  Baptized  with  the  Holy  Ghost.— Margin, "  Or,  in."  We 
read  in  Matt.  iii.  11  these  words  of  the  Baptist,  "  I  indeed  bajj- 
lize  you  with  water;  but  He  shall  baptize  you  with  the  Holy 
Ghost  and  with  fire,"  where  the  prej)osition  iv,  "  in,"  stands  in 
both  parts  of  the  sentence  ;  here,  by  our  Lord,  it  is  used  in  the 
latter  clause  only :  "  Jolm  baptized  tvii/i  water  " — water,  the  means, 
the  outward  form  or  instrument ;  "  but  ye  shall  be  baptized  in 
the  Holy  Ghost — in  Him,  as  the  very  element  of  the  new  life 
acquired  thi'ough  baptism. 

7  Hath  set  within  his  own  authority.— Margin,  "  Or,  Jiafh 
appointed  hy  His  oion  authority."  All  English  Aversions,  "hatli 
put  in  his  own  power  ;  "  Yvlg.fposuitin  sua potestate.  The  Gr. 
i^ovaia,  here  rendered  "  power,"  is  elsewhere  "  authority."  The 
meaning  may  be  either   "  settled  so  as  to  be  witliin  his  own 


THE  ACTS— I.  185 

authority,"  or,  takiug  Ic  to  be  instrumeutal,  "  settled  by  His  own 
aiitliority,"  as  in  Margin. 

8  My  witnesses. — By  cliange  of  Gr.  text,  for  "witnesses  unto 
me."     Auth. 

9  As  they  were  looking.— So  Rliem. ;  Autli.,  with  Wycl.  and 
Tynd.,  "  while  they  beheld."  The  Gr.  is  fiXeirovTwv.  See  Notes 
on  verse  11. 

10  While  they  were  looking  stedfastly. — The  verb  is  re- 
solved, as  it  is  iu  the  Gr.  is  aTevi^ovres  fjcrav,  expressing  the  pro- 
tracted gaze  more  strongly  than  Aiith.,  "  as  they  looked  sted- 
fastly." The  Gr.  is  used  by  St.  Luke  several  times  both  in  his 
Gospel  and  in  the  Acts,  and  by  St.  Paul  twice  (2  Cor,  iii.  7, 
13),  but  not  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament. 

As  he  went. — Auth.,  "as  he  went  up."  Gr.,  iropevofxiuou, 
the  same  as  in  verse  11. 

11  Looking  into.— So  Rhem. ;  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  gazing  up 
into."     The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  verse  9. 

Was  received  up. — Auth.,  "  which  is  taken  up."  See  Note 
on  verse  2.     The  participle  is  of  the  past  tense,  the  aorist. 

As  ye  "beheld  him. — All  English  Aversions,  "  as  ye  haA^e  seen 
him."      The  Gr.  is  iOedo-aa-de. 

Going. — Gr.,  iropevS/xevov,  literally,  "going  his  way;"  the  same 
Avord  is  used  of  the  ascended  SaAdour  by  St.  Peter,  I.  iii.  22. 

12  Which  is  nigh  unto  Jerusalem  .  .  . — So  Wycl.  and  Tynd. 
Auth.,  Avitli  Cranm.  (omitting  "nigh  mito  "),  "Avhich  is  from 
Jei'usalem  a  sabl)ath  day's  journey."  For  his  Gentile  readers 
St.  Luke  says  it  AA'as  "  nigh,"  for  the  Hellenistic  Jcavs  he  is  more 
particular,  saying  that  it  Avas  "  a  saljbath  day's  jom-ney  off." 

13  The  upper  chamber.  —  So  Geuev.  and  Rhem.  Wycl., 
"  solar,"  from  the  Latin  solarium.  Tynd.,  "  parlour."  Auth., 
"an  upper  room,"  but  "upper  chamber"  in  chap.  ix.  27  ;  xx.  8. 
The  Yulg.  here  has  coenaculum,  the  same  Avord  that  it  has  in  Mark 
xW.  15  for  the  "upper  room  "  in  Avhich  the  Last  Supper  Avas 
eaten,  thus  appearing  to  faA'our  the  tradition  which  identifies  the 
"  upper  chamber  "  of  this  place  with  the  "  upper  room  "  of  the 
Gospel.  The  two  Avords  in  Gr.  are  different,  though  alike  in 
meaning. 

Where   they   were    abiding;  both    Peter    and    John 

.  .  .  This  construction  of  the  sentence  is  preferable  to  that 
which  is  adopted  in  all  English  versions,  and  according  to  Avhich 
they  who  "  went  into  "  the  chamber  would  seem  to  be  not  the 


186  THE  ACTS— I. 

same  company  as  those  who  "  abode  "  there  :  thus  Auth.,  "  they 
went  into  an  upper  room,  where  abode  both  Peter,  &c."  As  it  now 
stands,  the  clause,  "  both  Peter  and  John,"  &e.,  is  in  apposition 
with  "  they,"  explaining  in  detail  who  are  included  in  that  word. 


14  With  the  women.  —  Margin,  "Or,  with  certain  women." 
The  article,  though  not  expi-essed  in  the  Gr.,  may  after  the  pre- 
position be  imderstood :  in  which  case  the  women  are  intended 
who  have  been  already  mentioned  in  the  Gospel  (see  especially 
Luke  viii.  2,  3) ;  or  the  omission  of  the  article  may  be  taken  to 
denote  an  indefinite  number,  as  in  Margin. 

15  There  was  a  multitude  of  persons  gathered  together, 
about  a  hundred  and  twenty.— So  Vulg.,  erat  turba  homi- 
mini  siinulfere  centum  viginta,  followed  by  Wycl.  The  absence 
of  the  article  in  the  Gr.  before  "  multitude"  determiues  in  favour 
of  this  rendering  in  preference  to  Auth.,  "  the  number  of  names 
together  were,"  &c. 

Persons.— So  Rhem.  The  Gr.  is  jn-operly  "names,"  as  Auth., 
with  Tynd.  The  same  word  is  a  sjoionym  for  "  persons  "  iu  Rev. 
iii.  4 ;  xi.  13.  It  may  have  obtained  this  idiomatic  use  as  being 
inclusive  of  women,  there  being  no  word  ui  Gr.  so  convenient 
for  this  purpose,  though  irpStrccTrov  is  sometimes  used  in  the  sense 
of  "  person."  It  has  been  thought  probable,  also,  that  a  list  was 
made  of  the  "  names  "  of  these  primitive  disciples. 

The  Gr.  particle  re,  "  and,"  which  connects  this  sentence  with 
*     the  preceding,  is  characteristic  of  the  Book  of  the  Acts,  being 
found  in  it  121  times,  and  only  five  times  in  the  Gospel  of  St. 
Luke  (Alford). 

16  Brethren. — So  Wycl.  Auth.,  follomng  Tynd.,  "Men  and 
bi'ethl'en."  The  Gr.,  literally  rendered  iu  Rhem.  "  men  breth- 
i-en,"  is  a  respectful  and  customary  mode  of  address,  several 
times  repeated  in  this  book,  where  the  Apostles  are  addressing 
then."  Jewish  countrymen ;  and  it  would  perhaps  indicate  that 
the  men  only,  and  not  the  women  also,  were  in  the  contemplation 
of  the  speaker. 

It  was  needful  that  the  Scripture  should  be  ful- 
filled.— Auth.,  "  this  Scripture  must  needs  have  been  fulfilled," 
with  Tynd.  Vulg.,  oportet  impleri  scripturam,  followed  by 
Wycl.,  "  it  behoveth  that  the  Scripture  be  filled."  Our  idiom- 
atic phr?se,  "  it  must  needs  be  " — i.e.,  "  it  cannot  be  otherwise  " 
(as  in  Matt,  xviii.  7) — is  not  apposite  as  a  rendering  of  the  Gr. 
Se?.     Compare  Mai-k  xiii.  7 ;  Acts  xvii.  3. 


THE  ACTS— I.  187 

17  Received  his  portion  in  this  ministry.  — Autli.,  with 
Wycl.,  "  had  obtaiued  part  of  this  ministry."  Tho  Gr.  is  lite- 
rally, *'  obtained  by  lot  the  lot  of,"  &c.  The  Gr.  K\7jpos,  clerus, 
"  lot,"  besides  its  primary  meaning,  came  to  designate  the  portion 
allotted,  as  the  case  has  been  with  the  English  word,  and  thus  it 
obtained  the  meaning  of  an  inheritance  or  possession,  in  what- 
ever way  acquired.  Nevertheless  St.  Peter,  by  his  use  of  the 
word  in  speaking  of  the  Apostolic  office,  may  have  suggested  to 
his  hearers  the  way  in  which  the  will  of  the  Lord  should  be  as- 
certained for  filling  up  the  vacant  place  :  "  they  gave  forth  their 
lots,"  &c.  (verse  26). 

18, 19  These  two  verses  are  to  be  regarded  as  a  parenthesis  intro- 
duced by  St.  Luke  for  the  information  of  his  Gentile  or  JewisJi 
readers.  The  narrative  which  they  contain  would  have  been  un- 
necessary for  those  whom  St.  Peter  was  now  addressing,  and  who 
must  have  been  well  acquainted  with  the  sin  of  Judas  and  liis 
fearful  end. 

18  Obtained. — Auth.,  "  purchased."  Tyiid.  and  Oranm.,  "  hath 
now  j)ossessed."  Yulg.,  possedit.  Gr.,  iKT-ljaaro,  literally,  "  ac- 
quired." In  view  of  the  account  given  in  Matt,  xxvii.  5,  the  ex- 
planation of  this  passage  must  be  that  Judas,  by  casting  his 
money  into  the  sanctuary,  caused  the  purchase  of  the  field  to  be 
made  after  his  death  by  the  chief  priests. 

19  In  their  language.  —  Auth.,  "  in  their  proper  tongue." 
"Proper"  is  omitted  by  change  inGr.  text.  For  "  language"  the 
Gr.  is  Sia\4KTos,  "  dialect,"  used  several  times  in  this  book  only. 

20  His  ofiice. — Auth.,  "  bishoprick,"  following  Vulg.,  episcopcdmn, 
and  aU  English  versions,  except  Genev.,  "  his  charge."  The  Gr. 
is  itriffKOKTiv,  episcopen ;  but  "bishoprick"  is  an  auticipation  of 
the  ecclesiastical  sense  which  the  word  acquired  in  post- Apostolic 
times.  As  used  on  this  occasion  by  St.  Peter,  or  even  thirty 
years  later  by  St.  Liike,  it  would  mean  no  more  than  the  office  of 
overseeing  the  work  of  others.  It  is  observable  that  the  Genevan 
version  alone  di'opped  the  rendering*  "  bishoprick,"  and  that 
King  James's  I'evisers  in  1611  returned  to  it.  The  Gr.  is  used  in 
the  LXX.  version  of  the  Old  Testament,  as  in  IsTum.  iv.  16  for 
the  "oversight"  of  the  Tabernacle.  "Office"  is  the  word  of 
Auth.  at  Ps.  lix.  8,  which  is  quoted  here  by  St.  Peter  from  the 
LXX.     There  also  the  Gr.  is  eniaKoirriv. 

22  Must  one  become.— Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "must  one  be 
ordained."  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  "  be  made,"  after  Yulg.  fieri, 
Avhich  is  very  near  to  the  Gr.  yei/iadai.      "  Ordained  "  has  now, 


188  THE   ACTS— 1. 

like  "  bislioprick,"  a  special  ecclesiastical  seuse,  which  makes 
its  use  iu  this  aucl  other  places  of  the  Bible  perplexing,  if  uot  mis- 
leadiug,  to  the  English  reader. 

23  They  put  forward  two.— Antli.,  with  Tyud.,  "appointed." 
The  Gr.  is  "  set,"  as  at  chaps,  v.  27,  vi.  13  (Anth.).  The  choice 
made  by  the  disciples  was  not  an  "  appointment,"  but  a  prelimi- 
nary nomination. 

24  Shew  of  these  two  the  one  whom  ...  —  Auth.,  with 
Tynd.,  "show  whether  of  these  two  thou,"  &c.  The  Gr.  is  more 
definite,  inserting  "  one  "  (according  to  English  idiom  "  the  one  ") 
before  "  whom." 

25  To  take  the  place  in  this  ministry.—"  Place,"  for  "  part " 
(Auth.),  by  change  in  Gr.  text,  tSwov  for  KXripov.  All  previous 
versions  have  "  place,"  or,  as  Rhem.,  "  room,"  following  Yulg. 
By  this  reading  an  antithesis  is  presented  between  the  "  place  " 
in  the  aj)ostleship  and  the  place  of  Judas,  to  which  he  is  gone, 
"  his  own  place." 

Fell  away. — Auth.,  keeping  the  elegant  paraphrase  of  Tpid., 
"  by  transgression  fell."  This,  however,  lays  too  much  stress  on 
"fell,"  which  is  not  the  prominent  notion  of  the  Gr.,  irape^ri,  elsc- 
whei'e  "  transgressed."  Compare  Luke  viii.  13,  "  which  for  a 
while  believe,  and  in  time  of  temptation  fall  away,"  where 
the  Gr.  is  acpla-Tavrai. 

26  They  gave  lots  for  them. — Margin,  "  Oi*,  unto  them,"  as 
Wycl.  By  change  in  Gr.  text  {avroTs  for  auTuv)  for  "  they  gave 
forth  their  lots"  (Auth.).  If  the  Marginal  rendering  be  taken, 
we  may  understand  from  it  that  the  lots,  consisting  of  two  tablets, 
each  inscribed  witli  one  of  the  names,  were  given  to  them,  and 
they  in  some  manner  arrived  at  the  result,  probably  by  placing 
the  lots  in  the  folds  of  a  robe  and  drawing  them  out.  This  is  the 
only  instance  in  the  New  Testament  of  recourse  to  lots,  which, 
under  the  Jewish  dispensation,  were  believed  to  convey  intima- 
tions of  the  Divine  will :  "  The  lot  is  cast  into  the  lap,  but  the 
whole  disposing  thereof  is  of  the  Lord"  (Prov.  xvi.  33).  This 
one  instance  occurs  before  the  bestowal  of  the  spiritiial  gift  of 
the  Holy  Ghost,  which  was  to  supersede  the  former  modes  of 
consulting  God's  will,  and  was  to  be  for  the  guidance  of  the 
Ajiostlcs  and  of  the  Church  for  all  time. 


THE  ACTS— II.  \8d 


CHAPTER  II. 


1  Was  now  come.— Autli.,  "  was  fully  come."  The  Gr.,  wliidi 
is,  literally,  "  -whoii  the  day  of  the  Pentecost  was  being  filled  np," 
has  been  varionsly  rendered  in  tlie  Engl,  versions  ;  bnt  all,  except 
Aiith.,  have  "  days  "  (in  the  plural),  following  Vulg. — cum  com- 
plerentur  dies  Pentecostes.  The  Gr.,  (rvfj,w\r]povffdai,  is  used  only 
by  St.  Luke,  and  by  him  three  times. 

Together. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following  Vulg.,  pariter  in 
eodem  loco,  by  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  with  one  accord." 

2  As  of  the  rushing  of  a  mighty  wind.— Auth.,  following 
Genev.,  "  as  it  had  been  of  a  mighty  rushing  wind."  The  Gr. 
is  literally,  "  as  if  a  violent  gust  were  being  borne  along." 

3  Tongues  parting  asunder.— So  Yulg.,  dispertitce  linguce, 
whence  Wycl.,  "divers,"  and  Rhem.,  "parted."  Auth.,  following 
Tynd.,  "  cloven,"  as  if  each  tongue  were  forked.  The  Gr.  is 
literally,  "  di\'iding  or  parting  themselves  off  "  (as  from  one  root, 
says  Chryso.stom). 

It   sat — i.e.,  the  apj)earance  of  a  fiery  tongue. 

Upon  each  one  of  them. — So  Cranm.  Auth.,  with  Tynd. 
and  Genev.,  "upon  each  of  them."  It  is  a  small  matter,  but  the 
distrib^^tion  to  each  and  all  is  thus  more  distinctly  marked.  There 
is  the  same  particnlarity  in  the  Gr.,  els  e/cao-Tos,  at  verse  6. 

5  From  every  nation. — Auth., "  out  of,"  which  would  represent 
e/c,  not  (xttS,  and  would  imply  that  they  themselves  belonged  to, 
were  of,  these  sevei'al  nations,  instead  of  being  Jews  born  and 
resident  among  them,  and  come  from  them. 

6  When  this  sound  was  heard.  —  Auth.,  "  when  this  was 
noised  abroad,"  a  paraphrase  of  what  was  supposed  to  be  the  true 
rendering,  '"  when  the  report  of  this  had  been  made."  So  Ei'asmus, 
Beza,  &c.  The  Gr.  is  literally  translated  by  Wycl.  and  Rhem., 
"  when  this  voice  was  made,"  following  Ynlg.,  facta  Jiac  voce.  The 
Gr.  <pajyh  never  in  the  New  Testament  has  the  sense  of  a  "  report," 
or  "  rumour,"  but  is  nsed,  as  here,  of  a  Divine  utterance  in  Matt. 
iii.  17,  &c.  The  "  sound  "  which  was  heard  was  either  the  noise 
{^X°^)  of  the  mighty  wind  in  the  house,  or  the  sound  produced  by 
the  manifold  utterances  of  the  Apostles  speaking  out  of  doors. 
The  latter  seems  the  more  probable  alternative ;  the  languages 
spoken  were  many,  but  the  sound  was  to  each  hearer  a  simple  and 
single  one — that  of  his  own  language  in  which  he  was  bom, 


190  THE  ACTS— IT. 

8  Language.— As  at  verse  6.     Autli.,  "  tongue."     The  Gr.,  as  at 
chap.  i.  19,  is  "  dialect." 

10  Sojourners  from  Rome.— Aiith.,  "  strangers  of  Rome,"  fol- 
lowing  Tyud. :  Wycl.,  "  comelings  Romans."  The  Gr.  is,  literally, 
"  the  sojourning  Romans,"  i.e.,  "  the  Jews  who  live  at  Rome  as 
sojourners,"  Roman  Jews,  as  we  now  speak  of  English,  Polish, 
Russian  Jews. 

11  Cretans. — Wycl.,  "  men  of  Crete."  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  strangely, 
"  Grekes."  Genev.  and  Auth.,  "  Cretes,"  as  in  Vulg.,  from  the 
Gr.  KprjTfs.  Rhem.,  "  Ci-etonians."  The  roWsers  of  1611,  in 
Titus  i.  12,  introduce  the  name  in  an  English  form,  "  Cretians," 
following  Yulg.,  which  there  has  Cretenses.  "'  Cretes,"  in  Auth., 
is  a  dissylable,  as  in  the  Gr.,  and  should  be  so  pronounced. 

Mighty  works. — Autli.,  "  wonderful  works,"  following  Genev. 
All  previous  versions,  "great."  The  Gr.,  fxfya\i7a,  is  found  in 
only  one  other  place,  in  the  Magnificat,  Luke  i.  49. 

12  Were  perplexed. — As  in  Luke  xxiv.  4,  where  for  the  same  Gr. 
the  Auth.  has  "  were  much  pei-plexed,"  but  here  "  were  in  doubt," 
following  Genev.  TjTid.,  ''  they  wondered."  The  Gr.  is  in  the 
passive  voice,  and  is  used  only  by  St.  Luke ;  its  proper  sense  is 
"  to  be  utterly  uncertain  what  to  think,"  rather  than  to  be  iu 
doubt  which  of  several  opinions  is  right.  (Compare  chap. 
XXV.  20.) 

14  Spake  forth  unto  them.— Auth.,  "said."  Something  un- 
usual iu  loudness  of  voice  or  solemnity  of  manner  is  indicated  by 
the  uncommon  word  a-n-€<p0ey^aTo.  The  locntus  of  Vulg.  should 
have  been  elocuhis. 

Give  ear  unto  my  words. — The  Gr.  is,  literally,  "take  my 
words  into  your  eai's."  Auth.,  less  vividly,  "  hearken  to  my 
words."  Yiilg.,  auribus  percijiite.  Tynd.,  "  with  your  ears 
hear." 

17  It  shall  be. — Auth.,  "it  shall  come  to  pass."  The  Gr.  is 
etnai,  not  yev-fia-eTai. 

I  will  pour  forth  of  my  spirit. — Auth.,  following  Genev., 
"  I  will  pour  out  of  my  sj)irit,"  by  which  rendering  it  is  not  made 
clear  that  "  pour  out "  are  to  be  joined  together,  not  "  out  of." 
It  may  have  been  to  prevent  this  possible  misconception  that 
Tynd.,  Cranm.,  and  Rhem.  invert  the  order  of  the  Gr.,  "  of  my 
spirit  I  will  pour  out." 


THE  ACTS— II  191 

22  Approved  of  God  unto  yon.— AU  English  versions, "  among 
you,"  as  "Vulg.,  approbatum  in  vobis.  The  Gr.  is  els  v/j-as,  not 
€«/  vfuv ;  and  "  approved "  correctly  represents  the  Gr.,  if  it  is 
understood  in  its  old  meaning,  "  demonstrated."  The  full  mean- 
ing of  the  phrase  may  be  thus  expressed :  "  a  man  demonstrated  to 

'  have  come  unto  you  from  God  by  mighty  works,"  &c. 

23  "  Have  taken." — (Autk.)     Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

By  the  hand  of  lawless  men. — By  change  of  Gr.  text,  for 
"by  lawless  hands ;  "  and  lawless  for  "  wicked,"  as  aU  English 
versions  ;  "  men  without  the  law,"  heathens,  as  in  1  Cor.  ix.  21, 
"  to  them  that  are  ■without  [law,  as  without  law."  Gr.,  avS/j-wu. 
The  Jews  crucified  the  Lord  by  the  hand  of  their  heathen 
governor  and  his  soldiery. 

24  Having  loosed  the  pangs  of  death. — Auth.,  "  pains  ;  " 
all  previous  versions  "  sorrows,"  following  Yidg.,  solutis  dolori- 
bus  inferni.  Gr.,  wSlvas,  properly  "  birth-pangs,"  here  to  be 
understood  of  death  as  the  travail  which  leads  through  a  new 
birth  to  a  new  life.  Compare  Matt.  xxiv.  8,  where  the  same 
word  is  figuratively  applied  to  the  approaching  fall  of  Jerusalem ; 
"  these  are  the  beginning  of  travail."  It  is,  however,  to  be 
observed  that  the  words  rendered  "pangs  of  death"  are  in  the 
LXX.  used  where  the  Hebrew  has  "  bands  or  cords  of  death," 
Pss.  xvii.  5,  and  cxv.  3.  It  is  not  unlikely  tliat  St.  Peter,  address, 
ing  the  people  in  the  Hebrew  language,  may  have  used  the 
appropriate  and  forcible  phrase,  "having  loosed  the  bands  of 
death,"  and  that  for  this  St.  Luke,  giving  St.  Peter's  speech  in 
Greek,  substituted  the  translation  of  the  LXX.,  the  "  pangs." 
(Alford.) 

26  Was  glad  .  .  .  rejoiced.— Auth.,  "rejoiced  .  .  ,  was  glad." 
These  words  have  changed  places,  because  "  rejoice "  has 
usually  been  taken  to  represent  the  latter  of  the  two  Gr.  verbs, 
ayaWlaofjLai,  denoting  active  and  outward  expressions  of  joy,  while 
"  be  glad"  indicates,  like  evcppaivofxai,  a  joyous  state  of  mind ;  and 
so  in  verse  28. 

Shall  dwell.— All  English  versions,  "shall  rest,"  as  Vulg., 
reqinescat.  The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  shall  dwell  as  in  a  tent,"  in  a 
temporary  abode.  "  My  flesh,"  my  body  and  soul,  "  shall  for  a 
shoi-t  time  dwell  in  hope." 

27  Give.— Auth.,  "  sufEer."     The  Gr.  is  Scio-fiy. 

29  I  may  say  unto  you  freely.— So  Geuev. ;  all  other  versions 
"  let  me,"  following  Vulg.,  liceai. 


192  THE  ACTS— II. 

30  "According  to  the  flesh  he  would  raise  tip  Christ." — (Auth.) 
Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text ;  as  also  "  his  soul "  (Auth.)  in 
verse  31. 

33  By  the  right  hand  of  God  exalted.— Margin,  "  Or,  «i." 
Tlie  reudei-iug  in  tlie  text  is  according  to  tlie  more  jn-obaWe 
construction  of  the  Gr.,  and  is  that  of  aU  English  Aversions,  the 
Vulg.,  and  generally  of  modern  commentators.  There  are  some, 
however,  who  adopt  the  alternative  of  the  Margin,  "  exalted  at 
the  right  hand,"  which,  if  it  coidd  be  shewn  to  he  an  admissible 
rendering  of  the  Greek,  might  be  preferred,  being  in  accordance 
with  other  passages,  whore  Christ  is  spoken  of  as  being  "  at  " 
the  right  hand  of  God. 

Poured  forth. — As  at  verse  17.  Here  Auth.  has  "  shed  forth," 
with  all  English  versions,  except  Rhem.,  "  poured  out." 

36  Hath  made  him  both  Lord  and  Christ,  this  Jesus 
whom  ye  crucified. — So  Wycl.,  Genev.,  and  Rhem.,  follow- 
ing Yulg.  The  order,  as  inverted  by  Tynd.,  Cranm.,  and  Auth., 
is  more  smooth  and  rhythmical,  but  does  not  so  well  suggest  the 
startling  effect  with  which  the  words  woiUd  fall  on  the  Jewish 
audience,  stinging  them,  causing  them  to  be  "  i^ricked  to  the 
heart." 

38  Unto  the  remission  of  your  sins.— So  Wycl.,  and  Rhem, 
with  Yulg.  In  the  Gr.  text,  followed  by  Auth.,  "your"  was 
omitted,  and  the  statement  was  a  general  one.  By  the  addition 
of  "your"  the  purpose  of  baptism  is  brought  home  to  each 
individual 

39  Shall  call  unto  him.— Auth.,  "shall  call."  The  verb  in  Gr. 
has  the  preposition  ■7rp6s,  and  is  in  the  middle  voice.  The  call  is 
from  God,  calling  them  to  Himself.     Vidg.,  advocaverit. 

40  Crooked. — The  same  Gr.  is  so  rendered  in  Luke  iii.  5 ;  Phil, 
ii.  1-5.  Here  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  has  "untoward;"  \he  latter 
word  signifying  backwardness  in  coming  to  the  truth,  the  former 
perversity  in  turning  off  from  it. 

41  "  Gladly." — (Auth.)    Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

42  Tepxhing. — So  "Wycl.,  as  in  Matt.  vii.  28,  and  elsewhere,  for 
the  Gr.  SiSaxi? ;  not  "  doctrine"  (Auth.,  with  Tynd.),  which,  as  we 
now  miderstand  it,  means  a  definite  system  or  canon  of  the 
faith. 

And  fellowship — i.e.,  in  the  Aj)Ostles'  fellowship,  associated 
■n-ith  the  Apostles  in  all  religioxis  acts.  The  Marginal  alterna- 
tive by  the  insertion  of  "in  "  would  make  "  and  in  fellowship  "  a 


THE  ACTS— II.  103 

separate  clause,  lueauiiig  "  iu  brotherly  iutereuiirsc  one  with 
auother,"  being',  as  it  is  said  afterwards,  "  all  of  one  heart." 
But  by  the  omission,  through  change  iu  the  Gr.  text,  of  '"  aud  " 
Ijcfore  the  uext  clause,  the  enumerated  particulars  are  divided 
^  into  two  couplets,  the  tirst  describing  the  close  couuection  of  the 
'  believers  Avith  the  Apostles,  the  second  their  outward  acts  of 
worship. 

In  the  breaking  of  bread  and  the  prayers.— Auth., 
following  Tyud.,  in  both  places  omits  the  article,  which  here  has 
strong  significance,  indicating  (1)  the  special  rite  to  which  the 
term  "breaking  of  bread  "  was  applied  in  the  primitive  Church — 
viz.,  the  breaking  of  bread  iu  Holy  Commimion  at  the  Acjape, 
or  "love-feast"  (compare  chap.  xx.  7;  1  Cor.  x.  16) ;  aud  (2)  the 
meetiugs  held  for  comniou  prayer. 

45  Any  man.— Not  "  every  man,"  as  all  English  versions.  The 
Gr.  is  TLs. 

46  At  home. — So  Geuev. ;  all  other  versions,  "  from  house  to 
house,"  as  Vulg.,  circa  domos  ;  but  in  Margiu  Auth.  (1611)  has 
'*  Or,  at  home."  The  Gr.,  kut  oIkov,  is  used  iu  the  same  sense,  chap. 
V.  42;  Rom.  xxi.  5.  The  words  might  bear  the  sense  given  them 
iu  the  text  of  Auth.,  as  iu  this  very  verse  KaQ^  r]/j.4pav  is  reudered 
"  day  by  day,"  "  daily,"  not  "  by  day ;  "  but  there  is  no  example 
of  this  in  the  New  Testameut. 

Gladness. — This  word  liiis  been  retained,  though  the  Gr.  de- 
notes properly  an  effusiveness  of  joy.  Vulg.,  exultatione.  (See 
Note  on  verse  26.)  The  difference  was  not  thought  sufficient  to 
necessitate  a  change  in  the  rendering  of  a  phrase  with  which 
we  are  so  familiar  as  it  stands. 

47  Added  to  them. —  By  a  change  iu  the  Gr.  text,  "  to  the 
Church  "  (Auth.)  is  omitted,  and  the  first  words  of  chap,  iii., 
"  to  them,"  literally,  "together,"  are  connected  with  the  end  of 
this  verse.  This  change  is  supported  by  nearly  all  the  l)est  MSS. 
and  the  ancient  versions,  including  Vulg.,  followed  by  Wycl.  aud 
Rhem.  The  Gr.,  iwl  rb  avrS,  "together,"  stood  awkwardly  at 
the  begiuning  of  the  next  sentence.  Tlie  same  Gr.  is  rendered 
"  together,"  in  chap.  i.  15 :  aud  Vulg.  in  that  place  has  simul, 
but  here  in  id  ipsum,  an  uuiutelligible  attempt  at  literaluess, 
imitated  by  Wycl.,  "  in  the  same  thing." 

Tlie  meutiou  of  "  the  Church,"  omitted  by  cluiuge  of  Gr.  text  iu 
this  place,  appears  for  the  first  time  iu  chap.  v.  11. 

Those  that  were  being  saved.— Auth.,  following  Tyud., 
"such  as   should  be   saved,"  which  perhaps  was   intended   to 

N 


194  THE    ACTS— III. 

iudicate  a  certain  class  of  persons  chosen  for  salvation, ''  such  as 
should  be,"  "were  destined  to  be,"  saved,  according  to  the  Cal- 
viuistic  doctrine  of  salvation  ;  but  of  this  there  is  no  indication 
in  the  Gr.  rous  crw(ofjLivovs  (the  present  participle),  "  those  that 
were  being  saved,"  were  putting  themselves  in  the  way  of  salva- 
tion, obeying  the  exhortation  of  St.  Peter  in  verse  40,  ''  Save 
yourselves,"  ffdi(eade.  So  in  1  Cor.  i.  18  the  same  phrase  is  con- 
trasted by  St.  Paul  Avith  those  that  are  in  the  way  of  perdition,  roTs 
aTToWv/xeyois.  "  Cahnnism,"  says  the  late  Professor  Blunt  {Duties 
of  a  Parish  I'riest,  §  2,  p.  51),  "  has  made  great  use  of  this  text, 
and  important  consequences  have  been  deduced  from  it."  To 
this  remark  he  api)ends  another,  which  is  of  general  application  : 
"  And  I  camiot  ))ut  think  there  is  more  to  satisfy  a  reasonaljle 
man  in  reasoning  like  this  on  the  grammar  of  the  Greek  which  con- 
tains the  revelation,  than  in  A^ery  verbose  disquisitions  on  the 
Divine  decrees  in  metaphysics  apart  from  the  Greek." 

The  Yulg.  in  this  place  lias  qui  salvi  ficrcnt  ;  Wycl.,  "  they  that 
were  made  safe,"  neither  of  which  renderings  is  free  from 
ambiguity. 


CHAPTER    III. 


1  See  Note  on  chap.  ii.  47,  "  added  to  them." 

2  Door. — Auth.,  "  gate,"  which  rein*esents  a  different  Gv.  word, 
used  for  the  same  entrance  in  verse  10. 

3  Asked  to  receive. — So  all  English  A-ersions  exceijt  Auth.  The 
phrase  is  not  elsewhere  found  in  the  New  Testament,  but  is  used 
by  classical  authors — e.g.,  by  Sophocles  and  Aristophanes.  Auth., 
foUoAving  a  different  Gr.  text  (not  that  of  the  Textiis  Beceptus), 
omits  "  to  receive." 

6  What  I  have.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "such  as  I  have."  "Wycl. 
and  Rhem.,  "  that  that  I  have,"  inelegantly  following  Vulg., 
(luod  liabes. 

"  Rise  lip  and."' — (Auth.)    Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

7  Raised  him  up. — Auth..  as  Tynd..  "lifted  up."  "Wycl.. 
"  lieaved."  The  Gr.  is  usually  rendered  in  the  active  voice  "  to 
raise,"  in  the  middle,  "  to  rise." 


THE    ACTS— III.  195 

10  Took  knowledge  of  him.— All  EngHsli  versions,  "kiicAv." 
The  Gi".  is  the  same  as  at  chap.  iv.  13,  where  Aiith.   (alone)  has 

"  took  knowledge  of  him."    "  Recognised  "  is  a  better  word,  bnt  of 
comparatively  modei'u  usage. 

11  Porch. — Margin,  "  Or,  iJortico."  This  portico  or  colonnade  was, 
according  to  ancient  tradition,  a  part  of  Solomon's  temple,  left 
standing  when  the  rest  was  destroyed  by  Ncbixchaduezzar. 
Jesus  walked  in  it  (John  x.  23) ;  and  becoming  afterwards  a 
place  of  piiblic  resort,  it  appears  to  have  been  frequented  by  the 
disciples  for  the  purpose  of  meeting  and  teaching  the  ]3eople. 

12  This  man.— (Gr.,  tovtu)  Preferable  to  "  this  "  (i.e.,  this  thing), 
as  all  English  versions,  because  of  "him,"  which  appears  to  refer 
to  "this  man,"  at  the  end  of  the  verse. 

Fasten  ye  your  eyes. — The  Gr.  is  so  rendered  in  Luke  iv. 
20  (Auth.),  but  here  "  look  ye  earnestly,"  as  in  chap.  i.  10,  and 
Luke  xxii.  56. 

Godliness. — So  Genev.  Auth.,  "holiness,"  with  Tjaid.  and 
Rhem.  The  Gr.  signifies  not  so  much  the  religion  of  the  heart 
within  as  the  outward  expression  of  it  in  acts  of  piety  towards 
God.     It  is  elsewhere  always  rendered  "  godliness  "  in  Auth. 

13  His  Servant. — Margin,  '■  Or,  cliild."  See  references  in  the 
Margin :  especially  to  he  observed  in  connection  with  this  place  are 
the  passages  of  Isa.  xlii.  1,  &c.,  in  which  the  future  Messiah  is 
sj)oken  of  as  "the  servant  of  the  Lord"  (translated  by  ira??  iu 
the  LXX.).  In  this  book  the  same  Old  Testament  designation 
of  Him  is  retained,  while  as  the  "  Son  "  of  God  He  is  always 
called  vlos,  and  not  until  the  age  following  that  of  the  Apostles 
was  the  term  ■n-air  @eov  applied  to  Him  as  "  the  Son."  All  English 
versions,  following  Vulg.,  here  have  "  son,"  exce^it  Autli., 
"  child."  Compare  Phil.  ii.  7,  8,  where  it  is  said  of  Christ  our 
Lord  that  he  took  upon  Him  the  form  of  "  a  servant,"  "  a  bond- 
servant," and  was  "  obedient  unto  death  "  {vTri'iKoos),  and  Zech.  iii. 
8,  "  my  servant  the  Branch,"  where  the  LXX.  has  SovXof.  The 
Gr.  Trars  is  rendered  "  servant"  in  verse  25  of  tliis  chapter;  and 
it  is  maintained  by  Nitzsch,  in  UUmanu's  Theolocjlaclie  ZeiUclir. 
for  1828.  that  both  in  the  LXX.  and  in  the  New  Testament  TraTs 
may  always  be  translated  either  "servant"  or  "one  of  tender 
years,"  never  necessarily  the  same  as  vl6s,  "'  son,"  Comp.  Isa, 
xliv.  21 ;    Luke  i.  5-1. 

14  Righteous.— Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "just."  Wycl.,  "  right-, 
ful."     Sec  Note  on  Matt.  i.  19.     Comp.  chaps,  vii,  52,  xxii.  14; 


196  THE    ACTS— III. 

1  John  ii.  1,  where  the  title,  "  the  Eighteous,"  is  emphatically 
given  to  our  Lord.  It  was  used  by  the  Jews,  as  appears  from 
the  writings  of  then*  rabbis,  to  designate  the  Messiali,  and  may 
have  been  originally  suggested  by  Isa.  liii.  11,  "  My  righteous 
servant  shall  justify  many." 

15  The  prince  of  life. — Margin,  "Or,  author."  So  in  Aiith. 
Rhem.,  following  Yulg.,  has  "Author."  Tyud.,  "  Lord."  The 
Gr.  properly  means  "  leader,"  "  chieftain,"  as  in  Num.  xiii.  3 
(LXX.).  The  title,  "  Author  of  life,"  woidd  i)crliaps  be  more 
appropriate  to  the  Holy  Spirit ;  the  "  Author  of  our  faith,  of  our 
salvation,"  are  titles  given  to  Christ  in  Helx  xii.  2,  ii.  10.  ■  "  The 
Prince  of  life,"  as  our  leader,  Avinning  life  for  us  by  His  victory 
over  death,  appears  to  be  a  suitable  rendering  of  the  Gr.  in  this 
place,  and  in  chap.  v.  31. 

Whereof  we  are  witnesses.— The  Gr.  may  be  either 
"whereof,"  i.e.,  "  of  his  resurrection,"  as  they  are  declared  to  bo 
in  chap.  i.  22,  or  •'  of  him,"  as  He  appointed  them  to  be  in  chap, 
i.  8.     (See  also  chap.  ii.  32.) 

16  By  faith  in  his  name — i.e.,  on  account  of  faith  in  His  name, 
both  on  our  part,  and  on  the  part  of  the  cripple  whom  we  have  seen 
healed.  His  name  worked  the  cure,  not  of  itself,  but  on  account 
of  the  faith  which  both  the  cripple  and  the  Apostles  had  in  it. 
The  Gr.  is,  literally,  "  upon  the  faith  "  (eVt  rfj  irio-Tej). 

Yea,  the  faith  which  is  through  him.— Auth.,  'which 
is  by  him."  "  Our  faith  in  his  name,  made  effectual  througli 
him,  hath  given,"  &c.  He  is  the  object,  as  He  is  also  the  autlior 
of  our  faith ;  He  is  the  motive  cause  of  it.  He  also  makes  it 
effectual. 

17  "  I  wot,"  for  "  I  know,"  tliDUgh  an  archaism  long  disused  in 
common  speech,  is  still  familiar  to  us  from  its  use  in  our  standard 
old  writers,  such  as  Shakspcare  and  Spenser ;  the  same  may  be 
said  of  "  I  wist,"  chap,  xxiii.  5.  Both  words  are  of  frequent 
occurrence  in  the  Bible. 

18  His. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  is  omitted  before  "  prophets,"  and 
inserted  before  "  Christ."  So  also  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following 
Yulg.  His  Chi'ist  is  a  title  foimd  only  here  and  in  the  quota- 
tion from  the  second  psalm  in  chap.  iv.  2(3,  where  see  the  Mar- 
ginal Note. 

19  Turn  again.— Auth.,  "  be  converted."  See  Note  on  Matt.  xiii. 
15. 

That  so  there  may  come.— AU  Engl,  versions,  "  when  the 
times   shall   come,"   giving   the    Gr.  conjunction   the   sense   of 


THE    ACTS— III.  197 

"  when,"  wliich  it  never  takes.  The  same  constniction  occurs  in 
Luke  ii.  35,  where  it  has  always  been  rightly  translated.  Here 
the  Yulg.  was  misleading,  with  a  broken  construction,  id  cum 
venerint,  whicli  Tynd.  endeavoured  to  amend  by  "  when  there 
shall  come." 

St.  Peter  exhorts  the  Jews  to  turn  from  their  old  evil  ways  and 
receive  the  Christ,  tlieir  long-expected  Messiali,  that  so  there  may 
come  seasons  of  "refreshing,"  of  revival.  What  tliese  seasons 
were  in  the  contemplation  of  the  Apostle,  and  whether  they 
would  come  to  the  Jewish  believers  only,  or  to  the  world  in 
general,  are  points  not  made  clear  by  the  context,  nor  hitherto 
illustrated  by  reference  to  other  passages  of  Scripture. 

20  Who  hath  been  appointed  for  you.—  By  change  of  Gr. 
text  for  "  which  was  before  preached  unto  you,"  as  in  all  Engl, 
versions.  The  Gr.  woi-d  is  used  in  the  LXX.,  but  in  tlie  New 
Testament  occurs  only  in  this  book.     (See  chaps,  xxii.  14,  xxvi. 

16.) 

The  Christ  .  .  .  even  Jesus. — Auth.,  "  Jesus  Christ."  This 
change  follows  from  the  change  in  the  order  of  the  words  in  the 
Gr.  text,  Tbi' TrpoKexeipitr/ieVoj/ XpicrJ*!' 'Irjirouj' for  tJij' TrpoK  .    .   .   I.,  X. 

21  The  times  of  restoration  of  all  things.—  Tynd.,  "  till 
the  time  that  all  things  be  restored."  Auth.,  here  following"  Wyel. 
and  Rhem.,  "until  the  times  of  restitution  of  all  things,"  taking 
from  the  Yulg.  the  word  ''restitution,"  which,  however,  is  not  in 
English  as  in  Latin  the  equivalent  of  a-iroKardaraa-is,  "  restora- 
tion." St.  Peter's  words  must  be  connected  with  the  saying  of 
our  Lord  (Matt.  xvii.  11),  "  Elijah  indeed  cometh,  and  sliall 
restore  all  things,"  where  the  same  Gr.  word  is  used.  Then  shall 
come  forth  "the  new  heavens  and  the  new  earth  "  spoken  of  in  2 
Peter  iii.  13. 

Whereof  God  spake.^"  Whereof."  i.e.,  of  Avhich  times.  Auth., 
"Avhich  God  hath  spoken," 'i.e.,  " which  things:"  a  comparison 
with  tlie  saying  of  our  Lord  in  Matt.  xvii.  11  shews  that  the 
former  is  the  true  connection,  though  that  of  Auth.  is  grammatically 
the  more  ob"\dous. 

22  Moses  indeed  said. — Auth.,  following  Cranm.  only,  "  Moses 
truly  said."  The  word  thus  rendered  (fiev)  is  not  an  adverb, 
affirming  the  truth  of  the  saying,  Imt  merely  tlie  particle  used 
when  two  statements  are  to  be  connected  or  contrasted,  as  here  in 
verses  22  and  24,  "Moses indeed  .  .  .  yea,  and  all  the  prophets." 

Like  unto  me. — Margin,  "  Or,  as  he  raised  vp  me  "  (so  again 
in  chap.  vii.  37).     This  is  not  an  improbable  interpretation,  the 


198  THE  ACTS— I Y. 

Gr.  being  iy  f/ue;  it  is  also  countenanced  by  Viilg.,  ianquam  me, 
and  there  appears  to  be  nothing  against  it  in  the  Hebrew  of  Dent, 
xviii.  15. 

To  him  shall  ye  hearken.— Anth.,  "  hear."  The  common 
Gr.  verb  aKovfiv  lias  often  in  the  New  Testament  a  pregnant  sig- 
nification Avhich  "to  hear"  fails  to  give,  but  which  is  sufficiently 
brought  out  by  "  hearken  to."  Similarly,  in  the  next  verse  the 
Auth.  "destroyed"  is  not  strong  enough  to  express  the  intensity, 
the  utteruess,  which  is  signified  by  the  Gr. 

25  Families. — As  in  Luke  ii.  4;  Ephesiaus,  iii.  15.  Auth.,  "  kin. 
dreds,"  with  Tynd.,  Avhich  is  the  rendering  of  other  words,  as  in 
chaps,  iv.  5,  vii.  3. 

2C>  His  Servant. — For  Auth.,  "  his  Son  Jesus."  by  change  in  Gr. 
text. 


CHAPTER  lY. 

2  Being  sore  troubled. — T\nid.,  "  taking  it  grievously."  Auth., 
after  Rhem.,  "being  grieved."  The  Gr.  is  an  unusual  word, 
occurring  only  once  again,  in  chap.  x\i.  18. 

Proclaim.ed. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  preached,"  which  is  the  usual 
rendering  of  anotlier  word.     So  ngain  in  chap.  xiii.  5. 

In  Jesus. — Auth.,  "  through  Jesus."  The  Gr.  is  not  "  through 
Him,"  as  tlie  means,  but  "  in  Him,"  as  the  ruling  precedent,  the 
primary  instance  of  a  universal  law. 

4  Came  to  be. — Aiith.,  "was."     The  Gr.  is,  literally,  "was  made 

to  be." 
5,  6  Tlie  change  in  the  order  and  construction  of  this  sentence 

is  due  to  the  broken  construction  of  the  Gr.  text  as  it  is  now 

amended. 

7  They  enquired. — Autb.,  "  asked."  The  Gr.,  in  the  imperfect 
tense,  implies  a  continued  or  repeated  questioning;  and  so  St. 
Peter,  in  vei'se  9,  speaks  of  "  being  under  examination." 

In  what  name. — As  at  chap.  iii.  2 ;  and  so  all  versions  here, 
except  Auth.,  "  by  what  name." 

9  A  good  deed. — So  Rhem. ;  Auth.,  following  Wycl.  and  Tj'ud., 
"  the  good  deed."     The  article  is  not  expressed  in  the  Greek ; 


THE    ACTS— IV.  199 

and  though  after  the  preposition  (e'Tri)  it  might  be  understood  and 
supplied,  if  required  by  the  context,  the  sentence  is  more  concise 
and  lias  more  irony  without  it. 

This  man. — Pointing  to  hhn.    Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  he,"  ol-ros 

11  He  is  the  stoue. — All  English  versions,  '•  This."  Hero,  as  in 
the  last  verse,  the  Gr.  is  oZros,  but  the  Gr.  pronoun  better  finds 
its  subject  in  the  person  just  before  mentioned  ( eV  rovro),  verse  10) 
than  in  that  which  follows  as  predicate,  "  the  stone,"  especially 
as  in  the  next  verse  "  he  "  is  spoken  of,  "  he  "  in  person,  and  not 
under  the  metaphor  of  the  stone. 

You  the  builders.— So  Rhem.  only ;  all  other  English  ver- 
sions, "you  builders."  The  article  is  in  the  Gr.,  and  is  in  accord- 
ance with  our  own  idiom,  though  in  the  clipiied  style  of  colloquial 
English  it  may,  with  some  loss  of  point  and  significance,  be 
omitted.     "  You,  the  appointed  and  authorised  builders." 

Which  was  made.— All  English  versions  have  the  present 
"is  made,"  misled  by  Yvlg.,  f actus  est.     Gr.,  6  yey6/xevos. 

12  And  in  none  other— i.e.,  in  no  other  person.  St.  Peter  reverts 
to  the  qiiestions  which  had  been  asked  (verse  9),  by  what  means 
the  man  had  been  "made  whole"  (literally,  "saved"),  and  in 
what  name ;  and  to  the  name  he  attaches  a  sovereign  and  uni- 
versal power  which  until  now  he  has  not  claimed  for  it. 

16,  22  Miracle. — Margin,  "'  Gr.,  sign."  The  use  of  the  Gr.  (T7]ne7ou 
for  "  miracle  "  is  a  significant  characteristic  of  St.  John's  Gos- 
pel, and  faithfulness  required  that  it  should  there  be  observed  in 
translation  ;  in  the  other  books  of  the  New  Testament  the  use  of 
the  word  in  this  sense  is  rare,  and  does  not  appear  to  be  so  signi- 
ficant that  it  should  be  represented  in  English. 

17  Threaten. — "  Straightly  "  is  added  in  Auth.  only,  but  without 
need. 

24  O  Lord. — Margin,  "  Or,  master.''  The  Gr.,  Aeo-TrJrrjs  (Despotes), 
is  used  in  addressing  or  sj)eaking  of  God,  or  Christ,  in  four 
other  passages  of  the  New  Testament :  Luke  ii.  29;  2  Peter  ii.  2; 
Jude  4,  and  Rev.  vi.  10.  It  is  the  equivalent  in  Gr.  of  the 
Hebrew  Aclonai,  by  which  name  God  was  invoked  as  the  Lord  of 
Creation.  In  this,  therefore,  the  earliest  recorded  hymn  of  the 
Christian  Church,  the  Lord  of  Nature  is  recognised  as  being  one 
with  the  God  of  Grace. 

"  Thou  art  God."— (Auth.)    Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 


200  THE   ACTS— V. 

25  Thy  servant.— David  is  liere  designated  by  the  same  title 
which  is  given  to  Christ  himself  in  verses  27,  30. 

Peoples.— All  English  versions,  "  people ;  "  but  the  Yulg.,  fol- 
lowing the  Greek,  po;puli ;  the  Heljrew  of  Ps.  ii.  also  has  the 
plural. 

26  Set  themselves  in  array.— Auth.,  "  stood  up."    The  Gr.  is 

literally,  "  presented  themselves,"  "  stood  forward." 

27  In  this  city.— Added  in  Gr.  text. 

32  And  not  one  of  them  said.— A  more  specific  denial  than 
Auth.,  "neither  said  any  of  them."  The  Gr.  is  here  ouSe  eTs  .  .  . 
€A676,  but  in  verse  34,  oy5e  ns,  correctly  rendered  "  Neifher  was 
there  any." 

35  See  Note  on  chap.  ii.  45. 

36  Son  of  exhortation. — Margin,  "Or,  consolation"  which  is 
the  word  used  by  Tynd.  and  Auth.  in  translating  TrapdKX-oais 
(paraclesis).  The  Gr.  admits  of  either  rendering :  "  exhortation  " 
seems  more  suitable  as  applied  to  Barnabas,  of  whom  it  is  said, 
chap.  xi.  23,  irape/caAei  irdi'Tas,  "  he  cxliorted  all." 

A  man  of  Cyprus  by  race. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "of  the 
country  of  Cyprus."  The  Gr.,  yevei,  properly  refers  to  the 
parentage  and  descent,  not  to  the  countr}'.  His  family  had 
settled  in  Cyprus,  as  did  many  Jews  as  early  as  tlie  second 
centiu-y  before  Christ. 

37  A  field. — Auth.,  "land;"  Vulg..  acjrnm-,  Gr.,  dypoD, 


CHAPTER  V. 

4  How  is  it  that  .  .  .—Auth.,  "why."  The  Gr.  is  the  same 
as  in  verso  10,  and  Luke  ii.  49. 

6  Wrapped  him  round — probably  in  their  own  mantles.  The 
word  does  not  occur  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament,  but  is  used 
by  classical  authors  andintheLXX.  Auth.,  "wound  him  up," 
as  if  in  grave-cloths  or  bands. 

17  Jealousy. — So  Wycl.,  "  envy."     The  Gr.  may  have  this  mean- 
ing, or  "  zeal,"  but  not  as  Auth.,  "  indignation." 


thp:  acts-v.  201 

18  In  public  ward. — So  Wycl.,  "common  ward;"  Auth.,  \y\i\\ 
Tyncl.,   "common  prison."     Gr.,   S-n/xoirla. 

21  About  daybreak. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "early  in  the  morning." 
The  Gr.  is  opQpov,  "  dawn."  As  the  heat  becomes  gi'eat  in  Pales- 
tine soon  after  sunrise,  people  began  their  day  very  early ;  and 
of  our  Lord  it  is  related,  that  though  He  passed  the  night  on  the 
mount  of  Olives,  yet  He  was  in  the  temple  at  an  early  hour,  and 
by  daybreak  the  people  were  assembled  there  to  hear  Him.  (Luke 
xxi.  38.)     See  also  John  viii.  2. 

24  They  were  much  perplexed  .  .  . — i.e.,  when  the  high 
priest,  &c.,  heard  these  words  of  the  officers,  they  were  at  their 
wits'  end  aboiit  them,  wondering  what  all  this  would  grow  to. 
See  Note  on  chap.  ii.  12. 

28  We  straitly  charged  you. — By  omission  of  the  negative  in 
the  Gr.  text  the  sentence  is  converted  from  an  indirect  into  a 
direct  affirmative.  Auth.,  "  Did  we  not,"  &c.  ?  Wycl.  and 
Rhem.,  following  Yiilg.,  preserve  the  Hebraism,  forcible  in  the 
original,  but  ciunbrous  in  English,  "commanding  we  com- 
manded you." 

29  But  Peter  and  the  Apostles.— So  "Wycl.,  Genev.,  and 
Rhem.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  inserts  other,  which  in 
1611  was  not  printed  in  italics.  St.  Peter,  throughout  the  early 
history  of  the  Church,  appears  as  j^j-wjitts  inter  pares;  and  this 
being  the  case,  the  mention  of  him  apart  from  the  body  of  winch 
he  was  the  representative  and  the  spokesman  is  consistent  with 
modern  as  with  ancient  usage. 

30  We  must  obey  God. — "  Must  "  is  much  more  often  the  ren- 
dering of  Se(  in  the  New  Testament  than  "ought"  (Auth.),  and 
is  here  more  appropriate,  as  expressing  better  the  curtness  of  the 
original,  and  resting  their  condu.ct  on  necessity,  not  on  a  sense  of 
duty. 

31  With  his  right  hand.— See  Note  on  chap.  ii.  33. 

Remission. — The  word  used  in  chap.  ii.  38.  Auth..  "  forgive- 
ness."    The  variation  is  due  to  Tyndale. 

34  Had  in  honour. — Auth.,  "  had  in  repiitation."  Wycl.,  "  wor- 
shipful." The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  honourable  to  all  the  people,"  as 
Vidg.,  honorabilis  universes  lilebi. 

Commanded  to  put  the  men  forth.— So  Wycl.,  Rliem., 
and  Yulg.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  following  a  different  reading  of 
the  Gr.  text,  has  "the  apostles."  We  seem  to  have  liere  the 
very  word  used  by  Gamaliel.     He,  of  course,  would  not  call 


202  THE  ACTS— Y.. 

tliem  "  apostles ; "  aud  St.  Luke  in  describing  tliera  himself 
would  not  have  called  them  "  the  men." 

35  What  ye  are  about  to  do.— Auth.,  follomngTynd.,  "  what 
ye  intend  to  do."  The  Gi".  yueWco  has  occasionally  this  meaning, 
as  in  chap.  xx.  13 ;  but  it  is  a  secondary  aud  derivative  meaning, 
not  to  be  resorted  to,  Avhen,  as  in  this  place,  the  primary  sense 
will  suit.     Yulg.,  q^iid  acturi  sitis. 

30  G-iving  himself  out. — This  in  the  Gr.  is  simply,  but  somewhat 
l)aldly,  "  saying  that  he  was  somebody,"  as  Rhem.  and  "Wycl., 
with  Vulg.,  clicens.  Auth.,  "boasting."  The  same  phrase  is 
used  by  the  historian  Josephus  {Ant.  xx.  5,  §  1),  "  he  said  he  was 
a  prophet,"  Avith  regard  to  another  impostor  of  the  same  name. 

Were  dispersed- — Auth.,  "  were  scattered."  The  Gr.  word 
occurs  only  in  this  place.  "  Scatter  "  is  iised  always  for  crKop-Ki^u 
and  its  kindred  words,  as  in  the  next  verse, 

37  The  enrolment. — Auth.,  "  the  taxing."  See  Luke  iii.  1,  and 
Note  there. 

Some  of  the. — Inserted  in  italics,  "  much  "  (Auth.)  being  omitted 
by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

38  It  will  be  overthrown.— Tynd.  and  Auth.,  "it  will  come  to 
noiight,"  suggestiug  that  it  has  in  it  the  seeds  of  decay,  aud  will 
perish  of  itself.  Rhem.,  following  Vulg.,  has  "  will  be  dissolved," 
and  so  in  verse  36  ;  but  here  the  Gr.  is  KaraXvojxai,  not  (as  there) 
SiaXvonat,  and  indicates  subversion,  not  dissolution. 

39  Pound  even  to  be  fighting.— Auth.,  "found  to  fight."  The 
Gr.  is  an  adjective,  Beo^uaxoi,  "'  fighters  against  God,"  not  used 
again  in  the  New  Testament. 

41  Dishonour. —Auth.,  "shame."  The  Gr.  is  cognate  to  that 
which  is  rendered  "had  in  honour  "  in  verse  34. 

The  Name. — "His"  (Aiith.),  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 
Tlie  abbre^-iation  by  its  expressiveness  reminds  us  of  "  the  Way  " 
(chap.  xix.  9).  "The  Name  of  Jesus  in  the  Book  of  the  Acts  is 
what  the  Name  of  Jehovah  is  in  the  Old  Testament.''  — 
(Wordsworth.) 

42  At  home. — All  English  versions,  "  in  every  house,"  as  at  chap, 
ii.  46, 

To  preach  Jestis  as  the  Christ.— This  change  is  required 
by  the  article  before  XpicTTov.  The  Apostles  in  their  preaching  to 
the  Jews  laboured  to  i)rove  (1)  that  Jesus,  their  master,  was 
risen  from  the  dead ;  (2)  that  He  was  the  Christ,  the  promised 
Messiah. 


THE  ACTS— VI.  203 


CHAPTER  VI. 

1  "Was  multiplying.  —  Axith.,  "was  multiplied."  The  Gv. 
present  participle  s]io\ys  that  the  niimber  was  on  the  increase ; 
this  appears  in  all  the  previous  English  versions,  and  Vulg., 
crescente  numero. 

The  Grecian  Jews — i.e.,  "the  Jews  of  the  dispersion," 
Hellenists,  'EW-qviffTai,  having  their  domicile  among  the  Gentiles 
in  countries  where  Greek  was  spoken,  and  speaking  that  lan- 
guage themselves;  called  here  and  elsewhere  in  Auth.  "  Grecians," 
to  distinguish  them  from  the  Greeks  by  race  ;  but  tlie  distinc- 
tion is  likely  now  to  be  overlooked,  and  requires  to  be  more  clearly 
marked  ))y  the  addition  of  '■  Jews." 

2  Not  fit. — The  Gr.  is  literally  "  not  pleasing."  Auth.,  "  not 
reason,"  following  Ynlg.,  non  est  ceqmim. 

3  Of  good  report. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  of  honest  report." 
The  Gr.  is  simply  "  witnessed  of,"  naprvpov/xevous.  The  elegant 
rendering  of  Tynd.,  "honest,"  is  losing  its  former  breadth  of 
meaning  as  the  equivalent  of  the  Latin  honestus,  "  honourable," 
and  becoming  contracted  to  the  limit  of  a  single  virtue.  Vulg., 
viros  boni  testimonii. 

4  Continue  stedfastly. — Auth.,  "  gi\-e  ourselves  continually." 
The  Gr.  is  St.  Luke's  often  i-epeated  word,  TrpoffKapTepilv. 

8  Grace.— So  all  the  chief  MSS.  and  Vidg.,  followed  by  Wycl. 
and  Rhem.     Tynd.  and  Auth.,  "  faith." 

10  Withstand. — The  same  Gr.  is  so  rendei-ed  in  chap.  xiii.  8 
(Auth.),  but  here  "  resist." 

12  Seized. — The  word  is  used  in  the  New  Testament  only  by  St. 
Luke.  It  denotes  a  sudden  seizure  rather  than  a  capture  after 
pursuit,  which  is  implied  by  Auth.,  "  caught." 

15  Fastening  their  eyes  on  him. — As  at  chaps,  iii.  4,  iv.  12. 
Auth.,  "  looking  stedfastly." 


204  THE   ACTS— VII. 


CHAPTER  YII. 


2  Haran. — The  Hebrew  name ;  for  whicli  Antli.  has  taken  the  Gr.  . 
form  "  Cliarrau,"  as  it  is  in  the  LXX.     The  Latin  was  Charrce, 
and  under  that  name  Abraham's  ancient  dwelling-place  became 
memorable  for  the  defeat  of  the  Roman  general  Crassus  by  the 
Parthians,  B.C.  53. 

3  Land. — Anth.,  "  country."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  in  both  parts 
of  the  sentence. 

5  In  possession. — Auth.,  "for  a  possession" — i.e.,  "as  a  thing 
possessed,"  "  a  property."  The  Gr.  is  one  of  the  verbal  uoiins, 
in  which  one  meaning  by  an  easy  ti-ansition  passes  into  another, 
the  act  of  doing  into  the  thing  done ;  and  it  appears  to  have  the 
secondary  or  derivative  sense  in  verse  45. 

11  A  famine.— So  Rhcm.  Auth.,  after  Tynd.,  "a  dearth."  In 
the  next  vei-se  it  is  said  that  there  still  was  com  in  Egj^jt,  but 
Kinos  requires  for  its  rendering  a  stronger  word  than  "  dearth." 

12  Corn. — The  Gr.  (rnla  (neuter  plural)  is  j)roperly  food  made  of 
corn,  "  breadstuff s." 

13  Joseph's  race. — All  English  versions,  "  Joseph's  kindred." 
The  Gr.  yevos  is  a  more  comjn'ehonsivc  word  than  '"  kindred  " 
(compare  chap.  iv.  3lj)  ;  and  the  wider  meaning  has  been  given  to 
it  here  and  in  verse  19.  that  it  may  not  be  taken  as  equivalent 
to  (Tvyyiviia.  "  kindred,"  which  follows  in  the  next  verse. 

Became  manifest. — Auth.,  "  was  made  known."     The  Gr. 

is  (pavipov. 

IG  Shecliem  is  the  Hebrew  form  of  the  name  which  in  the  Gr. 
and  in  the  Yulg.,  and  thence  in  Auth.,  is  wiitteu  '"  Sichem." 

For  a  price  in  silver.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  fol- 
lowing Tynd.,  '*  for  a  sum  of  money."  The  literal  rendering  of 
the  Gr.  seems  better  to  suit  the  narrative  of  the  purchase  made 
by  Abraham,  in  Gen.  xxiii..  than  that  in  Gen.  xxxiii.  relating  to 
Jacob's  purchase.  But  it  is  beyond  the  scope  of  this  commentary 
to  deal  with  the  difficulties  involved  in  the  interpretation  of  tliis 
and  other  parts  of  St.  Stephen's  speech. 

17  Vouchsafed. — By  change  of  Gr.  text,  o)ixoxiyr)(Tev  for  &fxoa-fu. 
Auth.,  '■  had  sworn." 

19  Dealt  subtiUy  .  .  .  evil  entreated.— These  idiomatic  ren- 
derings are  due  to  Tynd.   Wycl.  has  "  Ijeguiled  .  .  .  tormented." 


THE   ACTS— VII.  205 

Rlicm.,  "  circumvoutiiig  our  stock  .  .  .  afflicted  our  fathers." 
Yulg. ,  circuviven  lens. 

20  Margin,  "  Or,  faw  to  God."  This  is  the  literal  reucleriug  of  the 
Hel)raism  by  which  the  highest  excellence  is  described  as  that 
which  approves  itself  to  God. 

22  Was  instructed.— So  Rhem.  All  other  Engl,  versions,  "  was 
learned,"  a  phrase  which  now,  losing  its  old  sense,  has  come  to 
denote  the  fulness  of  knowledge  which  is  the  fruit  of  instruction. 

Gv.,    fTraiSevdr]. 

23  He  was  well-nigh  forty  years  old.—  Auth.,  with  Tynd., 
"  When  he  was  full  forty  years  old."  The  Gr.  is  literally,  "when 
the  age  of  forty  years  was  being  fulfilled  to  hiiu."  In  the  Engl, 
versions  the  imperfect  tense,  like  the  present  tense  of  the  same 
verb  in  chap.  ii.  1,  has  been  imderstood  as  denoting  an  accom- 
plished event,  not  one  in  course  of  fulfilment. 

24;  Smiting. — Auth.,  "and  smote."  The  construction  and  sequence 
of  the  words  is  the  same  as  in  chap.  v.  30.  The  English  idiom 
would  be  "  slew  by  hanging,"  "  avenged  by  smiting." 

25  Understood  .  .  .  was  giving.— Auth.,  "  woidd  have  under- 
stood .  .  .  would  deliver."  The  verbs  in  Gr.  are  in  the  present 
tense  of  the  infinitive.  He  thought,  when  lie  had  done  the  deed, 
his  brethren,  who  witnessed  it,  understood  the  meaning  of  it, 
but  they  did  not. 

"Was  giving  them  deliverance. — The  Gr.  is  properly  "  sal- 
vation ;  "  but  this  word  conveys  to  our  thoughts  the  notion  of  a 
spiritual  deliverance  which  the  original,  as  used  here  by  St. 
Stephen,  woidd  not  suggest  to  his  Jewish  audience. 

29  A  sojourner. — Auth.,  "  a  stranger."  Gr.,  ndpotKos.  Compare 
Luke  xxiv.  18. 

30  Were  fulfilled.— Tynd.,  Rliem.,  and  Auth.,  "  expired."  The 
Gr.  is  the  ordinary  word,  ir\7]po>d4vTcov. 

Si  I  have  surely  seen. — The  Gr.  is  the  Hebraism,  so  f.i-equent  in 
the  Scriptures,  "  seeing  I  have  seen,"  where  the  particii>le  with 
the  verb  gives  an  emphatic  assurance  of  what  is  said,  e.g.,  '"  bless- 
ing I  will  bk^ss  thee."  The  reduplication  adopted  by  Auth.  after 
Gcnev.,  "  I  have  seen,  I  have  seen,"  gives  the  same  meaning  iu 
our  English  idiom,  but "  I  have  surely  seen  "  are  the  words  iu 
Exod.  iii.  7  (Auth.). 

35  A  deliverer.—Gr.,  "  a  redeemer,"  XvTpoor-nv.  See  Note  on 
\e^ne,  25,  which  applies  to  this  word  as  well  as  to  "  salvation." 


206  THE    ACTS— VIL 

36  This  man  led  them  forth.— So  Wyel.  Autli.,  "he  brought 
tbem  out."  The  Gr.  is  usually  rcudered  to  "  lead,"  uot  to 
"  briug;  "  but  the  tense,  beiug  the  aorist,  denotes  the  completed 
work,  aud  therefore  the  participle  following  is  retrospective,  and 
is  properly  "  having  wrought." 

37  Like  unto  me.— See  Note  on  chap.  iii.  22. 

"  Him  shall  ye  hear  "  (Auth.)  appears  to  have  been  interpolated 
from  Deut.  x^dii.  15. 

38  Sinai. — Here  again  Auth.  has  retained  the  form  in  which  the 
word  appears  in  the  Gr.  aud  in  the  Yulg.,  "  Siua." 

Living  oracles.— Auth.,  "  the  lively  oracles,"  from  Gcucv. 
The  other  Engl,  versions,  "  words  (or,  the  words)  of  life."  The 
Gr.,  Aoyia,  "  oracles,"  was  used  of  the  responses  given  by  the 
priests  or  priestesses  of  the  heathen  deities,  as  at  Delphi,  to  those 
Avho  came  to  inquii'e  of  them.  The  word  is  applied  in  Rom.  iii.  2 
to  the  Hebrew  Scriptiu-es.  The  "  oracles "  of  God  were  not 
ephemeral  like  those  heathen  utterances;  they  were  "li^nug 
oracles,"  not  as  giving  life,  but  as  coming  from  the  true  living 
God,  aud,  like  Him,  having  a  A-itality  which  endures  for  all  ages. 
(Compare  Ps.  cxix.  89,  "  O  Lord,  thy  word  endureth  for  ever  in 
heaven.")  "  Lively,"  tlie  word  of  Auth.,  is  used  in  the  Bible  in 
contrast  to  "  feeble,"  "  languid,"  as  in  Exod.  i.  19.  and  this  is  its 
present  acceptation  ;  but  we  find  the  older  and  now  archaic  sense, 
*'  living" — in  which  it  is  here  to  be  understood — in  the  Church's 
prayer  "  for  the  Church  militant,"  "  thy  true  aud  lively  word,"  as 
also  in  Ps.  xxxA^ii.  19 ;  1  Peter  i.  3,  ii.  5. 

•i3  Rephan. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  Remphan." 

•i-i  The  tabernacle  of  the  testimony.— So  Rhem.,  following 
Yulg.  All  other  Engl.  Avrsious.  "  the  tabernacle  of  witness." 
The  same  phrase  is  used  in  Num.  ix.  15  concerning  the  tabernacle 
in  the  wilderness,  in  which  was  the  ark  containing  the  two  tables 
of  the  law,  the  "  testimony  of  the  covenant."  Compare  also 
Rev.  XV.  5  (Auth.).  In  the  LXX.  the  same  words  are  used  for 
the  tabernacle,  where  in  the  Hebrew  it  is  described  as  the  "  taber- 
nacle of  the  congregation"  (Exod.  xx\^i.  21). 

The  figure.— Auth.,  "  the  fashion."  "Wj-cl.  and  Rhem., "  form." 
Gr.,  rinrof  (tj'pc).  The  same  Avord  is  used  in  verse  43 ;  its  proper 
meaning  is  "  figure,"  or  "  pattern,"  as  in  Rom.  v.  14  (Auth.). 

St.  Stephen  contrasts  the  heathenish  modes  and  objects  of 
worship  which  the  Israelites  adopted  as  outward  j)resentments  of 
the  things  unseen  with  what  God  had  given  them  through  Moses 


THE  ACTS— VII.  207 

to  be  to  tliem  "  a  copy  and  shadow  of  tlie  licavcidy  tilings"  (Holj. 
viii.  5).  "Fasliiou  "  (Anth.)  is  a  word  wliieli  has  sunk  in  dignity 
since  it  was  imported  into  onr  language  from  tlie  Frencli. 

45  In  their  turn. — Anth.,  with  Craum.,  "  that  came  after."  The 
Gr.,  not  again  foimd  in  the  New  Testament,  is  literally,  "re- 
ceiving in  succession."  For  the  adverbial  sense  here  given  to  it, 
equivalent  to  t/c  5ia5ox7?s,  "  iu  their  turn,'  we  may  compare  Herod. 
viii.  142  (Field). 

The  possession;— See  Note  on  verso  5.  The  Gr.  is  literally, 
''  in  the  taking  possession  of  the  nations,"  i.e.,  of  the  laud  of  the 
nations. 

Thrust  out. — Anth.,  "  droA-e  out."  The  Gr.,  i^Sxrev,  is  a  cog- 
nate A'erb  to  that  rendered  "thrust  from  them"  (Auth.)  in 
verse  39. 

46  Asked  to  find.— Not  merely,  "desired  to  find"  (Auth.).  For 
tlie  same  construction  compare  chap.  iii.  14.  David  in  2  Sam. 
Aai.  2  is  represented  as  expressing  a  "desire." 

A  habitation.- So  in  Pss.  xxvi.  5,  Ixxx.  5.  All  English  ver- 
sions, "  a  tabernacle." 

48  "  Temples." — (Auth.)     Omitted  by  change  iu  Gr.  text. 

52  The  righteous  one.— As  at  chap.  iii.  14,  where  see  Note. 
Compare  also  Luke  xxiii.  47. 

53  Ye  who. — Auth.,  "  who."  Gr.  o'lnvis,  which  is  often  used  in 
the  Acts  and  the  Epistles,  where,  as  here,  the  condition  or  cou- 
diict  of  the  persons  already  mentioned  is  eidarged  upon,  and  the 
relative  clause  is  not  introduced  for  simple  identification.  [Alford.) 
Compare  chap.  x.  41. 

As  it  was  ordained  by  Angels.— Auth.,  "by  tlie  disposi- 
tion of  angels."  Yulg.,  in  disjpositione  angelorum.  The  Gr., 
eis  8iaTa7aj  dyyeAaiv,  appears  to  meau  literally  "  at  the  appoint- 
ment of;  "  the  preposition  els  having  the  same  force  as  in  Matt, 
xii.  41,  "  they  repented  at  the  preaching  of  Jonah,"  els  rh  K-fipvy/jLa. 
The  words  of  St.  Paul  also,  "  The  law  .  .  .  was  ordained 
through  angels  by  the  hand  of  a  mediator"  (Gal.  iii.  19),  were 
probably  suggested  by  this  saying  of  St.  Stephen. 

59  Calling  upon  the  Lord. — Auth.,  "  calling  upon  God."  If.  as 
the  transitive  Gr.  verb  appears  to  rec[uire,  a  word  must  be  sup- 
plied, it  should  be  that  which  is  suggested  by  the  prayer  itself. 
"  Lord  Jesus." 


208  THE  ACTS— VIII. 


CHAPTER  YIII. 

1  There  arose  on  that  day.— Autli.,  with  Tyiid.,  "  at  that 
time  there  was."  Tlie  Gr.  says  emphatically  that  on  that  self- 
same day  ou  wliicli  Stephen  was  killed  the  persecution  began. 
So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following  Vulg.  In  other  places  the  Gr., 
if  iKilvri  tt)  rjfi4pa.,  is  coiTectly  rendered  in  Auth.,  "  the  same  day." 
Compare  Luke  xxiii.  12. 

There  arose.— Auth.,  -there  was;"  Gr.,  (yevero. 

2  Buried.— So  Wycl. ;  Auth.,  "  Carried  to  Ms  burial."  The  Gr. 
is  properly  "  joined  in  carrjnng,"  but  includes  the  whole  cere- 
mony of  burial.  Compare  Soph.,  Ajax,  1047.  Vulg.,  ciira- 
vcrtitit  Stephanum,  whence  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  "dressed." 

3  But  Saul.— Auth.,  "and  as  for  Saxd,  he,"  following  Cranm. 
Tlie  Gr.  is  simply  2aCAos  S4. 

Iiaid  waste. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  ''made  havoc  of;"  a  good 
rendering  in  itself,  but  used  for  anotlier  woi'd  {eTrSpOow)  iu  Gal. 
i.  13,  where  St.  Paid  says  of  himself,  '"  I  made  liavoc  of  tlie 
Church." 

6  When  they  heard,  and  saw  .  .  .  — Auth.,  not  so  dis- 
tinctly, "  hearing  and  seeing  the  miracles  which  he  did,"  where 
both  verbs  seem  to  have  "  the  miracles  "  for  their  object.  More- 
over the  Gr.  is  iv  r^  uKovetv,  suggesting  a  relation  of  time,  "  when 
they  heard,"  not  a  participial  construction,  as  iu  Auth. 

7  Palsied. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  taken  with  palsies."   AVyd. 
aiul  Rliem..  "  sick  of  the  palsy."     The  participle,  TropaA.€\i;jufVo$ 
is  used  by  St.  Luke  both  in  the  Gospel  and  the  Acts  for  "para- 
lytic," irapaAvTiK6s,  which  we  find  in  the  first  two  Gospels. 

9  Amazed. — Tynd.  and  Auth.,  "  be^A-itched."  The  Gr.,  f^lcnoiv, 
does  not  occur  again.  The  cognate  verb,  e^l<TTT]/xi,  in  verse  11,  is 
rendered  by  the  same  word  in  Auth.,  probably  because  it  is  here 
in  connection  with  the  practices  of  a  sorcerer ;  but  there  is  no 
ground  for  saying  the  jjeople  were  "  bewitched."  Elsewhere  in 
Auth.  e^iVxTjyut  is  "  to  amaze,"  or  "astonish,"  as  in  verse  13  it  is 
said  of  Simon  that  "he  wondered." 

10  That  power  of  God  which  is  called  Great.— By  change 
in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  the  great  power  of  God."  The  Samari- 
tans, it  is  said,  called  the  angels  "  the  powers  of  God,"  and  to 
one  whom  they  believed  to  be  the  chief  this  title  may  have  been 
given,  "  the  Great  Power."     [Alford.) 


THE  ACTS— Vin.  209 

12  Preaching  good  tidings  concerning.— Antli.,  "preaeliing 
the  things  concerning."  By  a  change  in  Gr.  text  (the  omis- 
sion of  ra)  tlic  verb,  which  is  the  same  as  in  verse  4,  becomes 
intransitive,  and  consequently  has  received  its  fiUl  meaning, 
"  preach  good  tidings,"  in  tlie  translation.  There  appears  to  be 
no  exactly  similar  instance  of  its  neuter  use  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment. 

1 3  He  was  amazed. — See  Note  on  verse  9.  It  was  now  his  tvirn 
to  be  "amazed  "  when  he  saw  the  miracles,  the  "great  powers  " 
of  the  Apostles  (see  marginal  Note),  as  the  people  had  been 
amazed  by  him,  and  had  given  him  the  title  of  the  "  great  power 
of  God  "  (verse  10).  In  verse  19  he  seeks  that  higher  "  jjower  " 
which  the  Apostles  possessed,  and  which  he  thinks  to  obtain  with 
money. 

23  In  the  gall  of  bitterness.— Margin,  "  Or,  tviU  become  gall 
(or  a  gall  root)  of  bitterness,  and  a  bond,"  &c.  This  alternative 
has  for  its  object  to  give  effect  to  the  peculiar  Gr.  phrase, 
fls  xoA-V  TTiKpias  .  .  .  &pu  <Tf  oj'To,  which  may  moan,  not ,"  I  see 
thee  being  in,"  l)ut  (by  a  Hebraism)  "  being  for  " — i.e.,  "  about 
to  become,"  as  in  Mark  x.  8,  "  tliey  shall  become  one  tlesh  ;  " 
also,  instead  of  "  the  gall,"  "  a  gall  root " — gall  [xo^v)  being  the 
name  of  a  plant,  the  root  of  which  from  its  intense  bitterness  was 
connected  proverbially  with  wormwood,  and  the  juice  of  which 
was  offered  to  the  Sa-\aour  on  the  cross,  mingled  with  wine  (Matt. 
xxvii.  34).  The  plant  is  mentioned  by  this  name  in  Deut.  xxix. 
18  ;  in  Hosea  x.  4  it  is  called  "  hemlock." 

The  marginal  rendering,  however  probable  at  first  sight,  is  objec- 
tionable, inasmuch  as  it  points  to  the  future  malignity  of 
Simon's  character  at  the  moment  when  hope  of  foi-giveness  is 
held  out  to  him  ;  and  the  Gr.,  ovra  fls,  "  being  in,"  is  not  unusual. 
Compare  chap.  vii.  12  (revised  Gr.  text) ;  Mark  xiii.  16. 

26  The  same  is  desert. — A  separate  sentence,  and  probably  an 
explanation  added  by  St.  Luke.  So  Yulg.,  Wycl.,  and  Rhem. 
Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  which  is  desert." 

37  This  verse  has  been  omitted  from  the  Gr.  text  on  the  authority 
of  all  the  leading  MSS.,  and  in  conformity  with  the  example  of 
almost  all  recent  editions  of  tlie  Gr.  Testament.  It  appears  to 
have  been  inserted  at  an  early  pei'iod  as  a  record  that  a  definite 
confession  of  faith  was  required  before  baptism  in  the  apostolic 


210  THE    ACTS— TX. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

2  The  Way. — All  English  versions,  "tins  ■way,"  except  "WycL, 
who  has  "  of  this  life,"  as  if  he  had  read  vitce,  not  vice,  m  the 
Yulg.  Compare  the  similar  phrase,  "the  Name"  (chap.  v.  41). 
It  was  "  the  way  of  salvation,"  "  the  way  "  of  Him  who  declared 
himself  to  be  emphatically  "  tlie  Way ; "  to  the  Jews  it  was  "  the 
way  or  sect  "  of  the  Nazarenes  (chap.  xxiv.  5). 

3  Shone. — All  English  versions,  "shined,"  except  WycL, 
"  schoon ;  "  but  in  chap.  xxii.  6  all  have  "  shone."  The  two  forms 
appear  to  liave  been  used  indifferently  in  Auth.,  "  shone  "  being  the 
older  of  the  two. 

4  He  fell  upon  the  earth. —  So  Rhem.,  "falling  on  the 
ground."  All  other  English  versions,  "to  the  earth,"  as  it  is  in 
the  Gr.  in  chap.  xxii.  17,  thus  favouring  the  tradition  of  Avhich  it 
is  difficult  to  disabuse  ourselves,  so  familiar  has  it  been  made  to 
us  ui  pictures,  that  he  travelled  on  horseback.  St.  Aiigustine,  on 
the  contrary,  affirms  that  he  walked ;  and  it  is  said  the  Pharisees 
did  not  use  horses  {A.  Lapide  and  Wordsworth). 

5,  G  '■  It  is  liard  .  .  .  said  unto  him." — (Auth.)  These  words 
are  not  found  in  any  Gr.  MS.,  liaving  apparently  been  inter- 
polated from  chaps,  xxii.  10,  and  xxiv.  14.  They  are  in  the  Vulg., 
and  consequently  were  introduced  into  the  Gr.  text  published  by 
Erasmus. 

8  He  saw  nothing.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  follo\ving  Vulg. 
Tynd.  and  Auth.  foUow  another  reading  of  the  Gr.  text  (ovSfva 
for  oiJSeV),  "  he  saw  no  man."  He  saw  nothing,  being  "  blinded 
by  excess  of  light."    His  companions  were  speecliless  from  terror. 

15  A  chosen  vessel. — Margin,  "  Gr.,  a  vessel  of  election,"  a  good 
example  of  the  Hebraism  which  uses  a  second  noim  where 
Em-opean  languages,  ancient  and  modern,  have  a  qualifying 
adjective. 

19  Took  food. — Auth.,  "received  meat."  This,  coming  after  "re- 
ceived  his  sight,"  required  alteration.     Gr.,  Xa^uv  rpocp-ijv. 

21  Made  havoc  of. — Auth.,  "destroyed."  Wycl.,  "impugned." 
Rhem..  "  expr.gned."  Tynd.,  "  spoiled."  The  word  is  the  same 
wliich  St.  Paul  apphes  to  himself  in  Gal.  i.  13,  introducing  it  as 
a  term  that  others  had  used  of  liim. 

22  The  Christ. — Tynd.  and  Auth.,  "  very  Christ,"  the  only  place 
in  which  this  mode  of  expressing  the  Gr.  article  has  been  adopted 


THE    ACTS— TX.  211 

in  Anth.,  unless  it  be  iu  Jolm  vii.  26,  wlicre,  however,  it  more 
probably  includes  another  word,  aA-ndais.  In  the  Nicene  Creed 
"  very  "  represents  a.\y)dtv6s. 

24  Their  jjlot.— Tynd.  and  Anth.,  "their  laying  a-wait."  Rhem., 
"  conspirr.cy."  The  Gr.  noun  is  cognate  to  tJie  verb  which  in 
vei-se  23  is  rendered  "  took  counsel  together."  "  Lying  in  Avait," 
or  "  laying  a-wait,"  in  chap.  xxv.  15  is  for  the  Gr.  ev4Spa. 
They  watched  the  gates  also. — The  addition  of  "  also  " 
in  the  Gr.  text  indicates  the  unusual  measures  which  they  took  iu 
their  determination  to  catch  him. 

25  Through  the  wall.— So  Tynd.  Gr.,  Sia  tov  relxovs.  Auth., 
here  following  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  "  l)y  the  wall,"  proliably  misled 
by  Vulg.,  jjer  mnrum,  and  not  having  in  mind  the  further  detail 
of  this  incident  given  by  St.  Paul  himself  in  2  Cor.  xi.  33,  shewing 
that  it  was  through  the  window  of  a  house  on  the  town  wall,  as 
the  spies  were  let  down  by  Rahab  at  Jericho  (Josh.  ii.  16). 
Lowering  him. — Is  omitted  in  Auth.,  though  it  is  in  all  pre- 
vious versions  and  in  the  Gr.  text. 

28  Going  in  and  going  out.— The  more  usual  jihrase  "  coming 
iu  and  going  out "  is  here  varied  by  the  use  of  iropevo^iaL  instead 
of  ipxofj.ai,  for  which  comp.  chai).  i.  21,  also  Ps.  cxx.  8 ;  Dent, 
xxxi.  2  ;  Eurip.  Phcen.  534 

31  The  Church. — By  change  of  reading  for  "  the  Clun-ehes,"  as 
Tyud.  and  Auth.  The  great  preponderance  of  MSS.  aud  other 
authorities  is  for  the  singular,  and  so  Yulg.,  Wycl.,  and  Rhem. 
The  earliest  mention  of  "  Churches"  in  the  plural  is  in  Gal.  i. 

2,  22. 

Being  edified. — Margin,  "  Gr.,  binlded  up."  The  word  appears 
to  denote  not  the  spiritual  "edification,"  but  the  establishment 
and  or'ganisation  of  the  Church  as  a  visible  institution. 

33  Palsied. — See  Note  on  chap.  viii.  7. 

35  At  Lydda  and  in  Sharon.— Iji  Sharon,  because  it  was  not, 
like  Lydda,  a  town,  but  a  level  tract  between  the  mountains  and 
the  Mediterranean,  extending  from  Joppa  in  the  north  to  Csesarea 
in  the  south,  frequently  nunitioued  in  the  Old  Testament,  and  as 
pre-eminent  among  the  lowlauds  for  its  beauty  as  Carmel  was 
among  the  mountains.  Isaiah  speaks  of  the  excellency  of  Carmel 
and  Sharon  (xxxv.  2).  It  almost  always  has  the  article  prefixed  in 
the  Hebrew,  as  here  in  the  Gr. 

38  Delay  not.— By  change  in  G  r.  text  for  Auth.,  "  that  he  would 
not  delay."  The  ui-gency  of  ilie  message  is  thus  more  vividly  ex- 
pressed.    Compare  John  xi.  2. 


212  THE  ACTS— X. 


CHAPTER  X. 

3  Openly. — So  Wycl.     Yulg.,  manifeste;  not  in  a  dream  or  trance. 
Auth.,  "  evidently."     Gr.,  4>avepcos,  "  as  in  the  open  day," 

5  Fetch. — Aiitli.,  witli  Tjoid.,  "  call  for."     Ynlg.,  accersi.      Tlie 
Gr.  is  properly  "  send  for." 

8  Having  rehearsed. — Antli.,  "  when  he  had  declared."     The 
Gr.  signifies  the  recounting  of  a  narrative.  Yulg..  citvi  narrasset. 

11  "Knit." — (Auth.)  Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text,  and  so  in  Yidg.. 
Wycl.,  and  Rhem.  The  same  is  to  be  said  of  Auth.,  "  and  wild 
beasts,"  in  Averse  12. 

15  HHake  not.  —  So  Tynd.  Gr.,  koIvov.  Auth.,  following  Cranm. 
and  Rhem.,  "  call  not."     Compare  Note  on  Mark  vii.  19. 

23  He  arose  and  went  forth.— By  change  in  Gr.  text,  for 
"  Peter  wont  fortli."  In  this  and  the  preceding  chapters  the  name 
appears  to  have  been  several  times  added  in  the  MSS.  on  which 
the  English  Aversion  Avas  founded,  though  wanting  in  the  best  au- 
thorities which  have  been  brought  to  light  in  later  times. 

28  To  join  himself. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  with  Yidg.,  conjungi, 
rendering  the  Gr.  moi'e  literally  than  Auth.,  "to  keep  com- 
pany," and  Tynd.,  "to  company." 

30  Until  this  hour,  I  was  keeping  the  ninth  hour  of 
prayer. — So,  by  change  in  Gr.  text.  The  reading  of  this  sen- 
tence in  the  original  is  not  free  from  doubt. 

38  Jesus  of  Nazareth. — The  Name  is  tlras  placed  in  the  Gr. 
as  the  subject  of  all  that  follows. 

39  The  country  of  the  Jews. — As  distinguished  from  the  city, 
Gr.,  x'^P"-     Compare  Mark  i.  5. 

40  Gave  him  to  be  made  manifest. — Axith.,  "  sheAved  him 
openly,"  Avith  Tynd. ;  losing  sight  of  the  peculiar  phrase  of  the 
Greek. 

48  In  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for 
Auth.,  "  in  the  name  of  the  Lord."  His  name  is  specially  men- 
tioned, because  it  was  faith  in  Him,  and  in  God  revealed  throug-Ji 
Him,  which  the  converts  accepted  and  professed  at  baptism. 


THE    ACTS— XI.  213 


CHAPTER  XI. 


4  Began  and  expounded.— Auth.,  "  rehearsed  the  matter  from 
the  begiuuiug  aud  expounded,"  with  Tynd.,  the  first  ckuse 
bciug  a  paraphrase  of  api^dixivos,  aud  as  a  paraphrase  not  incor- 
rect, considering  St.  Luke's  use  of  the  same  word  in  chap.  i.  1, 
"  the  things  wliich  Jesus  beg?in  to  do  " — i.e.,  "  which  He  did 
from  the  beginning." 

St.  Peter's  defence  of  himself  here,  like  St.  Stephen's  in  chap, 
vii.,  is  put  mainly  in  the  form  of  narrative. 

11  Stood  before.— So  Auth.  at  cliap.  x.  17,  where  the  Gr.  is  the 

same;  hei"e,  "were  already  come  unto." 

12  Making  no  distinction— i.e.,  between  Jew  and  Gentile  (com- 
pare chap.  XV.  9),  by  change  of  Gr.  text  (the  active  for  the  middle 
voice),  "  doubting  nothing,"  as  all  English  versions,  and  Yulg., 
nihil  hcesitans. 

13  He  had  seen  the  angel  standing  in  his  house,  and 
saying. — Auth.,  "  he  had  seen  an  angel  in  his  house,  wliich  stood 
and  said."  The  two  participles  are  in  the  aorist,  and  to  represent 
the  action  which  in  each  case  they  describe  as  completed,  aud  not 
in  process,  the  following  translation  might  have  been  more  exact : 
"  He  had  seen  the  angel  stand  and  say  ;  "  it  might  have  been  so, 
if  our  vernacular  idiom  were  more  compliant  -with  the  Greek.  But 
in  the  j)hrase  "  saw  him  stand  aud  say  "  the  English  reader  would 
not  catch  the  pregnant  sense  of  "  stand  " — i.e.,  "stop  in  his  ad- 
vance," and  woukl  protest  against  the  combination  "  saw  him 
say "  as  an  offence  against  sense  and  cougruity  of  diction : 
whereas  "saw  him  standing  and  saying  "is  not  incorrect,  the 
sense  being  "saw  him  in  the  act  of  standing,  aud  in  the  act  of 
saying."  The  eminent  scholar  who  criticises  this  rendering  in  a 
sprightly  contribution  to  a  recent  periodical  has  himself  fur- 
nished the  answer  to  this  and  several  other  censures  which  he 
has  ijassed  on  the  Revised  Version,  when  he  says,  "  The  truth 
is,  the  meagre  staff  of  participial  forms  in  English  makes  it 
necessary  that  such  words  as  coming,  entering,  initting  on  should 
do  duty  sometimes  as  aorist,  sometimes  as  imperfect,  according 
to  the  colour  of  surrounding  circumstances."  The  same  remarks 
apply  to  chap.  x.  3,  where  the  Authorised  Version  has  not  been 
altered.  (Canon  Evans  on  the  "  Translation  of  the  Revised 
Version,"  in  tlie  Expositor  for  March,  1882.) 


214  THE    ACTS— XI, 

18  To  the  Gentiles  also  hath  God  ...  —  Tliis,  which 
follows  the  Gr.  order,  is  more  perspicuous  thau  Auth.,  "  Then 
hath  God  also,"  &c. 

19  Tribulation.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhein. ;  Auth.,  "  persecution," 
wliich  is  true  as  an  interpretation,  but  not  as  the  reuderiug  of  the 
Greek. 

20  The  Greeks.— By  change  in  Gs-.  text  for  "  the  Grecian  Jews," 
the  Hellenists.  These  Jews  of  CjiJiiis  and  Cp'ene,  being  them- 
selves Hellenists,  speaking  Greek,  would  be  better  able,  and  also 
more  willing,  than  the  Jews  of  Palestine  to  preach  the  Gospel 
to  the  pure  "  Greeks,"  heathens  to  whom  a  knowledge  of  the 
true  God  had  not  yet  extended ;  for  Cornelius  and  the  Eimueh 
were  already  before  their  conversion  more  or  less  acquainted 
with  the  religion  of  the  Jews. 

21  A  great  number  that  believed  turned  .  .  . — Auth., 
'■  A  great  number  believed  and  turned."  The  difference  is 
caused  by  the  insertion  of  the  article  before  "  believed  "  in  the 
Gr.  text. 

22  Concerning  them. — All  English  versions,  "  concerning  these 
things.''  The  Gr.  is  Trepl  avruv,  which  must  refer  to  the  persons 
just  mentioned. 

26  Even  for  a  whole  year.—"  Even "  is  added  in  the  Greek 
text. 

And  that  the  disciples  .  .  .  —  This,  according  to  the 
structure  of  the  sentence  in  Gr.,  is  connected  with  the  pre- 
ceding clause  ;  and  being  so,  it  suggests  tliat  the  new  name  of 
the  believers  arose  out  of  the  spread  of  the  faith  of  Christ  among 
the  Gentiles  (verse  21).  St.  Luke  himself  being,  according  to 
the  historian  Euscbius,  a  native  of  Antioch,  might  well  record 
the  origin  of  the  name  with  a  feeling  that  it  was  a  distinction 
for  his  city  which  should  never  be  forgotten. 

28  All  the  world— /.e.,  the  Roman  Emj)ire,  as  in  Luke  iii.  2. 

Claudius. — This  name  spoke  for  itself  in  the  time  of  St.  Luke, 
and  long  after,  Avithout  the  addition  of  "  Caesar "  (Auth.), 
which  was  probably  inserted  in  the  MSS.  of  a  later  date,  to  shew 
that  the  Roman  Emperor  of  that  name  was  intended. 

29  To  send  relief. — The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  to  send  as  or  for  a 

ministration."     Vulg.,  in  miaisterium  mlttere. 


THE  ACTS— XII.  215 


CHAPTER  XII. 


1  Put  forth  his  hands.— Auth.,  "  stretched  forth,"  which  is 
properly  used  to  render  the  Gr,  e'leTeiVaTe  iu  Luke  xxii.  53.  Here 
the  Gr.  is  eVe'ySaAev. 

4  To  guard  him.— See  Note  on  Luke  iv.  10;  "  was  kept,"  verse  5, 
represents  another  Gr.  word. 

After  the  Passover.— Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "after  Eas- 
ter " — the  only  place  in  which  the  English  version  substitutes 
the  name  of  the  Christian  for  that  of  the  Je'VArish  festival. 

5  Earnestly.— All  English  versions,  following  Yulg.,  "  without 
ceasing."  Compare  chap.  xxvi.  7  and  Luke  xxii.  44,  "  he  prayed 
more  earnestly."  This  word  was  often  repeated  by  the  deacon 
in  the  services  of  the  ancient  Churcli,  and  is  still  in  use  in  the 
East  to  arouse  the  fervour  of  the  worshippers — "  Let  us  pray 
eai'nestly,"  or  "  more  earnestly,"  SerjOaifjiiv  iKrevws,  or  eKnveaTfpoi/. 

13  To  answer.— Auth.,  "to  hearken."  The  Gr.,  which  means 
properly  "  to  hearken,"  was  the  phrase  in  use  among  the  Gi'eeks 
for  answering  at  the  door,  as  iu  Xenophon,  Sympos.  i.  11. 

15  Confidently  affirmed. — Auth.,  "  constantly  affirmed."  Tynd. 
(alone)  has  the  qiiaint  but  idiomatic  phrase  "  bare  them  down." 
The  Gr.  occurs  again  once  only  in  the  NeAV  Testament,  Luke 
xxii.  59,  and  is  there  also  used  by  St.  Luke  of  a  person  recog- 
nising Peter  by  his  voice.  It  is  there  translated  "  confidently 
affirmed  "  in  Auth. 

17  Tell  these  things.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  Go,  shew  these 
tilings ;  "  "  Go  "  being  perhaps  intended  to  express  the  a.Tr6  in 
d-KayyiiKare,  as  well  as  to  avoid  the  abruptness  of  the  impera- 
tive. 

19  Put  to  death.— The  Gr.  is  literally,  "to  be  led  away,"  an 
euphemism  for  "  being  executed "  (Hesychius).  It  is  not  else- 
where in  the  New  Testament  used  in  this  sense,  absolutely ;  but 
compare  Matt,  xxvii.  31,  "  they  led  him  away  to  crucify  him," 
airriyayov  avrhv  ds  rh  (rravpaxrai.      See  Note  on  chap.  xiii.  13. 

20  Was  highly  displeased.— The  Gr.  means  properly  "  he  bare 
a  hostile  mind,"  as  in  the  Margin  of  Auth.,  but  not,  as  that  Mar- 
gin adds,  "  intending  war ;  "  for  as  Tyre  and  Sidou  formed  part 
of  a  Roman  province,  and  were  under  the  protection  of  Rome, 
Herod,  who  was  also  subject  to  Rome,  could  not  have  actually 
contemplated  making  war  upon  them. 


216  THE    ACTS— XIII. 

Was  fed. — Wycl.,  "  victualled."  All  other  Eiigl.  Aersious, "  was 
uourislied,"  wliidi  is  iudeedthe  literal  meauiug  of  the  Gr.,  rp4cj)u> ; 
but  "fed"  is  the  usual  reuderiug  iu  the  New  Testameut  (comp. 
Matt.  vi.  26),  aud  is  more  suitable  iu  speakiug  of  iuteruatioual 
supplies  of  food,  though  "  uoui'ish  "  may  uot  be  obsolete  as  applied 
to  individuals. 

The  cities  of  Tyi-e  aud  Sidou,  with  their  narrow  strip  of  territory, 
depended  for  food  on  Palestine  in  the  time  of  Solomon  (1  Kings 
V.  11)  and  Zerubbabel  (Ezra  iii.  7). 

21  The  throne. — Margin,  "  Or,  judgement  seat."     The  Gr.  is  uot 

ep6vov  (throne),  but  jST^^aroj,  the  usual  word  for  "  tribunal  "  iii  the 
New  Testament  (as  in  Matt,  xxvii.  19),  and  it  is  so  rendered  in 
Yulg.,  followed  by  Rlicm.,  "  judgement  seat."  Tyud.,  "  seat." 
The  objection  to  giAang  the  woi'd  its  special  aud  usual  meaning 
here  ai'ises  out  of  the  detailed  and  graphic  narrative  of  the  same 
event  given  by  the  Jewish  historiau  Josephus,  who  says  it  took 
place  in  the  theatre  at  Csesarea,  on  the  1st  of  August  (''■  a  set 
day  "),  being  the  birthday  of  the  Emperor  Claudius.  The  Bema 
or  tribunal  therefore  must  have  been  not,  properly  speaking,  a 
judgement  seat,  but  the  place  called  in  modern  times  the  "  tri- 
bune " — the  royal  scat  in  the  theatre. 

25  Their  ministration. — Mentioned  in  chap.  xi.  29,  the  ministry 
to  the  poor  saints  iu  the  famine.  Auth.,  "ministry,"  which,  like 
"  ordain,"  is  used  almost  exclusively  with  reference  to  the  sacred 
office  of  the  clergy.     (Comxi.  chap.  \i.  1 ;  Luke  x.  40.) 


CHAPTER  Xni. 


Barnabas. — "  As  "  was  inserted  before  his  name  by  Tynd.,  pro- 
bably to  make  the  sentence  run  more  smoothly ;  but  it  suggests 
that  these  names  are  selected  out  of  a  larger  number,  whicli  is 
not  implied  in  the  original.  Auth.  has  also  "  certain "  before 
"  prophets,"  now  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

Poster-hrother.—  So  Rhem.  Auth.,  following  Geuev.,  "  which 
had  been  brought  up  with."  Wycl.,  "  sucking  fere  of  Eroud  " 
(mate).  Tyud.  and  Cranm.,  "  nurse -fellow."  The  Gr..  a-ivrpo- 
<pos,  is  literally  rendered  iu  Vulg.,  collectaneus,  hanug  the  same 


THE    ACTS— XIII.  217 

ineauiug  as  6/j.oyaKaKTos,  "uourislied  with  the  sauie  milk  as  Herod 
Autipas."  The  paraplirase  of  Auth.  probably  carries  the  early 
associatiou  of  the  two  further  than  the  history  would  warrant. 

2  The  particle  re,  following  the  name  of  Barnabas  in  the  received 
text,  but  not  translated  in  any  version,  is  omitted  in  the  revised 
Gr.  text.  But  there  remain  in  the  sentence  two  little  words 
which,  though  emphatic  in  the  Gr.,  can  scarcely  be  rexn-eseuted 
in  English  without  being  overdone  :  (1)  the  delicate  and  versatile 
conjunction  5t},  frequently  used  by  classical  authors  to  emphasise 
the  thought  or  feeling  mth  which  it  is  connected,  but  in  the  New 
Testament  occurring  only  four  times,  chiefly  in  urging  a  command 
or  entreaty — e.g.,  Luke  ii.  15,  "  Let  us  now  [Srj]  go  even  imto 
Bethlehem;"  Acts  xv.  36,  "now;"  1  Cor.  vi.  20,  "therefore;" 
Matt.  xiii.  23,  "  verily,"  where  see  Note.  Here,  if  represented  by 
"  now  " — "  Separate  me  now  Barnabas  and  Saul " — it  would  be 
too  prominent,  and  would  have  a  temporal  sense  attributed  to  it. 
(2)  The  article  is  here  prefixed  to  the  names  of  both  the  Apostles, 
though  in  chapters  xi.  and  xii.,  and  in  verse  7  of  this,  it  is  put  with 
neither,  and  in  verse  1  with  Barnabas  only.  "  The  Barnabas  " 
and  "  the  Saul "  seem  thus  recognised  by  the  Holy  Spii'it  as  the 
two  chief  men  in  the  Church  of  Antioch. 

4  Went  down— i.e.,  to  Seleucia,  the  seaport  of  Antioch.  To 
journey  from  the  interior  to  the  coast  was  described  as  "going 
down,"  and  vice  versa.  In  like  manner  to  sail  from  sea  to  port 
was  to  "go  down,"  to  put  out  from  i^ort  was  to  "  go  up  ;  "  the 
journeys  from  and  to  Jerusalem  were  "  down  "  and  "  up."  Auth. 
here,  "  departed,"  as  Vulg.,  abierunt,  overlooking  the  force  of 
the  preposition  in  the  Gr.  KUTrjAdov.     Compare  chap.  xv.  30. 

5  John  as  their  attendant.—  Auth.,  with  Tyud.,  "  John  to 
their  minister." 

6  Island. — All  Engl,  versions,  "  isle."  Gr.,  vrja-os.  The  term 
"  isle  "  has  long  been  used  as  a  diminutive,  and  caimot  consistently 
be  applied  to  Cyprus,  as  even  Clauda  and  Melita  are  called 
"  islands  "  in  this  book  (chaps,  xxvii.  16,  xxviii.  1,  Auth.,  fol- 
lowing Rhem.). 

Sorcerer. — The  Margin  shews  the  word  to  be  the  same  as  that 
rendered  "wise  men"  in  Matt.  ii.  1,  &c.;  but  among  the  Greeks 
and  Romans  it  was  used  in  a  bad  sense,  denoting  one  who  prac- 
tised magical  arts,  as  Simon  (Acts  viii.  9),  and  the  "strolling  Jews, 
exorcists  "  (chap.  xix.  13).  Our  word  "  sorcerer,"  in  its  original 
meaning,  is  one  who  for  purposes  of  divination  resoi-ts  to  the  cast- 
ing of  lots  {sortes),  in  Latin,  sortitor,  French,  sorcier,  in  which 
form  it  has  come  to  us.     Wycl.  here  has  "  witch."     This,  in  the 


218  THE    ACTS— XIII. 

masculine  form  "  wizard,"  would  be  au  appropriate  reudcriug  of 
the  Gr.,  iDiit  to  modern  ears  not  more  familiar  or  intelligible  tlian 
"  sorcerer." 

7  The  proconsul.  —  So  Wycl.  and  Rhcm.,  follo\^'iug  Yulg. 
Anth.,  "  deputy,"  wliichin  1611  was  probably  a  good  equivalent  of 
the  original  Liatin  title  to  which  dvOvnaros  corresponds  in  Greek ; 
the  officer  now  styled  Lord  Lieutenant  of  Ireland  having  in  the 
x-eign  of  James  I.  been  called  "  the  deputy."  "  Proconsul "  was 
the  title  of  the  officer  appointed  to  govern  those  provinces  of  the 
Roman  Empire  which  were  under  the  control  of  the  Senate.  Thus 
Cicero  was  proconsul  of  Cilicia  in  Asia  Minor.  This  word  is  now 
restored,  being  quite  as  intelligible  as  "  deputy,"  and  not  so  mis- 
leading; and  if  any  English  title  analogous  to  "proconsul" 
were  to  be  adopted,  it  woiild  j)robably,  in  course  of  time,  become 
as  inappropriate  and  obscure  as  "  deputy"  is  now. 

A  man  of  understanding. —  All  Engl,  versions,  following 
Vulg.,  "a  prudent  man."  Tlie  word  "'prudent"  is  now  cliiefly 
used  to  denote  careful  foresight  in  regard  to  worldly  affairs ; 
and  its  original  sense,  signifying  general  intelligence  and  discern- 
ment, has  b.^eii  lost  sight  of.     (Comp.  Matt.  xi.  25.) 

10  Guile. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Vulg.,  dolo.  Auth.,  following 
Tyud.,  "  subtilty,"  which  does  not  of  necessity  imply  deceit. 

Villany. — Auth.,  following  Genev.,  "  mischief."  Other  English 
Aversions,  "  deceit,"  with  Vulg.,  fallacid.  The  Gr.  properly 
means  readiness  for  mischief  of  every  kind.  Compare  chap, 
xviii.  14. 

12  The  teaching. — Auth.,  "  the  doctrine."  Comp.  chap.  ii.  42, 
"  the  teaching  of  the  Apostles."  It  is  immaterial  whether  we  here 
explain  the  phrase  to  mean  the  teaching  of  the  Lord  througli  his 
Apostle,  or  the  teaching  of  tiie  Apostle  concerning  the  Lord. 

13  Set  sail. — Auth,  "  loosed,"  which  might  be  said  of  weighing 
anchor,  or  taking  up  the  cables  by  whicli  the  .ship  was  moored  to 
the  laud;  but  the  Gr.  dvaxd^vTfs  is  a  nautical  term,  meaning  "  were 
carried  i;p  "  from  tlie  shoi-e  to  the  sea.  See  Note  on  verse  4. 
The  Gr.  word  in  its  technical  sense  is  here  used  absolutely  like 
the  cognate  verb  in  chap.  xii.  19,  "  led  to  execution." 

14  Passing  through  from  Perga— i.e.,  through  the  country. 
The  English  versions,  misled  by  Vulg.,  pertranseuntes  Per  gen, 
have  A-ariously  translated  the  Gr.  Auth.,  "they  departed  from 
Perga." 

16  Hearken.— Tyud.  and  Auth.,  "give  audience."    Gr.,  aKovoars. 


THE    ACTS— XIII.  219 

17  When  they  sojourned.—  AutL.,  with  Tynd.,  "  wheu  they 
dwelt  as  strangers."     The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  iu  their. sojourn." 

18  Suffered  he  their  manners. — The  difference  between  this 
and  the  alternative  rendering  iu  the  Margin  depends  on  the 
difference  of  the  MSS.  iu  a  single  letter.  See  Deut.  i.  31,  and 
Numb.  xi.  12. 

19  He  gave  them  their  land  .  .  . — By  change  in  Gr.  text, 
in  accordance  with  all  the  best  MSS.  and  the  Yulg.  for  Auth., 

"he  divided." 

By  another  change  in  the  Gr.  text  the  clause  which  follows  is 
connected  with  this  sentence :  gave  them  their  land  for  an 
inheritance,  for  about  four  hundred  and  fifty  years ; 

and  thus  the  discrepancy  is  avoided,  which  the  common  text 
presents,  between  the  statement  of  St.  Paul  and  the  received 
chronology  of  the  Old  Testament  as  to  the  interval  from  the 
Exodus  to  the  time  of  Samuel  the  j)ropliet. 

23  Broiight. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Ai;th.,  "raised:"  i^yaye 
for  Tjyupe. 

25  Unloose,  not  "loose"  (Auth.),  is  the  word  used  iu  Luke  iii. 
16. 

35  Because. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "wherefore,"  Sio'rt 
for  5l6.  This  verse  states  the  cause,  not  the  consequence,  of  what 
has  been  said  in  the  last. 

43  Devout.— This  is  the  word  in  Auth.,  verse  50,  and  expresses 
the  Gr.  (r^^op-ivoiv,  which  refers  to  the  habits  of  outward  worshi]) 
lietter  than  "  religious,"  which  applies,  as  now  used,  to  the  inward 
feelings  and  convictions. 

46  Thrust  it  from  you.— Aiith.,  "put  it  from  you."  The  Gr. 
denotes  a  rough,  contemptuous  rejection.     Vulg.,  I'ejJellitis. 

49  Was  spread  abroad.—  Tynd.  and  Auth.,  "  was  pubhshed," 
which  e\en  in  its  original  and  simjjle  meaning,  "  was  made 
pulilic,"  does  not  well  represent  the  Gr.  die(p€p6To,  "  was  carried 
aljout." 

50  Of  honourable  estate  —  x^Luth.,  "  honourable."  The  word 
does  not  refer  to  j)ersonal  character  but  to  social  position,  and  in 
that  sense  is  applied  to  Joseph  of  Arimathea  (Mark  xv.  43). 


220  THE  ACTS— XIV. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

2  Disobedient. — Autli.,  "  uubelieviag ;  "  as  iu  Johu  iii.  36,  where 
the  Gr.  is  the  same. 

5  An  onset.— AU  English  versions,  "an  assault."     The  Gr.  bpixri 
is  properly  a  rush  or  ouset,  not  an  attack.     Comp.  Matt.  viii.  32. 

Shamefully.— Auth.,  "  despitefuUy."     Comp.  Matt.  xxii.  6. 

10  He  leaped  up.°— For  Auth.,  "he  leaped,"  hy  change  iu  Gr. 
text  (aonst  for  imperfect).  The  leaping  was  a  single  act,  Avliile 
the  walking  was  continued,  as  appears  from  the  imperfect  tense  of 
the  verb  irepieirdTei,  the  aorist  of  which  is  used  in  verse  8. 

12  Jupiter  .  .  .  Mercury. — The  Latiu  names  are  retained, 
being  more  familiar  to  the  English  reader  thau  the  Greek,  which 
are  given  in  the  Margin.  Mcrcm-y  was  supposed  to  be  the  god 
of  eloquence,  Jupiter  the  supreme  god.  From  tlris  comparison, 
as  well  as  from  the  order  in  which  their  names  are  mentioned,  we 
may  infer  that,  though  Paid  was  the  chief  speaker,  Barnabas 
took  the  lead,  and  was  in  appearance  the  more  majestic  and  com- 
manding of  the  two.  These  Lycaoniaus  would  be  the  more  ready 
to  entertain  such  a  faucy,  because  iu  the  ueighboming  district  of 
Phrygia  Jupiter  and  Mercury  were  said  to  have  appeared  in  the 
old  time  iu  the  person  of  men,  and  to  have  been  hospitably  en- 
tertained by  Baucis  and  Philemon. 

13  Whose  temple  was  before  the  city.— Literally,  as  in 
Auth.,  "who  was  before  the  city" — i.e.,  was  euslu'ined  in  a 
temple  outside  the  gate  of  the  city,  as  its  tutelary  god.  The 
protection  of  the  heathen  deities  was  sometimes  invoked  by  an 
appeal  addressed  to  them  as  being  "  iu  front  of  "  their  city — e.g., 
in  ^schylus,  Septem  contra  Thebas. 

15  Of  like  passions  vrith  you. —  So  Auth.,  correcting  the  pre- 
\ious  versions,  which  have  "  moi-tal "  or  (as  Wycl.)  "  deadly 
men,"  misled  by  Vulg.,  tnortales  sumus,  similes  vohis. 

16  The   generations    gone    by.  —  Auth.,  "  times  past,"     Gr., 

yeveaTs. 

17  From  heaven  rains  and  fruitful  seasons.— The  seasons 
as  well  as  the  rains  are  treated  as  gifts  from  heaven.  The 
poetic  diction  and  the  rhythm  of  this  passage  in  the  original 
seem  to  indicate  that  it  is  a  citation  from  a  Greek  lyric  poet. 
(Humphry,  Commentary  on  the  Acts,  1847.) 


THE  ACTS— XV.  221 

19  Dragged. —  Aiith.  here  has  "drew,"  but  "dragging"  for  the 
same  word,  apphed  to  a  net,  in  John  xxi.  8. 

21  Had  made  many  disciples. —  Auth.,  "had  taught  many." 
Compare  Matt,  xxviii.  19,  and  Note  there, 

23  Appointed  .  .  .  elders.— Auth.,  "ordained,"  with  Wyel. 
and  Rhem.  Vidg.,  cum  constituissent.  The  Gr.  x^^po'^o^^^  means 
"  to  elect  by  show  of  hands,"  then  simply  "  to  elect  or  choose,"  in 
which  sense  it  is  usedin  2  Cor.  viii.  19,  the  only  other  place  of  the 
New  Testament  in  which  it  occurs.  The  cognate  noixn,  irpoxeipo- 
rovid,  is  used  of  the  "  choice  made  beforehand  "  by  God  in  Acts 
X.  41.  The  woi'd  does  not,  as  used  in  the  New  Testament,  indicate 
popular  election,  or  even  election  at  all,  properly  so  called — i.e., 
choice  made  out  of  a  number — nor  "the  laying  on  of  hands,"  as 
has  been  suggested;  but  is  simply  " appointed,"  in  which  sense 
"  ordained  "  was  used  in  Axith. 

2G  Committed.— So  Genev.  "Recommended"  (Auth.),  is  not  an 
apposite  word,  where  the  address  is  made  to  God.  It  is  only 
used  again  in  Auth.  at  chap.  xv.  40,  and  there  in  the  same 
connection. 

27  A  door  of  faith.— All  Engl,  versions,  "  the  door."  The  article 
is  neither  expressed  nor  implied  in  the  Gr.  This  metaphor, 
deriA'ed  probably  from  the  saying  of  our  Lord  with  regard  to 
HiniseK,  is  f i-equeutly  used  by  St.  Paixl,  as  in  1  Cor.  x^i.  9  ;  2  Cor. 
ii.  12  ;  Col.  iv.  3. 


CHAPTER  XY. 

1  The  custom  of  Moses. — Aiith.,  "  manner ;"  but  "  customs  " 
for  the  same  Gr.  in  chap.  vi.  15.  The  word  properly  means  a 
national  custom  ;  the  "  manner"  might  be  said  if  it  were  a  per- 
sonal habit,  or  a  temporary  fashion. 

2  Questioning. — By  change  of  reading — the  simple  for  the  com- 
pound noun.  Auth.,  "  dispiitation."  The  cognate  word  in  this 
verse  is  rightly  rendered  "  question  "  in  Auth. 

Appointed.— Auth.,  "  determined."    Gr.,  era^av. 


222  THE  ACTS— XV. 

6  "Were  gathered  together.— Auth.,  "came  togotlicr."  The 
verb  in  the  passive  voice  probably  indicates  that  they  were  con- 
vened by  some  one  who  had  authority. 

7  A  good  while  ago.— The  Margin,  "  Gr.,  from  early  days" 
gives  to  tlie  adjective  dpxaios,  instead  of  its  usual  meaning 
"  ancient,"  tliat  which  etymologically  belongs  to  it, '"  at  the  begin- 
ning," "  early,"  wliicli  it  has  in  chap.  xxi.  16,  where  Mnasou  is 
called  "  an  early  disciple."  The  dioiee  of  St.  Peter  for  the  con- 
version of  Cornelius  (chap,  x.)  had  been  made  ten  or  fourteen 
years  before  the  holding  of  the  council  at  Jerusalem  in  the  early 
days  of  the  Church. 

9  Made  no  distinction. — More  idiomatic  than  Anth.,  "  put  no 
difference." 

10  Why  tempt  ye  God,  that  ye  should   put  ?—  So  Tynd. 

All  otlier  Engl,  versions,  "  Wliy  tempt  ye  God,  to  put  ?  "  follow- 
ing Vulg.,  imponere  jugmn.  a  literal  translation,  yet  not  giving 
tlie  true  sense  of  the  Gr.,  which  is  not  tliat  they  tempt  God  to  do 
it,  but  tliat  they  tempt  Him  l)y  doing  it  themselves — they  put  to 
the  proof  His  will  by  setting  up  against  it  their  own  determina- 
tion to  lay  an  intolerable  j^oke  upon  the  Gentiles.  The  construc- 
tion may  be  compared  with  that  in  chap.  xxvi.  28,  ireideis  /le 

iroirjaai. 

14  Symeon. — The  Hebrew  form  of  the  name,  and  that  which  St. 
James  would  naturally  employ,  Jieing  a  Jew  by  birth,  in  address- 
ing an  audience  composed  chiefly  of  Jewisli  Christians.  Accord- 
ing to  many  of  the  MSS.,  St.  Peter  called  himself  by  this  name 
at  the  beginning  of  his  Second  Epistle. 

17,  18  The  change  in  the  text  and  alternative  rendering  in  the  Margin 
are  due  to  change  in  the  Gr.  text. 

19  My  judgement  is. — Gr.,  iyoo  Kpivu.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "my 
sentence,"  which  implies  a  judicial  decree,  such  as  would  preclude 
the  confirmation  given  to  this  authoritative  counsel  of  St.  James 
by  the  apostles  and  elders  (see  chap.  xvi.  4). 

20  Write  unto. — Margin,  "  Or,  enjoin."  Y\\lg.,  scribere.  "  En- 
join "  is  the  usual  meaning  of  the  Gr.  verb,  from  wlience  comes 
our  word  ''  epistle  "  (verse  30). 

From  what  is  strangled. — Auth.,  "  from  things  strangled." 
The  word  is  in  the  singular  number.  Tlie  flesh  of  an  animal 
killed  by  strangling  retains  tlie  blood,  and  on  that  account  was 
considered  a  delicacy  among  the  Greeks ;  while  among  the  Jews 
it  was  prohibited  by  the  ancient  injunction  recorded  in  Gen.  ix.  4 


THE  ACTS— XV.  223 

as  having  been  given  to  Noah  and  renewed  by  Moses,  Levit.  x\\i. 
13.  It  is  still  strictly  observed  by  the  Jews,  and  not  entirely 
obsolete  among  Cliristians. 

21  Prom  generations  of  old. — The  same  Heln-aism  as  in  chap, 
xiv.  16.  Auth.,  '■  of  old  time."  Wyel.  and  Rhem.,  "  of  old 
times,"  following  Ynlg.,  temporibus  antiquis. 

22  It  seemed  good. — All  Engl,  versions,  "  then  pleased  it,"  fol- 
lowing Ynlg.,  placuit ;  bnt  in  verse  25  for  the  same  Gr.,  "  it 
seemed  good." 

To  choose  .  .  .  and  send  .  .  .—  The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  it 
seemed  good  to  the  apostles,  &c.,  that  they  should  choose  men 
out  of  their  company  and  send  them."  Auth.,  "to  send  chosen 
men,"  does  not  shew  by  whom  the  choice  was  to  be  made. 

23  The  elder  brethren.— By  omission  of  "and  "  in  the  Gr.  text 
the  Epistle  goes  forth  in  the  names  of  the  heads  of  the  Church 
only. 

Greeting. — This  word  (xafpeii/)  is  at  the  end  of  the  salutation,  as 
usual  in  a  Greek  or  Roman  letter — e.g.,  in  the  Epistle  of  St.  James. 
The  final  salutation,  "  fare  ye  well,"  is  likewise  in  the  Greek 
form. 

24  "  Saying  .  .  ." — Omitted  in  the  Gr,  text,  there  being  strong  MS. 
authority  against  it. 

25  Having  come  to  one  accord.— Not  merely  "  being  assembled 
with  one  accord,"  as  all  Engl,  versions,  following  Ynlg.,  but 
having  come  to  an  miauimous  decision. 

27  By  word  of  mouth. — Auth.  and  Tynd.,  "by  mouth."  Wycl. 
and  Rhem.,  following  the  Gr.,  "  by  word." 

29  It  shall  be  well  with  you.— All  Engl,  versions,  "ye  shall 
do  well,"  which  hardly  conveys  now  the  meaning  of  the  Gr.,  "  ye 
.shall  prosper." 

31  The  consolation.— Margin,  "  Or,  exhortation."  The  Gr.  ad- 
mitting of  either  meaning,  the  former  is  here  preferred,  because 
the  main  purport  of  the  letter  is  to  relieve  the  minds  of  those  to 
whom  it  is  addressed.  (Comp.  chap.  xvi.  40.)  In  the  next  verse 
the  kindred  verb  has  the  more  usual,  and  in  that  place  the  more 
apposite,  rendering. 

33,  34  The  changes  and  omissions  in  these  verses  are  due  to  changes 
in  the  Gr.  text. 

37  Was  minded.— Auth.  (alone),  "determined."  Tynd.,  "gave 
counsel."    The  Gr.  is  efiovAero,  by  change  of  text  for  i^ovKivo-aTo. 


224  THE  ACTS— XVI. 

Yulg.,  volehat,  whence  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  "  woiilcT  take,"  "  would 
liave  taken."  The  rendering  of  Auth.  is  too  strong  for  eitlier 
reading  of  the  Gr.  text. 

38  Withdrew. — All  English  versions,  "  departed,"  which  is  used  in 
A^^th.  for  twenty-one  Gr.  words,  each  having  its  distinctive  sliade 
of  meaning  (see  verses  39,  40).  The  A-erb  which  stands  here  has 
a  stronger  sense  given  it  in  1  Tim.  iv.  1,  "  shall  fall  away  from." 

39  They  parted  asunder. — Auth.,  following  Wycl.  and  Tynd., 

"they  departed  asunder."  "Depart,"  in  the  sense  of  "  divide  or 
part,  'was  formerly  used  as  a  transitive  verb,  e.g., in  the  Marriage 
Ser\ace  before  1662,  "  till  death  us  depart,"  but  as  a  verb  neuter 
in  that  sense  examples  of  it  are  wanting,  imless  this  be  one. 


CHAPTER  XYI. 

7  Over  against.— The  Gr.  is  Kara. ;  Auth.,  "  to." 

The  Spirit  of  Jesus.— This  is  the  reading  of  all  the  gi-eat 
MSS.,  and  has  long  been  adopted  in  critical  editions  of  the  Gr. 
text. 

Assayed. — The  old  form  of  "  essayed,"  "  attempted."  It  has 
been  retained,  being  in  this  foi'm  quite  intelligible,  and  so  wi'itten 
in  Shakspeare,  Milton,  &c.,  though  now  confined  to  the  "  assay  " 
of  the  precious  metals. 

10  Sought. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  the  usual  rendering  of  Cvrea. 
Auth.,  "endeavoured." 

Concluding. — Auth.,  "  assuredly  gathering."  The  Gr.  is 
literally  "  putting  together  one  thing  and  another,"  and  in  chap. 
ix.  22  is  rendered  "■  proving." 

12  The  first  of  the  district.— Auth.,  "  the  chief,"  but  the  Gr., 
■Kpuri],  may  inean  either  that  it  was  the  chief,  or  the  first  city  to 
which  they  came  in  their  journey. 

A  Roman  colony. — The  insertion  of  Roman  is  made  because 
there  were  many  Greek  colonies,  but  the  word  liere  is  Latin, 
colonia,  denoting  a  Roman  colony,  and  such  at  this  time  was 
Philippi,    like  York,   Colchester,  St.   Albans,  and  other  cities 


THE  ACTS— XVI.  225 

of  the  provinces,  which  were  Roman  settlements,  organised  and 
governed  on  the  model  of  Rome,  and  by  Roman  law. 

13  Were  come  together. — Auth.,  "rcsoi-ted;  "  it  is  not  a  habit 
of  frequenting  the  place  that  is  here  spoken  of,  but  a  particular 
oc<^asion.     Compare  John  xviii.  20. 

14  One  that  worshipped. — The  Gr.  participle  is  descriptive, 
not  definiug.     Auth.,  "  which  worshipped." 

16  To  the  place  of  prayer. — AUEuglish  versions,  "to prayer." 
The  Gr.  Trpoa-evxv  (proseuche),  "prayer,"  was  also  used  to  desig- 
nate the  "  prayer-house,"  commonly  established  where  there  was 
a  Jewish  community  not  sufficiently  numerous  or  wealthy  to  have 
a  synagogue  ;  that  such  is  the  meaning  here  is  made  veiy  pro- 
bable by  the  article  prefixed  to  the  word  in  the  best  MSS. 

18  Sore  troubled.— Compare  chap.  iv.  2. 

It  came  out. — Auth.,  "  he."  There  is  no  reason  why  a  mascu- 
line personality  should  be  attributed  to  this  evil  spirit  of 
heathendom. 

19  Gone. — Margin,  "  Gr.,  come  out."  The  word  is  the  same  as  in 
the  last  verse. 

20  The  magistrates. — (See  Margin.)  The  two  municipal  Go- 
veruors  of  a  Roman  city  in  the  provinces  were  called  from  their 
number  Duumvir i,  from  their  office  Prcetores,  the  Gr.  for  which 

was  (TTpaT-qyol. 

22  To  beat  them  with  rods.— So  all  English  versions,  pre- 
ceding Auth.,  which  omits  "  ■with  rods."  The  rods  were  those 
borne  ordinarily  by  the  Roman  lictors.  Wycl.,  "  yards."  St. 
Paul  says,  2  Cor.  xi.  25,  "  thrice  was  I  beaten  with  rods  " — i.e., 
by  the  Romans. 

27  Being  roused.— Auth.,  "  waking,"  which  but  feebly  expresses 
the  phrase  of  the  Gr. 

Escaped. — The  Gr.  is  iKw^pevyivai.  Auth.,  "fled"  would 
rej)resent  the  simple  verb,  without  the  preposition  iK. 

29  Lights.— AU  English  versions,  following  Vulg.,  "  a  light."  It 
appears  not  to  have  been  observed  that  the  Gr.  <^wto  is  in  the 
plural  number. 

Si  Set  meat.— Gr.,  "a  table."  Compare  Ps.  Ixxviii.  19,  "shall 
God  prepare  a  table  in  the  wilderness  ?  " — "  the  table  "  including 
the  things  placed  upon  it.  , 

P 


226  THE  ACTS— XVII. 

Eejoiced  greatly,  with  all  his  house,  having  believed 
in  God. — This  is  the  Gr.  order;  aud  the  participle  in  the 
perfect  tense  shews  that  the  cause  of  the  rejoicing  was  the 
having  professed  their  belief. 

io  The  Serjeants. — So  Auth.,froinGenev. ;  Wycl.,  "catchpoles;" 
Tynd.,  "  ministers."  The  Gr.  is  literally  "  rod-bearers  " — i.e., 
lictors. 

57  Publicly. — All  English  versions,  "openly,"  which  would  answer 
to  cpavipws.     The  Gr.  here  is  5rifj.offla. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 


3  It  behoved  the  Christ  to  suffer. — Auth.,  "  Christ  must 
needs  have  suffered."  Compare  Luke  xxiv.  26,  where  the  Gr.  is 
the  same  as  here. 

5  Of  the  rabble. — Auth.,  "  of  the  baser  sort."  Gr.,  ayopaiwv, 
men  that  himg  about  the  market-place. 

11  Xixamining. — Auth.,  "aud  searched."  The  word  is  not  the 
same  as  in  John  v.  39,  "  Te  search  the  Scriptures." 

14  As  far  as  to  the  sea. — So  by  change  in  Gr.  text  (fa>s  for  aJs) 
for  "  as  it  were  to  the  sea  "  (Tynd.  and  Autli.).  He  was  sent 
forth  by  the  brethren,  accompanied  by  some  of  their  number,  to 
go  to  the  sea-coast ;  from  thence  his  conductors  went  on  with 
him  as  far  as  Athens. 

16  Was  provoked. — The  Gr.  is  a  stronger  word  thau  "stirred" 
(Auth.).  Comj)are  chap.  xv.  39,  1  Cor.  xiii.  5,  Heb.  x.  24,  where 
the  same  word,  or  the  cognate  noun,  is  used. 

Pull  of  idols. — The  Gr.,  «:aTei'5a>Xoy,  is  properly  "  covei'ed  \vith 
idols,"  not  as  Auth.,  "  given  to  idolatry,"  which  is,  in  substance, 
the  rendering  of  all  English  versions,  following  Vulg.,  idololatrice 
deditum.  So  full  was  the  city  of  idols,  and  so  debased  was  its 
population  at  this  time,  that  tlie  satiric  poet  Petronius  said  it 
was  easier  to  find  a  god  in  Athens  thau  a  mau.  In  the  time  of 
Xenophon  (400  B.C.)  the  multitude  of  the  objects  of  worship  was 
regarded  -with  pride.  The  whole  city  he  said,  was  one  altar,  one 
offering  to  the  Gods.     {De  Bep.  Ath.  xi.  8.) 


THE  ACTS— XVII.  227 

Beheld.— Auth.,  "  saw."  The  Gr.  word  expresses  the  couteui- 
platiou  of  a  thoughtful  person. 

17  He  reasoned. — The  Gr.  unpHes  uo  more  thau  this.  Auth., 
"  disputed." 

18  What  would  this  babbler  say?— i.e.,  "What does  he  meau?" 
Gr.,  t/  hv  d€\oi  Adyeiv  ;  So  Rheiu.  only;  Vulg.,  quid  vult  dicere  ? 
Misled  by  which,  Wycl.,  Tyiid.,  and  Auth.  have  "  what  will  he 
say  ?  "  as  if  the  verb  were  a  future.  "  Babbler  "  is  the  convenient 
translation  of  a-n-ep/xoxSyos  introduced  by  Tynd.  Wycl.,  "  sower 
of  words,"  following  Yulg.,  seminiverhius,  which  was  the  mean- 
ing given  to  the  Greek  by  Augustine,  as  if  it  were  aweipccv 
\6yovs,  as  we  siJeak  jestingly  of  "  a  word-spinner ;  "  whereas  the 
true  meaning  is  "  a  seed-picker,"  a-n-epixaTa  K^yc>iv,  a  small  bird 
that  hopped  about,  picking  up  seeds  and  chu'piug ;  and  thence 
applied  by  Athenian  jesters  to  strolling  beggars  and  chatterers. 

Jesus  and  the  resui'rection.- (Not  as  in  Auth.,  -with  a 
comma  between.)  It  is  probable,  as  Chrysostom  and  many  since 
his  time  have  thought,  that  the  Atlieniaus,  hearing  the  Apostle 
speak  much  of  Anastasis,  "  Resurrection,"  supposed  him  to  be 
setting  it  forth,  together  with  Jesus  Himself,  as  a  divinity. 

Strange  Gods — i.e.,  "foreign,"  Dieux  de  Vetranger;  Gr.,  |eVa. 
Comi)are  verse  20,  "strange  things,"  and  21  "strangers."  The 
Vulg'.  incorrectly  renders  the  Gr.,  novorum  dcemoniorum,  whence 
all  English  versions  before  Auth.  have  "  new"  fiends,  or  devils, 
or  gods.  The  Gr.  here  rendered  "  gods  "  is  the  same  that  is  com- 
monly in  the  Auth.  "  devils  ;  "  but  among  tlie  Greeks  it  had  a 
neutral  sense,  and  was  equally  applicable  to  beneficent  and  to 
malignant  divinities. 

19  Unto  the  Areopagus.— Margin,  "  Or,  before  " — i.e.,  "before" 
the  court  which  took  its  name  from  tlie  place,  the  Areopagus,  the 
hill  of  Mars,  whore  its  sittings  were  held.  That  court,  the 
supreme  and  most  venerable  tribunal  of  the  Athenians,  had 
special  jurisdiction  in  religious  matters,  and  was  therefore  the 
proper  court  to  have  cognisance  of  any  charge  against  St.  Paul, 
tlie  preacher  of  a  new  religion ;  and  Chrysostom  in  ancient  times, 
as  well  as  many  modern  commentators,  have  held  that  he  wa^i 
formally  accused  before  that  court ;  and,  grammatically,  some 
countenance  is  given  to  this  opinion  by  the  use  of  the  pi-eposition 
eVt,  compared  with  chaps,  xvi.  19,  xvii.  6,  xxv.  12.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  hill  of  Mars,  from  its  situation  just  above  the 
market-iilace,  must  haA^e  been  a  place  of  public  resort,  and  con- 
venient for  all,  whether  friends  or  opponents,  who  might  desire 


228  THE  ACTS— XYIT. 

that  he  should  be  brought  to  give  au  account  of  himself  aud  his 
teaching  before  a  larger  audience  than  he  had  yet  addressed  in  • 
the  sjTiagogue  or  the  market-place.  Moreover,  there  is  not  in  the 
narz'ative  a  trace  of  any  judicial  proceedings,  nor  anything  in  the 
speech  of  St.  Paul,  as  recorded  by  St.  Luke,  which  suggests  that 
he  was  being  tried  on  a  criminal  charge  before  a  legal  tribunal, 
and  speaking  in  his  defence. 

It  might  be  expected  that  on  tlie  hill  of  Mars  the  mind  of  the 
sti'anger  would  be  impressed  ■with  the  magnificence  of  the  religion 
which  he  sought  to  overthrow.  The  temple  of  the  Eiimenides, 
the  furies,  was  immediately  below  him ;  opposite,  at  the  distance 
of  200  yards,  was  the  hill  of  the  Acropolis,  which  being  entirely 
occupied  by  statues  and  temples  was,  to  use  the  phrase  of  an 
ancient  writer,  Aristides,  as  one  gTeat  offering  to  the  Gods  (Leake, 
Athens,  p.  278 ;  Thuc.  II.  17).  The  Persians  encamped  on  the 
Areopagus  when  they  besieged  the  Acropolis  (Herod.  YIII.  52) : 
from  the  same  place  tlie  Apostle  makes  his  first  j)ublic  attack  on 
Paganism,  of  which  the  Acropolis  was  the  stronghold.  Xerxes 
in  his  fanaticism  burnt  the  temples  of  Greece  (^sch.,  Pers. ; 
Cic.  de  Leg.  II.  10 ;  Note  on  verse  24)  :  Christianity  advanced 
more  meekly  and  surely ;  and  though  the  immediate  effect  of  the 
Apostle's  sermon  was  not  great,  the  Parthenon  in  time  became  a 
Christian  Church  (Leake,  Athens,  p.  277),  Athens  ceased  to  bo 
a  "  city  covered  with  idols,"  and  the  repugnance  of  the  Greeks 
to  images  became  so  great  as  to  be  a  principal  cause  of  the  schism 
between  the  Churches  of  the  East  and  West  in  the  8th  century. 
(Homily  on  Idolatry,  pai-t  2.)  [From  the  present  Author's  Com- 
mentary on  the  Acts,  18'47.] 

21  Sojourning  there.— So  Rhem.  The  force  of  this  word  is  en- 
tii-ely  lost  in  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  which  were  there."  Vulg., 
advence  hosjoites. 

22  Tlie  Areopagfus. — Auth.  here  lias  "  Mars'  hill "  in  the  text,  and 
"  the  court  of  Areopagus "  in  the  Margin,  whereas  in  verse  19 
"  Areopagus  "  is  in  the  text  aud  "  Mars'  Hill "  in  the  Margin.  This 
is  one  of  the  variations,  introduced  with  the  purpose  of  making 
both  terms  familiar,  which  tend  to  confuse  the  thoughts  of  an 
unwaiy  or  unlearned  reader. 

Somewhat  superstitious. — Margin,"  Or,  someiohat  religious." 
Auth., with  Tynd.,"  too  superstitious,"  apparently  following  Vulg., 
superstitiosiores.  The  question  is  not  yet  decided  whether  the 
Gr.  is  to  be  understood  in  a  good  or  a  bad  sense.  It  is  not  likely 
that  one  so  courteous  and  so  prudent  as  St.  Paid,  addressing 
a  highly  critical  and  sensitive   audience   whom  he  desired  to 


THE  ACTS— XVII.  229 

conciliate,  would  begin  by  using  an  offensive  phrase.  But  the 
word  denotes,  according  to  the  usage  of  the  best  classical 
authors,  an  excessiveness  of  religious  fear,  for  wliich  we  have 
no  better  word  tlian  "  superstition,"  though  this  implies  that 
the  religious  fear  is  erroneous,  and  therefore  is  not  an  exact 
equivalent.  This  sense  is  in  accordance  with  the  primary- 
meaning  of  the  word,  which  is  not "  god-dreading,"  but ''  iaemon- 
dreading,"  being  in  fear  of  the  daimones,  the  beings  of  an 
inferior  order  to  the  immortal  gods.  In  later  writers,  as 
Josephus,  the  word  has  a  good  sense ;  and  the  noun,  used  by 
Festus,  in  speaking  to  the  Jew  Agrippa,  to  designate  the  Jewish 
religion,  could  not  have  been  meant  offensively  (chap.  xxv.  19). 
Chrysostom  says  St.  Paul  meant  "'  very  reverent,  nothing  harsh" 
[ovSiv  ^apv).  To  meet  in  some  measure  both  these  couflictmg 
views,  "  superstitious  "  has  been  retained,  and  the  harshness  of 
the  Auth.  has  been  mitigated  by  substitiiting,  to  express  the 
comparative  form  of  the  adjective,  the  modifying  "somewhat" 
instead  of  the  intensive  "too,"  according  to  the  idiom,  common 
to  both  the  Gr.  and  Latin  languages,  which  enables  the  compara- 
tive to  indicate  either  a  deficiency  or  an  excess  (in  both  cases 
slight)  of  the  quality  contained  in  the  positive.  The  last  few 
words  are  from  the  learned  Note  of  Dr.  Field  on  this  passage. 
He  very  appositely  compjires  with  this  passage  Hor.,  Sat.  I.  ix. 
70:— 

"  Nulla  mihi,  inquani, 
Religio  est.    At  ml :  sum  paiilo  inflrinior." 

In  all  things  I  perceive  that  ye  are  . .  .—i.e.,  "  Wlier. 
ever  I  look  I  see  signs  of  it."  This,  the  order  of  the  Gr.,  conveys 
a  different  meaning  from  Auth.,  "  I  perceive  that  in  all  things  ye 
are,"  &c. — i.e.,  "  I  perceive  that  in  all  your  conduct  ye  are." 

23  As  I  passed  along— i.e.,  "  through  the  streets  of  your  city." 
Auth..  following  Tynd.,  "as  I  passed  by,"  which  would  mean, 
"  passed  by  the  objects  of  your  devotion."  The  same  Gi".  is  used 
in  the  same  sense  in  chap,  ^'iii.  40,  and  elsewhere. 

The  objects  of  your  worship.— Auth.,  "your  devotions," 
which  conveys  no  definite  meaning,  and  is  inadequate  as  a  render- 
ing of  crefidffixaTa.  The  Margin  of  Auth.  gives  as  an  alternative, 
"gods  that  ye  worship,"  referring  to  2  Thess.  ii.  4,  where  the 
word  is  well  translated,  "  all  that  is  worshipped."  Wycl.  here 
has  "mawmets,"  i.e.,  "  idols,"  following  Yn]g.,  simulacra.  Tj-ud. 
(strangely),  "  the  manner  how  ye  worship  your  gods ;  "  whence 
probably,  in  the  same  sense,  is  derived  Auth.,  "  your  devotions." 
The  Gr.  signifies  the  thing  worshipped,  not  the  act  or  manner 
of  worshipping. 


230  THE  ACTS— XVII. 

To  an  unknown  God.— All  Engl,  versions,  "  to  the  iinlaio-n-n 
God."  It  has  been  the  belief  of  Christian  antiquity,  as  well  as 
of  later  times,  that  the  Apostle  was  here  taking  for  his  text  an 
inscription  -which  expressed  the  yeai*ning  of  some  thoughtful 
mind  to  be  made  acquainted  -with  a  Being  unknown,  superior  to 
the  gods  many  and  lords  many  of  the  national  mythology :  and 
this  persuasion  is  not  invalidated  by  the  removal  from  the  Engl. 
Version  of  the  definite  article,  which  does  not  exist  in  the  original 
Greek.  "  To  an  unknown  God  "  may  be  interpreted  in  the  same 
sense,  though  not  so  conclusively.  It  is,  however,  stated  by 
Pausauias  (Avi-iting  in  the  second  century  after  Christ),  the  earliest 
extant  writer  on  the  monuments  of  ancient  Greece,  that  there 
were  at  Athens  altars  dedicated  to  "  unknown  gods."  Much 
interesting  matter  on  this  subject  is  to  be  found  in  the  Commen- 
taries of  Bishop  Wordsworth  and  Dean  Plumptre. 

What  therefore  ye  worship. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for 
Auth.,  "  whom."  Thus  the  words  of  St.  Paul  are  brought  into 
comparison  with  the  saying  of  our  Lord  to  the  woman  of  Samaria, 
"  Te  worship  that  which  ye  know  not."  "  What"  is  according  to 
the  reading  of  the  Vnlg.,  quod  colitis,  followed  by  Wycl.  and 
Rliem. 

Ye  worship  in  ignorance.— Auth.,  "  ye  ignorantly  worship." 
The  ignorance  is  with  regard  to  the  object  of  worship,  not  as  to 
the  manner  of  worshipping. 

24  The  God  that  made  ...  he  being.—  Auth.,  "  God  that 
made  .  .  .  seeing  that  "  {i.e.,  inasmuch  as  he  is).  This,  from  the 
ambiguity  of  "seeing  that,"  is  liable  to  be  misunderstood  by  a 
careless  reader,  as  if  "  seeing  "  were  to  be  connected  with  "  God  " 
at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence.  The  Gr.  is  simply  "  he  being." 
In  the  next  verse  the  same  use  of  "  seeing  that  "  for  "  since,"  or 
"  inasmuch  as,"  I'ecurs,  but  in  a  collocation  which  does  not 
occasion  ambiguity. 

25  Himself. — This  word,  here  so  empliatic  and  significant,  is  ex- 
pressed by  Tynd.,  Craum.,  and  Rhem.,  following  Vulg.,  but 
omitted  in  Wycl.,  Geuev.,  and  Auth. 

26  "Blood"  (Auth.),  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text,  is  omitted  also 
in  Vidg.,  Wycl.,  and  Rhem.  The  sense  is  substantially  the  same 
— "  He  made  of  one."  Human  nature  is  the  same  aU  the  woi'ld 
over. 

27  That  they  shotild  seek  God.— Auth.,  "the  Lord,"  which 
has  hardly  any  important  MS.  aiitlsority,  and  is  not  in  tlie 
Vulg.,  nor  in  any  English  version  before  the  Auth.      It  is  not 


THE  ACTS— XVITl.  231 

likely  that  the  Hebraic  name,  "  the  Lord,"  would  be  used  by  St. 
Paul  in  addressing  an  exclusively  heathen  audience. 

29  The  Godhead.— The  Gr.  is  a  neuter  adjective,  literally,  "  the 
divine,"  an  abstract  term  such  as  would  be  used  by  the  i)hiloso. 
phers  of  Atliens.     See  Xenoiihon,  Mem.,  i.  4,  18.     {Alford.) 

30  The  times  of  ignorance.— Not  "  of  this  ignorance,"  as  all 
Engl,  versions,  and  Vulg.,  hitjus  ignoranticp,,  over-translating  the 
Gr.  article. 

Overlooked. — Auth.,  "  winked  at,"  a  somewhat  broad  colloquial- 
ism, expressive  of  connivance,  which  is  not  in  the  Gr.  v-mpi^div. 
Tynd.,  "regarded  not;"  Vulg.,  desinciens.      (Comp.  Rom.   iii. 

25) 

30,  31  The  scholar  will  not  fail  to  observe  that  in  these  two  verses 
"  all  men  "  is  represented  by  Travras  avdpw-novs,  the  whole  human 
race;  "the  man,"  by  avZpi,  the  nobler  appellation;  and,  again, 
"  all  men  "  by  TraVros,  "  all,"  avdpd-novs  not  being  expressed  in  the 
Gr. 


CHAPTER  XYIII. 


2  A  man  of  Pontus  by  race. — Auth.,  "born  in  Pontus."  So 
Barnabas  was  "  a  man  of  CjT^rus  by  race  "  (chap.  iv.  26,  where 

see  Note). 

3  Trade. — The  same  Gr.— literally,  "art" — is  used  in  both  parts 
of  the  verse. 

4  Persuaded. — The  Gr.  is  in  the  imperfect  tense,  as  is  indicated 
by  the  Marginal  Note.     ( Comj).  chap.  xxvi.  11.) 

5  Constrained  by  the  word.—  For  "  pressed  in  the  spirit " 
(Auth.),  by  change  of  Gr.  text.  While  awaiting  at  Corinth  the 
arrival  of  his  companions,  he  had  done  no  more  than  use  quiet 
persuasion  with  the  Jews  and  proselytes  in  the  synagogue.  Now 
he  can  no  longer  restrain  himself  from  a  bolder  effort  and  a  more 
fervid  strain  of  preaclung.  The  "  word "  constrains  him ;  he 
"testifies,"  declares  himself  a  witness  to  the  truth  which  he 
asserts.      In  the   same   sj)irit   in  which  he  now  spoke   to  the 


232  THE  ACTS— XVIII. 

Corinthians  he  afterwards  wrot«  to  them,  saying,  "  Necessity  is 
laid  upon  me  :  for  woe  is  unto  me,  if  I  preach  not  the  Gospel " 
(1  Cor.  ix.  16).  For  "constrained"  comp.  Luke  xii.  50:  2  Cor. 
V.  14. 

7  Titus.— Added  by  change  in  Gr.  text.  So  Vulg.,  Wycl.,  and 
Rhem. 

11  He  dwelt.— So  "Wycl.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "he  continued." 
The  Gr.,  tKaOicre,  "  sat,"  is  unusual  in  this  sense,  "  staid  quietly." 
(Comp.  Luke  xxiv.  49.) 

12  Proconsul.— Auth.,  "  deputy,"  as  at  chap.  xiii.  7. 

Rose  up  against  Paul.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  with 
Tynd.,  "  made  insurrection,"  a  phrase  not  usually  applied  to  an 
onslaught  on  an  indi^adual. 

15  I  am  not  minded  to  be  a  judge.— Auth.,  "  I  vrill  be  no 
judge."     The  Gr.  is  oii  Pov\ofj.ai. 

17  "  The  Greeks."— (Auth.)     Omitted  in  Gr.  text. 

18  Sailed  thence  for  Sjrria.- Auth.,  "  into  Syria,"  with  Tynd. 

Gr.,  ei'y. 

21  "  I  must,"  &c.— (Auth.)  Omitted  in  the  Gr.  text,  there  being  a 
gi-eat  preponderance  of  MSS.  and  ancient  versions  against  it. 
Omitted  also  in  Vulg.,  Wycl.,  and  Rhem. 

23  Stablishing.— Auth.,  "strengthening."  (See  Note  on  Luke 
xxii.  32.) 

24  Learned. — Margin,  "Or,  eloquent."  The  Gr.,  K6ytos,iov  which 
there  is  no  exact  equivalent  in  English,  was  applicable  alike  to 
learned  writers  and  able  speakers. 

27  Encouraged  him. — So  Genev.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  makes  the 
disciples,  not  Apollos,  the  object  of  the  Gr.  participle:  "the 
brethren  wrote,  exhorting  the  disciples,"  &c. 

28  Powerfully  confuted. — Auth.,  "  mightily  convinced."  Tlie 
Gr.  means  literally  "argued  them  down,"  confuting,  but  not 
necessarily  convincing,  them. 


THE  ACTS— XIX.  233 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

1  The  upper  cotintry.  —  Literally,  "  tlie  upper  (i.e.,  inlaucl) 
imrts."     Aiith.,  "coasts,"  i.e.,  "  borders,"  as  in  Matt.  ii.  16,  &c. 

2  Did  ye  receive  .  .  .  when  ye  believed.— Auth.,  foUowing 
Tyud.,  "  Have  ye  received  .  .  .  since  ye  believed."  The  two 
aorists  in  the  Gr.  (verb  and  participle)  point  to  one  definite  time, 
"  when  they  believed  "  meaning,  probably,  when  they  made  pro- 
fession of  their  faith  and  were  baptized.  Compare  Rom.  xiii.  11, 
"  Now  is  salvation  nearer  to  ns  than  when  vfe  first  believed." 

Whether  the  Holy  Ghost  was  given. — Compare  John  vii. 
39,  "  the  Spirit  was  not  yet  given"  (Auth.).  Gr.,  d  nvfvfj.a"Ayi6v 
iariy. 

3  Into  what.— Auth.,  "  unto  what."  Gr.,  eh,  as  in  verse  5  and 
chap.  viii.  16.  Baptism  as  originally  practised  was  a  dipj)ing  or 
phmging,  and  the  practice  suggested  the  phrase  "  to  baptize 
into,"  which  was  applied  (1)  to  the  outward  sign — the  water ;  (2) 
to  the  inward  grace — "  the  Spirit ;  "  (3)  to  the  name  of  Him  who 
appointed  this  as  one  of  the  means  of  grace. 

13  Strolling. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  vagabond,"  too  harsh  a 
word,  as  we  apply  it  now,  for  tlie  Gr.,  which  is  literally  "  going 
about,"  and  is  so  rendered  by  "Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following  Yulg. 
circumetintibus. 

15  I  know  ...  I  know. — The  former  of  the  two  Gr.  verbs  may 
be  expressed  thus,  "I  know  him  when  I  see  him;  "  the  latter, 
"  I  am  well  acquainted  with  him."  The  latter  is  used  once  only 
in  the  Gospels,  by  St.  Mark,  but  frequently  by  St.  Luke  in  this 
book. 

16  Mastered  them. — So  Rhem. ;  literally,  "  lorded  it  over  them, 
as  in  Matt.  xx.  25 ;  1  Peter  v.  3.     Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  overcame 
them." 

19  Not  a  few.—Tlie  Gr.  is  not  the  same  as  in  verse  18. 

Curious  arts. — So  all  Engl,  versions,  following  Yulg.  curiosa. 
The  Gr.  nepiepyos  is  translated,  actively,  "busybodies"  in  1  Tim. 
V.  13 ;  i.e.,  "  they  that  busy  themselves  about  things  which  do  not 
concern  them."  Here  it  has  a  passive  sense,  "  things  that  are 
beyond  a  person's  proper  concern."  "  Curious,"  when  used 
actively,  retains  the  bad  sense  which  belongs  to  its  Latin  original, 
"  inquisitive,  prying ; "  it  is  not  commonly  used  in  the  passive 


234  THE  ACTS— XIX. 

sense,  with  tlie  bad  meaning  wliicli  it  has  here,  as  the  rendering  of 
irepiepya. 

22  Timothy. — This  name,  in  its  famihar  English  form,  enables  ns 
at  once  and  always  to  identify  the  disciple  to  whom  St.  Paul 
addresses  two  affectionate  Epistles  with  the  faitliful  companion 
of  whom  we  read  in  his  other  Epistles  and  in  this  book. 

24  Shrines  of  Biana. — These  were  small  models  of  the  shrine  of 
the  temple  {va6s,  sacrarium),  and  of  the  image  within  the  shrine, 
which  were  carried  about  as  amulets.  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  has 
"  shrines  for  Diana,"  which  is  not  very  intelligible.  Similar 
models  of  shrines  containing  images  of  the  Blessed  Virgin,  as 
of  "  our  Lady  of  Loretto,'  are  offered  for  purchase  to  the 
pilgrims  resorting  to  those  shrines. 

27  Come  into  disrepute.— Auth.,  "  be  set  at  nought,"  which  is 
the  rendering  of  a  different  word,  Luke  xxiii.  11. 

And  that  she  should  even  be  deposed  from  her  mag- 
nificence.— By  cliange  in  Gr.  text  for  "  that  her  magnificence 
should  be  destroyed."  The  word  rendered  "  magnificence  "  has 
reference  to  the  title  "  great,"  used  just  before  and  after,  but 
"  greatness  "  would  not  convey  the  same  idea. 

31  The  chief  ofELcers  of  Asia.— Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "the 
chief  of  Asia."  The  Gr.,  "  Asiarchs,"  was  the  official  title  of  the 
ten  officers  elected  annually  by  the  principal  cities  of  the  Roman 
province  of  Asia,  of  which  Ephesus  M-as  the  capital,  topi-eside  over 
the  festivals  and  games  hekf  in  the  different  cities. 

35  Temple-lreeper. — All  English  versions,  "  a  worshipper,"  follow- 
ing Vulg.,  cultricem.  The  Gr.  properly  means  '"  temple-sweeper," 
and  thence  keeper  or  warden  of  the  temple ;  it  was  the  title  of 
honour  borne  on  the  coins  of  Ephesus  and  other  cities  which  had 
the  charge  of  important  temples  in  Asia  Minor.  A  drum  of  one 
of  the  huge- columns  of  this  temple  of  Diana  is  now  in  the  British 
Museum.  Her  worship  at  Ephesus  continued  as  late  as  the  5th 
centui-y.     [Wordsworth.) 

37  Robbers  of  temples. — A\ith.,  following  Tynd.,  "  robbers  of 
churches."  The  word  '"  churches,"  now  totally  inappropriate  in 
reference  to  heathen  temples,  was  frequently  so  applied  by  writers 
of  the  Elizabethan  age.  The  Gr.  word  which  is  here  iised  to 
describe  the  crime  of  sacrilege  has  been  found  in  inscriptions 
among  the  ruins  of  the  temple  at  Ephesus,  denoting  an  offence  to 
which  the  severest  penalties  were  attached.     {Phimptre.) 

38  The  courts  are  open.— Auth.,  "  the  law  is  open,"  literally, 


THE  ACTS— XX.  235 

"  the  court  days — the  days  for  holding  trials  in  the  agora,  or  forum 
— are  going  on."  For  this  sense  of  i-y^adai  compare  Matt.  xiv. 
6  ;  Luke  xxiv.  21. 

Accuse. — The  same  woi'd  is  thus  translated  here  and  at  cliap. 
xxiii.  28  by  all  Engl,  versions  except  Auth.,whicli  here  has  '"  im- 
plead;" but  the  Gr.  is  not,  like  "implead,"  a  teclinieal  term. 
(Comp.  Rom.  viii.  33.) 

39  The  regular  assembly. — Aiith.,  "a  lawful  assembly,"  i.e., 
tJie  assembly  of  the  citizens  convened  by  the  proper  authority, 
and  legally  capable — which  this  tumultuary  meeting  was  not — of 
passing  decrees.  Among  the  inscriptions  discovered  by  Mr. 
Wood  at.Ephesus  is  one  requiring  that  at  every  " regular  as- 
sembly  "  (the  same  words  as  hero)  an  image  of  Minerva  (Athena 
in  Gr.)  shall  be  placed  "above the  bench  on  wliich  the  boys  sit." 
{Plvhiftre.) 

40  Accused. — Auth., "  called  in  question."  They  were  all  in  danger 
— even  the  town  clerk  himself,  as  one  who  was  present — of  being 
charged  with  riotous  conduct. 

Biiot. — Auth.,  "  uproar,"  which  is  moi'e  properly  used  in  chai>. 
XX.  1  for  another  word.  The  one,  o-rao-is,  signifies  a  commotion 
of  the  people,  an  insurrection  or  riot  (see  Mark  xv.  7) ;  the  other, 
e6pv^os,  is  the  uproar  or  tumult  caused  ))y  the  commotion.  (See 
Matt.  xxvi.  5.) 


CHAPTER  XX. 

1  Took  leave  of  them.— So  Wycl..  Tynd.,  Cranm.,  and  Rhem. 
Auth.,  following  Genev., "  embraced  them."  The  Gr.  is  properly 
"  to  salute,"  either  in  leave-taking,  as  here,  or  on  arrival,  as  at 
chaps. xviii.  22,  xxv.  13.  "Embracing,"  at  verse  10, is  for  another 
Gr.  word. 

3  He  determined. — Auth.,  "he  purposed."  He  had  " purposed " 
this  before  (chap.  xix.  21),  but  had  been  for  a  time  prevented. 

4  As  far  as.— Auth.,  "into;"  Gr.,  SxP'- 

7  Discoursed  with  them.. — Auth.,  "  preached  unto  them."  The 
Gr.    is  often  properly   rendered    "  to   reason ; "   but  in   Auth. 


236  THE  ACTS— XX. 

"  dispute,"  as  in  chaps,  xviii.  4,  xix.  8.  Here  also  Yiilg.,  followed 
by  Wycl.  and  Rheni.,  has  disputavit. 

8  We. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.  "  they,"  showing  that  St. 
Luke  himself  was  an  eye-witness  of  this  miracle  and  of  the 
attendant  circumstances  which  he  has  narrated  with  such  full 
detail, 

9  The  window. — Tlie  one  large  opening  in  the  chamber.  Auth., 
"a  window."  The  Gr.  is,  literally,  "on  the  window,"  i.e.,  on 
the  window-sill.  Compare  with  this  the  fall  of  King  Ahaziah 
through  a  lattice  in  his  upper  chamber  (2  Kings  i.  2). 

Borne  down  with  deep  sleep.  —  Auth.,  with  Wycl.  and 
Tynd.,  "being  fallen  into  a  deep  sleep."  Yulg.,  cum  mergeretur 
somno  gravi.  The  same  word  wliich  is  here  in  the  present  tense 
is  repeated  in  the  past;  Auth.,  "he  sunk  down  with  sleep."  The 
meaning  appears  to  be  that  as  he  sat  he  drooped  in  sleep,  and  by 
and  by  sunk  down  in  it  and  fell  over  into  the  court  below. 

We  may  observe  that  the  phrase  "  deep  sleep  "  is  idiomatic  both  in 
Greek  and  English. 

Discoursed  yet  longer. — Auth.,  "was  long  preaching."  The 
Gr.  is  in  the  comparative,  fTri  ttK^'iov,  and  is  so  rendered  in  Auth. 
in  the  few  places  of  this  book  and  St.  Paul's  Epistles  in  which 
alone  it  occurs  in  the  New  Testament. 

10  Make  ye  no  ado. — So  Auth.  in  Mark  v.  39,  but  here  "  trouble 
not  yourselves."  The  Gr.  verb,  like  the  cognate  noun  in  verse  1, 
is  suggestive  of  excitement  and  noise  rather  than  "  trouble," 
though,  etymologically,  "  trouble  "  may  be  nearly  allied  to  it. 

11  The  bread — i.e.,  of  the  Eucharist.  The  article  is  added  in 
the  Gr.  text,  being  found  in  all  tlie  best  MSS.,  and  other  author- 
ities. 

12  The  lad.^Auth.,  with  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  "  the  young  man." 
Yulg.,  puernm.     The  Gr.  is,  rhu  TraTSa,  not  ueavlav,  as  in  verse  9. 

13  By  land. — Margin,  "  Or,  on  foot."  The  former  is  the  literal 
meaning ;  but  to  go  by  laud  was  usually  to  go  on  foot.  (Compare 
Matt.  xiv.  13.) 

15  We  touched  at  Samos. — The  Gr.  has  this  sense  in  classical 
Tvi'iters,  but  is  not  used  again  with  regard  to  navigation  in  the 
New  Testament.     So  Yulg.,  cqjpUcuimus.     Axith.,  "  we  arrived." 

16  To  sail  past— i.e.,  without  stopping  there.  Auth.,  "  to  sail 
by  Ephesus,"  which  might  mean  to  take  that  route — to  take 
Ephesus  in  his  way.     Yulg.,  transnavigare  Ejphesum. 


THE  ACTS— XX.  237 

17,  18  "Elders,"  "  bisliops,"  or,  as  in  tlie  Margin,  "2)resbifters," 
"overseers."  The  names  of  tliese  officers  show  that  the  Cliurcli 
was  becoming  organised,  and  that  Greek  was  the  predomiuaut 
language  of  its  members;  but  the  two  names  "elder"  and 
"overseer,"  or,  as  in  the  Gr.,  "  presbyter  "  and  "bishop,"  do  not 
indicate  the  existence  at  this  early  period  of  the  two  distinct 
orders  of  the  ministry  to  which  they  were  afterwards  applied. 

18  Set  foot  in  Asia.— Auth.,  "  came  into."  The  Gr.  eVeySTj^ 
properly  means  "  stepped."     So  Vulg.,  ingressus  sum. 

All  the  time. — So  Rhem.  and  Yulg.,j5er  omne  tempus ;  Tynd. 
and  Auth.,  "  at  all  seasons ;  "  probably  because  of  the  preceding 
words,  "  I  have  been  with  you,"  as  the  Apostle  could  not  say  "  I 
have  been  with  you  all  the  time  "  when  he  had  been  a  long  while 
absent ;  but  with  the  corrected  rendering  "  I  was,"  pointing  back 
to  his  continuoiis  residence,  the  difficulty  and  consequent  error 
of  the  English  translation  is  removed.  The  same  correction  as 
to  time,  by  omission  of  "  have,"  is  made  throughout  the  speech  of 
St.  Paul. 

19  Lowliness  of  mind. — The  Gr.  raireivocppoa-vvr]  is  used  only  by 
St.  Paul  and  (once)  by  St.  Peter  :  it  is  more  exactly  rendered 
thus  than  by  "  humility,"  which  is  complete  in  itself,  without 
the  addition  of  "  mind  "  (as  in  Auth.). 

20  I  shrank  not. — The  Gr.  is  a  nautical  term,  signifying  to  lower 
or  take  in  the  sails,  and  is  appropriate  in  the  mouth  of  one  who 
had  just  landed  from  a  sea  voyage,  and  may  have  had  tlie  sails  of 
ships  in  Adew  as  he  spoke.  St.  Paul  uses  it  again  in  verse  27. 
Here  it  is  paraphrased  in  Auth.,  "  I  kept  back  nothing  ;  "  there 
it  is  rendered,  "  I  shunned  not  to  declare." 

31  Admonish. — Auth.,  "  warn,"  which  represents  another  Gr.  in 
Matt.  iii.  7,  and,  like  the  Gr.  in  that  place,  does  not  of  necessity 
imply  the  utterance  of  words,  as  does  the  Gr.  here  used  by 
St.  Paul. 

35  In  all  things  I  gave  you  an  example.— Auth.,  "I  showed 
you  all  things."  The  setting  or  being  an  example  is  the  sense  of 
this  verb  and  its  cognate  noun  in  the  New  Testament ;  and  that 
sense  requires  to  be  here  emphatically  expressed,  as  it  shews  the 
motive  which  the  Apostle  had  for  his  conduct  at  the  time,  and 
for  his  mention  of  it  afterwards.  In  all  that  he  then  did  he 
gave  them  an  example. 

He  himself  said. — Auth.,  "  he  said."  It  is  satisfactory  to 
find  that  in  the  Gr.  the  word  "  himself  "  is  used  in  reference  to 


238  THE  ACTS— XXL 

this,  tlie  only  saying  ascribed  to  our  Lord  in  the  New  Testament 
■which  is  not  recorded  in  the  four  Gospels. 

38  Behold. — Auth.,  "  see  ; "  Gr.,  BewpeTv.  St.  Paul,  speaking  of 
liiniself  in  verse  25,  had  used  a  more  modest  word,  "  ye  sliall  see 
my  face  no-mox'C  "  (ujj'eo'fle).  He  would  not  say,  as  his  disciples 
might  affectionately  and  truly  say,  that  his  face  was  an  object  to 
be  "beheld."     (Wordawortli.) 

Brought  him  on  his  way.— So  Aiith.  at  chap.  xxi.  4 ;  but 
here,  "accompanied  him"  (with  Tynd.),  which  is  the  rendering 
of  other  words.     The  Gr.  here  is,  literally,  "  sent  him  forward." 


CHAPTER  XXI. 


1  "Were  parted  from  them.— The  same  Gr.  is  used  in  Luke 
xxii.  41  and  Acts  xx.  30,  and  seems  to  imply  a  separation  attended 
with  pain  or  difficulty  (literally,  "torn  away  ").  Beza  has  avulsi 
ab  eis,  as  an  improvement  upon  Yvilg.,  abstrudi.  Auth.  (alone), 
"  gotten  away,"  which  may,  perliaps,  have  been  intended  to 
express  colloquially  the  dithculty  which  the  travellers  had  in 
'•  getting  away  "  from  their  sorrowing  friends. 

1,2  Set  sail.— Auth.,  "launched,"  "set  forth."  See  Xote  on 
chap.  xiii.  13. 

Crossing  over. — See  Note  on  Matt.  ix.  1. 

3  Had  come  in  sight  of.— "Had  sighted."  Auth.,  "  dis- 
covei'ed,"  which  in  its  old  sense  of  "  uncovered  "  was  correct. 
The  Gr.,  dvaipaivovTfs.  was  the  nautical  term  for  bringing  the 
land  in  view  by  apin-oaching  it,  and  so  bringing  it  up,  as  it  were, 
above  the  horizon.  In  tlie  New  Testament  "  discover  "  only 
occurs  liere  and  in  chap,  xxvii.  39  (Auth.).  In  the  Old  Testament 
it  is  frequently  found  where  "  uncover  "  would  now  be  more 
plain,  as  in  Ps.  xxix.  8. 

4  Set  foot. — Auth.,  "  go  up  to."  Compare  chap.  xx.  18,  and  Note 
there. 

7  The  voyage. — More  literal  than  "'  our  coiu-se  "  (Auth.). 

13  What  do  ye,  weeping  .  .  ,  ? — (As  we  should  say,  collo- 
quially, "  what  are  you  about  ?  "}   So  all  English  versions  before 


THE  ACTS— XXI.  239 

Aiith..  "  what  mean  ye,  to  weep" — i.e.,  " by  weeping  ?  "  which 
is  neitlier  literal  nor  idiomatic.     Gr.,  ti  iroielTe,  KXaiovns. 

15  Our  baggage.— Genev.,  "  our  fardels."  Anth.,  in  the  same 
sense,  "  our  carriages ;  "  but  that  word  has  long  since  exchanged 
the  passive  meaning,  tlie  thing  carried,  for  the  active,  the  vehicle 
which  carries.  For  its  old  sense  compare  1  Sam.  xvii.  22  ;  Isa. 
X.  28 ;  Shakspeare,  K.  John,  y.  7. 

16  Ail  early  disciple. — One  who  had  been  a  disciple  from  the 
beginning,  from  the  great  Pentecost.  Compare  Note  on  chaps. 
XV.  7  and  xi.  15. 

24  Be  at  charges  for  them.— Auth.,  "  with  them  ;  "  literally, 
"  spend  money  upon  them,"  a  test  then,  as  now,  of  sincerity. 

25  Giving  judgement.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  and  concluded." 
The  Gr.  is  simply  the  participle  KpivavTis.  Compare,  as  to  this 
combination  of  verb  and  participle,  chap.  v.  30. 

26  Declaring. — Auth.,  "  to  signify."  The  Gr.  means  not  merely 
"  signifying,"  as  by  an  outward  sign  or  token,  but  "  announcing 
j)ublicly,"  up  and  down,  to  everyone  whom  he  met  {^layyiXKuv). 

31  Were  seeking.— Auth.,  "went  about  to  kill  him,"  an  obsolete 
phrase  (as  in  John  vii.  19). 

In  confusion.— So  Rhem.,  literally  following  the  Gr.  Auth., 
"  in  an  uproar." 

Came  up. —and  32  Ran  down  upon  them. — Auth.,  "came" 
..."  ran  down  unto."  Attention  to  the  prepositions  in  these 
and  like  instances  tends  to  make  the  narrative  more  grapliic  and 
vivid. 

33  Inquired.— See  Note  on  Matt.  ii.  4. 

34  To  be  brought.— Auth.,  "to  be  carried."  The  Gr.,  ^ytaOai, 
docs  not  imply  anything  more  than  the  "  conducting "  of  the 
prisoner,  as  at  verse  37. 

37  Dost  thou  know  Greek?— Vulg.,  literally,  G)xeco  nosti  / 
The  idiom  is  the  same  in  Greek  and  Latin,  and  implies  no 
ellipsis  of  \a\(7v  {Alfonl,  Wordsivorth).  Wycl.,  "  Canst  tliou 
Greek  ?  "  All  subsequent  versions,  "  Canst  thou  speak  Greek  ?  " 
Luther,  " Kannst  du  Grlechish?" 

38  Stirred  up  to  sedition  and  led  out.— The  two  Gr.  verbs 
are  both  transitive. 

Men  of  the  assassins.— So  Tynd.  and  Rhem. ;  Auth.,.  "  men 
that  wei'e  murderers."     These  cut -throats — sicarii  as  they  were 


240  THE  ACTS— XXII. 

called  in  Latin,  from  the  dagger  in  form  of  a  sickle  or  scimitar 
with  which  they  were  armed  ;  "  bandits  "  or  "  brigands  "  as  they 
would  now  be  called — were  at  once  zealots  and  mercenaries,  ready 
to  kill  on  their  o-vtu  account,  or  to  let  themselves  out  to  others  for 
any  deed  of  violence — e.g.,  to  Felix,  for  the  assassination  of  tho 
high  priest  Jonathan.  (Josephus,  Antt.  xx.  8,  §  5 ;  B.  J.  ii. 
13,  §  3.) 

39  I  am  a  Jew. — So  Wycl. ;  Auth.,  after  Tynd.,  "  I  am  a  man 
that  am  a  Jew,"  thus  giving  prominence  to  the  word  "  a  man," 
which,  though  idiomatic  in  Gr.,  is  a  redundant  expletive,  almost 
a  vulgarism,  in  English. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 

2  They  were  the  more  quiet.— Auth.,  "they  kept  the  more 
silence."  The  Gr.  is  here  rjffvxia,  "  quietness,'  not,  as  in  chap, 
xxi.  40,  (Tiyf},  "silence." 

It  may  be  observed  that  the  Apostle,  speaking  to  his  Jewish 
audience,  gives  himself  the  same  honourable  and  distinctive  title, 
dvrip,  with  which  he  addresses  them ;  whereas,  in  his  answer  to 
the  Roman  commander,  chap.  xxi.  37,  he  calls  himself  by  the 
humbler  generic  name  dudpuiro!.     See  Note  on  chap.  xxi.  39. 

3  Instructed.— So  Genev.  and  Rhem. ;  Auth.,  "  taught."  Com- 
pare Acts  vii.  22. 

Strict. — Auth.,  "  perfect."  So  again  in  chap,  xxiii.  15.  The 
Gr.  denotes  "  precision."  Compare  chap.  xxvi.  5,  "  the  most 
straitest  sect." 

Zealous  for  God. — As  in  chap.  xxi.  20,  "zealous  for  the  law." 
Auth..  "zealous  toward  God."  The  meaning  is  "zealous  for 
the  honour  and  glory  of  God  ;  "  "  zealous  toward  God  "  would 
rather  mean  "  in  my  personal  devotions  and  obedience  to  Him." 

4  This  Way.— In  a  speech  to  the  unbelie^-ing  Jews  the  Apostle 
does  not  use  the  more  familiar  expression  "  the  way,"  by  which 
the  believers  among  themselves  spoke  of  their  common  faith. 

5  Thorn  also  which  were  there.— The  Gr.  kuI,  not  translat<^d 
in  Auth.,  has  the  same  emphasis  as  in  chap.  xxvi.  11,  "I  perse- 
cuted them  even  unto  strange  cities." 


THE  ACTS— XXTI.  241 

To  bring  them  also  which,  were  there— i.e.,  tlio  disciples 
wlio  were  there— unto  Jerusalem  in  bonds.— For  Auth., 
"  which  were  there  bound  imto  Jerusalem."  The  inversion  of  tlie 
order  precludes  the  supposition  that  there  were  already  some  in 
Damascus  "  bound,"  imprisoned  for  their  faith,  whom  he  was  to 
bring  to  Jerusalem. 

7  Unto. — Not  "  upon,"  as  in  chap.  ix.  4     Here  the  preposition  is 
els,  not  i-tl. 

13  Margin,  "  Or,  recovered  my  sight  and  looked  upon  him."  The 
Gr.,  d;'o/3Xeirai,  is  capable  of  two  meanings,  (1)  "  to  recover  sight," 
(2)  "  to  look  up,"  according  as  the  preposition  dvd,  which  enters 
into  it,  is  taken  to  mean  "  again  "  or  "  up."  In  verse  12  it  has 
the  former  meaning,  "receive  thy  sight;  "  in  this  verse,  accord- 
ing to  the  suggestion  of  the  Margin,  it  may  be  a  pregnant 
phrase,  involving  both  meanings,  "  I  saw  again,  and  seeing 
looked  up  on  him." 

14  Hath  appointed.— See  Note  on  chap.  iii.  20. 

The  righteous  one.— See  Note  on  chap.  iii.  14. 

Hear  a  voice  from  his  mouth.— Referring  to  the  voice 
heard  by  the  Apostle  at  his  conversion.  So  Rliem.  alone ;  all 
other  versions,  "  to  hear  the  voice  of  his  mouth  :  "  one  of  the 
inaccuracies  caused  by  the  fluctuations  and  uncertainty  of  our 
translators  with  regard  to  the  article,  which  is  not  either 
expressed  or  implied  in  the  Gr.  The  preposition  e/c,  "  from,"  is 
in  the  Gr.,  l)ut  not  in  Auth. 

15  A  witness  for  him. — All  English  Versions,  "  his  witness." 

Gr.,  fidpTvs  avTcjj. 

16  His  name. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "the  name  of  the 
Lord."  This  passage,  therefore,  becomes  an  authority  for 
invoking  the  "  Righteous  One,"  tlie  Lord  Jesus,  especially  at 
baptism. 

20  Thy  witness. — The  Gr.  is  the  same  here  as  in  verse  15 ;  and 
so  all  the  versions  before  Auth.,  which  here  has  "martyr;"  this, 
though  altered  in  meaning,  is  only  the  Gr.  /j-dprvp,  "  witness," 
in  English  letters. 

21  "  To  his  death." — (Auth.)  Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text,  and 
not  given  in  Yulg.,  Wycl.,  or  Rhem. 

24  Shouted.— Auth.,  "cried  against  him."  The  Gr.  is  not  the 
same  as  in  verse  23.     Corap.  chap.  xii.  22. 

25  Tied  him  up  with  the  thongs— i.e.,  with  the  ligatures 


242  THE  ACTS— XXIII. 

wliicli  kept  the  body  extended  and  fixed  -while  under  soonrgiug. 
Auth.,  "  bound  with  thongs,"  overlooking  the  significance  of 
the  article. 

26  "What  art  thou  about  to  do?— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for 
Auth.,  "  Take  heed  what  thou  doest." 

28  This  citizenship. — Auth.,  with  Wycl.  and  Tynd.,  '"  this  free- 
dom," which  may  be  defended  on  the  analogy  of  our  municipal 
franchise,  which  is  called  the  "  freedom  "  of  the  city,  borough, 
&c.  It  was  the  Roman  jus  civitatis,  here  expressed  in  Gr.  by 
iroXiTflu,  another  form  of  which  in  the  New  Testament  occurs 
once  again,  Phil.  iii.  20,  and  is  there  inappropriately  rendered 
"  conversation  "  (Auth.). 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 


4,  5  The  vehement  emphasis  laid  on  the  title  "  high  priest"  by  the 
bystanders,  and  the  toning  down  of  that  emphasis  by  the  omis- 
sion of  the  article  in  St.  Paul's  reply,  if  at  all  to  be  given  in 
translation,  would  be  represented  thus :  "  the  high  priest  of  God 
revilest  thou  ...  I  wist  not,  brethren,  that  he  was  high 
priest." 

6  A  son  of  Pharisees.— So  by  change  in  Gr.  text,  with  Vulg., 
Wycl.,  and  Rliem.,  for  "a  son  of  a  Pharisee  "  (Auth.) ;  his  ances- 
tors  were  Pharisees. 

9  Clamour.— The  word  is  so  translated  in  Eph.  iv.  31  (Auth.); 
here,  as  elsewliere,  "  cry." 

"  Let  us  not  fight  against  God  "  (Auth.).  Omitted  by  change  in 
Gr.  text,  as  ha^^ng  probably  been  interpolated  to  complete  the 
sentence  from  the  speech  of  Gamaliel,  chap.  v.  39. 

14  To  taste  nothing.— So  Wycl.,  following  Yulg.,  nos  nihil 
giistahirof.  All  other  Versions,  "We  will  eat  nothing."  Gr., 
yev<Taa6ai. 

15  As  though  ye  would  judge  of  his  case  more  exactly. 

— Auth.,  '•  enquire  something  more  perfectly  concerning  him." 
The  Gr.  Siaytyvwa-Kny  denotes  the  inward  mental  process  of  dis- 
cernment, which  is  to  be  the  ground  of  judgment,  not  the 
"  enquiry  "  which  leads  to  it,  for  which  the  usual  word  is  em- 
ployed in  verse  20. 


THE  ACTS— XXIII.  243 

16  The  margiual  alternative  is  not  improbable  whicli  takes  the  Gr. 
participle,  not  as  "  having  come  to  the  castle,"  bnt  as  "  having 
come  in  npon  them,  the  conspirators,"  so  as  to  overhear  them 
■while  concerting  their  plot  together. 

22  Signified. — Auth.,  "  shewed."  The  same  Gr.  as  in  verse  15 ; 
ifxcpaviCoo  is  properly  "  to  give  information." 

25  After  this  form.— Auth.,  "  manner."  Tlie  Gi*.,  rinrov,  '■  type," 
as  applied  to  the  contents  of  a  letter,  is  a  precis,  or  summaiy. 

27  "Was  about  to  be.— More  perspicuous  than  Auth.,  "  should 
have  been,"  which  is  now  understood  as  an  indirect  way  of 
saying,  "ought  to  have  been."  "Slay,"  not  "kill,"  has  been 
the  rendering  of  ayaipe'ia-eai  in  chap.  xxii.  20  (Auth.). 

The  soldiers. — Those,  namely,  that  were  under  his  command. 
Auth.  (alone),  "an  ai-niy,"  strangely  overlooking  the  article, 
which  is  given  in  Rhem.,  "  the  band,"  and  even  by  Wycl.,  "mine 
host."  Vulg.,  cum  exercitu,  whence  Tynd.,  "with  soldiers,"  and 
Auth.,  "with  an  army,"  returning  more  nearly  to  the  meaning 
of  the  noun,  but  making  more  necessary  the  expression  of  the 
article. 

There  are  several  slight  alterations,  caused  by  changes  in  the 
Gr.  text  of  this  letter  and  the  following  chapter,  which  it  seems 
needless  to  specify,  as  they  scarcely  afEect  the  interpretation. 

35  I  will  hear  thy  cause.— This  is  the  full  meaning  of  the  Gr., 
not  simply  "I  will  hear  thee,"  as  Auth.  The  compound  verb 
implies  a  thorough  "  hearing  "  in  a  judicial  sense,  not  a  listening 
to  what  the  prisoner  had  to  say.  This  was  according  to  the  rule 
of  Roman  law,  which  required  that  a  case  sent  from  one  authority 
to  another,  with  a  statement  in  writing,  should  be  heard  over 
again  ab  initio.     Digest.  48,  tit.  3,  cap.  6. 

Herod's  palace. — Auth.,  "judgment  hall."  (Comp.  Mark 
XV.  16 ;  John  xviii.  28.)  The  city  of  Csesarea  was  built  in  a 
style  of  great  magnificence,  with  a  breakwater  to  make  it  a  safe 
harbour  for  shipping,  and  all  the  other  requirements  of  a  port, 
as  well  as  a  splendid  j)alace,  amphitheatre,  and  other  edifices 
required  for  a  city  of  the  first  magnitude.  The  palace  was 
at  this  time  occupied  by  the  Roman  governor,  the  Procuraior  of 
Tudaea. 


244  THE  ACTS— XXiy. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 


2  Much  peace.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  -n-ith  Tyncl., 
"  quietness,"  which  represents  a  different  word.  See  chap.  xxii. 
2 ;  2  Thess.  iii.  12.  It  is  important  to  observe  this,  as  the  adroit 
flattery  of  Tertullus  is  shewn  by  his  thus  addressing  Felix,  who 
had  assumed  tlie  title  of  "Pacificator"  of  the  province,  in  con- 
sequence of  the  partially  successfiU  measures  which  he  had  taken 
for  suppressing  the  assassins  (the  sicarii  mentioned  in  chap  xxi. 
38)  and  the  outlaws,  whom  he  afterwards  employed  as  instru- 
ments of  his  own  cruelty  (Josephiis,  ^«^/.  xx.  3,  4,  and  Bell.  Jud. 
ii.  3). 

Evils  are  corrected. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following  Yulg. 
multa  corrigantur.  By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  very 
worthy  deeds  are  done."  In  spite  of  these  reforms,  Felix  was 
recalled  two  years  afterwards,  on  the  complaint  of  the  Jews,  for 
his  misgovernment.  Another  piece  of  sycophancy  on  the  part 
of  Felix  is  his  speaking  of  the  "providence"  of  Felix,  a  word 
used  by  the  Romans  only  of  their  gods,  and,  as  may  be  seen  on 
the  coins,  of  their  emperors. 

3  In  all  ways. — All  English  versions,  "always."  The  phrase 
has  no  reference  to  time. 

6  "  And  would  have  .  .  unto  thee  "  (verse  8). — (Auth.).  Omitted 
by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

14  A  sect. — AU  English  versions,  "heresy,"  which  is  the  Gi-eek 
word  in  English  letters.  Though  now  applied  specially  to 
erroneous  Christian  doctrine,  as  a  consequence  of  choosing  for 
oneself,  tlie  word  in  its  oi-iginal  meaning  is  "  a  choice,  or  choos- 
ing," and  was  in  ancient  times  used  to  designate  the  Jewish 
and  Grecian  sclwols  of  philosophy,  not  specially  their  particular 
doctrines.  The  same  word  is  used  by  Tertullus  in  verse  6 ;  and 
to  his  use  of  it  the  Apostle  is  here  alluding. 

15  Look  for. — So  Yulg.,  Tynd.,  and  Rhem.  The  Gr.  denotes 
expectation  rather  than  acceptance,  in  which  sense  Auth.  has 
"allow."     Comp.  chap,  xxiii.  21. 

18  Amidst  which. — By  change  of  Gr.  text  for  "  whereupon  " 
(Auth.).  The  relative  eV  ah  refers  to  the  "alms  and  offerings" 
in  the  last  verse. 

But  there  were  .  .  . — The  change  of  construction  and  the 
consequent  break  in  the  sentence  result  from  the  insertion  of  Se 
in  the  Gr.  text. 


fHE  ACTS— XXV.  245 

19  To  make  accusation.— Auth.,   "  to  object."    The  Gr.  is  the 

same  as  in  verse  2. 


oo 


I  will  determine. — Comp.  Note  ou  chap,  xxiii.  15,  where  the 
Gr.  is  the  same,  also  xxv.  21. 

23  Indulgence. — Auth.,  "  liberty,"  which  would  be  in  coutradic- 
tiou  of  what  is  said  as  to  his  being  still  detained  in  custody. 
What  is  meant  is  a  remission  of  the  military  rales  of  im- 
prisonment. 

25  Temperance. — Margin,  "  Or,  self-control"  gives  the  true  sense 
of  the  Gr.  iyicpaTeia  and  the  Latin  temperantia,  as  those  words 
were  used  of  old. 

Was  terrified.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "trembled,"  following 
Vulg.,  tremef actus.  The  Gr.,  fiJ.(po0os  yevSfxeuos,  denotes  the 
inward  feeling,  not  the  outward  sign  of  alarm. 

The  judgement  to  come. — By  which  even  judges  must  be 
judged.  The  article  is  omitted  in  all  English  versions  except 
Rhem. 

27  To  gain  favour  with  the  Jews.— Auth.,  "to  shew  the 
Jews  a  pleasure."  The  Gr.  is,  literally,  "to  lay  do^vn  or  deposit 
a  favour  vrith  the  Jews." 


CHAPTER  XXY. 


4  Was  kept  in  charge. — The  full  meaning  of  the  Gr.,  Tripe7a9M, 
is  not  shewn  by  "  was  kejit "  (Auth.). 

5  Them  .  .  .  which  are  of  power  among  you. — i.e.,  "your 
principal  men"  (verse  2).  So,  in  substance,  Wycl.  and  Rhem. 
with  Yulg., ^o^en^es.  Auth.,  "them  which  ai'e  able,"  following 
Tynd.,  thus  leaving  it  uncertain  whether  men  of  ability  are 
intended  (as  Rhem.),  or  men  who  were  able  to  go.  For  the  sense 
of  "powerful"  given  here  to  Swaroi  see  1  Cor.  i.  26;  it  is 
common  also  in  Joseplius  and  classical  authors. 

Amiss. — Comp.  Luke  xxiii.  41  and  Acts  xxviii.  6  (and  Note 
there)  for  the  same  rendering  of  Utottov,  which  Auth.  in  this 
place  paraphrases  by  "  any  wickedness." 


246  THE   ACTS— XXV. 

6  Not  more  than  eight  or  ten.— By  change  iu  Gr.  text  for 

"  more  than  teu  "  (Auth.). 

9  To  gain  favour.— Comp.  cliap.  xxiv.  27,  and  Note  there. 

11  If  then  I  am  a  wrong-doer.— Auth.,  "  If  I  be  an  offender." 
The  Gr.  dSiKcS  signifies  hurt  or  vn-ong  committed  by  one  against 
another;  " an  offender  "  is  one  who  breaks  the  law. 

Can  give  me  up  unto  them.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  follow- 
ing Vulg.,  donare.  Auth.,  with  Tyud.,  "  deliver  me  up  xmto 
them."  The  literal  rendering  woidd  be  "  grant  me  by  favom-," 
corresponding  to  the  word  tmce  used  by  St.  Luke  above,  in 
verse  3  and  xxiv.  27,  as  to  the  treatment  of  St.  Paul  by  the 
Roman  governors  with  a  view  to  "gaining  favour"  of  the 
Jews ;  so  that  his  use  of  this  word  has  probaljly  a  special  signi- 
ficance, showing  an  apprehension  that  Festus  would  yield  to  this 
motion.' 

14  Laid  Paul's  case  before  the  King.— So.  in  substance, 
Tynd. ;  Auth.,  "declared;  "  Vulg.,  indicavit.  Like  most  of  the 
fifteen  words  for  which  "  declare  "  is  used  in  Auth.,  the  Gr.  has  a 
special  sense  of  its  own,  "  to  refer  or  submit  a  matter  to  another 
person,"  as  in  Gal.  ii.  2,  the  only  place  of  the  New  Testament, 
besides  this,  in  which  it  occurs. 

15  Sentence — i.e.,  of  condemnation;  KaTaSlKrjv,  for  S/k^jj/,  "judg- 
ment "  (Auth.),  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

16  Custom. — Auth.,  "  manner."     See  Note  on  chap.  xvi.  1. 

Give  up. — Festus  repeats  the  word  used  by  Paul  at  verse  11. 

"  To  die." — (Auth.)     Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

Opportunity.— Auth.,  "  licence."  Literally,  "  place,"  as  in 
Heb.  xii.  17. 

18  Evil  things. — "  E^il  "  is  adc\ed  in  Gr.  text.  They  brought  no 
criminal  cliargc  against  him,  but  questions  relating  to  their  own 
religion.  They  were  not  so  wise  in  their  generation  as  those 
who  brought  our  Lord  before  Pilate,  and,  dropping  their  own 
grievance  against  Him,  charged  Him  with  an  offence  of  which 
they  knew  tlie  Roman  Governor  could  not  decline  to  take 
cognizance. 

19  Keligiou. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.  and  Rhem.,  "  supersti- 
tion."    Sec  Note  on  chap.  x\ii.  22. 


THE  ACTS— XXVL  247 

20  Being  perplexed.— Autli.,  "  I  doiibted."  Comi).  chap.  ii.  12. 
The  Gr.  is  literally  "  being  perplexed  as  to  the  inquiry  concern- 
ing these  things." 

21  The  decision.— Auth.,  "  the  hearing."  Tlie  Gr.  is  the  same  as 
in  chap.  xxiv.  22. 

The  Emperor. — Auth., "  Augustus."  This  title  was  conferred 
by  the  Romans  on  Octavius,  B.C.  27,  and  adopted  by  aU  succeed- 
ing Emperors  as  an  official  title,  as  we  entitle  a  sovereign  "  His 
Majesty ;  "  "  Augustus  "  was  represented  in  Gr.  by  2e)3a(rT<Js 
(Sebastus).  The  "Augustus,"  or  Emperor,  at  this  time  was 
Nero. 

22  I  could  wish. — Comp.  Rom.  ix.  5.  Auth.,  "  I  would."  Gr., 
literally,  "I  was  wishing." 

24  Made  suit  to  me. — "  Have  dealt  with  me."  The  Gr.  is,  "  to 
entreat  one  person  on  behalf  of,  or  against,  another."  Comp. 
Rom.  viii.  26,  xi.  2. 

27  In  sending  a  prisoner. — This  idiomatic  rendering  of  the  Gr. 
participle  is  rarely  so  convenient  as  it  is  here.  Auth.,"  to  send  a 
prisoner,  and  not,"  &c.,  which,  in  meaning,  is  the  same. 


CHAPTER  XXVI. 


5  The  straitest  sect.— Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "the  most 
straitest."  There  is  nothing  in  the  Gr.  corresponding  to  this 
hyperbole :  and  it  is  the  only  instance  of  the  double  superla- 
tive in  the  Bible,  though  the  expression  "the  Most  Higliest" 
occurs  several  times  in  the  Psalter  of  the  Prayer-book ;  and 
there  are  a  few  such  phrases  as  "most  imkindest"  in  Shak- 
speare. — (Bishop  Charles  Wordsworth,  "Shakspeare  and  the 
Bible.") 

6  I  stand  here  to  be  judged.— Auth.,  "  I  stand  and  am 
judged."     The  Gr.  is,  literally,  "  I  stand  being  judged." 

7  Earnestly. — Auth.,  "instantly."     Comp.  chap.  xii.  5. 


248  THE  ACTS— XXVI. 

To  attain.— All  English  versions,  "  to  come."  Comp.  Phil. 
iii.  11.  The  Gr.  Karavrdu  is  used  several  times  by  St.  Paul  in 
this  sense. 

Concerning.— Auth.,  "  for  the  sake  of."     Gr.,  inpl. 

By  the  Jews. — The  emphatic  mention  of  the  Jews  is  enforced 
by  the  subsequent  appeal  to  the  king,  as  himseM  knowing  that 
this  hope  was  entertained  by  the  Jews.  The  article  being  now 
omitted  by  change  in  the  Gr.  text,  the  words  might  be  rendered 
with  a  still  stronger  emphasis,  "  by  Jews,  O  King !  " 

S  Why  is  it  judged  incredible  with  you,  if  God  doth 
raise  the  dead?— Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "Why  should  it 
be  thought  .  .  .  that  God  should  raise  the  dead?  "  This  gives  a 
verv  clear  meaning,  but  not  all  the  significance  of  the  original. 
"  It  God  raises  the  dead  (as  He  does),  why  is  it  pronounced  with 
you  (in  your  judgement)  to  be  a  thing  incredible  ?  "  The  con- 
junction ei,  here  joined  wiih.  the  indicative  mood  of  the  verb, 
assumes  the  thing  stated  to  be  true.  "  Supposing  the  thing  to 
be  a  fact,  as  it  is,  why  by  you  self -constituted  judges  is  it  pro- 
nounced  incredible?  " 

10  My  vote. — Auth.,  "  voice."  Vulg.,  detuli  sententiam.  Tynd., 
"  gave  the  sentence."  Gr.,  ^ri(poy,  properly  the  pebble  used  in 
voting. 

11  I  strove  to  make  them  blaspheme.— AH  English  versions, 

"  I  compelled  them  to  blaspheme,"  following  Vulg.  compellebam ; 
a  notable  instance  of  the  serious  misconceptions  which  are  caused 
in  translation  by  not  distinguishing  carefully  the  tenses  of  the 
Greek  verb.  The  rendering  of  Auth.  implies  that  Said  succeeded, 
by  his  threats,  in  inducing  some  of  the  saints  to  renounce  their 
faith  and  blaspheme  tlieir  Lord ;  what  he  really  says  is,  that  he 
endeavoured  to  make  them  do  so.  Had  he  been  successful  he 
would  have  used  not  the  imperfect  tense,  but  the  aorist. 

18  That  they  may  turn. — Margin,  "  Or,  to  turn  them."  The 
verb  may  be  either  transitive  or  intransitive,  as  in  verse  20 ;  all 
English  versions  previous  to  the  Auth.  and  the  Yulg.  take  it 
intransitively ;  and  St.  Luke,  who  uses  it  in  his  Gosjjel  and  in 
this  book  much  more  frequently  than  any  other  writer  of  the 
New  Testament,  scarcely  ever  makes  it  transitive. 

20  Worthy  of.— Auth.,  "  meet  for."     See  Note  on  Matt.  iii.  8. 

22  Having  therefore  obtained  the  help  that  is  from  God. 

■ — That  help  which  He  alone  can  give.    Auth.,  "  having  obtained 


THE   ACTS— XXVI.  249 

help  of  God."  The  word  rendered  "  help  "  is  properly  "  succour  " 
given  to  one  who  is  beset  with  enemies. 

I  stand.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem. ;  Vulg.,  sto  ;  Auth.,  following 
Tynd.  (weakly),  "  I  continue."  Gr.,  eVxTj/ca.  "  Stand  therefore," 
says  the  Apostle,  "  having  girded  your  loins  with  truth."  It 
was  a  favourite  word  with  him,  and  ought  not  to  be  taken  away 
from  him  here. 

23  IVCust  suffer. — Auth.,  "should  suffer,"  as  'Beza,  passuruvi  esse. 
Tlie  Gr.  ■n-adr]T6s,  "  subject  to  siiSeving," passibilis,  does  not  occur 
again  in  the  New  Testament.     Comj).  Luke  xxiv.  26. 

That  he  first  by  the  resurrection  of  the  dead  (i.e. 

by  the  general  resurrection  of  the  dead,  of  which  he  was  the 
first  example  should  proclaim,  &c. — Auth.,  "  that  he  should 
be  the  first  that  should  rise  from  the  dead,  and  should  shew." 
The  Gr.  is  literally  not  "  by,"  but  "  out  of  "  (e|),  "  the  resurrec- 
tion of  the  dead.".  "  Out  of,"  or  "  by  means  of,"  that  universal 
fact,  exemplified  in  his  own  person.  He  was  to  "  proclaim  a 
light "  {KarayyeWeiv),  not  as  Auth.,  "  to  shew."  He  was  to  "  bring 
life  and  immortality  to  light." 

24  Thou  art  mad. — Auth.,  "  beside  thyself."  The  verb  here  is 
cognate  to  the  noun  at  the  end  of  the  sentence. 

Thy  much  learning. —  The  English  idiom  aptly  gives  the 
force  of  the  Gr.  article,  which  is  lost  in  Auth.,  "  much  learning." 
Vulg.,  viultce  litercB. 

Doth  turn  thee  to  madness.— So  Rhem.,  following  Vulg., 
te  ad  insaniam  convertunt,  and  Wycl., "  many  letters  turn  thee  to 
woodness"  (madness).  Auth.,  "doth  make  thee  mad."  The  Gr. 
irepLTpeireL  is,  literally,  "  doth  turn  thee  roimd,"  reminding  us  of 
the  English  phrase,  "his  head  is  turned." 

25  Most  excellent. — The  same  title  of  honour  is  given  to  Theo- 
philus  in  Luke  i.  3. 

28  With  but  little  persuasion. —  This  diflSeult  and  in  some 
degree  ambiguous  sentence  has  received  various  interpretations. 
The  word  "almost,"  derived  by  the  Auth.  from  the  Genevan 
Version  (and  Beza,  propeviodum),  gives  a  clear  and  pointed  sense 
both  to  the  words  of  Agrippa  and  to  the  reply  of  St.  Paul,  and 
fm-nishes  a  text  which  for  many  generations  has  been  enlarged 
upon  as  an  undoubted  saying  of  the  Apostle.  But  a  meaning  is 
thus  put  on  the  phrase,  eV  oKiy<f,  which  it  has  not  elsewhere  iu 
the  New  Testament,  nor  in  any  classical  author,  and  which 
would  be  expressed  hy  -nap  oKi-yov,    Its  true  and  oiUy  meaning  is 


250  THE    ACTS— XXVII. 

"  in  a  little"  (as  iu  EpL.  iii.  3,  "in  few  words"),  "  in  a  short 
space  or  time,"  and  thus  the  sentence  would  run, "  In  a  few  words 
thou  art  persuading  me."  At  this  point  another  difficulty  arises 
from  the  adoption  in  the  Gr.  text  of  "  to  make  "  instead  of  "  to 
become"  (ironjcrat  for  yivfo-dai),  and  the  sentence  is  completed  thus : 
"  In  a  few  words  thou  art  persuading  me  with  a  view  to  making  a 
Christian  of  me."  This  conjunction  of  words,  though  harsh  both 
in  Greek  and  English,  is  not  without  example  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment, and  it  may  be  softened  by  a  paraphrase  which  preserv'es  the 
meaning,  and  makes  the  sentence  consistent  with  the  position  of 
the  speaker.  He  says  with  a  sneer,  "  In  a  short  speech,  in  a  sum- 
mary way,  thou  art  persuadiug  me,  working  upon  me,  to  make  a 
Christian  of  me  ;  "  or  in  other  words,  "  With  but  little  persuasion 
thou  wouldest  fain,"  &c.  To  which  St.  Paul  replies,  "  Whether 
with  little  or  much  [and  he  is  ready  to  xise  few  words  or  many, 
little  or  much  persuasion,  as  the  case  may  require]  I  would  to 
God,"  &c.  As  to  the  construction  of  ireidfis  voiria-ai  comp.  chap. 
XV.  10, 14. 

Chiysostom  considers  that  Agrippa  used  the  phi'ase,  «V  oxiyw,  in 
one  sense,  and  Paul  took  it  in  another.  Erasmus  says  "  it  is  not 
easy  to  give  a  satisfactory  translation  of  the  passage."  He 
renders  it,  modicd  ex  parte  persuades. 

30  "  When  he  had  thus  spoken." — (Auth.)  The  omission  of  these 
words  in  the  Gr.  text  leaves  us  to  imagine  a  movement  on  the  part 
of  Agrippa,  followed  by  an  abrupt  termination  of  the  hearing. 


CHAPTER  XXVH 


1  The  Augnstan  band.— Auth.,  "  of  Augustus'  band."  The 
Gr.  is  an  adjective.  The  Augustan  cohort  or  "  baud  "  was  pro- 
bably the  bodyguard  of  the  Emperor  Nero,  consisting  of  3,0U0 
yovmg  men  of  the  equestrian  order,  who  attended  him  for  the 
pm-pose  of  applauding  him  at  the  theatres  in  which  he  gave  his 
recitations. 

3  Kindly. — Is  a  better  equivalent  of  the  Gr.,  "  philanthroj)icaUy," 
than  the  rendering  of  all  English  versions, "  courteously,"  follow- 
ing Vulg.,  humane.  (Comp.  chap,  xxviii.  2,  "  shewed  us  no 
common  kindness." ) 


THE    ACTS— XXVII.  251 

4  Under  the  lee  of  Cyprus. —  Autb.,  with  Rhem.,  "under 
Cyprus,"  following  Vulg.  subnavigavimus.  Wycl.,  "  under- 
sailed."  Tyud.,  "sailed  hard  by."  Their  course  was  probably 
along  the  east  coast  of  the  island,  from  Salamis  to  Dinaretum, 
the  most  northern  ijoiut,  and  thence  along  the  north-west  coast 
till  they  struck  across  the  open  sea  straight  to  Myra,  on  the  coast 
of  Asia  Minor. 

7  Were  come  with  diificulty.—  All  Engl,  versions,  "  scarce 
Avere  come."     The  Gr.  is  tx6\is ;  and  so  in  verses  8  and  16. 

8  Coasting  along  it — i.e.,  Crete.  Auth.,  "  passing  it,"  which 
would  refer  to  Salmone.  The  course  was  along  the  south  coast 
of  Crete,  the  wind  being  now  from  the  north-west. 

9  The  voyage. —  Auth.,  "  sailing."  The  same  Gr.  as  in  next 
verse,  i.e.,  the  voyage  to  Italy. 

Gone  by. — Avoids  the  jingling  sound  of  "  fast  .  .  .  past  " 
(Auth.). 

10  Injury  and  much  loss.— Auth.,  "hurt  and  damage,"  but  at 
ver.  21,  for  the  same  words,  "harm  and  loss."    (Comp.  Phil.  iii.  7.) 

12  To  put  to  sea.— Auth.,  "  to  depart."  The  Gr,  is  the  same  as 
in  verses  2,  4. 

13  They  weighed  anchor.— Auth.,  "  loosing  thence."  The  Gi*., 
&pavres,  "lifting,"  is  a  nautical  term  used  in  Gr.  authors  {e.g., 
Thucyd.  ii.  23),  but  not  again  in  the  New  Testament. 

Sailed  along  Crete,  close  in  shore,— Auth., "  sailed  close 
by  Crete."  The  Gr.,  aaa-ov  (iisson),  "close,"  was  in  early  times 
supposed  to  be  the  name  of  the  small  island  Assos  lying  to  the 
north  of  Crete,  or  of  a  town  on  the  south  coast  which  the  ship 
was  passing ;  and  it  was  so  rendered  in  the  Vulg.,  and  in  Engl. 
versions  previous  to  the  Genev.  of  1557. 

14  There  beat  down  from  it  —  i.e.,  from  the  land,  from  Crete. 
Genev.  and  Auth.,  "  against  it,"  i.e.,  against  the  ship.  The  Gr., 
Kar'  avTTjs,  is  the  same  construction  which  is  found  in  Homer  to 
express  the  wind  "  blowing  down  from  the  motmtains."    {Alford.) 

Euraquilo. — The  Latin  name  for  the  north-east  wind.  By 
change  in  Gr.  text,  for  Auth.  "  Euroelydon,"  which  is  not  known 
to  have  been  the  name  of  any  -wind,  but  may  have  been  the  local 
or  nautical  term.  Vulg.  has  Eiiraquilo,  and  so  have  Wycl.  and 
Tynd.,  who  translate  it  "  north-east." 

15  Face  the  wind.— Auth.,  "  bear  up  into  the  wind,"  expresses 


252  THE    ACTS— XXVIl. 

the  same  thing  better  thau  Yulg.,  conari  in  ventv/m,  or  Tynd., 
"  resist ;"  but  better  still  is  "  face  the  wind,"  as  the  equivalent  of 
the  idiomatic  avT0(pda\iJ.e7v,  "  look  at  the  wind,  eye  to  eye."  A 
large  eye  was  commonly  painted  on  Greek  ships,  and  the  practice 
is  not  uncommon  now  on  the  boats  of  the  Mediterranean. 

We  gave  way  to  it,  and  were  driven.— Auth.,  "we  let  her 

drive."     Literally,  "giving  way,  we  were  borne  along." 

16  Cauda.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  Clauda  "  (Auth.),  an  isle 
about  twenty  miles  south-west  of  Crete. 

We  were  able,  with  difB.culty. —  Auth.,  "  we  had  much 
work." 

To  secure.— Auth.,  "  to  come  by."  Gr.,  literally,  "  to  become 
masters  of." 

17  The  Syrtis. — The  much  dreaded  quicksand  on  the  north  coast 
of  Africa,  lying  south-west  of  Crete.  Autli.,  following  Wycl., 
translates  it  "  the  quicksands."  Tynd.,  following  Yulg.,  leaves 
it  untranslated. 

Lowered  the  gear — i.e.  (probably),  they  sent  down  on  deck 
the  hea\'y  yard  which  carried  the  mainsail,  together  with  the  ropes 
and  rigging  attached  to  it.  So  Bede,  laxantes  antennas.  Yulg., 
submisso  vase,  which,  however,  has  been  misunderstood  by  the 
English  translators,  rendering  it  "  vessel,"  except  Auth.,  which  has 
"strake  sail; "  this  in  its  tm-n  has  been  objected  to  by  nautical 
authorities  as  being  the  worst  thing  that  could  have  been  done,  as 
in  that  case  the  sailors,  foreseeing  a  danger,  would  have  deprived 
themselves  of  their  only  means  of  avoiding  it.  Some  sail,  though 
a  low  one,  was  necessary  to  keep  the  ship  steady,  otherwise  she 
would  pitch  about,  and  knock  herseK  to  i^ieces.  The  very  careful 
investigation  which  this  and  every  detail  of  St.  Luke's  narrative 
received  from  the  late  Mr.  Smith,  of  Jordanhill,  has  thrown  a 
flood  of  light  upon  tliis  chapter,  and  his  views  have  been  fol- 
lowed by  all  recent  expositors. 

So  were  driven. — "  So,"  i.e.,  "  in  this  state,"  with  the  ship 
undergirded,  with  stormsails  set,  and  on  the  starboard  tack, 
which  was  the  only  course  by  which  she  could  avoid  falling  upon 
the  Syrtis.     (Smith,  Voyage  and  Shipwreck  of  St.  Paul,  p.  72.) 

18  Laboured  exceedingly. — The  Gr.  does  not  mean  "being 
tossed,"  as  Auth.,  following  Yulg.,  tempestate  jactatis,  but 
"  being  hard  pressed;"  in  nautical  phi-ase,  "labouring." 

To  throw  the  freight  overboard.— Auth.  (in  general  terms), 
"lift-iitened  the  ship."     Yvilg.,  jactum  fecerunt.     The  Gr.  is  a 


THE    ACTS— XXYII.  253 

technical  term,  used  in  Jonah  i.  5  (LXX.)  and  in  classical  authors, 
as  ^schylus  (S.C.T.  755),  for  throwino;  overboard  the  carjjo 
and  whatever  the  ship  carried  that  could  be  spared. 

19  They  cast  out. — By  change  in  Gv.  text  for  "we"  (Auth.). 
According  to  this  reading  the  passengers  were  not  called  upon 
to  help  the  ship's  company. 

The  tackling. — Margin,  "  Or,  furniture,"  as  beds,  &c.  The 
Gr.  is  wide  enoi;gh  to  include  all  movables. 

20  Shone  upon  us. — More  exact  than  Auth.,  "appeared."    Vulg., 

apparentibus. 

21  When  they  had  been  long  without  food. — Auth.,  "after 
long  abstinence."  So  Tynd.  ;  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  "fasting." 
"  Abstinence  "  implies  a  voluntary  refraining  from  food,  which 
is  not  in  the  Gr.  ;  their  anxiety  may  have  taken  away  all  inclma- 
tion  for  food. 

Gotten. — Is  more  according  to  Engl,  idiom  than  "gained" 
(Auth.,  with  Geuev.  and  Rhem.),  as  applied  to  "  injmyand  loss." 
The  Gr.  idiom  KtpSria-ai  is  preserved  in  the  Latin  liicri  facere 
(Vulg.). 

27  To  and  fro. — So  Genev. ;  here  a  more  appropriate  phrase  than 
"  up  and  down "  (Auth.).  The  Greek  is  rendered  "  spread 
abroad  "  in  chap.  xiii.  49. 

The  sea  of  Adria. — Auth.,  "  in  Adria,"  whicli  is  not  very  in- 
telligible to  the  English  reader.  The  name  at  that  time  included 
much  more  than  is  now  meant  by  the  "  Adriatic."  The  ancient 
geographer  Ptolemy  applies  it  to  the  whole  of  the  sea  that 
washes  the  shores  of  Sicily  on  the  west,  and  Crete  on  the  east ; 
so  that  the  ship,  in  going  from  one  island  to  the  other,  was  in 
the  Adriatic  all  the  while.  The  southern  part  of  it,  however, 
was  also  known  by  the  Romans  as  the  "Ionian  Sea,"  and  the 
most  northern  part,  the  GuK  of  Venice,  was  called  the  "  Adi'iatic 
Gulf." 

Surmised. — Auth.,  "deemed,"  which  denotes  a  more  decided 
opinion  than  the  Gr.  virtvSow,  "  suspected,"  the  cognate  noim  to 
wliich  is  rendered  "  surmising  "  in  1  Tim.  vi.  4  (Auth.). 

27,  30  Sailors. — Auth.,  "  shipmen,"  which,  thougli  corresponding 
exactly  to  the  Gr.,  and  to  the  Latin  nauta,  is  now  obsolete. 

29  Be  cast  ashore. — Auth.,  "fall  upon  rocks."  The  Gr.  is 
literally  "fall  oif,"  i.e.,  be  cast  off  from  the  sea  by  the  actiou 
of  the  waves, 


254  TEE    ACTS-^XXVII. 

Rocky  ground.— Antli.,  "  rocks,"  literally,  "  rough  places." 

30  Seeking.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  The  Gr.  signifies  not  that 
they  were  about  to  do  it  (Auth.),  but  that  they  were  seeking, 
planning,  how  to  do  it. 

Would  lay  out  anchors.— i.e.,  at  cable's  leugth,  for  which 
purj)ose  they  would  liave  to  go  off  in  a  boat.  Auth.,  "  cast  out." 
Vulg.,  followed  by  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  extendere. 

34  For  your  safety.— Genev.,  "  safeguard."  All  other  versions, 
"  health,"  which  was  formerly  not  limited  as  it  now  is  to  the 
condition  of  body  and  mind.  Thus  in  Luke  i.  77  Wycl.  has 
"  science  of  health,"  where  all  that  followed  have  "  knowledge  of 
salvation ; "  and  in  Ps.  Ixvi.  2  we  have,  both  in  the  Auth.  and 
the  Prayer-book,  "  thy  saving  health." 

There  shall  not  a  hair  perish.— (So  Wycl.  and  Rliem.) 
By  change  in  Greek  text  for  "fall"  (Auth.).  Vulg.,  peribit, 
whence  probably  Shakespeare,  Tempest,  i.  2 — 

" Prospero.  But  are  they,  Ariel,  safe? 
Ariel.  Not  a  hair  perish'd. " 

39  Perceived. — Auth.,  "discovered;"  Kmevoovv  here  has  its  usual 
sense,  as  at  Matt.  vii.  3,  &c. 

A  .  .  •  bay. — Auth.,  "a  creek."  Previous  English  versions, 
"a  haven."  Vulg..  simim  (a  bay).  The  Gr.  is  "a  bay,"  whether 
small  or  large.  The  place  now  identified  as  the  scene  of  the 
events  here  narrated  may  be  described  as  a  small  bay,  a  creek.' 

With  a  beach. — A  smooth  shore,  alyiaK6s,  as  opposed  to  a 

rocky  shore,  S/cttj.     (Comp.  Matt.  xiii.  2,  &c.) 

Drive  the  ship  upon  it  —  i.e.,  upon  the  beach.  Auth., 
"  thrust  in  the  ship,"  i.e.,  into  the  "  creek."  The  Gr.  is  properly 
to  "  strand  "  a  ship,  to  run  it  aground,  and  is  used  in  that  sense 
by  Thucydides. 

40  Casting  off  the  anchors.— i.e.,  detached  them  from  their 
connection  with  the  ship;  the  very  reverse  of  "taken  up  the 
anchors,"  as  all  English  versions,  following  Vulg.  Compare 
verse  20,  where  the  same  Gr.  is  "  taken  away." 

They  left  them  in  the  sea.— i.e.,  the  anchors.  See  verse 
29.  Auth.,  following  Tjaid.,  "they  committed  themselves  to  the 
sea,"  and  so  Vidg. ;  by  themselves  probably  meaning  the  ship, 
for' they  themselves  continued  in  the  ship.  But  the  Gr.  entirely 
forbids  this  interpretation. 


THE  ACTS— XXVIII.  255 

The  foresail. — It  could  not  be  "  the  mainsail,"  as  Auth.,  with 
Tynd.,  the  yard  and  rigging  of  which  had  been  brought  down 
upon  deck  (verse  17),  and  afterwards,  most  probably,  thrown 
overboard.  The  Gr.  word,  artemon,  has  been  used  in  uiediieval 
times  by  the  French  and  Yenetian  saUors,  and  applied  by  the 
former  to  the  sternsail,  by  the  latter  to  the  foresail,  which  Avas 
also  with  the  Yenetians  the  mainsail ;  and  hence  probably  has 
arisen  the  mistake  with  regard  to  the  meaning  which  it  had  iu 
ancient  times,  and  which  it  has  in  this  place.  The  Avord  is  not 
found  in  any  other  Gr.  writer  (Smith,  "  Voyage,'"  &c.). 

41  The  vessel. — All  English  versions,  "  the  ship."  The  word  is 
here  changed.  That  which  hitherto  has  been  a  TrXohv,  capal)le  of 
saUiug,  is  now  reduced  to  a  wreck,  a  mere  hulk,  and  is  called 
vavs,  a  word  not  again  used  in  the  New  Testament.  ( Wo nlsivorth . ) 

Began  to  break  up.— Auth.,  "was  broken."  The  Gr. 
imperfect    denotes    a    process    of  dissolution   or  breaking   up 

(eXuero), 

43  Desiring  to  save  Paul.— Not  "  willing  "  only,  as  Auth.,  but 
intent  iipon  doing  it,  ^ov\6ixivos. 

Should  cast  themselves  overboard,  and  get  first  to 
the  land —  i.e.,  that  the  others  might  be  encouraged  by  their 
example,  and  might  also  have  their  assistance,  if  they  required  it. 


CHAPTER  XXYIII. 


2  The  barbarians.— So  Auth.  in  verse  4,  and  in  the  four  places 
in  which  the  same  word  occurs  in  St.  Paul's  Epistles;  but  here, 
"  the  barbarous  people."  The  word  was  used  to  designate  those 
who  were  neither  Greeks  nor  Romans,  without  implying  that 
they  were,  in  the  modern  sense  of  "  barbarous,"  rude  and 
uncivilised. 

No  common  kindness.— Auth.,  "  no  little  kindness,"  but  in 
chap.  xix.  11,  "  no  common  miracles."  Gr.,  oh  tV  rvxovaav.  By 
the  same  word  Longinus  describes  Moses  as  "no  common  man;" 
literally,  "  not  to  be  met  with  by  chance,"  or  "every  day." 


2o6  THE  ACTS— XXVIII. 

3  By  reason  of  the  heat.— Auth.,  "out  of  the  heat."  The 
Gr.  preposition  is  by  change  in  Gr.  text  airS,  not  (k.  For  air6  in 
this  causal  sense  see  Matt,  xviii.  7. 

4-  The  beast.— The  Gr.  is  ejiplov,  "wild  beast."  There  is  no  need 
to  insert  venomous,  as  in  Auth. 

Justice. — Anth.,  "vengeance."  Gr.,  v  SiKrj.  With  this  personi- 
fication  of  justice  may  be  compared  Sophocles,  Antigone,  544. 

Hath  not  suffered.— The  verb  is  in  the  past  tense,  the  aorist. 
The  horrified  bystanders  consider  him  to  be  already  as  good  as 
dead. 

6  Expected  that  he  would.— Auth,,  with  Tynd.,  less  exactly, 
"  looked  wlien  he  should." 

Swollen. — The  Gr.  Trl/xvpacreai  properly  means  "to  take  fire," 
"  to  become  inflamed  "  (as  applied  to  a  wound) ;  and  one  of  the 
serpents  of  Africa  was  named  Prestes  from  this  word,  which  was 
tliought  to  describe  the  effect  of  its  bite.  Compare  Lucan, 
Pharsulia,  ix.  790. 

Nothing  amiss. — Auth.,  "  no  harm."  The  Gr.  ironos,  which 
occurs  also  in  chap.  xxv.  5,  and  in  St.  Luke's  Gospel  xxiii.  41, 
means  properly  "  out  of  place,"  and  may  be  applied  either  to  a 
misdeed  or  to  physical  derangement  and  suffering :  its  best 
equivalent  in  English  is  "  amiss." 

7  Lands. — So  Cramu.  and  Rhem. ;  Auth.,  foUoAving  Genev., 
"  possessions  ;  "  Vulg.,  prced.ia,  whence  Wycl.,  "  manors,"  and 
Tjiid.,  "  a  lordship."  The  Gr.  is  x'^P^^,  for  which  compare 
chap.  1.  18. 

Entertained  us  .  .  .  courteously. —Auth.,  "lodged  us 
courteously."  The  Gr.  verb  is  properly  to  entertain  a  guest,  as 
at  chap.  x.  23 ;  Heb.  xiii.  2.  The  adverb  (not  the  same  as  in 
chap,  xxvii.  3)  is  <(>i,\o(pp6vuis,  "  with  a  friendly  disposition." 

8  Fever  and  dysentery. — Auth.,  "a  fever  and  a  bloody  flux." 
The  malady  is  specified  by  St.  Luke  with  medical  precision. 
"  Fever  "  in  '■/he  Gr.  is  the  plural  "fever  fits,"  and  signifies  an 
intermittent  fever,  which  Hippocrates  describes  as  an  accompaui- 
ment  of  dysentery.  The  same  type  of  that  disease  is  said  to  be 
still  prevalent  in  the  island  of  Malta. 

9  Were  cured.— Auth.,  "  were  healed."  The  Gr.  is  not  the  same 
as  in  verse  8.  The  one  properly  refers  to  the  actual  removal  of 
the  malady,  the  other  to  the  care  or  "  cure "  {cura),  the  treat- 
ment by  means  of  which  the  restoration  to  health  is  effected. 


THE  ACTS— XXVIII.  257 

10  When  we  sailed, they  put  on  board.— Auth.,  "  when  we 
depai-ted,  tliey  laded  us."  Tlie  Gr.  for  "  sailed  "  is  the  same  as  at 
chap.  XX.  34,  and  attention  to  the  meaning  of  it,  and  of  the  verb 
which  follows,  prevents  the  otherwise  possible  suijpositiou  tliat 
the  departing  travellers  were  themselves  "  laden  "  with  things 
needful  for  the  voyage. 

11  The  twin  brothers— i.e.,  as  in  Auth.,  "Castor  and  Pollux." 

12  Touching  at.— Auth.,  "landing  at."  The  Gr. isthe  reverse  of 
the  word  rendered  "  set  sail "  at  verse  11.  This  is  properly 
"going  down  from  sea  to  shore,"  that  (in  verse  11)  is  "  going  tqj 
from  shore  to  sea." 

13  Made  a  circuit.— Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "fetched  a  com- 
pass," a  good  old  English  phrase,  occurring  in  2  Sam.  v.  23  and 
2  Kings  iii.  9,  but  now  obsolete,  and  liable  here  to  be  misimder- 
stood,  from  the  special  sense  in  which  the  word  "  compass  "  is 
used  on  board  ship.  Rhem.,  "  compassing  by  shore,"  which  repre- 
sents the  Yulg.,  circumagentes,  "  going  round  by  the  shore,"  as 
opposed  to  putting  out  to  sea.  The  true  meaning  appears  to 
be  that  the  wind  being  contrary  they  could  not  go  straight 
across ;  so  they  worked  to  windward  by  tacking,  and  the  next 
day  a  favourable  wind  sprang  up  from  the  south. 

Sprang  up.— AU  English  versions,  "  blew."  The  word  means 
literally,  "arose  upon,"  or  "in  succession  to,"  that  which  had 
been  so  adverse. 

14  Were  intreated.— Auth.,  "  were  desired."  For  this  meaning 
of  TrapaKaXfw  compare  verse  20,  also  chap.  xiii.  42. 

We  came  to  Rome.— So  Wycl.,  Tynd.,  and  Cranm.,  with 
Yidg.,  sic  venimus  Bomavi.  Genev.  and  Auth.,  "we  went 
towards  Rome,"  not  expressing  the  dej&nite  past  tense  of  the 
vei'b,  which  is  the  same  as  in  verse  14,  "  we  came  to  Puteoli." 
We  are  to  understand  that,  without  breaking  the  Journey  again, 
they  came  to  Rome,  and  on  the  way  they  were  met  by  the 
brethren  who  came  out  to  them  from  Rome. 

15  The  m.arket  of  Appiiis.— In  Latin,  ^jjpii/orHwi.  This  and 
"  The  Three  Taverns  "  [Tres  tabernce)  were  two  towns  or  stations, 
the  former  33,  the  latter  23,  miles  from  Rome,  on  the  great 
Appian  Way,  the  road  between  Rome  and  Brundisium,  in  South 
Italy,  from  which  port,  then  as  now,  travellers  embarked  for 
Greece,  Egypt,  and  the  East. 

16  "  The  Centiu-iou,"  &c.— (Auth.)  Omitted  in  all  the  great  MSS., 
the  Vulg.,  &c. 

B 


268  THE  ACTS— XXVIII. 

The  soldier  that  guarded  him.— According  to  the  usual 
mode  of  close  custody,  beiug  attached  to  liim  by  a  chain.  Auth., 
"  a  soldier." 

17  I,  brethren. — "  I,"  by  change  in  Gr.  text,  is  made  more  em- 
phatic than  before,  being  the  first  word  in  the  sentence. 

Done.— Auth.,  "  committed,"  pointing  to  offences  against  the 
law.     The  G-r.  is  simply  ■Koi-})ffas. 

20  Did  I  intreat  you,  &c. — The  ambiguity  in  this  verse  (see  Mar- 
gin) arises  from  there  not  beiug  in  the  Gr.  any  pronoun  following 

"  see,"  and  "speak  with,"  and  consequently  it  is  doubtful  whether 
the  omission  shoidd  be  supplied  by  "  me,"  as  in  the  text,  or  by 
"  you,"  as  in  the  Margin  and  Auth. 

21  Report. — Auth.,  "  shew."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  chaj). 
iv.  23. 

23  Expounded  <7ie  irtrt/ier. — This  insertion  is  intended  to  show 
that  "  expounded  "  does  not  (as  it  seems  to  do  in  Auth.)  apply  to 
"  the  Kingdom  of  God." 

24  Disbelieved. — As  in  Luke  xxiv.  11.    Auth.,  "believed  not." 

28  This  salvation. — "  This "  is  inserted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 
Compare  chap.  v.  20,  "  the  words  of  this  life." 

They  will  also  hear — i.e.,  as  well  as  have  it  sent  to  them. 

29  This  verse  is  not  found  in  any  MS.  of  the  first  rank. 

31  Boldness.— Rather  than  "  confidence "  (Auth.).  The  Gr. 
irappriffla  is  properly  "  boldness  of  speech,"  which  does  not  of 
necessity  imply  confidence. 


THE  EPISTLE   OF   PAUL   THE  APOSTLE  TO  THE 

ROMANS. 

CHAPTER   L 

3  Who  was  born.— Autli.,  Avitli  WycL,  Geiicv.,  and  Rhem., 
"  wliicli  was  made."  Tyud.,  "begotten  ixuto  him."  Compare 
John  i.  14,  "the  Word  became  tiesh,"  where  the  Gr.  is  the 
same,  though  a  few  verses  previously,  where  the  same  Gr.  verb 
is  used  of  the  creation  of  the  workl,  "  was  made  "  has  been 
retained. 

4  Declared.  —  Margin,  "  Gr.,  determined "  (as  in  Margin  of 
Auth.),  i.e.,  "  defined,"  the  Gr.  being  dpiadevTos.  The  Vulg.  has 
prcedestinatus.  This  was  corrected  and  the  present  rendering 
adopted  by  Tynd.  The  Apostle  uses  a  compound  of  the  same 
verb  concerning  himself  in  verse  1,  there  translated  "  sexiarated." 

With  power  is  to  be  connected  with  "  declared."  Compare 
Mark  ix.  1,  "  till  they  see  the  kingdom  of  God  come  with 
power." 

By  the  resurrection  of  the  dead— i.e.,  by  the  universal 
resurrection  accomplished  in  Him—  not  "  from  the  dead  " 
(Auth.),  as  if  it  were  by  His  o^vn  rising  from  the  dead.  The 
same  expression  is  used  by  St.  Luke  (Acts  xx\'i.  23),  where  see 
Note. 

5  Jesus  Christ  our  Lord. — These  words,  which  are  placed  in 
Auth.  (following  Genev.),  at  the  beginning  of  the  3rd  verse,  after 
"  his  Son,"  are  brought  back  to  the  position  which  they  have  in 
the  Gr.,  Avliere  the  sequence  of  thought  requires  them  to  stand. 
The  intervening  clauses  are  an  amplification  of  the  title  "  big 
Son,"  and  the  words  "  Jesus  Christ  our  Lord  "  introduce  the 
mention  of  Christ  in  relation  to  men,  to  his  Apostle  first,  then  to 
the  world  in  general,  and  then  to  the  saints  at  Rome,  to  whom 
the  Epistle  is  addi'essed. 


260  ROMANS— I. 

Unto  obedience  of  faith..— The  Apostle  reverts  to  the  pur- 
pose for  which  he  had  beeu  separated — viz.,  "  iiuto  the  Gospel " 
(verse  1).  Auth.,  following  Rhem.,  has  "  for  obedience,"  which 
obscures  the  connection  with  verse  1 ;  previous  versions  have  a 
paraphrase,  which  loses  eight  of  it  altogether. 

Obedience  of  faith. — Not,  as  all  English  versions,  "  obedience 
to  the  faith "  as  to  a  creed  or  f onn  of  doctrine,  but  obedience 
springing  from  faith  in  Christ  as  its  motive.  These  words  are 
repeated  at  the  end  of  the  Epistle  (chap.  xvi.  26). 

6  Called  to  be  Jesus  Christ's. —  As  St.  Paul  himself  was 
"called"  to  bean  Apostle  (verse  1),  so  they  are  "called  to  be 
Christ's,"  not  "  called  by  "  Him,  as  Auth.,  following  Cranm.  and 
Rhem.,  "  called  of  Jesus  Christ ;  "  and  in  the  next  verse  they  are 
described  as  "  called  to  be  saints." 

8  Proclaimed. — The  Gr.  requires  a  stronger  word  than  "  spoken 
of"  (Auth.,  with  Cranm.),  or  "  published"  (Tynd.  and  Geuev.). 
Compare  Acts  xiii.  5.  The  news  that  the  Christian  faith  was 
established  at  Rome  woiUd  spread  quickly  throughout  the 
Empire,  and  from  thence  go  forth  into  nations  not  subject  to  tlie 
Romans.  The  word  for  "  world  "  here  used  by  the  Apostle  is 
6  K0<xfj.6s,  not  h  o'lKoviievri. 

9  Whom  I  serve  in  my  spirit.— So  Wycl.  and  Gcnev.  Auth., 
as  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  "  with  my  sj)irit."  The  Gr.  Xarpevu,  "  I 
serve,"  properly  denotes  the  scrA^ce  of  worship  :  that  service  the 
Apostle  says  he  renders  in  his  own  spirit,  as  in  a  temple  ;  and  in 
beautiful  harmony  with  this  thought  he  says  to  the  Cori'nthians 
(1  Cor.  iii.  16),  "  know  ye  not  that  ye  arc  a  temple  of  God?"  If 
Sou\6i;£o  had  been  the  word,  the  rendering,  "  I  serve  with  my 
spirit,"  in  the  sense  of  "  obey,"  would  not  have  been  in- 
appropriate. 

Always  in  my  prayers  is  better  connected  with  what 
follows  than,  as  in  Auth.,  with  the  in-eceding  words ;  "  always  " 
being  tautologous  in  connection  with  "  unceasingly." 

10  I  may  be  prospered.— The  Gr.  properly  means  "  to  be  pros- 
pered in  a  journey,"  but  is  used  without  any  reference  to  a 
journey  in  1  Cor.  xvi.  2,  and  3  John  2,  "  I  pray  that  in  all 
tilings  thou  mayest  prosper,"  the  only  places  besides  this  in  which 
it  occurs  in  the  New  Testament.  Here  the  desire  of  the  Apostle 
is  not  that  liis  journey  may  be  prosperous  (as  in  Auth.),  but  that 
the  course  of  events  may  favour  his  intention  of  coming  to  them. 

12  The  Greek  is  involved,  but  the  meaning  to  be  derived  from 
it  is  clear,  "  that  I  with  you  may  be  comforted  in  you  (in  my 


ROMANS— I.  261 

intercourse  with  you),  each  of  us  by  the  other's  faith,  both 
yours  and  mine  " — i.e.,  he  by  the  faith  which  is  in  them,  they  by 
the  faith  which  is  in  him ;  it  denotes  the  recognition  on  each 
side  of  faith  toward  God  as  existing  on  the  other  side,  not  of  a 
"mutual"  faith  or  confidence  as  existing  between  the  two.  The 
paraphrase  in  Auth.  obscures  this  meaning,  especially  by  sub- 
stituting "  the  mutual  faith  "  for  "  the  common  faith  "  (which 
stood  in  previous  versions). 

13  Hindered.— All  English  versions,"  let," except  Rhem., "  stayed." 
"  Let "  in  this  sense  has  become  obsolete,  but  is  used  several 
times  in  the  Auth.,  as  2  Thess.  ii.  7  and  Exod.  v.  4 ;  also  in  Shake- 
speare, Twelfth  Night,  act  v.,  scene  1. 

14  Foolish. — Auth.,  "  unwise,"  which  is  the  proper  and  literal  ren- 
dering of  another  word,  &<rocpos,  in  Eph.  v.  15,  "not  as  unwise, 
but  as  wise." 

17  A  righteousness  of  God.— All  English  versions,  "the 
righteousness."  What  is  liere  ■  meant  is  not  God's  essential 
righteousness,  nor  His  righteousness  in  dealing  with  mankind, 
nor  a  plan  by  which  we  may  become  righteous,  but  a  righteous- 
ness of  the  same  natm*e  with  His,  derived  from  Him,  an  inhe- 
rent quality  or  i^erfection  imparted  to  us  by  Him  through  Jesus 
Christ. 

By  faith  unto  faith— i.e.,  by  means  of  faith  in  its  small  be- 
ginnings unto  faith  in  its  fulness ;  or  as  Margin  and  Auth., 
"  fro)n  faith  to  faith,"  from,  out  of,  faith  in  the  germ,  unto  faitli 
in  the  fruit.  The  same  meaning  must  be  given  to  4k  in  both  parts 
of  the  verse,  and  "  by  faith  "  seems  to  suit  both  places  better 
than  "  from." 

18  The  wrath. — Margin,  "  Or,  a  wrath."  It  is  quite  open  to  us, 
80  far  as  the  Gr.  is  concerned,  to  ado^jt  the  alternative  of  the 
Margin,  a  for  the  (wliich  has  been  done  inverse  17),  but  "  a  wrath 
of  God  "  would  receive  no  explanation  eitlier  from  the  context  or 
from  the  teaching  of  Scripture.  "  A  righteousness  "  is  revealed 
from  God,  derived  from  Him,  imparted  to  us  ;  God's  wrath  is  re- 
vealed, not  that  we  may  have  anything  like  it  in  ourselves,  but 
that  we  may  take  warning  from  the  revelation  that  has  been 
made  of  it. 

Who  hold  down.— Margin,  "  Or,  who  hold  "  (as  Auth.).  Both 
senses,  though  very  dissimilar,  are  permissible,  the  question  being 
whether  in  the  verb  Karexu  the  preposition  has  the  sense  of  sup- 
pressing or  of  holding  fast.  In  the  one  case  it  refers  to  those  who, 
living  in  unrighteousness,  stifle  the  growth  in  their  hearts  of  the 


262  ROMANS— I 

truth  which  their  conscience  has  approved ;  in  the  other  case,  to 
those  who  hold,  maintain,  profess  the  truth,  but  only  as  a  lifeless 
principle  which  has  no  effect  on  their  conduct.  For  the  former 
sense  of  Karex<^  see  Luke  iv.  42  and  2  Thess.  ii.  6 ;  for  the  latter, 
Luke  viii.  15. 

20  Since  the  creation. —  Not  "from"  (Auth.),  in  the  sense  of 
"  being  inferred  from,"  which  would  be  e'/c,  but  "  from  the  time 
of,"  in  which  sense  dirS  is  used  in  Matt.  xxy.  34,  "  the  kingdom 
prepared  for  jow  from  the  foundation  of  the  world." 

Being  perceived. — The  Gr.  does  not  say  "  being  understood  " 
(as  Auth.) ;  nor  can  it  be  truly  said,  except  in  the  loose  way  in 
which  we  talk  of  imderstandiug  what  we  infer  or  suppose,  though 
it  is  not  plainly  set  before  tis. 

His  divinity. — So  Rhem.,  following  Vulg.,  divinitas.  All 
other  English  versions,  "  Godhead."  To  speak  of  the  "  Godhead" 
of  God,  i.e.,  of  his  being  God  (Gr.,  ee6Tr]s),  is  a  tatitology. 
His  "divinity,"  meaning  the  various  attributes  bound  up  in  our 
concej)tion  of  God,   represents   as  nearly  as  possible   the   Gr. 

Everlasting. — Auth.,  "eternal,"  which  is  the  proper  rendering 
of  cd^vios.  The  Gr.  here  is  aiStos,  which  occurs  only  in  this  place 
and  Jude  6. 

21  Knowing  God. — Auth.,  following  Wycl.  and  Tynd.,  "when 
they  knew."  The  participial  rendering  avoids  the  suggestion  of 
a  temporal  sense,  of  a  time  now  past  when  they  knew  God.  So 
Rhem.,  "  whereas  they  knew." 

Neither  gave  thanks. — So  "Wycl.  and  Rhem.  The  Gr.  de- 
notes the  outward  expression  of  thanks,  thanksgiAnng  ;  corre- 
sponding to  "  glorified,"  the  outward  adoration  offered  to  God  on 
account  of  His  Divine  perfections.  Auth.,  as  Tj-nd.,  "were 
thankful,"  which  refers  to  the  inward  feeling  only. 

Reasonings. — Auth.,  with  Tynd., "  imaginations,"  a  sense  which 
nowhere  in  the  New  Testament  is  given  to  the  Gr.  SiaXoytvixos. 
Compare  Luke  ix.  46. 

Senseless. — Auth.,  "  foolish,"  the  i-endering  of  another  word 
in  the  next  verse. 

23  Changed   the    glory    .    .    .    for   the  likeness.— Auth., 

"  into  an  image."  The  meaning  is  that  they  substituted  the 
one  for  the  other,  as  an  object  of  worship;  not  that  they  changed 
the  one  into  the  other,  which  was  a  thing  impossible.  The  words 
are  a  quotation  from  Ps.  cv.  20  (LXX.  version). 


ROMANS— I.  263 

Into  the  likeness  of  an  image  of  corruptible    man— 

i.e.,  "  into  the  resemblance  of  the  image  or  figure  of  a  corruptible 
man."  Auth.,  "  into  an  image  made  like  to  corruptible  man,"  a 
paraphrase  which  fairly  gives  the  sense,  though  with  a  con- 
siderable departure  from  the  weighty  phrase  of  the  original. 

27  Which  was  due. — Auth.,  "which  was  meet."  Gr.,  V  eSei. 
Wycl.,  "  that  meed  which  behoved." 

28  They  refused. — Margin,  "Gr.,  they  did  not  approA^e;"  and 
so  the  word  is  rendered  in  Phil.  i.  10,  "  that  ye  may  approve  the 
things  that  are  excellent ;  "  it  is  in  direct  contrast  to  that  wliich 
in  the  following  clause  of  this  verse  is  rendered  "  reprobate." 
The  Yulg.  preserves  the  j)lay  of  words,  which  cannot  well  be 
represented  in  English,  Non  probavemnt  Deuvi  habere  in  notitia, 
tradidit  illos  Deus  in  reprobum  sensiim.  The  meaning  in  sim- 
ple English  may  be  thus  expressed :  "  As  they  would  have 
nothing  to  do  with  Him,  He  would  have  nothing  to  do  with 
them." 

Fitting. — Auth.,  ■with  E-hem.,  "  convenient,"  a  word  which  now 
Las  a  lower  sense  than  belonged  to  it  in  its  original  Latin,  or 
than  it  had  in  the  Elizabethan  age  (see  rubric  at  the  end  of  the 
Marriage  Service  in  the  Prayer  Book).  The  Gr.  is  literally, 
"  things  unbecoming,"  not  consistent  with  the  nature  which  God 
had  given  them.     Tynd.,  "  not  comely." 

32  The  ordinance  of  God.— So  Genev.,  "the  law  ordained  of 
God;"  Auth.,  "the  judgment."  The  Gr.,  Si/caico/xo,  means 
properly  the  "  just  decree,"  or  "  ordinance."  Compare  chap.  ii.  26 ; 
Luke  i.  6. 

Practise. — The  Gr.  irpda-creiy,  twice  used  in  this  verse,  is  thus 
rendered  in  chap.  vii.  19,  where  it  stands,  as  it  does  liere,  in  con- 
tradistinction to  TToieij/,  "  to  do."  Like  the  English  "  practise," 
which  is  formed  from  it,  it  conveys  the  notion  of  a  continued  or 
repeated  doing.  The  phrase,  "  commit  such  things  "  (Auth.,  after 
Tpid.),  is  not  consistent  with  the  modem  sense  of  "  commit." 


264  ROMANS— 11. 


CHAPTER  II. 

1  Dost  practise.— The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  at  the  end  of  the  last 
sentence. 

2  We  know. — Auth.,  "we  are  sure,"  as  in  John  xvi.  30. 

3  Reckonest.— Auth.,  "thinkest."  The  Gr.,  Ao^i^r;,  presents  the 
matter  as  one  of  calculation  and  forecast. 

5  In  the  day. — SoWycl. — i.e.,  to  be  revealed  in  the  day.  Auth., 
"  against  the  day."  The  meaning  may  not  be  very  difBerent,  but, 
proi^erly  speaking,  to  lay  u-p  treasure  against  an  evil  day  is  to 
provide  against  the  danger  or  emergency  of  the  day,  which  is 
a  sense  not  applicable,  except  ironically,  in  this  case.  Compare 
Exod.  vii.  15. 

7  Patience.— Auth.  (alone),  "patient  continuance."  The  Gr.  is 
a  single  word  signifying  "  endurance," 

Incorruption.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem. ;  Auth.,  as  Tyud.,  "im- 
mortality." a.(peaparia  properly  means  "  incorruption,"  and  is  so 
rendered  in  Auth.,  1  Cor.  xv.  53. 

8  Factious. — Auth.,  "  contentious  ;  "  so  other  versions,  misled  by 
a  Avi-ong  derivation  of  the  Gr.  from  epir,  "strife,"  instead  of 
fpidos,  which  means  (1)  a  working  man,  (2)  a  hireling,  (3)  a  venal 
partisan;  and  hence  the  word  obtains  the  sense,  in  which  it 
is  here  used,  of  self-seeking  factiousness.  Compare  Gal.  v.  20 ; 
Phil.  i.  16. 

12  Under  law.— Auth.,  "in  the  law."  The  omission  of  the  article 
here,  as  well  as  in  the  former  part  of  the  verse,  shews  that  the 
Apostle  has  in  view  not  the  Jews  only,  but  the  Gentiles  also,  who 
were  not  under  the  law — i.e.,  the  law  of  Moses;  and  the  insertion 
of  the  article  here,  after  its  omission  just  before,  only  tends  to 
produce  confusion. 

13  For  not  the  hearers  of  a  law. — A  general  observation, 
exijlanatory  of  the  foregoing.  The  article  is  omitted  by  change 
in  Gr.  text. 

14  Which  have  no  law — i.e.,  no  specially  revealed  law.  Auth., 
"  which  have  not  the  law."     The  Gr.  has  not  the  article. 

15  In  that  they  shew. — Auth.,  "which  shew."  The  Gr.  rela- 
tive pronoun  {oinves)  often  has  a  causal  sense,  like  quippe  qui  in 
Latin,  "  inasmuch  as,"  or  "  in  that"  they  shew.  The  Gr.  would 
be  more  nearly  represented  by  "  being  persons  who."    The  same 


ROMANS— II.  265 

rendering  might  be  adopted  in  places  where  it  is  not  so  necessary 
for  the  sense — e.g.,  in  chap.  i.  25. 

Bearing  witness  therewith — i.e.,  with  "the  work  of  the 
law,"  which  they,  as  by  an  independent  testimony,  confirm  by 
doing  it  without  knowing  that  it  has  been  commanded  in  a  reve- 
lation from  God.  Not  "witnessing' with  them,"  as  Margin  of 
Anth.,  following Tynd. ;  nor  simply  "bearing  witness,"  as  Auth, 
in  text. 

And  their  thoughts.— Auth.,  "their  thoughts  the  meanwhile 
accusing  or  else  excusing  one  another,"  with  Margin,  "  Or, 
between  themselves."  The  previous  versions  vary  in  their  ren- 
derings. The  Yidg.  correctly  has  inter  se  invicem  cogitationibus 
acmsantibiis,  aut  etiam  defendentibus.  The  Gr.,  /xera^v,  "  be- 
tween," does  not  stand  absolutely,  as  in  Auth.  "the  meanwhile;" 
nor  is  it  to  be  joined  vnth.  "  themselves "  (understood),  as  in 
the  Margin  of  Auth. ;  but  with  the  word  following  it,  d\\r)\a>v, 
literally  "  between  one  another,"  or  in  English  idiom,  "  one  with 
another."  Thus  the  "  thoughts  "  are  in  a  manner  personified, 
and  are  represented  as  among  themselves  accusing  or  defending 
them  whose  thoughts  they  are;  "them"  being  suiDplied  as  the 
object  of  these  two  verbs,  from  the  former  part  of  the  sentence. 

16  In  the  day  is  to  be  connected,  not  with  what  immediately 
precedes,  but  with  the  main  sentence,  which  is  broken  oil  at 
the  end  of  verse  10  by  the  parenthetical  explanations  in  verses 
11—15. 

17  But  if.— For  "  behold  "  (Auth.,  with  Tynd.),  by  change  in  Gr. 
text,  supported  by  aU  the  oldest  MSS.  and  Vulg.,  followed  by 
Wycl.  and  Rhem.  "  Behold  "  apj)ears  to  have  been  introduced 
into  the  later  MSS.  to  remove  what  was  thought  to  be  a  break  in 
the  sentence  at  the  beginning  of  verse  21. 

Thou  bearest  the  name. — Auth.,  as  Tynd.,  "thou  art 
called."  The  preposition  eVi  prefixed  to  the  verb  denotes  that 
the  appellation,  "a  Jew,"  is  here  regarded  as  an  honourable  dis- 
tinction. So  Yvdg.,  cognominaris.  Rhem.,  "  if  thou  be  sur- 
named  a  Jew."  Compare  Gal.  ii.  15,  "  We  being  Jews  by 
nature,  and  not  sinners  of  the  Gentiles." 

Blestest  upon. — i.e.,  as  on  an  external  support.  All  English 
versions,  "  restest  in,"  following  Vulg.,  requiescis  in  lege.  The 
difference  in  meaning  is  considerable:  "restest  in"  would  mean 
"art  satisfied,  content,  well  pleased  with  it;"  "restest  on" 
means  "  dependest  on  it  as  thy  vantage  ground,"  from  whence 
thou  mayest  look  down  on  men,  and  hold  nearer  converse  than 
they  with  God. 


266  ROMANS— 11. 

Gloriest  in  God.— So  Wycl.  and  Rliem.,  following  Vulg., 
glorians  in  Deo.  This  rendering  here  as  elsewhere  has  been 
adopted  for  the  Gr.,  Kauxao/ww.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  niakest  thy 
boast  of  God." 

18  His  will. — Literally,  "  the  will,"  the  supreme  wiU.  This  ex. 
pression  does  not  occur  again. 

20  A  corrector  of  the  foolish.— Aiith.,  "an  instructor;"  and 
so  all  previous  Engl,  versions  and  Vnlg.  The  same  word  occura 
once  again  in  the  New  Testament  (Heb.  xii.  9)  in  the  phrase, 
"  fathers  ...  to  chasten  us,"  literally,  "  our  correctors  or 
chastisers."  This  meaning  of  the  word  seems  the  more  probable 
h^re,  as  there  follows  immediately  another  word  signifying  "an 
instructor,"  "  a  teacher." 

22  Dost  thou  rob  temples  ?— Auth.,  following  "Vulg.  and  Wycl., 
"dost thou  commit  sacrilege  ?  "  Tynd.,  "robbest  God  of  his  lionour." 
The  cognate  noun  is  rendered  "  robbers  of  churches  "  in  Acts  xix. 
37  (Auth.).  The  temples  of  the  heathen  gods  are  here  meant ;  and 
tiiough  there  is  no  instance  on  record  of  the  Jews  committing 
stich  an  offence,  we  must  suppose  they  were  thought  capable  of 
it.  from  the  law  against  it  mentioned  by  Josephus,  Ant.  iv.  8,  §  10 
[Alford). 

23  Transgression  is  the  literal  and  usual  translation  of  irapd^aa-ts. 
Compax-e  chap.  iv.  15  (Auth.),  which  here  has  "  breaking." 

24  Because  of  you.— Expresses  the  true  force  of  the  Gr.  preposi- 
tion, and  gives  a  more  definite  meaning  than  Auth.,  "  through 

you." 

25  If  thou  be  a  doer. — The  Gr.  signifies  the  "practice,"  the 
"  habitual  doing."     Auth,,  "  if  thou  keep  the  law." 

Is  become. — Auth.,  "is  made;"  yeyovev,  "is  become,"  as  we 
should  say,  "  to  all  intents  and  pm-poses,  for  any  good  it  can  do 
you." 

26  The  ordinances. — Auth.,  "the  righteousness."  Tynd.,  "the 
right  things  contained  in  the  law."  Tlie  Gr.  is  the  same  word,  in 
the  plural,  that  is  used  in  chap.  i.  32,  where  see  Notes. 

27  With  the  letter.— Auth.,  "  by  the  letter."  The  Gr.  preposi- 
tion does  not  mean  that  by  means  of  the  outward  letter  and 
ceremony  the  Jew  is  a  transgressor,  but  that  loitli  these  external 
advantages,  having  them,  he  yet  transgresses  the  moral  ordinances 
of  the  law.  For  the  same  use  of  5id  see  chap.  iv.  11 ;  2  Cor.  ii.  4. 
In  its  primary  meaning  it  is  "  tlirough,"  then  "  passing  through," 
"  being  in  the  midst  of  such  and  such  circumstances." 


ROMANS— III.  267 


CHAPTER  in. 

2  First  of  all.— Autli.,  with  Genev.,  "  chiefly."  The_  Apostle 
begins  with  "  first,"  but  instead  of  proceeding  to  mention  other 
advantages,  he  goes  ofE  into  a  digression  chai-acteristic  of  his 
mind  and  his  mode  of  epistolary  wi'iting,  from  which  he  does  not 
return  till  chap.  ix.  4,  and  then,  though  he  answers  the  question 
fully,  he  does  so  without  resuming  the  euumei'ation  which  is  here 
begun. 

3  The  double  sense  of  the  Gr.  word  for  "  faith,"  ■Kiaris,  is  she^vu  in 
this  verse  :  (1)  faith  on  tlie  part  of  him  who  trusts  towards  him 
who  is  trusted ;  (2)  f  aithf  idness  on  the  part  of  him  who  is  trusted 
towards  him  who  trusts ;  and  to  keep  up  this  mutual  relation  in 
English,  it  is  necessary  to  render  the  words  at  the  beginning  of 
the  verse  "  were  withoiit  faith,"  not  as  aU  Engl,  versions,  "  did 
not  believe,"  and  so  to  bring  in  "  faith  "  twice,  and  "  faithfulness  " 
instead  of  "  believed,"  "  belief,"  and  "faith,"  as  Auth. 

4  God  forbid. — Literally,  "  may  it  not  so  come  to  pass,"  an  ex. 
clamation  of  vehement  deprecation,  found  only  once  in  the 
Gospels,  in  Luke  xx.  16 ;  frequent  in  St.  Paul  and  later  Gr. 
authors. 

Let  God  be  found  true.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "let  God  be 
true."  The  Gr.  yi-yvoixai,  properly  "  to  become,"  here,  as  often, 
by  an  easy  transition  passes  into  the  sense  of  "  being  proved  or 
found  to  be."  Compare  2  Cor.  \\\.  14,  "  our  glorying  was  found  to 
be  truth"  ("found,"  as  in  Auth.).  The  sense  therefore  is,  "let 
God's  truth  be  proved  and  made  patent  to  all,  though  at  the 
cost  of  shewing  every  human  being  to  be  false." 

Mightest  prevail— t.e.,  "  judicially ;"  the  only  instance  in 
the  New  Testament  of  the  Gr.  vi.k3.v  used  in  the  technical  sense 
of  "  gaining  a  cause."    All  Engl,  versions,  "  overcome." 

"When  thou  comest  into  judgement— le.,  when  thy  deal- 
ings are  called  in  question.  All  Engl,  versions,  "  when  thou  art 
judged."  This  also  is  a  classical  use  of  the  Gr.,  Kpivofjiai,  applied  to 
one  who  has  a  contention  or  controversy  with  another,  either  as 
accuser  or  accused.  Compare  1  Cor.  vi.  6,  "  brother  goeth  to  law 
w4th  brother."  So  God  is  said  to  have  a  "  controversy  "  with 
man,  Isa.  xliii.  26 ;  Jer.  xxv.  31 ;  and  in  other  passages  of  the 
prophets  (LXX.  version). 

5  Who  visiteth  with  wrath.— Literally,  "  who  inflicteth  his 
wrath."     Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  who  taketh  vengeance."     Vulg., 


268  ROMANS— III. 

qui  infert  iram  (not  vindidam).  There  is  notliing  Tindictive  in 
the  wrath  of  God,  nor  is  that  sense  elsewhere  given  in  Auth.  to 
the  Gr.,  0^777. 

After  the  manner  of  men. —  Tlie  Gr.  is  so  rendered  in 
Auth.  at  Gal.  iii.  1.5,  but  here,  "as  a  man." 

7  Through,  my  lie  abounded.— The  Gr.  order  is  followed,  not 
as  differing  ui  sense,  but  as  being  more  perspicuous  than  that  of 
the  Auth. 

Why  am  Z  also  still  judged?— Auth.,  "  why  yet  am  I  also 
judged  ?  "  Compare  chap.  ix.  19,  "  why  doth  he  still  (erj)  find 
fault  ?  "  The  sense  is,  "If  it  were  the  case  that  my  lie,  my 
imfaithfidness,  has  had  the  good  effect  of  promoting  the  glory  of 
God,  what  groimd  exists  any  longer  for  condemning  me  also  with 
others  whose  lies  have  not  had  such  a  result  p  " 

9  Are  we  in  worse  case  than  they? — This  gives  to  the 
Gr.,  irpoex^fMeea,  the  passive  sense,  "  are  we  suriiassed  ?  "  which  it 
has  in  all  other  places  where  it  occurs ;  in  the  New  Testament  it 
is  not  foimd  again.  All  Engl,  versions  have,  "  are  we  better 
than  they  P  "  following  Vulg.,  prcBcellimus  eos  ?  which  would 
require  the  verb  to  be  in  the  active  voice  (irpoexo^ej/).  There  is  no 
example  of  the  sense  given  in  the  Margin,  "  Do  we  excuse  our- 
selves p  "  i.e.,  of  the  verb  standing  absolutely,  without  an  accusa- 
tive of  the  thing  put  forward  as  an  excuse.  The  meaning  is, 
"  Are  we  (Jews)  in  a  worse  case  than  the  Gentiles  ?  "  this  infer- 
ence being  suggested  by  what  is  said  in  verses  4,  5  (Field, 
otium  Norv.). 

Laid  it  to  the  charge.— The  Gr.  never  has  the  sense  given 
to  it  in  Auth.,  "  pi'oved." 

19  May  be  brought  under  the  judgement  of  God.—  The 

Gr.  denotes  not  guilt  (as  Auth.  in  text,  corrected  In  Margin),  but 
liability  to  God's  judgement.  The  Yulg.  misses  this  by  the 
rendering,  ut  suhditus  fiat  omnis  mundus  Deo,  followed  by  Wycl. 
and  Tynd. 

20  This  A-erse  states  not  the  consequence,  as  Auth.  "  therefore,"  but 
the  reason  of  what  is  said  in  the  preceding  (Gr.,  SiSrt).  Because 
in  God's  sight  no  man  can  be  justified  by  the  works  of  the  law, 
therefore  the  Jews  who  have  the  law,  and  the  Greeks  who  have  it 
not,  are  alike  liable  to  His  judgment. 

Through  the  Isuw  cometh. — Anth.,  "by  the  law  is."  "  It  is 
through  knowledge  of  the  law,"  or  generally  "  of  law,"  "  that  the 
consciousness  of  sin  is  produced  iu  us,"  i.e.,  through  the  sense 


ROMANS— IV.  269 

of  our  having  broken  an  external  commandment  that  has  been  laid 
npon  us. 

21  But  now,  apart  from  the  law  (which  could  not  "  justify  " 
or  make  righteous)  a  righteousness  of  God  {i.e.,  derived 
from  God,  see  Note  on  chap.  i.  17).— Aiith.  gives  the  same  sense, 
but  very  obscurely,  the  words  "  without  the  law  "  being  in  such 
a  position  as  to  make  their  meaning  and  connection  doiibtf  ul. 

22  Through  faith.— Contrasted  with  "  through  the  law,"  verse  20. 
25  Set  forth.— Literally,   "  set  forth  unto  himself "    (the   middle 

voice) — i.e.,  "purposed,"  as  in  Margin;  and  so  it  is  rendered 
in  Ephes.  i.  9,  "according  to  his  good  pleasure  which  he 
purposed." 

By  his  blood. — The  prei)osition  iv  is  here  ambiguous  ;  it  may 
be  taken  in  its  primary  meaning,  "  in  his  blood  "  (as  Auth.),  or  in 
that  which  it  often  has  in  the  New  Testament,  "  by :  "  "  set  forth 
by  the  shedding  of  His  blood  to  be  a  propitiation  through  faith." 
"Faith  in  His  blood  "  is  in  itself  a  frequent  and  intelhgible  com- 
bination of  words,  but  it  was  through  His  death  that  Christ  was 
made  "  a  propitiation,"  and  the  propitiation  becomes  eifectual  to 
us  through  faith  in  Him,  not  specially  in  His  death. 
30  If  so  be — i.e.,  "if  it  be  the  case,  as  it  certainly  is;"  by  change 
in  Gr.  text.     Auth.,  "  seeing  that." 

Through  faith. — Margin,  "  Or,  through  the  faith,"  the  differ- 
ence being  that  "  faith "  is  the  abstract  priucij)lc,  "the  faith" 
the  ]Darticular  form  of  it  which  is  called  "  faith  in  Christ " — the 
Christian  faith.  The  converse  of  this  alternative  is  presented 
with  regard  to  law :  "  the  law  "  means  the  law  of  Moses,  "  law  " 
(in  the  Margin)  means  "law"  as  a  general  principle. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

2  Toward  God— i.e.,  "  in  relation  to  God  "  {-n-pSs).  Auth.,  "  be- 
fore God." 

4  As  of  grace — i.e.,  "as  a  matter  of  grace  "  {Kara  %"?"').  Auth., 
"  of  grace." 

6  Pronounceth  blessing  upon  the  man.— Aiith.,  "  describeth 
the  blessedness  of  the  man."     The   Gr.,  jxaKapia-uSs,  is  not  the 


270  ROMANS— IV. 

"  blessed  state,"  'out  tlie  "  benedictiou,"  the  declaration  of  blessed- 
ness. The  cognate  verb  in  Luke  i.  48  is  rendered  "  shall  call  me 
blessed." 

Reckoneth.— Auth.,  "  imputeth,"  and  so  in  Terse  &  The  Gr. 
is  the  same  as  in  verse  5. 

10  How  then  was  it  reckoned  ?—"  Then  "  is  not  temporal,  as 
•   it  woidd  appear  to  be  in  Auth.,  ''  how  was  it  then  reckoned  ?  " 

11  The  reiteration  of  words  and  phrases  in  these  vei-ses  is  according  ■ 
to   the    Greek.      The   variations   in   Auth.,   if  they  relieve  the 
ear,  tend  somewhat  to  confuse  the  miud  of  the  reader,   and  to 
obliterate  one  of  the  characteristics  of  the  Apostle's  style  and 
diction. 

13  For  not  through  the  law.— This  is  the  order  of  the  Gr.,  as 

also  of  Vulg.,  Wycl.,  and  Rhem. 

16  For  this  cause.— Auth.,  "  therefoi-e,"  as  in  John  ^-ii.  22,  and 
elsewhere. 

According  to  grace — i.e.,  dependent  on.  Auth.,  "by grace." 
Compare  verse  4. 

18  In  hope  believed  against  hope.— This  collocation  of  the 
words  is  intended  to  show  that  "  in  hope  "  is  not  connected  with 
"  believe,"  as  it  is  commonly  understood,  with  this  meaning — 
"  who  against  all  himian  expectation  believed  in  a  heavenly  hope;" 
but  stands  as  an  adverb,  qualifying  the  verb  which  follows,  but 
not  depending  on  it :  "  who  hopefully,  or  in  a  hopeful  spirit, 
believed,  against  aU  eartlily  hope."  The  same  phrase,  eV  eATn'Sj, 
is  used  in  tlie  same  manner  at  chap.  viii.  20;  1  Cor.  ix.  10,  "  he  that 
ploweth  ought  to  plow  in  hope  " — i.e.,  hopcfidly  ;  and  Titus  i.  2. 

19  And  without  being  weakened  in  faith.— The  participle 
in  the  Gr.  being  iu  the  past  tense  points  to  a  change  from  strength 
to  weakness,  "  not  having  grown  weak  in  faitli "  hj  re^isou  of  the 
improbability  of  what  was  promised.  Auth.,  "  being  not  weak," 
which  would  be  a  needless  reiteration  of  what  has  been  already 
said. 

"  Not "  (Auth.)  is  omitted  by  change  iu  Gr.  text.  "  He  considered 
these  difficulties,  and  was  not  staggered  by  them."  With  "not'' 
in  the  text,  the  meaning  is  but  slightly  varied,  "  he  gave  no  heed 
to  them,  so  as  to  be  staggered  by  them." 

Now  as  good  as  dead.— Literally,  "  deadened."  Auth..  fol- 
lowing  Tyud.,  "now  dead."  Wycl.,  "nigh  dead."  Rhem., 
"  quite  dead."  Vulg.,  emortuuvi.  Compare  Heb.  xi.  12,  where 
for  the  same  Gr.  the  Auth.  has  "  as  good  as  dead." 


ROMANS— V.  271 

20  Tea,  looking. — This  sentence  rei^eats  what  lias  been  said  as  to 
liis  "  not  being  weakened  in  faith,"  and  makes  an  advance  upon 
it ;  and  in  such  a  case  "  yea "  is  a  better  connecting  link  tlian 
either  of  the  usual  renderings  of  5e — "  and  "  or  "  but ;"  "  Looking 
unto  the  promise,  having  it  in  his  view,  he  was  so  far  from 
wavering  that  he  waxed  strong." 

Wavered. — The  Gr.  is  jn'operly  "disputed,"  "  debated "  with 
himself.     Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  staggered."     Vulg.,  hcesitavit. 

24  Who  believe  on  him. — The  effect  of  the  Gr.  article  here  is 
to  define  a  class,  "  unto  whom,  namely,  them  that  believe ;  "  not 
to  lay  down  a  condition,  as  Auth.,  "to  whom  it  shall  be  imputed, 
if  we  believe."  Had  this  been  intended  the  article  would  not 
have  been  used. 

25  Was  delivered  up. — So  Rhem.  The  omission  of  "up"  in 
Auth.,  following  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  obscures  the  meaning.  The 
Gr.  is  ■irap(S6eri.  Compare  Isa.  liii.  12  (LXX.  version) ;  Matt. 
xvii.  22.  Genev.  has  "delivered  to  death,"  the  words  in  itahcs 
being  from  the  passage  of  Isaiah. 


CHAPTER  V. 

1  let  us  have  peace.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following  Yulg., 
paeeiin  liabeanms.  This  reading  in  the  Gr.  text,  iX'^l^^",  has  in 
its  favour  a  great  j)reponderance  of  the  MSS.  Auth.,  following 
Tynd.,  "  We  have  i^eace,"  according  to  another  reading  of  the 
Gr.,  exoM^",  which  commends  itself  as  more  in  keeping  with  the 
context.  The  impei-ative  "  let  us  have  "  is  an  exhortation  to  be 
at  peace  in  our  hearts  with  God,  through  Jesus  Christ.  Com- 
pare  Heb.  xii.  28,  "Let  us  have  grace,"  ex'^Mf"  X"P"',  where 
there  is  a  similar  diversity  in  the  MSS.,  but  those  which  have 
there  the  indicative,  "  we  have,"  are  comparatively  few. 

2  We  have  had  our  access.— We  have  obtained  the  access 
Avhicli  we  now  enjoy.  Auth.,  "  we  have  access."  The  verb  is  in 
the  perfect  tense ;  and  the  noun  has  the  article,  which  is  not  the 
case  with  "  peace  "  in  the  preceding  verse. 

Let  us  r^oice.— Auth.,  "we   rejoice."     The  Greek   may  be 
either  the  imperative  or  the  indicative  of  the  verb;   but  the 


272  ROMANS— V. 

construction  is  governed,  by  the  necessary  connection  of  this 
clause  with  "  let  us  have  peace  "  in  verse  1.  There  we  ai-e 
exhorted  to  be  at  peace,  here  to  rejoice.     Similarly  in  verse  3. 

Rejoice. — The  subsequent  words,  "  glory  of  God,"  prevent  the 
adoption  here  of  the  ordinary  rendering,  "  let  us  glory,"  which  is 
noticed  in  the  Margin. 

4  Probation. — Auth.,  following  Tyud.,  "experience."  Rliem., 
"  probation,"  following  Yulg.,  jn-obationem.  "  Experience  "  is, 
indeed,  a  consequence  of  patience,  but  not  the  consequence  signi- 
fied by  the  Gr.,  Soki^t},  which  is  the  test  or  probation  exhibited 
before  God  by  our  patience.  Compare  2  Cor.  viii.  2.  "  Ap- 
proval "  woiild  indicate  the  favourable  issue  of  the  probation,  and 
would  therefore  not  be  a  strictly  accurate  reudei'ing :  and  the 
probation  "worketh  hope" — i.e.,  the  state  of  trial,  in  which  we 
are  able  to  stand  firmly,  gives  us  hope  that  we  sliall  finally  be 
approved. 

5  Puttetli  not  to  sha^me.— Literally,  "  covereth  not  with 
shame" — i.e.,  by  mocking  and  deluding  us.  Auth.,  "maketh 
not  ashamed,"  as  it  would,  if  in  itself  a  shameful  hope.  Yulg., 
non  confundit.     Compare  chap.  ix.  33. 

Which,  was  given  to  us — i.e.,  when  we  became  Christians 
and  were  baptized.  Auth.,  "  which  is  given  to  us."  The  verb 
is  in  the  i)ast  tense. 

7  For  the  good  man. — The  adjective,  rov  dyadov,  may  be  cither 
masculine  or  neuter,  as  -rov  irov-qpov  in  Matt.  vi.  13 :  "  the  good 
man,"  or  "good  "in  the  abstract,  "'the  good  principle,"  "the 
good  cause."  In  the  preceding  clause  the  masculine,  "a  righteous 
man,"  is  without  any  doubt  to  be  taken,  the  adjective  being  with- 
out the  article  in  the  Gr. ,  and  therefore  not  capable  of  an  abstract 
sense ;  and  the  masculine  prevailing  there  detei-miues  in  favour 
of  the  masculine  here,  "  the  good  man." 

11  The  reconciliation. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  following 
Tynd.,  "  the  atonement."  The  Gr.  is  the  cognate  noun  to  the 
verb  rendered  in  the  last  verse  "  reconciled." 

12  For  that  all  sinned. — All  sinned  implicitly  in  Adam's  trans- 
gression, not  as  Auth.,  follo^ving  Genev.  only,  "  all  have  sinned," 
i.e.,  by  their  own  actual  transgressions.  The  verb  in  Gr.  is  the 
aorist,  ^fj-aprov,  not  the  ijerfect.  Compare  verse  15,  also  chap.  \i. 
2,  3,  where  a  similar  correction  has  been  made. 

15  The  many  died — i.e.,  by  and  at  the  time  of  the  trespass  of 
Adam.     The  Gr.  verb  here  also  (as  in  verse  12)  is  in  the  aorist. 


ROMANS— V.  273 

The  rendering  of  Auth.,  "  many  be  dead,"  supposes  the  reference 
to  he  to  the  present  state  of  sinners ;  misled  by  Yulj;.,  mortui 
sunt. 

Throughout  this  i^assago  there  are  three  points  to  which  careful 
attention  must  be  given  : — (1)  To  the  contrast  between  "  the  one  " 
and  "  the  many : "  "the  one"  being  at  first  Adam  the  trans- 
gressor, and  aftei'wards  Christ  the  Redeemer,  and  "  the  many  " 
being  not  a  limited  number  but  all  mankind,  of  whom  it  is  said 
that  tlicy  all  died  in  Adam,  and  that  thoy  aU  live,  potentially,  in 
Christ ; 

(2)  To  the  use  of  the  preposition  "through"  instead  of  Auth., 
"  by."  We  may  not  always  be  able  to  feel  or  explain  the  differ- 
ence which  there  is  between  the  two  ;  but,  speaking  generally,  it 
is  said,  concerning  Adam,  that  through  his  sin,  as  a  channel,  the 
sentence  of  death  passed  from  God  on  all  the  posterity  of  Adam ; 
and,  as  regards  Christ,  that  through  His  righteousness.  His  merits 
and  mediation,  the  free  gift  of  life  passed  from  God  upon  His 
outcast  children,  i.e.,  upon  all  mankind  ; 

(3)  To  the  distinction  of  the  tenses,  the  aorist  and  the  perfect, 
in  the  original — a  distinction  which  has  not  been  oljserved  in  any 
Engl,  version,  nor  in  the  Vulg. ;  nor,  indeed,  is  the  Latin  capable 
of  representing  it  except  by  periphrasis. 

16  The  judgement  came  of  one.— So  Tynd.  Auth.,  "was 
by  one."  The  sentence,  if  expanded,  would  run  thus :  "  The 
judgement  of  God  came  from  one  transgressor,  Adam,  unto  the 
condemnation  of  all  mankind  (who  all  sinned  in  him) ;  but  the 
free  gift  of  God  in  Christ  came  from  many  transgressions  unto 
justification."  The  free  gift  of  God,  besides  cancelling  the  judge- 
ment which  stood  against  all  mankind  as  being  all  involved  in 
Adam's  guilt,  also  cleared  men  individually  of  the  guilt  attaching 
to  their  o\vn  actual  transgressions. 

20  The  law  came  in  beside— i.e.,  by  the  side  of  transgression, 
and  as  a  subordinate  ally,  co-operating  with  it,  and  by  its  prohi- 
bitions enhancing  the  deadliness  of  sin.  Auth.,  with  Tjmd., 
"  entered  in."  Yulg.,  subintravit.  The  Gr.  Trapeia-ri\9:-v  occurs 
again  in  Gal.  ii.  4,  where  Auth.  has  "  came  in  pri^dly," 

21  Sin  reigned  in  death.—"  In  death,"  as  its  domain,  its  realm  ; 
not  "  unto  death,"  its  end  or  consummation,  as  all  Engl,  versions, 
following  ViJg.,  in  inortem.  The  Gr.  is  iv,  uot  as  in  the  next 
verse,  els,  "  unto  eternal  life." 


274  ROMANS— VI. 


CHAPTER  YI. 

2  Died  to  sin. — i.e.,  at  baptism,  as  is  sliewn  in  verse  3.  Auth., 
"  are  dead."     Compare  cliap.  v.  15,  and  Note  tliere. 

3  All  we.— All  we  believers  who,  &c.  So  all  Engl,  versions  before 
Autli.,  which  lias,  "  so  many  of  us  as  were  baptized,"  which  would 
appear  jioiutedly  to  exclude  some  as  not  having  been  baptized. 
Gr.,  00-01. 

4  Were  buried. — Auth.,  "  are  buried."    Compare  verse  2. 

5  Become  united  with  him. — The  Gr.  is  properly  "  connate," 
"  born  together  with,"  and  it  denotes  the  growing  together  in  vital 
unity  of  a  parasitic  plant  or  graft  with  the  stem  or  stock  to  Avhich 
it  is  joined.  Auth.,  "planted  together,"  following  Wyel.  and 
Vulg.,  complantati.  Tynd.,  "  grafted  in  him."  "  Him  "  is  sup- 
plied from  the  context.  Christ  and  no  otlier  must  be  the  living 
stem  or  tree  to  which  the  believer  is  united. 

By  the  likeness  of  his  death — i.e.,  by  our  conformity  to 
his  death,  not  "in,"  as  Auth.  Yulg.,  complantati siinilitudini, 
Avhence  Genev.,  "planted  into  the  likeness,"  which  is  not  an 

admissible  sense  of  (Tvix<pvroi. 

6  Was  crucified  with  him — i.e.,  at  His  crucifixion. 

Done  away. — All  Engl,  versions,  "  destroyed,"  from  Vulg., 
destniatnr.  The  same  Gr.  is  rendered  iu  chap.  iii.  3,  "  make  of 
none  effect "  (Auth.). 

Be  in  bondage.— All  Engl,  versions,  "  serve."  The  Gr.  is, 
"to  be  a  l)ond-servant,"  SovXivtiv. 

7  Is  justified. — So  all  Engl,  versions  except  Auth.  and  Genev., 
which  have  "  is  freed,"  following  Beza,  liberatus  est.  The  Gr. 
is  the  word  usually  rendered  "to  justify,"  "to  acquit."  A 
different  word  is  used  in  verses  18,  22. 

9  No  more  hath. — So  Wycl.  and  Rliem.  "No  more,"  oiiKert, 
has  relation  here  to  time,  not  to  quantity  or  extension,  in  which 
sense  the  Auth.  is  liable  to  be  misimderstood,  "  hath  no  more 
dominion."     Vulg.,  non  ultra  illi  domitiahitur. 

10  The  death  that  he  died.— The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  as  to  that 
which  he  died,"  t  dnfOave,  i.e.,  "  whereas,"  "  in  tliat,"  as  Auth. 
The  same  phrase  in  Gal.  ii.  20  is  rendered  in  Auth.,  "  the  life 
that  I  now  live."  Vulg.,  with  a  felicity  due  to  the  adverbial 
relative  quod,  Q.nodenim  movtuus  est. 


ROMANS— VI.  275 

11  Dead.— Autli.,  "  dead  indeed."  The  pcarticle  i-ifv  is  not  cmpliatic, 
l)eing  merely  the  correlative  of  "  but,"  6e',  in  the  next  clause. 

13  Present— i.e.,  for  acceptance.  The  Gr.  is  thus  rendered  in 
Luke  ii.  22  (Auth.);  it  has  not  the  idea  of  compulsory  surrender 
which  is  contained  in  "  yield." 

Present  your  members  unto    sin   as  instruments.— 

More  clear  than  Auth.,  "  as  instruments  .  .  .  unto  sin,"  which 
might  be  understood,  "with  a  -vdew  to  sin,"  as  it  is  in  verse  16, 
where  "unto  "  represents  not  the  dative  case,  but  the  preposition 

17  Whereas  ye  were. —  The  Gr.  Ve  obtains  this  significauce 
from  its  position,  and  from  the  "  but "  which  follows,  though  it 
is  literally,  as  given  in  the  Margin  and  in  Auth.,  "  ye  were;"  but 
manifestly  the  fact  that  they  had  been  servants  of  sin  was  not  in 
itself  a  cause  of  thankfulness. 

That  form  of  teaching  whereunto  ye  were  delivered. 

— It  might  be  rendered,  "  the  moidd  {tv-kov)  into  which  ye  were 
cast."  The  metaphor  would  suggest  itself  readily  to  the  Apostle 
in  the  city  where  he  was  writing,  Corinth,  famous  for  casting 
statues  in  bronze.    {Wordsworth.) 

19  Sanctification. — So  Tynd.,  Cranm.,  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  "  holi- 
ness," with  Geuev.  and  Bcza.  The  Gr.  denotes  the  process  of 
becoming  holy,  not  the  grace  of  holiness  itself. 

20  Free  in  regard  of— i.e.,  not  in  ser^^ce  to  it,  since  the  servant 
of  one  master  owes  no  obedience  to  another.  Auth.,  "  free  from," 
in  modern  English  means  "  exempt  from."  Tynd.,  "  you  were 
not  imder."  "  Made  free  from,"  in  verse  22,  is  a  different  word 
in  the  Gr. 

23  Free  gift.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "gift."  Wycl.  and  Rhem., 
"  the  grace,"  foUowiug  Vulg.,  (jratki.    The  Gr.  is  xop't^M'*. 


276  ROMANS— VII. 


CHAPTER  yn. 


5  Sinful  passions.— Aiith.,  "  motions  of  sins."  Tynd.,  "  lusts 
of  sius."     The  exact  meaning  is  "  emotions  tending  to  sin." 

6  Having  died  to  that  —  i.e.,  having  died  to  the  law, 
according  to  the  Apostle's  words  in  verse  4.  Auth.,  "  tliat  being 
dead  wherein  we  were  held,"  meaning  that  the  law  was  dead, 
which  certainly  was  not  the  case,  according  to  the  teaching  of  St. 
Paul.  This  rendering  of  Auth.  was  founded  on  a  conjectural 
emendation  of  the  Gr.  text  by  Beza,  aTodavSyros  for  airo6av6vrfs, 
which  has  no  support  in  the  MSS.,  and  was  suggested  to  him  by 
Chrysostom's  erroneous  interpretation  of  the  true  reading. 

7  Coveting. — Auth.,  "  lust."  The  Gr.  is  the  cognate  noun  to  the 
verb  rendered  "covet"  in  the  latter  part  of  the  verse,  and  repre- 
senting in  the  LXX.  version  of  Dent.  xx.  17  the  sin  which  is 
prohibited  by  the  tenth  commandment. 

8  Through  the  commandment. — These  words  are  not  to  be 
joined  with  "  finding  occasion,"  as  in  TjTid.  and  Auth.,  but  ■^•ith 
"  wrought,"  as  in  Vulg.,  Wycl.,  and  Rhem. 

9  Apart  from  the  law — i.e.,  in  a  state  of  nature,  ignorant  and 
indei^endent  of  the  law  (or  law).     Auth.,  "  without  the  law." 

10  "Which  tvas  unto  life. — The  purpose  of  which  was  to  give  life. 
Auth.,  "which  was  ordained  to  life,"  the  meaning  of  which  is 
not  quite  clear,  considering  how  the  same  phrase  is  used  in  Acts 
xiii.  48  (Auth.). 

13  But  sin  .  .  . — The  sentence  is  incomplete  in  the  original,  but  is 
readily  to  be  completed  by  the  insertion  of  "  became  death  unto 
me"  (as  Gcnev.),  which  is  supplied  from  the  preceding  sentence. 

That  it  might  be  shewn  to  be. — All  Engl,  versions,  "that 
it  might  appear,"  folloAving  Vidg.,  aiypareat ;  Gr.,  <pavfi. 

15  That  which   I   do. — Margin,  "  Gr.,  worh."      In  iliis  and  the 
following  verses  there  are  three  Gr.  words,  KaTep-yd^o/xat,  iroiw, 
Trpao-o-co,  which  are  properly  rendered  "work,"  "do,"  "practise," 
.  respectively.     As  to  "  practise  "  see  chap.  i.  32,  and  Note  there. 

18  Is  not — i.e.,  is  not  present  with  me;  by  cbange  in  Gr.  text  for 
Auth.,  "  I  find  not." 

21  I  find  then  the  law.— The  law  of  the  flesh—  the  law  of  sin, 
a  A'cry  different  rule  from  tlie  law  which  has  been  called  "  holy 
and  righteous  and  good  "  (verse  12).     This  interpretation  has 


ROMANS— VIII.  277 

been  tlionght  open  to  tlio  objcctiou  that  it  gives  to  "  the  law,"  as 
the  word  is  used  here,  a  different  meauiug  from  that  whicli  it  hao 
borne  hitherto,  and  the  alternative  in  the  Margin,  involving  a 
broken  construction  in  the  Gr.,  has  consequentl}"-  been  suggested. 
But  the  meaning  given  in  the  text,  "I  find  tlio  law,  namely, 
that,"  &c.,  appears  to  be  justified  by  what  is  said  in  verse  23,  "  I 
see  a  different  law  in  my  members,"  &c. 

To  me  who  would.— Auth.,  "  that  when  I  would."  Tlie  Gr., 
T(^  diKovTi  i/xo'i,  puts  the  emphasis  strongly  on  the  person  who  would 
do  good,  not  on  the  time  when  he  would. 

24  Out  of  the  body— Autli.,  "from  the  body."  Gr.,  4k.  He 
regards  himself  as  imprisoned  in  a  body  which  is  itself  stricken 
with  death,  and  will  bring  death  to  him,  and  out  of  which  he 
cannot  escape  unless  some  one  come  to  his  rescue. 


CHAPTER  YIII. 


1  "  Who  walk,"  &c. — (Auth.)  Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text,  being 
an  intei-polation  not  found  in  the  chief  MSS.,  and  probably 
derived  from  verse  4. 

3  As  an  offering  for  sin. — This  insertion  is  placed  beyond  question 
by  the  constant  use  of  the  Gr.  phrase  which  we  have  here  for  a 
"sin-offering"  in  the  Old  Testament  (LXX.  Version),  e.g.,  fifty 
times  in  the  Book  of  Leviticus.     Auth.,  "  for  sin." 

4  The  ordinance.— See  Note  on  chap.  ii.  26. 

6  The  mind  of  the  flesh.— Auth.,  following  Tynd.  and  Cranm., 
"  to  be  carnally  minded."  Geuev.  and  Rhem.,  "  the  wisdom  of 
the  flesh,"  after  Vulg.,  prudentla  carnis,  andWyel.,  "  prudence." 
The  Gr.  is  a  noun  akin  to  the  verb  in  verse  5,  which  means 
literally,  "  to  have  the  mind  set  upon  a  thing." 

8  And  they  .  .  . — This  is  not  an  inference  from  what  has  gone 
before,  as  it  appears  in  Auth.,  "  So  then,"  &c.,  but  is  appended 
to  the  sentence  by  "  and,"  Gr.,  5e,  as  a  further  develoi^ment  of 
what  has  been  said. 

13  Ye  must  die.— So  Tynd.     All  other  versions,  "  ye  shall  die." 
The  Gr.  is  fxiw^Ti  a.iTodvT](TKnVy  not  the  future  of  the  verb. 


278  ROMANS— VIII. 

17  Glorified  with  him. — All  Eugl.  versions  "glorified  togetlier." 
not  repeating  the  important  and  necessary  insertion  wliich  they 
have  with  the  previous  word,  "  suffer."  Compare  chap.  vi.  5, 
and  Note. 

18  To  US-ward.—  Auth.,  "  in  us,"  following  Yulg.  Genev., 
"  shewed  to  us."     The  Gr.  is  els  ht^us. 

19  The  creation — i.e.,  the  natural  world.  Auth.,  "  the  creature," 
following,  with  all  previous  versions,  Yulg.,  omnis  creatura. 

The  revealing. — Auth.,  "the  manifestation."     The  Gr.  is  the 

noun  corresponding  to  the  verb  in  the  preceding  verse. 

21  In  hope  stands  between  two  clauses,  to  either  of  wliich  it  may 
belong,  and  the  sense  either  way  is  substantially  tlie  same  : — (1) 
the  creation  was  subjected,  &c.,  yet  in  the  hope  that  the  ci'eation, 
&c. ;  (2)  as  in  the  Margin  and  Auth.,  "  The  creation  was  sub- 
jected, &e.,  by  reason  of  him  (God)  who  subjected  it  thus  in  a 
state  of  hope,  with  a  hope  of  recovery :  for  the  creation  itself 
also,"  &c. ;  thus  rendering  3tj,  "  for,"  not  "  that."  Thus  all 
Engl,  versions,  and  Vulg. 

The  liberty  of  the  glory. —  So  Wycl.  and  Ehem.  The 
phrase  in  Gr.  is  an  example  of  the  Hebraism  so  frequent  in  the 
New  Testament  and  in  the  LXX.,  which  has  been  eiTOueously 
treated  as  if  it  were  equivalent  to  an  adjective  and  noun — the 
adjective  an  epithet  qualifying  or  inteusifjong  the  noun.  Auth., 
following  T)-nd.,  "  glorious  liberty."  The  true  meaning  is,  "  the 
liberty  appertaining  to  the  gloiy,  to  the  perfect  state,  of  the 
children  of  God." 

24;  Who  hopeth  for  .  .  . — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth., 
"  why  doth  he  yet  hope  for  p  "  Another  reading  of  the  Gr.  gives, 
"  who  awaiteth  ?  " 

26  Onr  infirmity. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  our  infirmities," 
i.e.,  our  various  particulai*  weaknesses,  as  Auth. 

How  to  pray. — Auth.,  "  what  to  pray  for."  Wycl.  and  Rhem., 
"  what  we  should  i>ray,"  more  correctly  representing  the  Gr., 
vpo(revxoiJ.ai,  which  is  simply  "  to  pray,"  and  is  not  used  transitively 
in  the  sense  of  pi'aying  for,  or  desiring,  a  thing.  "  What  we 
should  pray  "  is  a  question  wliich  includes  both  the  subject-matter 
and  the  manner  of  our  prayer,  and  the  Auth.,  though  not  an  exact 
rendering  of  this  pregnant  expression,  is  a  fair  paraphrase  of  it, 
meaning,  "  What  is  the  thing  to  be  prayed  for,  and  how  is  it  to  be 
prayed  for  aright?  " 


ROMANS— IX.  279 

29  He  fore-ordained.— So  Wycl.  and  Tynd.  The  Gr.,  vpoopi(w,  is 
so  rendered  1  Cor.  ii.  7  (Auth.) ;  compare  also  Acts  iv.  28.  In  this 
Epistle,  and  Ephes.  i.  5,  11,  Auth.  has  "  predestinated,"  following 
E/hem.  and  Yulg.,  predestinavit.  The  word  does  not  occur  else- 
where in  the  New  Testament.  The  change  of  English  does  not 
involve  any  doctrinal  difference ;  but  the  Gr.  projierly  means  "  to 
determine  beforehand,"  and  is  so  used  in  the  above  passages  by 
St.  Luke  and  St.  Paul  with  regard  to  things  inanimate,  and  tliere 
appears  no  reason  why  the  rendering  should  not  be  the  same  in 
these  two  Epistles  in  which  it  is  applied  to  persons. 

33  Several  changes  in  this  and  the  two  following  verses  are  due  to 
slight  changes  in  the  Gr.  text  which  do  not  materially  affect  the 
sense. 

35  Anguish.— Auth.,  "  distress."  The  Gr.  is  a  stronger  word  than 
that  rendered  "tribulation,"  and  is  translated  "anguish"  where 
the  two  are  associated,  chap.  ii.  9  (Auth.). 

38  Nor  powers. — The  position  of  this  word  being  altered  by  a 
change  in  the  Gr.  text,  for  which  there  is  irresistible  authority,  it 
cannot  now  take  its  meaning  from  the  word  "  angels,"  next  to 
which  it  stood,  in  the  sense  of  "  spiritual  powers,"  but  must  be 
understood  as  comprehending  powers  of  any  kind  in  heaven  or 
earth,  visible  or  invisible. 

39  Creature. — Margin,  "  Or,  creation."  The  Gr.,  Kriffis,  means 
"  a  created  being,"  whether  individual  or  collective.  The  latter 
sense,  adopted  in  other  places  in  this  chapter,  does  not  seem  here 
so  suitable  as  the  former. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

1  Bearing  witness  with  me.— Auth.,  "  bearing  me  witness." 
Compare  chap.  ii.  15,  and  Note. 

2  Great  sorrow  and  unceasing  pain. — All  English  versions, 
"  great  heaviness  and  continual  sorrow."  These  changes  are 
made  for  the  sake  of  consistency  in  the  rendering  of  the  same 
words  in  this  and  other  passages. 

3  Anathema  is  a  Greek  word  meaning  that  which  is  devoted 
to  God,  whether  for  good  or  evil.     In  the  former  case  the  third 


280  ROMANS— IX. 

syllable  is  usually  writteu  witli  a  long  vowel,  and  pronounced 
anatheema ;  wlien  it  means  a  thing  devoted  under  a  curse,  for 
destruction,  it  has  the  short  vowel,  anathema.  In  Latin  sacer 
has  the  same  double  sense.  The  two  meanings  are  broiight 
together  in  Lev.  xxvii.  28,  29  (LXX.).  The  good  sense,  "  offer- 
ings," occurs  in  Luke  xxi.  5  ;  the  bad  sense,  "  a  curse,"  in  Acts 
xxiii.  14  ;  by  St.  Paul  it  is  used  in  the  bad  sense  only,  see  1  Cor. 
xii.  3,  xvi.  22  ;  Gal.  i.  8.  The  words  "  from  Christ " — denoting 
a  severance  from,  not  a  dedication  to.  Him — admit  of  no  doubt  as 
to  the  meaning  here.  It  is  left  untranslated  in  the  other  passages 
of  St.  PaiU's  Epistles.     Auth.  here,  "  accursed." 

9  This  is  a  word  of  promise. — So  Tynd.  Auth.,  following 
WycL,  "  this  is  the  word  of  promise."  The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  this 
word  is  a  word  of  promise."  The  Apostle  here  explains  his  use 
of  the  word  "  the  promise  "  in  the  preceding  verse,  by  saying 
that  the  word,  in  fulfilment  of  which  Isaac  was  born,  is  a  promise 
from  God. 

According  to  this  season— i.e.,  at  the  return  of  this  time  of 
year ;  a  free  translation,  or  rather  paraphrase,  of  Gen.  xviii.  10 
(LXX.  version). 

15  I  will  does  not  here,  as  at  verse  18,  represent  the  Gr.  64\w, 
"  to  will,"  but  simply  the  future  of  the  verb. 

17  Might  shew  in  thee  my  power— i.e.,  in  thee,  in  thy  case, 
as  an  example.  Auth.,  "  might  shew  my  power  in  thee,"  would 
mean,  "  might  show  my  working  in  thee ; '  and  so  it  is  taken  by 
Tynd.,  "  to  shew  my  power  on  thee."     Vulg.,  ostendam  in  te. 

Published  abroad.— Auth.,  "declared."  Gr.,  Sm7'7€A\a>,  which 
occurs  only  here  and  in  Luke  ix.  60 ;  Acts  xxi.  26. 

19  Withstandeth.— Auth.,  "  hath  resisted."  The  perfect  of  the 
Gr.  has  a  present  signification.  The  word  is  in  Auth.  more 
usually  rendered  "  withstand  "  than  "  resist." 

21  To  make  one  part  a  vessel  unto  honour.— All  English 
versions,  "  to  make  one  vessel  unto  honour,"  taking  the  pronoun 
(S  /ueV,  f>  Se)  as  an  adjective  in  connection  with  "  vessel."  Compare 
a  similar  use  of  the  pronoun  in  2  Tim.  ii.  20. 

25  Hosea. — The  form  "  Osee  "  has  prevailed  in  all  English  versions, 
following  the  Vulg.,  and  the  Vulg.  follows  the  Gr.,  except  that 
in  the  latter  the  first  syllable  has  the  aspirate ;  thus,  Hosee. 

27  It  is  the  remnant  that  shall  be  saved— i.e.,  the  remnant 
only,  not  the  mass ;  this  is  the  emphatic  significance  of  the  Gr. 
article.     Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "a  remnant  shall  be  saved,"  with 


ROMANS— X.  281 

the  meaning,  "  they  shall  not  aU  perish,  some  few  shall  bo  saved ; "' 
but  this  would  have  no  cougruity  with  the  former  part  of  the 
sentence. 

2S  The  Lord  will  execute  his  word.— So  by  change  in  Gr. 
text,  for  Auth.,  "  he  will  finish  the  work."  The  Gr.  is,  literally, 
"  The  Lord  will  do  a  word  upon  the  earth,  finishing  and  cutting 
it  short."     All  versions  before  Auth.  have  "word,"  not  "work." 

31  "Of  righteousness,"  and  32  "of  law,"  (Auth.)  are  omitted  by 
changes  in  Gr,  text. 


CHAPTER  X. 

1  My  heart's  desire. — This  place  and  Phil.  i.  15  are  the  only 
passages  of  the  New  Testament  in  which  evSoKia  is  used  of  the 
"  good  will "  or  "'  desire  "  of  man.  It  is  occasionally  so  used  in 
the  Old  Testament  (LXX.  version). 

3  Subject. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  and  so  Auth.  for  the  same  Gr. 
in  other  places  of  this  Epistle— e.g^.,  chap.  viii.  10;  here  "  sub- 
mitted." 

4  The  end  of  the  law  unto  righteousness.— As  the  city  gate 
is  the  end  of  the  long  journey  and  the  entrance  into  the  city. 
Auth.,  "  for  righteousness."     Gr.,  els. 

7  The  abyss. — As  in  Luke  viii.  31,  where  see  Note.  Auth., 
"  the  deep." 

9  Confess  .  .  .  Jesus  as  Lord— i.e.,  confess  Him  to  be 
"  Jehovah,  the  Lord."  Compare  Phil.  ii.  11,  "  every  tongue 
should  confess  that  Jesus  Christ  is  Lord ;  "  and  1  Cor.  xii.  3. 
This  is  the  earliest  recorded  form  of  a  confession  of  faith. 

11  Put  to  shame. — Seo  Note  on  chap.  v.  5. 

12  The  same  Lord  is  Lord  of  all. — The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  the 
same  Lord  of  all,  being  rich,"  &c.,  requiring  the  insertion  of 
"  Lord."    Auth.,  "  the  same  Lord  over  all  is  rich,"  &c. 

13  This  is  marked  as  a  quotation,  being  from  Joel  ii.  32  (LXX.).  It 
is  also  quoted  by  St.  Peter,  Acts  ii.  21. 


282  ROMANS— XL 

14  Whom  they  have  not  heard.— So  Wycl.  and  Eliem.,  follow- 
ing Yulg.,  quem  non  audierunt.  Antli.,  "  of  whom."  The  Loi-d 
Himself  speaks  to  us  in  Christ,  and  in  those  whom  He  sends  as 
preachers  of  His  Gospel  we  not  only  "  hear  of  Him,"  but  "  hear 
Him." 

17  Belief. — The  Gr.  commonly  rendered  "  faith  "  is  here  "  belief," 
because  of  the  cognate  verb  in  the  quotation  from  Isaiah  (verse 
16),  "  hath  believed." 

19  Void  of  understanding. — The  usual  and  proper  rendering  of 
the  Gi'.  oKTweTos,     Auth.,  "  foolish." 

20  Asked  not  of  me — i.e.,  "  asked  me  no  question,"  the  ordinary 
meaning  of  the  Gr.  iirepwrdo).  So  Vulg.,  me  non  interrogabant, 
and  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  Auth.,  "asked  not  after  me" — i.e., 
inquired  not  for  me,  which,  though  equally  true,  is  not  according 
to  the  Greek. 


CHAPTER  XL 

1  Cast  off.— The  Gr.  has  this  sense,  rather  than,  as  all  English 
versions,  "  cast  away."  Compare  Acts  ^ni.  27,  39,  xiii.  46 ; 
1  Tim.  i.  19,  where  it  is  rendered,  "  thrust  from  him ; "  also 
1  Sam.  xii.  22  (LXX.  version). 

2  Pleadeth. — Auth.,  '•'  maketh  intercession,"  which  usually  means 
to  "  plead  for,"  not  "  against." 

6  "  But  if  it  be  of  works." — (Auth.)  Omitted  in  the  great  majority 
of  important  textual  autliorities,  and  in  Wycl.  and  Rliem.,  follow- 
ing Vulg. 

7  Were  hardened.— All  English  versions,  "  were  blinded."  The 
word  is  a  medical  term,  signifying  the  petrifaction  of  the  joints 
and  bones  by  the  deposit  of  lime ;  and  in  some  places  of  the 
Epistles,  as  here,  it  has  apparently  been  confounded  with  another, 
■Ki)p6u,  resembling  it,  which  means  "  to  blind."  So  in  2  Cor. 
iii.  14 ;  Eph.  iv.  18.  In  the  Gospels  it  is  correctly  rendered  in 
Auth.,  as  at  Mark  vi.  52,  "  their  heart  was  hardened,"  though 
there  also  Yulg.,  and  all  English  versions  except  Auth.,  are  in 
error. 


ROMANS— XI.  283 

8  A  spirit  of  stupor.— Auth.,  "  of  slumber."  Tlie  word  tlms 
roudered  is  from  a  verb  wliicli  means  properly  "to  piu  or  nail 
down,"  and  thence  the  stupefaction  which  arises  from  such  treat- 
ment. Thus  in  Lev.  x.  3  (LXX.  version).  Here  Yulg.  lias 
spiritum  compunctionis,  and  so  Wycl.  and  Rhem. ;  Tyud.  and 
Cranm.,  "  uuquietuess ;  "  but  Genev.,  "  heavy  sleep,"  following 
Beza,  spiritum  soporis.  Hence  Auth.,  "  slumber,"  with  Mar- 
ginal Note,  "  Or,  remorse."  In  this  primary  sense  the  verb  is 
used  in  Acts  ii.  37,  "  they  were  pricked  in  their  heart "  (Auth.). 

12  Their  loss. — That  wherein  they  are  lessened.  Gr.,  ^TTq/xa. 
Auth.,  "their  diminishing."    Yulg.,  diminutio. 

13  To  you  that  are  Gentiles — i.e.,  to  those  of  you  that  are  Gen- 
tiles. Auth.,  "  to  you  Gentiles,"  not  marking  sufficiently  the 
force  of  the  article  in  the  Gr.  In  the  next  sentence,  Avhere  it  is 
absent  in  the  Gr.,  the  Auth.  expresses  it,  "  the  apostle  of  the 
Gentiles." 

Ministry. — Auth.,  "  office."  The  Gr.  SiaKovla  always  means 
"  a  ministry,"  a  service,  and  is  not  elsewhere  rendered '"  an  office  " 
— i.e.,  a  duty. 

17  And  didst  become  partaker  with  them.— So,  literally 
following  the  Gr.,  Yulg.,  and  Tynd. :  Auth.,  "partakest  with 
them." 

The  root  of  the  fatness  ("and"  being  omitted  by 
change  in  Gr.  text). — The  source  and  origin  of  its  richness. 

19  Branches — i.e.,  "  some  branches."  AU  English  versions  insert 
the  article. 

20  By  their  unbelief. — Not  "  because  of,"  as  all  English  versions, 
following  Yulg.,  propter  increclulitatem.  Unbelief,  "their  un- 
belief" (for  this  is  the  significance  of  the  article),  is  regarded  as 
the  instrument,  the  force  by  which  the  branches  were  broken 
off,  and  in  like  manner  it  foUows,  "  by  thy  faith  thou  standest." 
Compare  2  Cor.  i.  24. 

24  By  nature  a  wild  olive  tree. —  The  word  "  by  nature " 
does  not  in  the  Gr.  attach  only  to  the  adjective  "  wild,"  as  in 
Auth.,  "  the  olive  tree  which  is  wild  by  nature,"  and  Wycl.,  "  the 
kindly  (i.e.,  naturally)  wild  olive-tree." 

25  A  hardening. — Comp.  verse  7.  The  Gr.  denotes  the  incipient 
hardness,  not  the  complete  callousness. 

30  Were  disobedient.— As  at  chap.  x.  21.  Auth.,  "have  not 
believed." 


284  ROMANS— XII. 

31  By  the  mercy  shewn  to  you.— Comp.  Acts  xiii.  34,  "  the 
sure  blessings  of  David  " — i.e.,  the  mercies  assured  to  him  ;  and 
1  Cor.  XV.  31,  "  the  boasting  on  your  account,"  whero  the  Gr.  is 
literally  "  your  boasting,"  as  here  it  is  "  your  mercy,"  and  is  so 
rendered  in  Auth. 

32  Hath  shut  up  all  unto.— Auth.,  "  hath  concluded  them  all 
in,"  as  Rliem.,  following  Vulg.,  conclusit.  "  To  conclude  "  has 
lost  its  original  meaning,  and  is  used  chiefly  with  a  logical  sense, 
which  does  not  adequately  represent  the  Gr.  Compare  Gal.  iii. 
22. 

33  Past  tracing  out.— Auth.,  "  past  finding  out."  The  Gi-.  is 
literally,  "not  to  be  tracked,"  "unsearchable," as  it  is  rendered  in 
Ephes.  iii.  8.     Yulg.,  investigabiles  vice  ejus. 

36  Unto  him,  as  the  end  (Auth,,  "to  him"),  "of  him,"  i.e., 
from  Him,  as  the  beginning;  "through  him,"  as  their  Maker. 
Compare  1  Cor.  viii.  6,  where  "  of  him  "  and  "  unto  him  "  are 
said  of  "  God,  the  Father,"  "  through  him"  in  reference  to  "  our 
Lord  Jesus  Chriet." 


CHAPTER   XII. 

Reasonable  service.— See  Margin.  The  Gr.  XaTpiia  means 
the  service  of  worship,  and  a  "  reasonable  "  or  "  spiritual "  service 
is  of  the  sj)irit  and  uuderstandiug,  not  of  words  and  forms  and 
ceremonies  only. 

Fashioned  .  .  .  transformed.  —  Auth,,  "conformed  .  .  . 

transformed."  Vulg.,  confonnamini  .  .  .  reformamini.  (So 
Wycl.  and  Rhem.)  Tynd.,  "fashion  not  yourselves  .  .  . 
but  be  ye  changed  in  your  shape."  The  Auth.  and  Vulg.  would 
lead  us  to  suppose  that  the  two  words  in  the  Gr.  were  of  the  same 
origin,  and  nearly  of  the  same  meaning.  "  Be  not  fashioned  " 
well  represents  the  Gr.,  which  denotes  the  fleeting  nature  of  this 
world's  customs  and  opinions,  and  is  used  with  a  similar  sense  and 
construction  in  1  Peter  i.  14.  Compare  also  1  Cor,  vii.  31,  "  The 
fashion  of  this  world  passeth  away."  "Transformed"  in  the 
Gr.  is  the  word  used  of  the  "  transfiguration  "  of  Christ  (Matt. 
svii.  2),  and  denotes  not  the  momentaiy  conformity  of  attitude  and 
appearance,  like  the  first  word,  but  the  change  of  form.      The 


ROMANS— XII.  285 

same  contrast  is  signified  in  Phil.  ii.  6,  wliere  it  is  said  of  Christ 
that,  "  being  from  everlasting  in  the  form  {iJ.op(pfj)  of  God,  he  was 
found  (for  a  little  while)  in  fashion  (o-xtj^o't')  as  a  man." 

The  good.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  "  that  good,"  over- 
translating  the  article,  which  is  correctly  given  in  Wycl.,  Genev., 
and  Rhem.  The  rendering  of  the  Margin  resembles  that  which 
is  given  in  Genev.,  "what  is  the  will  of  God,  which  is  good  and 
accej)table  and  perfect." 

3  So  to  think  as  to  think  soberly. —  Anth.,  "to  think 
soberly,"  drox^ping  the  play  on  the  word  think,"  which  represents 
that  on  (ppoveTv  in  the  Gr.  The  meaning  is  "to  direct  the  mind 
towards  sobriety  of  thought." 

5  Severally.— Auth.,  "every  one."  The  Gr.  phrase  is  not  com- 
mon in  classical  authors,  but  is  used  in  Mark  xiv.  19,  signifying 
"  one  by  one." 

6  Our  faith.—"  Faith  "  has  the  article  prefixed  here,  not  in  verse 
3,  to  which  there  appears  to  be  a  reference.  God  deals  to  each  of 
us  a  measure  of  faith ;  and  in  proportion  to  the  measure  which 
we  have  received,  we  are  to  occupy  ourselves  in  prophesying. 
The  alternative  rendering  given  in  the  Margin  is  preferred  by 
many  commentators,  "  according  to  the  proportion  of  the  faith," 
i.e.,  of  the  rule  of  faith,  so  as  to  set  forth  the  Christian  faith  in 
its  due  proportions  without  laying  undue  stress  on  one  part  to  the 
neglect  or  su^jpression  of  another.  This  is  grammatically  quite 
as  correct  as  the  rendering  in  the  text,  and  perhaps  preferable  as 
regards  interpretation. 

8  With  liberality.— Auth.,  follow^ng  Yulg.,  Wycl.,  and  Rhem., 
"  with  simplicity."  This,  or  "  singleness"  (as  Tynd.),  is  the  pro- 
per meaning  of  the  Gr.  an\6T7iTi :  and  this  sense  is  very  suitable. 
Beneficence  is  to  be  exercised  in  simplicity  and  singleness  of  pur- 
pose, for  the  good  of  others  and  the  glory  of  God,  not  with  any 
admixture  of  self-interest.  But  in  2  Cor.  viii.  2,  ix.  11,  the  idea 
of  simplicity,  though  retained  in  Yulg.,  Tynd.,  and  Cranm.,  is  not 
appropriate ;  and  Auth.,  following  Genev.  and  Beza,  has 
"  abounded  unto  the  riches  of  their  liberality,"  and  "  being  en- 
riched in  everything  to  all  bountifulness,"  in  each  place  with  "  Gr., 
sim;plicity  "  in  the  Margin.  The  same  course  is  followed  here, 
not  because  "  simplicity "  would  here  be  out  of  place,  but  be- 
cause it  would  be  so  there  ;  and  this  passage  appears  to  be  ruled 
by  those.  "  Simplicity,"  disinterestedness  in  giving,  is  nearly 
allied  to  liberality.  Compare  also  James  i.  5,  "  God  also  giveth 
to  all  liberally"  {anKis),  where  Yulg.  has  a^iaenter,  and  is  followed 


288  ROMANS— XII. 

by  Wycl.,  "largely,"  and  Rliem.,  "abundantly,"  and  where 
"  simply  "  could  not  stand. 

9  Without  hypocrisy. — The  Gr.  is  so  rendered  iu  James  iii.  17, 
the  adjective  being  akin  to  the  noun  viroKplrTis,  "  hypocrite." 

10  In  love  of  the  "brethren. — The  order  of  the  Gr.  has  been 
followed  in  this  and  the  succeeding  clauses,  the  subject  or  prin- 
ciple in  regard  to  whicli  the  precept  is  given  being  put  first ; 
and  this  transposition  would  be  required  by  consistency  through- 
out the  11th  and  12tli  A'erses,  but  woiddliave  produced  a  deraiige- 
nicnt  of  the  rhythm,  and  an  awkwardness  of  expression  which 
would  not  be  comi)ensated  by  any  gain  in  emphasis  or  signi- 
ficance. 

The  title  "brethren,"  with  which  St.  Stephen  and  St.  Paul  ad- 
dressed  tlie  Jews  at  Jerusalem  (Acts  vii.  2,  xxiii.  1),  is  here  ex- 
tended to  all  Christians.     Auth.,  "  with  brotherly  love." 

Tenderly  affectioned.  —  Auth.,  "kindly,"  in  its  ordinary 
modern  sense,  is  hardly  an  adequate  rendering  of  tlie  Gr.,  wlucli 
denotes  the  ait'ection  springing  out  of  near  relationship  in 
blood. 

In  diligence. — Auth.,  with  Wycl.,  Tynd.,  and  Cranm.,  "in 
business,"  which  would  confine  this  precept  to  worldly  affairs. 
The  Gr.  (tttovSt]  means  diligence,  or  earnestness,  as  a  general  prin- 
ciple. 

13  Communicating.— So  Rhem.,  following  Vulg.  Auth.,  "  distri- 
buting, "  with  Tpid.  The  Gr.  Koivwvdi/  is  properly  to  partake  \nih 
a  jjerson  or  in  a  thing ;  and  thence,  in  an  active  sense,  as  here, 
"  to  give  a  sliare,"  "to  impart."     (See  Gal.  A-i.  8;  Phil.  iv.  15.) 

15  Rejoice. — "  Be  merry  "  was  the  woi-d  of  Tynd. ;  Rhem.,  "  re- 
joice," adopted  by  Auth.  with  the  addition  of  "  do  "  in  the  first 
member  of  the  sentence,  apparently  for  the  sake  of  the  iambic 
rhythm. 

16  Set  not  your  mind  on  high  things.— Autli.,  following 
Rhem.,  "mind  not."  Vulg.,  non  alta  sapientes.  The  Gr.  is  tJie 
word  used  in  verse  3,  and  means,  "  have  not  your  thoughts 
dwelling  on." 

Condescend  to  things  that  are  lowly.— Margin,  "  Or, 
them."  Whether  things  or  persons  are  to  be  understood  is 
doubtful  in  ihe  Gr. ;  l>ut  as  the  jiouter  has  been  used  just  before, 
it  seems  probable  that  here  also  the  neuter  is  intended;  and  the 


ROMANS— XII.  287 

precept  in  this  sense  receives  illustration  from  the  well-known 
lines  of  the  Christian  Year  : — 

"  Tlie  trivial  round,  the  common  task, 
Will  furnish  all  we  need  to  ask ; 
Room  to  deny  ourselves,  a  road 
To  bring  us  daily  nearer  God."  -(Plumptre,  Note.) 

Tynd.,  "make  yom-selves  equal  to  the  lower  sort."  Auth.,  "to 
men  of  low  estate."  Vulg.,  h^vmilihus  consentientes.  The  Gr., 
which  is  rendered  "  condescend  to,"  means  more  exactly,  "  letting 
yourselves  be  carried  away  with ;  "  and  is  translated  in  Gal.  ii. 
13,  "be  carried  away  with."  Compare  also  2  Pet.  iii.  17;  in 
both  places  it  is  followed  by  a  word  denoting  a  thing,  not  a 
person. 

17  Render. — The  same  Gr.  is  so  translatetl  in  chap.  xiii.  7.  Anth. 
here,  "  recompense." 

Take  thought  for  things  honourable.— Anth.,  "  provide 
things  honest."  This  precept  is  adopted  into  the  New  Testament 
by  tlie  Aj)ostle  from  Prov.  iii.  4  (LXX.  version).  See  also 
2  Cor.  viii.  21.  Honourable,  for  "  honest,"  Anth.,  following 
Tynd.  The  good  old  word  "  honest "  is  now  in  some  cases  (as 
in  this)  liable  to  be  understood  in  the  narrower  and  special  sense 
which  modern  usage  has  put  upon  it. 

18  Be  at  peace. — This  is  the  literal  meaning  of  the  Gr.  Auth., 
with  Craura..  "live  peaceably."  Other  versions,  "have  peace," 
following  Vulg.,  facem  habeiites. 

19  Wrath. — Margin,  "  Or,  the  wrath  of  God;  "  an  interpretation 
which  is  justified  by  wha.t  follows :  "  Leave  the  matter  in  the 
hands  of  God.  Give  place  tmto  His  wrath  ;  for  He  has  claimed 
vengeance  as  His  own."  Otherwise,  as  it  is  in  the  text  and  in 
Autli.,  the  precept  bids  us  give  place  to  the  wrath  of  men ; 
retire  before  it,  let  it  have  its  way,  trusting  that  God  will  avenge 
onr  cause ;  according  to  the  command  of  our  Lord,  Matt.  v.  39, 
'•  Resist  not  him  that  is  evil,"  &c. 


2S8  ROMANS-XIIL 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

4  An  avenger. — Auth.,  from  Rliem.,  "  a  revenofer,"  which,  in  it? 

present  acceptation,  is  not  siiggrostive  of  the  righteous  vengeance 
which  is  inflicted  by  Gotl,  or  by  "  the  power,"  the  magistrate, 
on  God's  behalf,  but  of  private  passionate  retahation.  Gr.,  e/cSi/cos, 
Vulg.,  vinclex. 

5  Yo  must  needs  be  in  subjection— i.e.,  to  the  "powers." 
Tlie  plirase  is  repeated  from  verse  1. 

6  Ministers  of  God's  service.— Auth.,  "  God's  ministers." 
The  Gr.  for  "  minister  "  properly  means  one  who  discharges  a 
public  ministiy  or  service,  and  might  liere  be  rendered,  "  God's 
ininistei'S  to  the  people  " — Xnrovpyoi,  whence  our  word  "  liturgy." 
In  verse  4  the  word  is  the  more  common  hidKovos,  whence 
we  have  "deacon"  in  English,  signifying  a  "minister"  or 
"attendant,"  whether  his  service  be  of  a  public  or  jn-ivate 
nature. 

8  Loveth  his  neighbour. — So  Wyel.  and  Rhem.,  following 
Vidg.,  qui  dillcjit  lyroxlmuin.  Auth.,  "loveth  another" — a 
statement  by  no  means  so  comprehensive  as  that  of  the  Apostle. 
The  Gr.  is  not  here,  as  in  the  next  verse,  rhv  irXriffiov,  which  in 
the  Gospels  is  "  my  neiglibour,"  but  rhv  erepov,  the  "  not  me  "  of 
modern  philosophy — any  one  who  is  not  myself,  and  with  whom 
I  liave  to  deal.  The  plirase  is  used  in  the  same  way  in  cliap.  ii.  1, 
though  there  it  is  not  necessary  to  give  it  in  translation  the 
wide  sense  which  is  required  for  it  here.  Compare  1  Cor.  -vi.  1, 
X.  24. 

9  Summed  up. — Auth.,  "  briefly  comprehended."  Gr.,  "brought 
to  a  head." 

10  The  fulfilment. — Tiiat  in  which  and  by  which  the  law  is 
fulfllled ;  not  "  the  fidtilling,"  as  aU  Engl,  versions  except 
Rhem.,  which  has  "  plenitude,"  following  Yulg.,  jilenitudo.  The 
Gr.  ir\r)pa)fxa  (phroma)  is  properly  "fulness." 

11  Knowing  the    season.— Knowing   your  oppoi-tunity.     Gr., 


ROMANS— XIV.  289 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


2  Hath  faith,  to  eat. — His  faith  is  so  strong  that  lie  cats, 
looking  ou  such  questions  as  of  too  little  impoi'taucc  to  affect  his 
faith. 

3  Set  at  nought.— Auth.,  "  despise."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as 
at  verse  10. 

4  Shall  be  made  to  stand.— A  nth.,  "shall  be  holden  up." 
The  Gr.  is  the  same  verb  which  is  used  in  the  active  voice  at  the 
end  of  the  verse. 

5  Fully  assured. — Auth.  (from  Genev.),  "  fully  jjersuaded." 
Vulg.,  utmsqulsque  in  suo  sensu  abundet,  followed  by  Rhem,, 
"  Let  every  man  abound  in  his  own  sen.se."  The  diversity  and 
obscurity  of  the  renderings  in  the  earlier  versions  arose  fronj 
uncertainty  as  to  the  meaning  of  irX-npocpopfTo-Bai,  which,  in  its 
primary  meaning,  is  "  to  be  filled  full,"  especially  of  assurance, 
as  in  Col.  ii.  2  (Auth.);  1  Thess.  i.  5. 

6  "  And  he  that  regardeth  not  .  .  .  " — (Auth.)  These  words 
are  omitted  in  the  principal  MSS.,  versions,  and  editions  of  the 
New  Testament. 

9  Lived  again. — "Lived"  takes  the  place  of  "rose  and  lived 
again"  in  the  Gr.  text:  again  is  supjilied  in  italics,  being 
necessary  to  the  sense,  for  which  reason  probaljly  the  words  were 
interpolated  which  have  now  been  omitted. 

10  But  thou  ...  or  thou  again.  "  Those"  is  in  both  places 
emphatic;  and  the  two  questions  arc  addi-essed  to  two  different 
classes  of  persons — (1)  to  those  who  eat  not,  their  conscience 
being  not  yet  free  from  the  trammels  of  the  ceremonial  law ; 
(2)  to  those  who  eat  and  exult  overmuch  in  their  Christian  freedom. 

14  Persuaded  in  the  Lord  Jesus— i.e.,  as  one  united  with 
Him  and  dwelling  in  Him.  Compare  chaps,  viii.  1,  ix.  1.  Vulg., 
confido  in  Domino.  And  so  the  Engl,  versions,  except  Auth., 
"persuaded  by,"  and  Genev.,  "persuaded  through,"  following 
Beza,  per  dominuni. 

15  Because  of  meat.— So  Rhem.,  "  For  the  sake  of  a  question 
about  meat."  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  with  thy  meat,"  thus 
making  it  a  personal  matter,  which,  indeed,  in  the  next  chapter 
it  is  shown  to  be ;  but  it  is  not  said  to  be  so  here. 

Walkest  no  longer  in  love.— Auth.,  f(jllowing  Tynd.,  "  not 
charitably."  This  is  the  one  place  in  which  Tynd.  renders 
aydiTTj  otherwise  than  by  "  love." 

T 


290  ROMANS— XV. 

17  Eating  and  drinking. — The  words  iu  Gr.  are  verbs,  denoting 
the  act  or  occupation.  All  Engl,  versions,  "  meat  and  drink," 
following  Vulg.,  esca  et  potus,  for  the  sake  of  having  correlative 
nouns  iu  the  two  contrasted  clauses  of  the  sentence.  Compare 
Col.  ii.  16. 

18  Well-pleasing.— The  Gr.  ivdpea-Tos  is  often  found  in  the 
Pauline  Epistles,  but  not  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament. 
Auth.,  "  acceptable." 

20  Overthrow  not.— Auth.,  "destroy,"  which  is  the  proper 
rendering  of  a.n6\\vi  in  verse  15  :  here  the  Gr.  is  KaraAue. 

Clean. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhcm.,  following  Yulg.,  omnia  quideni 
sunt  mnnda.     Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  pure.       Gr.,  Kadapd. 

22  The  faith  which  thon  hast.— By  change  in  Gr,  text  for 
Auth.,  "  Hast  thou  faith  ?  " 

Approveth.— So  Rhom.  Auth.,  with  T^Tid,  "  alloweth,"  which 
is  now,  in  the  sense  of  "approveth,"  an  archaism.  Yulg., 
probat. 


CHAPTER  XY. 

2  For  that  which  is  good,  nnto  edifying— i.e.,  with  good 
for  the  immediate,  and  edification  for  the  more  distant  object. 
Gr.,  els  .  .  .  Trpdj,  as  iu  Eph.  iv.  12  {Vauglian).  Auth., 
"  for  liis  good,"  following  Tynd.  The  application  of  the  term 
"  building,"  "  edifying,"  to  advancement  in  spiritual  life  is  fre- 
quent in  the  Epistles  of  St,  Paul,  but  occurs  only  once  elsewhere, 
■  iu  Acts  ix.  31. 

4  Through  comfort. — "  Through  "  is  by  an  addition  in  the  Gr. 
text,  shewing  that  "through  patience  "is  not  connected  with 
"  the  Scriptures,"  but  is  to  be  taken  by  itself,  "  tlu-ough  the 
grace  of  patience." 

5  Comfort. — The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  verse  4.  Auth.,  "  conso- 
lation." The  two  aids  to  hope  mentioned  in  the  preceding  verse — 
patience,  and  the  comfoi-t  which  patience  derives  fi'om  the 
Scriptures — are  here  referred  to  God  as  their  giver. 

To  be  of  the  same  mind. — So  the  Gr,  is  elsewhere  rendered: 
here   Auth.  has   "to  be  like-minded."      Similarlv,  in  the  next 


f 

ROMANS— XV.  291- 

verse,  the  phrase  which  frequently  occurs  in  the  Acts,  and  is 
there  always  rendered  in  Aiith.  "  with  one  accord,"  in  this  the 
only  other  instance  of  its  use  in  the  New  Testament  is  "  with 
one  mind  "  (Auth.). 

6  The  God  and  Father. — Compare  Eph.  i.  3,  where  the  same 
Gr.  is  thus  translated  in  Auth.  The  usage  of  the  Gr.  article 
co\xpliug  God  and  the  Father  together,  6  Oehs  koI  iraTvp,  requires 
this  rendering.  Hei-e  Auth.,  "  God,  even  the  Father."  So  also 
in  2  Cor.  i.  3.  In  John  xx.  17  the  risen  Christ  speaks  of  God  as 
His  God  and  His  Father ;  in  Epli.  i.  17  St.  Paul  has  the  phrase 
"the  God  of  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ." 

7  To  the  glory  of  God  is  to  he  connected  with  the  former  as 
well  as  yntli  the  latter  clause  of  the  sentence,  as  the  comma 
shews  after  "  received  you." 

11  Let  all  the  peoples  praise  him. — Auth.,  "  laud  him,  all  ye 
people."  The  third  person  is  substituted  for  the  second  by 
change  in  Gr.  text,  "  peoples  "  for  "  i^eople "  (Auth.),  the  woi-d 
being  in  the  plural ;  and  "  praise  "  for  "  laud,"  which  has  become 
archaic. 

12  Hope.— Auth.,  "  trust."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  the  next 
verse,  and  the  reiteration  of  "  hope  "  in  that  verse  was  probably 
suggested  to  the  Apostle  by  its  occiirrence  in  this  quotation. 
Compare  the  reciu-rence  of  "patience"  and  "comfort"  in 
verse  5. 

15  Putting   you    again    in    remembrance.— The  Gr.  is  a 

doubly  compounded  verb  [iiri,  avd,  fxLfj.vr]aKca),  which  is  not  again 
iised  in  the  New  Testament.  Auth.,  "j)utting  you  in  mind." 
This  word,  like  other  phrases  in  this  A'ei'se,  appears  to  be  chosen 
Avith  the  view  of  courteously  excusing  the  liberty  which  he  takes 
in  admonishing  them. 

18  The  sentence  is  cleared  and  made  more  perspicuous  by  turning 
the  second  negative  (see  Margin)  into  "  save  those,"  as  in  text. 

For  the  obedience  of  the  Gentiles — i.e.,  with  a  view  to 
that  object.  Compare  chap.  i.  5.  Auth.,  "  to  make  the  Gentiles 
obey." 

In  the  power  of  signs.— As  it  is  said  of  Elijah,  1  Kings 
xix.  8,  "he  went  in  the  strength  of  that  meat."  .  Auth.,  "by 
mighty  signs." 

20  Making  it  my  aim.— More  literally,  "making  it  my  ambi- 
tion." The  same  word,  in  reference  to  the  things  which  should 
be  the  objects  of  a  Christian  man's  ambition,  is  used  by  St.  Paul, 


.  292  EOMANS-XV. 

2  Cor.  V.  9  and  1  Tliess.  iv.  11.  He  was  "ambitious  "  of  doing 
what  was  nioi*e  difficult,  and  more  for  tlie  furtlierauce  of  the 
Gospel,  than  preaching  where  Christ's  Name  was  already  kuo^vn, 
and  biailding  on  a  foundation  which  another  Evangelist  had  laid. 
Auth.,  "  so  have  I  strived."  Tjoid.,  "  so  have  I  enforced  myself." 
The  word  is  altogether  passed  over  in  Yulg.,  Wycl.,  and  Rhem. 
Beza  has  contendens,  whence  probably  the  rendering  of  Auth. 

21  To  whom  no  tidings  of  him  came. — Auth.,  "  to  whom  he 
was  not  spoken  of."  The  Gr.  signifies  the  bearing  of  a  "  mes- 
sage "  or  "  tidings." 

22  These  many  times.— More  literally,  "  for  the  most  part," 
TO  irowd.  The  phrase  does  not  occm*  again  in  the  New  Testament, 
Auth.,  "  much."  There  is  probably  a  reference  to  chap.  i.  13, 
"  often  times  (iroAXoKts)  I  purposed  to  come  unto  you,  but  was 
hindered  hitherto." 

23  Having    ...    a  longing  to   come   unto  you. — As  he 

had  said  in  chap.  i.  11,  using  the  same  word,  iTrnrodii,  "I  long  to 
see  you."  All  English  versions,  "having  a  great  desire,"  fol- 
lowing the  inadequate  rendering  of  Yulg.,  cupiditatem  habens. 

24  In  some  nieasiire  satisfied  with  your  company. — More 
literally,  "  filled  with  you."  As  in  A'erse  15  he  excuses  his 
boldness,  so  hei'e  he  shows  his  tenderness  by  the  phrase  "  in  some 
measure  ;'''  fully  satisfied  with  their  company  he  cannot  be. 

26  It  hath  been  the  good  pleasure. — He  uses  here  a  word 
seldom  applied  in  the  New  Testament   to  aiiy  one   but  God, 

The  good  pleasure  of  Macedonia  and  Achaia.— A  bold 
figure  of  si)eech,  by  which  the  Apostle  represents  whole  pro- 
■\nnces  as  joining  in  a  contribution  which  was  made  by  that  small 
portion  of  their  inhabitants  who  were  Christians.  To  modify 
the  seeming  hyiJcrbole,  the  rendering  "  tliem  of  Macedonia  "  was 
adopted  in  Auth.,  following  Tynd. 

The  poor  among  the  saints.— So  Vulg.,  correctly,  j) a wperes 
sanctorum.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.  and  Rhem.,  "  the  poor  saints," 
as  if  all  the  believers  at  Jerusalem  were  poor. 

27  They  owe  it.-rThe  Gr.  is  the  verb  corresponding  to  the  noun 
"  debtors  "  in  the  last  sentence.     Auth.,  "  their  duty  is." 

28  Accomplished. — More  nearly  represents  eViTeXeVay  than  Auth. 
"  performed." 

Sealed  this  fruit.— Made  it  secure ;  like  the  oil  and  wine 
which  were  stored  in  vessels,  amphorce,  and  sealed. 


ROMANS— XVI.  293 

1  will  go  on  "by  you  unto  Spain.— Literally,  "  I  will  go 
away  through  {or,  by)  you  " — i.e.,  after  stopping  with  you  on 
luy  way,  I  will  start  afresh,  I  will  go  on.  Auth.,  "  I  will  come 
by  you  into  Spain." 

30  By  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ.— The  construction  of  the  Gr.  is 
the  same  as  in  chap.  xii.  8,  "  I  beseech  you  ...  by  the  mer- 
cies of  Christ  (5ia)."    Auth.,  "  for  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ's  sake." 

31  Them  that  are  disobedient. — As  at  chaps,  x.  21,  xi.  30. 

32  Find  rest.— This  is  the  proper  meaning  of  the  Gr.,  and  from 
this  springs  the  derivatiA^e  sense  "  be  refreslied,"  wliich  is  hero 
given  to  it  in  all  English  versions,  but  not  so  suital)ly  as  in 

2  Cor.  vii.  13,  "  his  spirit  hath  been  refreshed  by  you  all." 


CHAPTER  XYL 

A  servant. — Margin,  "  Or,  deaconess."  This  alternative  ren- 
dering has  not  been  placed  in  the  text,  because,  although  the  word 
diaconos  became  in  the  life-time  of  St.  Paul  the  special  title  of 
an  order  of  ministers  in  tlie  Church,  there  is  no  proof  that  it  was 
applied  officially  to  women ;  and  the  appellation  was  still  given 
to  servants  or  ministers  who  were  in  a  secidar  capacity.  Com- 
pare chap.  xiii.  4 ;  xv.  8. 

For  she  herself  also.— Auth.,  "  for  she,"  Her  claim  to  their 
help  is  put  emphatically,  Kal  yap  avri]. 

Fellow-workers. — The  word  is  so  rendered  in  verse  9  (Auth.), 
and  here  it  represents  tlie  relation  of  Prisca  and  Aquila  to  tlie 
Apostle,  not  merely  assisting  him  (Auth.,  "lielpei-s"),  but  work- 
ing with  him  in  the  same  trade  as  well  as  in  the  service  of  Clirist. 

Frisca,  for  PrisciUa  (which  is  the  diminutive  of  Prisca),  by 
cliange  in  Gr.  text,  in  accordance  with  all  the  chief  MSS. 

Worthily  of  the  saints. — In  the  manner  in  which  Christians 
shoidd  be  received  by  Christians.  Auth.,  "  as  becometh  saints  " 
would  moan  "receive  her,  as  it  becometh  saints  " — i.e.,  "  in  tlie 
Lord." 

Salute.— Auth.,  "greet."  The  Gr.,  varied  in  translation  by 
Auth.,  is  the  same  throughout  the  chapter. 


294  ROMANS— XYI. 

5  Asia. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "Acliaia  "  (Autli.).  Tlie  phrase 
"  first  fniits  of  Acliaia  "  being  applied  to  the  house  of  Stephanas 
in  1  Cor.  xvi.  15,  may  from  thence  have  been  introduced  into  this 
passage. 

8  Ampliatus.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  Amplias  "  (Auth.). 

9  TJrbanus. — All  Engl,  versions  before  Aiith.,  "Urban."  By  the 
addition  of  the  final  e.in  Aiith.  many  English  readers  have  l^een 
led  to  pronounce  the  name  "  Urbane,"  as  if  it  were  feminine. 

18  Smooth  and  fair  speech. — The  distinction  between  the  two 
words  ajjpears  to  be  (1)  speech  by  which  they  try  to  pass  tliem- 
selves  ofl:  as  good  men ;  (2)  speech  by  which  they  flatter  others 
("  eulogy  ").     Auth.,  "  good  words  and  fair  speeches." 

Beguile. — The  Gr.  is  so  rendered  in  chap.  vii.  11 ;  it  is  especially 
used  to  describe  that  kind  of  deceit  which  consists  in  giving  a 
goodly  outside  to  what  is  inwardly  and  essentially  evil,  as  in 
2  Cor.  xi.  3,  "  the  serpent  beguiled  Eve."   Auth.  here, "  deceive." 

19  Over  yon. — Auth.,  "  on  your  behalf."     Gr.,  icp'  v/iTv. 

22  Who  write.—  Literally,  as  Auth.,  "  who  wrote."  The  Gr. 
idiom,  unlike  the  English,  allows  the  writer  to  use  the  past  tense, 
and  thus,  by  a  proleptic  use  of  the  aorist,  to  represent  himseK,  as 
he  would  be  regarded  by  the  receiver  of  the  Epistle,  as  the  person 
who  "  wrote"  it.     Compare  Gal.  vi.  11 ;  1  Cor.  ix.  15. 

23  Treasurer. —  So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  "cofferer,"  after  Yulg., 
arcarius.  Auth.,  with  Tynd., "'  chamberlain."  The  Gr.,  oIkqvoixos, 
economus,  properly  denotes  a  financial  oificer. 

24  This  verse,  which  repeats  the  benediction  already  given  in  verse 
20,  is  omitted  in  the  best  MSS. 

25  Kept  in  silence.— Not  as  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  kept  secret." 

Through  times  eternal. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.  This  phrase, 
represented  in  Tynd,  and  Auth.  by  the  paraphrase,  "since  the 
world  began,"  is  used  again  by  St.  Paul,  and  by  him  only,  in 
2  Tun.  i.  9 ;  Titus  i.  2. 

27  To  whom. — These  words  are  in  the  received  Gr.  text  and  all 
the  great  MSS.,  but  are  not  translated  in  Auth.,  following  Tjnid. 
The  sentence  has  a  broken  constraction,  the  words  at  the  begin, 
ning,  "  Now  to  him,"  &c.,  being  resiimed  here  by  the  relative  "  to 
whom,"  instead  of  being  themselves  the  object  of  the  doxology  at 
the  close. 


THE  FIRST  EPISTLE    OF  PAUL  THE  APOSTLE 

TO   THE 

CORINTHIANS. 


CHAPTER  I. 

2  Even  them  that  are  sanctified. — A  further  description  of 
the  Church  at  Corinth,  not  a  new  class  of  believers. 

Their  Lord  and  our's. — The  insertion  of  Lord  in  italics  is 
intended  to  guard  against  the  interpretation  found  in  Yulg.  and 
Tynd.,  and  followed  by  many  modern  expositors,  according  to 
which  "  both  their's  and  our's  "  is  connected  rrith  "  every  place." 
Thus  Wycl.,  "  in  every  place  of  their's  and  our's."  By  tliis  com- 
prehensive clause  of  the  salutation,  every  member  of  the  Clmrch 
in  every  land  is  brought  within  the  scope  of  the  Epistle.  The 
connection  of  "their's  and  our's  "  with  "  Lord  "  is  apparently  due 
to  Beza,  Domini,  inquam,  twin  ipsorum  turn  nostri. 

4  In  Christ  Jesus. — So  Wycl.,  Genev.,  and  Rhem.,  following 
Vulg.  and  the  Gr.  (v  ;  i.e.,  "  given  to  you  as  members  of  Christ, 
united  with  Him."     Auth.,  "  by." 

7  Revelation. — Auth.,  "  coming."     The  Gr.  is  apocalypsis. 

8  Unreproveable. — So  the  Gr.  is  rendered  in  Auth.  at  Col.  i. 
22 ;  but  here  "  blameless,"  which  is  used  for  several  other  words. 

9  Through  whom  ye  were  called. —  The  phrase  "  through 
whom,"  as  applied  to  God,  instead  of  "  by  whom  "  {Sid  not  inr6)  is 
very  imusual.  It  is,  however,  the  rendering  of  Yulg.,  per  queni : 
all  Engl,  versions  have  "by  whom."  Compare  Gal.  i.  1,  and 
Note  there. 

10  Perfected  together.—  Auth.,  "  perfectly  joined  together." 
The  Gr.  is  usually  rendered  by  "made  perfect,"  or  "  perfected," 
which  is  the  prominent  notion  in  it,  and  that  of  "  joining  "  is 
sufficiently  expi'essed  here  by  "together."  Tynd.,  "knit 
together."     Yulg.,  sitis  perfecti.     Compare  Matt.  xxi.  16. 


296  1.   CORINTHIANS- 1. 

11  Signified, — A  milder  word  and  less  common  than  "  declared  '* 
(Auth.).  The  Gr.,  iSrjKiBri,  is  rendered  thus  in  Heb.  ix.  8,  and 
elsewhere  (Auth.). 

12  I  mean.— Explaining  what  he  has  just  been  sajing.  So  Tynd., 
Genev.,  and  Rhem.     Auth.,  "  this  I  say." 

18  The  word  of  the  cross.  —  In  contrast  with  "  wisdom  of 
words,"  words  of  man,  in  the  last  verse.  Auth.,  with  Tynd., 
"  the  preaching  of  the  cross."     The  Gr.  is  \6yos. 

Perishing  .  .  .  being  saved.— This  rendering  is  required 
by  the  Gr.  participles,  which  are  in  the  present  tense,  denoting 
an  inchoate  or  progressive  condition,  (1)  that  of  unbelievers;  (2) 
that  of  the  faithful.  AU  English  versions  have  "perish  .  .  . 
are  saved,"  pointing  in  each  case  to  the  event  as  already  accom- 
plished. Compare  cliap.  ii.  6,  "  are  coming  to  nought,"  and  Note 
on  Acts  ii.  47. 

19  Prudence  of  the  prudent. — The  noun  is  akin  to  the  adjective 
in  this  as  in  the  former  member  of  the  sentence.  Auth.,  "  under- 
standing." 

21  Seeing  that.— Auth.,  following  Cranm.,  "after  that."  The 
conjunction,  literally  "  since,"  by  an  easy  transition  passes,  like 
"  since "  and  other  temporal  particles,  to  a  logical  meaning. 
Vulg.,  qiiia.  The  same  word  stands  at  the  beginning  of  the  next 
verse. 

Its  wisdom. — The  article  in  the  Gr.  gives  this  meaning  more 
liglitly  than  our  possessive  pronoun,  but  it  is  not  expressed  in 
Autli.',  "  by  wisdom."     Compare  Acts  xxvi.  24, 

The  preaching. — Hero  also  the  article  is  omitted  in  the  Auth., 
"  preaching."  The  reference  is  to  verse  17.  The  Gr.  is  properly 
"the  tiling  preached,"  the  preachment. 

2t>  Por  behold. — The  Gr.  may  be  eitlier  imperative  or  indicative. 
The  former  appears  preferable  on  comparison  of  chap.  viii.  9, 
where  it  is  "  take  heed,"  and  chap,  x,  18,  "  Behold  Israel  after 
the  flesh,"  and  so  Vulg.,  videte. 

~7  Put  to   shame. — Auth.,  "  confound."     Compare  Rom,  v.  5. 


I.    CORINTHIANS— II.,    III.  297 

CHAPTER  11. 

1  Proclaiming. — Here  as  elsewhere  represents  the  Gr.,  naray- 
ytWuv.     Auth., "  declaring." 

Mystery. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  testimony  "  (Aiith.). 

11  The  spirit  of  the  man — i.e.,  the  things  of  a  man  are  known 
only  to  the  man's  own  spirit.  Auth.,  "  the  spirit  of  man,"  which 
seems,  by  suppression  of  the  article,  to  attribute  this  knowledge  to 
the  spirit  inherent,  not  in  the  individual  man,  but  in  humanity, 
in  all  human  nature. 

14  Spiritually  judged. — Margin,  "  Or,  examined."  The  word 
is  so  rendered  in  Vulg.,  WycL,  Tynd.,  andCranm.  Auth.  follows 
Genev.,  "discerned,"  The  word  is  applied  to  the  examination 
made  by  the  judge  (Luke  xxiii.  14),  and  to  the  judgement 
which  he  pronounces  (chap.  iv.  3,  4  of  this  Epistle).  The  sense 
of  "  discerning  "  does  not  appear  properly  to  belong  to  it,  and 
"  judging,"  which  involves  "examining,"  seems  here  the  more 
suitable  rendering. 


CHAPTER  III. 

3  Te  walk  after  the  manner  of  men  —  i.e.,  according  to 
your  human,  carnal  propensities,  not  as  those  who  are  spiritually 
minded.     Auth.,  "ye  walk  as  men."     Comxiare  Rom.  iii.  5. 

4  Men. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  carnal  "  (Auth.). 

5  And  each  as  the  Lord  gave  to  him— i.e.,  ye  believed, 
each  of  you,  as  the  Lord  gave  to  him.  Auth.,  "  even  as  the  Lord 
gave  to  every  man." 

15  As  through  fire — i.e.,  as  one  narrowly  escapes  through  the 
midst  of  fire.  So  Tynd,  and  Cranm.  Auth,,  "  by  fire,"  as  Wyel.. 
Genev.,  and  Rhem. — i.e.,  by  means  of  fire.  Tlie  Gr.  is  5m  irvpoi ; 
in  verse  13  it  is  eV  irvpi.  Vulg.,  per  ignevi,  which  miglit  be  taken 
either  way,  but  j)roperly  is  "  through  fire."  "  By  fire  "  would 
mean  "  by  the  purifying  effect  of  fire  as  of  a  furnace."     This 


298  I.    COEINTHIANS— IV. 

interpretation,  derived  from  the  ambiguous  plirase  of  tlie  Vulg., 
wonld  commend  itself  to  those  who  hold  the  Roman  doctrine  of 
a  purgatorial  fire  of  purification,  and  accordingly  has  j)revailed 
in  the  Roman  Church.  But  the  true  meaning  of  tJbe  whole  passage 
is,  that  thougli  tlie  building  erected  of  such  frail  materials  shall 
be  consumed,  the  builder  himself  shall  escape  with  personal  salra- 
tion  through  the  midst  of  the  flames. 

17  Margin,  "  Or,  and  such  are  ye  " — i.e.,  "  holy."  The  Gr.  is  the 
relative  o'lnvfs,  which,  being  plural  and  masculine,  connects  "  ye  " 
with  "  holy,"  the  word  immediately  preceding,  more  naturally 
than  with  "  temple ;  "  moreover,  "  which  temple  are  ye  "  is  merely 
a  repetition  of  what  has  been  said  just  before.  Tynd.  and  A.uth., 
following  Vulg.,  have  "wliich  temple,"  and  as  there  is  a  diffi- 
culty in  referring  the  relative  to  the  adjective  "  holy "  as  its 
antecedent,  the  Marginal  rendering  has  not  been  thought  suffi- 
ciently established  to  be  admitted  into  the  text. 

18  Thinketh.  that  he  is  wise.— As  in  chap.  viii.  2,  the  Gr. 
being  Sofcel  in  both  places.     Compare  also  John  v.  39. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

2  Here — i.e.,  on  earth,  added  by  change  in  Gr.  text,  in  accordance 

witli  all  the  chief  MSS.,  the  Vulg.,  &c. 

3  Judgement. — Tlie  Gr.  is  "day,"  the  day  of  man's  judgement, 
in  contrast  to  "  the  day  of  the  Lord  "  spoken  of  in  chap.  i.  8,  the 
day  of  His  judgement,  of  whom  it  is  said  in  verse  5  that  He 
"  wiU  bring  to  light  the  hidden  things  of  darkness." 

5  Each  man — i.e.,  separately.  Auth.,  "every  man."  Gr.,  e/coo-Tos, 
not  iras,  as  also  in  chap,  iii.,  where  the  same  change  has  several 
times  been  made. 

Shall  have  his  praise.— The  praise  that  is  his  due,  whether 
more  or  less :  his  proper  share  of  honour.  Auth.,  "  shall  have 
praise,"  overlooking  the  significance  of  the  article,  6  enatvos. 

6  Not  to  go  beyond  the  things. — The  omission  of  to  thinJc, 
due  to  change  in  Gr.  text,  makes  it  necessary  to  complete  the 
sentence  with  the  words  in  italics,  suggested  by  the  context. 


I.    CORINTHIANS— IV.  299 

8  Already — i.e.,  without  us,  independently  of  us  ;  said  ironically. 
Autli.,  "  now."     Gr.,  ^S??. 

9  Meu  doomed  to  death. — Prisoners  at  Rome  wlio  were  sen- 
tenced to  be  thro-^^ni  from  tlie  Tarpeian  Rock  are  described  by 
the  same  word  in  Dionysius  Halic,  ^di.  35. 

And  to  angels  .  .  . —  Margin,  "  Or,  both  to  angels  and 
men."  This  rendering  of  Kal,  "both"  instead  of  "and,"  seems 
reasonable  and  probable  when  we  consider  that  the  preceding 
word,  "the  world"  (t6?  KO(r;uij),  the  whole  created  universe),  in- 
cludes all,  and  that  what  follows  is  said,  not  in  addition,  but  in 
explanation.  So  Bcngel ;  and  Alford,  "  The  world  is  afterwards 
specialised  into  angels  and  men." 

10  Ye  have  glory,  but  we  have  dishonour.— A uth.,  with 
T)^ld. ,  "  ye  are  honoiirable,  but  we  are  despised."  The  former 
word  in  the  Gr.  is  connected  with  5o'|a,  "  glory,"  the  latter  with 
Tt/x-f],  "  honour." 

14  Admonish. — All  English  versions,  "  warn,"  which  has  a  darker 
shade  of  meaning  than  the  Gr.    Yulg.,  moneo.   So  in  Epli.  vi.  4. 

15  Tutors. — Autli.,  "  instructors."  The  iraiSaywySs,  "  pedagogue," 
among  the  Greeks  was  the  trusty  slave  in  a  family,  who  had  the 
general  care  and  superintendence  of  a  child,  but  did  not  himself 
give  instruction. 

16  Imitators. — Yulg.,  imitatores.  This  word,  derived  from  the 
Gr.,  expresses  Jietter  than  any  other  in  our  language  the  meaning 
of  ixifj.7]Tr]s.  AU  English  versions  have  "  followers,"  which  does 
not  at  all  indicate  what  is  meant ;  and  though  "  followers  of 
my  example  "  would  be  an  improvement,  it  would  be  a  cum- 
brous paraphrase,  not  denoting  the  close  observance  and  adop- 
tion of  another  person's  ways  wliich  are  implied  by  "  imitation." 

17  Child  in  the  Lord. — My  spiritual  child,  having  been  through 
me  converted  to  the  faith — a  favourite  ]}hrase  of  St.  Paul,  wliich 
he  uses  at  the  beginning  of  each  of  his  Epistles  to  Timothy. 
Auth.,  "  faithful  in  the  Lord,"  a  rendering  admissible  according 
to  the  collocation  of  the  Gr.,  but  not  probable,  considering  tliat 
the  Apostle  has  just  been  speaking  of  himself  as  a  spiritual 
father,  and  that  in  1  Tim.  i.  1  he  calls  Timothy  his  "  true  child  in 
the  faith." 

19  Word. — As  in  verse  20.    Auth.,  "  speech." 


300  I.    CORINTHIANS— V. 


CHAPTER  Y. 


1  Actually. — Anth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  commonly."  Tlie  Gr.  Sxcoy, 
"  wholly,"  is  in  the  English  versions  vai-ionsly  rendered  ;  in  Yidg., 
ovinino  (entirely,  absolutely).  Our  word  actually  in  its  present 
usage  is  well  suited  to  represent  the  vividness  which  the  expletive, 
though  an  adverb,  acquires  in  the  original  from  its  position  as  the 
first  word  in  tlie  sentence.  It  occurs  again  in  a  somewhat  similar 
way  in  chaj).  vi.  7. 

That  one  of  you  hatH. — Auth.,  "  that  one  should  have  his 
father's  wife."  This  rendering  with  "  should  "  leads  to  the  sup. 
position  that  it  was  a  general  principle,  that  for  a  man  to  have 
his  father's  wife  as  his  own  wife  was  a  thing  allowed  and  author- 
ized. Consistently  with  English  idiom  there  appears  no  way  of 
giving  expression  to  the  subtle  subjective  force  of  Sxrrf  with  the 
infinitive,  on  which  there  is  a  very  scholarly  dissertation  in  the 
Expositor  oi  March,  1882;  and  though  by  inserting  "of  you" 
the  considerate  and  courteous  indetiniteness  of  the  original 
(rti/a)  is  obliterated,  the  words  "  one  hath  "  without  some  such 
assistance  would  not  be  sufficiently  plain  to  the  English  reader. 

3  Being  absent. —  "As"  (Auth.)  omitted  by  change  in  Gr. 
text. 

Judged  him. — The  sentence  is  involved  both  in  the  Gr.  and 
in  the  English,  but  may  be  connected  and  arranged  thus,  "  I 
judged  him  {i.e.,  decreed  concerning  him)  in  the  name  of  the 
Lord  Jesus,  ye  being  gathered  together  and  my  spirit  mth  the 
power  of  our  Lord  Jesus,  to  deliver  such  an  one  {i.e.,  that 
such  an  one  should  be  delivered)  unto  Satan." 

7  For  us. — (Auth.)     Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

For  onr  passover  .  .  . — The  order  of  the  Gr.  is  here 
followed,  and  the  sense,  suggested  by  the  allusion  in  the  pre- 
ceding sentence  to  leaven  and  the  mileavened  passover  bi'ead,  is 
as  follows  :  "  For  we  Christians  also  have  our  passover,  which  has 
been  sacrificed,  namely,  Christ."  So  Yulg.,  Etenim  Pascha 
nostrum  immolatus  est  Christus.  The  point  and  connection  of 
the  passage  is  obsciu-ed  in  Auth.,  following  Tj-nd.,  by  the  trans- 
position of  "  Chi'ist "  from  the  end  of  the  sentence  to  the 
beginning,  "  For  Christ  our  passover  is  sacrificed  for  us." 

10  In  my  epistle. — The  Gr.,  which  has  the  article,  may  be  trans- 
lated tlms,  or  "  in  the  epistle  j  "  but  not  as  Auth.,  "  in  an  epistle." 


I.    CORINTHIANS— VI.  301 

The  alteration,  however,  is  not  decisive  of  the  vexed  question 
whether  tlie  Apostle  is  roforring  to  a  former  part  of  this  Epistle, 
or  to  another  Epistle  wliich  has  not  come  down  to  ns ;  but  the 
latter  interpretation  appears  the  more  probable,  if  only  because 
there  is  not  in  the  earlier  part  of  this  Epistle  anything  to  which 
these  words  can  be  referred. 

"Not  altogether  with — i.e.,  Not  that  you  were  altogether  to 
abstain  from  associating  with  such  persons.  The  Margina/ 
rendering  is  the  same  in  effect,  "  not  at  all  meaning,"  not 
having  in  my  riew  "  the  fornicators  of  this  world,"  of  the  non- 
Christian  world  around  you. 

12  Also,  and  13,    therefore. — (Auth.)  Omitted  by  changes  in  Gr. 
text. 


CHAPTER  TL 

1  His  neighbour. — Compare  Rom.  xiii.  8,  and  Note  there. 

The  unrighteous — i.e.,  the  infidels,  the  heathen,  as  opposed 
to  "  the  saints,"  the  Christians.  Both  words  are  here  used 
without  reference  to  their  moral  significance.  Auth.,  "  the  un- 
just," following  Beza,  injihstis,  Genev.,  and  Rhem. ;  Tynd.  and 
Cranm.,  "  the  wicked,"  following  Yulg.,  iniquis,  and  so  Wycl. 

4  If  ye  have  to  judge. — Literally,  as  in  Auth.,  "  if  ye  have 
judgements."  Gr.,  as  in  verse  2,  Kpirripwu,  criterion,  which  has 
the  several  meanings  of  a  judgement,  a  judicial  tribunal,  a  cause 
to  be  judged.  It  occurs  once  again  in  the  New  Testament, 
at  James  ii.  6,  where  it  has  the  second  sense,  and  is  rendered 
"jiidgement-seats." 

Do  ye  set  .  .  .  ? — This  is  one  of  the  many  cases  of  ambiguity 
arising  in  the  New  Testament  Greek  from  the  identity  of  the 
second  person  plural  of  the  verb  in  the  indicative,  imperative,  and 
interrogative.  Here  also  the  context  does  not  decide  beyond 
doubt  which  of  the  three  is  to  be  preferred.  Taking  the  inter- 
rogative, the  sense  of  the  passage  beginning  from  verse  1  is  this  : 
"  Wliy  do  ye  take  your  quarrels  before  heathen  judges  ?  The 
saints  are  to  judge  angels ;  much  more  are  they  competent  to 
judge  in  worldly  affairs.  If  these  questions  as  to  worldly  affairs 
arise  among  you,  why  do  ye  constitute  them  your  judges,  who  are 


302  I.    CORINTHIANS— VI. 

of  uo  account,  are  not  thought  anything  of  in  tlie  Church,  namely, 
the  heathen  ?  "  Auth.  takes  it  imperatively  in  this  sense:  "  Since 
we  are  competent  to  judge  angels,  any  of  us  are  sufficient  for 
worldly  affairs  ;  therefore  set  the  lowest  and  meanest  among  you 
to  judge  such  matters,  rather  than  take  them  before  the  heathen 
judges."  But  this  in  logical  force  and  consecutiveness  is  not  so 
probable  as  the  interrogative  rendering. 

5  To  move  you  to  shame. — The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  with  a  view 
to  your  shame,"  not  as  Auth.,  "I  say  this  to  your  shame" — i.e., 
as  a  shameful  thing  in  you.  The  same  phrase  is  used  again  in 
chaj).  XV.  34. 

7  Already. — Gr.,  ^5?) — i.e.,  antecedently  to  any  question  as  to  the 
tribunal  before  wliieh  their  lawsuits  were  to  be  tried.  Auth., 
"now." 

A  defect. —  A  falling  short;  Auth.,  "a  fault."  "Viilg-, 
delictum ;  or,  according  to  the  change  in  Gr.  text  by  the  omission 
of  eV,  it  may  be  rendered,  as  in  the  Margin,  "a  loss  to  your- 
selves." 

Have  lawsuits.  —  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  go  to  law," 
which  represents  a  different  phrase  in  verse  6. 

8  Ye  yourselves.—"  Ye  "  is  emphatic  in  the  Gr. 

11  Ye  were  washed.— Tlie  Gr.  is  the  aorist  of  the  middle  voice, 
"  Ye  caused  yourselves  to  be  washed  clean  of  your  sin  by  bap- 
tism." The  other  verbs  which  follow  in  this  sentence  are  also  in 
the  aorist. 

12  Not  all  things  are. — This,  the  order  of  the  Gr.,  is  more 
perspicuous  than  Auth.  "  all  things  are  not,"  in  which  the  nega- 
tive may  grammatically  attach  to  eitlier  of  the  words  between 
which  it  stands. 

15  Take  away — i.e.,  from  Christ,  whose  members  they  have  be- 
come.    Auth.  "  take  "  does  not  fully  express  this  meaning. 

16  The  twain. — Auth.,  "two,"  omitting  the  article.  Compare 
Matt.  xix.  5,  "  They  twain  shall  be  one  flesh,"  and  Gen.  ii.  24'. 

20  "  And  in  your  spirit." — (Autli.)  Omitted  in  all  the  earliest 
MSS.,  and  in  most  of  the  anciout  versions.  The  object  of  the 
Apostle  liere  is  to  insist  on  the  necessity  of  oiu*  keeping  holy  the 
body,  as  it  is  God's  temple. 


I.    CORINTHIANS— VII.  303 


CHAPTER  VII. 

2  Because  of.— So  Wycl.  and  Rlicm.  Aiitli.,  "to  avoid."  Tlio 
article  in  the  Gr.  points  to  the  prevalence  of  tlie  sin  at  Corintli ; 
the  i)lural  number  to  the  various  forms  of  it  {Bencjel  and 
Wordsworth). 

3  Her  due.— "  Benevolence  "  (Auth.)  is  omitted  by  change  in 
Gr.  text. 

5  "Fasting"  (Auth.,  with  Tynd.)  is  omitted  in  the  chief  textual 
authorities,  and  in  Vulg.,  Wycl.,  and  Rliem.  The  interpolation 
appears  to  have  been  made  at  a  comparatively  late  j)eriod,  for  the 
purpose  of  encouraging  asceticism. 

6  By  way  of  permission. — Gr.,  Kara  avyyvwix-nv.  He  lays  this 
down  not  as  a  command,  but  as  a  thing  permitted  and  disci'e- 
tionary,  as  to  which  each  person  should  judge  for  himself. 
Auth.,  "by  permission,"  woidd  imply  that  he  himself  delivered 
this  coimsel  by  the  permission,  and  not  by  the  command,  of  God. 
Wycl.,  correctly,  "  as  giving  leave,",  following  Vulg.,  pro;pter 
indulgmtiain. 

10  I  give  charge. — The  word  is  not  the  same  as  that  rendered 
"  command  "  in  the  previous  verses. 

Leave. — Auth.,  "  put  away,"  which  is  used  for  another  word, 
&iro\veLv,  in  Matt.  i.  19,  &c. ;  "  leave,"  atpuvai,  is  applied  to  the 
case  of  the  believing  husband  and  wife  (verses  12,  13). 

12  Is  content.— So  Tynd.  and  Genev.  Wycl.,  Cranm.,  and 
Rhem.,  "  consent,"  after  Vulg.,  consentit.     Auth.,  "  be  pleased." 

14  The  brother— i.e.,  a  Christian.  By  change  in  Gr.  text  for 
"husband." 

As  an  historical  illustration  of  these  injunctions,  it  is  remarked  by 
Dean  Stanley,  in  commenting  upon  tliem,  that  they  probably  had 
a  direct  influence  on  the  marriage  of  Clotilda  with  Clovis,  and 
of  Bertha  with  Ethelbert ;  and  consequently  on  the  conversion  of 
the  two  great  kingdoms  of  France  and  England  to  the  Christian 
faith  (Stanley  on  1  Cor.). 

15  In  peace — i.e.,  to  be  in  a  state  of  i^eace  and  concord  one  witli 
another ;  and  conjugal  lights  therefore  are  not  to  be  insisted  on, 
if  the  unbelieving  husband  or  wife  desires  to  separate.  Auth. 
(alone)  here  has  "  to  peace."  So  Gal.  i.  6,  "  called  you  in  the  grace 
of  Gln-ist,"  is  in  Auth.,  "  unto  grace." 


304  I.   CORINTHIANS— VIL 

16  How  knowest  thou  .  .  .  ? — This  plirase  in  classical  Gr. 
would  imply  that  the  thing  spoken  of,  the  conversion  of  one 
party  by  the  other,  is  nnlikely.  But  the  contrary  inference  has 
been  drawn  from  this  jmssage  by  Chrysostom  and  other  exposi- 
tors both  in  ancient  and  modern  times.  Auth.,  "what  knowest 
thou  ?  "  (Gr.,  Ti  oJSas  €{),  following  Beza,  ecquid. 

21  But  if  .  .  .  use  it  rather.— This  rendering  admits  of 
the  interjjretation  "  if  thou  canst  obtain  thy  liberty,  use  the  op- 
portunity of  becoming  free  "  (supplying  t^  iKevefpla  after  xp'j<''«')- 
The  Marginal  alternative  rendering,  "  Nay  even  if,"  supports  the 
other  view  of  the  passage  :  "  Even  if  thou  canst  obtain  tliy 
liberty,  prefer  to  make  the  best  of  thy  condition  as  a  slave. ' 
The  former  is  the  interiiretatiou  of  Tynd.,  Cranm.,  Autli.,  Vulg. 
(apparently),  Chrysostom  (who  argues  against  the  latter).  Alford, 
&c.  The  latter  is  followed  by  Erasmus,  Beza,  Wordsworth,  and 
others.  If  classical  usage  is  to  decide  the  question,  the  Gr.  is  in 
favour  of  the  latter  interpretation  and  the  Marginal  rendering. 
But  the  usage  of  the  New  Testament  is  not  so  conclusive.  See 
Phil.  ii.  17  ;   1  Peter  iii.  14.     Compare  verse  28. 

22  Freedmau. — So  Rhem.,  "  the  franchised  of  the  Lord,"  fol- 
lowing Viilg.,  libertus.  All  other  English  versions,  "  freeman." 
A  "  freedman  "  was  the  Roman  term  for  one  who,  having  been  a 
slave,  had  been  made  free,  "  manumitted."  By  this  phrase,  '*  the 
Lord's  freedmau,"  it  is  not  meant  that  he  had  been  enfranchised 
by  Christ,  but  that  he  was  a  freedman  belonging  to  Christ.  The 
Gr.  air(\(vd(pos  is  not  again  usetl  in  the  New  Testament. 

26  To  be  as  he  is.— This  meaning  of  the  Gr.  suits  the  context 
in  the  next  verse  better  than  '"  so  to  be  "  (Auth.) — i.e.,  "  un- 
married." 

29  The  time  is  shortened.— In  other  words,  "  our  salvation  is 
nearer  than  it  was."  All  English  versions,  "  is  short,"  following 
Vulg.  The  time  is  contracted,  dTa^vn  in  (a  metaphor  from  the 
drawing  in  or  furling  of  a  sail),  and  God's  purpose  in  shortening 
it  is,  that  for  the  time  remaining  those  that  have  wives  may 
be,  &c. 

31  As  not  abusing  it. — In  the  sense  of  "  not  using  it  to  excess." 
Margin,  "Or,  not  using  it  to  the  full,"  which  would  limit  the 
sense  to  a  use  going  to  the  full  extent  that  is  legitimate,  and  not 
beyond.  Compare  chap.  ix.  18,  where  the  Gr.  is  used  with  the 
same  meaning. 

32  Free  from  cares. —  Auth.,  •*  without  carefulness,"  following 
Rhem.     But "  carefulness  "  is  a  good  quality  if  not  carried  to 


I.    COBINTHIANS— VIII.  305 

excess,  and  "  careful "  has  a  good  sense  in  verse  34.  The  Gr. 
here  signifies  freedom  from  causes  for  care  —  i.e.,  according  to 
English  idiom,  from  cares. 

33  The  Margin  represents  another  reading  of  the  Gr.  text. 

36  Unseemly. — Auth.,  "  uncomely."     Oomp.  chap.  xiii.  5. 


CHAPTER  YIII. 


1  Sacrificed.— Auth.,  "  offered;  "  at  verse  4,  "  offered  in  sacrifice." 

2  Not  yet.— For  Auth.,  "nothing  yet,"  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

4  No  idol  is  anything — i.e.,  represents  anything  that  has  exist- 
ence. All  English  versions,  following  Vulg.,  "  an  idol  is  nothing." 
Either  rendering  is  admissible ;  that  which  has  been  adopted  is 
logically  the  more  correct. 

6  Unto  him. — Auth.,  "  in  him."     Compare  Rom.  xi.  36. 

7  Being  used  until  now  to  the  idol.— By  change  in  Gr. 
text  for  Auth.,  "with  conscience  of  tlie  idol  unto  this  hour."  The 
meaning  is,  "  they  still,  from  long  habit,  even  now  that  they  are 
Christians,  regard  it  as  having  been  sacrificed  to  a  being  of  some 
sort ;  and  so  in  eating  they  offend  against  their  conscience,  which 
is  weak  in  entertaining  such  a  scruple,  and  is  defiled  by  eating 
what  is  supposed  to  be  a  sacrifice  to  a  demon." 

12  When  it  is  weak.— Auth.,  "their  weak  conscience."  The 
change  is  required  by  the  position  and  meaning  of  the  participle 
in  the  Gr. 


506  I.    CORINTHIANS— IX. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

3  This  verse  refers  to  vrliat  lias  gone  before,  not  to  what  follows,  ac- 
cording to  the  punctuation  in  the  Anth. 

5  A  believer. — Literally,  "a  sister,"  as  "a  brother"  is  tised  in 
chap.  vii.  1-i  for  "  a  believer ;  "  here,  to  prevent  misapprehension, 
that  word  is  brought  into  the  text. 

7  What  soldier  ever  serveth.  ? — By  turning  the  Gr.  in  this 
way  an  idiomatic  rendering  is  given  to  the  Gr.  iroTf.  Auth.. 
"  who  goeth  a  warfare  at  any  time  ?  " 

9  The  ox  when  he  treadeth. —  The  Gr.  specifies  the  work 
which  the  ox  is  doing,  not  the  particular  ox.  Compare  chap, 
•viii.  12,  and  Note  there. 

Is  it  for  the  oxen  that  God  careth  ? —  i.e.,  in  giving 
this  command  is  it  for  the  oxen  that  He  shews  his  care  ?  All 
English  versions,  "  doth  God  care  for  oxen  ?  "  To  this  question 
the  proper  answer  would  be,  "  Yes,  He  does  care  for  all  His 
creatures;"  but  by  following  the  Gr.  order,  and  expressing  the 
article,  the  true  meaning  is  vividly  set  forth.  The  same  illustra- 
tion is  used  by  the  Apostle  in  1  Tim.  \.  18. 

10  Altogether. — For  the  alternative  sense  of  iravTus,  given  in  the 
Margin,  see  Acts  xxviii.  4 ;   Luke  iv.  23. 

And  he  that  thresheth    .    .    . — By  change  in  Gr.  text. 

12  Bear.— The  Gr.  is  not  "sxiffer"  (Auth.),  but  "put  up  with." 

13  Sacred. — Auth.,  "holy."    The  word  is  Upi,  not  ayia. 

Eat. — As  in  chap.  viii.  7.  Auth.,  with  Cranm.,  "  live,"  which 
in  verse  14-  is  properly  used  for  C^v. 

Have  their  portion  with. — The  word  thus  rendered  does 
not  occur  again  in  the  New  Testament.  Its  proper  meaning  is 
"  to  have  a  definite  prescribed  share."  Auth.,  with  Tynd.  and 
Cranm.,  '•  are  partakers,"  which  does  not  imply  apportionment, 
and  is  the  rendering  of  another  word.  The  portion  reserved  by 
the  law  of  Moses  for  the  priests  and  Levites  is  laid  down  in 
Numbers  xviii.     See  also  Levit.  vi.,  \\\. 

15  I  write.— Compare  Tim.  xvi.  22,  and  Note  there. 

17  I  have  a  stewardship  intrusted  to  me.— The  Apostle 
probably   has  in  mind  what  he  said  in  chap.  iv.  1  as  to  the 


I.    CORINTHIANS— X.  307 

"  stewards  "  of  tlie  mysteries  of  God,  and  as  to  its  being  re. 
quired  "  here,"  in  this  world,  that  "stewards  should  be  found 
faithful."  So  he  says  that,  whether  willingly  or  unwillingly,  he 
must  preach  the  Gospel,  for  he  has  a  stewardship  intrusted  to 
him.  This  strong  compulsory  motive  is  not  brought  out  in  Auth., 
"  a  dispensation  of  the  Gospel  is  committed  unto  me." 

18  Not  to  use  to  the  fall.— See  Note  on  chap.  vii.  31.  "  My 
reward  is  this,  to  preach  the  Gospel  without  charge  to  tliose  who 
receive  it,  without  earthly  reward  or  wages  to  myself ;  thus  setting 
an  example  of  disinterested  zeal,  not  straining  my  real  rights, 
and  looking  for  my  reward  to  God."     Compare  2  Thess.  iii.  9. 

23  Joint  partaker.— Auth.  adds  "  with  you,"  which  is  not  in  the 
Gr.,  nor  is  the  Apostle  contemplating  those  only  whom  he  now 
addresses. 

24  Attain.— Auth.,  "  obtain."  The  Gr.  is  "  to  catch,"  "  to  reach 
unto,"  as  in  Rom.  ix.  30. 

25  Striveth  in  the  games.— Literally,  "in  a  contest."  Yulg., 
qid  in  agone  contendit.  The  contests  from  which  tlie  illustra- 
tion is  drawn  are  the  foot-races,  boxing,  and  other  athletic  exer- 
cises of  the  Isthmian  games  held  near  Corinth,  and  familiar  to 
his  readers.  Auth.,  "  striveth  for  the  mastery,"  does  not  suggest 
this  comparison,  and  gives  no  definite  meaning  in  its  stead. 

27  Buflfet  my  body.— Auth.,  "keep  under;"  Vulg.,  castigo ; 
Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  "chastise;"  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  "tame;" 
Genev.,  "beat."  The  Gr.  is  properly  "to  inflict  bruises  on  the 
body,"  such  as  a  "  black  eye  "  with  the  fists.  The  word  occurs 
in  Luke  viii.  5,  and  is  there  rendered  "  wear  me  out." 


CHAPTER  X. 

5  With  most  of  them. — The  Gr.  is  the  comparative,  "  the  more 
part,"  "  the  greater  number."     Auth.,  "  with  many  of  them." 

9  The  Lord. — For  Auth.,  "  Christ,"  by  change  in  Gr.  text.  Tliis 
emendation  is  supported  by  the  chief  MSS.  {e.g.,  the  Sinaitic  and 
the  Vatican) ;  it  appears  best  to  suit  the  context,  and  has  been 
adopted  by  the  chief  critical  editors  of  the  Gr,  text. 


308  I.   CORINTHIANS— X. 

13  Such  as  man  can  bear.— Auth.,  "such  as  is  common  to 
man."  Tynd.,  "  snch  as  pertaineth  to  the  nature  of  man."  The 
Gr.  is  avepiinn'os,  literally  "hximan,"  here  in  the  sense  of  "pro- 
portioned to  human  powers  of   endurance."      So   Chrysostom, 

^VfJ./J.fTpOS. 

17  The  marginal  rendering  is  added,  not  as  being  probable,  but 
because  it  is  grammatically  admissible,  and  it  commends  itseK  to 
some  expositors  as  being  more  in  logical  sequence"  with  the 
context. 

18  Have  not  they    .    .    .    communion  with  the  altar  ?— 

Auth.,  "  are  not  they  partakers  of  the  altar  ?  "  The  Gr.  is  akin 
to  that  rendered  "  communion  "  in  verse  16;  and  here  the  Gr. 
requires  "  with,"  not  "  of,"  to  express  participation  with  the 
altar.  "  So,"  he  says,  "it  is  with  Israel,  the  earthly  type  of  the 
Christian  Church ;  they  eat  of  the  sacrifices,  and  by  so  doing 
join  in  the  worship.  In  like  manner,  if  you  eat  of  the  heathen 
sacrifice  you  associate  yourselves  with  the  heathen  worship." 

20  Communion.— Auth.,   with    Tynd.,    "fellowship,"    following 

Vulg.,^eri  socios  doBmoniorum. 

24  His  neighbour's  good. — Tynd.,  Genev.,  and  Auth.,  "another's 
wealth."  Cranm.,  "that  which  belongeth  unto  another,"  alto- 
gether mistaking  the  sense,  which  is  freed  from  obscurity  by 
the  substitution  of  good  for  the  archaic  wealth.  As  to  "  neigh- 
bour's "  for  "  another's  "  (Auth.),  compai'e  chap.  vi.  I,  and  Note 
on  Rom.  xiii.  8. 

27  One  of  them. — Auth.,  "  any,"  which  now,  like  "  many,"  is  used 
as  a  substantive  plural,  but  is  a  singular  in  the  Bible  and  Shake- 
speare, being  originally  ane,  "one,"  "an."  Wycl.  here  has 
"  ony."     Compare  James  i.  5. 

28  "For  the  earth  ..."  (Aiith.),  an  interpolated  repetition  of  verse 
26,  not  found  in  the  chief  MSS. 

30  By  grace. — Margin,  "  Or,  with  thankfulness."  The  Gr.  x«p'^ 
as  indeed  the  English  "grace,"  may  be  used  in  either  sense;  it 
enters  into  the  word  "  eucharist,"  which  is  expressive  of  thank- 
fulness, and  the  cognate  verb  to  which,  "  to  give  thanks,"  comes 
immediately  at  the  end  of  the  verse,  giving  probability  to  the 
Mai'ginal  rendering  in  this  place. 

33  The  many. — As  at  Rom.  v.  15. 


I.   CORINTHIANS— XI.  309 

CHAPTER  XI. 

2  Hold  fast.— Autll.,  "  keep."      Gr.  /farexere,  not  Tijpure. 

The  traditions. — The  word  is  cognate  to  the  verb  here  ren- 
dered "  I  delivered,"  and  occurs  again  in  2  Tliess.  ii.  15,  where 
Auth.  has  "  traditions,"  but  here  "  ordinances,"  following  Tynd. — 
a  sense  not  properly  belonging  to  the  word,  and  probably  adopted 
by  our  translators  in  their  dislike  of  many  practices  entailed  on 
the  Church  in  their  time,  not  by  primitive  but  by  mediaeval  usage. 
The  traditions  handed  doAvn  by  St.  Paul  were  matters  of  regi- 
men, iJolity,  and  doctrine.     Compare  Acts  xvi.  4. 

5  Unveiled.— Auth.,  "  uncovered."     The  Gr.  is  not  the  same  as 
at  verse  4,  which  is  literally,  "  having  on  the  head." 

It  is  one  and  the  same  thing.— This  idiomatic  phrase 
exactly  represents  the  Greek.  Auth.,  following  Cranm.,  "  that  is 
all  one  as  if."  Tynd.  and  Genev.,  "were  all  one  and  the  very 
same  thing." 

10  A  sign  of  authority. — The  words  in  italics  are  added  to  throw 
some  light  on  this  olDScure  passage,  though  without  removing 
the  doubt  whether  by  "  authority  "  is  meant  the  authority  which 
the  husband  has  over  her,  or  that  which  she  derives  from  him. 
Auth.,  with  Tynd.  and  Rhem.,  "  power." 

13  Seemly.— The  Gr.  has  reference  to  "propriety,"  not  to 
"  comeliness  "  in  the  modern  acceptation  of  the  word. 

14  A  dishonour. — Compare  chap.  iv.  10,  and  Note. 

17  In  giving  you  this  charge.— The  same  word  as  in  chap. 
\'ii.  10 ;  there  Auth.  has  "  I  command,"  but  here  "  I  declare." 
The  reference  is  to  the  injunctions  which  he  has  already  given,  not 
to  what  he  is  about  to  say.  "  Though  I  have  been  praising  you 
(see  verse  2),  for  this  I  praise  you  not,  namely,"  &c. 

19  Heresies.— Margin,  "Or, /acfioTCs."  The  Gr.  aipecrets,  hwresies, 
appears  in  the  apostolic  age  to  have  denoted  factions  or  parties 
within  the  Church,  not,  as  in  later  times,  erroneous  doctrines, 
tending  to  cause  separation  from  the  Church. 

20  It  is  not  possible.— Gr.,  ovk  icm.  So  in  the  Margin  of 
Auth.,  "ye  cannot  eat  "  (from  Tynd.). 

24  The  words  "  take  eat "  and  "  broken  "  (Auth.)  are  not  found  in 
the  earliest  MSS.,  and  were  probably  interpolated  to  bring  this 
narrative  into  closer  harmony  with  that  of  St.  Matthew.     They 


310  I.    CORINTHIANS— XL 

are  in  the  Vulgate,  with  the  variation  "  which  is  delivered," 
traditur,  for  "  which  is  broken." 

27  The  bread. — Auth.,  "  this,"  which  is  not  found  ui  any  of  the 

best  MSS. 

Froclaim. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "shew,"  The  Gr.  is 
KaTayjfWco,  as  in  chap.  ix.  14. 

28  Prove  himself. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  aft«r  Vulg.  probet.. 
Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  examine,"  which  is  used  for  another  Gr. 
word  in  chap.  ix.  3.  To  "  i^rove  himseK "  is  not  merely  to 
question  himself  as  to  his  conduct  and  motives,  but  to  subject 
them  to  some  test  that  may  assure  him. 

29  "  Unworthily." — (Auth.)  Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text ;  an 
interpolation  probably  thought  necessary  to  complete  the  sense. 
No  such  insertion,  however,  is  i-equired  when  the  proper  force  is 
given  to  the  Gr.  particle  m^i  which  follows,  "  if  he  discern  not." 

If  he  discern  not  the  body. — Auth.,  with  Rhem.,  "  not 
discerning  the  Loi'd's  body."  Vulg.,  non  dijudicans.  Tynd., 
"  because  he  maketh  no  difference  of  the  Lord's  body."  The  woi'ds 
"  of  the  Lord  "  are  omitted  in  the  Gr.  text,  ia  accordance  with 
the  Siuaitic,  Vatican,  Alexandrine,  and  other  MSS. ;  and  their 
removal  raises  the  question  whether  "  the  body "  which  is  not 
recognised  and  duly  estimated  is  the  Body  of  Christ  in  the 
Sacrament,  or  that  of  the  Church  as  a  holy  congregation,  not  to 
be  treated  as  a  common  assembly  meeting  for  a  secular  purpose. 
The  former  alternative  is  the  more  probable,  as  the  body  and  the 
blood  of  the  Lord  have  been  spoken  of  just  before  (verse  27),  as 
well  as  in  verse  24  and  chap.  x.  16,  while  no  mention  has  been 
made  of  the  Church  as  being  "  the  body ;  "  and  in  chap,  xii., 
where  that  expression  is  applied  to  the  Church,  it  is  with  the 
addition  of  "  of  Chinst."  To  infer  such  a  meaning  here  from  the 
Avords  in  chap.  x.  16,  "we  who  are  many  are  one  bi-ead,  one 
body,"  would  be  to  build  too  much  on  a  phrase  used  there  for  the 
fii'st  time,  in  a  figiu-ative  manner,  without  explanation. 

30  Not  a  few. — The  Gr.  is  not  the  same  as  that  rendered  "  many  " 
just  above. 

34  That  your  coming  together  be  not  unto  judgement. 

— The  difference  in  rendering  the  -^'ery  similar  Gr.  of  this  and 
the  preceding  verse  is  intended  to  mark  more  strongly  the 
difference  of  meaning.  In  verse  33  they  come  together  for  the 
purpose  of  eating  (eis  rb  <i)ayuv) ;  here  a  caution  is  given  lest 
they  come  together  "  unto  judgement "  {els  npTna) ;  not  with  that 
as  the  purpose,  but  as  the  consequence,  of  their  coming  together. 


I.    CORINTHIANS— XII.  311 


CHAPTER  XII. 


2  Led  away  .  .  .  led. — The  formei*  of  tlio  two  A'ci-bs  in  tlip 
Gr.  diifers  from  tlie  latter  in  being  componnded  of  airo  (away). 
Autli.,  "  carried  away  .  .  .  led."  "  To  lead,"  not  "to  carry, "  is 
the  usual  sense  of  &yeiy.    Compare  Matt.  iv.  1 ;  Luke  iv.  1 . 

Howsoever  ye  might  be  led. — Auth.,  "even  as  yo  wer«r 
led,"  which  does  not  give  the  indefiniteness  of  the  Gr. :  "  What- 
ever way  ye  were  led,  hither  or  thitlier,  ye  were  led  astray  to  the 
worship  of  idols." 

3  Anathema. — Compare  Rom.  ix.  8,  and  Note  there.  We  may 
suppose  that  an  unbelieving  Jew,  when  he  met  a  Christian, 
would  cry  out  insultingly,  "  Anathema  Jesus,"  and  the  Christian 
would  reply,  "  Lord  Jesus." 

6  Ministrations. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "administrations," 
which,  except  as  it  is  used  in  the  Frayer  Book  in  reference  to 
the  Holy  Communion,  has  lost  the  sense  which  it  had  in  the  time 
of  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  and  which  the  shortened  form  of  the  word 
still  retains. 

6  Workings. — So  Wycl. ;  Tynd.  and  Auth.,  following  Yulg., 
"  operations."  The  Gr.  properly  denotes  the  effect  of  an  inward 
working,  here  of  the  Spii-it's  working  in  the  soul.  The  working 
of  the  Spirit  within  the  man  is  accompanied  with  the  power  of 
manifesting  to  others,  for  their  good  and  his  own,  the  spiritual 
gifts  which  he  has  received  through  that  inward  working.  (See 
next  verse.) 

9  Healings  (plural),  i.e.,  of  different  diseases,  requiring  different 
modes  of  cure.     So  Auth.  in  verse  28. 

15  It  is  not  .  .  . — This  and  the  similar  clause  in  the  next 
verse  are  not  put  interrogatively  in  the  Gr.  text. 

28  Secondly. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  has  the  now  obsolete  form, 
"  secondarily."  The  word  does  not,  in  either  form,  apj)ear  else- 
where  in  the  Bible. 

31  Desire  earnestly. — Auth.,  "  covet  earnestly."  The  Gr.  is 
not  expressive  of  covetous,  but  of  earnest  desire  {Cv^oiiv,  not 
eiridvfj.e'iv),  and  is  used  in  the  same  sense  in  chap.  xiv.  1,  "  Desire 
earnestly  spiritual  gifts  "  (Auth.),  and  chap.  xiv.  39. 

The  greater. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "the  best"  (Aulli.). 


312  1.   CORINTHIANS— XIII. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 


The  restoratiou  of  "love"  for  "charity"  as  the  renclering  of 
ayaiTT)  in  this  chapter  is  one  of  the  most  conspicuous  features 
of  the  Revised  Version,  and  calls  for  some  words  of  historical 
retrospect  and  explanation.  The  Gr.  agape  is  peculiarly  a 
Christian  word,  not  found  in  any  classical  author,  and  only  a  few 
times  in  the  LXX.  version  of  the  Old  Testament,  though  tlie 
kindred  verb  ayairu,  "  to  love,"  and  tlie  verbal  adjective  ayaTrrjTos, 
"  beloved,"  are  of  frequent  use  both  in  classical  Gr.  and  in  the 
LXX.  In  the  New  Testament  the  noun  agape  occui's  once  in 
each  of  the  Gospels  of  St.  Matthew  and  St.  Luke,  and  in  each 
place  is  translated  "  love  "  in  Auth.  :  the  verb  is  frequent  in  aU 
the  first  three  Gospels.  In  St.  John's  Gospel  the  noun  occurs 
seven  times,  in  his  Epistles  eighteen  times ;  and  in  all  places 
is  rendered  "  love  "  in  Auth.,  except  in  3  John  vi.,  where  it  is 
"  charity."  In  the  Pauline  Epistles  (including  that  to  the 
Hebrews)  it  is  found  in  seventy-five  passages,  in  fifty-five  of 
which  it  is  "  love  "  in  Auth.,  in  seventeen  (including  seven  verses 
of  this  chapter)  it  is  "  charity,"  and  in  two  it  is  rendered  by  para- 
phrase. In  St.  Peter's  Epistles  it  occurs  in  three  places,  and  in 
each  is  "  charity." 

In  the  Latin  Vulgate  the  word  is  uniformly  rendered  caritas,  the 
only  other  possible  equivalent  (amor)  having  reference  exclu- 
sively to  human  and  earthly  affection.  Tyndale,  the  first  English 
translator  from  the  Gr.,  uniformly  rendered  the  noun,  as  well  as 
the  verb,  by  "  love ;  "  and  this  rendering  was  one  of  the  chief 
grounds  for  Sir  Thomas  More's  virulent  attack  upon  Tyndale's 
version,  in  which  he  denounced  it  as  only  fit  to  be  burnt,  for 
"  it  had  corrupted  the  New  Testament  to  a  clean  contrary 
thing."  Notwithstanding  this  invective,  Tyndale's  successors — 
Coverdale,  Cranmer,  the  Genevan,  aud  the  Bishop's  Bible  in 
the  first  edition  of  1569 — everywhere  retained  the  rendering 
of  "  love "  for  agape,  with  the  exception  of  two  passages, 
Jude  12  aud  Rev.  ii.  19,  where  "  charity"  appears  in  Genev.  It 
should  also  be  added  that  Tyndale  and  his  successors  have 
"  walkest  chai-itably "  for  kut'  a.yaTT-r)v  in  Rom.  xiv.  15.  The 
second  edition  of  the  Bishop's  Bible  (1572),  and,  after  its 
example,  the  Authorised  Version,  replaced  "love  "  by  "  charity  " 
about  twenty  times  in  the  Epistles,  thus  following  timidly  and 
without  any  guiding  principle  in  the  steps  of  Wycliife's  translation 
of  the  Vulgate. 

The  Latin  caritas,  though  applied  by  the  cLicsicrJ  Latin  writers 


I.   CORINTHIANS— Xiri  313 

to  a  higher  order  of  affections  than  amor,  had  not  the  high 
spiritual  meaning  which  was  put  upon  it  as  a  rendering  of  agape 
in  the  New  Testament ;  nor  has  it  attained  to  that  meaning  in 
the  passages  of  the  English  version  into  which  it  was  introduced 
in  1611.  Neither  has  it  maintained  in  common  usage  the  simple 
meaning  whicli  it  had  in  heathen  writers,  but  has  become  a 
synonym  for  the  virtue  of  beneficence,  with  which  agape  is 
shown  in  this  cliapter  (verse  3)  to  be  by  no  means  identical ;  and 
in  its  widest  scope  it  is  limited  to  the  affection  of  man  for  his 
brother  man.  We  never  speak  of  having  "  charity "  towards 
God ;  nor  do  we  say,  as  does  the  Vulgate,  that  "  God  is  charity." 
The  woi-d  "  love,"  according  to  its  ordinary  use  in  Auth.,  repre- 
sents  the  affection  which  the  Fatlier  has  for  the  Son,  which  God 
has  for  man,  which  reciprocally  man  ought  to  have  for  God  and 
for  his  brother  man. 

It  is  desirable  to  observe  consistency  in  the  translation  of  the 
word ;  but  still  more  important  to  shew  that  St.  Paul  and 
St.  Jolm  are  at  one  on  tliis  subject,  and  that  both  are  enforcing 
the  "  great  commandment  of  the  law "  as  declared  by  our 
Lord ;  and  thus  to  bind  together  again  the  whole  practical  teach- 
ing of  the  New  Testament  by  the  restoration  of  the  word 
which  stood  in  the  English  Version  until  1611.  Whatever 
may  be  the  lower  earthly  ideas  connected  with  that  word, 
they  have  not  impaired  the  sacred  associations  which  make  it 
the  holiest  word  in  Scripture  next  to  the  Divine  Name  itself ; 
and  it  is  more  likely  that  the  earthly  love  is  sanctified  by 
association  with  the  Divine,  than  that  the  Divine  perfection 
is  dishonoured  by  bearing  the  same  name  with  that  earthly 
affection,  which  men  believe,  perhaps  too  fondly,  but  not  quite 
foolishly,  to  have  in  it  a  heavenly  element. 

It  is  to  be  observed  that  there  being  in  Latin  no  cognate  verb 
to  caritas,  "  charity,"  the  feeble  woi'd  diligere,  meaning  pro- 
perly "to  choose,"  is  used  in  the  Vulg.  to  render  the  Gr. 
agdpdn.  It  need  not  be  said  that  no  such  difficulty  is  occa- 
sioned in  English,  where  the  verb  and  the  noun  are  identical 
in  form.  (See  an  excellent  discussion  on  this  subject  in  Canon 
Kennedy's  "  Lectures  on  the  Revised  Version,"  1882,  p.  63.) 

As  the  word  agape  does  not  occur  in  any  classical  Greek  au- 
thor, it  may  possibly  have  been  suggested  to  the  writers  of  the 
LXX.  version  by  the  Hebrew  agab,  in  its  feminine  form  shabah 
signifying  human  love,  passionate  desire.  In  that  sense  it  is 
used  in  2  Sam.  xiii.  15,  Jerem.  ii.  2,  and  throughout  the  Canticles, 
and,  in  a  more  general  sense,  in  Eccles.  ix.  1,  6.  (Dean  Stanley, 
Commentary  on  1  Cor.,  p.  233.) 


314  I.    CORINTHIANS— XIII. 

1  Clanging. — All  Eugl.  versions,  "  tinkling,"  after  Yulg.  tinniens. 
The  Gi*.  denotes  a  louder  sound  than  that  of  tinkling.  Compare 
Ps.  cl.  5.  The  metaphor  was  suitable  to  Corinth,  famous  for 
its  brass  (Wordsivorth).  The  cymbals  of  the  Hebrews  were 
of  two  kinds,  the  one  giving  a  softer  sound  than  the  other; 
the  louder  kind  are  distinguished  in  the  Psalm  (LXX.  version) 
by  the  same  word  which  is  used  here. 

5  Provoked. — Auth., "  easily  provoked ; "  previous  versions, "  pro- 
A'oked  to  anger ;  "  Gr.,  napo^vvfrai. 

Taketh  not  account  of  evil.  —  Gr.,  Xoyl^trai,  literally, 
"  reekoneth  it  not,"  doth  not  keep  account  of  it  and  brood 
over  it.  All  Engl,  versions,  "  thiuketh  no  (or  '  not ')  evil," 
following  Yulg.,  non  cogitat  malum. 

6  Rejoiceth.  with  the  truth.— So  Rhem. ;  Wycl.  also  (some- 
what imcoutlily)  "joyeth  together  to  truth,"  both  with  Yulg., 
congaudet  veritate.  "The  truth"  is  personified  as  companion 
of  "love."  Not  obser^-ing  this,  Tynd.  and  Auth.  have  "in 
the  truth."  The  words,  when  translated  out  of  the  language 
of  poetry  into  that  of  every-day  life,  denote  that  love  rejoices 
in  what  is  said  and  done  for  the  truth's  sake. 

7  Beareth  all  things. — Margin,  "  Or,  covereth,"  which  is  the 
literal  meaning  of  the  Gr. ;  but  compare  chap.  ix.  12. 

11  I  felt  as  a  child.— The  Gr.  (\>pov^a>  expresses  the  thoughts 
which  spring  from  the  affections,  as  Col.  iii.  2,  "  Set  your 
minds  on  things  above,"  and  1  Pet.  iii.  8,  "  be  like-minded." 
All  Engl,  versions,  "  I  imderstood,"  from  Yulg.,  sapiebam. 

Now  that  I  am  become  a  man,  I  have  put  away.— 

Auth.,  "  When  I  became  a  man,  I  put  away."  The  verbs  are  in 
the  perfect  tense  in  Gr. 

12  In  a  mirror.— So  Wycl.,  "  by  a  mirror,"  following  Yulg., 
2}er  speculum — by  reflection  as  from  a  surface  of  polished  metal. 
TjTid.  and  Auth.,  "through  a  glass,"  as  if  through  a  trans- 
parent medium.  The  same  Gr.,  ea-oirrpoy,  not  SloirTpov,  is  used 
in  James  i.  23. 

Darkly.— Gr.,  literally,  "  in  a  riddle,"  in  such  a  way  that  we 
are  set  guessing  and  imagining  and  craving  for  knowledge. 


I.    CORINTHIANS— XIV.  315 


CHAPTER  XIY. 

2  In  a  tongue. — Aiitli.  inserts  "unknown,"  following  Genev., 
which  has  "  strange,"  apijarently  on  the  assumption  that  the 
o'ift  here  spoken  of  was  the  power  of  speaking  in  foreign 
languages,  a  point  which  is  not  beyond  doubt,  as  the  word 
for  "a  language"  in  the  New  Testament,  StaAfKTos,  dialectus, 
is  never  used  in  speaking  of  the  gift  of  "  tongues." 

7  Giving  a  voice. — So  Wycl.,  with  Yulg.,  vocem  dantia ;  and 
so  Auth.  in  verse  10,  but  here  "sound,"  using  the  same  word 
again  in  this  verse,  where  the  Gr.  jn-operly  means  "  a  musical 
sound,"  as  in  Rom.  x.  18.  The  sense  is,  "  There  are  inanimate 
things,  such  as  the  pipe  and  harp,  which  can  be  made  to  utter  a 
voice ;  but  the  voice  is  without  significance  unless  it  has  a  dis- 
tinct modulation." 

8  For  war. — So  Cranm.  only,  though  Yulg.  has  ad  bellum  dent. 
All  other  versions,  "  to  the  battle." 

11  Unto  nie.— Literally,  "  in  me,"  in  my  estimation. 

12  Abound. — Autli.,  following  Cranm.  and  Genev.,  "  excel,"  i.e., 
surpass  others,  which  is  not  the  meaning  of  the  Gr.  Wycl.,  "  be 
plenteous." 

16  The  amen. — The  article  is  j)refixed,  as  amen  was  the  accus- 
tomed answer  of  the  congregation  to  the  prayer  or  thanksgiving 
in  the  Synagogue,  from  whence  it  was  transferred  to  the  Christian 
Chm-ch. 

20  Babes. — Auth.  rejjeats  "  children,"  not  noticing  the  variation  in 
the  Gr. 

21  By  men  of  strange  tongues.— Literally,  of  tongues  differ- 
ing from  your  own,  i.e.,  by  the  Assyrians  whom  God  sent  to 
scourge  the  Jewish  nation,  Isa.  xxviii.  9  (Aquila's  version).  As 
tlie  armies  of  the  aliens  Avere  sent  against  the  Jews  who  set  at 
nought  the  warnings  given  them  in  their  own  language  by  God's 
prophets,  so  the  tongues  heard  in  the  Christian  community  were 
for  a  sign  to  those  who  resisted  the  evidence  of  preaching  and 
other  signs. 


316  I.   CORINTHIANS— XV. 


CHAPTER  XY. 

2  If  ye  hold  it  fast. — After  these  words  we  tave  mentally  to 
supply  "as  ye  do,"  as  a  link  connecting  tbem  with  the  clause 
which  follows.  The  sentence  of  the  Gr.  is  somewhat  intricate.  The 
construction  which  has  been  followed,  and  is  approved  by  many 
commentators,  is  apparently  that  of  the  Vulg.,  and  yields  a  clear 
meaning,  with  the  connecting  link  supplied  as  above. 

4  Hath  been  raised. — The  verb  is  in  the  passive  voice  many 
times  in  this  chapter,  and  in  Autli.  is  in  some  places  rendered 
actively  as  here,  "  is  risen,"  and  in  others  as  a  passive  (verse  17). 
Here  it  is  in  the  perfect  tense,  the  resurrection  of  Christ 
being  viewed  as  a  continuing  fact,  whereas  his  death  was  an 
event  which  did  not  continue  as  regards  Himself,  though  it  does 
in  its  consequences  to  us. 

6  He  appeared. — In  Acts  ii.  3  (Auth.)  and  other  places  the  Gr. 
is  so  rendered.     Here  Auth.  has  "  was  seen." 

10  Was  not  found  vain. —  Meaning,  "  did  not  in  the  event 
become."  This  rendering  of  eyevrjdn,  "  was  found,"  is  used  with 
advantage  in  2  Cor.  vii.  14  (Auth.). 

20  "  Become." — (Auth.)     Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

27  Por,  He  .  .  . — Punctuated  thus  as  a  quotation  from  the 
Old  Testament  (Ps.  viii.  6). 

Put  in  subjection. — Auth.,  "jnit."      The  Gr.   denotes  tho 
placing  under  rule,  and  is  not  the  same  as  in  verse  25. 

31  That  glorying  in  you— i.e.,  the  cause  for  glorying  which  I 
have  in  you  as  my  disciples.  The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  your  glory, 
ing." 

33  Evil  company. — Literally,  "  evil  associations  or  companion- 
ships." Auth.,  following  Rhem.,  "  communications."  Vulg., 
colloquia,  and  so  Wycl.  and  TjTid.  This  proverb  in  the  Gr.  is  a 
metrical  line  of  the  sententious  poet  Menander.  The  saying  in 
the  preceding  verse  is  very  likely  to  be  from  the  same  or  a  similar 
som-ce,  though  in  it  the  metrical  form  has  not  been  so  exactly 
retained. 

34  Awake  up  righteously.^  Auth.,  with  Genev.,  "  awake  to 
righteousness."  Vulg.,  vigilate  jxisti  ;  but  Walton's  Polyglott, 
in  the  various  readings  of  the  Vulg.  appended  to  the  work  at  the 
end  of  vol.  vi.,  records   four  MSS.  as  having  juste.    Modern 


I.    COPJNTHIANS— XV.  317 

editions,  as  that  of  Paris  4to,  1785,  have  justi,  and  so  Wycl.  and 
Rhem.,  "  awake  ye  jnst  men."  Beza,  correcilj,  evigilate  juste. 
The  verb,  fKvi\<peiv,  "  to  awake  out  of,"  does  not  occur  again  in 
the  New  Testament,  but  in  the  LXX.  version  is  joined  witli 
words  expressive  of  di'unkeuness  and  revelling.  "  Awake  up 
righteously,"  i.e.,  in  a  righteous,  godly  frame  of  mind. 

To  move  you  to  shame.— Compare  chap.  vi.  5, 

36  Thou  foolish  one.— Auth.,  "  thou  fool."  The  Gr.  is  not  the 
contemptuous  term  that  nopi  is  in  Matt.  v.  22,  or  "  thou  fool  "  in 
English. 

38  A  body. — The  article  is  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

A  body  of  its  own. — The  archaism  "his"  in  Auth.  may  in 
this  place  be  a  stimibling-block  to  the  unwary  reader. 

44  If. — An  addition  due  to  change  in  Gr.  text. 

45  Became  a  living  soul. — Auth.,  "  was  made."  Gr.,  eyevfTo. 
This  sentence  is  quoted  verbatim  from  Gen.  ii.  7  (LXX.  version). 
It  was  held  by  the  Jewish  Rabbis  that  a  distinction  should  be 
made  as  to  the  meaning  of  the  two  statements  in  that  verse  of 
Genesis,  and  that  whereas  God  at  the  first  breathed  into  Adam 
the  "  breath  of  life,"  the  spiritual  life,  he  was  degraded  by  his 
sin,  and  was  not  made,  but  "  became,"  a  "  living  soul,"  possessing 
only  animal  life.  The  existence  of  such  a  tradition  is  a  reason 
for  adhering  to  the  literal  translation  of  eyivero,  "  became." 
(Dean  Stanley,  Note  on  this  verse,  quoting  Schottgen  on  1  Cor. 
ii.  13.) 

Iiife-g^ving. — Auth.,  "  quickening."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as 
in  verse  36,  where  the  old  English  word  "  quickened "  has 
been  retained,  the  subject  being  natural  life,  not  the  true 
spiritual  life,  the  gift  of  God  through  the  spirit,  of  which  it 
is  said  in  chap.  iii.  6,  "the  spirit  giveth  life"  (Auth.);  the 
Gr.  being  the  same  in  that  passage  as  in  this. 

47  "  The  Lord "  (Auth.)  is  omitted  in  abnost  all  the  best  MSS., 
and  in  the  pi-ineipal  ancient  versions,  including  the  Vulg. 
TertuUian,  writing  in  the  third  century,  attributes  the  inser- 
tion of  the  words  to  the  heretic  Marcion,  who  used  them  to 
prove  that  the  Lord  brought  with  Him  from  heaven  His  human 
body.     (Contra  Marcion,  ii.  10.) 

51  I  tell.— Auth.,  "I  shew."    Gr.,  Ae^. 

65  Death. — For  "  gi-avc,"  Auth.     So  it  is  ("  grave,"  Hade^,  being 


318  I.   CORINTHIANS— XVI. 

omitted  altogether)  iu  all  the  great  MSS.,  and  in  almost  all 
ancient  versions  and  patristic  quotations  of  the  passage. 

56  The  power. — So  Rhem. ;  Auth.,  "the  strength,"  which  would 
represent  iVxvy,  rather  than  Sivafits.  Vvilg.,  virtus  peccati  lex, 
a  singular  antithesis. 


CHAPTER    XYI. 


2  As  he  may  prosper. — Literally,  "  As  he  may  be  prospered." 
Auth.,  "  as  God  may  prosper  him."  Tlie  word  "  prosper,"  now 
used  intransitively,  corresponds  in  sense  to  the  passive  form 
of  the  Greek  verb. 

Collections. — Auth.,  "  gatherings."     The  Gr.  is  the  same  as 
in  verse  1. 

3  Bounty. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "liberality."  Wycl.  and  Rhem., 
folloAviug  Yulg., '' grace."  "Bounty"  represents  x"/"^  (charis) 
in  its  double  sense,  lioth  as  the  absolute  quality  of  beneficence, 
and  as  the  material  sign  or  product  of  it. 

5  When  I  shall  have  passed  through— i.e.,  "  when  I  .shall 
have  done  what "  (as  appears  from  what  follows)  "  I  am  now  about 
to  do."  Auth.,  "  when  I  shall  pass  through,"  overlooking  the 
distinctive  time  indicated  by  the  Greek,  and  expressed  by  Tyiul. 
and  Genev.,  "  after  I  have  gone  over,"  and  by  Yulg.,  cum 
Macedoniam  pert)xinsiero. 

I  do  pass  (the  present  tense)  indicates  the  purpose,  not  that 
he  was  then  actually  passing. 

6  With  you  .  .  .  that  ye. — The  Gr.  pronoun  is  in  both  places 
emphatic,  indicating  the  affectionate  desire  which  he  had  to 
visit  them,  and  after  passing  the  winter  months  with  tliem, 
while  navigation  was  discontinued,  to  be  set  forward  on  his 
travels  by  their  good  wishes  and  prayers.  This  intention  lie 
fulfilled.     (See  Acts  xx.) 

12  I  besought  him  much.— For  this  sense  and  construction  of 
the  Gr.  compare  Rom.  xii.  1. 

His  will. — The  absence  of  the  pronoim  in  tlie  Gr.  gives  vise 
to  the  alternative  rendering  noticed  iu  the  Margin,  "  God's  will," 


I.    CORINTHIANS -XVI.  319 

whicli  rests  on  the  usage  of  the  New  Testament,  applying  the 
word  64\-r\na,  "  will,"  specially  to  the  will  of  God.  It  is  so 
applied  in  the  great  majority  of  cases ;  but  there  are  about 
SIX  exceptions  out  of  the  sixty  instances  in  which  the  word 
occurs.     (Compare  chap.  vii.  37 ;  Luke  xxiii.  25.) 

14  Let  all  that  ye  do. — Auth.,  following  Wycl.  and  Rhera., 
"let  all  your  things."  Tynd.,  "all  your  business."  Gr.. 
■n-dvTa  vfj-civ. 

15  Have  set  themselves. — Auth.  (alone),  "  have  addicted  them- 
selves," a  word  not  elsewhere  used  in  the  Bible,  and  apparently 
suggested  by  Beza's  Latin,  sese  addixisse. 

22  Anathema.— See  chap.  xii.  3  ;  Rom.  ix.  3. 

Maranatha. — This  phrase  is  not  connected  vnth.  ihe  preceding 
imprecation,  but  follows  upon  it  as  a  warning.  The  meaning 
of  it  in  the  Hebrew  spoken  at  that  time  in  Palestine  (tlio 
Aramaic)  is,  "  the  Lord  (Maran)  cometh  {atha),"  or  "  the  Lord 
is  come."  The  same  abrupt  exclamation  or  warning  is  given 
by  St.  Paul  in  Gr.  in  Phih  iv.  5,  "  The  Lord  is  at  hand." 
Compare  also  Jude  14,  15.  Augustine  applies  it  against  the 
Arians  as  a  warning  that  the  Lord  will  come  to  judgement, 
and  so  do  some  modern  expositors.  Chrysostom  and  Jerome 
take  it  as  spoken  of  the  past;  the  former  applies  it  to  the 
perverseness  of  the  Jews,  who  denied  that  Christ  was  come, 
and  called  Jesus  anathema :  and  so  Dr.  Lightfoot.  (See 
Bingham,  Ant.  \\\.  2,  §  16.) 


THE   SECOND   EPISTLE   OF  PAUL   THE  APOSTLE 

TO   THE 

CORINTHIANS. 


CHAPTER  I. 

1  The  whole  of  Achaia — i.e.,  the  whole  Roman  province  so 
called,  including  Attica  and  other  districts  lying  outside  the 
region  to  which  the  name  was  limited  by  the  ancient  Greeks. 
Auth.,  "  in  all  Achaia."     Gr.,  '6\ti  r-p  'Axaia. 

3  The  God  and  Father.— See  Note  on  Rom.  xv.  6. 

4  Affliction  (twice). —  Auth.,  "tribulation" — "trouble."  Uni- 
formity of  translation  has  been  observed  in  this  and  the  following 
verses  with  regard  to  the  words  rendered  "  affiction  "  and  "  com- 
fort." 

6  Which  worketh. — The  transposition  of  this  clause  is  in  accord- 
ance with  its  place  in  the  chief  MSS. 

8  Were  weighed  down  exceedingly,  beyond  our  power. 

— The  rendering  of  Auth.,  "  were  pressed  out  of  measure,  beyond 
strength,"  is  neither  literal  nor  harmonious. 

9  The  answer. — Auth.,  "  the  sentence,"  following  Beza,  decrehim 
mortis.  AH  other  Eugl.  versions,  "  answer."  The  Gr.  does  not 
occur  again  in  the  New  Testament.  Its  proper  meaning  is 
"  answer,"  whether  the  opinion  of  the  physician  when  he  is  con- 
sulted, or  the  decision  of  the  judge  wlien  he  has  tried  a  cause. 

12  Holiness. — By  change  of  Gr.  text  for  "  simplicity  "  (Auth.). 
The  two  Gr.  words,  when  written  in  "  uncial "  (capital)  letters, 
are  nearly  alike. 

We  behaved  ourselves. — So  the  same  word  is  rendered  in 
Auth.  at  1  Tim.  iii.  15.  Here,  "  had  our  conversation,"  following 
Tynd.  and  Vulg.,  conversati  sumus.     Wycl.,  "  we  lived."    The 


II.  CORINTHIANS— II.  321 

cognate  uoun  a.vaffTpo<p-})  is  usually  veuclerecl  "  manner  of  life," 
but  in  Auth.,  "  conversation,"  wliich  is  now  of  more  limited 
meaning. 

12  Glorying.— See  Note  on  1  Cor.  xv.  31. 

17  Did  I  shew  fickleness  ?— Auth.,  "  did  I  use  lightness  ?  "  a 
literal  but  not  idiomatic  rendering  of  the  Gr. 

20  How  many  soever  be  the  promises.— So  Wycl.  Auth., 
"  all  the  promises  of  God  in  him  are  yea."  The  meanhig  is, 
"  however  many  may  be  the  promises  of  God,  in  Him  (in  Christ) 
they  are  affirmed  and  declared,  and  through  Him  they  are  ratified 
and  made  effectual."  Wherefore  also  through  him  is  by 
change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  and  in  him." 

23  I  call  God  for  a  witness— I  invoke  Him  as  a  witness  against 
my  soul  if  I  speak  falsely. — Auth.,  follo^^aug  Tynd.,  "  I  caU 
God  for  a  record,"  as  if  the  word  in  Gr.  were  "testimony,"  not 
the  '■  witness  that  testifies."     Vulg.,  testcm  Deum  invoco. 

I  forbare  to  come— i.e.,  "  I  gave  up  coming."  Literally,  "  I 
came  no  more."  Auth.,  following  Cranm.,  "I  came  not  as  yet," 
after  Beza,  nonclum,  gi'S'ing  to  oi/Kin  a  sense  which  it  never  has. 

24-  Have  lordship  over.— Auth.,  "  have  dominion."  The  Gr.  is 
the  same  in  Luke  xxii.  25,  where  Auth.  has  "  exercise  lordship." 
Compare  also  1  Peter  v.  3. 


CHAPTER  n. 

1  With  sorrow. — Auth.,  "  in  heaviness."  The  Gr.  noim  is  akin 
to  the  verl)  in  the  next  verse,  rendered  "  made  sorry." 

5  Not  to  me — i.e.,  "  not  to  me  alone,  but  in  part,  that  I  press  not 
too  hea^-ily  upon  him,  to  you  all."  By  the  change  in  pmictuation 
of  the  Gr.  text  a  clearer  meaning  is  obtained  than  that  of  Auth., 
"  he  hath  not  grieved  me,  but  in  part ;  that  I  may  not  overcharge 
you  all."  The  rendering  in  the  text  is  that  of  Clirysostom,  Beza, 
Meyer  and  others.     Auth.  follows  Vulg.,  Luther,  &c. 

10  In  the  person. — The  Gr.,  eV  irpoa-wirqi,  may  be  either  "  iu  the 
person  of  Christ,"  representing  Him,  or  "  in  his  presence." 


322  II.  CORINTHIANS— III. 

14  Leadeth  ns  in  triumph.— As  the  Roman  general,  when  he 
was  rewarded  with  the  honour  of  a  triumph,  led  in  procession  the 
captives  taken  in  war  who  had  surrendered  to  him  in  battle.  St. 
Paul  ranks  himself  with  those  whom  his  aU-conquering  Lord 
leads  along,  "  making  a  show  of  them  openly,"  as  it  is  said  in 
Col.  ii.  15.  There  is  no  example  of  epiafifievnv  in  the  sense 
here  given  to  it  in  Auth.  and  Genev.,  "  caiiseth  us  to  triiunph," 
following  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  "giveth  us  the  victory."  But  we 
may  accept  the  interpretation  of  Chrysostom,  "  who  maketh  us  a 
spectacle  to  aU,"  and  consider  that  in  using  this  word  the  Apostle 
was  not  thinking  of  himself  as  a  captive  led  along  by  his  con- 
queror, but  as  one  who  was  brought  before  the  world,  exhibited 
for  the  furtherance  of  the   Gospel.      (So  Field,  Otium  Nor  v. 

p.m.) 

15  That  are  being  saved    .  .  .  that  are  perishing. — The 

Gr.  in  each  case  is  the  present  participle.     Compare  1  Cor.  i,  18; 
Acts  ii.  47. 

16  Prom  death.— By  addition  of  ««  in  Gr.  text  for  "  of  deatli " 
(Auth.) :  an  odour  of  corruption  proceeding  from  the  death  of  sin 
which  has  already  taken  place,  and  which  will  end  in  the  eternal 
death ;  an  odonr  of  sweetness  arising  from  the  new  birth  unto 
righteousness,  which  issues  in  eternal  life. 

17  Corrupting.— Margin,  "  Or,  mahing  merchandise  of."  The 
Gr.,  which  is  used  only  in  this  one  place  of  the  New  Testament, 
means  properly  "to  be  a  retail  dealer,"  and  thence  "to  deal 
fraudulently,"  and  in  an  active  sense,  "  to  adulterate,"  as  here. 
Vulg.,  adulter  antes.  The  same  thought  is  expressed  by  another 
word  (chap.  iv.  2),  "  handling  the  word  of  God  deceitfvdly." 


CHAPTER  III. 


3  Tables  that  are  hearts  of  flesh.— For  Auth.,  "  fleshy  tables 
of  the  heart."  By  change  in  Gr.  text,  KapSiais  for  KapSias, 
"  hearts  "  is  in  apposition  with  "  tables." 

5  To  account  anything  as  from  ourselves — i.e.,  to  account 
any  good  thing  in  us  as  originating  in  ourselves.  Auth.,  "  to 
think  anything  as  of  ourselves."  The  Gr.,  Xoyl^tddai,  here  has 
its  proper  sense  to  "account,"  or  "  reckon." 


II.  CORINTHIANS— III.  323 

6  Suificient  as  ministers. — Autb.,  "  made  us  able  miuisters." 
The  verb  iu  the  Gr.,  rendered  "made  us  sufficient,"  is  cognate  to 
the  adjective  in  the  in'e\'ious  verse,  and  in  chaj).  ii,  16,  "  who  is 

sufficient  for  these  things  ?  " 

A  new  covenant. — The  article  is  not  expressed  nor  implied 
in  the  Gr.  Compare  Jer.  xxxi.  31,  "  Behold,  the  days  come,  saitli 
the  Lord,  that  I  will  make  a  new  covenant  with  the  house  of 
Israel." 

7  Came  with  glory. — Auth.,  "  was  glorious."  Literally,  "  was 
made  to  be."  (See  1  Cor.  xv.  10,  where  the  same  word,  4yiVT)Qr), 
is  rendered  "  was  found.") 

Ziook  stedfastly.— Auth.,  "  stedfastly  behold."  The  word  is 
frequently  used  by  St.  Luke,  especially  in  the  Acts  (compare 
chaps,  iv.  4,  xi.  6),  and  is  there  rendered,  if  as  here  it  is  in  the 
aorist,  "  to  fasten  the  eyes  on."  This  place  and  verse  13  are  the 
only  other  passages  of  the  New  Testament  in  which  it  is  found. 
"  Behold  "  is  the  rendering  of  words  expressing  a  contemplative 
look  or  gaze. 

8  How  shall  not  rather. — The  connection  of  "rather"  is  tliis, 
and  not  as  iu  Auth.,  "  be  rather  glorious." 

14  Were  hardened.— Auth.,  "were  blinded."  Compare  Rom. 
xi.  7,  and  Note  there. 

Unlifted. — Auth.,  following  TjTid.,  "  untaken  away."  The  Gr. 
is,  literally,  "  unveiled,"  as  at  verse  18,  and  is  a  verb  cognate  to 
the  noun  just  above  :  a  different  verb  is  used  in  verse  16. 

16  It  shall  turn — i.e.,  their  heart.  There  is  no  need  to  supply 
"  a  man,"  as  suggested  in  the  Margin. 

18  Reflecting.— Or,  as  Auth.,  "  beholding."  The  Gr.  word  is  not 
used  iu  the  LXX.,  nor  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament. 
"  Reflecting  in  our  hearts  as  in  a  mirror  "  is  the  interpretation 
of  Chrysostom,  Bengel,  and  others ;  and  this  seuse  is  suitable  to 
the  context ;  but  the  A^erb  being  in  the  middle  voice,  its  proper 
meaning  is  not  to  act  as  a  mirror,  to  reflect,  but  to  behold  oneself 
or  another  object  in  a  mirror. 

Transformed.— Auth.,  "  changed."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  iu 
Rom.  xii.  2,  Matt.  xvii.  2. 

Even  as  from  the  Lord  the  Spirit.— Auth.,  "  by  the  Spirit 
of  the  Lord."  The  Gr.  is  ano  ("from"),  not  inro  ("by"),  and 
cannot  be  rendered  "by  the  Spirit  of  the  Loi-d"  (as  Auth.), 
considering  the  order  in  which  the  words  stand,  and  the  absence 
of  the  article. 


324  11.  CORINTHIANS— lY. 


CHAPTER  IV. 


2  The  hidden  things  of  shame— i.e.,  "  tlie  shameful  things 
which  a  luau  hides  iu  his  owu  bosom."  Tyud.,  "  tlie  clokes  of 
dishonesty."  Craum.  aud  Geuev.,  "  the  cloaks  of  shame." 
Aiith.,  "  tlie  hidden  things  of  dishonesty,"  that  word  ha^dng  its 
now  obsolete  sense  of  "shame,"  as  "honest"  was  equivalent  to 
"  honourable." 

3  It  is  veiled  in  them  that  are  perishing.— Auth.,  "  it  is 

hid  to  them  that  are  lost."  The  Apostle  harps  on  the  thoughts 
suggested  by  the  mention  of  the  '"  veil "  in  the  last  chax^ter. 
The  Gospel  is  veiled  "  m  them"  (as  at  chap.  ii.  16),  not  "/o 
them  ;  "  being  in  their  minds  and  understandings,  it  is  yet  veiled 
from  their  hearts  and  affections  by  their  sin ;  in  them,  that  is, 
who  "  are  pei-ishing."  The  present  particij)le  denotes  a  process 
going  on,  not  completed.     (See  Note  on  chap.  ii.  16.) 

4  Should  not  dawn. — Auth.,  "  shine."  The  verb  is  not  used 
again  in  the  New  Testament.  The  kindred  noun  occurs  once 
only  (Acts  xx.  23),  where  it  is  rendered  "  break  of  day."  It 
denotes  the  rapid  transition  from  night  to  day  with  In-ief  interval 
of  t^vilight,  which  takes  j)lace  in  soutlierii  latitudes. 

Light.— The  Gr.,  as  shewn  iu  the  Margin,  properly  means 
"  illumination,"  the  shedtling  of  light  on  that  which  was  in 
darkness. 

6  That  said,  Light  shall  shine.— By  change  in  Gr.  text,  Aa^'f  et 
for  \dij.\pai.  Auth.,  "  who  commanded  the  light  to  shine  out  of 
darkness." 

It  is  God.— The  construction  of  the  Gr.  is  elliptical,  and  may 
be  completed  by  the  addition  of  it  is — &  dehs  [eVrlj/]  6  elirdv  .  .  . 
hs  e\afj.ypev.     So  Tynd.     Auth.,  "  for  God  .  .  .  hath  shiued." 

In  the  face  of  Jesus  Christ.— The  literal  meaning  of 
Trpo(Tci>iTCf>  ('•  face  ")  is  retained,  there  being  an  imphed  comparison 
between  the  glory  of  God  as  shewn  in  the  face  of  Christ,  and 
iu  the  face  of  Moses  (chap.  iii.  7). 

7  Exceeding  greatness. — Auth.,  "  excellency,"  wliich  in  its 
modern  acceptation  denotes  superior  goodness  rather  than  trans- 
cendent greatness,  wliich  is  the  prominent  idea  in  the  Gr. 
virepPo\7]  ("  hyperbole  "). 

8  Pressed  on  every  side,  yet  not  straitened.— Hemmed 
in,  yet  not  cooped  up.  The  metaphor  is  lost  iu  Auth., "  troubled 
on  every  side,  yet  not  distressed." 


11.  CORINTHIANS— V.  325 

9  Pursued,  yet  not  forsaken — i.e.,  pursued  by  euemies,  but 
not  forsaken  (literally,  "not  left  behind")  by  friends.  Autb., 
"  pei'secuted,  but  not  forsaken."  The  Apostle  compares  himself 
in  these  verses  to  a  soldier  on  the  field  of  battle,  hard-pressed, 
wounded,  j)ursued,  yet  still  holding  out,  and  not  cut  off  from  his 
supports. 

14  With  Jesus.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  by  Jesus."  Auth., 
"  with  Jesus,"  i.e.,  to  be  with  Him,  and  in  the  same  condition. 
Compare  1  Thess.  iv.  14,  17. 

15  That  the  grace — i.e.,  "  that  the  grace  of  God,  in  proportion 
as  it  is  multiplied  through  the  many  that  have  received  it,  may 
cause  the  thanksgiving  on  account  of  it  to  abound  the  more  to 
His  glory."  The  construction  of  the  Gr.  is  obscure,  though  the 
meaning  is  clear  enough.  The  verb  thus  has  an  active  sense,  as 
in  chap.  ix.  8.  In  Auth.  it  is  taken  as  a  neuter,  and  in  its 
ordinary  sense,  "redound;"  "That  the  abundant  grace  might 
through  the  thanksgiving  of  many  redound  to  the  glory  of 
God." 

16  Is  decaying. — The  Gr.,  in  the  present  tense,  denotes  the 
progress  of  decay.  Auth.,  "  perish,"  is  suggestive  merely  of 
the  event. 

17  More  and  more  exceedingly.— The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  ac- 
cording to  excess  unto  excess  ;  "  a  Hebraism  like  "  from  grace 
to  grace,"  expressing  the  vastness  or  intensity  of  a  thing  hj  the 
idea  of  accumulation.  Auth.  has  an  adjectival  rendering,  "  far 
more  exceeding." 


CHAPTER  Y. 


The  earthly  house  of  our  tabernacle.  —  Auth.,  "our 
earthly  house  of  this  tabernacle."  Yixlg.,  terrestris  domns 
nostra  liKJus  habitationis.  The  Gr.,  as  nearly  as  it  can  be  given 
in  Engl.,  is  "  our  earthly  tabernacle-dwelling."  The  Mai'gin  has 
"  bodily  frame  "  as  an  alternative  for  "  tabernacle,"  because  the 
Gv.  (T/c^i/os  ("  tent,"  "tabernacle  ")  was  a  term  for  the  human 


326  TI.  CORINTHIANS— V. 

body  used  by  Greek  medical  writers,  as  Hippocrates,  also  by 
philosophers  of  the  Pythagorean  school,  as  Democritus  (Sto- 
bseus,  Florileg.  x.). 

4  What  is  mortal. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "mortality."  Gr., 
rh  dvoT6v,  meaning  not  mortality  as  a  principle,  but  the  mortal 
element  in  our  present  nature.  Vulg.,  qiiod  mortale  fuit. 
"  This  mortal  must  put  on  immortality." 

8  To  be  at  home. — As  Auth.  for  the  same  Gr.  in  verse  6.  This 
very  apposite  phrase  is  due  to  Tynd.  In  the  previous  verse 
Wycl.  lias  "  we  go  in  pilgrimage  from  the  Lord,"  following 
Yulg.,  Dum  sumus  in  corpore,  peregrinamur  a  Domino. 

9  We  m,ake  it  our  aim. — Auth.,  "we  labour."  Gr.,  literally, 
"we  make  it  our  ambition,"  as  in  Rom.  xv.  20. 

10  Must  all  be  made  manifest. — So  Rhem.,  foUoAving  Yulg. 
Auth.,  after  Tynd.,  "  appear."  It  is  not  our  appearance  but  our 
manifestation,  our  exposui'e  of  ourselves  before  the  judgement, 
seat  of  Christ,  which  is  here  spoken  of  ;  as  the  Apostle  has  said 
in  his  former  Epistle  to  the  Corinthians  (chap.  iv.  5),  "  the  Lord 
mil  both  bring  to  light  the  hidden  things  of  darkness,  and  make 
manifest  the  counsel  of  the  hearts."  In  this  second  Epistle, 
(pavepSo},  "  to  manifest,"  is  a  characteristic  word,  being  used,  in 
different  ways,  nine  times. 

11  Xnowiug  therefore  the  fear  of  the  Lord.— This  phrase, 
"  the  fear  of  the  Lord,"  is  many  times  used  by  St.  Paid  in  a  good 
sense,  when  speaking  of  the  reverential  awe  which  is  shewn 
practically  by  obejaug  the  wiU  of  God.  (Compare  chap.  vii.  1 ; 
Rom.  iii.  18,  where  it  is  in  a  quotation  from  the  Old  Testament ; 
Ephes.  V.  21.)  It  is  once  used  in  the  same  sense  by  St.  Luke 
(Acts  ix.  31),  and  not  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament ;  but  it 
occurs  times  wthout  number  in  the  Old  Testament.  In  a  few 
places,  e.g.,  in  Isaiah,  it  signifies  the  active  fear,  the  "terror" 
inspired  by  dread  of  God's  judgements.  Here  Auth.  has  "terror," 
with  Genev.,  following  Beza,  i.e.,  the  dread  of  God's  final  judge- 
ment, of  which  there  is  mention  in  the  previous  verse.  This 
meaning  suits  well  with  the  context,  and  is  adopted  by  Chrysos- 
tom  in  his  exposition  of  this  passage  ;  but  by  retaining  it  (with 
Auth.)  we  should  depart  from  the  literal  rendering  of  the  Gr.,  and 
should  exclude  the  milder  and  more  ordinary  sense  of  the  phrase, 
which  it  has  in  all  other  places  of  the  New  Testament. 

13  Of  sober  mind. — Auth.,  "  sober,"  in  contrast  with  the  derange- 
ment which  was  imputed  to  him.  If  he  went  beyond  bounds  ia 
his  enthusiasm,  it  was  from  zeal  for  God ;  if  he  was  too  modeirate 


II.  CORINTHIANS— V.  327 

and  sober-minded,  it  was  that  he  restrained  himself  in  considera- 
tion for  thera,  for  their  sake. 

15  Who  for  their  sokes. — This  applies  to  both  the  death  and 
the  resurrection  of  Clirist.  Auth.  appears  to  limit  it  to  the  death : 
"unto  him  which  died  for  us  and  rose  again." 

16  We  know  him  so. — So,  i.e.,  "  after  the  flesh."  This,  though 
not  expressed  in  the  Gr.,  may  be  inferred  from  the  former  clause. 
So  Tyud.  Auth.,  "  know  we  him  no  more,"  following  Yulg., 
WycL,  and  Rhem.  St.  Paid  before  his  conversion  had  known 
Christ  only  after  the  flesh,  had  regarded  Him  (whether  or  not  he 
had  seen  Him  in  the  flesh)  as  an  ordinary  human  teacher  whose 
doctrine  was  at  variance  with  Jewish  law  and  custom,  and  was 
by  all  means  to  be  suppressed. 

17  A  new  creature.— See  Margin.  The  Gr.,  Krlffts,  in  its  pri- 
maiy  meaning  is  a  creative  act,  then  a  thing  created. 

They  are  become  new. — "jAll  things  "  (Auth.)  being  omitted 
by  change  in  Gr.  text.  (Compare  Rev.  xxi.  4, 5  ;  also  Matt.  xxiv. 
35,  and  Isa.  xliii.  18,  "  Remember  ye  not  the  former  things," 
&c.,  and  the  same  passage  in  the  LXX.  version.) 

19  Not  reckoning.- So  Wycl.  This  is  the  usual  meaning  of  the 
Gr.,  which  here  and  in  several  passages  is  rendered  "  impute  "  in 
Auth.,  following  Tynd.  and  Vulg.,  reputans. 

20  On  behalf  of  (three  times).— Atith.,  "for— instead  of— for." 
The  Gr.,  uirep,  like  "for"  in  English,  may  have  the  vicarious 
sense,  "  instead  of,"  or  the  tutelary  sense,  "  on  behalf  of,"  "  on 
the  side  of."  In  verse  14,  where  it  is  said  "  Clirist  died  for  all," 
and  verse  21,  "  he  was  made  to  be  sin  for  us,"  it  may  have  either 
meaning,  but  we  cannot  properly  say  that  the  Apostles  were  am- 
bassadors in  the  stead  of  Christ,  for  Christ  himself  pleads  with 
us  by  His  Spirit,  and  His  ministers  in  beseeching  and  pleading 
with  men  work  with  Him  (as  it  is  said  in  chaj).  vi.  1)  and  for  His 
sake.  To  make  this  clear,  "  in  behalf  of  "  has  been  taken  as  the 
rendering  in  both  places. 


328  II.  CORINTHIANS— YI. 


CHAPTER  YI. 


2  An  acceptable  time. — Aiitli.,  "  a  time  accej)tecl."  (Compare 
Liike  iv.  19,  "  to  preach  the  acceptable  time  of  the  Lord.") 

3  Our  ministration. — The  service  with  which  we  are  charged. 
Auth.,  "miuistry."  Yulg.,  ')ninistermm.  Tynd.,  "  our  office." 
The  word  miuistry  had  uot  iu  1611  the  compreheusive  scuse,  iu- 
chidiug  the  j)ersous  as  well  as  the  office  of  Christ's  servauts, 
which  it  has  now  acquired. 

6  In  pureness. — Auth.,  "by  pureness,"  &c.,  the  change  from 
"iu"  to  "by"  being  probably  made  because  the  Apostle  passes 
from  recounting  the  states  of  suffering  and  trial  imposed  upon 
him  to  an  enumeration  of  the  graces  received  from  God,  which 
enable  him  to  supi)ort  Ids  trials.  But  the  word  in  Gr.  is  "  in  " 
throughout,  and  there  appears  no  reason  why  it  should  be  varied 
iu  translation ;  if  he  was  in  the  midst  of  afflictions,  he  was  also 
in  a  state  of  pureness,  knowledge,  and  long-suffering.  Iu  verse? 
the  Gr.  is  changed  from  "  iu  "  to  "by,"  or  "by  means  of"  (5ia) 
and  the  English  is  accordingly  changed  to  "  by." 

8  By  glory  and  dishonour. —  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "by 
houom"  and  dishonour."  The  words  in  Gr.  are  not  correlatives. 
Yulg.,  per  gloriam  et  ignohilitatem,  whence  Wycl.,  "  by  glory 
and  unnobleth." 

12  In  your  own  affections.  —  The  Gr.  crTrKdyxva,  "bowels" 
(Auth.),  is  used  in  this  metai^horical  sense  many  times  by  St. 
Paid,  twice  by  St.  Luke,  and  once  by  St.  John  (in  his  First 
Epistle).  The  kindred  verb  "  to  have  compassion"  occurs  iu  the 
first  three  Gospels  several  times,  and  not  elsewhere  in  the  New 
Testament. 

14  Righteousness  and  iniquity.— Here  also,  as  iu  verse  8,  the 
words  iised  iu  the  antithesis  are  uot  correlatives.  In  the  follow- 
ing verse  the  words  are  correlatives,  "  believer "  and  "  un- 
bc'liever,"  but  are  varied  in  Auth.,  "believer"  and  "infidel," 
following  Yulg.,  quce  pars  fideli  cum  infideli.  "  Infidel "  occurs 
in  Auth.  only  here  and  in  1  Tim.  v.  8 ;  and  it  is  now  in  these 
places  likely  to  mislead,  having  passed  from  the  original  sense  of 
"  unbeliever,"  which  it  has  in  one  of  the  collects  for  Good  Friday, 
to  that  of  "  disbeliever,"  one  who  rejects  the  faith. 


[I.  CORINTHIANS— YTI.  329 


CHAPTER  VII. 


1  Defilement. — The  Gr.  does  not  occur  again  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment. AH  Engl,  versions,  "  filthiness,"  which  is  the  rendering 
of  other  words. 

2  Open  your  hearts  to  us. — Auth.,  "receive  us,"  following 
Genev.  and  Beza,  recipite  nos.  Yulg.,  ccqrite  nos,  whence  Tynd. 
and  Cranm.,  "  understand  us."  The  Gr.  is  literally  "  make  room 
for  us,"  i.e.,  in  your  affections,  of  which  he  had  complained  that 
they  were  closed  to  him  (chap.  vi.  12,  13).     So  Theoj)hylact. 

We  took  advantage  of  no  man.— Auth.,  with  Tynd., 
"  defrauded."  Vulg.,  circumvenimus.  Tliere  is  a  reference 
probably  to  the  charge  which  he  meets  in  chap.  xii.  17,  where 
the  same  word  is  used.  The  Gr.  has  the  notion  of  "  overreach- 
ing "  rather  than  "  defrauding." 

3  To  die  together  and  live  together. — The  Gr.  is  m  a  more 
emphatic  and  proverbial  form  than  Auth.,  "  to  die  and  live 
with  you."  To  be  companions  in  life  and  death  was  with  the 
Greeks  "and  Romans  an  almost  proverbial  expression,  denoting 
inseparable  friendship.     Thus  Horace  says  (Odes  III.  9) ; — 

"  Tecum  vivere  amem,  tecum  obeam  libens." 
("  With  thee  I  could  love  life,  with  thee  could  welcome  death.") 

In  many  nations  it  has  been  not  a  mere  form  of  words,  but  a 
fact,  and  sometimes  imposed  as  a  duty.  (See  A  Lapide's  com- 
mentary on  this  passage.) 

4  I  overflow  with  joy. — Auth.,  "  I  am  exceeding  joyful."  The 
Gr.  is  a  strong  metaphorical  expression,  used  again  in  Rom. 
V.  20,  corresponding  with  that  in  the  previous  clause — "  I  am 
filled  with  comfort,  I  overflow  with  joy  ; "  and  the  two  together 
are  a  characteristic  example  of  St.  Paul's  occasional  bursts  of 
affection. 

5  Relief.— Auth.,  "  rest."     Compare  chap.  ii.  13. 

6  The  lowly.— Auth.,  "  those  that  are  cast  down."  Tynd.  and 
Cranm.,  "  the  abject."  Yulg.,  humiles.  The  same  word  is  used 
in  the  Magnificat  (Luke  i.  52).  The  Apostle  speaks  in  chap. 
X.  1  as  if  it  were  applied  to  himself  by  way  of  reproach. 

7  Your  zeal  for  me.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  your  fervent  mind." 
Yulg.,  emulationem.     Gr.,  (^\ov  {zelon). 

8  With  my  epistle.— Literally,  "  with  the  letter  "  (viz.,  "  which 
I  sent  to  you  ").  All  Engl,  versions,  omitting  the  article,  "  with 
a  letter." 


330  II.  CORINTHIANS— YII. 

I  do  not  regret. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  I  do  not  repent." 
The  Gr.  is  not  so  strong  a  word  as  that  which  is  always  rendered 
"  repent,"  the  cognate  noun  to  which,  "  repentance,"  ex- 
presses in  the  following  verses  the  deejier  sorrow  and  change  of 
mind  of  the  Corinthians.     Wycl.,  "  it  rueth  me  not." 

10  Which  bringeth  no  regret.— Auth.,  "  not  to  be  repented 
of."  The  Gr.  adjective  is  akin  to  the  word  at  verse  8,  where  see 
Note.  It  may  be  connected  either  with  "  repentance  "  or  with 
"  salvation."  The  collocation  is  in  favour  of  the  latter  construc- 
tion ;  the  sense  seems  to  require  the  former,  and  this  has  been 
preferred,  as  is  shown  by  the  insertion  of  "  a  repentance "  m 
italics,  with  the  other  alternative  in  the  Margin. 

Godly  sorrow.— This  phrase  of  the  Auth.,  due  to  Tynd.,  has 
been  retained  as  being  the  same  in  sense  with  the  Gr.  /caro  @e6v, 
and  more  expressive  tliau  the  more  literal  rendering  of  the  Gr., 
"  sorrow  which  is  after  a  godly  sort,"  as  in  verse  9. 

11  What  avenging. — Auth.,  "what  revenge."  Compare  Note 
on  Rom.  xiii.  4.  The  Gr.  signifies  the  proceeding  to  take 
vengeance,  not  the  consummation  of  vengeance  in  retribution. 

Pure. — Auth.,  "  clear."  Gr.,  o7>'oi;s.  The  word  occurs  only  in 
the  Epistles,  and  always  in  this  its  proper  meaning,  "  pure." 

12  That  your  earnest  care  for  us  might  be  made  mani- 
fest unto  you. — By  changes  in  Gr.  text,  supported  by  nearly 
all  the  MSS.,  for  Auth.,  "  that  our  care  for  you  .  .  .  might 
appear  unto  you"  {vnuiv  for  rjtJiuv,  and  ^yucSr  for  vf/.u>v).  The 
meaning  is,  that  he  wrote  as  he  did  in  order  that  their  earnest 
care  for  him  might  be  brought  out  and  made  manifest  to 
themselves. 

Earnest  care.-=-The  Gr.  (tttov^j)  here  and  in  the  last  verse, 
and  in  chap.  viii.  7,  requires  a  stronger  rendering  than  Auth., 
"  care,"  "  carefulness,"  •'  diligence." 

13  We  have  been  comforted:    and  in   our  comfort.    .    . 

— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "we  were  comforted  in 
your  comfort,"  &c. 

15  Is  more  abundantly.— So  Yulg.,  "Wycl.,  and  Rhem.,  the 
adverb  being  repeated  from  verse  13.  Auth.,  "  is  more 
abundant." 

16  I  am  of  good  courage  concerning  you.— This  is  nearer 
to  the  meaning  of  the  Gr.  than  "I  have  confidence  in  you,"  as^ 
Auth.,  following  Yulg.,  confido  in  vobis.  Tynd.  and  Cranm., 
"  I  may  be  bold  over  you." 


II.  CORTNTIIIANS-VIII.  331 


CHAPTER  YIII. 

1  We  make  known  to  you. — This  is  the  ordinaiy  rendering 
of  the  G-r.  Tlie  Auth.  here  has  "  wc  do  you  to  wit,"  following 
Tynd.,  which,  though  pure  English,  and  very  literal  ("  I  make 
you  to  know  "),  is  now  too  antiquated  to  be  generally  under- 
stood. 

Given  in  the  churclies. — More  exact  than  Auth.,  "  bestowed 
on,"  following  Genev.  and  Beza,  prcestitmn  ecclesiis.  So  Acts 
iv.  12,  "  no  other  name  given  among  men."  "  Given  in "  is  a 
pregnant  expression,  denoting  not  only  the  bestowal  of  the  gift 
upon  the  churches,  but  its  working  in  tliem.  (Wordsivorth) .  The 
frequent  use  of  the  preposition  "  in  "  (eV)  is  a  characteristic  of 
St.  Paul's  style,  when  compared  with  that  of  the  other  writers 
of  the  New  Testament. 

2  In  much  proof. — Not  as  Auth.,  "  in  a  great  trial,"  which 
would  point  to  a  definite  occasion  rather  than  a  continuity  of 
trial. 

Liberality.— See  Note  on  Rom.  xii.  8. 

3  They  gave  of  their  own  accord. — This  represents  the  Gr, 
adjective  "  spontaneous,"  which,  standing  by  itself,  requires 
some  such  construction  to  be  supplied.  The  like  may  be  said  of 
other  clauses  in  this  sentence,  rendered  obscure  by  their  concise- 
ness ;  as  if,  in  dictating  to  his  amanuensis,  the  Apostle  delivered 
his  thoughts  without  regard  to  their  grammatical  connection. 

4  The  omission  by  change  in  Gr.  text  of  the  words  "  that  we  would 
receive"  (Auth.)  leaves  the  words  "this  grace"  standing  inde- 
pendently, and  requiinng  to  be  connected  with  the  words  at  the 
beginning  of  the  verse ;  thus — Beseeching  us  with  much 
intreaty  in  regard  of  this  grace. 

7  Earnestness. — Auth.,  "  diligence."     See  Note  on  chap.  vii.  12, 

8  By  way  of  commandment — i.e.,  as  if  I  were  gi^dng  you  a 
command.  Compare  1  Cor.  vii.  6,  and  Note  there.  Auth.,  "  by 
commandment,"  i.e.,  as  if  I  had  received  a  command  from  God 
to  speak  thus. 

But  as  proving  through  .  .  . — The  structure  of  the 
sentence  is  thus  altered  from  Auth.  "  by  occasion  of  .  .  .  and  to 
prove,"  in  order  to  give  to  the  Gr.  uai  its  necessary  meaning 
"  also,"  instead  of  "  and,"  as  in  Auth, 


332  II.  CORINTHIANS— VIII. 

10  Judgement. — Tlie  G-r.  is  a  more  authoritative  word  than 
"advice"  (Aiith.),  indieatiag  not  the  counsel  of  an  equal,  but 
the  decision  of  a  suj)erior.  Comj)are  1  Cor.  vii.  25.  Still  the 
judgement  is  given  as  his  OTvn,  and  not  as  coming  from  God. 

Who  were  the  first  to  make  a  'beginning  —  i.e.,  who 
anticipated  the  movement  made  by  the  Macedonian  Church. 
This  meaning,  thoiigh  not  so  clearly  expressed,  may  be  intended 
by  Aiith.,  "  who  have  begun  before,"  which  would  rather  imply 
that  they  had  once  before  begun,  and  given  up  their  purpose. 

Not  only  to  do  but  also  to  will.  —  They  had  been 
beforehand  with  others,  not  only  in  act,  but  in  pui-pose.  Auth., 
"  not  only  to  do,  but  also  to  be  forward  "  (G-r.,  rb  eeXeiv). 

11  Complete. —  Auth.,  "  perform."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  at 
A'erse  6,  where  Auth.  has  "  finish."  We  speak  of  performing  a 
promise,  but  not  of  performing  a  course  of  action  on  whicli  we 
have  entered. 

Out  of  your  ability. — According  to  your  means;  not,  as 
Auth.,  "  out  of  that  which  ye  have."  Tlie  preposition  here  has 
the  same  force  as  in  John  iii.  3^,  "  He  giveth  not  the  Spirit 
by  measure,"  i.e.,  "  according  to." 

12  If  the  readiness  is  there.— Auth.,  "  if  there  be  first  a 
willing  mind  "  (following  Tynd.).  The  Gr.  noim  has  the  article. 
It  is  expressive,  not  of  the  will  or  purpose,  as  rh  Qixnv  at  verse 
10,  but  of  promptness  and  forwardness.  The  preposition  TTp6, 
"  before,"  which  is  combined  with  the  verb,  shews  presence,  not 
priority,  to  be  the  condition  required. 

13  Distressed — The  Gr.  has  this  meaning,  rather  than  "  bur- 
dened," as  Auth.,  following  Genev.  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  "  brouglit 
into  cumbrance."     Vulg.,  trihulatio. 

17  Very  earnest. — Auth.,  "  more  forward."  The  Gr.  is  literally 
"  more  earnest,"  i.e.,  more  earnest  than  to  need  such  an  exhor- 
tation, "  too  earnest  to  need  it,"  according  to  Engl,  idiom. 
According  to  the  custom  of  the  Ancients  in  letter-wi'iting,  the 
past  tense  (the  aorist)  is  used  of  matters  pending  or  still  future 
at  the  time  the  letter  is  written,  Ijut  expected  to  be  j)ast  events 
at  the  time  when  the  letter  would  be  received.  See  Rom. 
xvi.  22,  &c. 

18  Is  spread. — The  insertion  of  a  word  of  this  meaning  is  reqiured 
by  8ta,  " through,"  which  follows.  Auth.,  "whose  praise  is  in 
the  gospel  throughout  all  the  churches."     Here  the  insertion  of 


IT.  CORINTHIANS— IX.  333 

is  breaks  the  true  connection  of  tlie  words  by  trausferriug  "  in 
the  gosi^el "  from  the  subject  to  the  predicate. 

19  In  the  matter  of  this  grace.— For  Autli.,  "Avith,"  and 
our  readiness  for  "  your,"  by  changes  in  Gr.  text. 

20  Bounty. — Auth.,  "abundance."  Previous  versions,  "plenty," 
or  "plenteous  distribution,"  aiievYwig.,  2>leiMmline.  The  word 
occurs  nowhere  else  hi  the  New  Testament.  In  Gr.  authors  it 
means  "fiduess,"  "largeness,"  and  here  refers  to  the  bounty, for 
which  the  word  "  gi'ace  "  is  used  in  verse  19,  very  much  as  a 
largess  is  a  gift  bestowed  out  of  the  abundance  of  tlie  giver 
(compare  Latin  largior),  and  a  "  bounty  "  is  that  which  is  given 
out  of  goodness  of  heart  {honitas). 

21  For   we   take    thought   for  things   honourable.  —  By 

change  in  Gr.  text  (the  verb  for  the  participle).  TJie  Apostle  is 
not  merely  describing  his  conduct,  but  resting  it  on  a  general 
rule  derived  from  Prov.  iii.  4  (LXX.  version).  The  same  pre- 
cept is  laid  down  by  him  in  Rom.  xii.  17,  where  see  Note  on 
honourable  for  "  honest." 


CHAPTER  IX. 


Hath  been  prepared.—  So  Tynd.  and  Yulg.,  parata  est. 
Auth.,  "  was  ready,"  the  rendering  adopted  for  another  word  in 
the  last  chapter,  and  indicating  a  state  of  mind,  not,  as  the  Gr.  is 
in  this  place,  a  process  of  preparation  {■Kapea-Kivaarai,  the  perfect 
tense).  In  verse  4,  where  the  Gr.  is  a  cognate  word,  the  Auth., 
for  the  sake  of  variation,  has  "unprepared,"  though  Wycl.  and 
Rhem.,  wliich  it  follows  here,  have  "imready,"  a  good  Shak- 
spearian  word. 

Hath  stirred  up  very  many.— So  Wycl.,  "  hath  stirred  full 
many."  All  other  versions,  "  hath  provoked,"  following  Yulg., 
provocavit.  The  English  word,  like  the  Latin,  from  which  it  is 
derived,  may  formerly  have  denoted  a  friendly  rather  than  an 
angry  incitement ;  and  it  may  still  bear  the  more  favourable 
sense,  when  the  context  helps  it,  as  in  Heb.  x.  24,  "  to  provoke 
unto  love  and  good  works."  At  Col.  iii.  21,  to  preclude  the 
favourable  sense,  the  words  "  to  anger  "  are  inserted  in  Auth.,  but 
any  such  words  are  now  unnecessary,  the  unfavourable  sense 


334  II.  CORINTHIANS— IX. 

being  presumed ;  and  in  modem  usage,  if  a  person  "  provokes  " 
another,  the  word  is  suggestive  of  an  irascible  temper  on  the  one 
side  or  the  other. 

4  Be  put  to  shame.— Auth.,  "be  ashamed."  Compare  chap, 
vii.  14 ;  and  1  Cor.  xi.  22.  The  word  is  always  used  in  an  active 
or  passive  sense,  but  not  as  expressive  of  the  feeling  of  shame, 
"  the  being  ashamed." 

6  Your  aforepromised  bounty.— Auth.  (alone),  "whereof  ye 
had  notice  before."  They  had  promised  it,  and  St.  Paul  had 
announced  it  to  the  Churches  of  Macedonia  (verse  2).  The 
Apostle  here  repeats  the  Gr.  irpS,  "before,"  "beforehand,"  as  if 
in  emphatic  approval  of  the  forwardness  which  they  had  shown. 

Bounty. — Margin,  "  Gr.,  blessing."  The  word  €v\oy[a  (eulogy) 
is  not  again  used  in  the  New  Testament  for  a  gift  or  benefaction, 
but  frequently  occurs  in  that  sense  in  the  Old  Testament  (LXX. 
version),  as  Gen.  xxxiii.  11,  "  Receive  my  gifts,"  a  gift  being 
the  outward  aud  A'isible  sign  of  a  blessing  conferred,  as  well 
as  of  the  benevolence  prompting  the  gift.  The  use  of  this 
word  introduces  the  fresh  turn  which  the  Apostle  now  gives  to 
his  exhortation. 

Not  of  extortion.— That  it  be  ready  as  a  free  gift,  aud  not  as 
a  thing  extorted  from  you  by  us.,  and  given  gi'udgingly. 

9  Scattered  abroad.  —  All  Engl,  versions,  "  dispersed "  or 
"  sparsed."  Vulg.,  dispersit.  The  Gr.  is  properly  "  to  scatter 
seed,"  thus  keeping  up  the  meta]>hor  of  the  sower  in  verse  6;  but 
modern  usage  has  overlaid  aud  obscured  this  metaphorical 
meaning  of  "  disperse,"  and  in  the  matter  of  almsgiving  has 
substituted  "  dispense."  In  the  Bible  (Auth.  Version)  ''  dis- 
perse" and  "dispersion  "  are  not  elsewhere  used  except  in  refe- 
rence to  men,  particularly  to  the  Jews  "  of  the  dispersion." 

10  SuppHeth. — Auth.,  "  ministereth,"  a  word  applicable  to  the 
work  of  a  subordinate,  and,  therefore,  not  to  God,  who  is  here 
the  subject.  Nor  does  it  express  the  Gr.,  which  properly  denotes, 
as  used  by  classical  authors,  an  act  of  public  uiunificeucey  prima- 
rily that  of  pajdng  the  expense  incurred  in  bringing  out  a  drama 
on  the  stage.  It  is  used  by  St.  Paul  (Gal.  iii.  5  ;  Col.  ii.  19)  aud 
by  St.  Peter  (II.,  i.  5,  11),  j)ossibly  derived  by  him  from  St.  Paid. 

And  bread  for  food.— By  change  in  Gr.  text. 

Seed  for  sowing. — Auth.,  "your  seed  so^ti."  The  Gr.  is  not 
the  word  which  is  rendered  "  seed  "  just  above,  and  means  pro- 
perly "  the  act  of  sowing,"  in  whicli  sense  it  is  used  in  Exod.  xxxiv. 


II.  CORINTHIANS— IX.  335 

21  (LXX.  version) ;  in  its  secomlary  meaning  it  is  "  the  seed 
sown,"  and  is  so  used  in  the  Gospels  of  St.  Mark  and  St.  Lnke  ; 
but  it  does  not  occur  again  in  the  Epistles.  St.  Paul  here 
departs  from  his  usual  practice,  and  prefers  variety  to  reiteration 
of  the  same  word. 

11  Te  being  enriched.— In  the  Auth.  verses  9  and  10  are  in- 
cluded in  a  parenthesis,  and  "being  enriched"  is  connected  with 
"ye,  always  haA-ing,"  &c.,  in  verse  8  ;  but  the  more  prolmble  con- 
struction is  that  of  the  participle  in  the  nominative  (called  by 
grammarians  the  nominativus  pendens),  used  as  the  commence- 
ment of  an  independent  and  additional  clause,  for  "  and  ye  sliall 
be  enriched." 

Liberality. — See  Note  on  Rom.  xii.  8. 

12  Filleth  np  the  measure  of  the  wants.— Auth.,  with  Tynd., 
"  supplieth  the  wants."  Vulg.,  supplet.  Wycl.,  "  filleth  those 
things  that  fail."  The  Gr.  means  literally,  "  filleth  up  by  addi- 
tion." 

13  Through  the  proving  of  you  by   this  ministration.— 

i.e.,  by  means  of  the  proof  to  which  you  ai-e  put  by  this 
ministration  testing  you.  Auth.,  "  by  the  experiment  of  this 
ministration,"  following  Genev. 

For  the  obedience  of  your  confession.— So  Rhem.    Auth., 

"for  your  professed  .subjection."  Beza,  de  vestrci  testatd  suh- 
jectione,  taking  the  two  nouns  of  the  Gr.  as  equivalent  to  an  ad- 
jective and  noun.  This  obscure  phrase  may  be  paraphrased  thus: 
"  your  obedience  in  conformity  with  your  confession  of  faith  in 
the  Gospel." 

Contribution. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "distribution."  The 
Gr.  is  literally  "  communication,"  Koivoivla. 

14  While  they  themselves  also,  with  supplication  on 
your  behalf,  long  after  you.— The  clause  is  thus  made  in- 
dei)endent  in  its  structure  like  verse  11  (see  Note) ;  and  tliis 
seems  the  simplest  way  of  unravelling  the  intricate  constniction 
of  the  Gr.  The  Auth.  makes  it  depend  on  the  words  in  the  pre- 
ceding verse,  "  glorify  God, ...  by  their  prayer  for  you  {i.e.,  by 
the  prayer  made  for  you  by  those)  which  long  after  you." 


336  II.  CORINTHIANS— X. 


CHAPTER  X. 


1  In  your  presence. — Literally,  "  before  your  face,"  as  iu  Acta 
iii.  13,  in  contrast  to  "  being  absent/'  Auth.,  "  in  presence," 
with  Margin,  "  Or,  in  outward  appearance"  as  if  with  refei-euce 
to  his  personal  stature. 

Iiowly. — Aiith.,  "  base,"  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  "  of  no  reputa- 
tion."    (Compare  chap.  vii.  6,  and  Note  there.) 

4  Of  the  flesh. — Auth.,  "  carnal,"  does  not  keep  up  the  emphatic 
reiteration  of  the  Gr.  in  verses  2  and  3,  and  uses  an  adjective  of 
Latin  derivation,  and  always  bearing  a  bad  sense,  which  is  not 
necessarily  implied  by  Kara  cdpKa. 

Mighty  before  God. — Exceeding  mighty.  A  Hebraic  form 
of  hyperbole.  (Compare  Acts  A-ii.  20.)  Moses  was  "  fair  unto 
God."     Auth.,  "  mighty  tlu'ough  God." 

6  Being  in  readiness. — Auth.,  "  haA-ing  in  a  readiness,"  as 
Yulg.,  followed  by  Rhem.,  in  liromptu  habentes,  a  plirase  which 
very  literally  represents  the  Gr.,  but  if  it  was  ever  in  accordance 
with  English  idiom,  tlms  to  use  "  to  have  "  for  "to  be"  is  now 
archaic  and  uncouth.  Auth.  also  has  "  revenge  "  where  modern 
idiom  requires  "  avenge."  (Compare  chap  vii.  11,  and  Note  on 
Rom.  xiii.  4.) 

7  Before  your  face. — Auth.,  "  after  the  outward  appearance." 
The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  verse  1.  The  sentence  may  be  cither 
indicative  or  interrogative ;  and  where  there  is  nothing  absolutely 
decisive  in  the  context  the  indicative  is  the  more  probable.  In 
Vulg.,Wycl.,  and  Rhem.  it  is  taken  imperatively  :  but  as  a  com- 
mand it  is  not  veiy  intelligible. 

Let  him  consider  this  again  with  himself.— So  Rhem. 
Literally,  "from  himself,"  i.e.,  as  a  thing  which  -will  occur  to 
him  on  refiectiou,  without  suggestion  fi'om  without. 

8  Not  for  casting  you  down. —  He  recurs  to  the  metaphor 
which  he  uses  in  verses  4  and  5.  AU  Engl,  versions,  follo-vviug 
Vulg.,  have  "  for  your  destruction,"  or  "  to  destroy  you."  In 
verses  4  and  5  Vulg.  has  destructionem  (which  j)roperly  means 
"pulling  doAATi,"  "demolition"),  but  is  not  there  followed  by 
Tjaid. 

10  Of  no  account.  —  Auth.,  "  contemptible,"  following  Yulg., 
Wycl.,  and  Rhem.  :  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  "  rude."  Genev.,  "  of 
no  value."  (Comp.  1  Cor.  vi.  4,  where  the  word  is  used  in  the 
same  sense.) 


II.  CORINTHIANS— X.  337 

12  To  number  or  compare  ourselves.— Tlie  play  on  words 
in  the  Gr.  cannot  be  reproduced  in  English.  A  more  exact 
rendering  is  given  in  the  Margin. 

Are  without  understanding.  —  So  Tynd.,  "  understand 
nought."  Autli.,  "  are  not  wise,"  a  milder  phrase  than  that  of 
the  original. 

13  We  will  not  glory  beyond  our  measure.— Literally,  "  we 
will  not  glory  unto  the  things  without  measure."  Auth.,  "  we 
will  not  boast  of  things  without  our  measure." 

But  according  to  the  measure  of  the  province.— The 

word  rendered  "  province,"  Kav6v,  canon,  means  properly  a  mea- 
suring-rod (the  Latin  canna,  "a  cane,"  is  from  the  same  root), 
and  thence  a  "  rule,"  as  Auth.  here,  and  in  that  sense  it  occui's  in 
Gal.  vi.  16.  In  a  secondary  sense,  applicable  here,  it  means  the 
line  or  direction  assigned  to  a  person  as  his  proper  sphere  or 
province. 

Which  God  apportioned  to  us.  —  Auth.,  "  distributed." 
The  Gr.  is  literally,  "allotted  as  our  share." 

As  a  measure,  to  reach  even  unto  you — i.e,  as  a  measure, 
thereby  empowering  us  to  extend  our  work  of  preaching  the 
Gospel  as  far  as  to  you. 

15  In  other  men's  labours — i.e.,  "  regarding  them  as  the  sphere 
wherein  my  boasting  lies."  So  Yulg.,  Wycl.,  Tynd.,  and  Cranm. 
Auth.,  following  Genev., "  of  other  men's  labours."  The  difference 
is  considerable.  The  Apostle  says  he  does  not  glory  in  other 
men's  labours,  i.e.,  in  occupying  the  field  on  which  they  have 
laboured,  and  reaj)ing  where  they  have  sown.  To  boast  "  of  their 
labours  "  (as  Auth.)  would  mean  to  boast  of  them  as  if  they  were 
his  own. 

Magnified. — So  all  Engl,  versions  before  Auth.,  which  has 
"enlarged."  The  Gr.  is  literally,  " made  great."  "Enlarged" 
is  equivalent  to  "  made  greater,"  and  is  used  for  a  different 
Gr.  in  chap.  vi.  11:  "Our  heart  is  enlarged j"  literally, 
"  widened." 


338  II.  CORINTHIANS— XI. 


CHAPTER  XI. 

1  In  a  little  foolishness.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth 
"  a  little  in  my  folly." 

Nay  indeed  bear  with  me. — The  imperative  is  preferable 
to  the  indicative  (see  Margin),  both  on  account  of  the  following 
verse,  and  because  it  is  used  in  verse  16,  where  the  same 
thought  is  resumed :  "If  ye  do  think  me  foolish,  yet  as  foolish 
receive  me." 

3  In  his  craftiness. — Auth.,  "  subtilty."  The  Gr.  is  the  same 
as  in  1  Cor.  iii.  19,  and  not  that  which  is  rendered  by  "  sxibtilty  " 
in  Matt.  xxvi.  4  and  in  Gen.  iii.  1  (LXX.  version). 

And  the  purity. — Added  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

That  is  toward  Christ. — The  single-mindedness  and  purity 
which  is  devoted  to  Christ,  and  looks  toward  Him  only.  The 
Gr.  is  els,  not  eV.  All  Engl,  versions,  following  Vulg.,  have 
"  in  Christ." 

5  The  very  chiefest. — Marg.,  "  Or,  tlwse  pre-eminent  apostles  " 
(in  an  ironical  sense).  In  his  former  Epistle  he  describes 
himself  as  "the  least  of  the  apostles"  (1  Cor.  xv.  9),  and  may 
be  here  also  ^vriting  in  a  tone  of  humility  with  regard  to  others 
whom  he  thought  his  suixn-iors.  So  the  phrase,  which  occurs 
again  at  chap.  xii.  11,  was  understood  by  the  early  expositors,  e.g., 
by  Chrysostom  ;  and  so  it  is  rendered  in  the  Vulg.  and  all  Engl, 
versions.  But  being  a  strong  hyperbole,  it  may  have  been  said 
in  irony,  with  pointed  reference  to  the  false  teachers  of  whom  he 
is  speaking — "  those  superlative,  pre-eminent  apostles ;  "  and  so 
it  is  understood  by  many  recent  commentators.  In  like  manner, 
mention  is  made  in  the  Apocalypse  of  those  "  who  call  them- 
selves apostles,  and  are  not  "  (Rev.  ii.  2). 

6  We  have  made  it  manifest. — It,  i.e.,  "  the  Gospel  which  we 
preach."  By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "we  have  been  made 
manifest." 

To  you-ward — i.e.,  "with  a  view  t'o  your  benefit."  Auth., 
"  among  you."     The  Gr.  preposition  is  ds,  not  eV.' 

7  Por  nought. — "  Without  cost  to  you."  This"  sense  is  not 
clearly  expressed  by  Auth.,  following  all  previous  versions, 
"  freely,"  which  might  mean  "  with  freedom  of  speech,"  or 
"  abundantly."     Vulg.,  gratis. 


II.  CORINTHIANS— XT.  339 

9  Supplied  the  measure.— The  Gr.  is  the  same  long  com- 
pound word  as  in  chap.  ix.  12. 

14  Fashioneth  himself.— Auth.,  "  is  transformed,"  making  the 
verb  passive,  though  the  participle  in  verse  13  is  rightly  treated 
as  of  the  middle  voice.  Tlie  change  here  described  comes  not 
from  without,  but  is  wrouglit  by  the  guile  and  cunning  that  are 
within.  See  Note  on  Rom.  xii.  11,  where  "  fashioned  "  is  the 
rendering  of  a  word  cognate  to  tlie  Gr.  of  this  place. 

17  As  in  foolishness.— "  As  a  fool  speaks  in  his  foolishness." 
Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  as  it  were  foolishly."  Wycl.,  "  as  in  un- 
wisdom." It  is  best  to  keej)  the  word  which  is  emphatically 
repeated  by  the  Apostle. 

20  If  he  taketh  you  captive. — Auth.,  "  if  a  man  take  of  you," 
beina'  probably  led  to  make  the  insertion  of  you  by  Genev., 
"if  a  man  take  your  goods."  That  7jou  is  to  be  supphed  with 
"  taketh  "  is  plain  from  the  preceding  clauses  with  which  this  is 
connected;  and  that  "taketh"  {Aafijidyei)  here  means  "  taketh 
captive,"  or  "  catcheth,"  may  be  inferred  from  the  similar  use  of 
the  same  word  in  chap.  xii.  16,  "  I  caught  you  with  gixile."  See 
also  Lxike  v.  5. 

21  I  speak  by  way  of  disparagement— i.e.,  disparaging 
myself;  "  you  will  bear  great  indignities  from  others,  while  you 
will  put  up  with  nothing  from  me,  as  if  I  were  weak,  and  not  to 
be  had  in  any  respect."  The  irony  of  the  Apostle,  which  has 
been  strongly  shewn  in  this  chapter,  here  reaches  its  climax. 

23  I  speak  as  one  beside  himself. — Auth.,  "I  speak  as  a 
fool."  The  word  in  the  Gr.  is  here  varied,  as  though  his 
"  foolishness  "  were  passing  into  aberration  of  mind. 

More  abundantly. — Auth.,  "more  abundant,"  &c.  The 
words  in  Gr.  are  adverbs  throughout,  not  adjectives. 

26  In  perils  of  rivers.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  of  waters."  Vulg., 
following  the  Gr.,  h^s  fluminum. 

From  my  countrymen. — The  Gr.  is  literally,  "in  perils 
from  race  " — a  singular  expression,  though  there  is  no  doubt  as 
to  its  meaning. 

27  In  labour  and  travail.— So  Tynd.  and  Cranm.  here,  and 
Auth.  also  in  2  Tliess.  ii.  8,  where  the  Gr.  is  the  same ;  but  here 
Auth.,  following  Genev.,  has  "in  weariness  and  painfulness,'" 
without  any  apparent  reason,  as  the  words  denote  the  toil,  and 
not  the  weariness  that  follows,  nor  the  ii-ksomeness  which  may 
accompany  it. 


340  IT.  CORINTHIANS— XII. 

28  Anxiety. — A  more  oppressive  pre-occitpation  of  the  mind  than 
"  care  "  (Auth.).  The  Gr.  is  aMn  to  that  which  is  rendered  "  be 
not  anxious  "  (Matt.  "vi.  25). 

32  Guarded.— Wycl.,  "  kept."  Tynd.,  "  laid  watch  in  the  city." 
Yiilg.,  custodiebat.  Auth.,  "  kept  with  a  garrison,"  whicli  would 
imply  that  the  whole  garrison  were  out  on  the  watch  for  him, 
whereas  the  Gr.  only  signifies  that  good  watch  was  kept  at  the 
gates  of  the  city. 

33  Through  a  window  was  I  let  down  in  a  basket  by 

the  wall.— Rather  more  j)erspicuous  than  "  through  a  window 
in  a  basket  was  I  let  down  by  the  wall  "  (Auth.). 


CHAPTER  XII. 

1  A  considerable  change  is  here  made  in  the  sense  by  a  slight 
change  in  the  reading  (5er  for  5?'))— "I  must  needs  glory, 
though  it  is  not  expedient." 

5  Weaknesses. — Here  and  elsewhere  in  this  chapter  for  Auth. 
"infirmities."  The  plural  of  " weakness "  appears  not  to  have 
been  in  use  so  early  as  1611. 

7  The  introduction  of  "  wherefoi-e,"  consequent  on  change  in  Gr. 
text,  causes  a  dislocation  of  the  sentence,  which  is  indicated  in 
printing  by  a  break. 

Exceeding  greatness. — Not  "  abundance,"  as  Auth.,  follow- 
ing  Tynd.     Vulg.,  magnitudo.     Compare  chap.  iv.  7. 

A  thorn  in  the  flesh.— Margin,  "  Or,  stake.''  The  Gr. 
ffK6xoy\j  is  in  the  Old  Testament  (LXX.  version)  "  a  thorn,"  as  in 
Num.  xxxiii.  55,  where  it  has,  as  in  this  passage,  a  figurative 
sense :  "  The  inhabitants  of  the  land  shall  be  thorns  in  your 
sides."  See  also  Ezek.  xxviii.  34 ;  Hosea  ii.  6.  In  Greek  authors 
generally  it  is  "  a  stake."  The  sense  here  may  be  taken  to  be 
ruled  by  the  usage  of  the  LXX. 

10  Injuries. — Auth.,  "  reproaches."     Compai-e  Acts  xxvii.  10,  21, 
The  Gr.  properly  means  injuiy  accompanied  with  insult. 

11  The  very  chiefest.— See  above  on  chap.  xi.  5. 


II.  CORINTHIANS— XIII.  341 

15  If  I  love  you  .  .  . — This  scnteuce  lias  taken  a  hypotlie- 
tical  and  iuteiTogative  form,  in  consequence  of  a  change  in  the 
Gr.  text. 

17  Bid  I  take  advantage  of  you  ?— Auth.,  "  did  I  make  a 
gain  of  you  ?  "  See  chap.  ii.  11,  and  Note  on  chap.  vii.  2. 
Tyiid.,  "  did  I  piH  you  ?  " 

19  AH  this  time.— For  "again"  (Auth.),  by  change  in  Gr.  text, 
■n-dxai.  for  -n-dxtv.  With  this  alteration  the  sentence  is  better  read 
as  an  assertion  than  as  a  question.     (See  Margin.) 

20  Strife— Auth.,  "  debates."     The  Gr.  is  ^pis. 
Factions.— Auth.,  "  strifes."     See  Note  on  Rom.  ii.  8. 

21  Have  sinned  heretofore.— As  Auth.  in  chap.  xiii.  2. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 


2  I  do  say  beforehand.— Auth.,  "  foretell  you,"  an  archaism. 

"  I  ^vl■ite." — (Auth.)  Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text.  With  this 
omission  the  sentence  admits  of  the  two  constructions,  not  very 
dissimilar  in  meaning,  which  are  given  in  the  text  and  Margin. 
The  Aiith.,  as  pointed  in  1611,  had  "as  if  I  were  present  the 
second  time,"  without  the  comma  after  "  present ;  "  in  that 
respect  following  Genev.,  which  has  "  as  when  I  was  present  the 
second  time." 

4)  For  he  was  crucified  .  .  . — "Though"  (Auth.)  is  omitted 
by  change  in  Gr.  text.  We  have  thus  the  dii'ect  and  miqualified 
declaration  of  the  Apostle,  that  Christ  suffered  in  human  weak- 
ness, and  as  an  example  to  us  in  our  weakness ;  and  that  we 
"  are  weak  in  Him,"  we  share  in  His  human  weakness,  that  we 
may  also  "  live  with  Him." 

9  Your  perfecting.  —  Auth.,  "  your  perfection,"  The  Gr. 
signifies  the  process  of  attaining  perfection,  not  the  end  which 
is  to  be  attained ;  as  also  do  the  words  in  verse  11,  be 
perfected,  be  comforted,  not  as  in  Auth.,  "be  perfect,  be 
of  good  comfort." 

14  "  Amen."— (Auth.)     Omitted  iu  almost  all  the  chief  MSS. 


THE   EPISTLE   OF   PAUL   TO   THE 

GALATIANS. 

CHAPTER  L 

1  Not  from  men  as  the  first  caiise  {a-n-o),  nor  through  man 

as  the  secondary  or  iustriuneutal  cause  {Sid),  but  through 
Jesus  Christ  and  God  the  Father  (5ia).  —  The  iustru- 
meutal  sense  of  the  prejiosition  5id  is  thus  applied  to  God  tlie 
Father  as  well  as  to  His  Son  Jesus  Chi-ist.  Compare  1  Cor.  i.  9, 
"  God  is  faithful,  through  whom  ye  were  called ;  "  and  it  may  be 
truly  said  that  God  is  the  secondary  as  well  as  the  primary  cause 
of  all  tilings,  for  no  secondary  cause  exists  but  by  Him,  as  the 
Apostle  says  (Rom.  xi.  36),  "  Of  Him,  and  through  Him,  and 
imto  Him  are  all  things."  All  Engl,  versions  here  have  "  not  of 
man,  neither  by  man,  but  by  Jesus  Christ." 

5  Our  God  and  Father.— So  Rhem. :  Tynd.,"  God  our  Father." 
Auth.,  "  God  and  our  Father."  The  same  phrase  occurs  in  Phil. 
iv.  20.  It  has  been  a  question  in  ancient  as  in  modern  times 
whether  "  our  "  applies  to  both  Names,  or  only  to  the  latter  (as 
Tynd.),  but  the  separation  of  the  two  Names  (as  in  Auth.)  is  ob- 
jectionable, both  in  grammar  and  meaning. 

6  Removing.— Auth.,  "  removed."  The  verb  is  in  the  present 
tense. 

In  the  grace  .  .  .  unto. — Auth., "  into  the  grace  .  .  . 
unto,"  which  confuses  the  sense,  and  does  not  express  the  Gr,  eV. 

A  different  Gospel;  which  is  not  another  GospeJ. — 
Auth.,  "  another  Gospel  which  is  not  another."  The  Gr.  has  two 
words,  the  former  denoting  difference  in  kind  {frepov),  the  latter 
simply  "  another."  Inversely  we  should  say  St.  Mark's  Gospel 
is  "  another "  history,  but  not  "  a  different "  one  from  St. 
Matthew's. 


GALATIANS— I.  343 

7  Only  there  are  some.— Autli.,  "  but  there  are  some."  Tyiul., 
"  but  that  there  are  some."  Gr.,  ei  /j-v  Tivis  dcnv  .  .  .  He 
is  assigning  the  only  reason  which  he  can  see  for  that  at  which 
he  "  marvels  "  iu  verse  6. 

8  Any  Gospel  other  than  that  — i.e.,  "at  variance  with." 
Gr.,  irap' '6.  Auth.,  "any  other  Gospel  than  that."  Genev., 
"  otherwise  than." 

Anathema. — Auth.,  "accursed."     See  Note  on  Rom.  ix. 3. 

11  I  make  known  to  you.— So  Wycl.  Aixth.,  with  Tyncl.,  "I 
certify  you."  Rhem.,  "  I  do  you  to  understand."  Compare 
2  Cor.  -saii.  1.  The  word  is  frequently  used  by  St.  Paul  to  in- 
troduce a  statement  of  special  solemnity. 

13  Made  havoc  of  it. — Auth.,  "wasted  it."  The  word  is  so 
translated  in  Acts  ix.  21.     Compare  verse  23  of  this  chapter. 

14  I  advanced. — Auth.,  "  I  profited,"  with  Wycl.,  Genev.,  and 
Rhem.,  following  the  Vulg.,  projiciebam,  which  in  Latin  is  a 
good  rendering.  Tyud.  and  Oranm.,  "I  prevailed."  The  Gr.  is 
properly  "to  get  on,"  "to  make  progress,"  and  is  used  iu  Luke 
ii.  52  ;    Rom.  xiii.  22. 

Many  of  mine  own  age. — So  Wycl.,  rightly  following  Yulg., 
cocetaneos  meos.  Tynd.,  "  my  companions."  Auth.,  following 
Rhem.,  "  my  equals,"  with  Margin,  "  Gr.,  equals  in  age." 

15  Separated  me,  even  from- my  mother's  womb.—  "Set  me 
apai-t  for  his  service,  even  from  my  birth."  Compare  for  this 
phrase  Acts  iii.  2.  All  English  versions,  "  separated  me  from 
my  mother's  womb." 

18  To  visit. — The  Gr.  is  used  in  this  sense  in  later  Gr.  authors. 
All  Engl,  vei'sious,  "  to  see,"  follo\viug  Vulg.,  viclere. 

19  Save  James. — Meaning  that  James  was  the  only  Apostle 
whom  he  saw,  as  Crisjius  and  Gains  were  the  only  persons  whom 
he  baptized  at  Corinth  (1  Coi'.  i.  14).  Gr.,  ovS4va  el  fx-f}.  The 
alternative  iu  the  Margin,  "  but  ouly,"  assumes  that  James  the 
Lord's  brother  was  not  an  Apostle  j  but  et  jH^  does  not  fairly 
admit  of  this  translation. 


3U  GALATIANS— II. 


CHAPTER  II. 


1  After  the  space  of.— The  alternative,  "  iu  the  course  of," 
has  been  admitted  in  the  Mai-gin  on  account  of  the  chronological 
difficulties  of  the  passage,  and  as  being  consistent  with  the  use 
of  the  preposition. 

2  Laid  before  them.—  Auth.,  "  communicated  unto  them.' 
The  same  word  occurs  in  Acts  xxv.  14.  "  Communicate"  is  appro- 
priated in  the  New  Testament  to  another  Gr.  word. 

3  Not  even  Titus — i.e.,  though  he,  if  any  one,  from  his  being 
closely  associated  with  me  (verse  1),  might  have  been  thought 
likely  to  receive  circumcision.  Auth.,  "  neither,"  which  has  no 
correlative  in  the  sentence  ;  and  so  in  chap.  vi.  13. 

4  And  that  because. — Margin,  "Or,  hutitwashecause.'^  Tlie 
sentence  is  incomplete  and  obscure.  Taking  the  text,  the  reason 
is  given  why  Titus  was  not  circumcised,  because  there  were  false 
brethren  who  wished  it,  that  so  they  might  have  ground  for 

•  charging  the  Apostle  with  inconsistency.  The  Margin  gives  this 
meaning,  "  but  I  was  advised  by  my  friends  to  circumcise  him,  be- 
cause of  the  false  brethren,  Judaising  Christians,  who  were 
making  a  clamour  against  me,  as  being  unfaithful  to  the  law  of 
Moses." 

6  Who  were  reputed.— Auth.,  "  who  seemed."  The Grr.  admits 
of  either  rendering;  but  the  latter  implies  outward  seeming, 
which  is  not  here  approj)riate. 

Imparted. — Auth.,  "iu  conference  added,"  probably  an  incor- 
rect rendering  of  Yulg.,  contiderunt. 

8  He  that  wrought  for  Peter.  —  Auth.,  "he  that  wrought 
effectually  in  Peter."  If  this  had  been  the  meaning,  the  prepo- 
sition (v,  "  in,"  would  have  followed  the  verb,  as  iu  Eph.  ii.  2. 
"  Wrought  effectually"  and  "  was  mighty"  are  different  render- 
ings in  Auth.  for  this  word,  which  in  each  case  is  sufficiently  ex- 
pressed by  "  wrought."     See  Note  on  1  Cor.  xii.  6. 

11  He  stood  condemned. — The  Gr.,  KanyvaxTfjLivos  ?iv,  requires 
a  stronger  word  than  "he  was  to  be  blamed,"  as  Auth.,  following 
Tynd.  and  Yiilg.,  repreliensibilis,  by  which  the  phrase  is  softened, 
perhaps  from  a  pious  unwillingness  to  recognise  a  grievous  fault 
in  St.  Peter.  The  old  Latin  version,  however,  did  not  shrink 
from  reprehensus.  Tlie  Gr.  may  be  interpreted  to  mean,  not 
that  any  formal  judgement  liad  been  passed  upon  him,  but  that 
his  conduct  was  "  condemned  "  by  the  outspoken  censure  of  the 


GALATIANS— III.  345 

Christian  community  at  Antiocb.  Dr.  Fiold  [Otium  Norvic),  on 
behalf  of  Aiith.  and  Yulg.,  compares  evKoyrnxevos  for  ev\o-yr]T6s,  and 
e$Se\vyiJLeuos  for  fide\vKT6s  (Rev.  xxi.  8) ;  but  see,  per  contra, 
"Winer's  Gh'ammar,  §  46,  8,  and  Bishop  Ellicott's  Commentary  on 
this  passage. 

Cephas,  by  change  of  Gr.  text  for  "Peter"  (Auth.),  is  the 
reading  here  and  in  verse  14,  as  in  verse  9  (Auth.). 

16  Save  through  faith— i.e.,  except  (tav  fj.ri)  in  the  sense  in 
which  it  may  be  said  that  he  is  justified  through  faith,  working, 
doing  the  woi'ks  of  the  law,  "by  love."  All  Engl,  versions,  "but 
by  the  faith,"  which  gives  a  more  unqualified  negative  to  the 
idea  of  justification  by  the  works  of  the  law  than  is  contained  in 
iay  fM7^.     See  Note  on  chap.  i.  19. 

18  Prove  myself  a  transgressor.—"!  set  myself  forth"  as 
such;  not  as  all  Engl,  versions,  "  I  make  myself." 

19  I  died.— Auth.,  "  I  am  dead."     Compare  2  Cor.  v.  14. 

21  Died  for  nought.— So  Wycl.  Auth.,  "  is  dead  iu  vain,"  follow- 
ing Tiynd.  To  do  a  thing  "  iu  vain  "  is  to  fail  in  one's  purpose ; 
to  d/  it  "for  nought"  is  to  do  it  without  a  purj^ose,  "gratui- 
tously" as  we  say.  Gr.,  Scopedy.  Yulg.,  gratis.  Compare  chap, 
ill.  4,  where  "  in  vain  "  represents  a  different  word. 


CHAPTER  III. 

1  Openly  set  forth.— Auth.,  "evidently  set  forth."  Tynd., 
"  described."  Yulg.,  prescriptus  est.  The  Gr.  word  is  elsewhere 
in  the  New  Testament  "  to  write  beforehaud  "  (as  iu  Rom.  xv.  4, 
Ephes.  iii.  3,  and  Jude  4),  but  in  the  LXX.  version  of  the  Old 
Testament,  and  in  classical  writers,  it  has  the  local  meauiug,  as 
here,  "  openly,"  "  before  your  eyes."  This  interpretation  is  in 
keeping  with  the  metaphor,  "  who  hath  bewitched  you,  fascinated 
you,  when  ye  were  able  to  fix  your  eyes  on  the  crucified  Saviour." 

8  Perfected. — Auth.,  with  Genev.,  "made  perfect."  The  word 
so  rendered  does  not  imply  perfection  in  goodness,  but  in  a 
neutral  sense,  "  completion."  So  Yulg.,  consummamini ;  and, 
in  English,  "  perfected  "  expresses  this  better  than  "  made  per- 
fect."     Compare  Note  on  Ephes.  iv.  13.     This  biblical  sense  of 


346  GALATIANS— III. 

"perfect"  is  to  be  imderstood  when  we  speak  of  Clirist  as  "per- 
fect God  and  perfect  man." 

14!  Upon  the  Gentiles. — Made  emphatic  in  the  Gr.  by  its  posi- 
tion iu  the  sentence. 

15  Maketh  it  void. —  Auth.  (alone),  "  disannulleth."  Geuev., 
"  doth  abrogate."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  chap.  ii.  21,  and 
different  from  that  in  verse  17  of  this  chapter. 

19  What  then  is  the  law  ? — Not  as  in  Aiith.,  "  wherefore  serveth 
the  law  ?  "  "  for  what  pui-pose  is  it  ?  "  but  "  what  is  its  nature  ?  " 

Ordained  through  angels  {as  instruments)  by  the  hand  of 
a  mediator ;  this  mediator  between  God  and  man  being  Moses, 
who  is  so|designated  in  Rabbinical  writings — not  Christ,  as  Origen 
understood  it.  In  Heb.  Adii.  6  Christ  is  said,  in  implied  com- 
parison of  Moses,  to  be  "  the  mediator  of  a  better  covenant." 

21  Made  alive. — A  more  exact  rendering  than  Auth., "  could  have 
given  life,"  while  it  also  avoids  the  repetition  of  "  give." 

22  Hath  shut  up. — All  Engl,  versions,  "concluded,"  following 
Yulg.,  conclusit.  The  English  word  is  now  chiefly  if  not  entirely 
used  in  a  logical  sense,  as  it  is  also  in  the  New  Testament  (Auth.), 
Avith  the  exception  of  this  place  and  Rom.  xi.  32.  The  Gr.  is 
repeated  in  the  next  verse,  and  is  there  "  shut  up  "  (Auth.,  with 
Tynd.).     Yulg.,  conclusi. 

All  things. — The  universe,  ra  travra.  Auth.,  "  all,"  which  is 
probably  understood,  though  it  was  not  intended,  to  mean  "  all 
men." 

23  Kept  in  ward.— Auth.,  "kept."  Tlie  Gr.  is  "  kept  in  custody," 
and  the  metaphor  is  contiaued  in  the  words  which  follow,  "  shut 
up,"  as  it  were  in  a  prison,  with  a  view  to  the  faith,  &c. 

24  Tutor. — Auth.,  "'  schoolmaster."  Gr.,  'pedagogue.  See  Note  on 
1  Cor.  iv.  15. 

26  The  comma  after  "  faith"  is  intended  to  show  that  "  in  Christ 
Jesus "  should  be  connected  with  "  ?ons  of  God  "  rather  than 
"  through  faith,"  but  either  way  the  sense  is  good,  and  the  con- 
struction legitimate. 

28  No  male  and  female. —  The  artificial  distinctions  are  here 
coupled  together  by  "nor,"  the  natural  by  "and."  All  Engl, 
versions  overlook  this. 

Ye  are  all  one  man.  —  "  One  person."  Here  again  the 
Auth.  is  apt  to  be  misleading,  "  one  "  being  likely  to  be  taken  as 
a  neuter. 


GALATIANS— IV.  347 


CHAPTER  IV. 

2  Guardians  and  stewards. — lu  tlie  Gv.  tlie  former  office  in- 
cludes the  personal  superiutendence  of  the  child,  the  latter  the 
care  for  his  maiutenauce.  Auth.,  with  Tyud.,  "tutors  and 
governors."     Vulg.,  sub  tutoribus  et  actoribus. 

The  term  appointed. — All  Engl,  versions,  "the  time  ap- 
pointed." The  Gr.  wpodefffiia  properly  signifies  the  limited  term 
within  Vvliich  an  action  at  law  might  be  brought.  It  is  not  again 
used  in  the  New  Testament. 

3  The  rudiments  of  the  world — i.e.,  those  rudiments  of  reli- 
gious  truth  which  were  known  to  the  world  prior  to  any  special 
revelation.     Auth.,  "  elements." 

6  Our  hearts. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  your,"  in  conform- 
ity with  all  the  best  MSS.  The  transitions  from  the  first  person 
to  the  second  and  from  the  plural  to  the  singular  which  occur  in 
this  passage,  are  according  to  the  manner  of  St.  Paul  and  of  the 
Hebrew  Scriptm-es,  being  especially  noticeable  in  the  Pentateuch 
in  the  words  addressed  by  Moses  to  the  people, 

7  An  heir  through  God — i.e.,  through  the  mercy  of  God;  by 
change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  heir  of  God  through  Christ,"  as  Auth. 

8  Ye  were  in  bondage. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "ye  did  service 
unto,"  but  in  verse  9  "  be  in  bondage."  The  Gr.  in  both  places 
is  literally,  "  to  serve  as  slaves." 

9  Back  again  .  .  .  over  again.— In  these  pleonastic  i^hrases 
the  Apostle  harps  upon  their  relapse  into  Judaism,  and  enforces 
his  reproof  of  it.  They  are  passed  over  somewhat  lightly  in 
Auth.,  "  turn  again  .  .  .  desire  to  be  in  bondage  again." 

13  Because  of  an  infirmity  of  the  flesh.— Probably  because 
he  was  detained  among  them  by  illness.  Auth.,  with  Tynd., 
"through,"  i.e.,  "  while  in  a  state  of  infirmity,"  a  sense  which  the 
construction  of  Sid  with  the  accusative  does  not  allow. 

14  That  which  was  a  temptation  to  you  in  my  flesh  — 

i.e.,  "  the  infirmity  in  my  flesh  which  was  a  trial  to  you,"  by 
change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  my  temptation  which  was  in  my  flesh  " 
(Auth.). 

15  That  gratulation  of  yourselves— i.e.,  "  What  becomes  of 
your  self -gratulation  on  account  of  my  teaching  ?  "  Auth., "  Where 
is  then  the  blessedness  ye  spake  of  p  "  which  is  not  very  intelli- 
gible, and  is  a  mis-translation  of  /j.aKapi<rfx6s.     (See  Rom.  iv.  6,  9, 


348  GALATIANS— IT. 

and  Note  there.)  The  rendering  in  the  Margin  would  mean, 
"What  becomes  of  the  gratulation,  the  felicitation,  which  ye 
bestowed  on  vie  ?  " 

17  They  zealously  seek  you. — "  They  (the  Judaising  teachers) 
pay  court  to  you  in  no  good  way  [oh  KaA&s),  not  honourably ;  but 
they  desire  to  shut  you  out  (from  me  and  those  who  follow  my 
teaching)  that  ye  may  zealously  seek  them."  Auth.,  "  they 
zealously  aii'ect  you."  The  Gr.,  (r]\ovy,  when  used,  as  it  is  here, 
with  an  accusative  of  the  person,  includes  the  feeling  of  zeal  for 
a  person,  and  jealousy  of  another's  influence  over  *Jiat  person. 
( Wordsworth.) 

18  To  be  zealously  sought.— The  verb  of  the  last  verse  is  here 
rej)eated  in  the  passive  voice. 

In  a  good  matter. — Fairly  and  honourably ;  not,  as  by  them, 
in  a  way  that  is  dishonourable  :  eV  Ka\f. 

20  I  could  wish. — Auth.,  "  I  desire."  Literally,  "  I  was  wish- 
ing." 

22  The  handmaid — i.e.,  Hagar.  Auth.,  with Tyud.,  "bondmaid." 
The  Gr.  ttoiSiV/ct;,  though  including  bondwomen,  comprises  a 
wider  class.     Compare  Matt.  xxvi.  69 ;  Acts  xii.  13. 

24  Contain  an  allegory. — Literally,  "  are  allegorised,"  beside 
their  plain  meaning  they  have  another.  Auth.,  "are  an  al- 
legory." 

These  women. — These  two,  Hagar  and  Sarah,  represent  two 
covenants.  Auth.,  "  These  are  the  two  covenants."  The  article 
is  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

Bearing  children.  —  All  Engl,  versions,  "  gendering,"  or 
"  which  gendereth."     Gr.,  yiwuxra. 

26  "Which  is  our  mother. — "All"  (Auth.) is  omitted  by chunge 
in  Gr.  text. 


GALATIANS— V.  349 

CHAPTER  V. 

1  With  freedom  did  Christ  set  us  free:  stand  fast 
therefore. — Auth., "  Stand  fast  therefore  in  the  liberty,"  &c.  The 
change  in  construction  is  cine  to  the  omission  in  the  Gr.  text  of  the 
relative  pronoun  fj.  St.  Panl  after  his  manner  takes  up  the  word 
which  he  had  used  just  before  and  emphatically  repeats  it,  using 
the  Heljraism  which  we  meet  with  so  often  in  the  Bil)le,  as  in 
Luke  xxii.  15,  "  with  desire  I  have  desired,"  and  John  iii.  29,  where 
"  rejoiceth  greatly "  is  in  the  Gr.  "  rejoiceth  with  joy."  In 
this  place  tlie  Gr.  admits  of  another  rendering  which  is  noticed  in 
the  Margin,  "For  freedom  did  Christ  set  us  free,"  i.e.,  for  the 
enjoyment  of  freedom  and  continuance  in  it,  and  not  that  we 
should  return  to  slavery.  This,  however,  is  not  a  probable  in- 
terpretation.    See  N"ote  on  verse  13. 

4  Ye  are  severed  from  Christ.— Literally,  "  abolished  from 
Clirist."  Auth.  (by  a  paraphrase),  "  Christ  is  become  of  no  eifect 
unto  yon."  Wycl.  (forcibly),  "  ye  be  voided  away  from  Christ," 
following  Yulg.,  evacuati  estis  a  Christo. 

Ye  who  would  be  justified. — All  Engl,  versions,  '^'whoso- 
ever of  you  are  justified."  The  verb  is  in  the  present  tense,  and 
is  to  be  taken  in  the  sense  of  the  middle  voice,  "ye  who  are  justi- 
fying yourselves,  seeking  to  be  justified."     Compare  Acts  ii.  47. 

5  We  ...  by  faith  wait  for. — "  By  faith,"  according  to  the 
collocation  in  the  Gr.,  is  to  be  coimected  with  the  verb  (as  by 
Wycl.,  Genev.,  and  Rhem.),  not  (as  by  Tynd.  and  Auth.)  with 
"righteousness." 

11  The  stumblingblock  of  the  cross.  —  Vxilg.,  scandalum 
cnicis.  Tynd.,  "  the  offence  wliich  the  cross  giveth."  Cranm. 
and  Genev.,  "  slander."  Rhem.,  "scandal."  Auth.,  "offence." 
Beza,  offendiculum.  The  stumbling-block  or  offence  which  the 
cross  gave  to  the  Jews  consisted  in  tlie  doctrine  that  faith  in  a 
crucified  Saviour  would  avail  for  salvation  without  ceremonial 
religious  ordinances.  The  same  idea  occurs  in  1  Cor.  i.  23,  "  Christ 
cracified,  unto  the  Jews  a  stumblingblock." 

13  For  freedom.. — Freedom  is  the  purpose  of  the  call.  Auth., 
"  unto  liberty."  The  preposition  eiri  with  the  dative  indicates  the 
purpose,  and  the  addition  of  the  preposition  supports  the  inter- 
pretation of  the  text  against  that  in  the  Margin  of  verse  1,  where 
the  preposition  is  omitted. 

17  That  ye  may  not  do. — Tending  to  prevent  your  doing  (Gr., 
'Iva  jXT)  iroTTjTs),  but  not  making  it  impossible,  as  Auth.,  "  so  that  ye 
cannot  do." 


350  GALATIANS— VI. 

19,  20  The  words  "  adultery,"  "  murders,"  are  omitted  by  change  in 
Gr.  text. 

20  Sorcery. — The  Gr.  is  more  properly  so  rendered,  as  in  Rev.  ix. 
21,  xviii.  23,  than  as  here  in  Auth.,  "  witchcraft."  The  practice 
of  sorcery  was  commtm  in  Asia  Minor  (see  Acts  xix.  19),  and 
therefore  doubtless  was  familiar  to  the  Galatians. 

Strife. — The  iisual  rendering  of  fpts.  Auth.,  "  variance,"  having 
"  strite  "  below. 

Factions. — The  same  word  as  in  2  Cor.  xii.  20.  See  Note  on 
Rom.  ii.  8.     Auth.,  "  strife." 

21  Practise. — Auth.,  "  do."  For  the  contrast  between  Trpda-a-ftu  and 
TTotelv  see  Rom.  i.  32,  vii.  19. 

22  Kindness  represents  the  Gr.  xp'ncT<^'''vs  better  than  "  gentle- 
ness "  (Tynd.  and  Auth.).  Vulg.,  benignitas.  "  Kindness  "  refers 
to  the  disposition,  "  goodness  "  to  the  same  in  its  outward  mani- 
festation, beneficence. 

24  Of  Christ  Jesus.  —  By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth., 
"  Christ's." 

25  If  we  live  by  the  Spirit.— The  Gr.  is  not  " in  the  Spirit" 

(Auth.).  but  '•  by,"  "by  the  power  of,"  or  possibly  "to,"  as  it  is 
said  in  Rom.  xix.  8,  "  we  live  unto  the  Lord,"  rcjl  Kvpieo,  without  a 
preposition. 

By  the  Spirit  let  us  also  walk— i.e.,  by  the  law  of  the 

Sj)irit.     Tlie  empliatic  order  of  the  Gr.  has  Ijeen  followed. 

26  Vainglorious. — All  Engl,  versions,  "  desirous  of  vain  glory," 
folloAviug  Vulg.,  inanis  glorice  cupidi. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


4  Then  shall  he  have  his  glorying.— Auth.,  with  Tynd., 
"  then  shall  he  have  rejoicing."  The  Apostle  pursues  the  thought 
expressed  in  chap.  v.  26,  "  let  us  not  be  vainglorious."  If  we  are 
to  boast,  we  must  find  cause  for  doing  so  either  in  the  Lord  and 
His  mercy  to  us  (2  Cor.  x.  17),  or  in  ourselves,  in  our  afflictions 
(2  Cor.  xi.  30). 

10  Let  us  work  that  which  is  good  toward   all  men.— 
So  Wycl.,  "  work  we  good."     Vulg.,  operemur.     This  is  required 


GALATIANS— VI,  351 

by  the  Gr.,  indicating  the  work  and  labour  which  is  involved  in 
well-doing.  Aiith.,  following  Tynd.,  "let  us  do  good."  We 
must  make  this  the  fpyov,  the  work  of  our  lives,  and  not  suifer 
ourselves  to  grow  weary  in  it. 

11  With  how  large  letters.— Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "how 
large  a  letter." 

I  have  written. — The  epistolary  aorist.  (See  Note  on  Rom. 
xvi.  22.) 

The  Apostle  undoubtedly  refers  to  the  unusual  size  of  the  letters, 
as  well  as  to  his  having  taken  the  unusual  course  of  writing  by 
his  own  hand  and  not  by  dictation  to  an  amanuensis,  in  both 
particulars  indicating  the  strong  feeling  under  Avhich  he  wi'ote. 
St.  Chrysostom  supposes  the  Apostle  wrote  not  only  in  large  but 
in  ill-shapen  letters.  Dr.  Field,  in  his  Note  on  this  verse,  points 
out  a  curiously  parallel  passage  in  Plutarch's  Life  of  Cato  the 
Elder.  In  describing  Cato's  method  of  educAting  his  son, 
Plutarch  says  that  "he  wrote  histories  for  him  with  his  own 
hand,  and  in  large  characters,  I5la  x^'p^  k^^^  jxeyaXots  ypifxixaffiv.^' 

The  connection  of  this  seemingly  irrelevant  observation  with 
what  follows  is  suggested  in  the  following  Note  of  Dean  Alford  : 
"  My  indifferent  penmanship  is  a  type  of  my  general  character. 
I  do  not  set  much  value  upon  outward  aj)peai'ances.  I  am  not 
one  of  those  who  desire  to  make  a  fair  show  in  the  flesh." 

13  Not  even,  for  Auth.  "  neither,"  is  required  to  clear  the  sense, 
as  in  chap.  ii.  3. 

14  Through  which — i.e.,  the  cross.  So  Tynd.  Auth.,  following 
Vulg.,  Wycl.,  and  Rliem.,  refers  the  relative  to  the  nearest  word, 
"  Christ." 

15  "  In  Christ  Jesus." — (Auth.)  Omitted  by  change  in  Gr,  text, 
probably  interpolated  from  chap.  v.  6, 

A  new  creature. — Or,  as  in  Margin,  "  a  new  creation  ;  "  a 
new  creative  act,  causing  a  new  spiritual  birth, 

17  I  bear  branded  in  my  body  the  marks.  —  The  word 
(Trlyixara,  stigmata,  I'endered  "marks"  in  aU  Engl,  versions,  except 
Wycl.  ("tokens"),  was  specially  used  of  the  marks  with  which 
slaves  were  branded  for  their  identification ;  and  the  Apostle's 
meaning  is,  that  the  wounds  and  scars  which  he  has  on  his  body, 
the  consequences  of  the  persecution  which  he  has  undergone,  are 
so  many  tokens  of  his  being  the  bond-servant  of  Christ.  So  St. 
Augustine  (quoted  by  Wordsworth,  Note  on  this  passage).  Not 
long  before  this  he  had  been  shamefully  treated  at  Philippi. 


THE  EPISTLE  OF  PAUL   THE  APOSTLE  TO  THE 

EPHESIANS. 

CHAPTER  I. 

4  Without  Tjlemish. — Like  tlie  victims  chosen  for  the  sacrifices, 
to  which  the  same  word  is  applied  iu  Lev.  i.  10  (LXX.  version), 
and  like  the  "  lamb  without  blemish  and  without  spot,"  spoken 
of  in  1  Peter  i.  19.  So  Yulg.,  imviaculati.  "WycL,  "without 
wene ;  "  and  so  Aiith.  at  chap.  v.  27,  but  here,  "  without  blame." 

5  Having  foreordained  us. — So  Wycl. :  Auth,  with  Genev., 
"  having  predestinated  us,"  following  Vulg.  and  Beza.  Compare 
Rom.  viii.  29,  and  Note  there. 

6  Which  he  freely  bestowed  on  us.— Auth.,  following 
Tynd.,  "  wherein  he  hath  made  us  accepted,"  as  Beza,  in  qua  nos 
gratis  acce^jtos  sibi  effecit,  which  does  not  seem  a  possible  ren- 
dering of  the  Gr. 

8  Which  he  made  to  abound. — Auth.,  "wherein  he  hath 
abounded."  The  word  is  usually  intransitive  in  St.  Paul ;  but  the 
construction  here  seems  to  make  it  transitive,  as  in  2  Cor.  iv.  15, 

ix.  8. 

JO  In   him— i.e.,  "  in  Christ."     So  "Wycl.,  with  Yulg.     Tynd.  and 
Auth., "  in  himself." 

Unto  a  dispensation. — There  is  nothing  in  the  sentence  to 
suggest  the  commencement  of  a  new  construction  at  this  point,  as 
in  Auth.,  "  that  in  the  dispensation,"  &c.:  "  unto,"  i.e.,  with  a  view 
to,  not  "in,"  as  Auth.,  following  Yulg.,  mi  disjpensatione. 

To  sum  up. — Auth.,  "  to  gather  together  in  one."  The  word 
occurs  again  in  Rom.  xiii.  9,  where  see  Note. 

11  We  were  made  a  heritage. —  The  Gr.  is  a  verb  in  the 

passive  voice,  with  the  meaning  "  we  were  made  heirs,"  as  the 


EPHESIANS— 11.  353 

Apostle  says  (Rom.  viii.  16),  "We  are  children  of  God;  and  if 
children,  then  heirs;"  and  so  Tynd. :  Auth.,  "  we  have  obtained  an 
inheritance,"  giving  the  Gr.  verb,  a  middle  sense. 

12  We  who.— Auth.  "who"  is  liable  at  first  sight  to  be  connected 
with  "his"  rather  than  with  "we,"  at  the  beginning  of  the 
Torse. 

13  In  whom  ye  also. — A  broken  construction,  after  the  manner 
of  St.  Paul,  resumed  by  "  in  whom  ye."  Auth.  fills  the  hiatus 
by  inserting  "  trusted.' 

14  GocVs  own  possession — i.e.,  the  people  whom  He  has  made 
his  own.  Compare  1  Peter  ii.  9,  "  a  people  for  God's  own  pos- 
session." The  idea  of  pux-chase  or  acquisition,  which  pro^ierly 
belongs  to  the  word,  has  not  the  prominence  which  is  fjiven  to  it 
in  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  the  purchased  possession.' 


CHAPTER  II. 

2  According  to  the  course  of  this  world.— So  all  Engl, 
versions.  The  Gr.  is  litei-ally,  "  according  to  the  age  (aiwya)  of 
this  world  (/coV^ou),"  and  so  Vulg.,  secundum  seculum  mundi 
hujus,  the  first  word,  aluv,  ceon,  denoting  the  world  in  its  tem- 
poral aspect,  as  a  transitory  period,  or  "  age  ;  "  the  second,  K0(rfj.6s, 
the  world  in  its  moral  condition,  as  a  beautiful  order  that  is  in 
disarray  and  corruption.  The  phrase  might  therefore  be  intelli- 
gibly and  not  incorrectly  translated  "  according  to  the  fleeting 
course  of  this  evil  world." 

3  Lived. — So  Wycl.  Yulg.,  conversati  sumus,  whence  Tynd., 
"  had  our  conversation."  Auth.,  "  walked,"  which  is  the  render- 
ing of  another  word  in  verse  10. 

6  With  him.— Auth.,  "  together."  Compare  Rom.  vi.  5,  where 
the  same  needful  change  has  been  made. 

10  Prepared. — So  Yulg.,  prceparavit.  All  Engl,  versions,  "or- 
dained," or,  as  Auth.,  "  before  ordained,"  which  represents 
another  Gr.  word. 

11  Aforetime,  by  change  in  the  collocation  of  the  Gr.  text,  is 
connected  with  "ye  were  separated"  in  verse  12;  not,  as  in 
Auth.,  "  ye  being  in  time  past  Gentiles." 


354  EPHESIANS— III. 

12  Separate  from  Christ.— The  Gr.  x^^P'^  ofteu,  as  here,  re- 
quires a  stronger  rendering  than  "vrithout,"  which  all  Eugl. 
versions  have  with  Vulg.,  sine.  Comp.  John  xv.  5,  "  Apart  from 
me  ye  can  do  nothing." 

Alienated  from. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following  Vnlg., 
alienati.  Auth.,  "  aliens."  Tynd.,  "  reputed  aliantes."  The 
Gr.  is  a  passive  participle,  and  is  so  treated  in  chap.  iv.  18 

(Auth.). 

13  Once.— So  Genev. :  Auth.,  with  "Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  "  sometimes," 
now  obsolete  in  the  sense  of  "  formerly."     Gr.,  irore. 

19  Sojourners. — The  Gr.  is  so  translated  in  Acts  vii.  6  (Auth.); 
liere  Aiith.,  following  Tynd.,  has  "  foreigners."  Compare  Luke 
xxiv.  18. 

21  Each  several  building.— This  rendering  is  consequent  on 
the  omission  of  the  article,  which  is  wanting  in  all  the  chief  MSS. 
"  Each  several  building  "  may  be  taken  to  mean  each  individual 
Christian,  of  whom  it  is  said  in  1  Cor.  vi.  19  that  his  body  is  a 
sanctuary  of  the  Holy  Ghost,  and  in  the  next  verse  the  union 
of  all  in  one  is  spoken  of  as  "  a  habitation  of  God."  With  this 
interpretation  of  the  passage,  the  maintenance  of  the  old  render- 
ing, "all  the  building,"  becomes  as  unnecessary  in  Englisli  as 
it  is  uugrammatical  in  Greek.  Each  individual  is  a  cell  "  fitly 
framed  together,"  and  all  the  cells  are  built  together  to  make 
one  holy  habitation. 


CHAPTER  III.    • 


4  Ye  can  perceive  my  understanding. — A  more  exact  ren- 
dering than  Auth.  (followiug  Cranm.),  "  ye  may  understand  my 
knowledge,"  and  it  gives  a  different  sense  ;  for  it  is  one  thing  to 
perceive  that  a  person  understands  the  suljject  of  which  he  treats, 
and  another  to  "  understand  the  knowledge  "  which  he  possesses. 

6  Fellow-heirs.  .  . — The  emphatic  assonance  in  the  Gr.,  i^ro- 
duced  by  the  use  of  three  words  beginning  with  the  preposition 
a-w,  is  represented  by  the  reiteration  of  the  same  word  "  fellow," 
but  is  lost  by  the  variation  in  Auth.,  "  fellow-heirs,"  "  of  the 
same  body,"  "  partakers." 


EPHESIANS— III.  355 

9  The  dispeusation. — So  Wycl.  The  word  is  the  same  as  in 
verse  2  and  chap.  i.  10.  The  reading  followed  by  Tynd.  aud 
Aiith.  is  Koivwvia,  "fellowship." 

Which  from  all  ages  hath  been  hid.— Auth.,"  from  the 
beginuiug  of  the  world."  Gr.,  "  from  the  ages  " — "  from,"  i.e.,  in 
point  of  time,  as  it  had  been  "  fore-ordained  before  the  ages  " 
(1  Cor.  ii.  7). 

"  By  Jesus  Christ." — (Auth.)    Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

10  Might  be  made  known. —  Not  "might  be  known,"  as  all 
Engl,  versions,  except  Rhem.,  "might  be  notified,"  following 
Ynlg.,  innotescat. 

15  Every  family. — So  Wycl.  and  Vulg.,  oumispaiernitos.  Auth., 
following  Genev.,  "  the  whole  family.'  Compare  chap.  ii.  21,  and 
Note  there. 

16  With  power. — Auth.,  "with  might."  The  Gr.  Swa/xis  is 
usually  expressive  in  the  New  Testament  of  supernatiiral  power ; 
it  occurs  about  a  hundred  times,  and  is  very  rarely  rendered  by 
"might"  in  Auth.  In  the  Gospels  and  Acts  it  is  often  ex- 
pressed by  "  miracles,"  or  "  mighty  works." 

18  May  be  strong  to  apprehend. — Auth.,  "  may  be  able  to 
comprehend."  Both  words  in  the  Gr.  require  the  change  of 
rendering;  as  to  "  apprehend,"  compare  John  i.  5,  Phil.  iii.  12. 

19  Unto  all  the  fulness. — "  Unto,"  so  as  to  attain  to.  So 
Rhem. :  Vidg.,  ^d  implcamini  in  omnevi  plenitudinem  Dei. 
Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  with  all  the  fulness." 

21  In  the  church  and  in  Christ  Jesus.— So  Wycl.,  Rhem., 
and  Vulg.  "And"  is  added  in  the  Gr.  text.  Aiitli.,  "in  the 
church  by  Christ  Jesus,"  thus  losing  sight  of  a  main  principle 
pervading  tliis  Epistle,  that  to  be  in  the  Clnzi'ch  is  to  be  also  in 
Christ ;  for  the  Church,  being  a  holy  bodj',  is  in  Him.  See 
especially  chap.  ii.  21,  22. 

Unto  all  generations.— See  Margin.  The  pleonastic  phrase 
of  the  original  hardly  admits  of  an  exact  analysis  or  a  close 
translation. 


366  EPHESIANS— IV. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

1  The  prisoner  in  the  Lord.  —  So  Rhem. :  Autli.,  "  the 
prisouer  of  the  Lord,''  as  iu  chap.  iii.  1,  where  the  Gr.  is 
cliffereut. 

3  Giving  diligence.— The  Gr.  is  commonly  so  rendered  in 
Auth.,  but  hei'e  "  endeavouring." 

11  He  gave  some  to  be  apostles. — The  insertion  of  to  be 
removes  an  ambiguity  from  the  Engl,  which  does  not  exist  in 
the  Gr.,  "  some "  representing  the  accusative  case,  not  the 
dative. 

12  The  work  of  ministering. — Auth.,  "the  work  of  the  minis- 
try," which  has  now  a  special  meaning  ;  whereas  the  Gr.  SiaKovia 
in  the  Apostolic  age  included  any  ser\ace  done  in  the  Chm'ch  for 
Christ's  sake,  especially  the  ministering  to  the  necessities  of  the 
saints.     Compare  2  Cor.  ix.  1. 

13  Till  we  all  attain  unto.— Auth.,  "  come  in,"  with  Margin 
"come  into."  Compare  Phil.  iii.  11,  where  the  same  Gr.  is 
"  attain  unto  "  (Auth.). 

PuUgrown. — All  Engl,  versions,  following  Vulg.,  "perfect," 
which  implies  moral  and  spiritual  excellence,  rather  than  the  full 
consummation  of  human  nature.     Compare  Note  on  Gal.  iii.  3. 

1-1  After  the  wiles  of  error. — Auth.,  by  a  rather  wide  para- 
phrase, "  whereby  they  lie  in  wait  to  deceive."  The  word  here 
rendered  "  wiles,"  like  the  cognate  verb,  may  receive  a  good  or 
bad  interpretation  according  to  the  context.  Here  e\'idently  it 
takes  the  latter,  as  also  in  chap.  vi.  11,  where  it  is  rendered  by 
"  wiles  "  in  Auth.  The  same  word  in  an  abbreviated  form, 
"  method,"  is  familiar  to  us  in  English  as  a  term  of  neutral  tint, 
which  may  take  its  colour  from  its  surroundings. 

16  Fitly  framed  and  knit  together.— The  former  word  seems 
to  apply  to  the  general  harmony  of  the  whole,  the  latter  to  the 
close  union  and  interdependence  of  the  several  parts. 

According  to  the  working  in  clue  measure  of  each 
several  part. — The  insertion  of  due  contributes  much  to  the 
perspicuity  of  the  sentence,  and  is  fully  implied  in  the  Gr. 
eV  /ueVpy.  Auth.,  "according  to  the  effectual  working  in  the 
measui'e  of  every  part."     Compare  for  the  sense  verse  7. 

Maketh  the  increase  of  the  body — i.e.,  "the  body"  (at 
the  beginning  of  the  verse)  maketh  its  own  increase. 


EPHESIANS— IV.  357 

17  As  the  Gentiles  also.— For  "as  other  G-en tiles"  (Auth.), 
by  cliauge  iu  Gr.  text. 

22  As  concerning  your  former  manner  of  life. — The  sense 
is  much  obscured  in  Anth.,  "concerning  the  former  con- 
versation." 

Which  waxeth  corrupt.— Auth.,  with  Wycl.  and  Tynd., 
"  which  is  corrupt."  The  Gr.  is  the  present  participle,  denoting 
that  the  corruption  is  in  progress,  not  complete. 

The  lusts  of  deceit. — Auth.,  "  deceitful  lusts."  The  mean- 
ing is  "  the  lusts  which  are  engendered  of  delusion  and  decep- 
tion." In  the  same  way  the  sense  is  enfeebled  in  verse  24,  and 
the  contrast  between  the  products  of  deceit  and  truth  is  lost  by 
the  rendering  of  Auth.,  "  true  holiness  "  for  "  holiness  of  truth," 
i.e.,  holiness  viewed  as  the  offspring,  the  effect  of  truth. 
"  Truth  "  is  here  an  emphatic  woi'd,  not  to  be  resolved  into  an 
epithet  of  "  holiness,"  as  appears  from  its  being  contrasted  witli 
"deceit"  in  verse  22,  and  from  the  fresh  antithesis  in  the 
following  verse,  where  it  is  contrasted  with  "falsehood." 

25  Falsehood.— Tlie  principle,  rh  >|/evSoy,  not  as  Auth.,  "  lying," 
the  practice. 

28  May  have  whereof  to  give.— The  Gr.  is  literally  as  Auth., 
"  may  have  to  give."  Tlio  Engl,  idiom  does  not  follow  the  Gr. 
in  this  use  of  "  have."  Compare  Matt,  xviii.  25,  "  he  had  not  to 
pay  "  (Auth.),  i.e.,  "  he  had  not  wherewith  to  pay." 

29  Good  for  edifying  as  the  need  may  be.— Literally,  "good 
for  the  building  up  of  the  need."  So  as  to  the  sense  Tynd.  and 
Cranm.,  "good  to  edify  withal,  when  need  is."  Auth.,  "good 
to  the  use  of  edifying,"  the  phrase  being  thus  treated  as  an 
inversion  of  the  proper  construction.  The  following  paraphrase 
is  suggested  by  Dr.  Field,  "  good  for  the  improvement  of  the 
occasion,"  which  sufficiently  expresses  the  meaning,  if  "  impi'ove- 
ment "  be  understood  in  its  modern  religious  sense. 

Give. — Auth.,  with  Cranm,  and  Genev.,  "minister,"  probably 
because  "  give  "  has  been  used  in  the   preceding  verse.     Gr., 


358  EPHESIANS— V. 


CHAPTER  V. 

1  Imitators.— All  Engl,  versions,  "  followers."     Compare  N'ot 
on  1  Cor.  iv.  16.     Through  the  use  of  the  word  in  the  Vulg. 
and  in  the  work  of  Thomas  a  Kempis,  it  has  come  to  be  in  better 
repute  than   it  had  with  the  old  Romans.     Compare  Horace, 
Ep.  I.  xix.  19. 

2  Odour. — For  "  savour  "  (Auth.,  with  Tynd.),  which  now  applies 
to  the  taste  rather  than  the  smell,  and  is  therefore  not  a  proper 
rendering  of  oa/x-f]. 

4  Befitting. — Auth.  "  convenient  "  is  now  archaic  in  this  sense. 

5  Which  is. — "  Which  "  is  preferable  to  "  who  "  in  a  relative 
clause  like  this,  containing  a  description,  not  an  identification,  of 
the  antecedent. 

6  Empty  words. — All  Engl,  versions, "  vain."    The  Gr,  is  KevoTi, 

not  naraiois. 

9  The  fruit  of  the  light. — An  unusual  phrase,  for  which  were 
substituted  in  some  of  the  MSS.  the  more  familiar  words  "  fruit 
of  the  Spirit"  (as  Auth.);  but  they  who  displaced  it  probably  did 
not  observe  that  by  doing  so  they  destroyed  the  contrast  which 
there  is  between  "  the  fruit  of  the  light "  and  "  the  unfruitful 
works  of  darkness,"  verse  11. 

13  Every  thing  that  is  made  manifest  is  light. — Auth., 
"  whatsoever  doth  make  manifest  is  light,"  giving  an  active  sense 
to  the  passive  participle  <pavepovix(vov.  The  sense  appears  to  be, 
all  things  when  re^iroved  are  by  the  veiy  i-eproof  made  manifest, 
liglited  up  ;  and  that  which  is  made  manifest,  lighted  up,  becomes 
itself  a  light,  e.g.,  in  the  material  world,  the  moon  for  guidance, 
a  beacon  for  caution ;  in  the  moral  world,  a  holy,  humble  man, 
when  his  light  is  made  to  shine  before  men,  becomes  an  example; 
a  sinner,  when  he  is  exposed  to  public  opprobrium,  becomes  a 
warning  to  others. 

14  Shall  shine  upon  thee. — Literally,  "  shall  dawn  upon  thee," 
as  in  Matt,  xxviii.  1.  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  shall  give  thee 
light." 

15  Look  therefore  carefully  how  ye  walk. — In  consequence 
of  a  transposition  in  the  Gr.  text,  "carefully"  becomes  con- 
nected with  "look  therefore."  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "see  then 
that  ye  walk  circumspectly." 


EPHESIANS— V^I.  359 

18  Biiot. — So  RLem. :  Auth.,  with  Tyud.,  "  excess,"  tlie  consequence 
of  which  is  meant  here,  as  in  Titus  i.  6,  where  jEor  the  same  word 
the  Aiith.  rightly  lias  "  riot." 

19  With  your  heart.— As  with  an  instrument ;  the  Gr.  iv,  "  in," 
being  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text, 

21  Subjecting  yourselves.  —  Auth.  here,  "  submitting  your- 
selves," but  at  verse  24,  "  is  subject,"  where  the  Gr.  is  the  same. 

31  The  twain. — Auth.,  "  they  two."  Gr.,  ol  Uo.  Compare  1  Cor. 
vi.  16,  and  Note  there ;  also,  for  the  Gr.  construction,  Luke  iii.  5. 

32  This  mystery  is  great.  —  In  the  Gr.  the  word  "  great  " 
stands  alone  as  the  predicate,  and  consequently  is  meant  to  have 
an  emphasis  which  is  not  clearly  expressed  in  Auth.,  "  This  is  a 
great  mystery." 

33  Severally. — Auth.  (alone),  "  in  particular,"  a  phrase  once  again 
used  in  Auth.  (1  Cor.  xii.  27)  for  s'/c  ix4povs. 

That  she  fear  her  husband.— So  all  versions,  except  Auth., 
which  has  "  reverence  "  as  the  rendering  of  (j)o$e7a-dat  in  this  one 
place ;  and  it  were  to  be  wished  that,  without  breach  of  faithful, 
uess  to  the  original,  this  could  have  been  kept.  It  need  not  be 
said,  however,  that  in  Scripture  "  fear  "  very  frequently  has  the 
sense  of  "  reverence."     See  for  examples  Acts  x.  and  xiii. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


4  Nurture  them  in  the  chastening.— Auth.,  "bring  them 
up  in  the  nurture."  "  Nurture"  is  more  suited  to  the  verb  than 
to  the  noim  [iraiSela)  which  it  represents  in  Auth.,  and  which  ia 
more  truly  rendered  by  a  disciplinary  word.  "  Bring  them  up  " 
comes  from  Vulg.,  educate  illos. 

9  Both  their  Master  and  yours. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  fol- 
lowing Yulg.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  your  Master  also,"  follow- 
ing another  reading  of  the  Gr.  text,  but  noticing  this  in  the 
Margin. 

12  The    world-rulers.  —  Auth.,     "rulers."      Tynd.,     "worldly 

rulers."     Gr.,  KOfffioKparopas. 


360  EPHESIANS-VI. 

Of  this  darkness. — By  change  iu  Gr.  text  for  Autli.,  "of 
the  darkuess  of  this  world." 

The  spiritual  hosts  of  wickedness.—  Literally,  the  "  spi- 
ritual things,"  or  "spiritualties  of  ■wickedness."  Auth.,  "  spiritual 
wickeduess." 

In  the  heavenly  places.— Auth.,  "  in  high  places  "  (with 
"heavenly"  iu  the  Margin),  probably  from  unwillingness  to  i-e- 
cognise  the  existence  of  wickedness  in  heaven,  and  from  inatten- 
tion to  the  different  senses  which  are  given  to  the  word  "  heaven  " 
in  Scripture.  See  Note  on  Matt.  iii.  17,  and  compare  cliap.  ii.  2 
of  this  Epistle,  where  mention  is  made  of  "the  prince  of  the 
power  of  the  air." 

16  The  evil  one. — Gr.,  rod  ■Kovt)pov  (in  the  singular).  The  conflict 
is  e^-idently  a  personal  one.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "of  the  wicked," 
which  accordijig  to  om*  idiom  is  a  plural,  "  of  wicked  men." 
Vulg.,  omnia  tela  nequissinii,  whence  Rhem.,  "  aU  the  fieiy 
darts  of  the  most  wicked  one." 

20  In  chains. — Literally,  "  in  a  chain."  This  in  the  text  would 
be  scarcely  intelligible  to  the  English  reader.  Tynd.  and  Autli., 
"in  bonds."  Rhem.,  "a  legate  in  a  chain."  The  customary 
mode  among  the  Romans  of  confining  a  prisoner  was  to  attach 
one  of  his  wrists  to  a  soldier  l)y  a  chain.  Compare  Acts  xxi.  33, 
xxviii.  20.  The  narrow  lane  near  St.  Paul's  Cathedral — "  Paul's 
Chain  " — is  a  memorial  of  this  custom,  and  of  the  Ai^ostle  who 
more  than  once  had  experience  of  it.  At  the  close  of  this  Epistle, 
as  at  the  beginning,  he  refers  to  his  imprisonment  as  being  con- 
nected with  his  Apostolic  calling. 

24  In  tincorruptness.  —  Tlie  Gr.  a.<p0ap(Tia  is  frequently  used  by 
St.  Paul  in  speaking  of  the  immortality,  the  imperishabloness  of 
man's  future  state,  as  in  1  Cor.  xv.  42,  "  it  is  raised  in  incornip- 
4ion."  Here  accordingly  he  speaks  of  a  love  imperishable.  So 
Wycl.,  "  iu  uncorruption."  TjTid.,  "  in  pm-eness."  Geuev., 
eiToneously,  "to  their  immortality."  Aiith.,  "  in  sincerity,"  fol- 
lowing Cranm.,  "  unfayneclly."  The  word  "  uncorvuptnoss  "  is 
the  rendering  of  another  Gr.  word  akin  to  this  iu  Titus  ii.  7 
(Auth). 


THE  EPISTLE    OF   PAUL   THE   APOSTLE   TO   THE 

PHILIPPIANS. 

CHAPTER  L 

3  Upon  all  my  remembrance. — Auth.,  "  upon  eveiy  remem- 
brance," not  expressing  tlie  article. 

4  Supplication  is  repeated,  as  in  the  Gr.,  rj  Serja-is.    Anth.,  "  in 
every  prayer  of  mine  for  yon  all  making  request." 

5  Your  fellowsMp  in  furtherance  of  the  Gospel.— Tlie 

word  rendered  "  in  furtherance  of  "  is  literally  "  towards  "  {eis). 
Compare  for  the  construction  Rom.  xv.  26,  "a  contribution  for 
the  poor ;  "  and  2  Cor.  ix.  13. 

7  To  be  thus  minded  on  behalf  of  you  all. — Auth.,  "  to 
think  thus  of  you  all."     The  preposition  is  v-rrep,  not  nepi. 

Partakers  with  me  of  grace.— So  Auth.  in  the  Margin ;  in 
the  Text,  "  partakers  of  my  grace,"  which  is  the  literal  rendering 
of  the  Gr.,  but  does  not  convey  the  meaning. 

13  Throughout  the  whole  praetorian  guard. — Auth.,  "  in  all 
the  palace."  The  word  prcetorhon  occurs  also  in  Matt,  xxvii. 
27;  Mark  xv.  16,  where  it  is  "the  palace"  of  Pilate  the  governor. 
It  was  also  applied  to  the  soldiers  of  the  Imperial  body-guard 
occupying  the  prwtorium,  the  praetorian  camp  outside  the  walls 
of  Rome ;  and  in  that  sense  it  is  here  to  be  understood.  See 
Bishop  Lightfoot's  Commentary  on  Philippians,  p.  99. 

17  Of  faction.— Auth.,  "  of  contention."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as 
in  Gal.  v.  20.  This  verse  and  verse  16  are  transposed  by  change 
in  Gr.  text. 

To  raise  up.— Auth.,  "  to  add."  The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  to  stir 
lap  affliction  for  my  bonds." 

18  What  then?  only  that— i.e.,  "  Wliat  shall  we  say  to  this? 
only  thus  much,  that,"  &c. ;    "  that "  being  added  by  change 


362  PHILIPPIANS— I. 

in  Gr.  text,  Auth.,  "What  then?  notwithstanding,  every 
way,"  &c. 

22  If  to  live  in  the  flesh.  .  .  .—The  broken  construction 
well  represents  the  chasm  in  the  Apostle's  feelings.  The  con- 
uection  may  be  supplied  either  according  to  the  Text  or  the 
Margin.  The  Auth.  removes  the  difficulty  by  a  change  of 
construction ;  any  way  the  meaning  is  not  very  clear. 

23  Very  far  better.— The  Gr.  is  a  redoubled  comparative, 
" much  rather  better."     Auth.,  "much  better." 

24  For  your  sake.— This  makes  it  clear,  as  it  is  in  the  Gr.,  that 
the  "  abiding  in  the  flesh  "  has  reference  to  himself.  Auth.,  "  for 
you,"  might  mean  that  for  thevi  it  was  necessary  to  abide  in 
the  flesh. 

25  I  shall  abide,  yea,  and  abide  with  yon  all.— The  first 
verb  in  the  Gr.  expresses  his  expectation  tliat  he  shall  "  abide  in 
the  flesh ;  "  the  second,  which  is  a  compound  of  the  first,  that  he 
shall  abide  near  at  hand  to  them,  "  yea  "  being  inserted  to  mark 
clearly  the  distinction  between  the  two.  Auth.,  "abide  and 
continue  with,"  as  if  the  two  were  synonymous. 

Your  progress  and  joy  in  the  faith.— This,  for  the  sake 
of  perspicuity,  takes  the  place  of  the  translation  given  in  all 
Engl,  versions,  "  your  furtherance  and  joy  of  faith." 

26  That  your  glorying  may  abound  in  Christ  Jesus  in 

me. — Auth.,  "  may  be  more  abundant  in  Christ  Jesus  for  me." 
They  will  glory  in  him,  he  being  himself  in  Christ,  in  whom  is 
contained  every  object  of  Christian  joy, 

27  Manner  of  life. — The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  behave  as  good 
citizens "  (of  the  heavenly  kingdom).  Compare  chap.  iii.  20 : 
"  Our  citizenship  is  in  heaven." 

Striving  for. — Or  (as  Margin),  "with  the  faith" — i.e.,  in  con- 
junction with  it.  Auth.,  "  stri\nng  together  for,"  understanding 
(TvvadXovvres  to  mean  "  striving  all  together  in  unison,"  which  is 
not  consistent  with  the  usage  of  the  Gr. 

28  Of  your  salvation.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Autli..  "  to 
you  of  salvation  " 


PHILIPPIANS— II.  363 


CHAPTER  n. 


5  Have  this  mind. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Ai^th.,  "let  tliis 
mind  be  in  you."     Viilg.,  hoc  sentite. 

6 — 8  In  this  deep  and  sublime  passage  the  exact  meaning  of  the 
words  which  ofEer  the  chief  difficulty  in  translation  is  given  in 
the  Margin.  To  paraphrase  it  is  to  lower  the  majesty  without 
explaining  the  mystery  in  it.  Yet  this,  to  some  readers,  may  be 
better  than  to  pass  it  by  without  any  attempt  at  explanation. 
The  following  is  an  approximation  to  the  plain  gi-ammatical 
meaning,  so  far  as  our  language  supplies  equivalent  terms  to 
those  of  the  original : — "  Who  from  eternity  existing  in  the 
Di\'ine  nature,  thoiight  the  being  equal  with  God  not  a  thing  to 
be  eagerly  clutched  and  held  fast,  but  emptied  Himself  of  His 
glory,  by  taking  the  nature  of  a  bond-servant,  coming  to  birth  in 
the  outward  semblance  of  man  ;  and  being  found  (John  i.  45)  on 
earth  in  figure  as  a  man.  He  humbled  Himself,  becoming  obedient, 
so  obedient  as  to  die,  yea,  to  die  the  death  of  the  cross." 

15  Without  blemish.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  with, 
out  rebuke." 

Generation. — All  Engl,   versions,  excejit  Rhem.,  follow  the 
erroneous  rendering  of  Vulg.,  nationis,  "  nation." 

Ye  are  seen. — Not  as  all  Engl,  versions,   "  ye  shine,"   and 
Vulg.,  lucetis. 

As  lights. — Gr.,  properly, "  luminaries,"  lights  of  heaven.    The 
word  <pco(TTripfs  occnrs  again  in  Rev.  xxi.  11. 

17  If  I  am  offered. — The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  if  I  am  poured  out  as 

a  libation,  or  drink  offering,"  i.e.,  if  my  blood  is  shed  for  Christ's 
sake.     The  same  metaphor  is  used  in  2  Tim.  iv.  6. 

20  Who  will  care  truly.— Auth.,  "naturally.''  The  Gr.  is 
"  gemiiuely ;  "  as  the  Apostle,  using  the  cognate  adjective,  calls 
Timothy  his  "  genuine,  true-born  son  in  the  faith"  (1  Tim.  i.  2), 
It  may  mean,  as  Chrysostom  here  interprets  it,  "  who  will  caro 
for  you  in  such  a  way  as  to  shew  that  he  is  my  true  son,  by 
doing  as  his  father  would  do  "  (Bishop  Lightfoot's  NotQ). 

22  As  a  child  serveth  a  father. — Literally,  "  as  a  child  to  a 
father,"  not  "  as  a  son  with  the  father  "  (Auth.).  The  construc- 
tion is  varied  in  the  two  clauses  which  contain  the  comparison. 

23  How  it  will  go  with  me. — This  idiomatic  phrase  is  due  to 
Tynd.    The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  the  things  concerning  me." 


364  PHILIPPIANS— III. 

25  Messenger.— Gr.,  "  apostle."  The  word  was  not  yet  limited  by 
Christiau  usage  to  "the  twelve"  and  those  who  like  Paul  and 
Barnabas  stood  on  an  equal  footing  with  them,  but  had  still  its 
ordinary  sense  of  "  a  delegate,"  as  in  2  Cor.  viii.  23. 

29  In  honour. — Not  "  in  reputation  "  (Auth.). 

30  Came  -  nigh.— The  aorist.     Auth.,  "was  nigh." 

Hazarding  his  life. — The  Gr.  is  literally  "  making  a  hazard 
of  his  life,"  a  metaphor  from  gamblers  throwing  for  a  stake ; 
whence  the  Christian  brotherhoods  in  the  great  cities  who  in 
after  times  risked  their  lives  by  nursing  the  sick  were  called 
"  hazarders,"  parabolani. 

That  was  lacking  in  your  service.— Auth.,  "your  lack 
of  service  toward  me,"  whicli  implies  a  deficiency,  a  want  of  zeal 
on  the  part  of  the  Philippians ;  whereas  the  meaning  is  only  that 
theii"  supply  fell  short  of  the  need. 


CHAPTER   III. 


1  Hejoice. — Margin,  "  Or,  fareivell."  At  the  beginning  or  end  of 
a  letter  X'^^P*"'  is  to  be  undei'stood  in  its  secondary  sense  as  a 
word  of  salutation.  But  as  it  stands  here  and  in  chap.  iv.  4  its 
proper  sense,  "  Rejoice,"  is  the  more  appropriate. 

3  Who  worship  by  the  Spirit  of  God.— By  change  in  Gr. 
text  for  Auth.,  "  who  worship  God  by  the  spirit." 

4  I  myself. — Auth.  (from  Cranm.),  "I  might  also  have  eonfi- 
denec."  The  emphatic  word  is  '"  I,"  not  "  might  have  confidence." 

5  A  Hebrew  of  Hebrews — i.e.,  descended  from  Hebrews,  of 
pure  Hebrew  blood.     The  Gr.  has  not  the  article. 

6  Found  blameless. — The  Gr.  yevSnevos,  not  expressed  in  Auth., 
may  best  be  rendered  thus,  as  it  is  in  2  Cor.  vii.  14  (Auth.). 

8  That  I  may  gain  Christ.— The  verb  is  akin  to  the  noun  in 
verse  7  rendered  "gain;"  and  "win"  (Auth.)  now  imjjlies 
victoi'y  in  a  contest. 

10  Becoming  conformed.— A  more   definite,  as  well  as  more 
literal  translation  than  Auth.,  with  Genev.,  "being  made  con- 


PHILIPPIANS— III.  365 

formable,"    wliieli   lucaus    "  eudued  with   the   capacity  of    cou- 
fonniug."     Rhem.,  "  configured,"  following  Vulg.,  confujuratus 
morti  ejus.     Tynd.,  "  being  conformable." 
12  Obtained.— Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "attained,"  wliich  reiire- 
scuts  another  word  in  verse  11. 

I  press  on.— Auth.,  "  I  follow  after."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as 
in  verse  14. 

14  The  goal. — This  word  is  now  more  appropriate  to  a  race-course 
than  "  mark,"  Auth.  with  Tynd.  "Goal"  (French,  gaule,  "a 
pole  ")  represents  the  meta,  or  pole  fixed  in  the  ground  as  the 
boundary  of  the  race. 

High,  as  in  the  Gr.,  is  an  adverb,  and  signifies  that  the  call  is 
"from  above,"  or  "  to  go  above,"  "upward." 

16  "  Let  us  mind  the  same  thing." — (Auth.)  Omitted  by  change 
in  Gr.  text,  probably  interpolated  as  an  explanation  of  the  pre- 
ceding clause. 

20  Oxir  citizenship. — The  Gr.  Troxirevfia  is  applied  either  to  the 
duty  and  privilege  of  the  citizen,  or  to  the  state  or  commonwealth 
to  which  he  belongs.     Auth.,  "  conversation." 

We  wait  for. — Auth.,  "  we  look  for."  The  same  Gr.  is  used 
in  Gal.  V.  5,  where  Auth.  has  "  wait  for." 

A  Saviour.— There  is  no  article  here  in  the  Gr. 

21  Who  shall  fashion  anew.  —  Auth.,  "who  shall  change." 
The  Gr.  verb  is  akin  to  the  noun  o-xvM-"-  (schema) ,  translated 
"  fashion  "  in  chap.  ii.  8. 

The  body  of  our  humiliation. —  Auth.,  following  Tynd. 
and  altogether  departing  from  the  true  sense,  has  "  our  vile  body," 
"  vile  "  having  in  the  time  of  our  early  translators,  as  it  has  now, 
the  meaning  of  "foul"  or  "sordid."  "  Gtir  humiliation," 
TaTTiivciiffis,  consists  in  the  degradation  of  soul  and  body  caused  by 
breach  of  God's  natiiral  and  moral  laws ;  but  neither  soul  nor 
body  is  on  that  account  vile ;  on  the  contrary,  the  body  is  still 
capable  of  being  a  "  temple  of  the  Holy  Ghost."  It  will  be  a 
comfort  to  many,  to  whom  this  passage  is  familiar  from  its  use  in 
the  Burial  Service  of  the  Cluirch,  to  be  assured  that  there  is  no 
ground  in  the  Holy  Scripture  for  attaching  the  heathenish  idea 
of  vileness  to  our  natural  bodies. 

The  rendering  of  the  Yulg.  is  corpus  limnilitatis  nostrce.  But 
"humility,"  or  "lowliness,"  on  the  other  hand,  does  not  give 
sufficiently    the    notion    of    abasement    which    is    in    the    Gr. 


366  PHILIPPIANS— IV. 

"  Humility "  is  consistent  with  the  natural  order  of  things,  in 
which  man  was  made  a  little  lower  than  the  angels ;  it  is  con- 
sistent with  holiness,  purity,  high  aspirations.  "  Humiliation," 
and  the  Gr.  which  it  represents,  denote  the  being  brought  down 
from  a  higher  state,  and  so  are  applied  to  Christ  in  chap.  ii.  8 ; 
Acts  viii.  33. 

Conformed. — The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  verse  10. 

To  subject.— As  in  1  Cor.  xv.  28,  &c.  Auth.,  "  subdue."  The 
Gr.  is  literally  "to  make  subordinate"  {biroToi^ai).  "  To  subdue" 
is  to  "conquer  an  opponent." 


CHAPTER  lY. 


2  Euodia,  not  "  Euodias "  (Auth.),  is  the  name  of  a  woman, 
as  appears  from  tlie  corrected  rendering  in  verse  3,  These 
women,  for  tliey  laboured,  instead  of  "  those  women  which 
laboured"  (Auth.). 

5  Zj^rbearance.  —  No  one  English  word  embraces  the  various 
meanings  of  rb  iir^eiKts.  In  some  places,  as  2  Cor.  x.  1,  "gentle- 
ness "  seems  best  to  represent  it  ;  in  Acts  xxiv.  4,  "  clemency  " 
vTynd.,  "courtesy").  How  it  has  exercised  former  translators 
of  this  passage  is  apparent  from  the  various  renderings  :  Vulg., 
vwdestia,  whence  Auth.,  "  moderation  ;  "  Wycl.,  "  patience  ;  " 
Tynd.,  "  softness; "  Cranm.,  "  patient  mind;  "  Rhem.,  "modesty." 
Regard  being  had  to  the  etymology  of  the  word,  it  would  appear 
that  its  primary  meaning  was  the  disposition  to  yield,  to  forbear. 

6  Be  anxious. — The  word  is  the  same  as  in  Matt.  vi.  25,  and  the 
precept  is  in  principle  the  same.  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  '"  Be 
careful  for  nothing,"  which  hardly  holds  good  if  "  careful"  is  to 
be  understood  in  its  present  sense,  according  to  which  it  is,  if  kept 
within  due  bounds,  a  Airtue. 

7  Shall  guard.— The  Gr.  is  (ppovpiian,  "  shall  watch  over  as  a 
sentinel."     Auth.,  "  shall  keep,"  which  would  be  r-oprja-et. 

8  Honourable.  —  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "honest."  Vulg., 
yadica.     Gr.,  cnixva,  properly,  "things  that  are  to  be  i-evered." 


PHILIPPIANS— IV.  367 

9  These  things  do. —  The  rhythm  is  improved  by  this  resto- 
ration of  the  order  of  the  Gr.,  ravra  irpdara-eTe ;  and  the  sentence  is 
then  also  brought  into  sequence  \nt\i  the  preceding  verse ;  the  one 
being  a  recapitulation  of  things  to  be  meditated,  the  other  of 
things  to  be  j)ut  in  practice.       .     . 

10  I  rejoice. — The  Gr.  is  "  I  rejoiced,"  the  epistolary  aorist,  as  in 
Rom.  xvi.  22,  &c. 

Ye  have  revived  your  thought  for  me. —  The  verb  in 
Gr.  is  transitive,  "  have  made  to  shoot  afresh."  Auth.  turns  the 
construction  by  paraphrase,  "  your  care  for  me  hath  flourished 
again." 

12  In  every  thing  and  in  all  things.— The  Gr.  idiom  is  like 
the  Engl.,  "  all  and  every."  Auth.,  "  everywhere  and  in  all  things." 
There  is  nothing  local  in  the  phrase.     Compare  2  Cor.  xi.  6. 

I  have  learned  the  secret. — The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  I  have 
been  initiated,"  ^us^ujj^ai.  Auth.,  losing  sight  of  the  gi'aceful 
metaphor,  has,  "I  am  instructed,"  following  Rliem.  and  Yulg., 
instituhcs  sum.  The  word  "  mystery"  is  from  the  same  Gr.  root, 
and'  denotes  in  classical  Gr.  a  religious  ceremonial  or  doctrine, 
which  was  kept  secret,  and  to  a  participation  in  which  only  certain 
classes  of  persons  or  selected  individuals  were  admissible.  There 
was  nothing  analogous  to  this  in  the  Mosaic  dispensation ;  the 
word  is  used  only  in  the  Apocryphal  books  of  the  Old  Testa- 
ment. In  the  New  Testament  it  occurs  once  in  each  of  the  first 
three  Gospels,  and  three  times  in  the  Apocaly[)se.  St.  Paul 
shews  his  familiarity  with  Gr.  culture  and  customs,  and  his  de- 
sire to  be  "  all  things  to  all  men  " — to  the  Greeks  to  be  as  a  Greek — 
by  speaking  of  the  doctrines  of  the  Gospel  as  "mysteries,"  and  by 
using  the  word  twenty  times  in  his  Epistles  to  tlie  Romans,  Corin- 
tliians,  Ephesians,  Colossians,Thessalonians,  and  Timothy,  besides 
this  solitary  use  of  the  verb.  In  the  Ei^istle  to  the  Hebrews  it 
does  not  occur. 

17  The  fruit  that  increaseth.  —  Auth.,  "fruit  that  may 
abound."  The  Gr.  verb  is  not  the  same  as  in  the  next  verse.  The 
meaning  in  fuiancial  phrase  is  "  the  fruit  or  profit  that  accrueth 
more  and  more  to  your  account  at  the  day  of  judgment." 

19,  20  The  slight  changed  in  these  verses  require  no  explanation, 
and  will  at  once  commend  themselves  to  the  reader  who  has  the 
Gi'.  Testament  before  him. 


THE  EPISTLE   OF   PAUL  THE  APOSTLE  TO  THE 

COLOSSIANS. 

CHAPTER  L 

"  Tlie  parallel  passages  iu  the  Epistles  to  tlie  Colossiaus  aucl 
Ephcsians  are  very  many,  and  on  comparisou  ■will  oftcu  be  fouud 
to  illustrate  or  siipplemeut  each  other. 

2  "And  the  Lord  Jesus  Clirist." — (Anth.)  These  words  being 
omitted  in  accordance  witli  the  testimony  of  the  best  MSS.,  this 
Epistle  is  an  instance,  and  the  only  instance,  of  the  name  of 
Christ  not  being  associated  by  St.  Paul  with  that  of  God  the 
Father  in  his  opening  benediction. 

6  And  increasing.— Not  in  Auth.,  but  added  in  Gr.  text.  Tlie 
Gospel  is  like  a  vigorous  tree,  which  at  once  bears  fruit  and 
extends  its  growth. 

10  Walk  worthily.— So  Wycl.  Auth.,  "worthy,"  which  is  no 
longer  used  as  an  adverb. 

13  The  power  of  darkness.— The  Gr.  i^ovcrla,  commonly  ren- 
dered "  authoi'ity "  in  the  New  Testament,  properly  moans 
"  liberty  of  action,"  and  thence,  like  "  licence  "  in  English,  it  lias 
derived  two  divergent  and  even  opposite  senses,  the  one  denoting 
authority,  delegated  power,  the  other  arbitrary  unrestrained 
power ;  the  latter  is  the  predominant  meaning.  Compare  Luke 
XX.  2,  xxii.  53.     (Lightfoot's  Note  on  tliis  verse.) 

The  Son  of  his  love.— God  is  love ;  Christ  being  His  Son  is 
endued  with  His  Father's  love,  and  has  communicated  it  to  us. 
This  deep  and  beautiful  thought  is  lost  in  the  translation  of 
Auth.,  "his  dear  Son."  A  somewhat  similar  thought,  arising 
out  of  the  spiritual  relationship  between  St.  Paul  and  Timothy, 
has  been  brought  out  by  a  change  of  translation  iu  Phil.  ii.  22. 

16  In  him.  —  As  comprehending,  sustaining,  holding  together ; 
through  him,  as  tlie  instrumental  cause  (Heb.  i.  2) ;  unto 


COLOSSIANS— II.  369 

him,  as  tlie  final  cause,  for  His  sake,  and  also  «wi  looking  ioward 
Him,     Compare  Rom.  ix.  26;  Heb.  ii.  10. 

19  All  the  fulness.— All  the  infinite  perfectioiis  of  God.     Gr., 
pleroma.     Compare  Ephes.  i.  23. 

22  Without  blemish.—  Compare  Eplies.  v.  27,   and  Note  on 
Ephes.  i.  4. 


CHAPTER  II. 

1  I  would  have  you  know.— Auth.,  following  Tynd.,"  I  would 
that  ye  knew,"  overlooking  the  present  sense  of  the  Gr.  perfect 
elSfvat,  which  is,  however,  correctly  given  in  1  Cor.  xi.  3,  where  the 
same  phrase  occurs.  St.  Paul  more  commonly  says,  "  I  would  not 
have  you  ignorant." 

3  In  whom  are  all  the  treasures  .  .  .  hidden.  —  Auth., 
"in  whom  are  hid  all,"  &c.  "  Hidden"  is  in  the  Gr.  a  verbal 
adjective,  and  stands  apart  from  the  verb  "  are  "  at  the  end  of 
the  sentence  as  a  secondary  predicate,  with  this  emphatic  mean- 
ing, "  in  whom  are  the  treasures,  &c.,  hidden  away."  As  to  the 
interpretation  of  the  Gr.  air6Kpv<poi,  '•  hidden,"  and  the  reason  for 
the  stress  thus  laid  upon  it,  see  Lightfoot's  Note. 

4  Delude. — Auth.,  "  begiiile."  The  Gr.  word,  which  is  once  again 
used  in  the  New  Testament  (James  i.  22),  denotes  the  effect  pro- 
duced by  fallacious  reasoning. 

Persuasiveness  of  speech. — The  Gr.  for  this  is  used  in 
classical  writers,  but  not  in  a  bad  sense.  Auth.,  "enticing 
words." 

8  Any  one  that  maketh  spoil  of  you. — The  Gr.  is  literally, 
"that  carrieth  you  off  as  spoil."  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "that 
spoileth  you,"  which  means,  according  to  Biblical  usage,  "  taketh 
spoils  from  you,"  as  in  Exod.  xii.  36;  hence,  in  colloquial 
English,  "  mars  you,  makes  you  useless ;  "  of  which  latter  sense 
this  passage  is  cited  as  an  example  in  Johnson's  Dictionary. 
The  Gr.  is  of  comparatively  late  use,  not  being  found  in  any 
writer  earlier  than  St.  Paul. 

10  Made  full. — Auth.,   "comi^lote."      The   Gr.  is  a  j)articiple, 
cognate  to  "  fulness  "  in  verse  8. 

Y 


370  COLOSSIANS— II. 

11  Not  made  with  hands.— Auth.,  "made  without  hands." 
The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  2  Cor.  v.  1. 

"  The  sins  of." — (Auth.)     Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

12  Through  faith  in  the  working  of  God.— Auth.,  "  through 
the  faith  of  the  operation  of  God,"  bearing  the  interpretation 
given  by  Tjoid.,  "  faith  that  is  -wrought  by  the  operation  of  God." 
The  true  sense  appears  to  be  obtained  by  taking  "  the  operation 
of  God  "  as  the  object  of  the  faith.  "  The  faitli  of  "  is  a  common 
construction,  often  meaning  the  same  as  "  the  faith  in."  So 
Chrysostoni  explains  it  here  :  "  Te  believed  that  God  is  able  to 
raise  you,  and  ye  were  raised."  Compare  Phil.  iii.  10,  and  Rom. 
X.  9. 

14  The  hond.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  the  handwriting."  The  Gr., 
chirographon,  properly  means  "a  handwriting,"  "a  MS.,"  but  is 
•specially  applied  to  a  contract  to  which  a  man  has  bound  himself 
by  his  sign-manual ;  and  in  that  technical  sense  it  is  frequently 
found  in  Latin  writers,  as  Cicero  and  Juvenal. 

15  Having  put  off  from  himself  the  principalities  and  the 
powers — i.e.,  "haAang  divested  himself  of  the  spii-itual  enemies 
which  clung  about  him."  Compare  verse  11,  and  chap.  iii.  9, 
"  ye  have  put  off  the  old  man,"  where  the  Gr.  is  the  same.  AU 
Engl,  versions,  "having  spoiled,"  i.e.,  "having  stripped  them 
naked,"  following  Yiilg.,  exspolians,  but  giving  an  active  sense  to 
a  middle  verb.  So  Chrysostoni  and  the  Greek  Fathers.  Another 
rendering  is  given  in  the  Mai'gin,  "  ha-^-ing  stripped  himself  of 
his  own  body  by  death,"  which  resembles  the  phrase  in  2  Cor. 
V.  4,  "  we  would  be  unclothed."  So  the  passage  was  understood 
by  the  Latin  Fathers.  The  objection  to  it  is  that  thus  the 
phrase  "  having  stripped  himself  "  is  taken  aj)art  from  the  words 
which  immediately  follow,  and  with  which  it  seems  grammatically 
connected ;  and  it  has  a  meaning  which,  if  it  be  found  elsewhere, 
is  not  suggested  by  the  present  context.  See  Lightfoot's  Note 
on  this  difficult  passage. 

16  A  feast  day. — So  Wycl.,  correctly  following  Yulg.,  in  parte 
clieifesti.     Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "an  holyday." 

17  The  body  {i.e.,  the  substance)  belongs  to  Christ.— Auth., 

as  Wycl.,  "is  of  Christ ;  "  which  might  be  taken  to  mean  "  from 
Christ." 

18  Let  no  man  rob  you  of  your  prize.— Auth.,  "  beguile  you 
of  your  reward."  The  word  which  is  here  used  metaphorically 
was  api^lied  properly  to  the  act  of  a  judge,  in  the  games,  deciding 
mifaii-ly  against  a  competitor  who  was  entitled  to   the  prize. 


COLOSSIANS— III.  371 

Compare,  for  the  reference  to  the  games,  Gal.  v.  7,  "  ye  did  run 
well,  &e.,  aud  for  the  metaphor  of  the  judge  in  a  race,  chap, 
iii.  14,  and  1  Cor.  ix.  24. 

Dwelling  in. — Or,  as  in  Margin,  "taking  his  stand  upon;" 
literally,  "  stepping  into,"  i.e.,  "  asserting  a  knowledge  of  things 
supernatural  which  he  has  seen."  Or,  if  the  negative  be  re- 
tained in  the  Gr.  text  (see  Margin),  "  which  he  has  not  seen." 
Auth.,  "  intruding  into."  The  Gr.  verb  is  properly,  "  to  step 
into  or  upon,"  and  thence  "  to  stand  or  dwell  upon." 

21  Handle  not,  nor  taste,  nor  touch.— All  Engl,  versions, 
following  Vulg.,  have  "  touch  not,  taste  not,  handle  not,"  trans- 
posing the  first  aud  last  words.  The  proper  meaning  of  the  first 
is  "  to  lay  hold  of,"  as  in  John  xx.  17 ;  1  Cor.  vii.  1. 

23  Severity  to  the  body.  —  Literally,  in  "  not  sparing  the 
body."     Auth.,  "  neglecting  the  body." 

Not  of  any  value  against  the  indulgence  of  the  flesh 

— i.e.,  "not  of  value  for  the  prevention  or  remedy  of  indul- 
gence ;  "  literally,  "  not  in  any  honour."  Other  intei*pretations 
of  the  passage  have  been  supi^orted,  both  in  ancient  and  modem 
times:  e.g.,  that  of  Auth.,  "not  of  any  honour  to  the  satisfying 
of  the  flesh,"  i.e.,  in  a  good  sense,  "  not  of  any  honour  with  a 
view  to  tlie  gratification  of  the  moderate  desires  of  the  flesh  ;  " 
but  the  sense  now  adopted  seems  most  in  conformity  with  the 
literal  meaning  of  the  words,  and  with  the  general  tenor  of  the 
passage.    See  Lightfoot's  Note. 


CHAPTER  III. 

2  Set  your  mind. — Auth.,  "  your  affection."     Gr.,  (ppoveTre. 

6  Passion. — Auth.,  "inordinate  affection."     Gr.,  -n-ddos. 

Evil  desire. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  evil  concupiscence,"  taking 
from  the  Latin  Yulg.  a  word  which,  having  been  used  three  or 
four  times  in  the  translation  of  the  Epistles  of  St.  Paul,  was 
adoi)ted  by  Shakspeare  and  other  standard  old  writers,  but 
probably  never  came  into  general  use.  The  Gr.  word  which  it 
here  represents  is  commonly  rendered  "  desire,"  or  "  lust." 

8  Railing. — As  at  Eph.  iv.  31,  where  also  the  Gr.  is  p\aa-<f>r]fjL'tci 
{blas^hemia). 


372  COLOSSIANS— IV. 

Shameful  speaking.— A  more  literal  rendering  than  "  filthy 
communication"  (Auth.), 

12  A  heart  of  compassion. — Tlie  latter  of  the  two  -words  in  the 
Gr.  means  pity  rather  than  "  mercy "  (Anth.),  as  that  word  is 
ijow  understood ;  though  originally  being  derived  from  miseri- 
cordia,  it  must  have  had  the  same  meaning. 

15  The  peace  of  Christ. — By  change  in  Gr.  text.  So  Vulg., 
WycL,  and  Rhem.  Auth., "  the  peace  of  God."  Compare  John 
xir.  27,  "  My  j)eace  I  give  unto  you,''  and  Ephes.  ii.  14,  '"  He  is 
our  peace." 

Rule. — Gr.,  "  arbiti*ate,"  "  be  umpire,"  as  in  a  race.  The  same 
metaphor  is  used  in  Phil.  iii.  14.  "  In  the  strife  of  contending 
thoughts  and  desires  let  the  peaceful  counsels  of  Christ's  spirit 
and  example  sway  you." 


CHAPTER  IV. 

3  A  door  for  the  word — i.e.,  "  a  door  for  the  word  to  come 
forth"  (dvpav  Tov  \6yov).  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "a  door  of 
utterance."  Compare  Acts  xiv.  27,  where  the  same  construction 
is  used  with  a  converse  meaning :  "  He  had  opened  a  door  of 
faith  unto  the  Gentiles,"  i.e.,  a  door  by  which  they  might  come 
in  to  the  faith  (dvpav  nia-Teus). 

6  lEach  one — i.e.,  each  in  the  way  suited  to  his  needs  and 
capacities.     Auth.,  "  every  man." 

10  Mark,  the  cousin  of  Barnabas.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem., 
coiTectly  folloAving  Yidg.,  consobrinus.  Auth.,  witli  Tynd., 
"  sister's  son."  The  Gr.  dv6;|/iJs  properly  means  "  fir.st  cousin," 
but  by  very  late  writers  is  used  instead  of  another  word  fur 
"nei^hew,"  whence  comes  probably  the  rendering  of  our  ver- 
sion (Lightfoot). 

12  Striving  in  his  prayers. — Auth.,  "labouring  fervently." 
Gr.,  a.ywpt(6/j.eyos,  as  if  the  struggles  of  the  games  were  still 
present  to  the  Apostle's  mind.  The  same  phrase  is  used  in 
Rom.  XV.  30. 

Fully  assured. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "complete," 
The  Gr.  word  has  the  same  sense  in  Rom.  iv.  21. 

13  Labour.— For  Auth.,  "  zeal,"  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 


THE  FIRST  EPISTLE    OF  PAUL   THE  APOSTLE 

TO   THE 

THESSALONIANS. 


CHAPTER  I. 

6  Imitators.— Aixth.,  "followers,"  as  in  1  Cor.  iv.  16,  where  see 
Note. 

9  Report  concerning  us.— So  Rliem,,  with  Yulg.,  annuntiant. 
All  other  Eugl.  versions,  "  shew  of  us."    Gr,,  airayyeWovo-i, 

10  A  living  and  true  God. — In  contradistinction  to  the  lifeless 
idols  and  false  gods  of  the  heathen.  The  article  inserted  in 
Auth.  is  not  in  the  Gr. 


CHAPTER  IL 

1  It  hath,  not  been  found  vain.— Hath  not  turned  out  to  be 
empty.  Auth.,  "  it  hath  not  been  in  vain,"  which  points  to  its 
results  rather  than  its  inception.  Vulg.,  no7i  inanis  fuit.  Wycl, 
"  it  was  not  vain," 

3  Not  of  error.— So  Wycl.,  following  Vulg.;  and  so  the  Gr. 
ir\dvri  is  Usually  to  be  translated,  not  as  Auth.,  following  Genev. 
and  Beza,  "  of  deceit." 

4  Approved  of  God.— So  Rhem.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  allowed," 
which  in  the  sense  of  "approved"  ("God  alloweththe  righteous") 
is  archaic.  The  same  Gr.  at  the  end  of  the  verse  is  rendered 
"  proveth."     Auth.,  "  trieth." 


374  I.  THESSALONIANS— II. 

7  As  when  a  nurse  cherisheth  her  own  children—  i.e., 

being  in  that  case  the  mother,  and  not  a  hireling.  The  words  in 
Gr.  are  emphatic,  ra  eavTrjs  reKva.     Auth.,  "  her  children." 

8  Even  so. — The  ovtus  is  comparative,  not  illative,  as  "  so "  is 
sometimes  in  English,  a  ligliter  form  of  "therefore." 

We  were  well  pleased.— Anth.,  "were  willing."  Tynd., 
"  our  good  will  was."  The  Gr.  is  the  word  often  used  in  speak- 
ing of  God's  "good  pleasure." 

9  That  we  might  not  burden.— Auth.,  "  be  chargeable."  The 
verb  is  cognate  to  the  noun  in  verse  6. 

11  Testi^ng. — Auth.,  "  charged  each  one  of  you."  The  Gr.  is  a 
verb  neuter.  The  construction  of  the  sentence  (being  participial 
throughout)  is  irregular,  requiring  a  A^erb  to  be  supplied,  which 
has  been  done  by  inserting  "  dealt  with  "  at  the  beginning.  lu 
the  Auth.,  the  participles  are  rendered  as  verbs. 

13  Received  .  .  .  accepted.— The  difference  between  the  two 
words  is  not  noticed  in  the  Yulg.,  or  in  any  Engl,  version. 

15  Drave  out  us. — So  the  Margin  of  Auth.,  following  Beza,  exe- 
gernnt.  The  Apostle  thus  reminds  the  Thessaloniaus  of  his 
expulsion  from  their  city,  the  history  of  which  is  given  by  St. 
Luke  in  Acts  xvii.  Auth.,  in  text,  and  all  previous  versions  have 
"persecuted  us,"  with  Yulg.,  joersecuti  sunt. 

17  Being  bereaved  of  you.— The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  made  orplians 
from  you."  Vulg.,  desolati  a  vohis.  Compare  John  xiv.  18. 
The  Apostle,  ha^dng  reminded  them  of  his  pai-ental  tenderue.-s 
and  care  (verses  7  and  11),  now  speaks  of  his  parental  sorrow. 
The  Auth.  misses  the  point  of  this  allusion  by  the  rendering  "being 
taken  from  you."  Rhem.  approaches  without  touching  it,  "  de- 
prived of  you." 

18  Because. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  wherefore." 


I.  TilESSALONIANS— IV.  375 


CHAPTER  III. 


4  We  are  to  suffer.— Auth.,  "  we  should  suffer."  Gr., /j-fWo/xfu. 
This  verb  often  implies  destination,  which  is  uot  sufficiently  ex- 
pressed by  "  shall,"  or  "should,"  as  those  auxiliary  words  are 
now  understood.  So  in  Mark  x.  32,  "  the  things  that  were  to 
happen." 

6  When  Timothy  came  even  now.— Auth.,  "But  now  when 
Timothy  came."  Timothy  had  just  returned  with  the  good 
tidings  which  gave  occasion  for  this  Epistle. 

12  Love. — So  Auth.  in  verse  12 ;  here  "  charity." 


CHAPTER  IV. 

1  Finally.— As  in  2  Thess.  iii.  1.  Auth.,  "  furthermore."  The 
Gr.  is  literally,  "  as  to  what  remains." 

Even  as  ye  do  walk.— Added  in  Gr.  text,  and  not  in  Auth. 

4-  To  possess  himself  of.—  The  Gr.  is  not  "  to  possess,"  as 
Auth.,  but  "  to  gain  possession  of,"  in  the  sense  in  which  we 
speak  of  being  "  self-possessed."  Let  him  gain  control  over  "  his 
own  vessel,"  i.e.,  his  body  ;  the  body  being  thus  described  by  the 
ancient  j)hilosopliers  in  its  relation  to  the  mind :  e.g.,  Cicero  says 
{Tusc.  Bisp.  i.  22) :  "  The  body  is  as  it  were  the  vessel  of  the 
mind "  ("  Corpus  quasi  vas  est  aut  aliqiood  animi  receptaculwn") ; 
and  so  Lucretius,  his  contemj)orary  poet,  iii.  441,  "  Quippe 
etiam  corpus  quod  vas  quasi  constitit  ejus  "  (i.e.,  animce). 

5  The  passion  of  lust.— Auth.,  "  the  lust  of  concupiscence." 
See  Note  on  Col.  iii.  5. 

6  Transgress. — Or,  as  in  Margin,  "  overreach."  Auth.,  "  to 
defraud."     The  Gr.  is  commonly  rendered  "  to  be  covetous." 

In  all  these  things.— Auth.,   "of  all  such,"  which  is  am- 
biguous and  obscure  in  its  reference. 

7  In  sanctification — i.e.,  "  in  the  way  of,"  or  "  by  a  course  of 
sanctification."  Auth.,  "  unto  holiness,"  which  points  to  the  end 
that  is  to  be  at faiucd.  The  Gr.  speaks  of  the  way,  the  process, 
and  the  preposition  is  "  in,"  not  "  to." 


376  I.  THESSALONIANS— V. 

8  Rejecteth. — The  Engl,  versions  here,  as  elsewhere,  have  "  de- 
spiseth,"  following  Ymg.,  spernit. 

9  Love  of  the  brethren. —  Auth.,  "brotherly  love."      So  in 
Rom.  xii.  10.     Yulg.,  de  charitate  fraternitatis. 

11  Study  to  be  quiet. — Literally,  "be  ambitions."  Using  the 
figure  of  speech  called  oxymoron,  he  says  in  effect,  "  Let  it  be 
your  ambition  to  be  without  ambition." 

13  Them  that  fall  asleep.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "are 
fallen  asleep."  In  verses  14  and  15  the  Gr.  participle  is  in  a 
past  tense,  but  here  in  the  present. 

The  rest. — Auth.,  "  others."  So  at  chap.  v.  6.  The  Gr.  is 
ol  \oLiroi  ("  the  rest  of  mankind  ").  In  Luke  xviii.  9,  the  same 
Gr.  is  rendered  "  the  rest  of  men." 


CHAPTER  V. 

3  When  they  are  saying. — The  Gr.  is  in  the  present  tense, 
and  represents  them  in  such  a  state  as  to  be  saying  so-and-so. 
Auth.,  "  when  they  shall  say,"  points  to  their  utterance  of  the 
saying,  as  if  it  were  to  be  the  signal  for  the  event  which  follows. 

14  The  faint-hearted. — So  Wycl.,  "the  men  of  little  heart." 
Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  the  feebleminded."  The  Gr.  imphes 
want  of  courage  rather  than  weakness  of  mind ;  though  "  mind  " 
in  the  New  Testament  is  a  comprehensive  word. 

15  Follow  after  that  which  is  good.— This  is  rather  more 
correct  than  "follow"  (Auth.),  where  it  is  not  an  example  which 
is  to  be  followed,  but  an  ideal  which  is  to  be  pursued.  Gr., 
SiicKere.    So  1  Tim.  vi.  11 :  "  Follow  after  righteousness." 

23  Be  preserved  entire. — Without  loss  or  detriment.  Auth., 
"your  whole  spirit  and  soul  and  body  be  preserved."      Gr., 

d\6K\T}pOV. 

Without  blame  at  the  coming — i.e.,  so  as  to  be  blameless 
in  His  presence.  Auth.,  "blameless  unto  the  coming."  The 
Gr.  preposition,  as  in  chap.  iv.  7,  is  iy,  not  ds. 
27  I  adjure  you.— As  in  the  Margin  of  Auth.  The  Gr._is  a 
more  solemn  word  than  "  charge,"  and  is  used  in  Mark  v.  7  and 
Acts  xix.  13. 


THE   SECOND   EPISTLE    OF   PAUL   THE   APOSTLE 

TO   THE 

THESSALONIANS. 


CHAPTER  L 

6  If  so  "be  that.— Auth.,  "  seeing  that."  Gr.,  ("iwep.  The  Apostle 
puts  liyj)othetically  what  he  knows  will  be  accepted  as  a  certain 
truth  and  a  good  reason  for  what  he  has  already  advanced.  So 
Rom.  A^ii.  9. 

7  In  flaming  fire. — This  is  connected  more  probably  with  the 
preceding  than,  as  all  Engl,  versions  and  Yulg.,  with  the  following 
clause.  The  revelation  of  the  Lord  from  heaven,  not  the  render- 
ing of  vengeance,  is  spoken  of  as  taking  place  in  fii-e.  Compare 
Dan.  vii.  9,  10 ;  Rev.  xix.  12. 

8  Rendering  vengeance. — The  j)hrase  is,  literally,  "giving 
vengeance,"  SiSovros  for  airoSiSouros. 

10  To  be  marvelled  at. — Auth.  (alone),  "  to  be  adnured,"  follow- 
ing Yulg.,  admirabilis  fieri.  The  Or.,  Qavfid^eLv,  is  expressive 
rather  of  wonder  than  of  admiration,  and  is  so  rendered  by 
Wycl.  and  Tynd. 

11  To  which,  end. — The  Gr.  is  eJs  '6,  the  contrary  of  "  wherefore  " 
(Auth.),  which  woidd  be  5(($.  "To  which  end," -sdz.,  "  that  oxiv 
God  may  count  you  worthy,"  &c.,  resuming  the  train  of  thouglit 
in  which  he  was  proceeding  in  verse  5. 

Worthy  of  your  calling. — "  Tour  "  is  to  be  supplied  rather 
than  "  this,"  as  in  Auth.  Compare  2  Peter  i.  10  :  "  Make  your 
calling  and  election  sui'e." 

Every  desire  of  goodness. — As  to  this  meaning  of  evSoKia, 
see  on  1  Thess.  ii.  8 ;  Phil.  i.  15.  Auth.,  "  all  the  good  pleasure 
of  his  goodness,"  thus  giving  to  fvSoKia  its  moi-e  usual  sense,  but 
to  support  this  translation  inserting  his  {i.e.,  God's).  The  word 
translated  "  goodness  "  occurs  in  three  places  besides  this  in  the 
New  Testament,  and  in  each  refers  to  man,  not  to  God. 


378  II.  THESSALONIANS— II. 


CHAPTER  IT. 

1  Touching  the  coining. — The  Gr.  virep  means,  properly,  "  in 
behalf  of."  But  it  is  "  iu  regard  of,"  "  concerning,"  in  Rom. 
ix.  27 ;  1  Tliess.  iii.  2.  AU  Engl,  versions  ti*eat  the  woi'ds  as  an 
adjuration,  like  Rom.  xii.  1,  where  the  Gr.  is  Std,  not  inrep.  The 
Vulg.  also  has  per  adventum  Domini.  But  there  is  no  example 
of  inrep  in  that  sense ;  and  the  other,  "  concerning,"  falls  in  more 
naturally  witli  the  context ;  for  it  would  be  strange  if  St.  Paul 
were  to  adjure  them  by  that  concerning  which  he  was  about  to 
teach  them.  So  Chiysostom  says,  "  He  here  discourses  about 
the  coming  of  Christ."  (Alford's  Note ;  and  so  Wordsworth 
and  Bengel.) 

2  Be  not  q^uickly  shaken  from  your  mind— i.e.,  from  your 
settled  mind  and  expectation.     Auth.,  "  in  mind." 

Is  now  present. — The  Gr.  ivea-Ti^Key  always,  in  the  New 
Testament,  has  this  sense  (AJford).  Comj)are  Rom.  viii,  38; 
1  Cor.  iii.  22.     Aiith.,  "  is  at  hand." 

3  The  falling  away.— AU  Engl,  versions  overlook  the  article. 
"  The  apostacy  "  is  probably  that  which  is  foreshadowed  by  our 
Lord  in  Luke  xviii.  8. 

The  man  of  sin. — The  article  is  here  over-translated  in  Tynd. 
and  Auth.,  "  that  man  of  sin." 

4  Setting  himself  forth  as  God. — Auth.,  "shcAving  himself 
that  he  is  God."  The  Gr.  is  not  "  shewing "  in  the  seuse_  of 
"  demonstrating  that  he  is,"  but  exhibiting  himself  as  being 
God. 

6  That  which  restraineth.— That  wliich  by  God's  purpose 
keeps  him  back,  to  the  end  that  he  may  be  revealed  in  his  own 
season,  in  the  time  appointed  for  him,  and  not  before.  Auth., 
"  ye  know  what  withholdeth  that  he  might  be  revealed  in  his 
time."  "  That  he  may  "  represents  in  the  Gr.  els  t6  with  the 
infinitive  mood,  and  "  in  his  own  season  "  ev  rep  ahrov  Kaipcf :  and 
with  this  literal  rendering  the  passage,  which  is  dark  in  Auth., 
becomes  clear  and  perspicuous. 

7  For  the  mystery  of  lawlessness  doth  already  work. 

— Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  the  mysteiy  of  iniquity,"  adopting 
the  word  of  the  Yulg.,  iniquitatis.  This,  however,  is  not  a 
rendering  into  Engl,  of  the  Gr.  Itvopilas,  which  means  "law- 
breaking,"  as  in  1  John  iii.  4.     The   stress  thrown   on  "  the 


II  THESSALONIANS— II.  379 

mystery,"  by  its  beiug  put  fii-st  in  the  sentence,  and  thus  brought 
prominently  into  contrast  with  "  revealed "  in  the  last  verse, 
cannot  be  preserved  in  English  without  paraphrase,  as  thus — 
"  At  present  the  mystery  works  as  a  thing  secret,  an  arcanum, 
not  yet  divulged ;  but  it  shall  be  revealed  in  its  appointed  time." 

Only  there  is  one  that  restraineth.— The  Gr.  admits  of 
either  this  or  the  Marginal  rendering.  The  Auth.  gives  the 
same  meaning,  though  not  in  a  manner  consistent  with  the 
construction  of  the  G-r.  The  word  for  "restraineth"  (Auth., 
"  letteth  ")  is  the  same  as  in  verse  6. 

8  The  lawless  one. — Tynd.  and  Auth.,  "  that  wicked,"  again 
obscuring  the  connection  by  varying  the  word. 

Bring  to  nought.  —  Auth.,  "  destroy,"  the  rendering  in  Auth. 
of  eight  other  words.  Karapye(a  is  usually  rendered  "  do  away  ;  " 
literally  it  is  "  to  make  barren  or  void." 

The  manifestation. — Auth.,  "the  brightness."  The  Gr. 
epiphaneia  occurs  only  here  and  five  times  in  the  pastoral 
Epistles  of  St.  Paul,  where  it  is  always  rendered  "appearance" 
in  Auth.  "  The  manifestation  of  his  presence  precedes  his 
actual  presence"  {Bengel).  So  Milton :  "  Far  off  his  presence 
shone  "  (Alforcl). 

10  Deceit. — So  Wycl.  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  deceivableness," 
an  obsolete  word,  which  in  Old  English  denoted  the  active  pro- 
pensity to  deceive,  not  (as  its  termination  would  indicate)  the 
passive  liability  to  be  deceived.  The  Gr.  a-n-aTri  is  in  other  places 
rendered  "  deceit  "  or  "  deceitf ulness  "  iu  Auth. 

Are  perishing. — The  Gr.  is  the  present  participle — not  those 
who  "  perish"  (as  Auth.),  but  those  who  are  in  the  way  to  perish. 

11  Sendeth. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  shall  send"  (Auth.).  St. 
Paul  sees  \dvidly  this  coming  portent,  and  speaks  of  it  as  if 
already  present. 

A  working  of  error.  —  "Working"  represents  the  Gr. 
ivfpyeiav  ("energy  "),  akin  to  the  verb  rendered  by  "  worketh"  in 
verse  7 ;  and  "  error  "  stands  for  lTr\dvri,  as  in  1  Thess.  ii.  3,  and 
elsewhere.  This  active  working,  this  "  energy  of  error,"  is  iu 
Auth.  "  a  strong  delusion," 

12  Judged. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  damned."  Comp.  Matt,  xxiii. 
33  ;    Rom.  xiv.  23. 

13  In  sanctiiication. — Auth.,  "  through,"  as  in  1  Thess.  iv.  7. 


380  II.  THESSALONIANS— III. 


CHAPTER  in. 


1  May  run. — The  literal  renderiug  of  the  viAad  phrase  o£  the 
Apostle.  So  Wycl. ;  aucl  Vulg.,  cturai.  Tyud.,  "  may  have  free 
passage  "  ;  whence  Auth.,  "  may  have  free  course."  Compare 
Ps.  cxlvii.  15,  "  His  word  runneth  very  swiftly." 

3  Prom  the  evil  one. — Auth.,  "from  evil."  This  thought  pro- 
bably arose  out  of  the  mention  of  "  evil  men  "  in  the  preceding 
verse.  There  is  a  special  reason  for  attributing  the  masculine 
sense  to  the  word  here,  as  the  Apostle  has  sj^oken  of  Satan  iu 
chap.  ii.  9 ;  and  in  the  former  Epistle;  chap.  ii.  18,  and  cha]). 
iii.  5. 

5  The  patience  of  Christ.— So  Wycl.,  Tynd.,  and  Cranm., 
following  Vulg.  Auth.,  "the  patient  waiting  for  Christ,"  with 
Genev.,  following  Beza,  Christi patientem  expectationem  ;  a  beau- 
tiful idea,  but  not  contained  in  the  Gr.,  which  must  mean  the 
patient  endurance,  of  which  Christ  is  om*  example.  So  Chrysos- 
tom,  "  that  ye  may  be  patient,  as  He  was  patient." 

The  Auth.,  however,  has  on  its  side  the  interpretation  of  some 
ancient  commentators,  as  Ambrose,  also  of  Erasmus  and  A  La- 
pide ;  and  both  Chrysostom  and  Theophylact  give  it  as  an  alter- 
native (Alford).  Compare  Rev.  xiv.  12,  "Here  is  the  j)atieuce 
of  the  saints  " — i.e.,  "  the  imtience  which  is  shown  by  them." 

8  Bread  at  any  man's  hand. — Literally,  "from  any  man." 
Auth.,  "  any  man's  bread."  "  To  eat  bread"  is  a  customary  He- 
brew idiom.     Compare  verse  12. 

But  in  labour  and  travail  [we  ate],  working.  —  Auth., 
with  a  change  of  construction,  and  a  transposition  of  the  Gr. 
order,  "  but  wi'ought  with  laboiu-  and  travail." 

That  we  might  not  burden  any  of  you— i.e.,  "  by  the 

expense  of  maintaining  us,"  as  iu  1  Thess.  i.  9.  Auth.,  "  that  Ave 
might  not  be  chargeable." 

9  The  right. — Auth.,  "  the  power."  As  to  the  Gr.  e^oua-la,  see 
Note  on  Col.  i.  13. 

16  In  all  ways. — In  every  form;  peace  inward,  external  with 
each  other,  with  the  world,  with  God.  Gr.,  iv  vavri  rpSirci).  Anth., 
"  always." 


THE  FIRST  EPISTLE   OF  PAUL  THE  APOSTLE  TO 

TIMOTHY. 

CHAPTER  L 

1  Our  hope. — The  insei-tiou  " xoliich  is"  (Aiith.)  is  not  required. 
Compare  Col.  i.  27  :  "  Christ  .  .  .  the  hope  of  glory." 

2  My  true  child. — Auth.,  "  my  own  son."  Gr.,  yvrtcrltf,  as  in 
Phil.  iv.  3.     See  Note  on  Phil.  ii.  20. 

4  The  which. — The  relative  is  causal,  not  defining,  a'hivis. 
Aiith.,  "which." 

A  dispensation. — Or,  as  in  Margin,  "  a  stewardship ; "  by 
change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  edifying  "  (Auth.)  :  the  dispensation 
made  by  God  to  man  of  the  spiritual  food  and  sustenance,  which 
His  ministers,  hence  called  His  "  stewards,"  are  commissioned  to 
supply.     See  Ephes.  i.  10,  iii.  2, 

So  do  I  now. — The  sentence  in  the  Gr.  is  not  concluded.  The 
words  inserted  appear  to  fill  the  void  better  than  "  so  do,"  as 
Auth.,  with  Tynd.  and  Erasmus. 

5  The  end  of  the  charge. — Referring  to  verse  3.  The  con- 
nection is  lost  in  Auth.,  "  commandment,"  which  is  suggestive 
of  some  Scriptural  precept.  Timothy  was  to  charge  certain 
persons  that  they  should  not  teach  false  doctrine  ;  but  he  was  to 
remember  that  the  end  and  purpose  of  his  so  charging  them  was 
the  increase  of  love.  This  connection  between  verses  5  and  6  is 
obscured  in  Auth.  by  commencing  the  latter  verse  with  "  Now," 
as  if  a  new  subject  were  entered  upon. 

6  Vain  talking.— Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "vain  jangling."  The 
Gr.  does  not  contain  any  idea  of  "jangling,"  i.e.,  of  dissonant 
noise  or  unmeaning  chatter.     Yulg.,  vaniloquixim. 

9  The  unruly.— Not  exactly  "the  disobedient,"  as  Auth.,  but 
those  who  are  unwilling  to  submit  themselves  to  rule,  insub- 
ordinate. 


382  I.  TIMOTHY— I. 

10  False  swearers. — Tynd.,  "perjured;"  amondcd  but  made 
cumbrous  iu  Auth.  by  the  addition  of  "  persons." 

The  sound  doctrine. — The  exact  meaning  of  the  Gr.  is 
"  healthful."  This  phrase,  and  other  terms  relating  in  their 
primary  sense  to  physical  health  and  disease,  are  specially 
characteristic  of  the  pastoral  Epistles,  written  at  the  time  when 
St.  Paul  had  with  him  St.  Luke,  the  "  beloved  physician,"  as  his 
companion  in  travel  and  imprisonment. 

11  The  gospel  of  the  glory. — So  Wycl,  Tynd.,  and  Cranm. 
Auth.,  following  Genev.  and  Beza,  "  the  glorious  gospel."  "  The 
glory  of  God"  is  His  majesty  and  mercy,  which  the  Gospel 
reveals  to  us.  Compare  2  Cor.  iv,  4 :  "  The  light  of  the  gospel 
of  the  glory  of  Christ." 

12  Appointing  me  to  his  service. — AU  Engl,  versions, "  putting 
[or,  '  and  put ']  me  into  the  ministry."  The  Gr.  verb  is  in  the 
middle  voice,  containing  a  reflective  sense,  and  implying  that  it 
was  for  His  own  Divine  pm-pose  that  He  did  this.  Compare 
Acts  xiii.  47. 

15  Faithful  is  the  saying. — This  emphatic  phrase,  used  occa- 
sionally by  St.  Paul  in  introducing  a  familiar  Christian  maxim, 
is  another  characteristic  of  his  pastoral  Epistles,  and  is  not 
found  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament.  Compare  chaps,  iii.  1, 
iv.  9 ;  2  Tim.  ii.  11 ;  Titus  iii.  8.  In  the  Old  Testament  (LXX. 
version)  a  very  similar  phrase  occurs  (2  Kings  x.  6) :  "  True  is 
the  report."  It  is  thought  to  be  an  indication  that  these  Epistles 
were  wi-itten  at  a  comparatively  late  date,  when  the  main  tniths 
of  the  Gospel  began  to  be  embodied  in  short  pithy  sentences, 
wliich  were  easily  committed  to  memory,  and  obtained  general 
acceptation  among  the  believers.  "Faithful,"  i.e.,  worthy  of 
being  believed:  it  looks  like  the  germ  of  a  creed.  Auth.,  "it  is 
a  faithful  saying,"  gives  the  sense  of  the  formula,  but  not  the 
emphasis,  which  lies  on  the  first  word,  "faithful." 

16  That  in  me  as  chief.— Auth.,  "that  in  me  first."  Tynd., 
"  that  Jesus  Christ  should  first  shew  on  me."  Tlie  Gr.  is 
"fii'st"  {■rrpdiTCf),  both  in  this  verse  and  in  the  preceding,  and 
should  be  translated  by  the  same  word,  that  word  being  "  chief." 
So  says  St.  Augustine  (on  Ps.  xx.) :  "Taking  precedence  of  all 
others  not  in  time,  but  in  the  magnitude  of  his  sin."  The 
change  made  in  Auth.,  from  "  chief  "  in  verse  15  to  "first"  in 
this  verse,  would  imply  that  the  Apostle  passes  from  the  one 
thought  to  the  other.  "  Foremost  "  might  have  been  a  suitable 
rendering  in  both  places,  but  would  have  been  detrimental  to  the 
clearness  of  the  sense,  as  well  as  to  the  rhythm  of  the  sentence. 


I  TIMOTHY— IT.  383 

All  his  long-suffering  gives  the  force  of  the  article  tV 
&va(Tav,  which  is  lost  in  Auth.,  "all  longsiiffering,"  Comj)are 
Acts  XX.  18,  and  John  xvi.  13. 

For  an  ensample  of  them.— This  change  from  Auth.,  "for 
a  pattern  to  them,"  is  intended  to  express  the  force  of  the  genitive 
"  of  them,"  shewing  that  it  was  not  held  out  as  a  pattern  to 
them  for  their  use  and  imitation,  but  as  their  possession,  "  their 
pattern  or  example,"  according  to  English  idiom;  but  it  m;iy 
be  doubted  whether  the  change  Avas  sufficiently  important  or 
significant  to  be  worth  making.  Compare  2  Peter  ii.  6,  where 
the  change  has  not  been  made. 

17  Incorruptible.— The  Gr.  is  so  rendered  in  Auth.  in  all  the 
other  places  (seven  in  number)  in  which  it  occurs ;  hei'e  "  im- 
mortal," with  all  Engl,  versions.     Wycl.,  "  undeadly." 

"  Wise." — (Auth.)     Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

19  Having  thrust  from  them. — The  Gr.  denotes  more  violence 
than  "  put  away "  (Aixth.),  and  is  also  in  liarmony  with  the 
nautical  metaphor  which  follows :  "  Piishiug  off  from  the  land 
on  which  they  might  have  found  safety,  they  made  shipwi'eck 
concerning  the  faith." 

20  That  they  might  be  taught — i.e.,  by  the  Christian  disci- 
pline of  siiffering.  Auth.,  "that  they  may  learn."  The  "de- 
livering to  Satan "  is  thoiight  to  be  said  in  reference  to  a 
formiUa  for  excommunication,  combining  expulsion  from  the 
outward  means  of  grace  with  the  infliction  of  bodily  suffering. 
{ElUcott,  and  Wordsivorth,  Notes  on  1  Cor.  v.  5,  where  the  same 
phrase  occurs.) 


CHAPTER  II. 

1  I  exhort  therefore  first  of  all.— Auth.,  following  Tynd., 
"  I  exhort  therefore  that  first  of  all,"  as  if  in  the  supplications 
of  tlie  Church  the  first  place  were  to  be  given  to  intercession ; 
whereas  the  meaning  of  the  Gr.  is,  "I  begin  my  exhortations 
with  this  command." 

2  In  high  place. — The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  in  eminence,"  and  only 
by  inference  suggestive  of  "  authority,"  as  in  Auth.     Wycl.,  "  all 


384  I.  TIMOTHY— II. 

that  be  set  in  liigliness."  Yulg.,  in  sublimitate.  The  word 
occurs  in  the  LXX. — e.g.,  2  Mace.  ii.  11— but  not  again  in  the 
New  Testament. 

Tranquil  and  quiet. — AU  Engl,  versions,  following  Vulg., 
•'  quiet  and  peaceable."  The  difference  between  the  two  Gr. 
words  is  said  to  be  tliat  the  former  denotes  the  absence  of 
molestation  from  without,  the  latter,  inward  quietness,  "  the 
ornament  of  a  meek  and  quiet  spirit "  (1  Peter  iii.  4). 

Gravity. — Auth.,  "  honesty."  Yulg.,  castitate.  The  word,  in 
connection  with  "  godliness,"  means  the  effect  which  godliness 
has  on  the  outward  demeanour.  It  is  rendered  "  graA-ity "  in 
chap.  iii.  4  (Auth.). 

4  Who  willeth. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  who  will  have  all 
men  to  be  saved,"  which  sounds  like  a  determinate  purpose. 
Gr.,  ee\ei.  Yulg.,  vult  salvos  fieri.  Rhem.,  by  a  singular 
adaptation  of  Tynd.  to  Yulg.,  "who  will  all  men  to  be  saved." 
Wycl.,  "  that  wole  that  all  men  be  made  saaf ." 

6  Himself  man. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  the  man."  Gr.,  nfcrlrrts 
0€oi"  Kol  avdpd-rruv  iudpoonos  .  .  .  where  "man,"  though  without 
the  article,  is  made  emphatic  by  its  iteration.  The  manhood 
of  Chi'ist  is  thus  strongly  affirmed,  as  if  the  false  teachers  were 
contemplated  wlio  denied  it.  Moreover,  it  was  in  His  human 
nature  that  He  gave  Himself  "  a  ransom  for  aU  "  (verse  6)  and 
fulfilled  His  mediatorial  office.  He  is  described  not  as  "the 
man,"  or  "  a  man,"  but  as  "  man,"  the  representative  of  humanity 
{Alforcl). 

6  The  testimony  to  he  borne  in  its  own  times. — The  Gr. 

requires  a  supplement  of  this  kind,  or  a  paraphrase  such  as 
Aiith.,  "  to  be  testified  in  due  time ;  "  the  sense  being  that  the 
testimony  as  to  His  mediation  was  to  be  given  to  men  in  the 
appointed  time  by  His  death.  By  preserving  the  word  "  testi- 
mony "  the  reference  of  the  relative  "  whereunto,"  at  the  begin- 
ning of  the  next  verse,  is  more  clearly  seen. 

7  In  faith  and  truth.— Tynd.  and  Auth.,  "  in  faith  and  verity ; " 
a  typical  instance  of  the  studied  variation  of  the  Engl,  version 
even  when  the  same  Gr.  word  is  rejieated  in  the  same  sentence. 

8  The  men. — In  contradistinction  to  "  women  "  in  verse  9 — (the 
article  is  here  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text) — with  regard  to 
whom  the  rule  is  laid  down  which  prevailed  in  tlie  Jewisli 
synagogues,  that  they  were  not  to  lift  up  their  voices  in  prayer. 


I.  TIMOTHY— II.  SS5 

Disputing. —Tlie  Gr.  is  so  reiidored  in  Autli.  at  Pliil.  ii.  14; 
but  here  "doubting;"  and  so  Cluysostom.  Vnlg.,  discep- 
tatione. 

9  Shamefastness.— Correctly  so  printed  in  Auth.  of  1611.  Tlio 
modern  mode  of  spelling  the  w.ord  "sliamcfast"  arose  fi-om  the 
erroneous  notion  that  it  denotes  shame  as  shewn  in  the  face 
("  shamefaced  "),  whereas  the  second  syllable  is  an  adjective,  as 
in  steadfast :  "  made  fast,  and  settled  in  (an  honourable)  shame." 
See  Trench  on  "  New  Testament  Synonyms." 

Raiment. — Tynd.  and  Auth.,  "  array."  The  Gr.  signifies 
"  clothing,"  not  "  ornament."  "  Array,"  in  its  original  sense  of 
"  clothing,"  is  antiquated ;  while  "  raiment,"  another  form  of 
the  word,  is  still  understood  in  that  sense  only. 

11  Quietness. — All  Engl,  versions,  "  silence,"  following  Yulg. 
The  Gr.  is  cognate  to  "  quiet,"  in  verse  2. 

12  Permit.— So  Rhem.  Auth.,  "  suffer."  The  Gr.  is  more  com- 
monly rendered  "  permit,"  though  "  suffer "  has  been  kept  in 
Matt.  viii. 

To  have  dominion.— Auth.,  "  to  usurp  authority."  Tlie  Gr. 
is  not  found  in  classical  authors ;  it  is  defiued  to  mean  "  exercise 
lordship." 

14  Hath  fallen  into.— More  littn-ally,  "hath  come  to  be  in" 
(7670^61'  eV).  Auth.,  "  was  in,"  following  Tynd.  Cranm.,  "  was 
subdued  to." 

15  She  shall  be   saved  through  the  childbearing.— The 

article,  omitted  in  Auth.,  has  great  significance.  The  obvious 
iuterj)retation  is,  "  woman  shall  be  saved  through  the  discharge 
of  her  maternal  duties ; "  but,  as  ancient  expositors  held,  and 
modern  commentators  now  allow,  there  is  a  deeper  meaning 
underlying,  if  not  displacing,  that  which  apx)ears  on  the  surface  : 
"  The  whole  female  sex,  and  even  the  whole  of  mankind,  is  saved 
through  the  birth  of  Christ  born  of  a  woman  according  to  the 
flesh,  if  they — i.e.,  the  women — abide  in  faith  and  love,  and  in. 
sanctification  with  modesty." 


386  I.  TIMOTHY— III. 


CHAPTER  in. 


1  Paithfal.— See  Note  on  cliaix  i.  15. 

2  Without  reproach.— Autli.,  "  blameless."  The  Gr.  is  liter, 
ally,  "  not  to  be  laid  hold  of ;  "  "  one  Avho  offers  no  handle  for 
reproach."  Rheni.,  "  irreprehensible."  It  occurs  three  times  in 
tliis  Epistle,  but  not  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament. 

Temperate. — The  Gr.  properly  means,  "  abstinent  as  regards 
wine."     Auth.,  following  Genev.,  "^^gilant." 

Sober-minded. — The  usual  meaning  of  the  Gr.  adxppuiv.  Auth., 
"  sober." 

Orderly. — Shewing  in  the  outward  conduct  a  weU-rogulated 
mind.  Auth.,  "  of  good  behaviour " — a  somewhat  colourless 
phrase.  Tynd.,  "honestly  appai'elled."  Genev.,  "modest." 
Vulg.,  ornahim.  A  singular  diversity  of  interpretations,  none 
of  which  can  be  said  to  be  unsuitable  to  the  Gr.  k6(T)iiov. 

3  No  .brawler. — Literally,  "  not  violent  over  wine,"  as  in  the 
Margin  of  the  Auth.,  which  has  in  the  text,  "not  given  to  wine." 

Gentle. — Axith.,  "  patient."     See  Note  on  Phil.  iv.  5. 

Not  contentious. — Tynd.,  "abhon-ing  fighting."     Auth.,  "no 

brawler." 

No  lover  of  money. — This  is  the  literal  meaning  of  the  Gr. 
Auth..  "  not  covetous."     Tynd.,  "  abhorring  covetousness." 

6  Puffed  up. — A  metaphor  from  smoke.     Auth.,  "  lifted  up  with 

pride." 

10  Serve  as  deacons. — ^Auth.,  "  use  the  office  of  deacons ;  "  a 
l)rolix  expression  for  the  single  Gr.  word,  which,  on  the  other 
hand,  is  here  too  cm-tly  rendered  by  Tynd.,  "  minister,"  being 
cognate  to  the  word  "  deacons,"  for  whom  the  admonition  is 
intended  (verse  8)  ;  and  so  in  verse  13. 

11  Women.— Tynd.  and  Auth.,  "  their  wives."  The  Gr.  is  simply 
yvvaiKas,  and  there  is  nothing  to  shew  that  the  wives  of  deacons 
are  intended. 

13  A  good  standing.— A  good  position ;  Avhether  in  the  sight  of 
God  or  man  is  not  said.  All  Engl,  versions,  "  a  good  degree," 
following  Vulg.,  f/rcidum  bonum.  The  meaning  may  be  "ad- 
vancement to  the  liigher  offices  in  tlie  Churcli."  or  a  good  degree 
in  heaven,  where  there  are  different  degrees  of  blessedness.  The 
jivoid  properly  means  a  step  or  standing-place,   and   does   not 


I.  TIMOTHY— IV. ■  387 

occur  again  m  the  New  Testament,     As  to  the  interpretation, 
see  Alford's  and  Ellicott's  Notes. 

16  He  who.— Auth.,  "  God."  The  Gr.  text  has  long  been  doubt- 
ful ;  but  it  is  now  ascertained  that  there  is  a  great  preponderance 
of  the  most  ancient  MSS.  and  versions  in  favour  of  the  rehitive, 
and  of  the  MSS.  for  the  masculine  '6s, "  He  who,"  while  the  versions 
vary  between  the  masculine  and  the  neuter  S,  which  is  the 
reading  followed  by  the  Yulg.  The  two  words  &s6s  and  '6s,  as 
wi-itten  in  the  MSS.,  02  and  02,  differ  but  little,  and  the 
one  might  easily,  in  copying,  be  mistaken  or  written  for  the 
other.  The  masculine  "  He  who "  necessitates  the  insertion, 
mentally  if  not  in  the  text,  of  "  Christ " — "  Christ,  who  was 
manifested,"  &c.  Supposing  Q^Ss  ("  God ")  to  be  genuine,  the 
passage  would  still  refer  to  Christ,  and  would  be  a  declaration 
of  His  Godliead,  which,  however,  needs  not  such  dubious  su^jport 
as  might  be  derived  from  a  disputed  reading.  Alford,  EUicott, 
Wordsworth,  are  in  favour  of  the  relative.  For  the  use  of 
the  word  "  mystery "  in  relation  to  Christ,  compare  Col.  i.  26, 
27 ;  and  especially  Col.  ii.  2,  according  to  the  revised  Gr.  text, 
*•  that  they  may  know  the  mystery  of  God,  even  Christ." 


CHAPTER  IV. 

1  Fall  away. — The  Gr.  is  so  rendered  in  Luke  viii.  13;  and  the 
cognate  noim,  apostasia,  "  a  falling  away,"  in  2  Thess.  ii.  3. 
All  Engl,  versions  here  have  "depart,"  following  Yulg.,  dis 
cedent. 

2  Through  the  hypocrisy  of  men  that  speak  lies.— The 

Gr.  is  literally  rendei'ed  thus.  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  speak- 
ing lies  in  hypocrisy,"  as  if  in  grammatical  connection  with 
"some"  (verse  1),  instead  of  denoting  the  mode  or  cause  of 
their  "  falling  away." 

Branded  in  their  own  conscience.— As  slaves  Avere  on 
their  forehead.  Auth.,  "  having  their  conscience  seared;"  i.e., 
rendered  callous  and  dead  as  by  cautery. 

4  Nothing  is  to  be  rejected.— So  Rhem.  Auth.,  "refused." 
This  saying,  Avith  regard  to  the  gifts  of  the  gods,  was  a  proverb 
among  the  ancient  Greeks,  probably  derived  from  Uomer,  Iliad, 
iii.  65.     (Field.) 


388  I.  TIMOTHY— V. 

6  Thou  nast  followed. — The  Gr.  is  the  same  word  as  in 
Luke  i.  3 ;  2  Tim.  iii.  10,  and  is  better  rendered  by  Tyud., 
"continually  followed,"  than  by  Auth.,  "thou  hast  obtained." 
following  Rhem.,  misled  by  Vulg.,  assecutus  es.  Until  now  is 
added  to  give  the  full  force  of  the  verb  in  the  perfect  tense, 
"  hast  followed  all  along,  and  stiU  art  following." 

8  Is  profitable  for  a  little.— Bodily  austerities  are  profitable 
in  some  small  degree.  Gr.,  Trphs  6\iyov.  Auth.,  with  Tynd., 
"profiteth  little,"  which  is  an  allowable  rendering.  The  con- 
struction is  the  same  in  this  and  the  next  clause.  Yulg., 
ad  modicum     .     .     .     ad  omnia. 

10  Strive. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  suffer  reproach." 

We  have  our  hope  set  on.— Literally,    "We    have    hoped 
upon."     So  in  chap.  v.  5.     Auth.,  "  we  trust  in." 

13  Give  heed. — Or,  as  would  now  be  said,  "  give  attention,"  i-athor 
than  "give  attendance"  (Auth.).  WycL,  "Take  tent  to  reading." 

15  Be  diligent  in  these  things. — Auth.,  "meditate,"  following 
Yulg.,  meditare.     The  Gr.  is  ixiXera. 

Thy  progress. — Auth.,  "  profiting  ;  "  as  in  Phil.  i.  12,  25. 


CHAPTER  Y. 

Exhort. — So  Tynd.  This  is  the  usual  translation  of  irapaKa\fu, 
where  the  context  shews  that  au  admonition  is  meant,  not  a 
request.  Auth.,  "  intreat,"  with  Rhem.  Wycl.  and  Yulg., 
obsecra.  These  milder  words  apparently  were  chosen  becanse  of 
the  older  men  to  whom  the  exhortation  is  in  the  first  instance 
applied. 

Grandchildren. — Tynd.  and  Auth.,  "  nephews,"  now  obsolete 
in  this  sense,  Avhich  it  retained  in  the  time  of  Locke,  wlio  says, 
"  All  men  who  believe  in  th-e  Bible  must  derive  from  Noah  ;  but 
the  rest  of  the  world  think  little  of  his  sons  or  nephews."  Yulg., 
7ie2)otes. 

To  shew  piety  toward  their  own  family— i.e.,  towards 
their  own  parents  or  progenitors  literally,  "towards  their  own 
house."     So  Chrysostom,  and  other  ancient  expositors ;  not  as 


I.  TIMOTHY— VT.  389 

Yulg.,  "to  nile  their  own  household."   domum   suam  regere, 
followed  by  Tynd.     Ai;th.,  "  to  show  i>iety  at  home." 

8  An  unbeliever.— Auth.,  "  an  infidel."    See  2  Oor.  vi.  15. 

9  Be  enrolled.— Auth.,  "bo  taken  into  the  number."  Tynd., 
"  be  chosen."  The  Gr.  woi-d,  from  which  comes  the  Engl. 
catalogue,  means  properly, "  be  put  on  a  list" — the  most  probable 
interpretation  of  the  phrase  in  this  place  being  tliat  it  has 
reference  to  an  order  of  "  widows  "  in  the  Church,  to  whom 
certain  duties  were  entrusted,  such  as.  the  superintendence  of 
the  yoxmger  women, 

13  Going  about.— More  exact  than  "  wandering  about "  (Auth.). 
Vulg.,  circuire. 

14  Rule  the  household.— A  stronger  phrase  than  Autli.,  "  guide 
the  house."     Wycl.,  "  be  house\vives." 

16  "  Man  or," — (Auth.)     Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

19  At  the  mouth  of. — Compare  Matt,  xviii.  16,  where  these  words 
stand  in  the  text  (Auth.). 

20  Reprove. — Auth.,  "rebuke,"  which  represents  a  more  severe 
word  in  verse  1. 

21  Without  prejudice.— Or,  as  in  Margin,  "without  preference." 
The  unfavourable  sense  is  the  more  probable. 

23  Be  no  longer  a  drinker  of  water.— Auth.,  "drink  no 
longer  water,"  The  Gr.  recommends  the  discontinuance  of  a 
ha])it.    The  Auth.  seems  entirely  to  prohibit  the  drinking  of  water. 

24  Some  men's  sins  are  evident.— Are  openly  manifest.  The 
Gr.  has  not  any  reference  to  time,  as  Auth.  with  Tynd.,  "  are 
open  beforehand,"  as  though  they  were  evident  before  they  were 
committed. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


2  But  let  them  serve  them  the  rather — i.e.,  "  serve  them 
all  the  more  zealously,  because,"  &c.  Not  as  Auth.,  "  but  rather 
do  them  service,"  which  puts  tlie  emphasis  on  the  verb,  as  if  the 
meaning  were  "  rather  than  despise   them,  do  them  service." 


390  I.  TIMOTHY— YI. 

They  that  partake  of  the  benefit.— This  is  the  subject  of 
the  verb,  not,  as  in  Auth.,  a  secondary  predicate.  "  They  that 
partake  of  the  benefit  {i.e.,  the  masters,  who  benefit  by  the  good 
offices  of  their  servants)  are  believers." 

4  Doting. — Literally,  "diseased"— I'oo-djj',  in  a  morbid  state. 

Questionings. — The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  chap.  i.  4,  denoting 
not  "questions"  (as  Auth.),  but  the  controversies  to  which  the 
questions  give  rise. 

Disputes  of  words. — The  Gr.  is  the  original  of  the  term, 
recently  imported  into  English,  "  logomachy."  Auth.,  "  strifes 
of  words."     "  Strife  "  foUows  immediately  as  the  rendering  of 

epis. 

6  Wranglings. — Prolonged  conflicts.  A  doubly  comj)oundea 
word.     Auth.,  "perverse  disputings." 

Bereft  of  the  truth — i.e.,  ha^aug  possessed  it  and  been 
deprived  of  it.  Auth.,  "  destitute  of  the  truth."  Y\dg.,privati 
veritate. 

Supposing  that  godliness  is  a  way  of  gain.— The  point 
of  this  sententious  saying  is  lost  in  Auth.  by  the  inversion, 
■  "  supposing  that  gain  is  godliness."  The  right  order  is  indicated 
in  the  Gr.  by  the  article  prefixed  to  "  godliness,"  marking  that 
word  as  the  subject.  Their  supposition  was  that  the  profession 
of  godliness,  as  inculcated  by  St.  Paul,  was  nothing  more  nor 
less  than  a  way  to  get  rich. 

7  For  neither  can  we.— So  by  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth., 
"  and  it  is  certain  we  can;"  but  the  logical  connection  (indicated 
by  oTi,  *'  for  ")  l)etween  this  clause  and  tlie  preceding  is  not  very 
apparent.  Dr.  Field  suggests  that  there  is  an  ellipsis  of  5t\\ou 
— the  word  which  has  been  cast  out  of  the  text,  and  which  is 
certainly  spurious — and  he  cites  two  examples  of  this  ellipsis  from 
Chrysostom,  vol.  x.,  p.  38  (Otium  Now ic,  -p.  127);  comparing 
also  1  John  iii.  20,  which  might  be  explained  in  iJae  same  way, 
according  to  a  suggestion  of  the  learned  grammar iin  L.  Bos. 

8  Having  food  and  covering.— Auth.,  "food  and  raiment." 
Neitlier  word  occurs  again  in  the  New  Testament.  The  latter, 
which  is  rendered  "  covering,"  probably  includes  both  clothing 
and  shelter.     Yulg.,  habentes  alimenta  et  qidhus  tegimur. 

We  shall  be  therewith  content. — More  literal  than  Auth., 
"  let  us  be." 


I.  TIMOTHY— VI.  391 

10  A  root.— Not,  as  all  Engl,  versions,  "the  root."  Tlie  Gr.  does 
not  assert  that  the  love  of  money  is  the  root,  the  one  and  only- 
root. 

Which  some  reaching  after. — Auth.,  not  so  literally, 
"  coveting,"  with  Wycl.  The  relative  is  grammatically  in 
concoi'dwith  "the  love  of  money,"  <\>iKapyvpia,  but  is  to  be  under- 
stood as  referring  not  to  the  whole  word,  l)ut  to  a  part  of  it, 
"  money." 

12  Didst  confess  the  good  confession. — The  Gr.  words  are 
commonly  so  rendered,  as  in  verse  13,  "confession,"  but  are  here 
in  Auth.  and  Tynd.,  "hast  professed  the  good  profession."  As 
used  in  the  New  Testament,  they  denote  an  "acknowledgment," 
whether  of  faith,  of  sin,  or  of  thankfulness;  here,  of  faith. 
"  Profess  "  is  used  for  another  Gr.  word  in  verse  21. 

14  Without  reproach. — The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  chaps,  iii.  2, 
V.  7.  Auth.,  "  unrebukeable,"  following  Tynd.;  like  "unreprov- 
able  "  (Col.  i.  22) :  this  word  does  not  occur  again  in  Auth. 

16  Unapproachable. — The  single  Gr.  word  airpSa-irov  is  resolved 
in  all  Engl,  versions.    Auth.,  "  which  no  man  can  approach  unto." 

17  As  in  chap.  iv.  10. 

19  The  life  which  is  life  indeed. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for 
■    "  eternal  life "    (Auth.),  ovrui  for  aluviov  -.   the    j)hrase  is  not 

foimd  elsewhei'6  in  the  New  Testament. 

20  Guard. — As  a  deposit,  <pvKai,ov ;  not  simply  "  keep  "  (Auth.),  as 
a  possession.     Compare  2  Tim.  i.  12. 

Babblings. — The  addition  of  "vain"  (Auth.)  is  unnecessary, 
•  as  all  babbling  is  vain.  Gr.,  Keyo^wvias,  literally  "empty 
■     utterances." 

The    knowledge   which    is   falsely   so   called.— Auth., 

"  science  falsely  so  called."  The  knowledge  (gnosis)  here  referred 
to  was  probably  of  the  kind  afterwards  taught  as  a  system  of 
doeti'ine  in  the  schools  of  the  Gnostics,  who  took  their  name  as  a 
sect'  from  their  profession  of  it,  and  who  asserted  among  other 
things  an  opposition  between  tlie  law  and  the  Gospel. 


THE  SECOND  EPISTLE   OF  PAUL  THE  APOSTLE  TO 

TIMOTHY. 

CHAPTER  I. 

4  Longing. — A  more  tender  expression  than  "  greatly  desiring  " 
(Autli.)-     The  Gr.  iiTnroeaiv  is  the  same  as  in  Phil.  i.  8. 

6  The  laying  on  of  my  hands.— So  Auth.  iu  1  Tim.  iv.  14; 

liero  "  putting  on." 

7  Pearfulness. — Literally  "cowardice,''  5ei\ias.     Anth.,  "fear." 

Discipline. — Anth.,  "  sound  mind.''  The  Gr.  means  propei-ly 
the  training  -which  steadies  and  sobers  the  mind,  not  the  state  of 
sober-mindedness. 

8  Suffer  hardship  with  the  gospel.--  So  Tynd.  and  Cranm., 
"  sulfer  adversity  with  the  gospel;"  and  Viilg.,  collabora 
Evangelio.  Rliem.,  "  travail  with  the  gospel."  Genev.  and 
Auth.,  "be  thou  partaker  of  tlie  afflictions  of  tlio  gospel,"  follow- 
ing Beza.  The  Gospel  is  regarded  as  a  living  sentient  being, 
Avliieh  suffers  ;  as  tlie  Creation  is  said  to  "  groan,"  Rom.  viii.  22. 

9  Before  times  eternal. — Fi*om  all  eternity.    Auth.  (by  para- 

plu'ase),  "  before  the  world  began." 

10  Incorruption. — So  "VVyel.  with  Vulg.  Auth.,  following  Tynd., 
"immortality."  Compare  1  Tim.  i.  17;  Rom.  ii.  7 ;  1  Cor. 
XV.  42. 

12  I  know  him  whom  I  have  believed.— Not  merely  "  I  know 
who  it  is,"  as  Auth..  but  ''  I  know  Him.  am  acquainted  with 
Him." 

Guard. — Auth.,  "  keep."     See  Note  on  1  Tim.  vi.  20. 

13  Pattern.— So  Auth.  in  1  Tim.  i.  16 ;  here  "  form."  The  Gr. 
means  properly  that  of  which  a  copy  is  to  be  made. 

15  Turned  away. — The  Gr.,  thougli  passive  iu  form,  denotes  a 
voluntary  defection. 


II.  TIMOTHY— II.  393 


CHAPTER  II. 

3  Suffer  hardship  with  me. — Tlie  Gr.,  by  change  in  the  text, 
is  the  same  as  in  chaj).  i.  8,  having  the  preposition  (tvi>,  "  with," 
and  requiring  the  insertion  of  some  word  to  denote  ijartieipation 
in  suffering ;  an  alternative  mode  of  doing  this  is  given  in  the 
Margin. 

4  No  soldier  on  service.— Auth.,  "no  man  that  warreth."  The 
Gr.  is  properly,  "  no  one  sending  in  an  army."  Compare 
1  Cor.  ix.  7 ;  Luke  iii.  14. 

Who  enrolled  him.— Auth.,  "who  hath  chosen  him."  Tho 
Gr.  is  not  found  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament. 

5  Contend  in  the  games. — Auth.,  "strive  for  mastei-ies.'' 
Tho  Gr.  signifies,  especially,  the  engaging  in  the  "  athletic " 
conflict  of  the  Greek  games.     And  from  it  we  have  the  word 

"athlete." 

9  A  malefactor — i.e.,  a  criminajl.  Auth.,  "  an  evil-doer."  The 
Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  Luke  xxiii.  32,  where  Auth.  has  "  two 
other,  malefactors." 

11  Died. — Auth.,  "be  dead."     See  Note  on  Rom.  vi.  2. 

12  Endure. — Auth.,  "suffer."  The  Gr.  denotes  patient  endurance, 
as  in  Matt.  x.  22,  and  many  other  places. 

15  Give  diligence. — The  Gr.  is  frequently  so  translated,  and 
implies  active,  earnest  endeavom'.  Auth.,  following  TjTid., 
"  study." 

To  present  thyself. — So  Rhem.  Other  Engl,  versions, 
"shew,"  but  in  general  the  Gr.  irapiffr-qixi  is  rendered  "to 
present."  The  meaning  is,  "do  thy  best  to  present  thyself  before 
God  as  one  that  He  wiU  approve." 

Handling  aright. — Literally,  "  cutting  straight,"  e.g.,  a  road, 
or  a  furrow,  as  in  Prov.  iii.  6  (LXX.).  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "rightly 
dividing."  "Wycl.,  "treating  rightly,"  after  Yulg.,  recte  trac- 
taniem. 

16  Proceed  further. — The  Gr.  denotes  movement  in  advance, 
rather  than  growth,  as  Auth.,  "increase."  Compare  chap.  iii.  9, 
and  Luke  ii.  52,  "  Jesus  advanced,"  where  the  same  word  is 
used. 

17  Will  eat. — Litei'ally,  "  will  spread."  These  medical  terms  may 
liave  been  suggested  to  St.  Paul  by  his  intercourse  with  St 


394  II.  TIMOTHY— II. 

Luke,  who  was  at  this  time  his  only  companion.  See  Note  on 
1  Tim.  i.  10. 

A  gangrene. — Gv.,  gangrcena,  "an  eating  sore."  All  Engl, 
versions,  following  Vulg.,  "a  cancer,"  or  "canker."  The 
gangrene  is  said  to  be  more  rapid  in  its  deadly  course  than  the 
cancer. 

19  The  firm  foundation  of  God  standeth.— This  collocation 
is  followed  in  aU  Engl,  versions,  except  Anth.,  which  lias 
"the  foundation  of  God  standctli  sure."  Thus  Wycl.,  "the 
sad  (solid)  foundement  of  God  standeth."  The.  emphatic  use  of 
the  word  "  to  stand "  is  familiar  to  the  reader  of  St.  Paul's 
Epistles.     Compare  Eph.  vi.  13,  14. 

22  Follow  after.— Auth.,  "follow."  Compare  1  Tim.  vi.  11, 
where  the  same  command  is  given. 

23  Ignorant.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  iinlearned."  Tlie  Gr.  denotes 
not  so  much  want  of  |lcarning  as  want  of  the  intelligence  which 
comes  of  education  and  mental  discipline. 

Refuse — i.e.,  when  they  are  proposed  to  yoia';  literally,  "beg  off 
from  them."  Auth.,  "avoid."  The  same  word  is  used  in 
1  Tim.  iv.  7,  v.  11,  and  is  there  rendered  "  refuse  "  in  Auth. 

24  Forbearing. — Literally,  "  patient  of  evil,"  as  Tynd.  The  word 
does  not  again  occur  in  the  New  Testament. 

25  The  knowledge. — Auth.  (alone),  "  acknowledging,"  following 
Beza,  agnitionem  veritatis. 

26  They  may  recover  themselves.  .  .  .—This  obscure  passage 
admits  of  various  interpretations.  The  difficulty  arises  from 
the  use  in  the  Gr.  of  two  different  pronouns,  the  separate  re- 
ference of  which  is  not  cleai'ly  defined  by  the  context.  Tlie 
alternative  which  is  given  in  the  Margin — "  that  .  they  may 
recover  themselves  from  the  snare  of  the  devil,  after  having  been 
taken  captive  by  the  same  (the  devil),  unto  the  will  of  him 
(God) " — is  in  point  of  sense  and  construction  as  probable  as  that 
which  stands  in  the  text.  Auth.,  "  who  are  taken  captive  by 
him  at  his  will,"  is  objectionable,  (1)  because  "  who  are  taken" 
would  require  the  article,  which  is  not  in  the  Gr.  :  (2)  because 
in  the  words  "by  him  at  his  will"  the  distinction  between 
tlie  two  Gr.  pronouns  is  not  preserved;  and  (3)  because  the 
last  words  are  incorrectly  rendered  "  at  his  will,"  instead  of 
"'  unto." 


II.  TIMOTHY— III.  395 


CHAPTER  III. 

1  Grievous  times. — Hard  times.  All  Engl,  versions,  "  peril- 
ous," following  Yulg.,  periculosa.  The  Gr.  denotes  difficulty 
ratlier  than  danger. 

2  Lovers  of  money.— The  cognate  adjective  to  the  noun  in 
1  Tim.  vi.  10.     Auth.,  "  covetous." 

Haughty. — The  word  is  so  rendered  in  Rom.  i.  30,  where  there 
is  a  similar  catalogue  of  evil-doers.     Auth.  here,  "  proud." 

Railers. — Auth.,  "  blasphemers,"  the  literal  Gr.,  which,  how- 
ever,  is  not  limited,  like  the  same  word  in  Engl.,  to  evil-speaking 
against  God,  unless  the  context  shews  it  to  be  so,  which  is  not 
the  case  liere. 

3  Im.pla;Cable. — Not  admitting  of  a  truce,  rather  than  "  truce- 
breakers,"  as  Auth.,  following  Tynd.     Yulg.,  sine  pace. 

Slanderers.— Gr.,  diaboli.  So  Auth.  in  1  Tim,  iii.  11,  but 
here  "  false  accusers." 

Without  self-control. — Auth.,  with  Wycl.  and  Yulg.,  in. 
continent.  This  word,  like  that  in  verse  2  ("  railers"),  is  general 
in  its  sense,  unless  limited  by  the  context,  as  in  1  Cor.  vii.  5. 

No  lovers  of  good. — Auth.,  "  desj)isers  of  them  that  are 
good."  This,  though  not  so  strong  as  Tynd.,  "  fierce  despisers 
of  them  which  are  good,"  is  an  exaggeration  of  the  first  half  of 
the  word,  which  is  "not  loving,"  and  a  limitation  of  the  latter 
half,  which  is  "  of  good  "  in  general,  not  of  good  men  in  par- 
ticular. Compare  Titus  i.  8,  where  the  word  occurs  of  which 
this  is  the  negative,  denoting  sympathy  with  all  that  is  good. 

4  Headstrong.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "heady" — a  good  Shak- 
spearian  word,  but  now  disused.  Rhem.,  "  stubborn."  The 
same  word  in  Acts  xix.  36  is  rendered  "  rash." 

Hather  than. — AU  Engl,  versions,  following  Yulg.,  "more 
than."  Demophilus,  an  ancient  Pythagorean  philosopher,  using 
the  two  words  here  used  by  tlie  Apostle,  said  it  was  impossible 
for  the  same  man  to  be  a  lover  of  pleasure  and  a  lover  of  God. 
( Wordsworth.) 

6  Take  captive. — The  Gr.  is  not  properly  to  "  lead  captive,"  as 
Auth.  (compare  Rom.  vii.  23) ;  and  it  is  not  related  to  the  word 
which  follows,  "  led  away." 


396  II.  TIMOTHY— III. 

9  Evident  is  more  commonly  used  for  the  Gr.  Srj\os  and  its 
compounds  ;  "  manifest  "  (Auth.)  for  <j>avep6s. 

Came  to  be. — This  idiomatic  phrase  occasionally  is  well  suited 
to  the  Gr.  yivo/xai.    All  Engl,  versions,  "  was." 

10  Thou  didst  follow.— Auth.,  "  thou  hast  fiUly  known  ;  "  here 
as  in  1  Tim.  iv.  6,  erroneously  following  Yulg.,  assecutus  es. 
Timothy  had  "  followed  "  him  as  a  disciple  in  his  teacliing,  as  a 
partaker  in  his  perils,  as  an  imitator  of  his  faith,  love,  and 
general  conduct  in  his  trials  at  Antioch,  &c. 

13  Impostors. — The  Gr.,  properly  meaning  those  who  prac- 
tised incantations,  was  used  for  impostors  generally.  Auth., 
"seducers,"  following  Rhem.  and  Yulg.,  sedtidores.  Tynd., 
"  deceivers." 

15  Prom  a  babe. — Gr.,airb  Ppf(t>ovs,  "from  infancy."  The  phrase 
does  not  occur  again. 

The  sacred  writings.— Not,  as  Auth.,  "the  holy  scrii^tures," 

j  the  Gr.  being  ra  hpa  ypd/xixara,  not  ras  dalas  ypa(pds.  The  phrase 
is  found  in  Josephus,  but  not  again  in  the  New  Testament. 
Yulg.,  sacras  liter  as,  as  if  it  meant  sacred  literature  in  general. 

16  Every  scripture. — Eveiy  separate  part.  All  Engl,  versions, 
"  all  scripture  "  as  a  whole. 

Every  scripture  inspired  of  God  is  also  profitable. — 

This  construction,  taking  " inspired  of  God"  {QeSwevcTTOi)  with 
the  subject,  and  not  as  tlio  predicate,  is  followed  by  the  ancient 
expositors — e.g.,  by  Origen,  Chrysostom,  and  the  best  and  most 
ancient  versions,  as  tlie  Syi'iac  and  Yulg.  {ovinis  scriptura 
divinitus  inspirata  utilis  est);  by  Wycl.,  Tynd.,  and  Cranm. ; 
also  (among  recent  commentators)  by  Alford,  Ellicott,  and  by 
Bp.  Wordsworth  (substantially),  whose  rendering  is,  "All  scrip- 
ture, being  inspired  of  God,  is  also  profitable,"  &c'.  Auth., 
with  Geuev.,  following  Beza,  takes  "  inspired  of  God  "  as  the 
predicate  :  "  All  scripture  is  given  by  inspiration  of  God,  and 
is,"  &c. ;  and  so  Bengel.  This  translation  is  grammatically 
allowahle  ;  but  besides  being  against  the  weight  of  ancient  and 
modern  authority,  it  is  not  so  probable  as  the  former,  there 
being  nothing  in  the  context  which  would  lead  to  a  declaration 
that  the  Scriptures  are  inspired. 


II.  TIMOTHY— IV.  397 


CHAPTER  IV. 

1  And  [I  cliarge  tliee]  by  his  appearing.— For  "  at  his  appear- 
ing" (Autli.),  by  change  iu  Gr.  text. 

3  But  having  itching  ears.— The  trauspositiou  of  tliis  clause 
removes  the  possibility  which  there  iij  iu  Auth.,  but  not  iu  the 
Gr.,  of  couuecting  it  with  "  teachers." 

5  Be  thou  sober, — The  Gr.  V7}<peiv  is  usually  so  rendered  iu 
Auth.,  as  iu  Tliess.  v.  6,  but  here  "  ■watch." 

Fulfil. — So  Vulg.,  imple,  and  all  Engl,  versions  except  Auth., 
which  has  "make  full  proof  of  thy  ministry,"  following  Beza, 
ministerii  tui  plenam  Jidem  fucito,  on  the  assumption  that  the 
transitive  verb  Trkripocpopio)  must  iu  meaning  correspond  with  tlie 
passive,  which  is  rendered  ''  be  fully  assured  "  iu  Rom.  iv.  5. 
Compare  Acts  xii.  25. 

6  I  am  already  being  offered.— As  at  Phil.  ii.  17,  where  see 
Note.  Auth.,  "  I  am  now  ready  to  be  oifercd."  The  lu-eseut 
tense  of  the  Gr.  verb  implies  that  the  sacrifice  has  now  com- 
meuced,  the  out-pouriug,  the  libation  of  his  blood. 

7  The  good  fight  — which  in  his  former  Epistle  he  bids 
Timothy  maintain  (chap.  vi.  12).  Thus  he  reverts  from  the  idea 
of  a  sacrifice,  which  is  unusual  vnth  him,  to  the  favourite 
metaphor  of  the  games,  which  was  so  familiar  to  every  Greek, 
and  which  he  here  contiuues  in  his  allusions  to  the  ''course,"  and 
the  "crown,"  and  (perhaps)  the  "judge."  Compare  1  Cor.  ix.  24; 
Phil.  iii.  13,  and  chap.  ii.  5  of  this  Epistle. 

11  For  ministering.— Auth.,  "for  the  ministry."  Compare 
Eph.  iv.  12,  and  Note  there. 

Ii  The  Lord  will  render  to  him.— For  Auth.,  '•  the  Lord 
reward  him,"  by  change  in  Gr.  text  from  the  optative  mood  to 
the  future  indicative.     A  similar  change  is  made  iu  chap.  ii.  7. 

16  At  my  first  defence.  —  So  Wycl.,  following  Vulg., 
defeiisionem.  Auth.,  with  Tyud.,  "  answer."  The  Gr.  dTroAoyia. 
(whence  our  apology)  is  properly  rendered  "  defence."  Compare 
Acts  xxii.  1. 

Took  my  part.— Gr.,  Trapiyevero.  More  UteraUy,  "came  to  my 
side."     Vulg.,  adfiilt.     The  word  is  used  iu  a  forensic  sense  by 


398  II.  TIMOTHY— IV. 

Demostlieues.       Auth.,   "stood    with    me,"   following    anotlier 
readiiig  of  tlie  Gr.  text. 

17  That  through  me  the  message  might  be  fully  pro- 
claimed.— Literally,  "  that  by  meaus  of  me  the  proclamation 
[of  the  GospelJ  might  be  fulfilled. "  Auth.,  "  that  by  me  the 
preaching-  might  be  fully  known." 

20  Miletus. — All  Engl,  versions,  erroneously,  "  Miletum  " — except 
Wycl.,  "milete." 


THE    EPISTLE    OF    PAUL    TO 

TITUS. 

CHAPTER  L 

1  The  knowledge. — Auth.,  "the  acknowleclging ; "  as  iu  2  Tira. 
ii.  25,  iii.  7. 

2  Before  times  eternal.— See  Note  on  2  Tim.  i.  9. 

4  My  true  child. — Timothy  is  addressed  by  the  same  tender 
phrase,  1  Tim.  i.  2. 

5  As  I  gave  thee  charge.— ^Gr.,  Stera^afniy.  The  Auth., 
"  ordained  elders  in  every  city,  as  I  had  appointed  thee,"  is 
liable  to  be  read  as  if  a  comparison  were  drawn  between  the 
ordaining  of  elders  and  the  appointment  of  Titus. 

6  Children  that  believe.— Auth.,  "  faithful  children,"  which, 
though  meant  to  have  the  same  sense,  might  be  understood  to 
mean,  not  holding  the  faith  in  Christ,  but  faithful  to  their  own 
fatlier. 

7  As  to  the  changes  in  this  verse,  see  Notes  on  1  Tim.  iii.  3 ; 
2  Tim.  ii.  3  ;  1  Tim.  ii.  8  ;  1  Tim.  i.  10. 

12  Idle  gluttons.— Auth.,  "  slow  bellies."  It  was  not  thought 
necessary  to  retain  the  literal  rendering  of  the  expressive  Greek 
phrase,  denoting  one  who  from  gluttony  has  become  corpulent 
and  indolent,  a  mere  "  belly,"  a  man  no  longer. 


CHAPTER  II. 

1  Befit. — Auth.,  ''  become,"  a  word  which,  having  two  very 
different  meanings,  is  liable  in  such  a  context  as  this  to  be 
misunderstood. 

3  Reverent  in  demeanour. — Auth.,    "in    behaviour    as    be- 


400  TITUS— 11. 

Cometh  lioliuess."  Neither  of  the  two  -words  of  the  Greek  occurs 
again  in  the  New  Testament.  For  the  thought  which  they 
express,  compare  1  Tim.  ii.  10 ;  Eph.  v.  3.  The  adjective 
translated  "  reverent  "  points  to  outward  deportment  rather  than 
"  hoHness,"  and  the  noun  likewise  to  demeanour,  outward 
manner,  rather  than  "  behaviour,"  which  includes  general 
conduct  in  intercourse  with  other  persons. 

4  That    they   may  train    the  young  women.— Literally, 

"  may  sober  the  yoimg  women  to  love  their  husbands,"  the 
Gi*.  A'erb  being  "to  make  sober-minded,"  doicppovi^eiy.  Autli., 
"  may  teach  the  young  women  to  be  sober,  to  love  their  Imsljands." 

5  Workers   at  home. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  '•  keepers  at 
home,"  Autli. 

13  And  appearing  of  the  glory. — See  Note  on  1  Tim.  i.  11. 

Our    great    God    and    Saviour,   Jesus    Christ.— Auth., 

"the  great  God,  and  our  Saviour  Jesus  Christ;"  wliicli  is 
substantially  the  rendering  of  Wyd.  and  Tynd.,  and  according 
to  which  a  double  appearance  is  foretold,  viz..  of  the  great 
God,  accompanied  by  our  Sa^dour  Christ.  The  Gr.  is  tov 
/utyaAou  &€ov  Koi  (Toorripos  ti^jlwv  '  ItjctoC  XpicroC,  in  which  the  article 
appears  from  its  position  to  bind  together  in  one  the  two 
heavenly  Names  which  are  connected  by  "  and,"  so  that  the 
appearance  here  spoken  of  is  tlie  apiJearance  not  of  two  Divine 
Persons,  but  of  one,  of  Christ,  both  God  and  man.  This,  as 
Bishop  Wordsworth  sliews  by  a  long  chain  of  testimony,  has  been 
the  interpretation  of  the  passage  from  the  earliest  time  to  the 
present  ;  but  as  there  are  scholars  of  high  authority  Avho  deny 
the  cogency  of  the  argument  drawn  from  the  position  of  the 
article,  the  rendering  of  Auth.  has  been  inserted  as  an 
alternative  in  the  Margin.  See  especially  Dr.  Kennedy's  Ely 
Lectures  on  the  Revised  Version,  p.  83.  Compare  2  Peter  i.  1, 
which  is  very  similar  though  not  precisely  parallel  to  this 
passage. 

14  A  people  for  his  own  possession.— This  appears  to  be  the 
meaning  of  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "a  peculiar  people;" 
*•  peculiar  "  in  old  English  hanug  the  same  sense  as  pecuUaris 
in  Latin,  that  which  is  a  person's  own,  his  '"property,''  his 
pemUum.  The  Gr.  is  not  elsewhere  foimd  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment, but  is  frequent  in  the  Old  Testament,  as  in  Deut.  vii.  6, 
where  Vulg.  has  popidus  pecidiaris ;  and  a  similar  phrase,  with 
the  same  meaning,  occurs  in  1  Pet.  ii.  9. 


TITUS— III.  401 


CHAPTER  III. 

1  To  rulers,  to  authorities.— Autli.,  "to  Principalities  and 
Powers."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  Luke  xii.  11,  where  Awth. 
has  "  uuto  magistrates  and  powers." 

2  Not  to  be  contentious.— As  in  1  Tim.  iii.  3.  Auth.  iu  both 
places  has  "  no  brawlers." 

4  Love  toward  man. — This  in  Gr.  is  one  word,  fhilantliropia. 
The  word  "  kindness  "  therefore  cannot  grammatically  be  con- 
nected with  '■  toward  man,"  as  in  Auth. 

5  Works  done  in  righteousness.— Not  as  Auth.,  "works  of 
rigliteousness,"  but  done  in  a  state  of  righteousness  (fV). 

Which  we  did  ourselves.—"  We  "  is  emphatic  in  the  Gr. 

8  Confidently. — Auth.,  "  constantly,"  i.e.,  in  the  old  sense  of 
the  word,  "  with  constancy." 

Maintain. — The  Gr.  word  so  rendered  is  of  doubtful  inter- 
pretation ;  but  the  alternative  rendering  iu  the  Margin  has  little 
support. 

9  Shun.— The  Gr.  is  literally,  "avoid  by  going  round,"  and 
occurs  again  in  2  Tim.  ii.  16. 

10  Refuse. — Compare  1  Tim.  iv.  7. 

11  Perverted. — Auth.,  "  subverted."  Litei-ally,  "is  turned  inside 
out,"  the  metaphor  being  from  a  garment  which  may  be  so 
treated.  The  same  word  occurs  in  Deut.  xxxii.  20  (LXX.),  where 
the  Auth.  has  "  a  froward  generation." 

13  Set  forward— i.e.,  "  equip,  provide  with  wliat  they  want," 
as  in  1  Cor.  xvi.  6.  Not  as  Auth.,  "  bring  on  tlieir  journey  " — 
i.e.,  "  conduct,  go  some  way  with  them,"  as  in  Acts  xv.  3. 


A  A 


THE    EPISTLE    OF    PAUL    TO 

PHILEMON. 

2  Our  sister. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  om-  beloved." 

5  And  of  the  faith,  which  thou  hast  toward  .  .  . — i.e., 
"  the  faith  which  thou  hast  toward  the  Lord  as  the  object,  and 
manifested  toward  the  saints  by  way  of  example  and  en- 
couragement to  them."  That  this  is  the  connection  is  shewn 
(1)  by  the  relative  in  the  Greek,  "  which,"  referring  only  to 
"  the  faith,"  and  not  to  "  thy  love "  also ;  and  (2)  by  the 
change  of  preposition  {npSs  .  .  .  fls),  which  is  represented  in 
Vulg.,  fideni  quam  habes  in  Domino  Jesu,  et  in  omnes  sanctos. 
The  rendering  of  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  thy  love  and  faith 
which  thou  hast  toward,"  &c.,  is  retained  in  the  Margin; 
but  besides  being  objectionable  on  the  grounds  mentioned 
above,  it  involves  a  logical  inversion  of  the  sentence,  as  if 
it  were,  "  thy  faith  and  love  which  thou  hast,  (thy  faith)  toward 
the  Lord,  and  (thy  love)  toward  the  saints,"  as  it  is  in 
Col.  i.  4,  wi'itten  about  the  same  time. 

6  The  fellowship  of  thy  faith.— So  Tynd.  This  appears  to 
be  said  in  explanation  of  the  latter  part  of  verse  5.  "  Thy 
faith  transpireth,  is  manifested  to  the  saints,  that  its  sympa- 
thetic influence  may  become  effectual  in  them  by  means  of 
the  knowledge  which  they  acquire  of  all  the  good  which  is 
in  you."    Auth.,  "  the  communication." 

In  you — i.e.,  in  thee  and  thy  house,  by  change  in  Gr.  text  for 
"  in  us  " — i.e.,  "  in  us  Christians  " — (as  Auth.). 

Knowledge. — Compare  Phil.  i.  9. 

Effectual  .  .  .  unto  Christ — i.e.,  in  bringing  them  to  Christ. 
Auth.,  "  in  Christ." 


PHILEMON.  403 

8  Though   I   have    much   boldness. — Not   as  Auth.,  with 
Cranm.,  "  though  I  miglit  be  much  bold."     The  Gr.  verb  is  in 

the  present  tense. 

Befitting.— Compare  Titus  ii.  1. 

10  Onesimus. — The  meaning  of  this  name,  "  helpful,"  is  shewn 
in  the  Mai-gin,  because  St.  Paul  evidently  plays  upon  it  in 
the  next  verse,  and  again  in  verse  20. 

12  "Thou  therefore  receive  him." — (Auth.)  Omitted  from  the  Gr. 
text,  having  probably  been  interpolated  to  supply  what  seemed 
wanting  in  the  sense. 

15  Was  parted  from,  thee. — The  verb  is  passive,  and  does  not 
imply  a  voluntary  separation,  as  Auth.,  "  departed."  The 
actual  cause  of  the  separation  is  thus  gently  passed  over  by 
the  Apostle. 

Have  him. — Auth.,  "receive."     The  Gr.  is  not  the  same  as 
in  verse  19. 

18,  21  I  write.— Auth.,  " I  have  wi-itten  "...  "I  wrote."  The 
Gr.  in  both  places  is  the  historical  aorist,  as  in  Rom.  xvi.  22 
and  elsewhere. 


THE  EPISTLE   OF  PAUL   THE   APOSTLE   TO   THE 

HEBREWS. 

CHAPTER  I. 

1  God  .  .  ,  having  spoken. — Autli.,  '•  God,  who  .  .  . 
spake,"  thus  making  promiuent  the  identity  of  Him  who  "  spake 
by  the  prophets  "  with  Him  who  "hath  now  si^oken  by  his  Son;" 
which  would  have  been  expressed,  if  intended,  by  Ofhs  6  KaKi^cras, 
wliereas  the  actual  phrase  in  the  Gr.  points  to  the  sequence  of 
the  Divine  revelations.  God,  having  spoken  in  one  way  in  former 
times,  has  now  spoken  in  another  way. 

Of  old  time.— Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  in  time  past."  Gr., 
iroAat.       Ynlg.,  oUm. 

In  tlie  prophets    ...    in  his  Son.— Auth.,  "by  .  .  . 

by."  The  preposition  is  eV,  "  in ; "  not  Sid,  "  through,"  as  in 
Matt.  i.  22,  and  as  in  verse  2,  where  it  is  said  that  God  "  made  the 
worlds  through  His  Son."  God  spake  "  in  them,"  in  the  proi^hets, 
by  inspiring  them — iu  His  Son,  being  Himself  in  Christ.  I  have 
not  foimd  it  anywhere  said  in  Scripture  tliat  "He  spake  through 
the  Son." 

By  divers  portions.— Auth.,  "at  sundry  times,"  following 
Genev.  The  Gr.  iroXu/ucpcDj  has  no  reference  to  time ;  nor  is  it 
accurately  expressed  by  "diversely"  (Tynd.  and  Rhem.),  the 
exact  meaning  of  the  word  being  "in  many  parts  or  portions; "  as 
Shakspeare  says,  "  by  parcels."  Yulg.,  Multifariam  mtiltisque 
moclis  olim  Deus  loqiiens  iJatrihus  in  projphetis. 

2  Hath  at  the  end  of  these  days. — By  change  in  Gr.  text 
for  "hath  in  these  last  days"  (Auth.,  following  Tynd.).  The 
Gr.  is  an  unusual  exjiression,  resembling  1  Pet.  i,  20,  "  at  the 
end  of  the  times,"  and  Num.  xxiv.  14  (LXX.). 

These  days. — At  the  end  of  these  days  of  partial  revelations, 
this  age  of  expectation  and  looking  forward  to  the  Messiah's 


HEBREWS- 1.  405 

coming',  called  by  tlie  Rabbis  alwv  ovros,  "  tliis  prcseut  age,"  as 
distiuguislied  from  the  Messianic  period,  whicli  they  designated 

3  The  effulgence.— So  Beza.  Yulg.,  splendor.  All  Engl, 
versions,  "  the  brightness  of  his  gdory,"  which  denotes  a  quality 
iulierent  in  the  glory,  but  not  that  which  is  meant  by  the  Gr. 
airavyairixa,  "the  shining  or  beaming  forth"  of  the  glory,  the 
display  of  it  to  the  world.  Compare  Wisdo'ni  vii.  26,  where 
Wisdom  is  described  by  the  same  word,  as  an  effulgence  of  tho 
everlasting  light.  Christ  is  the  effulgence  of  the  Father's  glory, 
as  He  is  the  "  Word,"  the  utterance  of  the  Father's  -wisdom  and 
will.  He  is  "  Light  of  Light,"  as  we  say  in  the  Nicene  Creed, 
co-eternal  with  the  Father,  if  we  may  take  an  illustration  from 
the  works  of  His  hands,  as  the  ray  is  coetaneous  with  the  sun 
from  which  it  proceeds.  So  Theodoret,  TcrtuUian,  &c.  See 
Wordsworth's  Note,  and  compare  Rev.  xxi.  23 ;  John  v.  35,  and 
Notes  there. 

The  very  image  of  his  substance.— So  Tynd.  and 
Cranm.,  following  Vulg.,  fi,gura  suhstantice  ejus.  Genev.,  "the 
engraved  form  of  his  person,"  whence  apparently  Auth.,  "  the 
express  image  of  his  person."  "  Express "  does  not  convey 
the  idea  of  "  exact "  so  well  as  "  very,"  which  has  been  sub- 
stituted for  it.  The  Gr.  x°-P°''^''"^p  {character)  is  properly  an 
impression  or  stamp,  as  of  a  seal  or  die. 

His  substance. — Auth.,  follo-\™g  Genev.,  "his  person."  The 
Gr.  inrScxTaa-is  [hypostasis)  had  not  this  meaning  in  the  Apostolic 
age,  and  did  not  acquire  it  till  the  fourtli  century,  when  it  was 
adopted  in  theological  literature  by  the  Greek  Fatliers  to  denote 
what  was  signified  m  Latin  by  persona ;  and  ovarla  (ousia, 
"essence  ")  took  its  place  as  an  equivalent  of  the  Latin  substantia. 
This  later  signification  of  the  two  words  was  sanctioned  by  tho 
Synod  of  Alexandria,  at  which  St.  Athanasius  was  present 
(a.d.  862),  as  a  mode  of  reconciling  the  difference  on  the  subject 
between  the  Eastern  and  Western  Churches  {Alford ;  and  Bleeh, 
quoted  by  him). 

"  By  himself." — (Auth.)     Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

"When  he  had  made  purification  of  sins.— Auth.,  "  when 
he  had  purged  our  sins."  The  meaning  is,  "  when  he  had  done 
away  the  guUt  of  our  sins ; "  not,  "  when  he  had  sanctified  us 
from  them,"  i.e.,  had  enabled  us  by  self-improvement  to  cast 
them  off.  The  phrase,  though  rare,  is  akin  to  that  in  Matt.  viii. 
3,  "  his  leprosy  was  cleansed." 


406  HEBREWS— I. 

4  Having  become. — Auth.,  "  being  made,"  as  iu  John  i.  14,  and 
many  other  places. 

He  hath,  inherited. — So  "Wycl.  The  single  Gr.  word  is 
paraphrased  in  Tyud.  and  Auth.,  "he  hath  by  inheritance 
obtained,"  as  if  the  idea  of  "  inheritance  "  were  the  prominent 
one,  whereas  the  word  is  often  i;sed  both  in  the  Old  and  New 
Testament  figuratively,  to  the  exclusion  of  the  original  idea  of 
inheritance. 

6  And  when  he  again  bringeth  in.— Auth.,  "and  again, 
when  he  bringeth  in,"  &c.  "  Again  "  would  not  stand  where  it  is 
in  the  Greek  if  it  introduced  another  quotation,  as  it  does  in  the 
preceding  verse ;  and  the  ancient  expositors,  Gr.  and  Latin,  as 
Chrysostom,  Ambrose,  the  Yidgate,  &c.,  together  with  many 
modems,  as  Tholuck  and  Alford,  have  understood  it  to  mean, 
"  when  God  bringeth  his  first-begotten  Son  a  second  time  into 
the  world  (at  his  resurrection,  or  at  his  second  advent)  he  saith," 
&c.  The  rendering  in  the  Margin,  which  is  that  of  Auth.,  is  in 
point  of  interpretation  much  to  be  prefen-ed,  but  is  not  justifiable 
grammatically :  it  is  supported  by  Erasmus,  Beza,  and  Words- 
worth. 

7  He  maketh  his  angels  winds  .  .  . — i.e.,  He  bids  them  go 
forth  in  the  semblance  of  wind  or  flame  to  fulfil  His  purpose. 
Auth.,  "  spirits,"  which  is  unmeaning,  as  His  angels  ax-e  already 
in  their  nature  spirits.  The  Gr.  irvevixa  may  have  either  mean- 
ing,  "wind"  or  "spirit,"  in  tlie  New  Testament;  the  context  in 
each  place  determining  which  is  to  be  taken.  In  John  iii.  8 
both  meanings  are  given  to  it  in  the  same  verse. 

8  The  sceptre  of  uprightness.— Literally,  "  of  straightness." 
Yulg.,  virga  cequitatis.  Tynd.,  "a  right  sceptre;"  and  so  Auth. 
in  Ps.  xlv.  6.  The  Gr.  is  not  the  word  which  in  the  next  verse, 
and  here  in  Auth.,  is  rendered  "  righteousness." 

12  As  a  mantle. — Auth.,  "  as  a  vesture."  The  Gr.  is  an  unusual 
word,  signifying  a  loose  enveloping  garment ;  and  roll  up 
expresses  the  verb  better  than  Auth.  "  fold  up,"  which  rather 
suggests  the  careful  putting  away  than  the  casting  off  of  a 
thing  that  is  done  with.  The  Hebrew  word  in  the  Psalm 
signifies  "  change ; "  and  such  is  the  reading  of  one  of  the 
principal  MSS.  in  this  place  for  "  roll." 

14  To  do  service — i.e.,  to  God.  Auth.,  "  to  minister."  The  Gr. 
is  not  cognate  to  the  adjective  rendered  "ministering"  in  the 
former  part  of  the  verse. 


HEBREWS— II.  407 


CHAPTER  II. 


1  The  things  that  were  heard — i.e.,  when  God  spake  iu  His 
Sou.  Autli.,  "  tlie  things  which  we  have  heard  : "  the  change 
from  the  passive  voice  to  the  active  is  without  anything  to 
warrant  it  in  the  Gr. 

Lest  haply  we  drift  away  from  them.— Gr.,  fjiv  iroTe 
T-apappvujjLey.  Auth.,  by  an  inversion  of  the  metaphor,  "lest 
at  any  time  we  should  let  them  slip."  The  fear  is  not 
lest  the  things  spoken  should  slij)  away  from  us,  for  they  are 
sure  and  stedfast,  and  will  not  pass  away ;  but  lest  we  should 
drift  (literally,  "flow")  away  from  them.  There  may  be  an 
allusion  iu  this  to  Prov.  iii.  21,  where  the  same  word  is 
used  (in  the  LXX.  version)  in  the  same  sense,  "lest  thou 
drift  away ; "  Auth.,  "  let  them  not  depart  from  thine  eyes." 

8  Subjected. — The  word  is  emphatically  reiterated  throughout 
this  passage.     Auth.  varies  it  by  substituting  "  put  under." 

9  Because  of  the  suffering  of  death. — This  is  to  be  con- 
nected with  what  follows,  "crowned,"  &c.,  as  Tynd.  and  Cranm., 
following  Vulg.,  not  with  the  preceding  clause,  "made  a  little 
lower,"  &c.,  as  Auth.,  with  Genev.  and  Beza.  It  was  not  in 
respect  of  His  sufferings  that  Christ  was  said  to  be  "  a  little 
lower  than  the  angels,"  but  in  respect  of  His  manhood.  It 
was  because  of  His  sufferings,  and  His  faith  and  patience  under 
them,  that  Christ  in  His  manhood  was  "  crowned  with,  glory 
and  honour."     Compare  Phil.  ii.  8 — 11. 

10  The  author  of  their  salvation.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem., 
following  Vulg.,  mictorem  salutis  eorum.  Tynd.  and  Craum., 
"lord;"  Genev.,  "Prince;"  Auth.,  "Captain."  The  Gr.  is 
properly  "leader;"  it  occurs  again  in  chap.  xii.  2,  where  it 
is  "  author  "  in  Auth. 

12  Congregation,  as  in  Ps.  xxii.  22,  from  which  this  quotation 
is  made ;  and  so  Tynd.  and  Craum.  Auth.,  with  Genev., 
"  church,"  following  Yulg.  and  Beza,  Ecclesice. 

14  Are  sharers  .  .  .  partook.— The  two  words  rendered  in 
Auth.  "  partakers,"  "  took  part,"  are  different  in  the  Gr. 

15  All  them  who. — Literally,  "  those,  as  many  as."  Auth., 
"  them  who." 

16  Take  hold. — In  the  sense  of  "  helping."  Compare  chap.  viii. 
9,  "I  took  them  by  the  hand  to  lead  them"  (Auth.).     The 


408  HEBREWS— III. 

Gr.  &,vri\afi$dvo/xai,  in  the  middle  voice,  has  this  sense  both  in 
the  LXX.  aud  in  classical  authors  (Alford);  and  this  in- 
terpretation is  here  given  to  it  by  recent  commentators.  Auth., 
"  he  took  not  on  him  the  nature  of  angels,  but  he  took  on 
him,"  &c.,  following  Chrysostom,  and  other  ancient  expositors ; 
also  Erasmus,  and  others  of  later  times,  "took  on  him" — i.e., 
at  His  incarnation — a  rendering  which  gives  a  very  good 
meaning  to  the  sentence,  whether  considered  by  itself,  or  in 
relation  to  the  context.  But  it  puts  on  the  Gr.  verb  a  sense 
which  it  will  not  bear,  being  in  the  middle  voice  and  the 
present  tense.  There  is  probably  a  reference  in  this  passage 
to  Isai.  xli.  8,  9,  "  Thou,  Israel,  art  my  serA'ant,  Jacob  whom  I 
have  chosen,  the  seed  of  Abraham,  my  friend.  Thou  whom  I 
have  taken  from  the  ends  of  the  earth;"  where  the  Hebrew 
may  better  be  rendered,  "whom  I  have  taken  hold  of" — 
i.e.,  "have  helped;"  and  the  Gr.  of  the  LXX.,  avTe\a$6/xr}i>,  has 
the  same  sense  of  helping,  which  it  has  also  in  Luke  i.  54.  "  He 
taketh  hold  of  the  seed  of  Abraham" — i.e.,  in  a  spiritual  as 
well  as  in  a  literal  sense ;  as  St.  Paul  says,  "  he  is  not  a 
Jew  that  is  one  outwardly,"  Rom.  ii.  29 ;  and  see  Gal.  iii.  7,  29. 

17  To  make  propitiation  for— i.e.,  "to  expiate."  Auth.,  "to 
make  reconciliation  for,"  which  represents  elsewhere  a  different 
word  (KaTaAXdo-o-eo-flot).  The  Gr.  i\d(rKfa6ai  is  here  used  in  tlie 
middle  voice,  having  "the  sins"  for  its  object,  as  in  Ps.  Ixiv. 
3 ;  in  other  places,  as  Luke  xviii.  13,  being  in  the  passive,  it 
is  said  of  the  person  who  is  to  be  propitiated,  "Be  merciful 
to  me  a  sinner,"  "  be  propitiated." 

18  In  that — i.e.,  "  inasmuch  as  "  (eV<?).  So  in  Rom.  viii.  3.  The 
Marginal  translation,  "  liaAdng  been  tempted  in  that  (i.e.,  in 
that  body,  in  that  human  nature)  wherein  he  suffered,"  has 
claims  to  consideration,  as  being  more  easily  elicited  from  the 
Gr.,  and  in  itself  not  an  improbable  statement. 


CHAPTER   m. 

2  In  all  his  house— i.e.,  as  the  Margin  explains,  in  "  God's 
house,"  referring  to  Num.  xii.  7,  "  My  servant  Moses,  who  is 
faithful  in  all  mine  house." 

10  This  generation.— So  Wycl.,  following  Vulg.     Auth.,  "  that 
generation,"  follows    the   reading   of   the   received    Gr.    text, 


HEBREWS— IV.  409 

which  is  also  that  of  the  LXX.  in  the  Psalm  (the  94th)  from 
which  the  qiiotatiou  is  made.  The  word  iu  the  original  wan 
probably  altered  by  the  writer  of  the  Ei^istle,  to  make  the 
warning  derived  from  the  past  apply  to  the  then  living  gene- 
ration of  the  Jews.     (Alford.) 

I  was  displeased.— The  Gr.  irpoo-cox^^ffa  is  stronger  than  "  I 
was  grieved"  (Tynd.  and  Auth.).  Yiilg.  has  infensus  fieri ; 
the  Heb.  is  stronger  stiU,  "  I  loathed." 

11  As  I  sware. — Auth.,  "so  I  sware,"  giving  to  the  particle 
cos  a  sense  which  does  not  iu  such  a  position  belong  to  it, 
and  which  is  not  required  by  the  context.  The  meaning  is, 
"  As  I  sware  in  my  'i^Tath "  (to  their  fathers ;  see  Num.  xiv. 
21),  "so  shall  it  be  to  this  generation,  they  shall  not  enter 
into  my  rest." 

12  In  falling  away — i.e.,  in  committing  apostasy.  The  same 
word  is  used  in  1  Tim.  iv.  1.  Auth.,  "departing."  The  Auth., 
though  much  given  to  variation  iu  the  rendering  of  the  same 
Greek,  has  "  depart "  for  twenty-one  different  words. 

16  For  who  .  .  .  did  provoke.— The  Gr.  pronoun  at  the  begin- 
ning of  this  verse,  as  in  tlie  next,  is  interrogative — not  indefinite,  • 
as  in  aU  Engl,  versions  "  some,"  following  Yulg.  quidam, 
and  the  ancient  expositors ;  Bengel  (1731)  being  the  first  to 
point  out  the  true  rendering,  which  involves  the  re-construc- 
tion of  the  whole  sentence,  and  makes  verses  16  and  17  parallel 
in  their  form  and  in  their  inferential  warning.  Compare  for 
the  construction  Luke  xvii.  7 ;  1  Thess.  ii.  19. 

18  Were  disobedient.— Auth.,  "  believed  not."  The  Gr.  is 
distinct  in  meaning  from  that  which  is  rendered  "  unbelief  "  in 
verse  19.  Compare  John  iii.  36,  "  he  that  believeth  on  the  Son 
hath  eternal  life ;  but  he  that  obeyeth  not  the  Son  shall  not  see 
life." 


CHAPTER   lY. 

2  The  word  of  hearing.— The  message  heard  by  Moses  and 
the  Prophets,  and  preached  to  the  people.  Compare  Jer.  xlix.  14, 
"  1  have  heard  a  rumour  from  the  Lord  "  (o/coV  ijKovaa). 

Because  they  were  not  united  (literally,  "  mingled  ")  by 
faith  with  them  that  heard.— This  rendering,  which  stands 


410  HEBKEWS— IT. 

in  the  Margin  of  Autli.,  is  consequent  on  the  change  iu  Gr.  text, 
which  is  supported  by  the  best  MSS.  The  meaning  appears  to  be, 
"  The  word  of  the  message  did  not  profit  those  to  whom  it  was 
preached,  because  they  were  not  united  by  faith  (not  made  one 
in  heart)  with  those  who  '  heard '  the  message  (viz.,  Moses  and 
the  Prophets),  and  preached  it."  The  imidiomatic  English 
phrase  "  word  of  hearing  "  becomes  helpful  to  us  as  we  trace 
the  connection  of  thought  through  the  sentence. 

7  He  again  defiueth  a  certain  day— i.e.,  "fixeth  as  a 
boundary."  Gr.,  dpl(ii.  Auth.,  "he  luniteth,"  with  Rhem,, 
following  Yulg.  terminat. 

Saying  in  David,  after  so  long  a  time— i.e.,  saying  in 
the  psalm,  or  in  the  mouth,  of  David,  after  the  long  interval 
shice  the  preaching  of  Moses.  This  may  be  deduced,  though  not 
very  easily,  from  the  order  of  the  words  in  Auth.,  "  saying  in 
David,  To  day,  after  so  long  a  time." 

9  A  sabbath  rest. — Auth.,  "  a  rest."  The  Gr.  (sabbatismos)  is 
not  the  word  which  is  rendered  "  rest "  in  the  next  verse ;  and 
by  its  introduction  here  it  indicates  that  as  Joshua  is  a  type  of 
the  Lord  Jesus,  so  the  sabbatical  rest  is  typical  of  the  rest  with 
God  which  is  i^repared  for  His  people  when  theii*  work  in  this 
world  is  at  an  end. 

12  Living. — Auth.,  "  quick."  Here  in  its  old  sense  liable  to  be 
not  understood ;  but  reappearing  advantageously  in,  its  modern 
sense  at  the  end  of  the  verse,  "  quick  to  discover,"  for  Auth., 
"  a  discoverer." 

Active. —  Gr.,  energes,  "  energetic  "  rather  than  "  powerful  " 
(Auth.).  "  Inactive  "  would  represent  the  meaning,  if  "  in," 
instead  of  being  negative  in  composition,  had  the  sense  of  ^y, 
'•  inwardly." 

14  Through  the  heavens.— Not  as  Auth.,  "into  the  heavens;" 
"  through,"  and  beyond.  Compare  Eph.  iv.  11,  "  He  that 
descended  is  the  same  that  ascended  far  above  all  the  heavens." 

16  Receive  mercy. —  The  mercy  which  is  freely  offered  and 
awaits  us  there.  So  Tynd. ;  Auth.,  "  obtain,"  following  Craum., 
and  Vulg.,  consequimur,  which  implies  the  going  to  sul'  f^r  it. 


HEBREWS— VI.  411 


CHAPTER  V. 

1  Being  taken,  from  among  men— i.e.,  "  iuasmucli  as  he  is 
taken."  Auth.,  "  that  is  takeu,"  wliieli  would  require  a  differeut 
order  of  the  Gr. 

2  Can  bear  gently  with. — Literally,  "  can  be  moderate  in  his 
feelings,"  according  to  the  maxim  of  the  Peripatetic  philosophers, 
to  whose  school  the  word  belongs.  Auth.,  "have  compassion 
on." 

7  Having  been  heard  for  his  godly  fear.— Auth.,  "in  that 
he  feared"  (apjiarently  misled  by  Genev.,  "in  that  which  he 
feared  "),  with  Margin,  "  Or,  for  his  piety,"  which  substantially 
agrees  with  the  previous  versions.  The  same  Gr.  occurs 
at  chap.  xii.  28,  where  it  is  "  godly  fear "  in  Auth.  Beza 
(strangely),  liberatus  ex  metu. 

10  Named  of  God. — Vulg.,  appellatus — i.e.,  being  so  addressed. 
All  Engl,  versions,  "  called  of  God,"  which  might  mean  "  having 
received  of  God  a  call  to  be  a  high  priest." 

11  Hard  of  interpretation. —  Not  as  Auth,,  "hard  to  be 
uttered."  Yulg.,  rightly,  though  ruggedly,  ininterpretabilis  ad 
dicendum. 

12  Solid  food.— Auth.,  with  Tyud.,  "  strong  meat."  Wycl.,  "  sad 
meat."  Vulg.,  solido  cibo.  The  Gr.  a-Tspeos  is  properly  "  hard, 
solid."  Compare  1  Cor.  iii.  2,  "  I  fed  you  with  milk,  not  with 
meat,  for  ye  were  not  able  to  bear  it." 

13  Fartaketh  of  milk — i.e.,  has  milk  for  his  portion  at  a  common 
meal ;  fx.eTex"'  has  the  same  sense  in  1  Cor.  x.  21.  Auth.  (alone), 
"  useth."    Tynd.,  "  is  fed  with." 


CHAPTER  VI. 

Let  us  cease  to  speak  of. — A  paraphrase  of  the  cumbrous 
rendering  which  is  given  in  the  Margin.     Comj)are  chap.  v.  12. 

As  touching  those  .  .  . — The  sentence  in  the  original  is 
prolonged  by  a  succession  of  clauses,  tUl  the  grammatical 
structure,  and  the  connection  of  the  end  with  the  beginning, 
are  almost  lost  sight  of.     Yet  the  construction  is  simple,  and 


412  HEBREWS— VII. 

the  meaning  clear,  if  the  verb  which  stands  at  the  end  be  placed, 
where  in  an  English  sentence  we  expect  to  find  it,  at  the 
beginning :  "  It  is  impossible  to  renew  those  Avho,"  &c.  Even 
thus,  however,  the  sentence  goes  heavily ;  and  by  the  intro- 
duction o£  the  words  "  as  touching  "  the  sequence  of  thought 
is  made  clear,  without  having  recourse  to  a  broken  construction 
as  in  Auth. 

7  The  land.— Not   "  the   earth "  (Auth.)  as  a  whole,  but  that 
particular  spot  of  ground  which  hath  drunk,  &c. 

8  Thistles.— As  in  Matt.  Aai.  16.      All  Engl,  versions  for  the 
same  Gr.  her^  have  "  briars."     Yulg.,  rightly,  tribulos. 

9  Things   that    accompany.  —  Literally,   "  things   bordering 
on,"  "  next  door  to." 

10  Your  work  ...  which  ye  shewed.— By  change  in  Gr.  text 
we  lose  the  familiar  aUiteration,  so  sweet  to  our  ears  for  what  it 
signifies,  "labour  of  love"  (Auth.). 

12  Sluggish.  —  "  Slothful "  (Auth.)  represents  another  word, 
0Kvrip6s. 

16  In  every  dispute  of  theirs. — This  rendering,  which  follows 
more  nearly  the  order  of  the  Gr.,  is  also  more  exact  than  Auth., 
"  An  oath  for  confirmation  is  to  them,"  &c. 

Final  for  confirmation— i.e.,  for  settlement  of  all  doubt. 

17  Interposed. — Made  Himself  mediator,  with  an  oath.  God 
being  the  Giver .  of  the  promise  and  man  the  recipient,  God 
swearing  by  Himself  interposed  and  became  the  mediator  between 
the  two.  This  is  said,  according  to  the  phrase  of  St.  Paul,  "  after 
the  manner  of  men."  God,  as  it  were,  called  Himself  to  witness, 
and  interposed  between  Abraham  and  Himself  with  an  oath. 


CHAPTER  VII. 


2  Divided.— Auth.,  "  gave."    ^r.,  e/iepia-fv. 

3  Without  genealogy. — Auth.,  "  without  descent."  The  Jews 
were  very  particular  in  ascei'tainiug  the  pedigree  of  the  Le^itical 
high  priests.  Compare  Acts  viii.  33.  "  His  generation  who 
shall  declare  ?  "  (said  of  Christ  in  Isai.  liii.  8). 


HEBREWS— VII.  413 

4  The  chief  spoils. — Literally,  "the  top  of  the  heap."  So 
WycL,  "  tithes  of  the  best  things,"  following  Vnlg.,  decimas 
de  'prcpxipiiis :  spolia  opima  according  to  the  Latin  phrase. 
Tyncl.  and  Auth.,  "  tithes  of  the  spoils." 

7  Without  any  dispute. — The  word  is  so  rendered  in  Auth. 
at  chap.  vi.  16 ;  here,  "  witliout  aU  contradiction." 

11  Reckoned.— Auth.,  "  called,"  suggesting  the  same  misinterpre- 
tation  as  in  chap.  v.  10.     Gr.,  xiyeaOai. 

15  And  what  we  say  is  yet  more  abundantly  evident. — 

The  insertion  is  intended  to  shew  that  the  reference  is  to  what 
has  been  said  in  verse  11,  concerning  the  imperfection  of  the 
Levitical  priesthood,  and  not,  as  might  be  supposed,  to  verse  14, 
"  it  is  evident,"  &c. 

If— (i.e.,  as  the  case  is).  Auth.,  "for  that,"  following  Genev., 
"  because  that."     Gr.,  el. 

18  A  disannulling  of  a  foregoing  commandment. — Auth., 
"a  disannulling  of  the  commandment  going  before,"  leaving 
doubtful  the  connection  and  meaning  of  "  going  before."  Tynd., 
more  clearly,  "  the  commandment  which  went  before  is  dis- 
annulled." 

19  And  a  bringing  in  .  .  . — The  connection  of  this  clause  with 
the  preceding  verse  is  shewn  by  treating  the  intermediate  clause, 
"  for  the  law,"  &c.,  as  a  parenthesis  ;  and  thus  the  obscurity  is 
removed,  which  liangs  over  the  Auth.,  notwithstanding  the 
altered  construction  and  the  insertion  of  did. 

23  Have  been  made  priests  (in  succession,  tla-t  yeyovores,  as 
also  in  verse  21)  many  in  number. — Auth.,  "they  were 
many  priests." 

By  death  (by  reason  of  their  being  subject  to  death)  they 
are  hindered  from  continuing  (in  the  priesthood). — 
Auth.,  "they  were  not  suffered  to  continue  by  reason  of  death." 
The  changes  made  in  this  verse  conduce  to  perspicuity,  while 
they  also  bring  the  English  nearer  to  the  original. 

24  Unchangeable. — The  Gr.,  which  is  found  only  in  late  writers, 
means  properly,  "  which  cannot  be  passed  from,"  cannot  be 
vacated.  The  two  Marginal  notes  give  two  other  possible  but 
not  probable  interpretations. 

26  Guileless. — The  Gr.  properly  means,  "  innocent  in  disposition." 
Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "harmless,"  which  is. not  quite  the  same 
thing,  and  is  the  rendering  of  another  word,  aKspaios,  at  Phil. 
ii.  15. 


414  HEBREWS— IX. 

Separated  from  sinners.— So  Rhem.  Auth.,  "separate." 
The  Gr.  is  the  passive  participle,  "removed  far  away  from 
them,"  so  far  removed  that  He  is  even  "  made  higher  than  the 
heavens."  The  adjective  "  separate,"  according  to  its  common 
acceptation,  would  in  this  place  denote  "  one  that  is  in  the  world, 
but  not  of  the  world,"  and  would  be  a  fitting  description  of  the 
great  High  Priest,  while  He  was  still  amongst  men. 

27  Once  for  all. — Once  only.    Auth.,  "once."    Gr.,  icpdvai. 


CHAPTER  Vin. 


5  A  copy. — An  outline  or  general  resemblance.      Auth.,  "the 
example." 

6  Enacted.— Auth., "  established."    The  Gr.  is  the  word  specially 
used  of  enacting  a  law  {voiJ.odfrf7v). 

11  His  fellow-citizen. — By  change  in  the  Gr.  text  for  "his 
neighbour"  (Auth.). 

13  Is  becoming  old  and  waxeth  aged.— Auth.,  "decayeth 
and  waxeth  old."  The  two  Gr.  words  are  nearly  the  same  in 
meaning,  the  chief  distinction  between  them  being  that  the 
former  is  exclusively  a  Biblical  word,  while  the  latter,  which  is 
rare  in  the  New  Testament  and  the  LXX.,  is  of  frequent  classical 
usage,  signifying  properly  the  coming  on  of  old  age  in  man. 
Neither  of  them  has  properly  the  sense  of  "  decay." 


CHAPTER  IX. 

1  Its  sanctuary,  a  sanctuary  of  this  world. — Auth.,  "  a 
worldly  sanctuary."  The  sanctuary  appertaining  to  the  first 
covenant  is  described  as  being  K0(TiJ.iK6v,  mimdane,  appropriate 
to,  typical  of,  this  present  world. 

2  Prepared.— Not  only  "  made  "  (Auth.),  but  completely  fitted 
up.     See  verse  6. 


HEBREWS— IX.  41-') 

3  The  holy  of  holies.— This  is  the  literal  translation  of  the 
Hebraism  ayta  ayluv,  which  is  also  rendered  literally  in  Vulg., 
sancta  sanctorum ;  in  Tynd.  and  Aiith.,  "  the  holiest  of  all." 
The  Latin  phrase,  having  become  familiar  and  in  common  use, 
is  left  in  Rhem.  untranslated.  The  same  Hebraism  occurs  in 
Exod.  xxvi.  33,  34  (LXX.),  where  Auth.  has  "  the  most  holy 
place."  The  phrase  "  holy  of  holies  "  is  not  in  the  Bible ;  and 
our  familiarity  with  it  is  derived  from  its  use  in  the  Latin  form 
in  the  Yulg. 

5  Cherubim. — This  word  being  a  plural  in  the  original  Hebrew, 
does  not  need  the  English  sign  of  the  plural  which  is  commonly 
given  to  it  in  the  Bible,  "  cherubims." 

Overshadowing.— So  Rhem.  This  is  the  proper  meaning  of 
the  Gr.,  and  in  accordance  with  the  actual  position  of  the 
cherubim,  upon  the  mercy-seat.    Vidg.,  obumbrantia. 

6  The  priests  go  in. — The  use  of  the  present  tense  in  this  and 
the  four  following  verses  is  not  a  sign  that  the  temple  service 
was  stiU  continued  in  every  particular  according  to  the  system 
of  the  tabernacle,  but  is  due  to  the  point  of  view  of  the  writer, 
who  describes  the  arrangement  as  if  it  were  still  subsisting. 
Auth.,  "  went,"  following  Tynd.  and  Yulg.,  introibant,  rather 
than  Beza,  ingrediuntur 

8  The  way  into  the  holy  place. — Auth.,  with  Genev.,  "  into 
the  holiest  of  all,"  which  is  true  as  an  interpretation,  the  sense 
being  that  the  entrance  into  the  most  holy  place,  heaven,  was 
as  yet  not  open,  even  as  the  entrance  into  the  sanctuary  on  earth 
(called  in  verse  7  the  "  second  tabernacle,"  and  so  distinguished 
from  the  "  first  tabernacle  ")  was  not  open,  except  to  the  high 
priest  once  a  year. 

9  A  parable.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  as  it  is  in  the  Gr.  Auth., 
with  Genev.,  "  a  figure." 

According  to  which.— Referring  to  the  "  parable ;  "  by 
change  in  the  Gr.  text  for  "  in  which  "  (Auth.),  referring  to  the 
"  time." 

The  worshipper. — Auth.,  "  him  that  did  the  service,"  which 
points  to  the  ministering  priest ;  and  so  Tynd.,  "  them  that 
minister."     Compare  chap.  x.  2. 

10  Seing  only  (with  meats  and  drinks  and  divers  wash- 
ings) carnal  ordinances — i.e.,  being,  together  with  meats, 
&c.,    "mere   carnal  ordinances."      Auth.,    "which  stood  only 


416  HEBREWS— IX. 

in  meats,"  &c.  "  And  "  before  "  carnal  "  is  omitted  by  change 
in  Gr.  text. 

11  But  Christ  .  .  . — This  sentence,  though  lengthy,  is  simple  in 
structure ;  and  only  a  few  slight  amendments  are  required  to 
make  the  rendering  of  Auth.  perspicuous,  the  chief  being  the 
direct  connection  of  "  Christ "  with  "  entered,"  instead  of  the 
resumption  of  the  nominative  to  the  verb  by  "  he." 

Not  of  this  creation. — According  to  the  ordinary  sense  of 
the  Gr.  ktIo-is,  "  not  belonging  to  the  present  order  of  things." 
Auth.,  "not  of  this  building" — i.e.,  "not  a  work  of  an  earthly 
builder,"  which  has  been  already  said  in  the  words,  "  not 
made  with  hands."     Compare  2  Cor.  v.  1. 

12  "  For  us  "  (Auth.,  following  Genev.)  is  doubtless  implied,  but  is 
not  expressed  in  the  original. 

13  Them  that  have  been  defiled.— So  Rhom., "  the  polluted," 
following  Yulg.,  inquinatos ;  aU  other  English  versions  take 
the  Gr.,  which  is  a  participle  in  the  passive  voice  and  past 
tense,  as  an  adjective.     Auth.,  "the  unclean." 

Unto  the  cleanness.— Unto  that  as  the  end  or  object,  not 
unto  the  "  purifying,"  i.e.,  the  means  or  process  of  attaining 
the  end,  as  Auth.  .  The  cognate  verb  "  to  cleanse "  is  used 
in  the  next  verse. 

15,  16  Covenant  .  .  .  testament.— The  Gr.,  diatheJce,  is  here 
in  the  same  context  rendered  by  two  diiferent  words.  This 
anomaly  is  to  be  justified  only  by  its  affording  an  escape  from 
the  still  greater  difficulties  attendant  on  any  other  interpre- 
tation.     A  similar  case  occurs  in  John  iii.  8. 

15  A  death  having  taken  place — i.e.,  the  death  of  Christ; 
more  literal  and  more  intelligible  than  "  by  means  of  death " 
(as  Auth.),  where  "  death  "  in  the  abstract  would  seem  to  be 
signified. 

16  Where  a  testament  is. — In  the  preceding  verse  the  Gr. 
word  is  i;sed  in  its  usual  Biblical  sense  for  "  a  covenant," 
which  is  described  in  chap.  viii.  in  the  language  of  the  pro- 
phet Jeremiah,  and  of  which  Christ  is  the  Mediator.  Here 
the  same  word  appears  to  have  its  ordinary  classical  sense, 
"a  testament"  or  "will,"  which  is  said  to  be  of  no  force  during 
the  life  of  the  testator — i.e.,  of  Christ.  In  the  18th  and  fol- 
lowing verses  the  writer  reverts  to  the  idea  of  a  covenant. 
For  a  full    investigation  of   this   much-coutroverted  passage. 


HEBREWS— IX.  417 

see  Alford's  Note.  The  main  question  is  wbethei'  tlie  word, 
which  certainly  has  the  meaning  of  "covenant"  in  verse  15, 
is  to  be  translated  "  testament  "  in  verse  16 ;  and  this,  happily, 
is  not  a  question  of  doctrine  or  of  i)ractical  importance. 

Be.— The  Gr.  is  literally,  "  be  broiight,"  i.e.,  "  must  be  brought 
in,"  "reported"  {"  like  fertur  in  Latin" — Dr.  Field)*  before 
the  testament  will  be  held  valid. 

17  Doth  it  ever  avail?— A  nth.,  "It  is  of  no  strength  at  all." 
The  sentence  may  be  taken  either  way. 

20  Commanded  to  you-ward.— "  In  regard  to  you,"  "  for  your 
benefit,"  -n-phs  vfj-us,  not  "unto  you"  (Auth.),  "to  be  obeyed  by 
you." 

22  I  may  almost  say.—"  Almost "  in  the  Gr.  attaches  to  the 
whole  assertion,  not  to  "  all  things,"  as  in  Auth. 

23  The  copies — i.e.,  the  earthly  copies  of  the  heavenly  patterns. 
Auth.,  "  the  patterns  of  the  things  in  heaven."  As  to  "  copies," 
see  Note  on  chap.  viii.  5. 

24  Like  in  pattern.— Corresponding  in  figure.  The  Gr.  is 
literally  "  antitypes."     Auth.,  "  figures  of  the  true." 

Before  the  face  of  God. — A  Hebraism  occurring  in  the 
Gospels,  as  Matt,  xviii.  10,  and  in  the  LXX.,  Ps.  xxxiii.  16. 

25  With  blood  not  his  own.— Auth.,  "with  blood  of  others;" 
which  might  be  supposed  to  mean,  "  with  the  blood  of  other 
men."  The  true  meaning  is  that  the  priest  enters  not  with 
his  own  blood,  but  with  the  blood  of  a  victim  slain  as  a  sacrifice ; 
whereas  Christ  has  been  manifested  to  put  away  sin  by  the 
saci'ifice  of  HimseK,  by  His  own  blood-shedding. 

28  Apart  from  sin. — No  longer  "  bearing  the  sins  of  many." 
Gr.,  X^P^^  a/xapTt'as. 

To  them  that  wait  for  him. —  The  word  is  used  by 
St.  Peter  I.  iii.  17  ;  by  St.  Paid  several  tl:  ..:  Rom.  vi...  ^j, 

"  The  earnest  expectation  of  the  creation  waiteth  for  the  re- 
vealing of  the  sons  of  God ;  "  it  is  cxpres.sive  of  the  patient 
expectation  of  faith.     Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  look  for." 


BB 


418  HEBREWS— X. 


CHAPTER   X. 

1  Them  that  draw  nigh — i.e.,  "unto  God,"  as  at  cliap. 
vii.  25 ;  described  in  the  next  verse  as  "  the  worshippers."  Auth., 
"  the  comers  thereunto." 

16  Then  saith  he. — This  insertion  shews  that  the  sentence  which 
follows  is  connected  with  "  after  he  hath  said  "  in  verse  15. 

19  The  holy  place — i.e.,   "  heaven,"  as  at  chap.   ix.  8.     Auth., 

"  the  holiest." 

20  Dedicated. — Auth.,  "consecrated,"  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as 
at  chap.  ix.  18. 

21  Having  a  great  priest.— So  Wycl. ;  and  Vulg.,  sacer- 
dotem  magmim.  Anth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  a  high  priest," 
which  represents  another  word,  apxup^vs,  in  this  Epistle,  e.g., 
chap.  iv.  14,  where  Christ  is  called  "  a  great  high  priest."  Here 
the  title  "  high  "  is  not  used,  as  it  is  His  priesthood,  not  His 
high-priesthood,  on  which  tlie  stress  is  laid. 

23  That  it  waver  not — i.e.,  that  the  "  confession  of  our  hope  " 
waver  not.  Auth.,  "without  wavering,"  is  naturally  connected 
with  "  let  us  hold  fast."  Compare  chap.  iii.  6,  "  the  rejoicing 
of  our  hope."  Auth.  here,  "  of  our  faith,"  probably  by  an  over- 
sight ;  all  other  versions,  "  hope."  The  exliortations  in  verses 
22 — 24  answer  to  the  Pauline  division  into  the  three,  "faith, 
hope,  and  charity."     {Alford.) 

26  No  more  a  sacrifice — i.e.,  no  longer.  Auth.,  "  no  more 
sacrifice."     Gr.,  ovKen. 

27  A  fierceness  of  fire. — Tlie  Gr.  is  literally,  "a  zeal  or  jealousy 
of  fire."     Auth.,  "  a  fiery  indignation." 

28  Without  compassion. — Auth.,  "without  mercy."    The  Gr. 

is  olKTipfJ.uv.  not  eA-eiv. 

32  Enlightened. — Auth.,  "illuminated."  Compare  chap.  vi.  4 
(Auth.).  The  Gr.  for  "  conflict,"  not  foimd  again  in  the  New 
Testament,  relates  primarily  to  the  athletic  contests  in  the 
games,  and  is  nearly  akin  to  that  which  is  frequently  used 
by  St.  Paul,  e.g.,  at  PhiL  i.  27 ;  2  Tim.  ii.  5,  &c. 

Sufferings  represents  irofli^yuaTa,  which  is  used  of  the  "  passion  " 
of  our  Lord  in  chap.  ii.  9,  10. 

33  Partakers  with. — The  proper  meaning  of  the  Gr.  Wycl., 
"  fellows."     All  othor  versions,  "  companions." 


HEBREWS— XI.  419 

34  On  them  that  were  in  bonds,— So  Wyel.  aud  Rhom.,  fol- 
lowing Vulg.  Aiitli.,  "  of  me  iu  my  bonds,"  following  a  dif- 
ferent reading  of  tlie  Gr.  text,  probably  introduced  by  a  scribe 
as  a  connecting  link  between  this  Epistle  and  those  in  which 
St.  Paul  speaks  of  his  bonds  and  imprisonment.  Compare, 
however,  chap.  xiii.  3,  "  Remember  them  that  are  in  bonds  " 
(Auth.). 

38  My  righteous  one.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following  Vulg., 
Justus  vieus.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  the  just,"  as  the  passage  is 
quoted  by  St.  Paul  in  Rom.  i.  17 ;  Gal.  iii.  11,  from  Habak.  ii.  4. 
The  authority  of  the  MSS.  and  ancient  versions  is  in  favour  of 
"  my  "  in  this  place,  as  it  is  in  the  LXX.,  "  my  righteous  one," 
i.e.,  "my  righteous  servant," 

Shrink  back. — Tlie   Gr.  is  the   same  as  in  Acts  xx.  20,  27. 
Auth.,  "  draw  back." 

39  The  saving  of  the  soul. — Literally,  "the  gaining,"  as  in 
Lidie  xvii.  33. 


CHAPTER  XI. 

1  The  assurance  of  things  hoped  for.— The  Gr.  (hii2:iostasis) 
is  rendered  "  substance  "  iu  chap.  i.  3,  instead  of  "  person " 
(Auth.).  In  its  primary  sense  it  means  "  that  which  stands 
beneath,"  Latinised  by  substantia,  and  may  here  be  either  (1)  that 
which  is  in  the  mind  the  firm  foundation  and  assurance  of 
things  unseen,  as  in  chap.  iii.  14,  and  as  it  is  here  interpreted 
by  modern  commentators  in  general;  or  (2)  that  which  gives 
to  the  unseen  things  embodiment  and  reality,  a  substrattim,  so 
that  they  are  not  mere  jihantoms  of  the  imagination.  So  in 
this  place  Chrysostom,  Augustine,  &c.  Hence  the  two  renderings 
in  the  Text  and  Margin.  Auth.,  "  substance,"  following  "Wycl. 
and  Yulg. ;  but  without  giving  the  definite  sense  in  English, 
wliicli  is  conveyed  in  Latin  by  substantia.      See  Alford's  Note. 

The  proving.— Or  "test."  Literally,  the  "demonstration" 
or  "  proof."  Auth.,  "  the  evidence,"  following  Beza,  evidentia, 
and  Genev.  "  How  can  this  be  said  ?  Faitli  sliews  us  things 
visible  to  the  mind,  invisible  to  the  sense ;  "  so  Tlieophylact, 
quoted  by  Alford. 


420  HEBREWS— XI. 

2  Had  witness  borne  to  tliem— i.*^,  iu  the  matter  of  faith 
they  were  testified  of.  So  at  verse  39.  The  Gr.  verb  is  used 
in  this  absohxte  sense,  "  well  testified  or  reported  of,"  chiefly 
by  St.  Luke  in  the  Acts,  as  iu  chaps,  vi.  3,  x.  22.  Auth., 
"  obtained  a  good  report,"  following  Vulg.,  testimonium  con- 
secuti  sunt  senes. 

3  What  is  seen. — The  siugular  for  the  plural,  by  change  iu 
Gr.  text. 

7  Godly  fear.— Tliis,  and  not  simply  "  fear  "  (Auth.),  is  always 
the  signification  of  euAa/Seia  in  the  New  Testament. 

9  As  in  a  land  not  his  own. — Auth.,  "as  in  a  strange 
countrJ^"  The  Gr.  word  has  reference  to  the  ownership,  not 
to  the  sti'angeness  of  the  country.  A  similar  change  is  made 
in  chap.  ix.  25. 

Intents. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "tabernacles,"  which,  though 
it  has  properly  the  same  meaning,  yet,  being  specially  applied 
to  the  movable  sanctuary  in  the  wilderness,  is  apt  to  perplex 
if  not  to  mislead  the  English  reader.  Yulg.,  casulis ;  Wycl., 
"  little  houses  ;  "  Rhem.,  "  cottages." 

13  Greeted  them. — Auth.,  "embi-aced  them."  The  Gr.  is  the 
word  commonly  used  by  the  Apostles  iu  the  salutations  at  the 
close  of  their  Epistles. 

14  A  country  of  their  own.— Auth.,  "a  country."  The  Gr. 
jHitris,  Latin  patria,  means  properly  "  fatherland,"  the  country 
of  one's  birth.  "  A  coimtry,"  by  itself,  might  mean  laud  as 
distingixished  from  sea,  and  is  so  used  in  Acts  xxvii.  27. 

17  Offered  up — i.e.,  ^•i^tually  offered  him,  by  shewing  his  perfect 
willingness  to  do  so  at  God's  command  ;  and  his  act  is  spoken 
of  as  still  continuing  iu  its  effect  and  examjjle,  the  verb  being 
in  the  perfect  tense  (see  Margin) :  immediately  afterwards 
we  are  taken  back  to  the  moment  itself  of  the  inten-upted 
sacrifice  by  the  use  of  the  imperfect,  "  was  offering  up." 

19  Prom  whence  he  did  also  in  a  parable  receive  him 
back. — So  that  the  rising  from  the  dead,  as  well  as  the 
sacrifice  of  the  life,  was  virtually  accomplished,  though  oidy 
by  way  of  "  parable,"  or  as  Auth.,  "  iu  a  figure." 

22  When  his  end  was  nigh.— Literally,  "  when  he  was  end- 
ing." Auth.,  "  when  he  died."  The  verb  is  not  the  same  as 
in  verse  21 ;  but  is  frequently  used  in  the  New  Testament  in  the 
same  sense. 


HEBREWS—XII.  421 

23  A  goodly  child. — Tyud.  aud  Auth.,  "a  proper  child;"  a 
pretty  use  of  the  word  "  proper,"  but  now  obsolete,  or  only 
current  in  pi'ovincial  talk.  From  its  primary  sense  "  ijelotgiug 
to  "  it  passed  by  easy  gradations  to  "  suitable,"  "  convenient," 
"  seemly,"  "  comely,"  in  which  last  sense  it  occurs  several  times 
in  Shakspeare,  as  "  Cassio  is  a  proper  man."  Yulg.,  elegantem 
infantem;  Beza,  venustnm.  The  Gr.  is  the  word  of  the  LXX. 
in  Exod.  ii.  2.     See  also  Acts  idi.  20. 

26  He  looked  unto.— Literally,  "  he  looked  away,"  i.e.,  from  his 
present  state  and  the  temptations  which  were  before  him. 
Auth.,  "  he  had  respect  unto." 

35  By  a  resurrection.— This  is  the  literal  sense  of  the  Gr. 
Auth.,  "raised  to  life  again."  The  same  word  is  correctly 
rendered  at  the  end  of  the  verse,  "  a  better  resurrection " 
(Auth.),  i.e.,  better  than  the  temjDorary  restoration  to  life  which 
is  here  called  "  a  resurrection." 

38  Caves  and  the  holes  of  the  earth.— AU  Engl,  versions, 
"  dens  and  caves  of  the  earth."  The  word  "  den"  is  now  suggestive 
of  the  lair  of  a  wild  beast,  which  is  not  the  meaning  of  the 
Gr.  The  same  word  is  used  in  3  Kings  xviii.  4  (LXX.  version) 
of  the  cave  in  which  Obadiah  hid  fifty  of  the  Lord's  prophets. 
The  second  word,  signifying  "  a  chink"  or  "opening"  (Gr.,  ope), 
occurs  in  Jas.  iii.  11,  and  is  the  term  used  in  Exod.  xxxiii.  22 
(LXX.)  for  the  "clift  of  the  rock"  in  which  Moses  was  to 
be  while  the  glory  of  the  Lord  passed  by.  For  the  use  and 
meaning  of  the  word  "  den "  in  the  Old  Testament  (Auth.) 
see  Judg.  yi.  2;  Job  xxxviii.  8,  &c. 


CHAPTER    XII. 


2  The  author.— See  Note  on  chap.  ii.  10,  "the  author  of  our 
salvation." 

Perfecter.— Auth.,  "finisher."      The   word   is   akin  to  that 
which  is  rendered  "  made  perfect,"  chap.  xi.  40. 

3  Against  themselves.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth., 
"  against  himself ;  "  "sinners  against  their  own  souls."  as  we 
read  in  Num.  xvi  38. 


422  HEBREWS— XII. 

5  Reasoneth  with  you.— More  literal  than  Auth.,  "speaketh 

unto  yon." 

Hegard  not  lightly. — "Despise"  (Autb.,  with  Wyel.  and 
Tyncl.)  is  too  strong  a  word  for  the  Gr.     Yulg.,  noli  negligere. 

7  It  is  for  chastening  that  ye  endure.— Tliis  rendering, 
and  the  Marginal  alternative  "  endure  unto  chastening,"  are  duo 
to  the  change  in  tlie  Gr.  text  {els  for  et),  -which  makes  it  doubtful 
whether  "  endure  "  is  k)  be  taken  in  the  indicative  or  imperative 
mood.     Auth.,  "  if  ye  endure,"  &c. 

10  As  seemed  good  to  them. — Not  as  Auth.,  "  after  their  own 
pleasure."  It  is  not  the  capricious  or  arbitrary  character  of 
the  human  chastisement  which  is  here  put  in  comparison  with 
that  of  the  heavenly  Father,  but  its  liability  to  error,  even  when 
the  judgement  is  according  to  the  dictates  of  human  reason  and 
affection. 

11  All  chastening  .  .  .—The  Auth.  turns  the  affirmation  of 
the  original  into  a  negative  sentence,  which  is  neither  so  simple 
nor  so  direct. 

14  The  sanctification.— Auth.,  "holiness."  The  word  always 
means  the  process,  not  the  end.  That  we  may  see  the  Lord,  we 
must  indeed  be  holy ;  but  first  we  must  go  through  the  process 
of  being  made  holy.  Compare  1  Tim.  ii.  15,  where  the  same 
change  is  made.  The  article  is  prefixed  to  this  word,  but  not  to 
"  peace."  It  is  worthy  of  notice  that  the  Gr.  presents  a 
hexameter  line  in  the  13th  verse,  and  two  iambics  in  the  14th. 

17  Desired  to. — There  is  an  ambiguity  in  the  common  auxiliary 
form,  "  would  have  "  (Auth.). 

He  sought  it  diligently  with  tears. — The  pimctuation 
and  parenthesis  shew  that "  it "  is  to  be  referred  back  to  "  the 
blessing,"  and  not  to  be  connected,  as  tlie  punctuation  in  Auth. 
requires,  with  "  repentance."  Either  connection  is  grammatically 
possible,  and  in  point  of  sense  it  is  hard  to  choose  between  the 
two.  Chiysostom,  followed  by  many  modem  expositors,  and  by 
Auth.,  takes  the  latter,  and  explains  it  thus  :  Esau  attained  not 
to  a  true  repentance,  though  he  sought  it  with  tears ;  for  his 
self-reproach  was  not  genuine  contrition,  as  he  shewed  af tei-wards 
by  wishing  to  kill  his  brother  Jacob.  To  this,  however,  it  may 
be  objected  that  the  narrative  in  Genesis  (chap,  xx-vai.)  gives 
no  intimation  of  his  wishing  to  repent,  whereas  it  does  shew 
how  "diligently,"  how  persistently  he  sought  "the  blessing" 
(iK^riTTjo-as  aurr^y  is  the  emphatic  phrase  in  this  verse) ;  how  "  he 
cried  with  an  exceeding  bitter  cry,  saying,  Bless  me,  even  me  also, 


HEBREWS— XIT.  423 

O  my  father ;  "  aud  when  this  was  of  no  avail,  how  he  renewed 
his  entreaty  in  the  same  words,  and  "  lifted  up  his  voice,  and 
wept."  This  interpretation  is  adopted  by  Theophylact,  A 
Lapide,  and  Beza,  and  is  followed  in  the  versions  of  Tynd. 
and  Genev.  The  intervening  clause  then  refers  to  Isaac, 
thus:  "he  (Esau)  was  rejected,  for  he  found  no  place  of  re- 
pentance in  his  father  Isaac,  no  way  of  moving  him  to  revoke 
the  blessing  which  he  had  bestowed  on  Jacob." 

19  That  no  word  more  should  be  spoken.— Auth., "  that  the 
word  should  not  bespoken:"  "word"  in  the  Gr.  has  not  the 
article.  "  The  word '  (Auth.)  suggests  something  definite,  the 
word  of  God,  or  the  word  already  spoken. 

20  If  even  a  beast.— Auth.,  following  Genev.,  "  if  so  much  as  a 
beast,"  after  Beza,  si  vel  bestia — an  inelegant  rendering,  but 
more  accurate  than  the  previous  versions,  which  overlooked  the 
Gr.  Kai.  Not  even  a  wild  beast,  much  less  a  man,  was  permitted 
to  approach. 

"  Or  thrust  through  with  a  dart." — (Auth.)  Omitted  by  change 
in  Gr.  text. 

21  The  appearance.— The  Gr.  is  cognate  to  the  word  which  is 
rendered  "  apparition"  in  Matt.  xiv.  26,  Mark  vi.  49,  and  means 
properly  "  that  which  was  appearing."  Auth.,  "  the  sight,"  as  of 
something  real. 

23  Enrolled.— The  same  word  is  so  rendered  in  Luke  ii.  1.  All 
Engl,  versions,  "written." 

Made  perfect  is  to  be  joined  with  "  just  men."  The  connec- 
tion is  apparent  in  the  Gr.,  and  hardly  doubtful  in  the  Engl. ; 
but  in  illustration  of  the  mistakes  into  which  Ave  may  be  led 
by  the  absence  of  inflexions  in  our  native  language,  two  examples 
of  erroneous  interpretation  of  this  passage  are  pointed  out  by 
Dr.  Field.  Archbishop  Sumner  on  Ephes..  p.  17,  says :  "  To 
them  fully  .  .  .  will  be  the  high  privilege  of  the  '  spirits  made 
perfect ;  '  "  and  Sir  Theodore  Martin,  in  the  concluding  sentence 
of  his  Life  of  the  Prince  Consort,  says  of  the  heavenly  state, 
"  Where  tliere  is  a  rest  for  the  weary,  and  where  the  s]nrits  of 
the  just  are  made  perfect." 

24  That  speaketh  better.— So  Wycl.  and  Tynd.,  with  Vulg, 
Auth.,  with  Genev.,  following  a  different  reading  of  the  Gr, 
text,  "  better  things." 

25  Warned.— Auth.,  "spake."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  that  is 
rendered  "  warned  of  God  "  in  Matt.  ii.  12. 


424  PIEBREWS— XIII. 

26  Make  to  tremble.— Autli.,  "  sliake."  The  Gr.  is  not  tlie 
same  that  is  rendered  "  sliook  "  in  the  context,  but  occurs  in 
Matt,  xxvii.  51,  xxviii.  4  in  the  passive ;  and  there  is  "  quake." 

28  Offer  service.— All  Engl,  versions,  "serve."  The  word  here 
as  elsewhere  denotes  the  service  of  worship.  The  word  which 
follows  is  an'adverb,  "  well -plea  singly." 

Grace. — The  Marginal  translation,  "  thankfulness,"  would  bo 
equally  suitable  to  the  Gr.,  and  perhaps  even  more  apposite  in 
this  hortatory  sentence  ;  but  "  grace  "  is  a  prominent  idea  in  the 
Epistle,  and  especially  in  this  and  the  following  chapter ;  and 
an  exhortation  to  "  have  grace  "  extends  to  the  use  of  those 
means  by  wliich  grace  may  assuredly  be  obtained. 

Keverence. — The  word  is  rendered  "godly  fear"  in  chap.  v.  7, 
and  here  in  Autli. 

Awe. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  reverence  "  (Stovs  for 
aldoiJs).  Besides  the  change  of  words,  there  is  also  a  trans- 
position in  the  Gr.  text,  making  reverence  the  first  word, 
which  stands  second  ("  godly  fear  ")  in  Auth. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 


1  Love  of  the  brethren— i.e.,  of  the  believers.  See  Note  on 
Bom.  xii.  10.  Auth.,  ''  brotherly  love."  The  word  in  classical 
autliors  means  love  of  brothers  and  sisters,  but  not  in  the  New 
Testament. 

2  To  shew  love  unto  strangers.— The  Gr.  philoxenia,  "love 
of  sti-augevs,"  is  formed  in  tire  same  manner  as  philadelpliia, 
"  love  of  the  brethren,"  in  verse  1.  All  Engl,  versions,  "  to 
lodge,"  or,  as  Auth.,  "  to  entertain  strangers,"  treating  the 
Gr.  as  a  verb  akin  to  tliat  which  is  rightly  translated  "  entertain  " 
in  this  verse. 

3  Are  evil  entreated. — Auth.,  "  suffer  adversity,"  as  in  chap. 
xi.  37. 

4  Let  marriage  be  had  in  honour.— Auth.,  "marriage  is 
honourable."  The  absence  of  a  verb  in  the  Gr.  raises  the  ques- 
tiou  whether  the  sentence  is  a  command,  or,  as  given  in  Auth., 


HEBHEWS— XITT.  425 

the  statement  of  a  geiKral  truth  rrom  which  a  command  to 
observe  it  may  be  inferred.  Standing  in  the  midst  of  exhorta- 
tions, and  resembling  them  in  the  collocation  of  the  words,  it 
seems  more  naturally,  as  well  as  more  forcibly,  to  follow  their 
construction  and  their  hortatory  tone  than  to  break  off  from 
them  with  a  didactic  statement,  from  which  a  return  to  the  im- 
perative  mood  is  made  in  the  next  verse.  Moreover,  as  a  matter 
of  Greek  construction,  "  the  bed  imdefiled  "  (Auth.)  can  only  be 
justified  by  expanding  the  phrase  thus — "  Marriage  is  honourable, 
and  the  bed  is  undefiled ;  '  which,  in  point  of  sense,  is  incon- 
gi'uous.  Chrysostora  takes  the  sentence  as  an  affirmation ; 
Theophylact  as  a  precept.     See  Alf  ord's  Note. 

6  What  shall  man  do  unto  me?— The  change  made  in  this 
quotation  from  Psalm  cxviii.  6  (LXX.)  brings  it  into  accordance 
with  the  original  Hebrew,  and  also  removes  a  construction  which, 
though  permissible  in  English,  is  ungrammatical  in  Greek,  "  I 
will  not  fear  what  man  can  do  unto  me  "  (Auth.). 

7  Them  that  had  the  rule  over  you.— Auth.,  "  them  which 
have  the  rule  over  you."  Gr.,  "your  rulers."  From  what- 
follows  it  appears  that  these  rulers  had  passed  away,  and  were  to 
be  remembered  for  their  good  works  and  examples ;  such  were 
St.  Stephen,  St.  James  the  great,  and  St.  James  the  less,  who 
all  had  died  a  martyr's  death  at  Jerusalem, 

The  issue.  —Auth.,  "  the  end."    Gr.,  (K$a(nv,  "  the  outcome." 

Life,  imitate.— See  1  Tim.  iv.  12;  1  Cor.  iv.  16;  and  2 
Thess.  iii.  7. 

8  Jesus  Christ  is  the  same. — "  The  earthly  rulers  pass  away  ; 
the  heavenly  Lord  is  the  same  to-day  as  yesterday,  and  will 
be  the  same  for  ever."  To  bring  out  fully  this  meaning 
is  and  yea  are  added  in  italics :  the  former  shewing  that  the 
eentence  is  not  an  exclamation,  or  an  explanation  of  the  phrase 
"the  issue  of  their  life;"  the  latter  making  "for  ever"  an 
independent  clause,  suggested  by  the  preceding.  The  collocation 
of  the  words  in  the  Gr.  appears  plainly  to  indicate  this. 

9  Carried  away  by.— For  Auth.,  "carried  about  with,"  by 
change  in  Gr.  text — irapacpepea-ee,  "be  carried  aside  out  of  the 
right  way,"  for  ■}repi(t>fpea-Oe,  "  be  carried  roimd  and  round  "  (as 
in  Eph.  iv.  14),  like  the  leaves  in  autumn,  by  every  wind  of 
doctrine. 

17  They  watch  in  behalf  of  your  souls — i.e.,  to  protect 
them.  The  Gr.  is  inrtp ;  "  watch  for "  (Auth.)  might  be  said 
of  one  who  watched  with  an  unfriendly  intent. 


426  HEBREWS -XIII. 

That  they  may  do  this. — The  reference  of  "  do  this  "  is  to 
the  "  bearing  rule "  and  "  watching,"  not  to  the  "  giving 
account."  The  change  in  punctuation  after  "  give  account " 
(semicolon  for  comma),  as  weU  as  the  substitution  of  this  for 
"  it "  (Auth.),  is  intended  to  point  to  this  interpretation,  which 
is  al^o  indicated  by  the  concluding  clause  of  the  sentence. 

This  were  unprofitable. — "  This,"  viz.,  "  to  give  account  with 

grief."     Auth.,  "  that  is  unprofitable." 

18  We  are  persuaded. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  we  trust," 
as  Auth.  and  previous  versions.  "  We  trust,"  imtoldaixev,  is 
St.  PaxU's  ijlirase :  see  Gal.  v.  10 ;  Phil.  i.  25 ;  "  we  are  per- 
suaded "  is  St.  Luke's  in  Acts  xxvi.  26. 

19  I  exhort  you  the  more  exceedingly.— The  Gr.  requires  a 

stronger  Engl,  word  than  "  the  rather "  (Auth.).  Whether 
joined  with  "  I  exhort  you  "  or  with  "  to  do  this,"  it  expresses  a 
vehement  desire  on  the  part  of  the  writer. 


THE     GENERAL     EPISTLE     OF 

JAMES. 

CHAPTER   I. 

1  Of  the  dispersion.— Autli..  "  scattered  abroad."  The  same 
word  Diaspora  is  used  by  St.  Peter  at  the  begmiiing'  of  his  First 
Epistle,  and  by  St.  John  in  his  Gospel  (vii.  35).  It  comprehended 
in  the  time  of  the  Apostles  all  Jews  living  outside  of  the  Holy 
Land. 

4  Lackiiig  in  nothing.— As  Vnlg.,  in  nullo  deficientes.  Auth., 
"  wanting  nothing."  The  Gr.  for  "  lacking  "  is  the  same  as  in 
the  next  verse ;  but  the  noun  which  follows  is  here  dependent  on 
the  preposition  eV,  "in,"  not  as  inverse  5  on  the  verb  itself: 
consequently  the  meaning  here  is  "  in  no  respect  falling  short 
of  the  perfection  and  entireuess  which  have  just  been  men- 
tioned,"  in  verse  5,  "if  any  of  you  falleth  short  of  wisdom." 

6  Nothing  doubting.  —  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  nothing 
wavering,"  for  the  sake  perhaps  of  the  word  "  waves  "  which 
follows,  though  there  is  no  similarity  in  the  Gr. 

The  surge  of  the  sea.— Auth.,  "  a  wave  of  the  sea."  The 
Gr.  K\v5oiiy,  as  distingi;ished  from  the  more  usual  word  Kv/xa, 
denotes  the  state  of  the  sea  when  violently  agitated  l}y  the  wijul. 
Compare  Luke  viii.  24. 

8  A  doublemiuded  man  .  .  .—All  Engl,  versions,  with  Yxdg., 
insert  is ;  but  the  clause  without  such  insertion  may  be  connected 
with  "he,"  the  subject  of  the  former  clause ;  or  it  may  be  taken 
to  be  the  subject  of  that  clause,  as  in  the  Margin. 

9  In  his  high  estate.— Literally,  "  in  his  height."  Aiith.,  "  in 
that  he  is  exalted."  Of  such  glorying  the  Magnificat  is  the 
most  eminent  example. 


428  JAMES.— I. 

11  TliQ  nwv.  ai'iseth.— So  Tynd. ;  Auth.,  "  tlie  sun  is  uo  sooner 
risen."  The  Gr.  aorist  here  has  its  "  usitative  "  sense,  "  is 
wont  to." 

The  scorching  wind.— Anth.,  "a  burning  heat."  The  Gr. is 
the  same  as  in  Matt.  xx.  12 ;  and  Jonah  iv.  8  (LXX.),  where 
the  Auth.  has  "  a  vehement  east  wind." 

Fade  away  in  his  goings.— Auth.,  "  fade  away  in  his  ways." 
The  change  is  not  made  merely  to  avoid  the  coincidence  in  sound, 
biit  because  the  word  for  '"  ways  "  is  not  the  same  as  in  verse  8 ; 
and  as  distinguished  from  that — which  may  be  "  ways  of  life, 
liabits"' — this  may  be  "  projects,  adventures,"  in  which  a  man 
makes  a  start  and  presently  gives  them  up.  The  combination 
of  metaphors  may  remind  us  of  that  in  Juvenal  ix.  126, ''  Festinat 
enwi  clecurrere  velox  Flosculiis." 

12  When  he  hath  been  approved.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem., 
following  Vulg.,  probahis.  Auth.,  "when  he  is  tried."  The 
Gr.  denotes  the  favourable  result  of  the  trial. 

14  Each  man— i.e.,  severally,  in  a  way  peculiar  to  himself.  Auth., 
"every  man,"  which  would  rather  indicate  the  universality  of 
temptation. 

The  lust,  the  sin,  in  verse  15,  also  appear  to  be  particularised, 
and  not  regarded  in  the  abstract. 

15  Fullgrown. —  Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "  finished,"  dropping 
the  metaphor  of  tlie  jjreceding  clause,  which  is  continued  in  the 
original. 

Beareth  .  .  .  bringeth  forth. — The  variation  in  the  Gr. 
is  not  observed  in  Auth. 

16  Be  not  deceived. — Literally,  "  be  not  led  astray."  Auth., 
'•do  not  err." 

17  Every  good  gift  and  every  perfect  boon.— Here  also 
there  is  a  variation  which  in  the  Engl,  versions  (except  Genev.) 
is  disregarded;  and  indeed  it  is  not  easily  grasped.  Yidg., 
07nne  datum  optimum  et  omne  donum  perfecttmi.  Genev.  has 
"  eveiy  good  givuig  and  every  perfect  gift,"  taking  S6(Tti 
(Engl.,  "dose ")  in  its  primary  sense,  as  the  act  of  giving.  Accord- 
ing to  PhUo,  the  second  word,  Swp-nna,  means  a  superlatively 
good  gift ;  if  that  is  so,  "  boon,"  from  the  Latin  honum,  may 
fairly  represent  it.  The  words  of  the  Gr.  form  a  hexameter 
verse,  if  the  second  syllable  of  ^6<ns  is  lengthened  by  the  ictus 
upon  it  {Wordsicorth,  Note). 


JAMES.— I.  429 

Can  be.— Autli.,  "is."  The  Gr.  signifies  tliat  it  is  uot  in  His 
natm-e. 

Variation. —  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "variableness."  The  Gr. 
denotes  not  tlie  quality  in  the  abstract,  but  actual  change. 

Shadow  that  is  cast  by  turning— i.e.,  by  the  daily  and 
yearly  [apparent]  revolution  of  the  sun.  Auth.,  "  shadow  of 
turning."  The  shifting  of  the  shadow  appears  to  l^e  tlie  idea 
expressed  by  rpoiTrjs  a.iro(TKiaa-fj.a  (by  enallage  for  rpoTr?;  airoiTKidcr- 
fiaros). 

18  He  brought  us  forth.— Auth.,  "begat  he  us."  The  Gr.  is 
the  same  as  in  verse  15. 

19  Ye  know  this. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  (t'o-re  for  uVre).  So 
Wycl.  and  Rhem,,  following  Vulg.  scitis.  Tynd.  and  Autli., 
"  Avherefore." 

21  Overflowing  of  wickedness. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  super- 
fluity," which  would  mean,  in  modern  usage,  too  much  of  that 
which  in  moderation  is  good.  We  are  reminded  of  the  phrase  in 
Ps.  xviii.  4  (Prayer-book  version),  "  the  overflowings  of  ungod- 
liness ;  "  but  in  the  LXX.  version  the  word  is  different,  xe'V^Ppoj- 

Wickedness. — Auth.,  "  naughtiness."  Other  versions,  "  ma- 
lice "  or  "maliciousness."  The  Gr.  kukIus  is  an  ordinary  word, 
and  of  more  compi-ehensive  meaning  than  "  naughtiness "  in 
its  present  usage. 

21  Implanted. — That  which  is  sown  within  you,  the  inspired 
word  of  God ;  with  an  allusion,  perhaps,  to  the  parable  of  the 
sower.  Auth.,  "engrafted."  The  Gr.  in  its  primary  meaning 
is  "  inborn." 

22  Deluding. — All  English  versions,  "  deceiving."  The  Gr.  is  the 
same  as  in  Col.  ii.  4,  and  properly  signifies  deception  by  false 
reasoning. 

25  The  Imv  of  liberty. — The  position  of  the  Gr.  article  implies 
the  reiteration  which  in  English  needs  to  be  expressed.  "The 
law  of  liberty,"  that  liberty  wherewith  Christ  hath  made  us  free. 

And  so  continueth. — i.e.,  continueth  looking.  Auth.,  "  con- 
tinueth  therein,"  i.e.,  in  the  law  of  liberty;  which  is  not  the 
meaning  of  the  Gr. 

A  hearer  that  forgetteth. — The  Gr.  is  Hebraistic,  "  not  a 
hearer  of  forge tfulness,  but  a  doer  of  a  work."     The  two  clauses 


430  JAMES.— II. 

slioulfl  be  symuictrical  iu  trauslatiou,  as  iu  the  origiual.  Auth., 
"uot  a  forgetful  liearer,  but  a  doer  of  tlie  work." 

In  his  doing. — All  English  versions,  '•■  in  his  deed,"  i.e.,  in 
his  accomplished  work,  following  Yulg.,  in  facto  suo.  The 
word  is  akin  to  that  which  is  rendered  "  doer"  in  this  verse. 


CHAPTER   II. 


1  Hold  not— Auth.,  "have  uot."  This  use  of  ^x'^,  "to  have," 
is  chai-acteristic  of  the  Epistle.  See  chap.  i.  4,  ii.  14,  iii.  14. 
The  senteuco  admits  of  being  taken  interrogatively,  as  iu  the 
Margin. 

3  Ye  have  regard. — Literally,  "ye   look  upon."     Auth.,  with 

Tyud.,  "  ye  have  respect." 

4  Are  ye  not  divided? — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "are  ye  uot  par- 
tial," which,  according  to  present  usage  of  the  word,  would  mean, 
"  disposed  to  favour  one  side  rather  than  the  other."  The  Gr.  does 
uot  allow  of  that  interpretation,  though  its  raeauiug  here  is 
imcertaiu.  It  may  mean,  as  in  chap.  i.  6,  "ye  are  in  doubt," 
"  ye  are  divided  in  your  thoughts,"  i.e.,  between  the  principles  of 
Christian  equality  and  worldly  prudence  ;  or,  "  ye  are  divided 
amoug  yourselves  "  (as  a  house  divided  within  itself)  by  a  liue 
of  separation  betweeu  rich  and  poor.  The  former  of  these  two 
senses  appears  the  more  near  to  tlie  primary  meauing  of  the 
word,  and  is  that  of  the  cognate  adjective  in  chap.  iii.  17. 

5  Them  that  are  poor  as  to  the  world.— By  change  in  Gr. 
text  (the  dative  case  for  the  genitive)  for  ''  the  poor  of  this  world." 

To  be  rich  in  faith. — The  insertion  in  italics  is  necessary 
to  the  sense,  and,  to  prevent  any  doubt,  is  better  expressed  than 
left  to  he  mentally  si^iiplied,  as  in  Auth. 

t>  Dishonoured. — All  Engl,  versions,  "despised:"  a  word  which 
in  Auth.  represents  seven  distinct  Gr.  words.  Vulg.,  exhono- 
rastis,     Uompare  Heb.  x.  28. 


JAMES.— II.  431 

The  poor  man. — Auth.,  "the  poor."  The  Gv.  is  iu  the 
singular  number,  rhv  irruxSy. 

And  themselves  drag  you. — The  word  implies  violeuce. 
Auth.,  "  draw  you."     Compare  Acts  xxi.  26. 

Themselves.— Gr.,  oi»to(,  with  this  meaning,  "  Is  it  not  those 
very  men,  the  rich,  who  treat  you  thus  insolently?  then  why 
should  you  give  special  honour  to  a  man  because  he  is  rich  ?  " 

7  The  honotirable  name.— Auth.,  with  Genev.,  "that  worthy 
najoie."  Wycl.  and  Tynd.,  "  that  good  name,"  as  Yulg.,  bonmn 
nomen.  Gr.,  rh  Ka\hv  ovo/xa,  "  the  beautiful  Name,"  from  which 
they  had  their  name  given  to  them  opprobriously,  "  Christians." 

9  Convicted  by  the  law. — Auth.,  "  convinced  of  the  law." 
Tynd.,  "rebuked  of  the  law."  "Con\dnce"  in  Auth.  sometimes 
has  the  sense  of  "convict,"  as  in  John  viii.  46,  "which  of  you 
convinceth  me  of  sin  ?  " 

10  Stumble. — The  same  word  is  so  rendered  iu  Auth.  at  Rom. 
xi.  11,  "  Have  they  stumbled  that  they  should  fall  ? "  but 
here  and  in  chap.  iii.  2,  "  offend."    Tynd.,  "  fail." 

12  As  men  that  are  to  be  judged.— Literally,  "as  being 
about  to  be  judged"  (/xiWovTis  Kpiviadai). 

13  Judgement  is  without  mercy  to  him  .  .  .—Literally, 
"  is  merciless."  Auth.,  foUowiug  Craum.,  "we  shall  have  judg- 
ment without  mercy;"  "judgement"  is  rei^resented  as  a  per- 
sonal agent  in  both  clauses  of  the  sentence. 

15  In  lack  of. — So  Rhem.  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  chap.  i.  4,  5. 
Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  destitute  of." 

17  Is  dead  in  itself.— So  all  Engl,  versions,  excejit  Auth., 
"  is  dead,  being  alone,"  which  misses  the  true  significance  of 
the  original;  its  deaduess  is  intrinsic,  and  consists  not  iu  its 
"  being  alone,"  or  "  by  itself,"  and  lacking  outward  support, 
which  is  the  case  rather  of  those  whom  it  refiises  to  help. 

18  Apart  from. — Separate  from.     Auth.,  "  without."     Gr.,  x<^P^J- 

19  That  God  is  one. — Auth.,  "that  there  is  one  God."  Gr..  efs 
iCTTiv  6  @e6s.  "  God  "  is  the  subject ;  of  Him  it  is  predicated 
that  He  is  One. 


432  JAMES.— III. 

20  Barren.— Literally,  "  idle,"  "  doing  uo  wurk,"  as  iu  2  Peter 
i.  8  ;  by  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Autli.,  "  dead." 

21  In  that  he  oifered  up.— Autli.,  "  wlieu  he  offered."  The  Gr. 
participle  has  a  causal  rather  than  a  temporal  sense ;  so  in 
verse  25. 


CHAPTER    III. 

1  Teachers. — Autli.,  "  masters,"  a  word  which  foriuerly  had  the 
special  meaning  of  "teacher,"  when  used  absolutely,  as  it  is 
in  the  Gospels,  to  represent  ''  Rabbi."  But  properly  "  master" 
denotes    supei'iority,   mag-ister,    as    inferiority    is    implied    by 

min-ister. 

2  Stumble.— See  Note  on  chap.  ii.  10. 

3  Now  if.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  Behold "  (Auth.) 
If  we  put  the  bridle  into  the  horse's  mouth  to  make  him  obey 
us,  by  so  doing  we  obtain  the  obedience  not  of  his  head  only, 
but  of  his  whole  body ;  in  the  same  manner,  he  who  can  rule 
his  tongue  can  rule  his  whole  self. 

The  horses'  bridles.— This,  according  to  the  Gr.,  is  the 
connection  of  the  words,  not  as  in  all  Engl,  versions,  with 
Vulg.,  "  the  horses'  mouths." 

Bridles. — So  Wycl.,  following  Vulg.  frena.  Auth.,  "  bits." 
The  Gr.  word,  which  in  the  preceding  verse  enters  into 
composition  with  '"lead"  in  the  verb  rendered  "to  bridle," 
xaAivayoiyi^u,  includes  properly  the  whole  bridle,  though  often 
used  for  the  "bit,"  the  wliole  for  the  part,  by  the  figure 
which  the  grammarians  call  synecdoche,  and  of  which  another 
form  iu  the  opposite  sense,  the  part  for  the  whole,  occurs  in 
the  next  verse  (Auth.). 

4  BiOugh  winds. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "fierce."  Literally, 
"hard"  or  "harsh."  "Fierce"  has  an  ethical  meaning,  which 
(7K\rip6s  does  not  imply,  when  applied  to  physical  objects  and 
phenomena,  such  as  "  winds." 


JAMES.— in.  433 

Rudder.— Auth.  liere,  with  Tyud.,  "helm;  "  but  in  Acts  xxvii. 
40,  "rudder,"  which  is  the  proper  meaning  of  the  Gr.  in^SdKtov. 
The  "  helm  "  is  properly  the  upper  part  of  the  rudder,  often 
used  poetically  for  the  whole. 

The  impulse  of  the  steersman.— Auth.,  with  Gener., 
(omitting  the  first  word)  "the  governor."  Tynd.,  Cranm.,  and 
Rhem.,  "  whithersoever  the  violence  of  the  governor  will." 
Vulg.,  ubi  vis  dirigentis  voluerit.  Beza,  impulsus  gubei-na- 
toris.  Quhernator,  "  governor,"  in  its  primary  sense  is  a 
steersman  or  pilot  of  a  ship. 

5  How  much  wood. — Margin, "  Or,  lioio  great  a  forest.'^  The 
Gr,  v\i)  may  be  either  a  quantity  of  wood  used  for  fuel,  or  a 
standing  wood,  a  forest,  or  dead  matter,  "  materials,"  as  Beza, 
niateriain,  whence  Auth.,  "  how  great  a  matter."  This  phrase, 
however,  "  a  matter,"  witli  the  indefinite  article,  rather  suggests 
the  logical  sense  in  which  the  Gr.  word  is  used  by  Aristotle, 
to  denote  the  subject-matter  of  an  argument  or  discourse.  Tlie 
primary  meaning  of  v\7i  is  "  a  forest "  (in  Latin,  sylva).  The 
poetical  idea  of  a  forest  destroyed  by  a  little  spark  is  classical, 
being  found  in  Homer,  II.  xi.  115 ;  Virgil,  Georgic  ii.  303,  &c. 
In  this  passage,  where  the  imagery  is  taken  from  the  incidents 
of  common  life,  the  derivative  meaning,  wood  for  fuel,  seems 
more  probable. 

6  The  world  of  iniquity  .  .  . — "So"  (Auth.)  is  omitted  by 
change  in  Gr.  text.  The  other  changes  and  the  ahernative  ren- 
derings in  the  Margin  depend  on  various  modes  of  punctuation, 
and  involve  no  material  difference  in  meaning. 

The  wheel  of  nature. — Literally,  "  the  wheel  of  creation  " 
or  "  birth ;  "  the  orb,  or  cycle,  or  totality  of  creation.  Tyud. 
and  Craum.,  "  all  that  we  have  of  nature."  Autli.,  with  Geuev., 
"  the  course  of  nature,"  understanding  by  "  the  wheel  "  the 
orbit  in  which  Nature  moves.     Vulg.,  rotavi  nativitatis. 

Hell. — Gr.,  Gehenna,  not  Hades. 

7  Creeping  things. — All  Engl,  versions,  with  Vulg.,  "serpents." 

Gr.,  fpTTiTuiy,  not  otpeuy, 

8  Restless.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "unruly"  (Auth.). 
Vulg.,  inquietam,  and  so  Wycl.  and  Rhem. 

11  From  the  same  opening.— So  Wycl.   and   Rhem.      Vulg., 
de  eodem  forainine.     Tynd.   and   Auth.  less  literally,  "  at  tne 
same  r)lace."     The  Gr.  6irv  ia  used  in  Heb.  xi.  38. 
C  G 


434  JAMES.— IV. 

12  Neither  can  salt  water  yield  sweet.— By  change  in  Gr. 
text  for  Auth.,  "  neither  can  a  fountain  both  yield  salt  water 
and  fresh."  A  salt  source  cannot  yield  sweet  water;  an  evil 
tongue,  similarly,  cannot  utter  good  words. 

13  Wise  and  understanding.— The  same  two  words,  literally, 
"  wise  and  knowing,"  are  found  together  in  Dent.  i.  13  (LXX.); 
the  latter  does  not  again  occur  in  the  New  Testament.  The 
distinctions  which  have  been  drawn  between  them  are  not 
well  supported  by  their  usage. 

14  Jealousy  and  faction.— Auth.,  "  env^nug  and  strife."  So 
Acts  xiii.  45 ;  Rom.  ii.  8,  and  elsewhere. 

16  Deed. — The  Gr.  denotes  a  thing  done,  not  "  a  work,''  as  all 
Engl,  versions.     The  converse  change  is  made  in  chap.  ii.  25. 

17  Without  variance. — Aixth.,  "  without  partiality."  The  Gr. 
is  the  same  as  in  chap.  ii.  4. 


CHAPTER    IV. 

2  Covet. — Margin,  "Or,  are  jealous.^'  The  Gr.  may  have  either 
sense.     Compare  1  Cor.  xii.  31 ;  Jas.  iii.  14. 

3  Spend. — Auth.,  "  consume,"  which  is  the  usiial  rendering  in 
Auth.  for  another  word,  as  "  spend  "  is  for  this. 

4  "  Adulterers." — (Auth.)    Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text.    Tlie 
■    Aj)Ostle  addresses  those  who  have  broken  their  vows  to  God 

in  the  stern  language  of  the  old  prophets  rebuking  the  people 
of  Israel.  Thus  Ezek.  (xvi.  32)  says  to  Jerusalem,  "  Thou  hast 
been  as  a  wife  that  committeth  adultery."     Ps.  Ixxiii.  2,  6,  &c. 

Maketh  himself.—"  Thereby  becomes."    Auth., "  is."    Vulg., 

constituitur.     Gr.,  KaQicrrarai,  as  at  chap.  iii.  6. 

5  Or  think  ye  .  .  . — The  main  difference  between  this  and  the 
Auth.  is  caused  by  the  change  of  punctuation,  according  to  which 
the  sentence,  which  in  Auth.  is  one,  is  broken  into  two,  the 
former  being  a  general  question,  the  latter  not,  as  in  Auth., 
a  quotation  from  Scripture  introduced  by  the  former,  but  an 


JAMES.— IV.  435 

independent  question  asked  by  the  Apostle  himself.  This  view 
of  the  passage,  which  is  that  of  Bede  in  ancient  times,  has 
been  adopted  by  Whitby  (A.d.  1700)  and  Bishop  Wordsworth. 
It  avoids  the  difficulty  of  attributing  to  the  Old  Testament 
a  sentence  which  is  not  now  found  in  it :  and  no  objection 
can  be  raised  to  the  rendering  of  ^tyei,  "speaketh,"  instead 
of  "saith,''  as  in  the  next  verse;  for  it  is  so  used  in  2  Cor. 
•  vi.  13.  The  question  is  tlien  to  be  understood  as  an  inquiry 
whether  the  Holy  Spii-it,  Who  has  taken  up  His  abode  in  us, 
longeth  for  us  to  such  a  degree  as  to  be  an  example  of  envy 
and  jealousy;  and  the  implied  answer  is,  "  No,  He  is  a  Spirit  of 
gentleness."  On  the  wnole,  this  interpretation  appears  the 
more  probable.  That  which  in  substance,  with  variations, 
has  been  generally  followed  by  ancient  and  modern  expositors 
is  given  in  the  Margin.  Neither  in  the  letter  nor  in  the 
spirit  of  the  Old  Testament  is  such  a  statement  found  as 
this,  if  (as  in  Auth.)  it  represents  the  Spirit  "  lusting  to 
envy,"  i.e.,  to  a  degree  bordering  on  envy. 

10  He  shall  exalt  you.— The  phrase  is  made  familiar  to  us 
by  Matt,  xxiii.  12  ;  1  Pet.  v.  6.    Auth.,  "  lift  you  up." 

11  Speak  against.— So  Auth.  in  1  Peter  ii.  12,  but  here  "  speak 
evil  of,"  which  limits  the  prohibition  to  backbiting.  This  limited 
sense  of  the  word  is,  however,  supported  by  Dr.  Field  in 
his  Note;  and  the  cognate  noun  in  Rom.  i.  30  is  rendered 
"  backbiters." 

12  Thy  neighbour.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "another." 
Compare  Rom.  xiv.  4. 

13  This  city.— Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "such  a  city;"  but  there 
appears  to  be  no  instance  of  the  definite  pronoun  in  Gr.  being 
used  thus  indefinitely. 

Spend  a  year.— Literally,  "  make  a  year,"  as  in  Acts  xv.  23. 
The  Gr.  vividly  suggests  the  idea  that  the  time  was  their 
own  to  "  make  out,"  and  do  with,  as  tliey  pleased. 

Trade. — Auth.,  "buy  and  sell."  The  Gr.,  which  does  not 
occur  again  in  the  New  Testament,  is  a  general  term  for  acting 
as  a  merchant. 

14  Ye  are.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  it  is  "  (Auth.).  Thus 
Horace  says,  Pulvis  ei  umhra  sumus,  "  Dixst  and  a  shade 
we  are." 

16  Your  vauntings. — Auth.,  "your  boastings;"  literally,  "your 
vaingloriousnesses."    The  word  occurs  again  in  1  John  ii.  16. 


436  JAMES.— V. 


CHAPTER    V. 

3  Rusted  .  .  .  their  rust.— So  "Wycl.  Autli., "  caukeroJ  .  .  . 
their  rust."     The  two  Trorcls  in  Gr.  are  cognate. 

Ye  have  laid  up  your  treasure  (one  word  in  Gr.)  in  the 
last  days — i.e.,  "ye  have  laid  up  earthly  treasure  when  the 
Lord's  coming  is  at  hand,  and  when  ye  ought  to  have  been 
preparing  for  that,  and  with  a  view  to  it  laying  up  treasure 
in  heaven."  Auth.,  "for  the  last  days,"  erroneously  trans- 
lating the  preposition  eV,  and  so  falling  in  with  another  in- 
terpretation, which  associates  this  passage  with  Rom,  ii.  5, 
"Thou  treasurest  up  for  thyself  wrath  in  the  day  of  wrath." 

4  Mowed  .  .  .  reaped  rejoresent  two  different  words  in  the  Gr, 

5  In  a  day  of  slaughter.— "  As "  (Auth.)  being  omitted  by 
change  in  Gr.  text.  The  comparison  is  with  beasts  feeding 
themselves  as  usual  on  the  day  of  their  slaughter ;  and  the 
idea  is  the  same  as  that  in  verse  3,  of  treasuring  up  wealth 
"  in  the  last  days." 

9  Murmur  not. — Auth.,  "  grudge  not,"  which  formerly  may 
have  borne  the  same  meaning,  but  now  denotes  a  suppressed 
feeling  of  ill-will. 

13  Cheerful. — Auth.,  "  merry,"  which  suggests  the  outward  ex- 
pression of  joyousness,  rather  than  the  inward  cheerfulness 
of  the  Gr.  (iidvuf?. 

Let  him  sing  praise. — Auth.,  "  let  him  sing  Psalms."  The 
Gr.  ipsalmodein)  denoted  properly  the  musical  accompaniment 
of  the  song,  and  thence  was  applied  either  to  the  music  or 
the  song,  or  to  both  as  one  art,  but  not  exclusively  to  the 
singing  of  "  Psalms,"  understanding  by  that  word  the  Psalter 
or  "  Psalms  of  David."     Compare  Rom.  xv.  9  ;  Eph.  v.  19. 

16  Confess  therefore. — "  Therefore,"  added  consequently  on  a 
change  in  the  Gr.  text,  connects  this  command  with  the  pre- 
ceding verses.  There  is  no  express  injunction  to  confess  to 
the  elders  of  the  Church :  biit  it  would  seem  to  be  implied  in 
the  direction  that  they  are  to  "  pray  over "  the  sick  man ; 
and  the  further  direction  is  here  given  that  the  believers 
should  confess  their  sins  (not  to  the  elders  only,  but)  "one 
to  another,"  and  "  pray  one  for  another." 


JAMES.— V.  437 

In  its  working.— Gr.,  fvepyov/xfvn.  The  force  of  this  word, 
staucliug  at  the  eud  of  the  sentence,  is  much  impaired 
in  Auth.,  which  rej)resents  it  as  an  epithet  and  resolves  it 
into  two  adjectives,  "  the  effectual  fervent  prayer."  Tlie 
meaning  is  that  the  prayer  avails  much  by  its  working.  Com- 
pare Gal.  V.  6,  "  faith  working  by  love,"  where,  as  in  this 
place,   it  is  joined  with  la-xvn ;   and  see  Col.  i.  29. 

17  Of  like  passions.— Margin,  "Or,  nature."  Auth..  "subject 
to  like  passions."  The  word  occurs  once  again  in  the  New 
Testament,  Acts  xiv.  15. 

20  Shall  cover. — Shall  be  the  means  of  covering,  of  blotting  out, 
the  sins  of  the  convert.  Auth.,  "  shall  hide."  Compare  1  Peter 
iv.  8  ;  Prov.  x.  12. 


THE    FIEST    EPISTLE    GENERAL    OF 

PETER. 

CHAPTER  L 

1  To  the  elect. — This  word  by  the  Gr.  construction  is  joined 
with  "according  to  the  foreknowledge  of  God"  (as  in  Auth.), 
but  by  position  it  is  made  emijhatic,  coming  after  the  name  and 
title  of  the  Apostle,  with  this  meaning—"  to  those  who  have 
been  chosen  to  receive  the  Gospel  (being  Jews  scattered  abroad 
and  sojourning  in  Pontus,  &c.)  according  to  God's  fore- 
knowledge." 

Sojourners  of  the   Dispersion. — See    Note   on  James  i. 
Auth.,  "  the  strangers  scattered." 

2  In  sanctification.— Comp.  2  Thess.  ii.  13,  and  Note  there. 
The  same  change  of  "  in  "  for  "  through  "  (Auth.)  is  made  in 
2  Pet.  i.  2. 

3  A  living  hope.— Auth.,  "lively."  Compare  chap.  ii.  4,  5, 
"  a  living  stone,"  where  the  Gr.  is  the  same. 

5  Guarded.  —  Protected  by  God's  watchfulness  and  power. 
Auth.,  "  kept."     The  Gr.  is  a  military  word.      See  2  Cor.  xi.  38. 

6  Ye  have  been  put  to  grief.  —  The  Gr.  (aorist  participle) 
denotes  a  definite  affliction,  not  the  being  "  in  heaioness  "  (Auth.). 

7  More  precious  than  gold — i.e.,  "  the  proof  and  testing  of 
your  faith  is  of  more  value  than  gold."  Auth.,  "  than  of  gold," 
i.e.,  "  the  proof  of  your  faith  is  of  more  value  than  the  testing 
of  gold,"  which  is  not  grammatically  correct,  nor  helpful  to  the 
sense. 

10  Sought.— Auth.,  "  enquired,"  which  implies  asking  questions, 
and  represents  another  Gr.  word,  as  in  Matt.  ii.  4. 


I.  PETER.— I.  439 

11  What  time,  or  what  manner  of  time — i.e.,  "  what  would 
be  the  time,  or  of  Avliat  sort,  by  wliat  signs  and  circumstances  it 
woidd  be  attended."  Autli.,  "  wliat,  or  what  manner  of  time," 
would  mean  "  what  things,"  as  if  the  Gr.  rim  were  the  neuter 
plural. 

12  Sent  forth.— Aiith.,  "  sent  down."  The  verb  in  Gr.  is  cognate 
to  the  noun  Apostolos. 

13  Set  your  hope. — The  Gr.  expresses  a  definitive  act  of  hope, 
accomplished  once  for  aU ;  not,  as  Auth.,  "  hope  to  the  end,"  the 
state  of  hopefulness.  Perfectly,  without  reserve  or  faltering ; 
not  as  Auth.,  "  to  the  end,"  in  a  temporal  sense. 

14  Children  of  obedience. — The  common  Hebraism,  suggested 
by  the  vivid  Oriental  imagination,  which  personified  obedience, 
wrath,  &c.,  and  represented  those  who  were  subject  to  these 
moral  conditions  as  being  their  offspring. 

According  to  your  former  lusts  in  the  time  of  your 
ignoi^ance. —  A  condensed  expression,  signifying  "  the  lusts 
which  ye  had  formerly,  in  the  time,  &c."  Auth.,  "  fashioning 
yourselves  according  to  the  former  lusts,  in  your  ignorance,"  as 
if  "  in  your  ignorance  "  were  to  be  connected  with  "  fashioning 
yourselves." 

17  If  ye  call  on  him  as  Father.— Literally,  "  if  ye  address  by 
the  name  of  Father  {e.g.,  in  the  Lord's  Prayer)  him  who,"  &c. 
Auth.,  "if  ye  call  on  the  Father." 

19  Even  the  hlood  of  Christ. — The  name  stands  thus  in  the  Gr. 
at  the  end  of  the  sentence,  and  immediately  followed  by  "  who 
was  foreknown." 

20  Foreknown— i.e.,  by  God.  So  Auth.  in  Rom.  viii.  29,  xi.  2 ; 
but  here  "  foreordained." 

At  the  end  of  the  times.— Compare  the  similar  phrase  in 
Heb.  i.  2,  "  at  the  end  of  these  days."  Auth.,  "  in  these  last 
times." 


440  J.  PETER.— II. 


CHAPTER  II. 

1  Putting  away.— So  Auth.  for  the  eame  word  in  Eph.  iv.  25  ; 
here  "  laying  aside." 

8  Long  for. — The  Gr.  is  elsewhere  so  rendered.  Auth.,  •'  desire," 
which  is  not  so  appropriate,  in  reference  to  "  newborn  babes." 

Spiritual.— A  paraphrase  adopted  here  by  Chrysostom;  see  also 
Rom.  xii.  I  (Margin).  The  Gr.  properly  means  "  reasoning," 
or  "  rational,"  as  contrasted  with  "  unreasoning,"  "  irrational," 
Auth.  here,  "  of  the  word." 

Without  guile.— With  reference  to  "  guile  "  in  verse  I.  Auth., 
"  sincere."  IrenaBus  (in  the  third  century)  notices  in  connection 
with  this  passage  the  practice  of  adulterating  milk  with  gypsum. 
"In  Dei  lade  gypsum  male  miscetur."    {Wordsivorth.) 

4  Rejected.— Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  here  has  "disallowed,"  but 
for  the  same  Gr.  in  six  other  places  "  reject." 

Elect.— The  same  word  as  in  verse  9,  and  chap.  i.  1 ;  Auth., 
"  chosen." 

6  Because.— Auth.,  "wherefore."  The  Gr.  is  SiJrt  not  3t(i.  The 
Apostle  adds  from  Scripture  the  ground  on  which  he  makes  the 
preceding  statement. 

Be  put  to  shame.— Auth.,  "  be  confounded;"  with  Vidg., 
7ion  confundetur.  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  chap.  iii.  16 ; 
Rom.  V.  5. 

7  For  you   therefore    ...    is  the  preciousness.— The 

Gr.  noun  is  akin  to  the  adjective  rendered  "  precious  "  in  verse  6. 
Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  Unto  you  therefore  ...  he  is  precious." 
The  full  meaning  of  the  passage  appears  to  be  this,  "  For  you 
who  believe  in  Him,  for  your  sake,  is  this  preciousness,  this 
honour  which  He  possesses ;  that  so  far  from  being  '  put  to 
shame '  (verse  6),  ye  may  partake  in  it,  may  be  yourselves 
precious  in  the  sight  of  God." 

9  Race. — Auth.,  "  generation."  The  Gr.  is  yevos,  not  yeyea.  It  ia 
not  a  single  "  generation  "  that  is  here  addressed,  but  a  nation 
derived  from  a  common  Father,  as  Israel  was  from  Abraham. 
Compare  Isai.  xliii.  20  (LXX.),  rb  y&os  /xov  rh  fK\(KT6v. 

A  people  for  Ood's  own  possession. — Auth.,  '•  a  pcouli.ir 
people."     See  Note  on  Ejjhes.  i.  li. 


1.  PETER.— III.  441 

The  excellencies.— Literally,  "the  virtues."'  The  word  is 
used  in  the  passage  of  Isaiah  referred  to  above,  which  the 
Apostle  evidently  here  has  in  mind.  Autli.,  "  the  praises." 
We  are  to  shew  His  excellencies,  His  virtues,  by  telling  them 
out  among  the  heathen,  and  presenting  a  likeness  of  them 
in  ourselves. 

12  Seemly.— Auth.,  "  honest,"     See  Note  on  Rom.  xii.  17. 

25  Ye  were  going  astray  like  sheep.— For  Auth.,  "ye  were 
as  sheep  going  astray;"  by  change  iu  Gr.  text,  "  going  astray  " 
is  connected  with  "  ye  "  instead  of  "  sheep." 


CHAPTER    III. 

3  Jewels  of  gold.— Literally,  "  pieces  of  gold  "  (ihe  plural). 
Auth.,  "  gold." 

4  In  the  incorruptible  apparel  of.— Auth.,  "in  that  which  is 
not  corruptible,  even  the  ornament  of."  This  insertion,  besides 
being  at  variance  with  the  construction  of  the  Gr.,  somewhat 
obscures  the  meaning,  which  is  this,  "  Let  your  adorning  be  the 
hidden  man  of  the  heart,  appearing  outwardly  in  the  incorrup- 
tible apparel  of  a  meek  and  quiet  spirit." 

6  Are  not  put  in  fear  by  any  terror — i.e.,  by  any  sudden 
alarm.  Auth.,  "are  not  afraid  with  any  amazement."  Compare 
Prov.  iii.  25,  which  passage  the  Apostle  seems  here  to  have 
in  mind :  "  be  not  afraid  of  sudden  fear,  neither  of  the  desolation 
of  the  wicked,  when  it  cometh,"  where  the  word  for  "  fear "  is 
the  same  as  in  this  place,  irT6rj(n5,  not  occurring  elsewhere  in 
the  LXX,  or  New  Testament.  Its  proper  meaning  is  the 
"  flutter  "  or  "  fright  "  produced  by  sudden  alarm. 

8  Compassionate, — The  Gr.,  sympathetic,  is  general,  not  calling 
for  the  insertion  in  Auth.,  "  having  compassion  one  of  another." 
The  adjective  does  not  occur  again ;  but  like  the  verb  in  Heb. 
iv.  15,  X.  34,  and  like  "  sympathy "  in  Engl.,  it  denotes  more 
frequently  fellow-feeling  in  sorrow  than  in  joy. 

Tenderhearted.—  So  Auth.  for  the  same  word  in  Eph.  iv.  32, 
but  here   "pitiful"     In   classical    Greek    it    means    "strong- 


442  I.  PETER.— ITJ. 

lieai-ted,"  bui  as  its  proper  meauiug  is  '"  goodlieartod,"  it 
embraces  both  senses,  and  the  one  quality  by  no  means  ex- 
cludes the  other. 

Humbleminded. — Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "courteous."  So 
Cranm.,  but  with  "  meek  "  (in  brackets),  from  Wycl.  and  Vulg., 
humiles. 

11  Turn  av/ay  from.. — As  in  Rom.  iii.  12,  xvi,  17,  for  the  same 
Greek.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  eschew,"  a  word  of  the  same 
meaning,  but  now  not  in  common  use,  connected  with  the 
German  "  scheuen,"  and  the  English  "  shy."  Compare  Prov. 
iv.  14,  15,  "Enter  not  into  the  path  of  the  wicked  .  .  .  Avoid 
it,  pass  not  by  it,  avoid  it,  and  pass  away."  In  like  manner, 
"  ensue  "  (Auth.)  has  lost  in  its  ordinary  use  the  sense  of  active 
pursuit  which  formerly  it  had,  and  which  is  in  the  Gr.  hiwKw. 
Both  words  are  in  the  Psalter  of  the  Prayer-book,  but  not  in 
the  Auth.  of  Ps.  xxxiv.  16. 

12  Is  upon  them. — Auth.,  "  against,"  with  Margin,  "  Gr.,  upon." 
The  preposition  is  the  same  as  in  the  former  part  of  the  verse. 

13  Be  zealous. — Literally,  "  zealots,"  by  change  in  Gr.  text  for 
"imitators,"  or,  as  in  Auth.,  "followers." 

14  Blessed  are  ye. — Auth.,  "  happy  are  ye."  There  is  an  e\'ident 
reference  to  the  Sei-mon  on  the  Moimt,  "Blessed  are  they  that 
have  been  persecuted  for  righteousness'  sake,"  Matt.  v.  10. 

Fear  not  their  fear.— As  in  Isa.  viii.  12  (Auth.),  "  Neither 
fear  ye  their  fear,  nor  be  afraid,"  "  Their  fear "  may  mean 
either  "  that  of  which  they  are  afraid,"  or  "  that  of  which  they 
would  make  you  afraid."  The  latter  interpretation  is  the  more 
probable,  and  is  that  of  Alf  oi-d  and  Wordsworth.  Bengel  rather 
happily  combines  the  two,  "  Fear  not  that  which  they  fear  them- 
selves, and  of  which  they  would  make  you  afraid." 

15  Sanctify  .  .  .  Christ  as  Lord.— So  Vulg.,  Wycl.,  and 
Rhem.  The  Auth.,  following  another  reading  of  the  Gr.  text 
has  "  the  Lord  God."  Compare  Isa.  viii.  13,  "  Sanctify  the 
Lord  of  hosts  himself ;  and  let  him  be  your  fear,  and  let  him 
be  your  dread."  Thus  the  Apostle  places  before  us  Christ  to 
be  our  Lord,  and  to  be  set  up  in  our  hearts  as  the  object  (if 
reverence  and  godly  fear,  in  the  words  which  the  prophet  of 
the  Old  Testament  uses  with  regard  to  the  "  Lord  Jehovah." 

Yet  with  meekness.— The  very  needful  condition  expressed 
by  "  jet  "  is  due  to  the  addition  of  iAXti  in  the  Gt.  toxt. 


1.  PETER.— 1X1.  143 

16  Ye  are  spoken  against. — By  chauge  iu  Gr.  text  for  "  they 
speak  evil  of  you,  as  of  evildoers  "  (Autn.). 

Revile. — The  Gr.,  which  occurs  again  only  in  Luke  vi.  28,  has 
not  the  sense  given  to  it  in  the  English  versions,  "  falsely 
accuse,"  following  Yulg.,  cahimniantur. 

18,  19  Quickened  in  the  spirit ;  in  whicli.— Auth.  (alone) 
has  "quickened  by  the  Spirit  {rep  irvevixaTt),  by  which"  (iv  ^). 
It  cannot  be  said  that  Christ  was  quickened  by  the  Spirit,  i.e., 
by  the  Divine  Spirit,  without  saying  in  the  previous  part  of  the 
verse  (where  the  Gr.  constmction  is  the  same)  that  "  He  was  put 
to  death  by  the  flesh."  But  whereas  he  was  put  to  death  as 
regards  the  flesh,  his  natural  body,  He  was  by  death  quickened, 
endued  with  new  power,  new  life,  "  in  the  spirit,"  in  the  un- 
dying sj)iritual  nature,  which  as  man  He  had  in  common  with  us 
all ;  and  in  that  spiritual  nature,  thus  quickened,  He  went  and 
preached  to  the  spirits  in  prison :  not  as  Auth.,  "  by  which," 
meaning  "by  the  power  of  the  Divine  Sj)irit."  AU  Engl, 
versions  except  Auth.  have  "  quickened  iu  the  spirit,"  and  aU 
except  Auth.  and  Genev.,  "  in  which  "  (verse  19). 

We  shall  not  be  presumptuous  if  we  infer  from  this  that  our 
own  spirits,  so  far  from  being  deprived  of  life  or  impaired, 
wUl,  like  Christ's,  at  dissolution  be  "quickened,"  endued  with 
a  fresh  vitality.     (Wordsworth.) 

20  Were  saved  through  water. — Auth.,  "  by  water."  Similarly 
in  1  Cor.  iii.  15  we  read,  "he  liimself  shall  be  saved;  yet  so  as 
thi'ough  fire,"  instead  of  "  by  fire "  (Auth.).  The  marginal 
rendering,  which  is  more  exactly  literal,  "into  which  few  .  .  . 
were  brought  safely  through  water,"  is  i)erhaj)s  a  stiU  further 
improvement. 

21  Which  also,  after  a  true  likeness — Margin,  "Or,  in  the 
antitype — by  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  the  like  figure 
whereunto."  The  meaning,  with  this  change,  is  "  which  also 
{i.e.,  water),  after  a  true  likeness  to  the  waters  of  the  deluge 
through  which  the  faithful  were  saved  when  the  disobedient  Avere 
drowned,  even  the  water  of  baptism,  doth  now  save  you,  put  you 
in  a  state  of  salvation ;"  as  it  is  said  in  Titus  iii.  5,  "  According 
to  His  mercy  He  saved  us,  through  the  washing  of  regeneration 
and  the  renewing  of  the  Holy  Ghost." 

Baptism  is  further  explained  to  be  not,  as  under  the  Jewish  law, 
a  ceremonial  washing,  a  cleansing  of  the  flesh,  symbolical  of  the 
purification  of  the  spirit,  but  the  interrogation  of  a 
good  conscience  toward  God.     So  WycL,  "the  axing  of 


444  I.  PETER.— IV. 

a  good  oonscieuce  in  Gcd,"  following  imperfectly  Viilg.,  bonoe 
conscientice  interrogatio  in  Deum.  Subsequent  versions  vary : 
Rhem.,  "  tlie  examination ;  "  Tynd.,  "  in  that  a  good  conscience 
consentetli  (Genev.,  '  maketh  request ')  to  God;  "  Autli.  (alone), 
"  the  answer  of  a  good  conscience  toward  God ;  "  "  Interroga 
tion,"  or  "  inquiry,"  is  the  tnie  rendering  of  the  word,  but  in 
what  sense  applicable  here  it  is  difficult  to  determine.  Without 
discussing  the  several  interpretations  which  are  possible,  and 
have  been  held  by  different  commentators  in  ancient  or  modern 
times,  it  wUl  be  sufficient  to  give  that  which  appears  the  most 
probable :  "  Baptism  is  the  interrogation  or  inquiiy  of  a  good 
conscience  seeking  after  God."  In  this  sense  and  with  this  con- 
struction the  cognate  verb  is  used  m  2  Kings  xi.  7  (LXX.), 
iwripuTria-ev  AavlS  eis  elprivr}v  'IcwajS,  "David  inquired  after  the  peace 
of  Joab."  In  no  other  place  of  the  New  Testament  or  the  Old 
Testament  does  the  word  occur. 

Through    the    resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ.— This  is 

to  be  connected  -with  "  save  you,"  as  in  Auth.,  though  the 
marks  of  a  parenthesis  are  not  retained.  It  has  been  observed 
that  when  St.  Peter  speaks  of  glories  he  uses  the  human  name  of 
"Jesus,"  when  of  sufferings,  the  title  of  "Christ."  With  the 
Jews  the  glorification  of  human  nature  in  the  Son  of  Mary,  and 
the  death  of  their  expected  Messiah,  "  the  Christ,"  were  alike 
stumbling-blocks  to  belief  in  the  Gospel. 

22  Who  is  on  the  right  hand  of  God  .  .  .—The  order  of  the 
two  clauses,  inverted  in  Auth.,  has  been  restored.  The  main  fact 
thus  stands  first :  He  is  at  the  right  hand  of  God,  ha"v^ng  gone 
into  heaven,  the  place  of  the  heavenly  powers,  which  have  been 
all  made  subject  to  Him. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

3  "Wine-bibbings. — Auth.,  "  excess  of  wine."  The  word  is  not 
used  again  in  the  New  Testament.  The  same  may  be  said  of 
that  which  f oUows,  rendered  carousings  —  Auth.,  "  ban- 
quetinga." 

7  Be  sober.— As  at  chaiDs.  i.  13,  v,  8.    Auth..  ■'  watch." 


I.  PBTER.— V.  445 

10  A  gift— i.e.,  of  "  the  Spirit."  See  1  Cor.  xii.  4.  Auth.  inserts 
the  article  here,  and  again  with  "  oracles  of  God  "  (verse  11), 
wliere  tlie  meaning  is,  "  Let  him  speak  not  as  of  himself,  but  as 
a  deputed  minister,  uttering  thouglits  received  by  him  from  God." 

11  Strengfth. —  Power  of  whatever  kind,  physical,  intellectual, 
spiritual,  pecuniary.     Auth.,  "  ability."     Gr.,  l<rx^os. 

Supplieth.— Auth.,  "  giveth."  Vulg.,  administrat.  See  Note 
on  2  Cor.  ix.  10. 

Whose  is  the  glory  ,  .  .—Auth.,  "  to  whom  be  praise."  The 
Gr.  is  $  iariv  r]  56^a.  This  may  be  the  original  of  the  doxology 
which,  in  process  of  time,  became  attaelied  to  the  Lord's  Prayer. 
See  Note  on  Matt.  vi.  13,  and  compare  the  doxologies  in  chap.  v. 
11 ;  Rom.  xi.  36;  Eph.  iii.  21.  The  article,  twice  in  this  passage 
unduly  inserted  in  the  English  versions,  is  here  unduly  omitted. 

12  The  fiery  trial  among  you,  which  cometh  upon  you 
to  prove  you.— More  exact  than  Auth.,  "  tlie  fiery  trial  which 
is  to  try  you." 

15  A  meddler  .  .  .—Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  a  busybody,''  &c.  The 
Gr.  for  this  phrase  is  a  single  word — not  found  elsewhere,  except 
in  Christian  Authors,  who  may  have  taken  it  from  St.  Peter — 
meaning  litei'ally  "an  overseer,  or  bishop,  of  other  men's  af- 
fairs," aWoTpioeirlffKOTTos.  Plato,  in  his  Eejniblic,  uses  a  word 
very  similar  in  form  and  meaning,  aWoTpioTrpay/xoa-vvri. 

16  Let  him  glorify  God  in  this  name— i.e.,  in  the  name  of 
Christ,  by  dying  for  it.  So  Wycl.  and  Vulg. ;  Auth.,  ^vith 
Tynd.,  "on  this  behalf,"  following  another  reading  of  the 
Gr.  text  {fJ-epei,  not  bv6ixa.Ti), 


CHAPTER    V. 

1  A  fellow-elder. — The  Gr.  is  a  single  word,  in  form  like  those 
which  are  translated  "  fellow-worker,"  "  fellow-soldier."  Vulg., 
consenior.     Auth.,  "  also  an  elder." 

2  Tend. — The  same  word  is  used  in  the  charge  given  to  St.  Peter 
in  Jolm  xxi.  16.     Auth.,  "  feed." 


446  I.  PETER.— V. 

Exercising. —  Auth.,  "taking."  The  Gr.  ciria-KOTrovvrts  does 
not  mean  taking,  assuming,  but  practising,  exercising  the  over, 
sight. 

3  As  lording  it  over. — Auth.,  "as  being  lords  over."  The 
Gr.  denotes  the  exercise  of  an  arbitrary  tyrannical  power,  not  the 
"  lordship,"  the  legitimate  authority,  which  is  consistent  with  due 
respect  on  the  part  of  the  niler  for  the  rights  of  those  who  are 
under  him. 

The  charge  allotted  to  you. — Gr.,  tHu  K\i]puv.  Autli., 
with  Genev.,  "God's  heritage."  Tynd.  and  Cranm.,  "the 
parishes,"  which  is  good  as  an  interpretation,  the  word  being 
literally  "  the  lots  "  assigned  to  the  presbyters  as  their  respective 
portions  in  God's  vineyard.  From  this  word  clems  the  "  clergy  " 
take  their  name,  they  being  clerici,  officers  to  .whom  such  "  lots  " 
or  portions  have  been  assigned.  In  Acts  i.  we  have  an  example 
of  the  Apostolic  office  being  assigned  by  lot,  by  the  counsel  of 
St.  Peter. 

5  Gird  yourselves. — Auth.,  "be  clothed  with," which  gives  the' 
meaning  better  than  TjTid.,  "knit  yourselves  together  with;" 
or  Genev.,  "  deck  yourselves  inwardly  with ; "  or  Rhem.,  "  in- 
sinuate humility,"  following  Yulg.,  insinuate  JixLviilitatem.  The 
Gr.  is  aveiy  imusual  word,  and  signifies  literally  "  tie  yourselves 
up  with  the  apron  or  cape  of  a  slave,"  being,  a  verb  formed  from 
the  word  encombroma,  a  garment  tied  on  with  strings  or  bands 
(comboi),  and  worn  by  slaves.  St.  Peter  uses  the  word  to  indi- 
cate  the  menial  service  which  they  were  to  render  one  to  another ; 
in  the  same  way  as  our  Lord  shewed  it  in  His  own  example  and 
person  when  He  girded  Himself  with  a  towel  and  washed  the 
disciples'  feet  (John  xiii.). 

7  Anxiety.— The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  Matt.  xiii.  22,  The  word 
is  varied  in  the  latter  part  of  the  verse,  as  is  shewn  in  Wycl.  and 
Rhem.,  following  Vulg.,  soZiciYwcZinem  .  .  .  ciira.  Tynd.  and 
Auth.  have  overlooked  the  distinction  which  is  drawn  by  the 
Apostle  between  our  anxieties  and  God's  care  for  us. 

10  A  little  while. — The  Gr.  lays  stress  on  the  short  duration  of 
the  suffering,  not  as  Auth.,  "a  while,"  which  rather  draws  atten- 
tion to  the  necessity  of  some  temporary  suffering.  Tynd.,  "  after 
ye  have  suffered  a  little  affliction." 

Himself,  solemn  and  emphatic  in  the  Gr.,  is  expressed  in  Yulg., 
Wycl.,  Genev.,  and  Rliem.,  not  in  Tynd.,  Cranm.,  or  Axith, 

Shall  himself  perfect.— The  future  for  the  precatory  form, 
by  change  in  Gr,  text. 


I.  PETKR— V.  447 

12  As  I  account  him. —  The  Gr,  does  not  indicate  any  doubt. 
Auth.,  "  as  I  suppose." 

Stand  ye  fast  therein. — The  imperative  for  the  indicative, 
by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

13  She. — Auth.,  the  Clmrcli,  following  Vulg.,  Tyud.,  and  Rheiu.  ; 
but  as  the  word  is  not  expressed,  any  insertion  must  be  conjec- 
tural ;  and  some  commentators,  as  Bengal  and  Alf  ord,  recognise 
here  the  wife  of  St.  Peter ;  but  the  former  supposition,  "  the 
Church,"  is  more  probable.  The  words  indicate  that  the  writer 
was  himself  at  Babylon  ;  and  that  he  should  point  to  a  single  in- 
dividual there  by  this  elliptical  phrase  is  highly  unlikely.  "  In 
Babylon  "  is  to  be  understood  literally,  not  (as  it  has  by  some  been 
interpreted)  figuratively  of  Rome,  in  which  seuso  it  is  to  be 
understood  six  times  in  the  Ai^ocalypse ;  there,  ho^vover,  it  is 
always  distinguished  as  "  Babylon  the  great,"  e.g.,  Rov.  xiv.  8. 
(Wordsworth.) 


THE    SECOND    EPISTLE    GENERAL    OF 

PETER. 

CHAPTER  I. 

1  Our  God  and  Saviour. — So  all  versions  prior  to  Antli.,  which 
has  "  God  and  our  Sa^Tour."     Compare  Note  on  Titus  ii.  13. 

3  By  Ms  own  glory  and  virtue.—"  Own,"  iSws,  is  added 
in  Gr.  text,  and  is  characteristic  of  the  Epistles  of  St.  Peter  : 
.see  chap.  ii.  22 ;  1  Peter  iii.  1,  5  (Wordsworth).  "  His 
glory  "  denotes  the  essential  power  and  majesty  of  God ;  His 
moral  attributes  are  signified  by  "his  virtue,"  a  word  rarely 
applied  to  God,  but  so  used  in  the  plural  by  St.  Peter  (1.  ii.  9). 
Genev.  and  Auth.,  "  Called  us  to  glory  and  virtue,"  which  is  a 
departure  from  the  correct  rendering  of  previous  versions,  sug- 
gested, it  may  be,  by  the  strangeness  of  the  expression  "  called 
us  by  his  virtue." 

4  He  hath  granted  unto  us.— The  Gr.,  though  passive  in 
form,  is  transitive  in  sense,  and  is  so  rendered  in  Auth.  (verse  3). 

5  Yea,  and  for  this  very  cause. — The  Gr.  is  an  idiomatic 
phrase,  literally,  "  this  very  thing,"  avrh  toCto — the  preposition 
Sid  being  dropped,  as  in  ri,  "  why  ?  "  i.e.,  Stk  tI — not  as  Auth., 
"besides  tliis."  but  "because  God  has  been  gracious  to  you, 
tlierefore  do  ye  for  your  part,"  &c.  Compare  1  Peter  i.  15,  where 
the  Apostle  urges  the  holiness  of  God  as  a  reason  why  we  should 
be  holy. 

Adding  on  your  part. — Literally,  bringing  in,  in  addition 
to,  by  the  side  of,  what  God  has  done  for  you,  all  diligence  on 
your  part.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "  give  all  diligence."  The  Gr., 
a  double  compound  verb,  irapfKrcpfpw,  is  not  again  used  in  the  New 
Testament. 


II.  PETER.— I.  449 

In  your  faith  supply  virtus.  —  lu  tlio  exercise  of  eacli 
Cliristiau  gnice  which  yo  possess  develop  a  further  growth  of 
grace.  Ye  have  received  faith  as  the  gift  of  God ;  in  the  exercise 
of  faitli  furnish  forth  virtue — here  probably  meauiug  the  special 
virtue  which  we  caU  moral  courage — aud  iu  the  strength  of  virtue 
pi'oduce  knowledge,  the  practical  knowledge  which  discerns  good 
from  evil,  and  tends  to  corresponding  action ;  and  as  a  conse- 
quence of  this  knowledge,  temperance,  self-control ;  and  ont  of 
tliis,  patience,  patient  endui'ance ;  aud  as  a  f  nait  of  this,  godli- 
ness, confidence  in  God  and  resignation  to  His  will ;  and  in 
your  godliness  remember  'love  of  the  brethren,  do  not  rest  on 
your  trust  in  God,  as  if  that  might  supersede  love  for  all  who 
are  your  brethren  in  Him ;  aud  while  loving  the  brethren  seek 
to  attain  to  the  largeness  of  heart,  the  love  that  extends  to  all 
mankind,  according  to  the  saying  of  St.  Paul  (1  Thess.  iii.  12), 
"  Abound  in  love  toward  the  brethren,  and  toward  all  men." 
Thus  St.  Peter  links  together  seven  virtues  as  issuing  one  from 
another,  and  all  from  Faith;  but  of  course  this  is  not  to  be 
understood  as  a  logical  account  of  the  mode  in  which  they  are 
connected  and  unfolded. 

Supply. — The  same  word  as  iu  verse  11  and  2  Cor.  ix.  10,  where 
see  Note ;  also  1  Peter  iv.  11,  where  the  simple  A'erb,  x°pvy^'^>',  is 
used  iu  the  same  sense.  Auth.,  "  Add  to  your  faith  virtue,"  &c., 
following  Genev.  and  Beza,  adjicite  fidei  vestrce  virtutem. 
Wycl.,  Tynd.,  and  Craum.,  "  Minister  iu  your  faith  virtue,"  as 
Vulg.,  niinistrate  in  fide  vestrd  virtutetn. 

9  The  cleansing'  from. — Auth.,  "  that  he  was  pm'ged."  The 
Gr.  is  a  noun ;  the  same,  aud  with  the  same  construction,  as  in 
Heb.  i.  3. 

10  Give  the  more  diligence.— Auth.,  "  wherefore,  the  rather, 
brethren,  give  diligence,"  as  if  some  other  alternative  were  iu 
view,  to  which  tliis  shoiild  be  preferred. 

Stumble. — Auth.,  "  fall."     See  Note  ou  James  ii.  10. 

12  I  shall  be  ready.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  I  will 
not  be  negligent."  The  same  word  occurs  again  only  iu  Matt, 
xxiv.  6. 

The  truth  which  is  with  you—  i.e.,  "  now  among  you." 
Auth.,  "  the  present  truth,"  as  if  it  meant  the  truth  now  present 
to  your  thoughts,  now  under  your  consideration.  Compare  Col. 
i.  6. 

14  The  putting  off  of  my  tabernacle  cometh  swiftly.— 

So  Wycl.,  following  the   careful  i-endering  of  Yuig.,  vdox  est 


450  II.  PETER.— 11. 

depositio  tabernaculi  mei,  not  ineauiug,  as  Autli.,  foUowiug 
Cranm.,  "  that  I  must  shortly  (i.e.,  soou)  put  off,"  &c.,  but  that 
"  my  death  when  it  comes  will  be  sharp  and  sudden,"  referring 
to  the  prediction  of  our  Lord  in  John  xxi.  18.  So  Alford,  quoting 
classical  authorities  for  this  sense  of  raxtvv  and  rax^s,  "  speedy, ' 
as  applied  to  the  end  of  life,  e.g.,  Eurip.  Hippol.,  lOi.  Putting 
this  interpretation  on  the  Apostle's  words,  we  understand  him  to 
say  that  he  thinks  it  right  to  give  these  admonitions  while  he  can, 
as  he  may  expect  to  be  very  suddenly  called  away  by  death. 

18  We  ourselves. — "  "We  "  is  here  emphatic  in  the  Gr. 

19  We  have  the  word  of  prophecy  made  more  sure. — 
Auth.,  "  we  have  also  a  more  sure  word  of  prophecy  "  (omitting 
the  article),  which  is  obscure.  Rhem.,  more  correctly,  "  the  pro- 
phetical word  more  sure."  The  meaning  is  "  ha^nug  been  wit- 
nesses of  His  majesty  and  hearers  of  His  voice  from  heaven,  we 
have  the  word  of  prophecy  made  more  firm  (as  a  foundation  of 
our  faith)  by  the  fulfilment  which  it  has  received."  The  phrase 
is  in  this  sense  illustrated  in  a  learned  Note  of  Dr.  Field. 

A  lamp.— Not  as  Auth.,  "  a  light."     See  Note  on  John  v.  35. 

21  Men  spake  from  God.— By  change  in  Gk.  text  for  Auth., 
*'holy  men  of  God  spake." 

Being  moved. — The  Gr.,  <pfp6nevot,  indicates  the  cause  of  their 
speaking,  "  because  they  were  moved,"  not  "  as  they  were 
moved"  (Auth.),  which  points  to  the  manner  or  substance  of 
their  prophesying.  By  the  changes  in  Gr.  text  and  translation 
the  contrast  is  rendered  more  simple  and  direct. 


CHAPTER  n. 

1  Destructive.— Auth.,  "damnable."     Literally,   "sects  of  de- 
struction," tending  to  the  destruction  of  those  who  hold  them. 

The  Master.— Auth.,  "  the  Lord."  Gr.,  SftrirSTriv  (despoten), 
the  correlative  of  which  would  be  Sov\oi,  slaves,  servants  acquired 
by  purchase.  Compare  Jude  4.  The  Apostle,  as  he  wrote  these 
words,  may  have  been  looking  back  on  his  oavu  grievous  but 
forgiven  denial  of  the  Lord. 

2  Ijascivious. — For  "pernicious  "  (Auth.),  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 


11.  PETER.— II.  451 

4  Pits.— For  "chains  "  (Auth.),  bycliauge  in  Gr.  text. 

5  Noah.  with,  seven  others. —  Auth.  follows  the  Gr.  idiom, 

"  Noah,  the  eighth  person." 

A  flood. — The  Gr.  has  not  the  article  as  it  has  in  the  Gospels, 
Matt.  xxiv.  38 ;  Luke  xvii.  27. 
9  Under  punishment.  —  Actually  in  that  state,  not   "  to  be 
punished,"  as  all  Engl,  versions,  following  Vulg.,  cruciandos. 
The  Gr.  is  the  present  participle. 

10  Despise  dominion.—  So  Auth.  in  Jude  8 ;  here,  "  govern, 
meut,"  the  Gr.  being  the  same. 

Daring. — Auth.,  "  pi*esumptuous."  Gr.,  roXfx-nral.  The  Gr.  for 
railing  is  cognate  to  the  adjective  in  verse  11. 

11  Judgement. — So  all  Engl,  versions  except  Auth.,  "accusation." 

12  Creatures  without  reason. — Auth., "  brute  beasts,"  following 
Tynd.  The  adjective  &\oya,  "  unreasoning,"  is  in  modem  Gr. 
the  word  for  "  animals"  generally. 

Born  mere  animals. — Literally,  "born  natural  creatures," 
not  spiritual.  Auth.  connects  the  word  with  "beasts  ;  "  but  by 
change  in  Gr.  text  it  is  removed  from  that  word  and  connected 
with  "born."     Compare  Jude  10. 

To  be  taken  and  destroyed. — Literally,  "  for  taking  and 
destroying."  These  words,  which  represent  substantives  in  Gr., 
may  have  either  an  active  or  passive  sense,  according  as  we  con- 
sider the  purpose  which  they  serve  for  men,  or  the  mode  by  which 
they  get  their  own  food. 

Shall   in  their  destroying  surely  be  destroyed— i.e., 

while  causing  destruction  to  otliers,  shall  accomplish  their  own 
destruction.  Auth.  fails  to  bring  out  this  meaning,  "  shall 
utterly  perish  in  their  own  corruiition."  Compare  1  Cor.  iii.  17, 
"  If  any  man  destroyeth  the  temple  of  God,  him  shall  God  de- 
stroy" (Wordsworth). 

13  Suffering  wrong  as  the  hire  of  wrong-doing.  —  By 
change  in  Gr.  text,  for  "receiving  the  reward  of  wrong-doing." 
The  emphatic  and  vehement  repetition  of  words  is  characteristic 
of  this  Epistle. 

14  Enticing. — Tempting  with  a  bait.  Auth.,  "beguiling."  The 
Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  verse  18  and  James  i.  14. 

Children  of  cursing—  i.e.,  "  devoted  to  the  curse."  Tlie 
Hebraism  has  not  the  same  meaning  as  Auth.,  "  ciu'sed  children." 
Compare  2  Thess.  ii.  3,  "  the  son  of  perdition." 


452  IT.  PETER.— III. 

15  Beor.— The  Chaldee  form  of  Bosor, 

The  hire  of  wrong-doing.— See  verse  13. 

16  Stayed. — ^Auth.,  "  forbade,"  as  iu  Matt.  iii.  13. 

17  Springs.— This,  or  "  fouutains,"  is  the  usual  aud  proper  mean- 
ing of  the  Gr.  irrryai,  though  in  John  iv.,  where  it  is  applied  to 
"  Jacob's  well,"  the  word  of  Auth.,  "  well,"  has  been  retained. 

Mists. — So  Wycl.,  "  mists  driven  Avith  whirling  winds."  The 
Gr.  is  different  from  that  in  the  parallel  passage  of  Jude  12, 
which  is  rightly  rendered  "  clouds  "  (Auth.) 

18  Just  escaping. — For  Auth.,  "  clean  escaped  " — (1)  bv  change 
in  Gr.  text,  oxlya^s  for  iivrais ;  (2)  the  Gr.  participle  is  of  the 
present  tense,  indicating  an  escape  in  progress,  not  accomplished. 

20  The  last  state.— Auth.,  "  the  latter  end."  The  Apostle's 
words  are  almost  identical  with  the  saying  of  our  Lord  (Matt, 
xii.  45). 

22  The  sow  that  had  washed. — The  Gr.  is  in  the  middle 
Voice,  "  that  had  washed  herself."     Auth.,  "  that  was  washed." 


CHAPTER  m. 


1  This  is  now. — Expressed  less  conveniently  in  Auth.,  following 
the  Gr.  idiom,  "  This  second  Epistle  (beloved)  I  now  write  imto 
you." 

Sincere. — The  Gr.   is  the  same  as  in  Phil.  i.  10  {u\tKpivri). 
Auth.,  "  pui'e,"  which  represents  KaOapSs. 

Mind. — The  Gr.  is  in  the  singular  number. 

2  The  commandment  of  the  Lord  and  Savionr  through 
your  Apostles.  —  By  change  from  viJ-<^y  to  v/^uv  the  Gr. 
text  giA^es  in  a  condensed  form  this  meaning,  instead  of  Auth., 
"  the  commandment  of  us  the  Apostles  of  the  Lord  aud  Saviour." 
"  Your  "  Apostles,  as  St.  Paul  is  called  "  the  Apostle  of  the 
Gentiles." 

3  Mockers  shall  come  with  mockery. — The  last  words  are 
added  in  the  Gr.  text,  according  to  the  Hebraic  mode  of  empha- 
sising by  iteration. 


II.  PETER.— III.  453 

6  "Wilfully  forget.  —  More  exact  than  "  willingly  are  ignorant 
of  "  (Auth.). 

There    were   heavens    from  of  old,  and  an  earth.— 

The  article,  inserted  in  Auth.,  is  not  expressed  nor  to  be  under- 
stood in  the  Gr. 

Compacted. — Or,  as  in  Margin  of  Auth.,  "  consisting,"  as  the 
word  is  rendered  in  Col.  i.  17,  literally  "standing  together,"  the 
reference  being  to  the  material  out  of  which  an  earth  was  con- 
stituted,  not  to  its  position,  as  Auth.,  "  standing  out  of  the  water 
and  in  the  water,"  or  Tynd.  and  Genev.,  "  the  earth  that  was  in 
the  water  appeared  up  out  of  the  water."  Rhem.,  "the  earth 
out  of  water  and  through  water  consisting  by  the  word  of  God," 
is  nearly  correct. 

8  Forget  not  this  one  thing. — Referring  to  verse  5. 

10  "  In  the  night." — (Auth.)  Omitted  in  Gr.  text :  perhaps  inter- 
polated  from  1  Thess.  v.  2. 

Shall  be  dissolved.— Auth.,  "  shall  melt."  The  Gr.  does  not 
contain  the  idea  of  melting  from  heat,  but  simply  that  of  disso- 
lution.     It  occurs  in  John  ii.  19,  "  Destroy  this  temple ;  "  and 

see  next  verse  (Auth.) 

12  Earnestly  desiring. — Margin,  "Or,  hastening."  The  Gr. 
has  both  senses  in  classical  authors.  The  latter  may  be  supported, 
with  reference  to  "the  day  of  God,"  by  considering  that 
Christians  may,  as  the  Scriptures  say,  helj)  forward  the  accom- 
plishment of  God's  purposes  by  their  holy  lives  and  their 
prayers.  It  was  also  a  Rabbinical  saying,  "  If  thou  keepest  this 
precept,  thou  hastenest  the  day  of  the  Messiah,"  and  it  may  there- 
fore be  presumed  that  the  thought  was  familiar  to  the  Jewish 
Christians  to  whom  the  Apostle  was  writing.  There  is,  however, 
no  instance  in  the  New  Testament  of  the  word  being  used  transi- 
tively,  in  the  sense  of  "  hastening."  In  Isa.  xvi.  5  it  may  pro- 
perly be  rendered  "  be  earnest  about,"  though  the  Auth.  has 
"  hasting  righteousness,"  a  loose  ti-anslation  of  the  Hebrew. 

By  reason  of  which— i.e.,  either  "  day,"  or  "  coming." 
Auth.,  "  wherein,"  wliich  would  be  eV  f,  not  di'  V. 

17  Being  carried  away.— Auth.,  "  led  away."     The  Gr.,  an  un- 

common  word,  is  used  in  Gal.  ii.  13  of  Barnabas  being  "  carried 
away  with  their  dissimulation"  {i.e.,  of  Peter  and  others);  and 
it  is  remarkable  that  St.  Peter  should  use  a  word  which,  as  he 
was  acquainted  with  St.  Paul's  Epistles,  he  may  have  seen  in  a 
passage  making  such  reference  to  himself  (Alford). 


THE   FIRST  EPISTLE  GENERAL   OF 

JOHN. 

CHAPTER  L 

1  That  which  we  beheld—  "  which  we  looked  upon  with 
stedfast  gaze."  The  word  is  the  same  that  is  used  in  Acts  i.  11, 
of  the  Apostles  beholding  the  ascension  of  the  Lord. 

The  "Word  of  life. — The  capital  letter  denotes  that  the  Divine 
Son  of  God  is  spoken  of  by  St.  John  here,  as  at  the  beginning 
of  his  Gospel.  In  this  sense  the  phrase  has  been  generally 
understood  both  by  ancient  and  modem  expositors :  but  as  there 
are  some  who  explain  it  of  the  doctrine  taught  by  Christ,  this 
interpretation,  however  improbable,  has  been  recognised  in  the 
Margin. 

2  The  life,  the  eternal  life. — The  emphatic  repetition  of  the 
Gr.  article  with  noun  and  adjective  requires  in  English  the  repe- 
tition of  the  noun. 


CHAPTER  II. 

2  Por  the  whole  world. — The  ellipsis  needs  not  to  be  supplied 

as  in  Auth.,  "  for  the  sins  of  the  whole  world." 

8  Is  passing  away. — Auth.,  "  is  past."      The  Gr.  verb  is  in 
the  present  tense. 

8,  9,  11  Darkness. — The  article  is  throughout  these  verses  ex- 
pressed in  the  Gr.  with  this  word. 

12  3fy  little  children. — The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  verse  1,  except 
that  '•  my '"   is   omitted,   but  the  meaning  is  the   same.     Hia 


I.  JOHN— III.  455 

disciples  are  all  comprehended  in  this  address,  and  so  in  verse  27. 
At  verse  13  he  uses  a  different  word,  naiSia,  and  addresses  those 
who  are  actually  chikli'en  in  age. 

13,  14  Because  ye  know.— The  Gr.  is  in  tlie  perfect  tense,  which 
in  this  verb,  as  in  the  corresponding  Latin  novi,  has  a  present 
meaning.     Aiith.,  "  ye  have  known.'      So  in  chaps,  iii.  16,  iv.  16. 

I  have  written. — The  epistolary  aorist. 

14  The  evil  one. — Auth.,  "the  wicked  one."  The  same  word  as 
in  chaps,  iii.  12,  v.  18 ;  Matt.  xiii.  19  ;  Ephes.  vi.  16.  See  Not« 
on  Matt.  vi.  13. 

16  Vainglory. — Auth.,  "  pride."  The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  Jamoa 
iv.  16,  where,  being  in  the  plural,  it  is  rendered  "  vauntings." 

18  The  last  hour.— The  Gr.  &pa,  hora,  is  almost  always  in  tho 
New  Testament  to  be  rendered  "  hour,"  not  "  time,"  as  here  in 
Auth. 

Have    .   .   .   arisen.— Auth.,  "are."    Gr.,yfy6va<Tiv. 

20  Anointing. — Auth.,  "  unction."  The  word  occurs  in  verse  27, 
and  not  again  in  the  New  Testament. 

24  As  for  you. — "  You  "  is  empliatic ;  "  therefore  "  is  omitted  iu 
the  Gr.  text. 

26  That  would  lead  you  astray.— The  same  Gr.  as  in  chap, 
i.  8.  Autli.,  "  seduce."  The  present  participle  denotes  an  in- 
choate action,  an  attempt  not  yet  accomplishecf. 

29  Begotten.— This  word  is  required  in  chap.  v.  1,  and  conse- 
quently has  been  iised  for  the  Gr.  y^yyutrQat  throughout  tlia 
Epistle. 


CHAPTER   III. 

3  Hath  this  hope  set  on  him. — Sef  is  inserted  to  shew  distinctly 
that  the  meaning  is  "  he  that  hath  this  hope  set  or  fixed  on 
Christ."  Auth.,  "  hath  this  hope  in  him,"  wliich  may  mean 
"  hath  within  himself  this  hope."  The  preposition  is  "  on,"  not 
"  in." 

4  Doeth  .  .  .  lawlessness. — More  literal  than  "  transgresscth 
the  law"  (Auth.),  which  also  obliterates  the  parallelism  of  the 
two  clauses  in  the  Gr. 


456  I.  JOHN— IV. 

14  "  His  brother." — (Auth.)    Omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text. 

18  With,  the  tongue.— The  preposition  "  in  "  is  omitted  in  the 
Gr.  text. 

20  Whereinsoever  .  .  .— Tlie  rendering  and  interpretation  of 
this  passage  are  doubtful,  the  ambiguity  being  twofold :  ( 1 )  the 
repetition  in  the  Gr.  of  on,  "  that,"  or  "  because ;  "  this  difficulty 
is  avoided  in  Auth.  by  passing  over  the  second  Sn,  which  in  some 
MSS.  is  omitted ;  and  (2)  tlie  doubt  whether  in  saying  that  God 
is  "  greater  than  our  heart "  tlie  Apostle  means  "  greater  in 
knowledge,"  and  consequently  more  severe  in  judgement,  or 
"  greater  in  mercy,"  and  therefore  more  ready  to  forgive.  The 
Revised  Version  takes  the  first  8ti  not  as  a  conjunction,  but  as 
the  relative  pronoun  '6  n,  and  renders  thus,  "  We  shall  assure  our 
heart,  whereinsoever  (8  n  idv)  our  heart  condemn  us ;  because 
(oTi)  God  }s  greater  (in  mercy)  than  our  heart."  Another 
explanation  is  obtaiaed  by  assuming  an  ellipse  of  "  it  is  "  before 
the  second  2ti,  thus :  "  We  shall  assure  our  heart,  because  if 
our  heart  condemn  us,  it  is  because  God  is  greater  than  our 
heart,  and  kuoweth  all  things ; "  the  condemnation  which  our 
heart,  our  conscience  pronounces,  derives  its  force  from  the 
greatness  of  God,  who  is  Lord  of  our  conscience  and  knows  all 
things.  So  Wordsworth.  For  a  fuU  investigation  of  this  difficult 
text  see  the  Commentaries  of  Alford  and  Wordsworth,  and  the 
highly  interesting  work  of  Haupt  on  the  First  Epistle  of 
St.  John  (translated  by  the  Rev.  W.  D..Pope,  D.D.,  Edinburgh, 
1879),  who  supports  and  Ulustrates  the  interpretation  adopted 
in  the  Re^ased  Version. 


CHAPTER  IV 

5  Speak  they  as  of  the  world.— Not  "  concerning  the  world," 
but  in  a  mamier  consistent  with  their  being  "  of  the  world  ;  "  they 
speak  as  belonging  to  it,  having  their  origin  in  it,  being  j)roducts 
of  it. 

16  The  love  which  God  hath  in  ns.— Auth.,  "the  love  that 
God  hath  to  us."  Compare  John  xvii.  26,  "  that  the  love  where- 
with thou  lovedst  me  may  be  in  them." 


I.  JOHN— V.  457 


CHAPTER  V. 


8  There  are  three  who  bear  witness.— The  words  which 
follow  in  Auth..  "  in  hearen  ...  in  earth,"  are  not  found  in  any 
of  the  Gr.  MSS.,  except  three  of  comparatively  recent  date,  nor 
in  the  ancient  lectioiiaries  or  versions,  nor  in  any  Greek  or  Latin 
Father  of  the  first  four  centuries,  except  in  a  doubtful  passage 
of  Cyprian.  They  have  been  given  up  as  spurious  by  almost 
every  modern  critic  of  the  Gr.  Testament,  as  well  as  by  Erasmus, 
the  earliest  of  all,  in  his  first  edition.  The  removal  of  them 
from  the  Sacred  text  is  required  by  the  conscience  of  the  Church, 
and  in  no  degree  weakens  the  strength  of  the  testimony  and 
argument  on  which  the  doctrine  of  the  Holy  Ti-inity  is  established. 
(See  Wordsworth;  and,  for  a  digest  of  the  textual  evidence, 
Alford.)  The  passage  was  first  inserted  in  the  Coinplutensian 
Greek  Text  of  1514.  It  was  admitted  with  marks  oi  doubt  by 
Stephens,  and  thence  was  adopted,  without  marks  of  doubt,  in 
the  Textus  Beceptus. 

16  Not  concerning  this  do  I  say.  —  Auth.,  "I  do  not  say 
that  he  shall  pray  for  it."  Emphasis  cannot  well  be  given  to 
"  it "  at  the  end  of  a  sentence,  and  the  Gr.  order  therefore,  which 
lays  stress  on  the  pronoun,  has  been  followed.  This  sentence  has 
a  remarkable  similarity  in  its  structure  to  John  xvi.  26,  "  I 
say  not  unto  you,  that  I  will  pray  the  Father  for  you." 

19  Lieth  in  the  evil  one.— Auth.,  "in  wickedness."  Gr.,  ^v 
T^  iroyrip(j).  The  masculine  is  required  here,  consistently  with 
"  the  e\al  one  "  (Auth.,  "  that  wicked  one  ")  in  verse  18,  and  with 
St.  John's  usage. 


THE    SECOND    EPISTLE    OF 

JOHN. 


1  Whom  I  love  in  truth— ?.e.,  in  Christian  sincerity.  Auth. 
inserts  the  article.  "  Truth  "  is  the  key-note  of  this  and  of  the 
third  Epistle. 

7  Cometh. — Auth.,   '•  is  come."     The  Gr.  is  the  participle  of  the 

present  tense. 

9  Goeth  onward. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  transgresseth " 
(Auth.),  irpodyuiv  for  irapafiaivoip.  Margin,  "  Or,  taJceth  the  lead," 
piitteth  himself  forward  as  a  leader. 


THE    THIRD    EPISTLE    OF 

JOHN. 


2  I  pray  that  in  all  things.— So  Tynd.  Not  as  Auth.,  fol. 
lowing  Genev.,  "  I  wish  above  all  things,"  in  which  sense  the 
preposition  irepi  is  not  found  in  prose  writers. 

5  Thou  doest  a  faithful  work  in  whatsoever  thou  doest. 

— Auth.,  "  thou  doest  faithfully."  The  Gr.  adjective  denotes  the 
character  of  the  work,  not  the  manner  or  spirit  in  which  it  was 
done. 

That  are  brethren  and  strangers  withal.— By  change 
in  Gr.  text  for  "  to  the  brethren,  and  to  strangers  "  (Auth.). 

6  Worthily  of  God. — In  a  manner  worthy  of  Him  whose  servants 
they  are.     Auth.,  "  after  a  godly  sort,"  following  Cranm. 

7  For  the  sake  of  the  Name.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for 
Auth.,  "  for  his  Name's  sake."  Compare  Acts  v.  41,  for  the 
same  ellipsis. 

11  Imitate. — A  Pauline  word.     Compare  2  Thess.  iii,  7,  9.    Auth., 
"  follow." 


THE    GENERAL    EPISTLE     OF 

JUDE. 


To  them  that  are  called,  beloved  in  God  the  Father, 
and  kept  for  Jesus  Christ.— "  Beloved  "  is  by  cliange  in 
Gr.  text  for  "  sanctified "  (Avitla.) ;  and  so  Wycl.  and  Rhem., 
following'  Vnlg.,  dilectis.  "Beloved  in  God"  does  not  occur 
again  in  tlie  New  Testament ;  "  beloved  in  God "  (not  only  by 
Him),  as  being  united  with  Him,  His  children  by  adoption  and 
grace. 

Kept  Tor  Jesus  Christ.— As  He  says  Himself  (John  xvii. 
11),  "  Keej)  them  in  thy  name  which  thou  hast  given  me."  Auth. 
introduces  the  preposition  "  in,"  which  is  not  in  the  Gr. 

I  was  constrained.  —  Literally,  "  I  had  a  necessity,"  a 
stronger  phrase  than  Auth.,  "  it  was  needful  for  me." 

Once  for  all.— Once  only  and  never  to  be  repeated  (a-rra^). 
Auth.,  "  once,"  which  might  be,  as  we  say,  "  once  on  a  time."  So 
in  verse  5. 

Set  forth. — The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  Rom.  xv.  4,  where  it  is 
rendered  "  written  aforetime ; "  here  also  in  Wycl.  and  Rhem., 
following  Yulg.,  prcescripti  simt ;  but  in  Gal.  iii.  1,  "  openly  set 
forth."  Here  Auth.,  following  Genev.,  has  "  before  ordained." 
The  word  {irpoypd(poo)  may  be  rendered  either  way,  according  as 
the  meaning  "  before,"  in  point  of  time,  or  "  before  the  eyes," 
openly,  pul)licly,  is  given  to  the  preposition  Trp6,  which  it  contains. 

Our  only  Master  and  Lord.— "  God  "  is  omitted  by  change 
in  Gr.  text.     Compare  the  parallel  passage  in  2  Peter  ii.  1. 

All  things.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  this  "  (Auth.).  Wycl. 
and  Rhem.,  following  Vulg.,  have  "  all  things." 

Ye  know. — So  all  Engl,  versions,  except.  Auth.,  which,  by  the 
translation    "  ye  once  knew  this,"  implies  that  they  had  once 


460  JUDE. 

known  and  forgotten.  See  Note  on  verse  3,  and  on  1  John  ii. 
13.  "  Te  know  all  things  once  for  all "  might  in  Engl,  idiom  be 
thus  paraphrased,  "  Te  have  known  these  things  all  along." 

A  people.— Aiith.,  "  the  people."  The  article  is  not  in  the  Gr., 
nor  can  it  properly  be  supplied. 

6  Angels  which  kept  not    their    own    principality.— So 

Wycl.,  " princehood ; "  and  Rhem.,  {oUowingYxilg.,  principatum ; 
and  the  Ancient  Gr.  commentator  Cyi-il.  The  angels  were  called 
by  the  Jews  apxai,  ''  principalities,"  in  respect  of  the  power 
which  they  were  believed  to  have  over  men.  The  word  apxv  in 
its  primary  sense  is  the  "  first  state,"  "  beginning,"  which  is  here 
adopted  by  Autli.,  following  Tynd.  (with  "principality"  in  the 
Margin) ;  and  so  Erasmus  and  Beza. 

Their  proper  habitation. — Gr.,  ISiov,  "  that  which  was  ap- 
pointed to  them  as  angels  of  heaven,"  rather  than,  as  Auth., 
"  their  own." 

Kept. — Auth.,  "  reserved,"     The  Gr.  is  the  same  as  in  verse  1. 

8  Rail  at.— Auth.,  "speak  evil  of,"  but  in  verse  9  "railing  "  for 
the  cognate  noun. 

9  A  railing  judgement.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem.,  following  Viilg. 
judicium;  and  Tynd  and  Cranm.,  "sentence."  Auth.,  "a  railing 
accusation."  Gr.,  Kpicnv  fiKacnp-r^fiia^.  Even  the  Archangel  did 
not  pronounce  a  railing  sentence  against  the  devil,  but  witlioTit 
any  words  of  railing  left  the  matter  to  God's  judgement.  St. 
Jude  appears  to  have  in  \dew  a  Rabbinical  tradition  not  contained 
in  the  Bible,  imless  it  be  referred  to  in  Zech.  iii.  1,  2. 

10  Like  the  creatures  without  reason.  —  Auth.,  "brute 
beasts."  ComiJ.  2  Peter  ii.  12.  They  offend,  by  railing  at  the 
things  of  which  they  have  no  knowledge  ;  and  the  things  which 
in  common  with  creatures  devoid  of  reason  they  do  understand, 
their  natural  wants  and  appetites,  they  jjcrvert  to  their  own  de- 
struction. 

11  Ran  riotously.— Auth.,  "  ran  gi-eedily."  The  Gr.  is  literally 
"  were  poured  out  in."  The  Viilg.  translates  it  well  by  a  good 
Latin  phrase,  effusi  sunt. 

12  Hidden  rocks.— For  "  spots  "  (Auth.),  which  is  the  word  in  2 
Peter  ii.  13 ;  "  hidden  rocks  "  underlying  the  smooth  surface  of 
the  love-feast. 

Shepherds  that  without  fear  feed  themselves.— They 

are  like  shepherds  that  have  themselves  for  tlieir  flocks,  feasting 


JUDE.  461 

themselves,  not  their  sheep,  aud  doing  this  "  without  fear  "  of 
tlie  Chief  Shepherd  who  has  His  eye  upon  them.  Auth.,  "  feeding 
themselves  without  fear,"  though  literal,  scarcely  lays  the  em- 
pliasis  on  "  themselves  "  sufficiently  to  make  the  meaning  clear. 
Compare  Ezek.  xxxiv.  2,  8,  10. 

Autumn  trees  without  fruit. — So  Wycl.,  "  harvest  trees 
without  fruit."  Vulg.,  arbor es  autumnales.  Tyud.  and  Cranm., 
'  trees  without  fruit  at  gathering  time."  These  all  give  the  true 
meaning,  "  trees  bearing  no  fruit  at  the  season  (the  end  of 
autumn)  when  fruit  ought  to  be  ripe  for  gathering."  Auth., 
"  trees  whose  fruit  withereth,  without  fruit,  '  giving  to  the  ad- 
jective 'pdivoirwpivo.  the  erroneous  interpretation  which  appeal's 
in  Beza,  emarcidcB. 

19  Who  make  separations.— For  Auth.,  "wlio  separate  them- 
selves," "  themselves  "  being  omitted  in  Gr.  text. 

25  "  Wise." — (Aiith.)    Omitted  in  Gr.  text.    Compare  Rom.  xvi.  27, 
where  this  word  enters  into  the  final  doxology. 

Through  Jesus  Christ  our  Lord.— So  Wycl.  and  Rhem., 
following  Yulg.  These  words  (not  in  Auth.)  are  added  in  the 
Revised  Gr.  text. 


THE     REVELATION 

OF 

S.   JOHN    THE    DIVINE. 

CHAPTER    I. 

The  Greek  Text  of  the  Apocalypse,  as  it  appears  iu  the 
"  Textus  Receptus,"  on  which  the  Authorised  Yersiou  was 
founded,  had  for  its  basis  a  very  small  number  of  MSS.,  not 
more,  it  is  said,  than  foiu*  iu  all,  including  those  which  were 
used  by  the  prexnous  editors,  by  Erasmus  who  had  only  one, 
and  that  incomplete,  by  the  Complutensian  editors  who  had  only 
one,  and  by  Stephens  who  had  two.  Consequently,  the  Text  of 
this  Book  has  benefited  more  than  any  other  part  of  the  New 
Testament  by  the  accessions  to  the  textual  evidence  which 
have  been  made  in  the  last  three  centuries.  The  emendations 
which  it  has  received  do  not  involve  any  article  of  Christian 
doctrine;  though  considerable  in  number,  they  are  mostly  of 
slight  significance ;  and  only  a  few  are  of  sufficient  interest  to 
be  noticed  in  this  commentary. 

The  firstborn  of  the  dead.— Auth.,  "  first -begotten."  The 
same  word,  ttputStokos,  is  used  by  St.  Paul  in  the  same  con- 
nection. Col.  i.  18,  "  who  is  the  beginning,  the  firstborn  from 
the  dead"  (Auth.). 

The  ruler. — The  Gr.  Apxc"  is  commonly,  so  rendered.  Auth. 
here,  "  prince." 

Loosed  us  from  our  sins  by  his  blood.— By  change  in 
Gr.  text  for  "  washed "  (Auth.) ;  see  Margin.  This  change, 
Xva-avTi  for  Xovffavri,  has  the  support  of  the  chief  MSS.,  as 
well  as  of  ancient  versions  and  expositors.  It  requires  the  pre- 
position iv  ("in")  to  be  taken  in  the  instrumentiil  sense  which 
it  has  in  several  places  in  this  Book ;  e.g.,  ii.  16,  vi.  8. 

A  kingdom.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  kings  "  (Auth.). 


REVELATION— II.  463 

7  All  the  tx'ibes  of  the  earth  shall  mourn.— This  is  said 
by  our  Lord  himself  iu  Matt.  xxiv.  30.  "The  tribes,"  i.e., 
"  the  nations."  Auth.,  "  kindreds."  Gr.,  (pv\al.  "  Over  him," 
i.e.,  at  the  sight  of  him.  Auth.,  "  shall  wail  because  of  him." 
This  is  added  to  the  words  of  oiir  Lord  in  Matt,  xxiv.,  ^^^th 
this  implied  sense,  "  they  sliall  mourn  at  the  sight  of  him, 
whom  tliey  ought  to  have  mourned  for  when  he  was  dead, 
whom  tliey  now  behold  alive  from  the  dead." 

8  "  The  beginning  and  the  ending." — (Auth.)  Omitted  by  change 
in  Gr.  text,  having  probably  been  introduced  here,  iu  expla- 
nation of  the  previous  words,  from  chap.  xxii.  13. 

13  A  son  of  man. — Margin,  "  Or,  the  son  of  man."  The  article 
is  not  here  in  the  Gr.,  as  it  is  usually  where  this  j)hrase  is 
used  as  a  distinctive  title  of  Christ. 

15  Burnished  brass. — Auth.,  "fine  brass."  The  meaning  of  the 
Gr.  chalcolibanus,  as  well  as  the  etymology,  is  uncertain.  It 
is  translated  in  Vulg.  aurichalcum.  It  was  probably  the  name 
of  a  composite  metal.  The  meaning  which  lias  been  adopted, 
"  shining  or  burnished  brass,"  is  conjectural  only. 

17  As  one  dead. — Auth.,  "  as  dead ;  "  but  in  Mark  ix.  26,  "  as 
one  dead."     The  Gr.  is  a  noun,  vtKp6s. 

18  The  Living  one. — A  simpler  rendering  of  6  C'^v  than,  "  I  am 
he  that  liveth"  (Auth.). 


CHAPTER   II. 

8  And  lived  again.— All  Engl,  versions,  "  is  alive."  The  Gr. 
is  the  aorist,  "  came  to  life." 
13  Throne. — The  word  is  almost  always  so  translated  in  Auth., 
here  "  seat."  Compare  Luke  i.  52,  where  the  same  change 
has  been  made.  In  like  manner  for  "  martyr "  in  this  verse 
(Auth.)  "witness"  is  substituted.  The  Gr.,  fidprvp,  does  not 
appear  in  the  Apostolic  age  to  have  acquired  the  special  sense 
to  which  it  was  afterwards  limited;  though  it  may  bear  that 
sense  in  chap.  xvii.  6. 

24  The  deep  things  of  Satan.— Auth.,  "the  depths."  The 
same  phrase  is  used  by  St.  Paul,  I  Cor.  ii.  10,  "  the  deep  things 
of  God." 


464  REVELATION— IV. 


CHAPTER  III. 


2  Fulfilled.— Aiitli.,    "perfect."     The   Gr.   is  a  participle,   not 

deuoting  their  quality,  but  their  unfinished  state ;    they  have 

been  begun  and  not  accomplished. 
9  I   give   of  the    S3rnagogue — i.e.,   some   of    the    s}magogue. 

Auth.,   "I  will  make  them  of  the  synagogue,"   which  would 

include  them  all,  as  a  class. 

17  Have  gotten  riches. — Auth.,  "increased  in  goods."  The 
Gr.  is  simply  "  have  become  rich,"  a  verb  cognate  to  the 
adjective  "  rich." 

The  wretched  one.— Auth.,  "wretched."  The  Gr.  has  the 
article,  thus  distinguishing  him  as  the  representative  of 
wretchedness,  &c. 


CHAPTER    IV. 

3  Sardius. — The   Gr.   is  so  rendered  in  chap.  xxi.   10,  Auth.; 

here  "  sardine  stone." 
6  A    glassy    sea. — Glasslike.     All   Engl,    versions,   "  a  sea   of 
glass."      The    Gr.   is    an    adjective,   represented  in   Vulg.   by 
vitreum. 

Living  creatures.— All  Engl,  versions,  "  beasts."  Vulg., 
animalia ;  Gr.,  (wa.  The  rendering  of  Auth.  is  inappropriate, 
being  not  a  literal  translation,  and  more  suited  to  duplov,  for 
which  it  is  used  many  times  in  this  Book,  and  by  which,  in 
the  imagery  of  the  Bible,  the  powers  of  evil  are  often  desig- 
nated ;  whereas  ^wa,  the  word  here  used,  includes  any  of  the 
bemgs  in  animated  nature.  The  four  "  living  creatures  "  have 
been  regarded  both  in  the  ancient  and  modern  times  as  emblems 
of  the  four  Gospels,  and  the  twenty-four  elders  as  emblems 
of  the  Books  of  the  Old  Testament;  though  this  latter  sym- 
bolism has  not  been  so  generally  received  as  the  former. 

8  Holy  is. — Compare  Isa.  vi.  3,  where  is  stands  in  Auth. 

Which  was  and  which  is. — Auth.,  "which  was,  and  is," 
&c.  The  translation  gains  in  solemnity  as  well  as  in  exact- 
ness by  the  reiteration  of  the  relative,  which  is  also  given  in 
Wycl.,  following  Vulg. 


REVELATION— VI.  465 

CHAPTER    V. 

1  Close  sealed.— Literally,  "  sealed  down."    Autli..  "  scaled." 

2  A  great  voice. — This  plirase,  so  characteristic  of  the  Ai^oca- 
lypse,  is  reudei'ed  in  Ai^th.  sometimes,  as  here,  "  a  loud  voice," 
and  sometimes,  as  in  chap.  i.  10,  "  a  great  voice."  The  latter, 
being  the  more  literal  rendering,  has  now  been  uniformly 
adopted. 

5  Hath  overcome,  to  open  the  book.— So  Vvdg.,  vicit 
afperire,  followed  by  Wycl.  Tynd.,  "  hath  obtained  to  open." 
Aiitli.,  "  hath  prevailed  to  open."  The  x^hrase  in  Gr.  is  elliptical, 
the  full  meaning  being  "  luith  by  victory  gained  the  power  of 
opening."  This  sense,  vivitlly  expressed  in  the  Gr.,  is  obscured 
in  Auth. 

8  Bowls.— From  the  Gr.  (ptdxas,  comes  the  word  of  all  Engl, 
versions,  "vials,"  which  is  now  disused,  except  in  a  sense 
inappropriate  to  the  original.  The  Gr.,  according  to  its  usage 
in  the  LXX.,  denotes  tlie  flat  golden  bowls  which  held  the  in- 
cense in  the  temple  worship.     Compare  Exod.  xxx.  7. 

Incense. — Tlie  word  occurs,  mostly  in  the  plural,  in  this  Book 
and  in  Luke  i.  10,  11,  and  not  elsewhere  in  the  New  Testament. 
The  meaning  is  "  incense,"  not  "  odoiirs,"  as  all  Engl  versions, 
following  Yulg.,  plenas  odoravientorum. 

9  Purchased. — All  Engl,  versions,  "redeemed"  (Wycl.,  "again 
bought"),  following  Vulg.,  redemisti,  Gr.,  i]y6pa(ras,  "bought." 

"  Us  "  (Auth.)  is  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text.  The  heavenly 
beings,  who  sing  the  song,  sjjeak  of  the  redemption  of  men. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

There  is  in  this  chapter  no  change  that  seems  to  need  explana- 
tion. The  corrections  of  the  Gr.  text,  besides  those  of  which 
notice  is  taken  in  the  Margin,  are  numerous,  but  in  no  case  such 
as  to  make  any  material  difference  in  the  translation. 


466  REYELATION— VITJ. 


CHAPTER  yn. 

2  The  sunrising.— Auth.,  "the  East."  The  word  occurs  in 
chap.  xvi.  12,  aud  twice  in  the  LXX.,  but  not  again  in  the  New 
Testament. 

9  Peoples. — Auth.,  following  Tynd.,  "people."  The  word 
commonly  used  to  designate  the  people  of  Israel  is  only  found 
in  the  plural  in  this  Book  of  tho  ^ew  Testament,  and  in  quota- 
tions from  the  Old  Testament  (LXX.  version),  as  Rom.  xv.  ii., 
"  Let  all  the  peoples  praise  him." 

14  The  great  tribulation. — The  article,  omitted  in  Auth.,  is 
in  the  Gr.  emphatically  repeated,  "  the  tribulation,  the  great 
one."  The  particular  trouble  thus  described  is  not  again 
mentioned. 

15  Shall  spread  his  tabernacle  over  them. — Literally, 
"  shall  tabernacle  over  them."  Auth.,  "  shall  dwell  among 
them."  The  reference  is  probably  to  the  Shechinah,  the 
"  canopy  of  glory,"  the  symbol  of  God's  presence  in  the  Holy  of 
Holies. 

16  Neither  shall  the  sun  strike  upon  them— i.e.,  to  injure 
them.  Auth.,  with  Tynd.,  "neither  shall  the  sun  light  on  them," 
which,  thougli  literal,  is  not  quite  perspicuous. 

17  Guide.— Literally,  "  guide  them  in  the  way."  Auth.,  "  lead," 
which  is  used  in  Auth.  as  the  rendering  of  nine  other  words. 


CHAPTER  yill. 


10  A  torch. — Auth.,  "  a  lamp."  The  Gr.  is  \dfjiiras,  lampas,  "  a 
torch." 

13  An  eagle. — So  Vulg.  and  "Wycl.  Tynd.  and  Auth.,  following 
another  reading  of  the  Gr.  text,  "  an  angel."  The  Gr.  is  "  one 
eagle,"  a  solitary  bird,  symbol  of  God,  who  is  alone  in  His 
heavenly  majesty. 

Mid  heaven. — The  Gr.  is  more  definite  than  Auth.,  "  the 
midst  of  heaven,"  which  may  be  anywhere  in  the  air  between 
eaiih  and  sky.  The  term  is  specially  used  in  Gr.  to  denote 
thf  place  of  the  sun  at  mid-day,  exactly  South.     (Alford.) 


REVELATION— XL  467 


CHAPTER    IX. 

1  I  saw  a  star  from  heaven  fallen  unto  the  earth.— 

Ai^tli.,  "  fall  from  heaven."  The  Gr.  is  the  perfect  participle, 
"already  fallen  and  on  the  earth."  See  Note  on  Luke  x.  18, 
"  I  saw  Satan  as  lightning  fallen  from  heaven." 

The  pit  of  the  abyss.— More  literal  than  Auth.,  "  the 
bottomless  -pit."     The  word  "abyss"  occurs  also  in  Luke  viii.  31. 

12  The  first  Woe.— Auth.,  "one  woe."  The  Gr.  phrase  is  literally 
"  the  woe  the  one,"  in  colloquial  Engl.,  "  woe  number  one." 
Compare  a  similar  use  of  the  article  in  chap.  xvii.  10. 

17  Hyacinth. — The  colour  so  called  in  Gr.,  deep  blue,  appears  to 
have  been  (like  white)  a  sacred  colour  in  the  ceremonial  law  of 
Moses.     Auth.,  "jacinth." 

20  Mankind.— Auth.,  "  the  men."  The  Gr.,  twv  avepdirwv  (not  tSiv 
avZpwv),  here,  as  well  as  in  verse  18,  includes  mankind  in  general. 


CHAPTER  X. 

7  Then  is  finished.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  the  construction  is 
altered,  and  Kai  answers  to  '6rav,  "  when,"  in  the  former  clause, 
standing  in  the  apodosis  here  as  in  chap.  vi.  1, 12. 


CHAPTER  XL 

8  Their  deau  bodies. — The  Gr.  by  change  in  the  text  is  in  the 
singular ;  literally,  "  carcase."  The  two  witnesses  are  explained 
to  be  the  Old  and  New  Testaments,  which,  though  two,  are ."  one 
body." 

15  The  kingdom.— So  Wycl.,  following  Yulg.     Auth.,  following 
another  reading  of  the  Gr.  text,  has  the  plural,  "  kingdoms."    It 


468  REVELATION— XIII. 

is  not  the  separate  communities  and  nations,  but  the  kingdom  of 
the  whole  world  that  is  become  the  kingdom  of  the  Lord. 

17  Didst  reign.— Didst  shew  thyself  as  king  (the  aorist).    Auth,, 
"  hast  reigned." 


CHAPTER  XII. 

1  Arrayed  with  the  sun.— Auth.,  "  clotlied."  The  Gr.  is  the 
same  as  in  chaj).  "vai.  9.  The  woman,  the  Ohurcli,  is  arrayed  in 
the  glory  of  Christ,  her  snn,  the  sun  of  rigliteousuess,  as  God  is 
said  to  "  deck  himself  with  light  as  with  a  garment,"  Ps.  civ.  2. 
{Wordsworth.) 

3  Diadems.— Auth.,  "  crowns."  The  word  is  found  in  this  Book, 
here  and  at  chaps,  xiii.  1,  xix.  12,  and  not  elsewhere  in  the  New 
Testament. 

5  A  son,  a  man  child.— By  change  in  Gr.  text,  Hpffev,  "a 
male,"  is  in  the  neuter  gender ;  reKvov,  "  child,"  being  understood. 
See  a  similar  instance  in  Mai.  i.  14.  The  masculine  strength 
and  dignity  of  the  chUd  are  thus  emphatically  declared. 

11  Because  of  the  blood — i.e.,  because  of  the  strength  which 
it  gave  them.  Gr.,  Sia  rh  of^a.  Auth.,  "by  the  blood,"  as  if  by 
it  as  a  weapon  or  instrument,  which  in  Gr.  would  have  been  Sia 
Tov  aXfMaros, 


CHAPTER  Xin. 


He  stood— i.e..  the  dragon,  for  "I  stood,"  by  change  in  Gr. 
text ;  and  so  Yidg.,  Wycl.,  and  Rheui.  The  Dragon  changes  his 
mode  of  attack,  and  standing  on  the  sea-sliore,  summons  the 
monsters  of  the  deep  to  his  aid.  So  in  Milton  {Paradise  Lost, 
book  i.),  Satan,  having  been  discomfited  in  war  against  heaven, 
stands  on  the  shore  of  the  burning  lake,  and  rallies  tlie  legions 
who  have  been  hurled  into  it  from  on  high. 


EEYELATION— XIII.  469 

3  His  death-stroke.  —  Literally,  "the  wound  of  his  death." 
Autli.,  "his  deadly  wound."  The  particular  head  which  had 
received  a  death-stroke  was  outwardly  healed,  and  "  had  a  name 
to  live  though  it  was  dead,"  whether  it  symbolised  the  imj)erial 
head  of  Rome,  or  any  other  particular  power  of  evil ;  but  the 
many-headed  monster  continued  in  life  and  potency  for  mischief. 

5  To  continue. — For  this  sense  of  iroie^v  see  Acts  xv.  33;  for 
"to  do,"  as  in  Margin,  compare  Dan.  viii.  28  (LXX.  version). 

10  If  any  man  is  for  captivity  .  .  .  .—In  the  difficulty  arising 
from  the  uncertainty  of  the  Gr.  text,  this  rendering  has  been  pre- 
ferred, which  gives  the  following  sense  to  the  two  clauses  of  the 
verse  here  placed  in  contrast :  "  If  any  one  (a  persecuted  Christian) 
goes  into  captivity  for  the  sake  of  the  Gospel,  into  captivity  he 
goes;"  he  must  patiently  submit  and  endure,  as  it  is  said  in 
Jerem.  xv.  2,  "  If  they  say  unto  thee.  Whither  shall  we  go  forth  ? 
then  thou  shalt  teU  them.  Thus  saith  the  Lord;  Such  as  are  for 
death,  to  death  ;  and  such  as  are  for  the  sword,  to  the  sword ;  and 
such  as  are  for  the  famine,  to  the  famine  ;  and  such  as  are  for  the 
captivity,  to  the  captivity ; "  and  the  following  clause  has  regard 
to  the  persecutors  :  "  If  any  man  shall  kiU  with  the  sword,"  &c. 
According  to  the  Marginal  rendering  the  two  clauses  go  pari 
passu  together,  both  of  them  pointing  to  the  retribution  which  is 
to  overtake  the  oppressors;  but  it  involves  the  insertion  of 
"  leadeth,"  "  leadeth  into  captivity,"  which  is  not  suggested  by 
anything  in  the  clause  itseK. 

11  Horns  like  unto  a  lamb.—  Meaning  like  those  of  a  lamb, 
not  that  it  had  two  horns  as  a  lamb.     The  Gi*.  is  KiparA  5vo  '6/j,oia 

apvlcjj. 

13  He  doeth  great  signs.— This  verse  contains  two  peculiarities, 
strongly  characteristic  both  of  the  fourth  Gospel  and  of  the 
Apocalypse,  and  therefore  to  be  preserved  in  the  English  version, 
in  evidence  of  the  common  authorship  of  the  two  Books : 

(1)  The  use  of  o-rj/xf wv,  "  a  sign,"  i.e.,  a  miracle,  for  which  the 
other  Evangelists  more  commonly  have  Svvaixn,  "  mighty  work," 
a  word  not  found  in  St.  John's  writings ; 

(2)  The  use  of  the  Gr.  particle  'Iva,  "in  order  that,"  denoting 
purpose,  where  other  writers,  and  once  St.  John  himself,  have 
&<rre,  signifying  consequence.  This  latter  feature  of  his  style 
cannot  always  be  represented  in  English  without  endangei'ing 
the  perspicuity  of  the  sentence ;  such  a  case  there  is  in  verse  12. 
But  it  is  remarkable  that  'Iva  occurs  over  200  times  in  St.  John's 
Gospel,  and  40  times  in  this  Book;,  and  many  times  in  his  Epistles ; 


470  KEVELATION— XIV. 

whereas  &<rTt  is  found  only  once  in  any  of  his  writings,  viz.,  in 
John  iii.  16,  though  it  is  a  common  word  in  the  rest  of  the  New 
Testament.  This  displacement  of  Sxrre  by  'Cva  indicates  the  com- 
mencement of  the  idiomatic  use  of  the  latter  particle,  which  pre- 
vails in  modern  Greek,  as  the  sign  of  the  infinitive  mood. 

16  The  small  and  the  great.  .  .  . — Again  in  this  verse  we  have 
a  characteristic  feature  of  the  style  of  St.  John.  As  a  matter  of 
English,  the  sentence  would  be  more  buoyant  in  the  succinct 
form  which  it  has  in  Auth.,  without  repeating  the  copula  "  and" 
with  each  clause  and  the  definite  article  with  each  class.  The 
sense  also  is  not  perceptibly  altered,  though  it  may  be  felt  that 
the  introduction  of  these  little  words  tends  to  keep  off  the  words 
and  clauses  from  each  other,  and  to  present  each  as  a  separate 
idea  before  our  minds.  A  similar  remark  may  be  made  on  other 
passages  in  the  Revised  Version :  compare  especially  Matt.  xiii. 
37-39. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


6  An  eternal  Gospel.— So  Wycl.,  Tynd.,  and  Genev.  Auth., 
following  Cranm.  and  Rhem.,  "the  everlasting  Gospel."  The 
phrase  does  not  occur  elsewhere;  and  as  it  stands  here  without 
the  article,  and  the  adjective  "  eternal "  may  be  in  emphatic 
contrast  to  the  transitory  condition  of  them  that  "  dwell  on  the 
earth,"  the  indefinite  article  has  been  joined  with  it  to  give  it 
this  prominence. 

8  "  City  "  (Auth.)  being  omitted  by  change  in  Gr.  text,  a  return 
has  been  made,  for  the  sake  of  rhythm  as  weU  as  of  perspicuity, 
to  the  order  of  the  Gr.,  Fallen,  fallen,  is  Babylon  the 
great,  which  is  followed  by  Genev.  and  Rhem.,  with  Vulg., 

Cecidit,  cecidit,  Babylon  ilia  magna. 

14  Like  unto  a  son  of  man.— Compare  chap.  i.  13. 

20  As  far  as.— Auth.,  "  by  the  space  of."  The  blood  rose  to  the 
height  of  the  horses'  bridles,  and  extended  to  a  distance  of  1,600 
furlongs.  The  preposition  air6,  in  the  sense  of  "  as  far  as,"  is 
used  by  St.  John  only.     Compare  John  xi.  18,  xxi.  8. 


REVELATIOK— XTI.  471 


CHAPTER  XV. 


1  The  last.  — These  are  the  emphatic  words  of  the  clause,  as 
appears  from  what  follows.     Auth.,  "  the  seven  last  plagues." 

Grr.,  nXriyas  Itttoi  ras  icrxaras. 

2  That  come  victorious  from  the  beast.— Literally,  "  those 
that  are  couqueriug  from."  Auth.,  "them  that  had  gotten  the 
victory  over  the  beast " — foUowiug  Tynd.,  and  Vulg.,  qui 
vicerunt  hestiam.  The  Gr.  construction  viKuvras  ck  is  not  found 
elsewhere,  and  may  be  compared  with  the  Latin  phrase,  victoriam 
referre  ex  aliquo,  in  Livy,  viii.  8.     {Alford.) 

4  Righteous  acts. — The  Gr.  occurs  again  in  this  sense  in  Rom. 
V.  18.    Auth.,  "judgments." 

6  Arrayed  with  precious  stone,  pure  and  bright.— Auth.. 
with  many  ancient  authorities  (see  Margin)^  "in  pure  and  wliite 
linen."  The  word  \idov  is  substituted  in  the  Gr.  text  for  AiVoi/ 
(flax).  The  textual  authorities  on  which  the  change  is  made  are 
set  forth  in  Westcott  and  Hort's  Gr.  Test.,  1881.  The  phi-ase  in 
the  text  resembles  that  of  Ezek.  xxviii.  13  (LXX.  version),  irdvra 
Xi6ov  XP')"''''^*'  e'j'Se'Secrai,  (rdpSiov  Kol  rond^iov,  "  every  precious  stone 
was  thy  covering  "  (Auth.) ;  literally,  "  every  good  stone  hast  thou 
put  on."  Against  the  reading  which  has  been  followed  in  Auth. 
it  is  urged  that  in  the  New  Testament  >^ivov  (linon)  properly 
means  "  flax"  in  an  unmanufactured  state  (compare  Matt.  xii.  20), 
and  is  not  used  for  "  linen."  See  chap.  xix.  8,  where  "  to  array 
herself  in  fine  linen,"  is  'Iva  irepifidATixai  ^ictrivov  Xafxirphv  Kadapdv, 


CHAPTER  XVL 


7  I  heard  the  altar  saying.— By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  "  I 
heard  another  out  of  the  altar  say"  (Auth.).  This  reading, 
which  represents  the  altar  speaking,  is  that  of  the  best  MSS., 
and  is  generally  received. 

12  The  kings  that  come  from.— Auth.,  "  the  kings  of  the  East." 

Gr.,  ruv  ii,Tr6. 

The  sunrising. — Compare  chap.  vii.  2, 
16  They — i.e.,  the  unclean  spirits  (the  neuter  plural  wvevnara  in 
verse  14),  not  "  he  "  as  Auth.  and  all  previous  versions,  except 
Genev.,  which  has  the  plural. 


472  REVELATION— XVIII 

19  Was  remembered. — AU  Engl,  versions,  "  came  in  remem- 
brance," adopting  the  idiomatic  phrase  of  Vulg.,  venit  in  me- 
moriam.     Gr.,  iuyfiffOrj. 


CHAPTER   XVII. 

3  A  wilderness. — Aiith.  inserts  "  the,"  which  is  not  expressed 
in  the  Gr.,  and  which,  if  supplied,  gives  definiteness  to  the 
place,  whereas  the  context  seems  to  leave  it  indefinite. 

10  The  five — i.e.,  the  first  five.  Of  the  two  remaining,  the  one, 
the  first,  is  present,  the  second  is  to  come.  This  appears  to 
be  the  force  of  the  article,  which  is  omitted  in  Anth.  Compare 
chap.  ix.  12. 


CHAPTER    XVIII. 

6  Mingled.— Anth.,  "  filled."  Gr.,  tKepaa-e,  as  in  chap.  xiv.  10. 
The  ancients  mixed  water  with  their  wine;  and  hence  "to 
mingle  the  cup  "  was  another  phrase  for  preparing  it. 

13  Spice.— (Added  in  the  Gr.  text,)  amomiim,  a  plant  growing  in 
India,  producing  aromatic  seeds,  and  used  in  Egyi)t  for  embalm- 
ing, whence  the  dead  body  was  called  "a  mummy." 

14  Sumptuous. — Auth.,  "  goodly."  The  adverb  XayiTrpm  is  ren- 
dered "  fared  sumptuously  "  in  Luke  xvi.  11,  and  this  secondary 
sense  seems  more  suitable  here. 

17  Is  made  desolate. — Auth.,  "is  come  to  nought."  TheGr.  is 
the  same  as  in  verse  19  and  chap.  xvii.  16. 

20  God  hath  judged  your  judgement  on  her.— A  con- 
cise mode  of  saying,  "  God  as  judge  hath  pronounced  on  them 
the  judgement  which  was  due  to  them  on  your  account." 

21  With  a  mighty  fall.— Auth.,  "  with  violence."  The  word 
does  not  occur  again  in  the  New  Testament.  The  cognate  verb 
is  used  several  times,  as  in  Matt.  viii.  32,  where  it  is  translated 
"  rushed." 


REVELATION— XXI.  473 


CHAPTER  XIX. 


1  Hallelujah. — The  exclamation  is  given  in  tlio  Heljrcw  form. 
The  Gr.  form,  "  Alleluia,"  is  retained  in  Autli. 

3  Goeth.  up. — The  Gr.  is  the  present  tense  of  the  verb  which  is 
commonly  so  rendered.     Auth.,  "  rose  np." 

6  The  Almighty. — Auth.,  here  "  Omnipotent,"  elsewhere  always 
"  Almighty." 

8  Righteous  acts. — Auth.,  "righteousness."  The  same  word 
as  in  chap.  xv.  4.  The  passage  recalls  by  way  of  contrast  Isa. 
Ixiv.  6,  "  All  our  righteousnesses  are  as  filthy  rags." 

10  A  fellow-servant  with  thee  and  with  thy  bi'ethren. — 

Auth.,  "  thy  fellow- servant,  and  of  thy  brethren  ;"  which  may  be 
understood  in  the  sense  more  clearly  but  en'oneously  expressed 
in  Tynd.,  "  thy  fellow-servant,  and  one  of  thy  brethren."  The 
angel  would  thus  be  ranking'  liimself  among  the  Christian 
brotherhood,  and  not  as  one  of  the  great  famUy  in  heaven  and 
earth  who  serve  before  God.     Compare  chap.  xxii.  9. 


CHAPTER  XX. 


3  Shut  it. — "  Him,"  Auth.,  is  omitted  in  the  Gr.  text. 
14  Even  the  lake  of  fire.— Added  in  the  Gr.  text. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 


4  Death  shall  be  no  more. — Auth..  "  there  shall  be  no  more 
death,"  i.e.,  "  no  more  dying,"  no  more  death  in  the  concrete.  The 
true  meaning  is,  "  Death  itself  shall  cease  to  be."  Compare  chap, 
xxii.  5. 

SHouruing — i.e.,  for  the  dead.  Auth.,  "  soitow."  "  Crying  " 
is  the  loud  outcry,  Kpavy-f],  of  the  bereaved.  "Pain"  is  here 
used  in  the  primary  sense  of  nSvos,  "  toil  and  trouble." 


474  REVELATION"— XXII. 

23  The  lamp  thereof  is  the  Lamb. — So  Wycl.  and  Rhem. 
following  Vulg.,  lucerna  ejus  est  Agnus.  Auth.,  following  Tynd., 
"  the  Lamb  is  the  light  thereof."  The  Gr.  is  not  <pws  but  Kvxvos. 
The  glory  of  God  is  the  sun  which  illumines  the  New  Jerusalem. 
It  is  received  from  the  throne  and  shed  forth  by  the  Lamb,  who 
is  before  the  throne.  In  the  same  way,  and  doubtless  with  the 
same  meaning  if  we  could  understand  the  things  of  heaven,  it  is 
said  that  the  Sou  is  "  the  effulgence  {a-Kavyaa-ixa)  of  the  Father's 
glory"  (Heb.  i.  3).  Compare  also  John  v.  30,  where  St.  John  the 
Baptist  is  spoken  of  as  "  a  lamp,"  not,  as  in  Auth.,  "a  light." 

27  He  that. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  whatsoever." 


CHAPTER  XXII. 


1  In  the  midst  of  the  street  thereof. — The  ambiguity  as 
to  the  connection  of  this  clause  throws  a  doubt  upon  the  inter- 
pretation of  it.  If  the  reading  be  adopted  which  is  followed  in 
Auth.,  and  represented  in  the  Margin,  the  meaning  is  that  the 
trees  were  on  either  side  of  the  river,  in  the  space  between  the 
"  street  "  and  the  river. 

11  He  that  is  unrighteous. — The  present  participle  ;  literally, 
''  he  that  is  a  doer  of  unrighteousness."  Let  him  do  un- 
righteousness  still,  the  aorist  imperative. 

14  That  wash  their  robes. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth., 
'■  that  do  his  commandments." 

19  From  the  tree  of  life. — By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth., 
"  out  of  the  book  of  life." 

21  The  Grace  of  the  Lord  Jesus  be  with  the  saints. — 

By  change  in  Gr.  text  for  Auth.,  "  the  grace  of  our  Lord  Jesus 
Christ  be  with  you  all."  This  final  salutation  A-ery  nearly  re- 
sembles that  which  is  found  at  the  close  of  every  one  of  St. 
Paul's  Epistles,  and  is  spoken  of  by  him  as  a  token  of  his  author- 
ship, being  always  written  by  himself,  though  the  body  of  the 
Epistle  was  dictated  to  an  amanuensis.  Thus  he  says  in  chap, 
iii.  17,  "  The  salutation  of  me,  Paul,  with  mine  own  hand,  which 
is  the  token  in  eveiy  epistle :  so  I  write."  It  is  not  found  in  the 
other  Ej)istles  of  the  New  Testament,  but  only  in  this  Book, 
written  after  the  death  of  St.  Paul.  (See  Wordsworth  on 
1  Thess.  V.  29.) 


Date  Due                         | 

FACULTY 

<|) 

SmenSy  on  the  revised  version  of 

Prmcelon  Theological  Sem.nary-Speer  Library  ^ 


1    1012  00055  0980